Professional Documents
Culture Documents
Notice Sov M25nss51er0
Notice Sov M25nss51er0
HEAT EXCHANGER
THERMAL FLUID-STEAM
ITEM 400
INSTALLATION, MAINTENANCE
AND USE MANUAL
BABCOCK WANSON ITALIANA Via Roma 147 20040 Cavenago B.za Milan ITALY
PHONE 003902959121 FAX 00390295019252 e-mail bwi@babcock-wanson.com
Thermal fluid/Steam Exchamger
Series SOV 25MSS50
GENERAL INFORMATION
The contents of the present manual enter in the field of application of the European Directives concerning
“Equipment subject to pressure” 97/23/EC, and is aimed at producing steam.
This manual reports the basic information relative to the installation, utilization and maintenance of the
Thermal Fluid/Steam SOV series heat exchanger. The present manual must always be at the disposition of
qualified personnel responsible for heat exchanger management.
At any rate, the manual does not relieve purchaser from responsibility as to adopted solutions. Furthermore, it
does not imply any dispensation of local or national laws, regulations regarding safety standards or
agreements made with insurance agencies. It does not exclude our technical assistance whenever it may be
required.
Whoever be responsible for or involved in carrying out installation, utilization and maintenance activities must:
- be aware of all information reported in this manual
- have the professional requisites relative to engineering, function and legislative standards relative to steam
generators
- assume responsibility relative to the entire installation
- assume complete responsibility regarding any modification carried out on instruments and/or non respect of
reported information in the present manual.
- establish adequate surveillance of function in conformity with legislation in force.
All instruments to be connected to the heat exchanger must be compatible with the process fluid in
conditions of maximum pressure and temperature.
All special safety indications reported in the various chapters must be respected.
Non-compliance of said indications may compromise the correct function of the heat exchanger as
well as endanger personnel, in such case; BWI declines any and all responsibility.
In order to facilitate consultation of these particular indications, a series of graphic symbols and their
significance have been provided throughout the description of this manual:
Indicates danger for those directly responsible for carrying out heat exchanger management.
Indicates danger for those responsible for operating heat exchanger and related electrical devices.
WARNING
Indicates an anomalous situation, which may compromise normal heat exchanger function.
As part of the purchaser’s agreement, it shall be understood that the end user nominate an individual
responsible for overseeing Safety measures regarding heating plant and heat exchanger.
This individual shall be responsible for overseeing installation, testing, operation, maintenance and
repair, and guarantee that all such operations be carried out by Qualified Personnel, in respect of
local standards or laws regarding such matters.
By Qualified Personnel it is understood as:
For those persons who by their training, experience, possession of information, knowledge of
current laws or standards regarding the prevention of accidents, measures to adopt in case of
accident and who have been personally cleared by the plant Safety Supervisor to carry out necessary
heat exchanger plant operations as well as be able to point out potential or eventual situations of
danger.
The information reported in the following is not complete, but provides essential criteria for the
operation and utilization of the heat exchanger in the most suitable manner. Babcock Wanson does
not assume any responsibility for utilization of the heat exchanger other than that specifically
reported in the present manual.
The information reported in the following is not complete, but provides essential criteria for the
operation and utilization of the heat exchanger in the most suitable manner. Babcock Wanson does
not assume any responsibility for utilization of the heat exchanger other than that specifically
reported in the present manual.
Any reproduction, partial or integral of this manual is strictly forbidden without express written
permission from Babcock Wanson.
INDEX
Chapter 1 CHARACTERISTICS
Chapter 6 START UP
Chapter 8 MAINTENANCE
Chapter 9 DISPOSAL
1 –CHARACTERISTICS
SUMMARY
Chapter Description
1.B Characteristics
Only for the pressure parts identification (ex. pressure body), is possible the presence of the plate with
admissible max temperature and pressure.
B) CHARACTERISTICS
Execution Horizontal
SUMMARY
Chapter Description
2.A Transport
2.B Hoisting
2.D Storage
This heat exchanger has been designed without taking outside factors into consideration
(wind, earthquakes,…) In case such outside factors cannot be overlooked additional
verifications must be carried out.
Water stoking, steam and discharge connections must be carried out so as to not interfere
with heat exchanger.
A) TRANSPORT
The heat exchanger is normally sent via truck and covered in cellophane.
The transport position may not be other than horizontal and the body must be anchored to the transport
vehicle via cable or rope, appropriately gauged in relation to weight and passed through anchorage
points situated on base body.
In placing anchorage cables verify that no heat exchanger equipment parts or insulation materials are
compromised.
For dimension and characteristic, see drawing “Lifting Drawing” and “190003430” attached.
B) HOISTING
Before moving the heat exchanger verify that:
See drawing “Lifting Drawing” and “190003430” attached.
• The hoisting device utilized is suitably large enough in relation to heat exchanger weight.
• Hoisting cables and hooks, which only should be in steel, are also suitably strong enough and form a
maximum angle of less than 45° between the taught cables.
• All personnel are out of the immediate operative area during hoisting operations.
When moving heat exchanger, place hooks in provided eyebolts situated on top of heat exchanger
and balance weight by anchoring to base.
Under no circumstances should the heat exchanger be moved using piping, control panel
or parts subject to pressure as anchorage points.
Heat exchanger weight is distributed so that the structure results slightly inclined forward during hoisting.
During this situation the operator’s visual field may be reduced or impaired. Therefore,
exercise maximum attention and caution when moving the heat exchanger.
Once the heat exchanger has been hoisted and is in motion verify that:
• No one may pass directly beneath or in its immediate vicinity.
• All cables are positioned properly so as to not damage heat exchanger equipment.
• Movement is slow and regular
• On site placement is slow and steady.
Normally furnished goods are supplied free at works Babcock Wanson Italiana; therefore the
responsibility of goods in transit shall be that of the purchaser.
If any anomalies result, notify our shipping office in writing of damaged goods or missing
materials within and not beyond 48 hours after having received goods.
D) STORAGE
The heat exchanger is naturally stabilized if positioned horizontally on its base therefore it must be
positioned on a flat level surface thus avoiding any structural damage.
In case of storage in dusty environments cover the heat exchanger with plastic sheets.
Under no circumstances should the generator be placed in environments with relative humidity superior
to 80%, corrosive vapors, or temperatures below 5°C or above 40°C.
This operation must result slow and steady so as to avoid possible damage to structure
or personnel carrying out such operations.
When carrying out these connections utilize seals or gaskets with suitable pressure and
temperature characteristics for the type of thermal fluid utilized reported on heat
exchanger rating plate and table in Chapter 1.
Heat exchanger thermal fluid inlet flow, pressure and temperature must never exceed
maximum values reported on heat exchanger rating plate.
In particular, the thermal fluid circulation system must be such as to never exceed
maximum admissible pressure values at heat exchanger inlet. Furthermore, the heat
exchanger thermal fluid preheating system must be provided with safety systems in
order to prevent exceeding maximum admissible temperature at heat exchanger inlet
(such safety systems must be set to a temperature value below that of the maximum
temperature value).
Connection point seals utilized must be suitable to chemical physical characteristics of
thermal fluid utilized at maximum pressure and temperature conditions.
Once tubing has been connected, it must be properly insulated so that surface
temperatures cannot exceed 40 °C thus limiting risk of injury to personnel due to
accidental contact.
Once water stoking tubing has been connected, it must be properly insulated so that
surface temperatures cannot exceed 40 °C thus limiting risk of injury to personnel due to
accidental contact.
The water delivery line must be carried out bearing in mind maximum temperature and pressure
conditions foreseen by the water treatment system utilized as well as installed supply system.
At any rate the heat exchanger inlet water temperature must never exceed 90°C.
Relative sealing gaskets must be suitable to temperature and pressure conditions
determined by selected water treatment system.
Heat exchanger delivery water in as far as salinity is concerned must be free of calcareous and
magnesium salts, silica, organic compounds and corrosive elements.
In general, water distributed in common water systems corresponds to these requisites except for water
hardness, which must be brought to optimum value of 0.5 °F ( French degree 1°F = 10mg/lt of CaCO3
equivalent), and dissolved oxygen concentration.
This condition can be obtained by utilizing a water softener, resin type exchange and regeneration
through saturated saline solution, to which a suitable mechanical pre-filtering system must also be
added.
In addition to water softening treatment a degasser can also be added to lower the concentration of
dissolved gases.
At any rate, delivery water must respect the characteristics reported in the following table. It is therefore
necessary to analyze delivery water on a regular basis so as to avoid the onset of scaling or corrosion of
internal heat exchanger parts.
The composition of the water in the heat exchanger body should also be controlled on a regular basis. In
this case, the concentration of saline is kept under control by applying a series of discharge cycles.
Operational modalities and reference tables for heat exchanger body water analysis and frequency of
delivery water controls are reported in chapters relative to function and maintenance.
Connection piping must not have a diameter inferior to that of valve outlets. Even for this
connection relative sealing gaskets must conform to maximum pressure and temperature
conditions of steam and delivery water.
Piping must be properly insulated so that surface temperatures cannot exceed 40 °C thus
limiting risk of injury to personnel due to accidental contact.
Steam discharge point must be positioned so as to not cause damage to persons or
materials.
M) DISCHARGE CONNECTIONS
The heat exchanger and its equipment foresee the application of discharge points which must be
opportunely set up:
• Instrument discharge valves (level gauge, level regulator…).
• Discharge valve for deslimer for manual and automatic discharging operations.
For diameters and connections refer to heat exchanger mechanical diagram.
All these connections must be channeled into one single discharge point so as to not generate any
return flow of hot liquids or steam to heating plant or associated instruments.
All connections and relative sealing gaskets must conform to maximum pressure and
temperature conditions of delivery steam reported in general heat exchanger
characteristics.
Control electrical panel diagram concerning any eventual instrumentation connections or signals to
remote control (necessary for function but not furnished with order).
Once instrumentation has been connected verify correct function before starting steam
generator.
If this instrumentation or signals are to be connected, utilize flame-retardant electrical cable with 1.5
mm² minimum section. See page 16 and 24 of the electric diagram.
If cables are exposed to elevated heat sources, they must be insulate cable type with
silicone or glass braiding.
The electrical plant must be in conformance with current safety standards regarding such installations.
All connections and relative sealing gaskets must be conforming to maximum pressure
and temperature conditions of steam reported in general heat exchanger
characteristics.
If no automatic discharge system exists, such operations must be carried out via the
heat exchanger discharge valve and dedicated On/Off valves.
SUMMARY
Chapter Description
The heat exchanger must be utilized to respecting maximum acceptable limits reported
on the plate and on the diagram of the chapter 1.
- a cutoff valve HV408 on steam outlet for cutting off steam to utilization inlet;
- one cutoff valve HV415 on heat exchanger discharge;
- two way blow down automatic valve XV401, with pneumatic servomotor and on-off N.C. electro-valve
XY401. If the electro-valve is closed the valve XV401 is closed;
- a pressure transmitter device PT401, with output signal 4÷20mA related to pressure in the body of
SOV.
On the SOV body it is installed a probe that detects the pressure PT401.
This probe with regards to the pressure taken utters a signal 4÷20mA.
The signal is sent to a regulator PIC401.
The regulator with regards to the value detected by the probe acts, by OP5 outlet, on the
electropneumatic servocontrol of the three way valve of the thermal fluid capacity regulation in the
exchanger PCV402/PY402. If the pressure results low the thermal fluid flow in the exchanger tube
system is regulated to maximum capacity. When the pressure increases proportionally the thermal fluid
capacity in the exchanger is reduced until the stopping at the acheivement of the maximum working
pressure.
In case of alarm for high pressure or low level the electrovalve EV402 closes. In this way the three way
valve diverts all the thermal fluid capacity at the exterior of the exchanger stopping the hot fluid inlet and
the water heating.
Based on current legislative standards some exchangers may have one safety valves which are
capable of discharging the requested discharge flow for safety intervention.
These components are provided with positive logic function which closes electrical circuit when
heat exchanger functions correctly and opens circuit during alarm situations or malfunction of
instrumentation.
For the safety of those working in the vicinity of the generator under no circumstances
should one of these safety systems be deactivated.
In case of failure of one of these instruments the heat exchanger must be stopped
immediately and repaired so as to guarantee the safety of those responsible for its
conduction.
After the onset of an alarm situation, heat exchanger function may be resumed only after
having selected the Reset button S04.
If alarm situation occurs frequently, carry out an accurate control of heat exchanger by
contacting our technical service assistance department.
The reference diagram of the control panel is reported in the enclosed manual.
A) INSTRUMENTATION
The general electric control panel, in its standard version, includes a series of instruments for managing
exchanger function, and is basically composed of the following:
- a three-polar general power switch for interrupting power to electric control panel, doorblock type sized
for the maximun power requested by the exchanger instruments;
- a transformer supplying control circuits with protection fuses;
- one start and control section for motor of water pressurization pump P401/MP401, which includes:
- a triad of protection fuses
- an alternate current contactor for direct start-up
- a thermal protection relay
- one start and control section for motor of water buster pump P701/MP701, which includes:
- a triad of protection fuses
- an alternate current contactor for direct start-up
- a thermal protection relay
The thermal protection will be set during heat exchanger start up. Any successive
alteration may create anomalies in pump motor control system.
- one pressure exchanger regulator, PID type PIC401, see chapter 3 (see also manual enclosed)
connected to PT401 pressure element. Regulation exit OP5 4÷20 mA drive tree way valve;
- one water level regulator, PID type LIC401, see chapter 3 (see also manual enclosed) connected to
LT401 level probe. Regulation exit OP6 4÷20 mA drive two way valve. On-Off exit OP1/OP2 start and
stop the water load pump P401/MP401;
- one water level regulator, PD type LICLH400, see chapter 3 (see also manual enclosed) connected to
LIC401 outklet signal OP5. On-Off exit OP1/OP2 for min and max alarms of water level;
- one temperature regulator, PD type TIC503, see the manual of SOAC500 (see also manual enclosed);
- one temperature regulator, PD type TIC603, see the manual of SOAC600 (see also manual enclosed);
• a series of auxiliary relays, which consent the managing of logic regulation and alarm function;
• a series of pushbuttons and switches for managing exchanger function;
• a series of lamp indicators;
• a terminal board for connecting various instruments detailed in enclosed electrical diagram.
During normal heat exchanger function the switch must be in the AUTO position.
If run in the MAN mode, water level is controlled directly by the operator, therefore this
mode can only be utilized during heat exchanger start up phase, and only by specialized
and authorized personnel.
The function AUTO position of the pump is umprimed in case of alarm for low water level
inside the exchanger. In these conditions the water level inside the exchanger must be
restored in the MAN position, by an authorized operator, after to have verified that the
level is not descended to leaving encovered any parts heated.
In this case cool the tube bundle before to introduce water in the exchanger.
The buster pump P701/MP701 start and stop with P401/MP401 pump.
S03 black pushbutton MANUAL OPENING BLOW DOWN VALVE SOV 400
Opening the blow down valve XV401 in manual mode (see S02 selector)
This pushbutton must only be utilized once the cause that activated the safety alarm has
been resolved. Its use is provided by the standards in force about the equipments
subject to pressure.
Do not insist on reinserting this pushbutton. If the heat exchanger does not reenter in
normal function immediately interrupt all operations and contact our technical assistance
service.
C) LAMPS
The electric control panel includes a series of indicator lamps which indicate:
H03 BLOW DOWN VALVE SOV ITEM 400 OPEN color blue
Indicates condition of blow down valve XV401
Off Indicates that valve is closed
On Indicates that valve is open
H04 MIN WATER LEVEL (LIC401 and LICLH400) SOV ITEM400 color red
Off Normal function condition of heat exchanger
On Alarm situation caused by low water level inside the heat exchanger body, with deviation of
thermal fluid flow external to tube bundle of heat exchanger
H11 VERY LOW WATER LEVEL (LSLL402) SOV ITEM400 color red
Off Normal function condition of heat exchanger
On Alarm situation caused by low water level inside the heat exchanger body, with deviation of
thermal fluid flow external to tube bundle of heat exchanger.
D) TERMINAL BOARD
The electric control panel foresees the installation of a terminal board which permits connecting all heat
exchanger control and safety instruments.
The terminal board can be divided into two sections, the first of which includes connections for all motors
present and function instruments, while the second contains clean contacts that indicate the function
status of the heat exchanger.
To connection please to refer the electric diagram enclosed.
Never intervene on electric panel or heat exchanger instruments supplied with electricity
with wet hands or clothing soaked in highly conductive or inflammable liquids.
Always wear heavy duty work shoes when intervening on plant.
Never intervene on various electric instruments of panel or heat exchanger without first
having checked that general panel power switch is in the open position "0".
If the electric control panel results powered with the front door of cabinet open, a
situation of extreme danger exists. In such situations only expert personnel should
conduct operations.
Electric control panel keys must be kept in the custody of person responsible for heat
exchanger management and conduction and never be left inserted in panel.
Never direct conductive or explosive liquids in the direction of the electric panel.
In case of fire never use water to extinguish fire; only powder-based extinguishers
should be used.
Verify grounding system on a periodic basis.
5 –FILLING (LOADING)
SUMMARY
Chapter Description
A) LOADING METHOD
Begin filling by activating one of the heat exchanger load pumps and load until work level has been
reached. The pump is activated through its own dedicated switch which permits selecting AUTO or MAN
function.
Once having completed filling operation close the manual On/Off valve on suction side of feed pump.
A water treatment plant must therefore be installed to filter and successively soften or demineralize the
water in addition to an eventual chemical conditioning to limit corrosion effects.
In this manner precipitation phenomena of scaling and corrosive substances can be contemporaneously
avoided.
Pressure in function
Parameters Measure unit
Until 15 bar Beyond 15 bar
Phosphates mg PO4/Kg 30 30
For the determination of the quantity of water to be discharged, concerning the critical parameter
concentration in the delivery water and in the water of the exchanger body, carry out the following
calculation:
Ca
S% = 100 x --------------
Cc
The ratio Ca/Cc indicates the number of possible concentrations of salt or critical parameter in the
stoking water. The most critical parameter must always be introduced in the formula, that is, the one
which first reaches the maximum admissible value.
For the control, the ratio between the critical parameter and one more easy analysing (for example
Chlorides) and successively establish discharges based on the concentration of this parameter.
Example:
Let’s say that the delivery water has an alkalinity P (ppm CaCO3) equal to 100, while the maximum
admissible value when functioning at 15 bar is 1000 ppm as reported the table.
100
S% = 100 x --------------
1000
The discharge must be equal to 10% of the delivery water flow (equal to the effective steam utilization)
If 1000 Kg/h of steam is produced with a condensate regeneration of 80%, 200 Lt/h of water will be
reintegrated and the quantity to discharged will be of 200*0.1=20 lt/h.
The correct management of discharges guarantee a good function or heat exchanger and
avoid some possible scaling and corrosion problems that can create a dangerous
situation for the operators are working. The discharge flow must be such as to not
induce a decrease in heat exchanger water level, with risk to uncover the tube bundle.
If the heat exchanger is equipped with an automatic discharge valve, the timed control
system setting must be set determining length and volume of the discharge in relation to
the above mentioned calculations. The system setting operation must be carried out by
specialized personnel.
The frequency to control water delivery and the water in the heat exchanger body is reported in the
chapter of the maintenance.
6 –START UP
SUMMARY
Chapter Description
Starting up of the heat exchanger can only take place once the thermal fluid circuit has
been loaded and all degassing and initial preheating operations carried out.
We recommend consulting the manual relative to thermal fluid boiler.
The thermal fluid must be free of air bubbles, water mixtures or other fluids at different
specific weights and boiling temperatures.
The first start up of the heat exchanger, within which control and safety system settings
are carried out, must be performed by expert and qualified personnel. We recommend
contacting our technical assistance service if necessary for further support.
The qualified operator responsible for ignition control and heat exchanger management
must wear heavy duty work shoes, gloves, and adherent clothing. Under no
circumstances should operators wear loose fitting clothing which may get caught in
moving machinery.
- verify that electric control panel is regularly powered with nominal voltage;
- verify correct delivery of compressed air at 6 bar to three way valve regulator, in relation to flow values
reported in manual. Furthermore, verify that pneumatic connections have been carried out correctly.
Set the regulator PIC401 and three way valve control system as indicated in relative manual.
- set the maximum steam pressure switch PSHH402 so that it corresponds low of 1 bar of pressure
maximum value of the safety valve pressure setting.
Set a differential value of 0,5 bar between activation and deactivation of alarm contact;
- verify the action of level regulator LIC401 and LICLH400. The min alarm low level must be at the same
level of LSLL402 alarm switch the max level must be at 10% upper of max regular functioning level;
- set the KT01 timer relay TU93 for blow down valve (see chapter 5) – set the valve opening time and
the valve closing time - function W;
- at this point power the electric control panels through the power switch;
Reset any alarms relative to generator via the reset S04 pushbutton.
- open all On/Off valves for control and regulation devices, HV406, HV413, HV410,
Close the manual valve HV408,
close all heat exchanger devices discharge valve XV401;
open On/Off valves on water delivery line and pressure inlet to regulator of the three way valve HV409;
- set the manual On/Off valves of the three way valves so that the thermal fluid can flow to the heat
exchanger;
- reintegrate the exchanger water level by starting the load pump in manual control S01;
- verify that water level rises in heat exchanger body, making sure that the pump stops when the
maximum level has been reached. If the water continues to rise exceeding maximum level after the
pump has been shut off, temporarily close the On/Off valve to pump. When water level starts to fall
immediately reopen the valve;
- verify that minimum level alarm has been shut off;
- make sure that there are no other ongoing alarms, and if necessary, act on reset S04 pushbutton.
- reintegrate the exchanger water level by starting the load pump in automatic control S01;
During these phases when acting on manual valves always wear protective gloves being
that surface temperatures may exceed 40°C.
- at this point the heat exchanger should continue function without any further controls with water loading
and regulation of thermal fluid passage completely automatic.
WARNING
If steam pressure rises above pressure switch regulation setting or water level diminishes below
minimum allowable level, an alarm situation will be activated and the flow of thermal fluid will be
deviated outside the tube bundle in order to annul the heat transfer.
A single lamp evidences each and every alarm and normal function can only be resumed by resetting
the control system via the reset S04 pushbutton.
In order to avoid any potentially dangerous or hazardous situation for personnel responsible for
managing the heat exchanger make certain that the following points are respected:
Abide by and respect all safety prescriptions reported in the present manual.
Create a zone of respect in the immediate area around the heat exchanger. During function all
unauthorized personnel must remain outside this area. Do not operate mechanical machinery
within this area that may damage instruments at the base of the heat exchanger.
Do not store any materials in the zone dedicated to the heat exchanger especially if highly
inflammable (diesel fuel, gasoline, petroleum products, lubricants, acids or base, etc.).
No part of the heat exchanger should ever be utilized to support the weight of persons or
extraneous objects.
The ventilation system installed inside the heat exchanger room must be such as to guarantee a
temperature which does not exceed 30° C.
Do not direct jets or streams of liquids of any kind towards the heat exchanger, in particular
water or highly inflammable liquids.
In case of fire utilize powder-based extinguishers only.
Never alter definitive regulation and safety system function parameters established during initial
setting phase of heat exchanger.
Never deactivate any of the safety systems. The heat exchanger must never be utilized with one
of these systems deactivated. If this anomalous situation should ever arise there are no
guarantees regarding neither heat exchanger safety nor the safety of personnel responsible for
heat exchanger supervision.
Periodically verify the correct function of all regulation and safety systems, both water/steam
side and thermal fluid side.
Periodically verify the correct function of the thermal fluid circulation system.
In case of function anomaly with onset of an alarm situation of the heat exchanger, never insist
on trying to reinstate control systems if the cause generating the situation has not been
resolved.
In case of alarm due to low or insufficient level carefully read information reported in chapter
relative to electric control panel in relation to reset alarm pushbutton.
If safety systems intervene repeatedly, it would be advisable to shut down the heat exchanger
immediately and contact our Technical Service Assistance Office.
Normally never suddenly interrupt power, water, compressed air supply or thermal fluid to heat
exchanger. This may provoke overheating or malfunction phenomena.
Do not effect sudden load variations.
Do not intervene at inspection hatches until fluid temperatures or pressure no longer constitute
a source of danger.
Never open manual discharge valves during regular function so as to avoid lowering level of the
heat exchanger thus leading to overheating phenomena.
All discharge operations must be carried out solely by qualified personnel.
The delivery water pump is equipped with opportune protections against accidental or voluntary
contact with moving parts. These protections must never be removed when the motor is
electrically powered. If protections are removed, before pump can be operated, make sure that
all protections have been reinstated.
When handling manual valves while heat exchanger is in function, utilize adequate protection for
hands.
Never place hands at risk where there is danger of crushing or cutting hands or fingers in
moving machinery.
We recommend carrying out regular maintenance operations regarding various heat exchanger
parts as reported in relative chapter.
Do not intervene on any mechanical part of heat exchanger when in function or parts thereof
which may present temperatures above 40°. When carrying out maintenance operations wait
until temperature has fallen to within acceptable values.
Periodically control insulation and protection system.
If it is ever necessary to reach any part of the heat exchanger above 300 mm, use external
support equipment provided with proper protection (in conformity with local safety standards).
These structures must never bear weight on any part of the heat exchanger.
Upon terminating maintenance phases control inside and outside of heat exchanger to make
sure that no extraneous objects have been accidentally left behind such as keys, rags, etc.
Visually inspect external connections on a periodic basis. Control gaseous fluid and liquid
connection sealings regularly.
If leakage of hot gases or liquids is noted immediately interrupt heat exchanger function, wait
until temperature of interested part descends below 40 °C, cut out power supply, then proceed to
control of sealing capacity.
When handling thermal fluid follow prescriptions reported in safety sheet. Never disperse
thermal fluid in the environment.
B) ALARM SITUATIONS
In case of an alarm situation, please go on like following way:
• The alarm situation is indicated through a lighting on electric board and (optional) acoustic indicator.
In accordance with the indication, found the alarm type happened and elimine the cause.
Only after restored the correct function conditions, restart the heat exchanger.
• To reactivate the heat exchanger function, push the Reset pushbutton.
Repeat therefore the starting heat exchanger procedure.
• Reduce the hot thermal fluid flux on the tube bundle. If the anomaly is repeated, stop the thermal fluid
flux.
Only after detected and eliminated the malfunction cause, reactivate the heat exchanger running.
During the stop phases, wear protective gloves when handling manual valves in as much
as surface temperature may exceed 40°C.
- interrupt heating of thermal fluid by deactivating the relative generator situated on circuit, so that oil
temperature diminishes, however do not interrupt the oil circulation system.
- when steam pressure descends below 1 bar, close the manual steam outlet valve HV408, stop the oil
circulation system and close the On/Off valves of the three way valve;
- once the water inside the heat exchanger has reached maximum level, verify the stop of the loading
pump, then close On/Off valves situated on water delivery line. Successively gradually open the
discharge valves of the level indicator HV407 and level regulators HV416/417 until discharging is
complete then close valves.
- recheck the water level inside heat exchanger, if low, bring to maximum level by opening the On/Off
valves on the water delivery line and activating loading pump by positioning the WATER PUMP S01
switch to MAN. Control correct level through indicators, stop the pump and close all On/Off valves;
- remove power supply from electric panel by placing switch to 0, then close all On/Off valves to devices.
Upon terminating the first heat exchanger start up, recheck all connection points of
various circuits. Expansion phenomena may in fact produce loosening of bolts, seals,
etc., therefore control of and tightening of said parts is fundamental for correct heat
exchanger function, eliminating any possible leakage of hot steam or liquids from
connection points.
Before proceeding with these operations, wait until various heat exchanger parts have
cooled down to below 40 °C thus avoiding injury due to accidental contact.
WARNING
In case of prolonged stops, it is highly recommended that the heat exchanger body be filled with
water, so that the tube bundle is covered with water, also adding a more concentrated solution
of conditioning substances than what is normally added during normal function.
At any case, consult your supplier of conditioning substances for further information.
7 - SETTING TABLES
In these tables all definitive devices regulation and safety settings carried out during first heat exchanger start
up phase can be noted.
Instrument initials and reference models of instruments can be easily found in the enclosed mechanical and
electrical diagrams.
This data will serve as a reference in carrying out periodic instrument controls.
°C
Thermal fluid temperature at tube bundle inlet ----
bar
Steam pressure at heat exchanger outlet PI403
l/h
Water max delivery pump capacity P401
bar
Pumps inlet water pressure ---
bar
Pumps outlet water pressure PI401
°C
Pumps inlet water temperature ---
Model
Configuration
Algorithm
Hysteresis (Hy)
Set Point 2
Hysteresis
Set Point 3
Hysteresis
Model
Configuration
Algorithm
Hysteresis (Hy)
Set Point 2
Hysteresis
Set Point 3
Hysteresis
Model
Configuration
Algorithm
Hysteresis (Hy)
Set Point 2
Hysteresis
Set Point 3
Hysteresis
8 - MAINTENANCE
SUMMARY
Chapter Description Intervention
8.A General intervention notes Frequency
In case of repeat of hidraulic test, the temperature of water not must to be lower of 21°C
B) WATER ANALYSIS
The heat exchanger is equipped with drawing points wich gives patterns for the analysis or the water
contained in the heat exchanger body.
During the operations be careful and have all precautions to avoid the possible burn.
The drawing must be effectued in a glass pirex container of 200 cc previously washed with distilled water
to avoid every trails of possible substances present.
When the drawing is effectued, the on/off valves utilized must be closed immediately.
If the water of the heat exchanger body analysis show some differences by the limit prescribed values,
while delivery water has very goods characteristics, it’s necessary to verify the discharge way.
The prescribed values for the delivery water characteristics and the water of the heat exchanger body
are indicated, respectly, in the chapter concerning the installation and the heat exchanger running.
In case of values are not according, the situation must be quickly normalized. In all case,
the heat exchanger doesn’t run with not available water.
The frequency with which analysis should be carried out in relation to type of water is reported in the
following table.
On the steam too daily analysis must be carried out to verify the presence of saline content or of
conditioning, means a high concentration of salts in the water of the heat exchanger body.
C) CONTROL OF DISCHARGES
Verify the frequency and duration of discharges controlling that the quantity of water discharged is
correct based on periodic analysis.
If an automatic discharge system is not available, utilize the manual discharge foot valve.
It is extremely important that the water level never descend below the alarm point during
discharge sequence. Always carefully verify frequency in order to limit the quantity of
water to be eliminated during each discharge.
At end of each workday the regulator and level indicators must be discharged so as to eliminate any
possible deposits which may interfere with normal function.
Before carrying out this operation make sure that internal pressure is below 8 bar after
heat exchanger has been stopped.
If operations require removal of mechanical protections from the pump, make sure that
all such protections have been correctly reinstated before restarting pump.
For the safety of those working in the immediate area of the heat exchanger, never
deactivate any of the safety systems. In case of generator malfunction immediately stop
heat exchanger function.
We recommend utilizing a strong jet of water to carry out internal cleaning of heat exchanger body.
Upon completing cleaning operation check that discharge point is clean and discharge tube free of
scale.
If after the cleaning operation there are evident signs of corrosion or scaling phenomena, it is then
necessary to alter delivery water and or function conditions.
Upon terminating verification reinstall the hand/manhole and substitute sealing gaskets making sure that
they are properly seated.
Make sure that sealing gaskets are suitable to pressure and temperature function
conditions of the heat exchanger.
During this control must be carried out a test to the control systems to verify them are running; the scale
can effectly create their wrong running.
In this case too, please reassemble all parts being careful for the position and the quality of the gaskets
utilized.
Make sure that sealing gaskets are suitable to pressure and temperature function
conditions of the heat exchanger.
The excess thermal fluid must be disposed of in recognized and approved disposal
centers in conformity with laws in force. Never disperse in environment.
It is extremely important to verify that wiring is properly connected and tightened to relative contacts and
terminal board in as much as function may induce loosening of screws, thus giving rise to the onset of
overheating phenomena of wiring and the creation of false contacts capable of compromising correct
plant function.
In case of anomalous function first verify efficiency of auxiliary relays involved in control system function.
At any rate verify function on a regular basis.
Control voltage regularly verifying that voltage does not oscillate more than 10% in either direction in
respect to nominal value.
During the initial start up phase the data sheet reporting correct initial setting values must be compiled.
Control and compare current control instrument settings on a regular basis.
For maintenance of individual instruments refer to enclosed relative technical documentation.
9 – DISPOSAL
Disposal of the heat exchanger and its components must be carried out in respect to protecting the
environment and in accordance with local norms regarding such materials.
In substance, initial disposal operations basically consist of dismantling and separating structural parts, as
iron, plastic and electrical parts and isolation parts.
All plastic, fuel filter, electrical wiring etc., must be collected and put in designated areas for such materials,
while structural and iron parts must be brought to designated centers for disposal of metals.
Remember that the insulation materials are considered special rubbish to be packed to avoid
the powders dispersion in the environment. When you handling all insulation materials it’s
necessary to avoid the powders creation and put on an individual protection to avoid a
possible inhalation of the powders and the contact with skin and mucous.
In case of accidental contact, rinsed at once the parts with much water.
At the end of the disposals operations, all protection systems (clothes, faceplates, glasses…)
must be eliminated with other material.
As previously noted the SOV heat exchangers are fitted with various control instruments that are responsible
for guaranteeing regular heat exchanger function.
In the following are listed some of the possible remedies in case of burner malfunction, stop or difficulty in
starting:
F.M.: 3x400VAC 50Hz Aux.: 230-24VAC A termini di legge la Babcock Wanson Italiana SpA si riserva la proprietà del presente
CAVENAGO DI BRIANZA ( MB ) disegno e ne vieta l'utilizzazione e la riproduzione o la comunicazione a terzi. Foglio: 01 di 30
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
0 1
Q01 F01 F03 F05
+IQ +IQ +IQ +IQ
25A 10A 4A 4A
aM aM aM
L07
L10
L13
L19
L23
L16
L22
L04
L03
L02
T01
L01 +IQ
1
3
5
KM01 KM02 630VA
(03-10) (03-8) 400VAC
6
230-24VAC
L17
L20
L14
02
L11
L05
L08
F02 F04
7,0 ÷ 10,0A 1,8 ÷ 2,5 A 01
(03-10) (03-8)
COOPER BAR
-- --
-
L21
L15
L18
L09
L06
L12
F06 F08 F09 F07
+IQ +IQ +IQ +IQ
X400-1
X400-2
X400-3
X400-4
X400-5
X400-6
4A 4A 4A 4A
gG gG gG gG
230F1
230N1
230N1
230N1
24N1
24F1
230F3
230F2
X1-1
X1-2
X1-3
X1-4
03-1 03-1 14-1 14-1
R S T PE
MP.401 MP.701
4,0kW 8,8A 0,75kW 2,0A
F.M.: 3x400VAC 50Hz Aux.: 230-24VAC A termini di legge la Babcock Wanson Italiana SpA si riserva la proprietà del presente
CAVENAGO DI BRIANZA ( MB ) disegno e ne vieta l'utilizzazione e la riproduzione o la comunicazione a terzi. Foglio: 02 di 30
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
230F1 230F1
02-11 07-1
1 0 2
S01 S01
+FQ (03-3)
MAN AUT
(03-5)
95
13
F04 KM02
05
(02-9) (03-8)
96
14
57
03 K01
(04-5)
58
08
X700-1
06
57
95
LSL98 K02 F02
SEE T300-03 (04-7) (02-7)
58
96
X700-2
Page 02 of 06
230N1
07
12
14
K24
09
(10-6)
11
A1
A1
KM02 KM01
04 +IQ +IQ
A2
A2
230N1 230N1
02-11 04-1
NO NC NO NC
ttttttttt
-t-ttt ttttttttt
-t-ttt
ttttttttttttt
ttttttttttttt
(02-9) (02-7)
(02-9) - - (02-7) - -
(02-9) (02-7)
(03-10) (14-3)
-- --
F.M.: 3x400VAC 50Hz Aux.: 230-24VAC A termini di legge la Babcock Wanson Italiana SpA si riserva la proprietà del presente
CAVENAGO DI BRIANZA ( MB ) disegno e ne vieta l'utilizzazione e la riproduzione o la comunicazione a terzi. Foglio: 03 di 30
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
10 10
08-3 05-1
12
14
22
24
1
3
K01 K03
K20 K20
(08-2) (04-5) (08-2) (04-11)
4
11
21
21
14
1
3
K02 K04
(04-7) (04-12)
4
11 16 18
X400-7
67
67
75
85
K01 K01 K03 K03 PSHH.402
(04-5) (04-5) (04-11) (04-11)
68
68
76
86
X400-8
12
14
12
14
K23 K25
15
19
12
22
(10-4) (11-4)
11
11
67
67
75
85
K02 K02 K04 K04
(04-7) (04-7) (04-12) (04-12)
68
68
76
86
13 17 20 23
A1
A1
A1
A1
K01 K02 K03 K04
+IQ +IQ +IQ +IQ
A2
A2
A2
A2
230N1 230N1
03-15 05-1
NO NC NO NC NO NC NO NC
ttttttttt
-t-ttt ttttttttt
-t-ttt ttttttttt
-t-ttt ttttttttt
-t-ttt
ttttttttttttt
ttttttttttttt
ttttttttttttt
ttttttttttttt
(04-3) (04-3) (07-4) (07-4)
(07-2) (04-2) (07-2) (04-2) (04-9) - - (04-9) - -
-- -- -- -- - - (04-8) - - (04-8)
(03-5) (03-5) -- --
(04-3) (04-3) (04-9) (04-9)
F.M.: 3x400VAC 50Hz Aux.: 230-24VAC A termini di legge la Babcock Wanson Italiana SpA si riserva la proprietà del presente
CAVENAGO DI BRIANZA ( MB ) disegno e ne vieta l'utilizzazione e la riproduzione o la comunicazione a terzi. Foglio: 04 di 30
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
10 10
04-15 06-1
32
34
42
44
1
1
K05 K07
K20 K20
(08-2) (05-5) (08-2) (05-11)
2
31
41
27
33
1
1
K06 K08
(05-7) (05-12)
2
24 30
X500-1
X500-3
69
75
69
75
JB500-1
JB500-3
K05 K05 K07 K07
(05-5) (05-5) (05-11) (05-11)
68
76
68
76
TSH.503 PSHH.503
31
25
28
34
JB500-2
JB500-4
69
69
75
75
68
76
68
76
X500-2
X500-4
26 29 32 35
A1
A1
A1
A1
K05 K06 K07 K08
+IQ +IQ +IQ +IQ
A2
A2
A2
A2
230N1 230N1
04-15 06-1
NO NC NO NC NO NC NO NC
ttttttttt
-t-ttt ttttttttt
-t-ttt ttttttttt
-t-ttt ttttttttt
-t-ttt
ttttttttttttt
ttttttttttttt
ttttttttttttt
ttttttttttttt
(05-3) (05-3) (05-9) (05-9)
(07-9) (05-2) (07-9) (05-2) (07-11) - - (07-11) - -
(15-6) - - (15-6) - - (15-6) (05-8) (15-6) (05-8)
-- -- -- --
(05-3) (05-3) (05-9) (05-9)
F.M.: 3x400VAC 50Hz Aux.: 230-24VAC A termini di legge la Babcock Wanson Italiana SpA si riserva la proprietà del presente
CAVENAGO DI BRIANZA ( MB ) disegno e ne vieta l'utilizzazione e la riproduzione o la comunicazione a terzi. Foglio: 05 di 30
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
10 10
05-15 11-7
12
14
22
24
1
1
K09 K11
K21 K21
(08-3) (06-5) (08-3) (06-11)
2
11
21
39
45
1
1
K10 K12
(06-7) (06-12)
2
36 42
X600-1
X600-3
69
69
75
75
JB600-1
JB600-3
K09 K09 K11 K11
(06-5) (06-5) (06-11) (06-11)
68
68
76
76
TSH.603 PSHH.603
37
40
43
46
JB600-2
JB600-4
69
69
75
75
68
68
76
76
X600-2
X600-4
38 41 44 47
A1
A1
A1
A1
K09 K10 K11 K12
+IQ +IQ +IQ +IQ
A2
A2
A2
A2
230N1 230N1
05-15 07-1
NO NC NO NC NO NC NO NC
ttttttttt
-t-ttt ttttttttt
-t-ttt ttttttttt
-t-ttt ttttttttt
-t-ttt
ttttttttttttt
ttttttttttttt
ttttttttttttt
ttttttttttttt
(06-3) (06-3) (06-9) (06-9)
(07-12) (06-2) (07-12) (06-2) (07-14) - - (07-14) - -
(15-7) - - (15-7) - - (15-7) (06-8) (15-7) (06-8)
-- -- -- --
(06-3) (06-3) (06-9) (06-9)
F.M.: 3x400VAC 50Hz Aux.: 230-24VAC A termini di legge la Babcock Wanson Italiana SpA si riserva la proprietà del presente
CAVENAGO DI BRIANZA ( MB ) disegno e ne vieta l'utilizzazione e la riproduzione o la comunicazione a terzi. Foglio: 06 di 30
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
230F1 230F1
03-15 08-1
1
3
3
K01 K03 1 0 2
S02 K05 K07 K09 K11
S02
(04-5) (04-11) +FQ (07-5) (05-5) (05-11) (06-5) (06-11)
4
4
MAN AUT
(07-8)
54
61
57
50
55
59
48
52
26
28
1
3
3
K02 K04 S03 K06 K08 K10 K12
KT01
(04-7) (04-12) +FQ (07-8) (05-7) (05-12) (06-7) (06-12)
4
4
BLACK
25
53
51
49
60
58
56
62
A2
A1
A1
A1
A1
A1
A1
A1
K13 K14 K15 KT01 K16 K17 K18 K19
+IQ +IQ +IQ Fun.
+IQ
W +IQ +IQ +IQ +IQ
A2
A2
A2
A2
A2
A2
A2
A1
jumper A1 B1
230N1 230N1
06-15 08-1
MIN. WATER MAX STEAM OPENING AUTOMATIC OPENING HIGH WATER HIGH WATER HIGH WATER HIGH WATER
LEVEL PRESSURE BLOW DOWN VALVE BLOW DOWN VALVE TEMPERATURE PRESSURE TEMPERATURE PRESSURE
SOV ITEM 400 SOV ITEM 400 SOV ITEM 400 SOV ITEM 400 SOAC ITEM 500 SOAC ITEM 500 SOAC ITEM 600 SOAC ITEM 600
NO NC NO NC NO NC NO NC NO NC NO NC NO NC NO NC
ttttttttttttt ttttttttttttt ttttttttttttt ttttt
-t
-ttttttt ttttttttttttt ttttttttttttt ttttttttttttt ttttttttttttt
ttttttttttt
ttttttttttt
ttttttttttt
tttttt
ttttttttttt
ttttttttttt
ttttttttttt
ttttttttttt
S(08-5) S(08-6) S(14-5) S(08-9) S(08-10) S(08-11) S(08-12)
S(14-6) S(14-7) S(15-2) (07-6) S(14-9) S(14-10) S(14-11) S(14-13)
S(15-4) S(15-4) -- S(16-8) S(16-10) S(16-12) S(16-14)
S(16-2) S(16-4) -- -- -- -- --
F.M.: 3x400VAC 50Hz Aux.: 230-24VAC A termini di legge la Babcock Wanson Italiana SpA si riserva la proprietà del presente
CAVENAGO DI BRIANZA ( MB ) disegno e ne vieta l'utilizzazione e la riproduzione o la comunicazione a terzi. Foglio: 07 di 30
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
230F1 230F1
07-15 09-1
12
14
12
14
12
14
12
14
12
14
12
14
12
14
12
14
S04 S04 K13 K14 K26 K16 K17 K18 K19 K29
+FQ (08-2) (07-2) (07-4) (11-5) (07-9) (07-11) (07-12) (07-14) (11-13)
RED
11
11
11
11
11
11
11
11
(08-3) RED
64
63
10
11
S05 K22
04-1
+FQ (08-5)
RED
14
12
65
66
X400-29
A1
A1
A1
A2
A2
230N1 230N1
07-15 09-1
NO NC NO NC NO NC
ttttttttttttt ttttttttttttt ttttttttttttt
ttttttttttt
ttttttttttt
ttttttttttt
F.M.: 3x400VAC 50Hz Aux.: 230-24VAC A termini di legge la Babcock Wanson Italiana SpA si riserva la proprietà del presente
CAVENAGO DI BRIANZA ( MB ) disegno e ne vieta l'utilizzazione e la riproduzione o la comunicazione a terzi. Foglio: 08 di 30
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
230F1 230F1
08-15 10-1
67
68
70
69
Shunt
2,5ohm
X400-11
X400-10
X400-12
X400-9
71
25 19 20 23 24 36 12 11 10 1 2
+ - - + 24V + + -
PY.402
PIC.401
OP5
PT.401
I
U
OP1 OP2
WIKA
26 27 29 28 30 32 31 33
230N1 230N1
08-15 10-1
F.M.: 3x400VAC 50Hz Aux.: 230-24VAC A termini di legge la Babcock Wanson Italiana SpA si riserva la proprietà del presente
CAVENAGO DI BRIANZA ( MB ) disegno e ne vieta l'utilizzazione e la riproduzione o la comunicazione a terzi. Foglio: 09 di 30
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
230F1 230F1
09-15 11-1
72
73
76
80
X400-13
X400-14
X400-15
X400-16
25 21 20 3 5 6 7 12 11 10 36 +19 1 2
- OP6 + COM IL1 IL2 IL3 - + +24Vdc SET-REM + -
LY.402
LIC.401
LT.401
I
U
X5 3104 I
3-15 4-20
X
PSI mA
OP4 OP3 OP1 OP2 + - + -
OP5
26 35 34 29 30 28 32 31 33 8 9 16 17 18
75
79
78
74
11-5 11-6
A1
A1
K23 K24
+IQ +IQ
A2
A2
230N1 230N1
09-15 11-1
NO NC NO NC
ttttttttttttt ttttttttttttt
ttttttttttt
ttttttttttt
S(04-4) S(03-5)
-- --
-- --
-- --
F.M.: 3x400VAC 50Hz Aux.: 230-24VAC A termini di legge la Babcock Wanson Italiana SpA si riserva la proprietà del presente
CAVENAGO DI BRIANZA ( MB ) disegno e ne vieta l'utilizzazione e la riproduzione o la comunicazione a terzi. Foglio: 10 di 30
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
230F1 230F1
10-15 12-1
10
06-15
10-6 10-7
32
34
3
79
78
K27 K27
K21
(08-3) (11-11) (11-11)
4
31
133
136
Shunt
2,5 Omh
3
K28 K28
(11-12) (11-12)
4
1 8 7 9 12 5 6
130
LICLH.400
- +
- +
X400-31
OP4
67
85
M1 3000-0000/8400
K27 K27
(11-11) (11-11)
68
86
OP1 OP2
LSLL.402
2 4 3 16 15
X400-32
131
134
137
67
85
K28 K28
(11-12) (11-12)
81
82
68
86
135
132
A1
A1
A1
A1
A1
A2
A2
A2
+IQ +IQ
A2
A2
230N1 230N1
10-15 12-1
NO NC NO NC NO NC NO NC NO NC
ttttttttttttt ttttttttttttt ttttttttt
-t-ttt ttttttttt
-t-ttt ttttttttttttt
ttttttttttt
ttttttttttt
tttttttt
tttttttt
ttttttttttt
S(04-5) S(08-7) (11-9) (11-9) S(08-13)
-- S(14-8) (11-13) - - (11-13) - - S(14-14)
-- -- - - (11-8) - - (11-8) S(15-4)
-- -- -- -- S(16-6)
(11-9) (11-9)
F.M.: 3x400VAC 50Hz Aux.: 230-24VAC A termini di legge la Babcock Wanson Italiana SpA si riserva la proprietà del presente
CAVENAGO DI BRIANZA ( MB ) disegno e ne vieta l'utilizzazione e la riproduzione o la comunicazione a terzi. Foglio: 11 di 30
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
230F1 230F1
11-15 13-1
83
84
TE503
PT100
JB500-7
JB500-8
JB500-9
JB500-11 X500-11
JB500-10 X500-10
X500-7
X500-8
X500-9
85
85
86
25 19 20 23 24 36 12 11 10
+ - - + 24V +
TIC.503
OP5
PY.502
X3 3105-0000/0022-0000
3-15 4-20
OP3
PSI mA
OP1 OP2
26 27 29 28 30 32 31 33
230N1 230N1
11-15 13-1
F.M.: 3x400VAC 50Hz Aux.: 230-24VAC A termini di legge la Babcock Wanson Italiana SpA si riserva la proprietà del presente
CAVENAGO DI BRIANZA ( MB ) disegno e ne vieta l'utilizzazione e la riproduzione o la comunicazione a terzi. Foglio: 12 di 30
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
230F1
12-15
87
88
TE.603
PT100
JB600-7
JB600-8
JB600-9
JB600-11 X600-11
JB600-10 X600-10
X600-7
X600-8
X600-9
89
89
90
25 19 20 23 24 36 12 11 10
+ - - + 24V +
TIC.603
OP5
PY.602
X3 3105-0000/0022-0000
3-15 4-20
OP3
PSI mA
OP1 OP2
26 27 29 28 30 32 31 33
230N1
12-15
F.M.: 3x400VAC 50Hz Aux.: 230-24VAC A termini di legge la Babcock Wanson Italiana SpA si riserva la proprietà del presente
CAVENAGO DI BRIANZA ( MB ) disegno e ne vieta l'utilizzazione e la riproduzione o la comunicazione a terzi. Foglio: 13 di 30
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
13
12
14
22
24
22
24
22
24
22
24
22
24
22
24
22
24
22
24
KM01 K15 K13 K14 K26 K16 K17 K18 K19 K29
(03-10) (07-5) (07-2) (07-4) (11-5) (07-9) (07-11) (07-12) (07-14) (11-13)
11
21
21
21
21
21
21
21
21
14
91
97
93
95
99
98
96
92
138
WHITE BLUE BLUE RED RED94 RED RED RED RED RED RED
H01 H02 H03 H04 H05 H06 H07 H08 H09 H10 H11
+FQ +FQ +FQ +FQ +FQ +FQ +FQ +FQ +FQ +FQ +FQ
24N1 24N1
02-15 15-1
POWER WATER BLOW DOWN MIN. WATER MAX STEAM VERY HIGH HIGH WATER HIGH WATER HIGH WATER HIGH WATER VERY LOW
ON PUMP VALV E LEVEL PRESSURE WATER LEVEL TEMPERATURE PRESSURE TEMPERATURE PRESSURE WATER LEVEL
ON SOV ITEM 400 SOV ITEM 400 SOV ITEM 400 SOV ITEM 400 SOAC ITEM 500 SOAC ITEM 500 SOAC ITEM 600 SOAC ITEM 600 SOV ITEM 400
OPEN
F.M.: 3x400VAC 50Hz Aux.: 230-24VAC A termini di legge la Babcock Wanson Italiana SpA si riserva la proprietà del presente
CAVENAGO DI BRIANZA ( MB ) disegno e ne vieta l'utilizzazione e la riproduzione o la comunicazione a terzi. Foglio: 14 di 30
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
24F1
14-15
X900-1
22
24
32
34
5
K05 K09
K15 K13
(07-5) (07-2) (05-5) (06-5)
6
21
31
TSH.901
107
103
5
5
K06 K10
101
X900-2
(05-7) (06-7)
6
108
104
32
34
K14
5
(07-4)
K07 K11
31
(05-11) (06-11)
6
100
105
109
139
5
K08 K12
32
34
111
K29 (05-12) (06-12)
6
(11-13)
31
110
106
102
X500-5
X600-5
X400-21
X400-17
X400-19
JB500-5
JB600-5
X900-3
XY.401 XY.402 EV.402 EV.502 EV.602 EV.901
X400-18
X400-20
X400-22
JB500-6
JB600-6
X900-4
X500-6
X600-6
24N1
14-15
F.M.: 3x400VAC 50Hz Aux.: 230-24VAC A termini di legge la Babcock Wanson Italiana SpA si riserva la proprietà del presente
CAVENAGO DI BRIANZA ( MB ) disegno e ne vieta l'utilizzazione e la riproduzione o la comunicazione a terzi. Foglio: 15 di 30
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
42
44
42
44
42
44
32
34
32
34
32
34
32
34
K13 K14 K29 K16 K17 K18 K19
(07-2) (07-4) (11-13) (07-9) (07-11) (07-12) (07-14)
41
41
41
31
31
31
31
141
121
117
127
113
115
140
120
119
123
125
129
118
128
116
126
112
142
122
114
124
X400-23
X400-24
X400-25
X400-26
X400-27
X400-28
X400-33
X400-34
X400-35
X500-12
X500-13
X500-14
X500-15
X500-16
X500-17
X600-12
X600-13
X600-14
X600-15
X600-16
X600-17
MIN. WATER MAX STEAM VERY LOW HIGH WATER HIGH WATER HIGH WATER HIGH WATER
LEVEL PRESSURE WATER LEVEL TEMPERATURE PRESSURE TEMPERATURE PRESSURE
SOV ITEM 400 SOV ITEM 400 SOV ITEM 400 SOAC ITEM 500 SOAC ITEM 500 SOAC ITEM 600 SOAC ITEM 600
LSL.401 PSHH.402 LSLL 402 TSH.503 PSHH.503 TSH.603 PSHH.603
F.M.: 3x400VAC 50Hz Aux.: 230-24VAC A termini di legge la Babcock Wanson Italiana SpA si riserva la proprietà del presente
CAVENAGO DI BRIANZA ( MB ) disegno e ne vieta l'utilizzazione e la riproduzione o la comunicazione a terzi. Foglio: 16 di 30
1
X400
N° MORSETTO N° FILO
W1 Filo 1
MP.401 1 L06
4,0kW 8,8A Filo 2
L09
UFFICIO TECNICO
2
2
Filo 3
3 L12
CAVENAGO DI BRIANZA ( MB )
W2 Filo 1
MP.701 4 L15
0,75kW 2,0A Filo 2
5 L18
3
Filo 3
6 L21
W3 Filo 1
PSHH.402 7 20
Filo 2
8 23
W4 Filo 1
PT.401 9 69
4
ELECTRIC DIAGRAM
Reg.: EL/PNEUMATIC
Filo 2
10 70
W5 Filo 1
PY.402 11 67
Filo 2
12 68
5
W6 Filo 1
80
W8 Filo 1
XY.401 17 100
Filo 2
18 24N1
W9 Filo 1
XY.402 19 102
7
Filo 2
Schema:
Directory:
20 24N1
W10 Filo 1
EV.402 21 102
Filo 2
22 24N1
W11 Filo 1
MIN. WATER 23 112
8
25.136.065.0
LEVEL SOV ITEM 400 Filo 2
LSL.401 24 114
251360650R2ENG
Filo 3
25 113
W12 Filo 1
Rev:
Filo 2
1
LSL.401 27 117
disegno e ne vieta l'utilizzazione e la riproduzione o la comunicazione a terzi.
Filo 3
28 116
A termini di legge la Babcock Wanson Italiana SpA si riserva la proprietà del presente
29 66
30 230N1
10
Foglio:
Ordine:
W13 Filo 1
Sezione:
LSLL.402 31 132
Filo 2
17
32 135
W15 Filo 1
di
LSLL.401 34 142
30
Filo 3
35 141
TERMINAL BOARD: X400
12
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
N° FILO
24N1
121
118
106
123
119
120
122
X500
35
85
85
26
86
83
29
32
84
N° MORSETTO
11
17
10
13
15
16
12
14
1
7
3
9
8
6
2
4
Filo 1
Filo 1
Filo 1
Filo 1
Filo 1
Filo 3
Filo 5
Filo 3
Filo 3
Filo 3
Filo 6
Filo 2
Filo 2
Filo 2
Filo 2
Filo 2
Filo 4
W17
W13
W15
W16
W14
CONNECTION
CONNECTION
TEMPERATURE
PRESSURE
HIGH WATER
HIGH WATER
SOAC ITEM 500
TO JB500
TO JB500
CONNECTION
PSHH.503
TSH.503
F.M.: 3x400VAC 50Hz Aux.: 230-24VAC A termini di legge la Babcock Wanson Italiana SpA si riserva la proprietà del presente
CAVENAGO DI BRIANZA ( MB ) disegno e ne vieta l'utilizzazione e la riproduzione o la comunicazione a terzi. Foglio: 18 di 30
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
N° FILO
24N1
128
125
126
129
127
110
124
X600
41
38
88
89
89
47
87
90
44
N° MORSETTO
11
17
10
13
15
16
12
14
1
7
3
9
8
6
2
4
Filo 1
Filo 1
Filo 1
Filo 1
Filo 1
Filo 3
Filo 5
Filo 3
Filo 3
Filo 3
Filo 6
Filo 2
Filo 2
Filo 2
Filo 2
Filo 2
Filo 4
W21
W19
W20
W18
W22
CONNECTION
CONNECTION
CONNECTION
TEMPERATURE
PRESSURE
HIGH WATER
HIGH WATER
SOAC ITEM 600
TO JB600
TO JB600
F.M.: 3x400VAC 50Hz Aux.: 230-24VAC A termini di legge la Babcock Wanson Italiana SpA si riserva la proprietà del presente
CAVENAGO DI BRIANZA ( MB ) disegno e ne vieta l'utilizzazione e la riproduzione o la comunicazione a terzi. Foglio: 19 di 30
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
N° FILO
X700
03
04
N° MORSETTO
2
Filo 1
Filo 2
W23
SEE T300-03
PAGE 02 OF 06
LSL.98
F.M.: 3x400VAC 50Hz Aux.: 230-24VAC A termini di legge la Babcock Wanson Italiana SpA si riserva la proprietà del presente
CAVENAGO DI BRIANZA ( MB ) disegno e ne vieta l'utilizzazione e la riproduzione o la comunicazione a terzi. Foglio: 20 di 30
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
N° FILO
24N1
24F1
111
111
X900
N° MORSETTO
3
2
4
Filo 1
Filo 1
Filo 2
Filo 2
W25
W24
TE.901
EV.902
F.M.: 3x400VAC 50Hz Aux.: 230-24VAC A termini di legge la Babcock Wanson Italiana SpA si riserva la proprietà del presente
CAVENAGO DI BRIANZA ( MB ) disegno e ne vieta l'utilizzazione e la riproduzione o la comunicazione a terzi. Foglio: 21 di 30
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
CONNECTION
CONNECTION
CONNECTION
FROM X500
FROM X500
FROM X500
W13
W15
W14
Filo 1
Filo 1
Filo 1
Filo 3
Filo 5
Filo 3
Filo 6
Filo 2
Filo 2
Filo 2
Filo 4
JB500
N° FILO
24N1
106
35
85
85
26
86
83
29
32
84
N° MORSETTO
11
10
1
7
3
9
8
6
2
4
Filo 1
Filo 1
Filo 1
Filo 1
Filo 1
Filo 3
Filo 2
Filo 2
Filo 2
Filo 2
Filo 2
W27
W29
W30
W28
W26
TSH.503
PSHH.503
TE.503
EV.502
PY.502
F.M.: 3x400VAC 50Hz Aux.: 230-24VAC A termini di legge la Babcock Wanson Italiana SpA si riserva la proprietà del presente
CAVENAGO DI BRIANZA ( MB ) disegno e ne vieta l'utilizzazione e la riproduzione o la comunicazione a terzi. Foglio: 22 di 30
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
CONNETCTION
CONNECTION
CONNECTION
FROM X600
FROM X600
FROM X600
W19
W20
W18 Filo 1
Filo 1
Filo 1
Filo 3
Filo 5
Filo 3
Filo 6
Filo 2
Filo 2
Filo 2
Filo 4
JB600
N° FILO
24N1
110
41
38
88
89
89
47
87
90
44
N° MORSETTO
11
10
1
7
3
9
8
6
2
4
Filo 1
Filo 1
Filo 1
Filo 1
Filo 1
Filo 3
Filo 2
Filo 2
Filo 2
Filo 2
Filo 2
W31
W33
W35
W32
W34
PSHH.603
TE.603
TE.603
EV.602
PY.602
F.M.: 3x400VAC 50Hz Aux.: 230-24VAC A termini di legge la Babcock Wanson Italiana SpA si riserva la proprietà del presente
CAVENAGO DI BRIANZA ( MB ) disegno e ne vieta l'utilizzazione e la riproduzione o la comunicazione a terzi. Foglio: 23 di 30
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
230N1
230N1
230F3
230F2
N° FILO
X1
N° MORSETTO
3
2
4
Filo 1
Filo 1
Filo 2
Filo 2
W37
W36
CONDENSATE TANK
WATER SPFTENER
230VAC SUPPLY
230VAC SUPPLY
F.M.: 3x400VAC 50Hz Aux.: 230-24VAC A termini di legge la Babcock Wanson Italiana SpA si riserva la proprietà del presente
CAVENAGO DI BRIANZA ( MB ) disegno e ne vieta l'utilizzazione e la riproduzione o la comunicazione a terzi. Foglio: 24 di 30
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
EV.402 EL-VALVE INTERCEPTION AIR VALVE PCV.402 SOV ITEM 400 EV.x Rif. P&I
EV.502 EL-VALVE INTERCEPTION AIR VALVE PCV.502 SOAC ITEM 500 EV.x Rif. P&I
EV.602 EL-VALVE INTERCEPTION AIR VALVE PCV.602 SOAC ITEM 600 EV.x Rif. P&I
EV.901 EL-VALVE INTERCEPTION AIR BLOW DOWN TANK ITEM 900 EV.x Rif. P&I
F04 THERMAL RELAY X 3RT10 .. WATER PUMP MOTOR 3RU11 26-1JB0 7,0 ÷ 10,0 A SIEMENS
F01 FUSE HOLDER BOOSTER WATER PUMP MOTOR PROTECTION 0058 38 LEGRAND
F04 THERMAL RELAY X 3RT10 .. BOOSTER WATER PUMP MOTOR 3RU11 16-1CB0 1,8 ÷ 2,5 A SIEMENS
F05 FUSE HOLDER TRANSFORMER PROTECTION 0058 28 LEGRAND
H03 BLUE SIGNAL LAMP BLOW DOWN VALVE SOV ITEM 400 OPEN 3SB30 01-6BA50 D. 22 SIEMENS
H04 RED SIGNAL LAMP MIN WATER LEVEL SOV ITEM 400 3SB3001-6BA20 D.22 SIEMENS
H05 RED SIGNAL LAMP MAX STEAM PRESSURE SOV ITEM 400 3SB3001-6BA20 D.22 SIEMENS
H06 RED SIGNAL LAMP VERY HIGH WATER LEVEL SOV ITEM 400 3SB3001-6BA20 D.22 SIEMENS
H07 RED SIGNAL LAMP HIGH WATER TEMPERATURE SOAC ITEM 500 3SB3001-6BA20 D.22 SIEMENS
H08 RED SIGNAL LAMP HIGH WATER PRESSURE SOAC ITEM 500 3SB3001-6BA20 D.22 SIEMENS
H09 RED SIGNAL LAMP HIGH WATER TEMPERATURE SOAC ITEM 600 3SB3001-6BA20 D.22 SIEMENS
H10 RED SIGNAL LAMP HIGH WATER PRESSURE SOAC ITEM 600 3SB3001-6BA20 D.22 SIEMENS
F.M.: 3x400VAC 50Hz Aux.: 230-24VAC A termini di legge la Babcock Wanson Italiana SpA si riserva la proprietà del presente
CAVENAGO DI BRIANZA ( MB ) disegno e ne vieta l'utilizzazione e la riproduzione o la comunicazione a terzi. Foglio: 25 di 30
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
H11 RED SIGNAL LAMP VERY LOW WATER LEVEL SOV ITEM 400 3SB3001-6BA20 D.22 SIEMENS
K01 CONTACTOR MIN WATER LEVEL SOV ITEM 400 3RT10 15-1AP02 230V 50Hz SIEMENS
CONTACTS AUXILIARY MIN WATER LEVEL SOV ITEM 400 3RH19 11-1FC22 SIEMENS
K02 CONTACTOR MIN WATER LEVEL SOV ITEM 400 3RT10 15-1AP02 230V 50Hz SIEMENS
K02 CONTACTS AUXILIARY MIN WATER LEVEL SOV ITEM 400 3RH19 11-1FC22 SIEMENS
K03 CONTACTOR MAX STEAM PRESSURE SOV ITEM 400 3RT10 15-1AP02 230V 50Hz SIEMENS
CONTACTS AUXILIARY MAX STEAM PRESSURE SOV ITEM 400 3RH19 11-1FC22 SIEMENS
K04 CONTACTOR MAX STEAM PRESSURE SOV ITEM 400 3RT10 15-1AP02 230V 50Hz SIEMENS
CONTACTS AUXILIARY MAX STEAM PRESSURE SOV ITEM 400 3RH19 11-1FC22 SIEMENS
K05 CONTACTOR HIGH WATER TEMPERATURE SOAC ITEM 500 3RT10 15-1AP02 230V 50Hz SIEMENS
CONTACTS AUXILIARY HIGH WATER TEMPERATURE SOAC ITEM 500 3RH19 11-1FC22 SIEMENS
K06 CONTACTOR HIGH WATER TEMPERATURE SOAC ITEM 500 3RT10 15-1AP02 230V 50Hz SIEMENS
CONTACTS AUXILIARY HIGH WATER TEMPERATURE SOAC ITEM 500 3RH19 11-1FC22 SIEMENS
K07 CONTACTOR HIGH WATER PRESSURE SOAC ITEM 500 3RT10 15-1AP02 230V 50Hz SIEMENS
CONTACTS AUXILIARY HIGH WATER PRESSURE SOAC ITEM 500 3RH19 11-1FC22 SIEMENS
K08 CONTACTOR HIGH WATER PRESSURE SOAC ITEM 500 3RT10 15-1AP02 230V 50Hz SIEMENS
CONTACTS AUXILIARY HIGH WATER PRESSURE SOAC ITEM 500 3RH19 11-1FC22 SIEMENS
K09 CONTACTOR HIGH WATER TEMPERATURE SOAC ITEM 600 3RT10 15-1AP02 230V 50Hz SIEMENS
CONTACTS AUXILIARY HIGH WATER TEMPERATURE SOAC ITEM 600 3RH19 11-1FC22 SIEMENS
K10 CONTACTOR HIGH WATER TEMPERATURE SOAC ITEM 600 3RT10 15-1AP02 230V 50Hz SIEMENS
CONTACTS AUXILIARY HIGH WATER TEMPERATURE SOAC ITEM 600 3RH19 11-1FC22 SIEMENS
K12 CONTACTOR HIGH WATER PRESSURE SOAC ITEM 600 3RT10 15-1AP02 230V 50Hz SIEMENS
CONTACTS AUXILIARY HIGH WATER PRESSURE SOAC ITEM 600 3RH19 11-1FC22 SIEMENS
K12 CONTACTOR HIGH WATER PRESSURE SOAC ITEM 600 3RT10 15-1AP02 230V 50Hz SIEMENS
CONTACTS AUXILIARY HIGH WATER PRESSURE SOAC ITEM 600 3RH19 11-1FC22 SIEMENS
K13 AUXILIARY RELAY MIN WATER LEVEL SOV ITEM 400 PT 570 730 230V 50Hz SCHRACK
K14 AUXILIARY RELAY MAX STEAM PRESSURE SOV ITEM 400 PT 570 730 230V 50Hz SCHRACK
K15 AUXILIARY RELAY OPENING BLOW DOWN VALVEL SOV ITEM 400 PT 570 730 230V 50Hz SCHRACK
K16 AUXILIARY RELAY HIGH WATER TEMPERATURE SOAC ITEM 500 PT 570 730 230V 50Hz SCHRACK
K17 AUXILIARY RELAY HIGH WATER PRESSURE SOAC ITEM 500 PT 570 730 230V 50Hz SCHRACK
F.M.: 3x400VAC 50Hz Aux.: 230-24VAC A termini di legge la Babcock Wanson Italiana SpA si riserva la proprietà del presente
CAVENAGO DI BRIANZA ( MB ) disegno e ne vieta l'utilizzazione e la riproduzione o la comunicazione a terzi. Foglio: 26 di 30
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
K18 AUXILIARY RELAY HIGH WATER TEMPERATURE SOAC ITEM 600 PT 570 730 230V 50Hz SCHRACK
K19 AUXILIARY RELAY HIGH WATER PRESSURE SOAC ITEM 600 PT 570 730 230V 50Hz SCHRACK
K20 AUXILIARY RELAY ALARM RESET PT 570 730 230V 50Hz SCHRACK
K21 AUXILIARY RELAY ALARM RESET PT 570 730 230V 50Hz SCHRACK
K22 AUXILIARY RELAY HOOTER ACKNOWLEDGEMENT PT 570 730 230V 50Hz SCHRACK
K23 AUXILIARY RELAY VERY LOW WATER LEVEL ( LSLL.401 ) SOV ITEM 400 PT 570 730 230V 50Hz SCHRACK
K24 AUXILIARY RELAY ON / OFF WATER PUMP ( LSL / LSH.401 ) SOV ITEM 400 PT 570 730 230V 50Hz SCHRACK
K25 AUXILIARY RELAY MIN WATER LEVEL ( LSL.401 ) ITEM SOV ITEM 400 PT 570 730 230V 50Hz SCHRACK
K26 AUXILIARY RELAY VERY LOW WATER LEVEL ( LSLL.402 ) SOV ITEM 400 PT 570 730 230V 50Hz SCHRACK
K27 CONTACTOR VERY LOW WATER LEVEL ( LSLL.402 ) SOV ITEM 400 3RT10 15-1AP02 230V 50Hz SIEMENS
CONTACTS AUXILIARY VERY LOW WATER LEVEL ( LSLL.402 ) SOV ITEM 400 3RH19 11-1FC22 SIEMENS
K28 CONTACTOR VERY LOW WATER LEVEL ( LSLL.402 ) SOV ITEM 400 3RT10 15-1AP02 230V 50Hz SIEMENS
CONTACTS AUXILIARY VERY LOW WATER LEVEL ( LSLL.402 ) SOV ITEM 400 3RH19 11-1FC22 SIEMENS
K29 AUXILIARY RELAY VERY LOW WATER LEVEL ( LSLL.402 ) SOV ITEM 400 PT 570 730 230V 50Hz SCHRACK
KM01 CONTACTOR WATER PUMP MOTOR 3RT10 24-1AL24 220V 50-60Hz SIEMENS
KM02 CONTACTOR BOOSTER WATER PUMP MOTOR 3RT10 16-1AP01 220V 50-60Hz SIEMENS
KT01 DELAYED RELAY AUT. OPENING BLOW DOWN VALVEL SOV ITEM 400 TU93 220V 50-60Hz CDC
LIC.401 REGULATOR AUTOMATIC FEED VALVEL REGULATOR SOV ITEM 400 X5 3104 85-264V 50-60Hz ASCON
LICLH.400 REGULATOR LEVEL WATER SOV ITEM 400 M1 3000-0000/8400 85-264V 50-60Hz ASCON
LSL.98 LEVEL CONTROL SWITCH LOW WATER LEVEL TANK LSxx.x Rif. P&I
LSLL.402 LEVEL CONTROL SWITCH VERY LOW WATER LEVEL ( LSLL.402 ) SOV ITEM 400 LSxx.x Rif. P&I
LT.401 LEVEL TRANSMITTER LEVEL TRASMITER SOV ITEM 400 LTxx.x Rif. P&I
LY.402 TRANSDUCER EL/PN AUTOMATIC FEED WATER VALVE REGULATION LYxx.x Rif. P&I
PSHH.401 PRESSURE CONTROL SWITCH MAX STEAM PRESSURE SOV ITEM 400 PSxx.x Rif. P&I
PSHH.503 PRESSURE CONTROL SWITCH HIGH WATER PRESSURE SOAC ITEM 500 PSxx.x Rif. P&I
PSHH.603 PRESSURE CONTROL SWITCH HIGH WATER PRESSURE SOAC ITEM 600 PSxx.x Rif. P&I
PSH.203 PRESSURE CONTROL SWITCH MAX GAS PRESSURE PSxx.x Rif. P&I
PSL.201 PRESSURE CONTROL SWITCH MIN GAS PRESSURE PSxx.x Rif. P&I
PSL.202 PRESSURE CONTROL SWITCH MIN COMBUSTION AIR PRESSURE PSxx.x Rif. P&I
PIC.401 REGULATOR REGULATOR VALVE THREE-WAY PCV 402 SOV ITEM 400 X3 3105-0000/1522-0000 85-264V 50-60Hz ASCON
F.M.: 3x400VAC 50Hz Aux.: 230-24VAC A termini di legge la Babcock Wanson Italiana SpA si riserva la proprietà del presente
CAVENAGO DI BRIANZA ( MB ) disegno e ne vieta l'utilizzazione e la riproduzione o la comunicazione a terzi. Foglio: 27 di 30
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
PT.401 PRESSURE TRANSMITTER STEAM PRESSURE TRASMITER SOV 400 PTxx.x Rif. P&I
PY.402 TRANSDUCER EL/PN AUTOMATIC REGULATION VALVE PCV.402 SOV ITEM 400 PYxx.x Rif. P&I
PY.502 TRANSDUCER EL/PN AUTOMATIC REGULATION VALVE PCV.502 SOAC ITEM 500 PYxx.x Rif. P&I
PY.602 TRANSDUCER EL/PN AUTOMATIC REGULATION VALVE PCV.602 SOAC ITEM 600 PYxx.x Rif. P&I
S02 SELECTOR SWITCH 3 pos. BLOW DOWN VALVE SOV ITEM 400 MAN - 0 - AUT 3SB3000-2DA11 D.22 SIEMENS
S03 BLACK PUSH-BUTTON MANUAL OPENEING BLOW DOWN VALVE SOV ITEM 400 3SB3000-0AA11 D.22 SIEMENS
TE.503 THERMORESISTANCE WATER TEMPERATURE SOAC ITEM 500 TExx.x Rif. P&I
TE.603 THERMORESISTANCE WATER TEMPERATURE SOAC ITEM 600 TExx.x Rif. P&I
TIC.503 REGULATOR WATER TEMPERATURE REGULATION SOAC ITEM 500 X3 3105-0000/1522-0000 85-264V 50Hz ASCON
TIC.603 REGULATOR WATER TEMPERATURE REGULATION SOAC ITEM 600 X3 3105-0000/1522-0000 85-264V 50Hz ASCON
TSH.503 TEMPERATURE CONTROL SWITCH HIGH WATER TEMPERATURE SOAC ITEM 500 TSxx.x Rif. P&I
TSH.603 TEMPERATURE CONTROL SWITCH HIGH WATER TEMPERATURE SOAC ITEM 600 TSxx.x Rif. P&I
TSH.901 TEMPERATURE CONTROL SWITCH HIGH WATER TEMPERATURE TANK ITEM 900 TSxx.x Rif. P&I
XY.401 EL-VALVE BLOW DOWN VALVE SOV ITEM 400 XY.x Rif. P&I
XY.402 EL-VALVE INTERCEPTION AIR VALVE XV401 SOV ITEM 401 XY.x Rif. P&I
F.M.: 3x400VAC 50Hz Aux.: 230-24VAC A termini di legge la Babcock Wanson Italiana SpA si riserva la proprietà del presente
CAVENAGO DI BRIANZA ( MB ) disegno e ne vieta l'utilizzazione e la riproduzione o la comunicazione a terzi. Foglio: 28 di 30
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
SA
LICLH.400
PIC.401
LIC.401
TIC.503
TIC.603
1000 mm
H01
1 2 1 2
Q01
800 mm
F.M.: 3x400VAC 50Hz Aux.: 230-24VAC A termini di legge la Babcock Wanson Italiana SpA si riserva la proprietà del presente
CAVENAGO DI BRIANZA ( MB ) disegno e ne vieta l'utilizzazione e la riproduzione o la comunicazione a terzi. Foglio: 29 di 30
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
T01
F06
F07
F08
F09
F01 F03 F05
KM01 KM02
K01 K02 K03 K04 K05 K06 K07 K08 K09 K10 K11 K12
F04
F02
KT01
K21
K13
K14
K15
K16
K17
K18
K19
K20
K22
K23
K24
K26
K29
K25
K27 K28
F.M.: 3x400VAC 50Hz Aux.: 230-24VAC A termini di legge la Babcock Wanson Italiana SpA si riserva la proprietà del presente
CAVENAGO DI BRIANZA ( MB ) disegno e ne vieta l'utilizzazione e la riproduzione o la comunicazione a terzi. Foglio: 30 di 30
MAKING MODERN LIVING POSSIBLE
~,.,.
r
[
-
JIll .... , J
,w.. ~J
~~'I
s
I
1-
~~I [-
l~
l
II
~-- I
~~I
l )~~ ~IP:'"
'-
<l>
~""
--
J
"'"
-/
----------
Pressure switch
RT
Technical brochure
~
Technical brochure Pressure switch, type RT
Contents Page
Description 3
Survey of types, pressu re ranges 3
Technical data and code nos. all types 4
Approval s 5
Technical data and material in contact with medium 6
Dimen sion and wei ght 7
Installatio n 8
Function 9
Function description fail-safe design 10
Pressure switch for liquid level control 10
Applicatio n 11
Pressure switch with adjustable neutral zone 12
Differentialpressure switches 13
RTspare parts and accessories 15
@
2 IC.PD.P10.B4.02-520B3955 DanfossAiS (RA-SMC/mr),04-2010
~
Technical brochure Pressure switch, type RT
I r
~I tral zone regulation. These units are for general
use within the industrial and marine sectors.
I r
The RTseries also covers safety pressure switches
for steam boiler plant.
"" , ~....,
l For installations in which operation is particularly
critical from safety and economic points of view,
the use of fail-safe pressure switches is recommend-
ed. The use of gold-plated contacts is also recom-
...J mended in such installations, provided operation
involves only a few switching cycles or low signal
currents and voltages.
Technical data and code nos. When ordering, please state type and code The type designation for the letters below means:
number. A: Unit suitable for the medium ammonia
L: Unit with neutral zone
I I effective
mechanical
differential
pressu re
PB
pressure
p'
ISO228/1
~!j
pressure)
r""~,.I.
D
0
~;;
g ~o ~~0
0
~d gl!
g;;
Type
I 't;2
SPOT
04 04
'iS2
max. reset
'iS2
min.
04
reset
04
SPOT SPOT 't;2
bar bar bar bar SPDT
-1~0 0.09 ~0.4 7 8 G 3/8 A 017-521566 RT 121
RTl13
0 ~0.3 0.01 ~0.05 0.4 0.5 G 3/8 A 017-519666 RT 113
for manual setting;
0.1 ~1.1 0.07 ~0.16 7 8 G 3/8 A 017-519166 017-519366 RT 112
cover with windows
0.1 ~1.1 0.07 7 8 G 3/8 A 017-519266 RT 112
0.2 ~3 0.08 ~0.25 7 8 G 3/8 A 017-529166 017-529266 RT 110
0.2 ~3 0.08 7 8 G 3/8 A 017-511066 RT 110
-0.8 ~5 0.5 ~1.6 22 25 '/'6-20 UNF 017-524566 RT1
-0.8 ~5 0.5 22 25 '/,,-20 UNF 017-524666 RT1
1)
-0.8 ~5 0.5 ~1.6 22 25 G 3/8 A 017-500166 RT1A
1)
-0.8 ~5 0.5 22 25 G 3/8 A 017-500266 RT1A
1)
-0.8 ~5 1.3 ~2.4 22 25 G 3/8 A 017-500766 RT1A
0.2 ~6 0.25 ~1.2 22 25 G 3/8 A 017-523766 017-524066 RT 200
0.2 ~6 0.25 22 25 G 3/8 A 017-523866 017-523966 RT 200
1~10 0.3 ~1.3 22 25 G 3/8 A 017-520366 017-520066 RT 116
1~10 0.3 22 25 G 3/8 A 017-520466 017-519966 RT 116
4~17 1.2 ~4 22 28 G 3/8 A 017-525566 017-525366 RT5
4~17 1.2 22 28 G 3/8 A 017-50946621 RT5
1)
4~17 1.2 ~4 22 28 G 3/8 A 017-504666' RT5A
RTl16 4~17 1.2 22 28 G 3/8 A
1)
017-50476621 RT5A
for tamper proof; 1)
10~30 1~4 42 47 G 3/8 A 017-529566 017-529666 RT 117
cap and blank cover 1)
Supplied with 06/0 10 mm weld nipple.
'I With seal cap
@
4 IC.PD.P1O.B4.02-520B3955 DanfossAiS (RA-SMC/mr),04-2010
~
Technical brochure Pressure switch, type RT
Technical data and ordering The designation letters mean: B: Safety units with external reset
A: Units suitable for the medium ammonia. S: Safety units with internal reset
W: Units for control purposes.
0
~Ii 0
~" 0
~Ii Type
0 0 0
04 .4 04
Pressure switch for low pressure steam plant (pressure monitoring)- not PEO approved
10.1~1.1 IO.07~0.161 7 I
7
I
GV2A
I
017-518466 I I
RT112 I
Approvals
RTl RT1A RT1AL RTs RT 30AW RT31W RT 33B RTll0 RTl12 RTl13 RTl16 RT l17L RT 260A
RTsA RT 30AB RT31B RT 3SW RTl17 RT 200L RT 262A
RT12l RT 30As RT3ls RT1l2W RT 200 RT 26sA
RT19W RT 32W RT 260AL Approvals
RT19B RT 32B RT 262AL
RT19s RT 263AL
RT 266AL
x x x x x x x x x x x x x CE marked ace. to EN 60947-4/-5
x x x VD Tuv, Germany
x x x x Det Norske Veritas, Norway
x x x x Lloyds Register of Shipping, UK
x x x x x x Germanischer Lloyd, Germany
x x x x x Bureau Veritas, France
x x x x x x x x x x x x x Registro Italiano Navale, Italy
x x x x x x x x x x x x x RMRs, Russian Maritime Register of shipping
x x x x x x x Nippon Kaiji Kyokai, Japan
x x x x x x x x x x x x x CCc, China Compulsory Certificate
Note: in addition we refer to the certificates, the copies of which can be ordered from Danfoss
All RTare
. CE marked in accordance with EN 60947-4/-5 for sale in Europe
. Further, the RT 19, RT 30, RT 35, RT112 W, RT33, RT31 and RT32 series is CE markd in accordance with PED 97/23/EC, category IV, safety
equipment.
@
DanfossAiS (RA-SMClmr),04-2010 IC.PD.P10.B4.02-520B3955 5
~
Technical brochure Pressure switch, type RT
Contact load
Single-pole
Alternating
changeover
current:
switch (5PDT)
00"
OOW
o~
~,
~~
~
~
Fig.6
1
AC-1: 10A.400V on
~1
RT5, 110, 112, 116, 117,200
Special version with tamper
proof cap and blank cover
r/J5
r/J8.5
(Q)@ (Q)(Q)
-
It)
N
I')
-.t
N
v
~:: v
~I
0'"
z'"'
~~
<'i:<
~~.
0<
(Q)(Q)
(Q)(Q)
It)
co co 0
m m 0
N
I')
N N N
v
gj~
~ v ~I
0'"
<~
Z'"'
"",;
",0 ~:! 0<
e'?" 0"'.
~I
~~
0< <~
Z'"'
0<
Weight: approx. 1 kg
@
DanfossAiS (RA-SMClmr),04-2010 IC.PD.P10.B4.02-520B3955 7
~
Technical brochure Pressure switch, type RT
Setting
S. Setting knob The range is set by using the setting knob (5)
9. Range scale while at the same time reading the scale (9). Tools
19. Differential setting
must be used to set pressure switches fitted with
disc
a seal cap.
In units having a fixed differential, the difference
between cut-in and cut-out pressures is of course
19 determined. On units having an adjustable
differential the front cover must be removed. The
differential disc (19) must be set in accordance
with the diaphragm.
Fig.2
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
RT1 O. 0.7 .9 1. 1.3 1.5 1. Selection of differential
RT1A bar
(017-5001)
,. To ensure that the plant functions properly, a
RT1A 1.5 .7 1. 2.1 .32.
(017-5007)
bar suitable differential pressure is necessary. Too
,.
RT5 .. 2.0 2. .. 3.2 3.. 40
bar small a differential will give rise to short running
RT5A
O. .4 0.5 O. .7 0.. 0.9 1.
periods with a risk of hunting. Too high a differential
RT31W bar
(017-5267) will result in large pressure oscillations.
RT3ZN O. 1.2 .. 2. 2.4 .8 30
(017-5247)
bar
RT113
O. 1 .02 .03 O. O.
bar Differential scale values are guiding
0.0 5 0025 .035 O. 5
O. O. 0.7 .9 1.1 1.
RT116 bar
0.5 0.4 .. .. 10 1.
RT200 bar
10 13 ,. 20 25 35 40
RT117 bar
Min. Max.
. . 3. 4. 5. . . 7. 8. 9. .
~1 2 10
00
cl
Fig.3 Obtainable differential disc scale
@
8 IC.PD.P10.B4.02-520B3955 DanfossAiS (RA-SMC/mr),04-2010
~
Technical brochure Pressure switch, type RT
Function a. RT19,RT30, and pressure switches with max. I. Alarm for rising pressure given at the set
reset range value.
When the pressure exceeds the set range value, II. Alarm for falling pressure given at the set
contacts 1-4 make and contact 1-2 brake. The range value minus the differential.
contacts changeover to their initial position when Units with max. reset can only be reset at a
the pressure fallsto the range value minus the pressure corresponding to the set range value
differential (see fig. 4). minus the differential, or a lower pressure.
v
II
04 04 gJ~
1C>"""""4
1~2 02 1~2
i~
b. All other RT pressure switches I. Alarm for falling pressure given at the set range
When the pressure falls to the set range value, value.
contacts 1-2 make and contacts 1-4 brake. The II. Alarm for rising pressure given at the set range
contacts changeover to their original position value plus the differential.
when the pressure again rises to the set range Units with min. reset can only be reset at a
plus the differential (see fig. 5). pressure corresponding to the set range value
plus the differential.
II
04 ~~
1C>"""""4
1~2 1C>"""""4
02 02 ~~
Pressure switches for liquid The RT 113 pressure switch can be used to control 3. Connection to the side of the tank with the RT 113
level control RT 113 the liquid level in open tanks. Fig.6 shows in below the liquid level
principle, four different types of installation. Where possible, this form of connection should
be used. Ifan air-absorbing liquid like oil is
1.With air bell (see "Accessories") involved, it is preferable to 1 and 2. The resulting
For control purpose, the air bell should be installed range setting is the distance from the liquid surface
20 to 40 mm below the lowest liquid level. In to the centre of the diaphragm housing.
addition, the tube between the RT113 and the
air bell must be absolutely airtight. Ifonly an 4. Connection in the tank with the RT 113above the
indication is required, the bell can be placed 100 liquid level
mm below the max. level. The RT113 must be set This method is for use with air-absorbing liquids
at 0 cm wg and the differential disc on 1. where connection type 3 is not possible. The
shortest horizontal tube length is determined as
2. Connection to the side of the tank with the RT 113 described in 2. A shut-off valve is installed
above the liquid level between the oil tank and water reservoir shown
The horizontal tube A must have a certain length so that impurities can be drained from the water
in relation to the vertical tube Bin order to reservoir through a bottom drain plug. Fresh water
ensure reliable control. The length ofA can be can then be poured into the reservoir through a
found from fig. 7, using Band the range setting filling connector in its top.
pressure C.
@
10 IC.PD.P10.B4.02-S20B39SS DanfossAiS (RA-SMC/mr),04-2010
~
Technical brochure Pressure switch, type RT
mB
"''"
ON
""-
~~ 10 /I V
..,
~~
CO<
0" 0-
9
8
-11;
.J:I
0 ;j '"'"
-0'
~~=to~~tf~~
01- (jIfo' ~::? 0':3
~I
~~
c""
u (J (J'fIr,"(JI "1 cf
7 "
17-4013 m 6
Ex.
5 ,/
11I1
m 4
-------
------- 3
------
2
II/-,
0 1~~ A
1.5 1 2 3 4 5 6
Fig.6 Fig. 7
Application N
.. 5 RT-Lpressure switches are fitted with a switch
'"
g:~
with an adjustable neutral zone. This enables the
0..,
units to be used for floating control.
~~
The terminology involved is explained below.
9
Floating control
A form of discontinuous control where the
correcting element (e.g. valve, damper, or similar)
moves towards one extreme position at a rate
independent ofthe magnitude ofthe error when
the error exceeds a definit positive value, and
towards the opposite extreme position when the
error exceeds a definite negative value.
40
Hunting
Periodic variations ofthe controlled variable from
the fixed reference.
5. Setting knob
9. Rangescale
Neutral zone
40. Neutral zone disc
The interval in the controlled variable in which
the correcting element does not respond
(see fig. 13).
Setting of neutral zone The range is set using the setting knob (5) fig. 8 The required neutral zone can be found in the
while reading the range scale (9).The pressure set diagram for the unit concerned. The position at
is the break pressure for contacts 1-4 (see fig. 13). which the neutral zone disc (40) must be set can
be read from the lower scale in the diagram. The
function can be seen in fig. 13.
RT1AL
p81
. ~. ! . '! . 2 pel 1088420
RT117L
p.'
b...
s.<M.03.02.01!J
. . . ..
2 1 0
Cl
RT200L
pel
......
1088420
......
bar 1.00.80.80.40.20 RT5AL
........ ;
bar1.:,.;;.8.0.; mP.
".5"
035 02010
.....
pel 0.8 0.8 0.4 0.2 0
I 1000
I 1200
,
!~
m
12-:
2
'22 '2. 8
130 13.0
-
." ,,
10
.....
141
281
401
11
12
13
I 100
I
I -- -- . '
'
,
,7 .. ,,
1400
,, bar~mP.
551 14 I
, 2401
]
481 I3 1300 pal I,
.2 ~
1700 en"":
801 I 4 1400 , "' , 701 15 I
701 I I 1500 ,, ~ ... 9 40... en'"
'"
OU') UI 18
~kPo
I 800 ,,
~ :o "
pelil bar. kP. , polO 10 DIFF.OMRADE/DIFF. 121'-~ n IIITII bI !z r!. polo ,
' en"; RANGEIDIFF. BEREICH
~ :c . "[210en~
"'
~
""'8
en'" POSITION
9 4O
'"2"0 en;;; 0'"
3 2
"-[ en...
z...
~
:o OMRADEIRANGEI
OMRADEIRANGEI
BEREICH
Fig.9
~ POSITION
een'"
'(
z to-.
~ :;c
BEREICH
Fig. 10
POSITION <-
c<
Fig.11
OMMDEIRANGE/ 3
BEREICH
Fig.12
POSITION <-
c "<
2 ~7
z
LJp
NZ= NEUTRALZONE/DEADZONE
c, p.1g3 2 1 0
RT110L
.....
bor :'20.,: 0.1 ~.O5 ~
Range setting kP.20151050
Inlet pressure ,,
'V\Jl ,
,
Differential (mechanical
~ ..
,
differential) corresponds to the :: :~: ~~ .,
least neutral zone setting. a
,
]
301 12.0 Il2OO
12.5 1250
.:.
a:The neutral zone.lnlet
40' 13.0 1300 ,, IN
paIg ,
pressure may vary within this ~ 943.210
kP. It)
"":
interval without resulting in a
make function 1-2 or 1-4. OMRADE::~ ~~
"""'\;111:'
BEREICH ~ POSITION ~~
C-<
Fig. 13
Example
Together with a VLT@static frequency converter, RT
200L neutral zone pressure switches can be used
for the infinite control of a pump in, for example, a ~.;
;>
F 0
~ID
pressure boosting plant. o~
~I
z~
<~
In this case, the pump must be up and down- 0<
Application Control and monitoring of pressure differentials between the counteracting bellows elements and
A differential pressure control is a pressure the set scale value. This unit is also available with
controlled switch that cuts in and cuts out the an adjustable neutralzone (likethe RT-L which is
current dependent on the pressure differential described on page 12.
5. Setting disc
9. Range scale
Note:
When installing, the low
pressure connection (LP)
must always be upwards
Fig.1s
NZ= NEUTRALZONEIDEADZONE
NZ= NEUTRALZONEIDEADZONE NZ= NEUTRALZONE/DEADZONE NZ= NEUTRAL20NEIDEADZONE
pal 141210884 20
......
pal543210
psi 3.53
. 2 1 0
. . pal 3.n.!.!.2
RT260ALbOf
......
1.:~.8:.:0~:0.; ~ RT262AL
bar ........
0.3 0.2 0.1 a
RT263AL
~.: ~.,' ~
b.or ...... RT266ALb.or
......
0.250.2 0.1 0
kPa 100 80 80 40 20 0 kPa 30 20 10 0 kPa 25201510 5 0 kPo 252015105 0
,, ,, ,, ,
, , :,
8'
10'5 50 , 1.51 10.1 .1 0 ,' 1.5- .0.1 .'0 ,,
.,00
181
241
321
.'.0
IUS
12.0
.,50
.~C!C!
. 41 10.3 13 0
0
81 -0.5 I_I!.
.0.7 .7 0
,
4. JQ.3 .30
81
JQ.5 IJKl
.
- , 4
3.~: :~'2
8.01 10.4
'~0
140
,
12.5 1250 - , 121
10.8 18 0 10.7 .70 , 8.01 10.8 1M -- ~
',
401 13.0 1300 , 181 .'.1 .,1 0 ' 121 0
481 13.5 1350 .;, ', 141 10.8 .80 .., 12.01
:8:: ::8 ,,
11.3 1'130 .'.0 .,00 ,,
581
pel
14.0
bar kPa
..00
~ ,,
, '"
...
201
pel
.'.5
bar
1150
kPa
,,
4 3 ,2 1 0
...
'"
.
pal b.o kPo
4 3 I 2 10
'"
~
pel bar ~ kPa
4
,
3: 2 10
~
'"
~
"40.3,210 940 B 40 or-
DJFF.OMRADEIDIFF~
RANGEIDIFF.BEREJ~H ~ P051TION
"'0
",r-
0'"
"-I
Zr-
...:-
0"':
8 40
'"--
DlFF.OMRADEIDIFF.
3 2
RANGE/DIFF.BEREICH
~ POSITION
~:g
~ 'f
Z ....
~ ;;;:
DIFF.OMRADEIDIFF.
RANGEIDIFF.BEREICH ~ 3
POSITION
2
",0
"'''':
0 ,
~ ....
"'
~ =<
DIFF.OMRADE/DIFF.
RANGE/DIFF.BEREICH
~ 3
POSITION
2 ~~;c
c
Fig.16
@
13 IC.PD.P10.B4.02-520B3955 DanfossAiS (RA-SMC/mr),04-2010
~
Technical brochure Pressure switch, type RT
Function a. Units with changeover switch (SPOT) I. Contacts make when differential pressure falls
If the differential pressure falls below the set below the range scale setting.
value, contacts 1-2 make and contacts 1-4 break.
Contacts 1-2 break again and contacts 1-4 make II. Contacts make when pressure rises above the
when the differential pressure has risen to the set range scale setting plus the fixed mechanical
range value plus the fixed contact differential. differential.
II
04 ~~
~m
1~4 1~4
1~2
°2 °2 ~~
b. Units with adjustable neutral zone (SPOTNP) The contact function can be summed up as
If the differential pressure rises above the set value follows:
plus the differential, contacts 1-4 make.
If the pressure falls by the amount of the differential I. Setting disc set for falling differential pressure.
(which is fixed in this unit), contacts 1-4 break.
If the pressure falls to the neutral zone minus the II. Neutral zone disc set for rising differential
differential, contacts 1-2 make. When the differential pressure.
pressure rises again by an amount corresponding to
the differential, contacts 1-2 break again.
LIp
~:!
04 04 04 0 4 04
10-- 1~ 10-- 1 10-- ~~
02 °2 "'-02 02
°2
Range setting -----
Inlet pressure 'UUl
Mechanical
differential
~
Differential a
(mechanical
differential)
corresponds to
the least neutral
zone setti ng.
a: The neutral zone and inlet differential
pressure may vary within this interval
without resulting in a make function 1-2
or 1-4.
Fig. 18. Contact function, setting of neutral zone
Example 1 Example 2
When the differential pressure exceeds 1.3 bar, a The speed of a circulation pump must be controlled
filter needs cleaning. The static pressure over the to give a constant differential pressure of 10m wg
filter is lObar. in a heating plant. The static plant pressure is 4 bar.
According to the ordering table on page 4, the The choice is an RT 262AL.
choice is an RT 260A (the RT 262A has a max. The differential disc (5) fig. 15 page 13, must be set
operating pressure on the low pressure side (LP) of at 1 bar (10m wg) minus the fixed differential of 0.1
6 bar and is therefore not suitable for this applica- bar, i.e. 0.9 bar. The neutral zone disc is factory-set
tion). (marked in red).
Setting: Since a signal is required for rising differen-
tial pressure, the setting becomes 1.3-0.3 bar = 1.0
bar.
@
DanfossAiS (RA-SMClmr),04-2010 IC.PD.P10.B4.02-520B3955 14
~
Technical brochure Pressure switch, type RT
04 Alternating current
Single-pole changeover switch (SPOT) with gold
AC-1 (ohmic): 10A.400V
plated (oxide-free) contact surfaces.
1~2 AC-3 (inductive): 2A.400V
Increases cut-in reliability on alarm and monitoring
Standard AC-14/1S 1 A. 400 V 017-424066
systems, etc.
Blocked rotor: 14A.400V
Snap action changeover contacts.
Direct current:
Terminal board proof against leakage current.
DC-13/14: 12W, 230V
Alternating current:
AC-1 (ohmic): 10A.400V
AC-3 (inductive): 3 A. 400 V
AC-14/1S 2A.400V
Single-pole changeover switch that cuts in two Blocked rotor: 20 A. 400 V
Cuts in two circuits '~4 02 circuits simultaneously on rising pressure. Direct current:
017-403466
simultaneously Snap action changeover contacts. DC-13/14: 12W,230V
Terminal board proof against leakage current.
If current is led through contacts 2 and
*
4, i.e. terminals 2 and 4 connected but
not 1, max. permissible load is increased
to 90W, 220V - - -.
02
With non-snap action Single-pole changeover with non-snap action Alternating or direct current:
164 017-018166
changeover contacts changeover gold plated (oxide-free) contacts. 2SVA.24V
'} At load types with low currents/voltages contact failure The switch contacts are shown in the position they
may occure on the silver contacts because of oxidation. assume on falling pressure/temperature, i.e. after
In systems where such a contact failure is of great downward movement of the RT main spindle.
importance (alarm etc.), gold plated contacts are
The setting pointer of the control shows the scale value
recommended.
Contact systems for neutral zone units are not at which contact changeover occurs on falling pressure/
available as spare parts. Exchange not possible, as the temperature. An exception is switch no. 017-403066
contact system adjustment is adjusted to the other with max. reset where the setting pointer shows the
parts ofthe unit. scale value at which contact changeover occurs on
rising pressure.
Switches
Version Symbol Description Contact rating Code no.
1~2
For manual reset of unit after contact changeover on Direct current
With max. reset rising pressure. DC-13/14: 12W,230V 017-404866
Gold plated (oxide-free) contact surfaces
For control aoolication
max. 100 mA / 30 V a.c./ d.c.
min. 1 mA / S V a.c./ d.c.
Cover
[JD Covers:
Colour:
Polyamide
Pale grey RAL 7035
With window
Without window
5
5
017-436166
017-436266
Setting knob
~ Replacement Pale grey Ral 7035
30 017-436366
Seal cap
0 Seal cap to replace setting
Setting can only be altered
knob
with
so that
tools
Black 20 017-436066
Seal screws
cover
for
and seal cap
i 1 +1 017-425166
For all RT pressure switches with damping coil or other longer connections
Clamping band 10 017-420466
L= 392 mm
Conncetor with Pipe thread ISO 228/1, G3/8 connector, nipple and AL washer (10 mm ext. 6.5
nipple @~~ mm into diam.) for welding or brazing on to steel or copper tubing
5 017-436866
Connector
~ 7/16 - 20 UNF connector for ';4 copper tube, brass, span of jaws 16 10 011L 1101
Reducer
00 Pipe thread ISO 228/1, GY2Ax G3/8, steel, span of jaws 22 017-421966
Adaptor
oij) Pipe thread ISO 228/1, G3/8 x3/8 - 27 NPT with copper washer, brass,
060-333466
.0
span of jaws 22
Pipe thread ISO 228/1, G3/8 A x ';4 - 18 NPT with copper washer, brass,
Adaptor 060-333566
span of jaws 22
Adaptor
olP Pipe thread ISO 228/1, G3/8 x ';4 - 18 NPT with copper
span of jaws 22
washer, brass,
060-333666
Adaptor
Gb Pipe thread ISO 228/1, G3/8 A - G ';4 A, brass, span of jaws 17 060-324066
Adaptor ~ Pipe thread ISO 228/1, G3/8 A x R3/8 (ISO 7/1) brass, span of jaws 17 060-324166
0.50 m
~
Damping coil with 7/16 - 20 UNF connectors. Reducer code no. 017 -420566 is 060-019066
1.00 m
necessary if the damping coil is to be used with RT units having a pipe thread 060-019166
Damping coil 1.50 m
ISO 228/1, G3/8 connection. Damping coils with several lengths of capillary 060-019266
2.00 m
tubes are available. Please contact Danfoss. 060-019366
~
"
Pipe thread ISO 228/1, damping coils with G3/8 connector and 1.5 m copper
Damping coil 060-104766
capillary tube. Standard washers are supplied.
Armoured Pipe thread ISO 228/1, damping coil with G3/8 connector and 1 m copper
060-333366
damping coil capillary tube. Standard washers are supplied.
Air bell, 62 mm diam. ext. x 204 mm length. Pipe thread ISO 228/1,
Air bell for liquid
level control RT 113
i:::I@~.c\
U ) G3/8 connector and nipple (10 mm o.d./ 6.5 mm I.d.) for welding or brazing on 017-401366
to steel or copper tubing. The air bell is of brass CuZn 37, W.no. 2.0321.
Danfoss can accept no responsibility for possible errors in catalogues, brochuresand other printed material.Danfoss reserves the right to alter its products without notice.This also applies to products
already on order provided that such alterations can be made without subsequential changes being necessary in specifications already agreed.
All trademarks in this material are property of the respective companies. Danfoss and the Danfoss logotype are trademarks of Danfoss AlS. All rights reserved.
@
16 IC.PD.P10.B4.02-520B3955 DanfossAiS (RA-SMC/mr),04-2010
Current terms and conditions apply. Operating instructions
Details are available on ... Betriebsanleitung
Mode d’emploi
Es gelten unsere aktuellen Verkaufs- Manual de instrucciones
und Lieferbedingungen siehe unter ...
S-10, S-11
Toute commande est assujettie à nos
conditions de ventes et de fournitures Pressure transmitter /
dans leur dernière version en vigueur, voir Druckmessumformer /
sous ... Transmetteur de pression /
Transmisor de presión
Se aplican nuestras condiciones actuales
de venta y de suministro, que se pueden
consultar en ...
www.wika.de
1604457.14 GB/D/F/E 12/2009
S-10 S-11
WIKA Alexander Wiegand SE & Co. KG
Alexander-Wiegand-Straße 30
63911 Klingenberg/Germany
Tel +49 / (0) 93 72/132-295
Fax +49 / (0) 93 72/132-706
E-Mail support-tronic@wika.de
www.wika.de
Contents / Inhalt / Contenu / Contenido GB D F E 1. Important details for your information / 2. A quick overview for you GB
Contents Page 3-18 GB Contenu Page 35-50 F 1. Important details for your information
Read these operating instructions before installing and starting the pressure transmitter. Keep
1. Important details for your information 1. Informations inportantes
the operating instructions in a place that is accessible to all users at any time.
2. A quick overview for you 2. Aperçu rapide The following installation and operating instructions have been compiled by us with great care
3. Signs, symbols and abbreviations 3. Explication des symboles,abréviations but it is not feasible to take all possible applications into consideration. These installation and
4. Function 4. Fonction operation instructions should meet the needs of most pressure measurement applications. If
5. For your safety 5. Pour votre sécurité questions remain regarding a specific application, you can obtain further information:
6. Packaging 6. Emballage Via our Internet address www.wika.de / www.wika.com
The product data sheet is designated as PE 81.01
7. Starting, operation 7. Mise en service, exploitation
Contact WIKA for additional technical support (+49) 9372 / 132-295
8. Adjustment of zero point / span 8. Réglage du zéro / gain With special model number, e.g. S-10000 or S-11000, please note specifications in the deli-
9. Maintenance, accessories 9. Entretien, accessoires very note.
10. Trouble shooting 10. Elimination de perturbations If the serial number and/or the 2D code on the hexagon gets illegible (e.g. by mechanical
11. Storage, disposal 11. Stockage, mise au rebut damage or repainting), the retraceability of the instrument is not possible any more.
WIKA pressure transmitters are carefully designed and manufactured using state-of-the-art
technology. Every component undergoes strict quality and environmental inspection before
Inhalt Seite 19-34 D Contenido Paginás 51-66 E assembly and each instrument is fully tested prior to shipment. Our environmental manage-
1. Wichtiges zu Ihrer Information 1. Detalles importantes para su información ment system is certified to DIN EN ISO 14001.
2. Der schnelle Überblick für Sie 2. Resumen rápido para usted Use of the products in accordance with the intended use:
3. Zeichenerklärungen, Abkürzungen 3. Signos, símbolos y abreviaciones Use the pressure transmitter to transform the pressure into an electrical signal.
Knowledge required
4. Funktion 4. Función
Install and start the pressure transmitter only if you are familiar with the relevant regulations
5. Zu Ihrer Sicherheit 5. Para su seguridad and directives of your country and if you have the qualification required. You have to be
6. Verpackung 6. Embalaje acquainted with the rules and regulations on measurement and control technology and elec-
7. Inbetriebnahme, Betrieb 7. Puesta en servicio, funcionamiento tric circuits, since this pressure transmitter is „electrical equipment“ as defined by EN 50178.
Warning
! severe injuries. the applicable European
directives.
! performance and specific measurement conditions prior to installing and
starting the instrument.
Warning
Potential danger of life or CSA Observe the relevant national regulations (e.g.: EN 50178) and observe the
of severe injuries due to Canadian Standard Asso- applicable standards and directives for special applications (e.g. with
catapulting parts. ciation dangerous media such as acetylene, flammable gases or liquids and toxic
Warning
Potential danger of burns The product was tested and gases or liquids and with refrigeration plants or compressors). If you do not
due to hot surfaces. certified by CSA Internati- observe the appropriate regulations, serious injuries and/or damage
onal. It complies with the can occur!
Caution applicable Canadien stan- Open pressure connections only after the system is without pressure!
Notice, important informa- dards on safety. Please make sure that the pressure transmitter is only used within the overload threshold
tion, malfunction. limit all the time!
2-wire Two connection lines are intended for the voltage supply. Observe the ambient and working conditions outlined in section 7 „Technical data”.
The supply current is the measurement signal. Observe the technical data for the use of the pressure transmitter in connection with
3-wire Two connection lines are intended for the voltage supply. aggressive / corrosive media and for the avoidance of mechanical hazards.
One connection line is intended for the measurement signal. Ensure that the pressure transmitter is only operated in accordance with the provisions i.e.
U+ Positive supply connection as described in the following instructions.
U- Negative supply connection Do not interfere with or change the pressure transmitter in any other way than described in
S+ Positive measurement connection these operating instructions.
Remove the pressure transmitter from service and mark it to prevent it from being used
4. Function again accidentally, if it becomes damaged or unsafe for operation
S-10: Pressure connection with internal diaphragm(standard version). Take precautions with regard to remaining media in removed pressure transmitter.
S-11: Pressure connection with flush diaphragm for highly viscous or Remaining media in the pressure port may be hazardous or toxic!
Have repairs performed by the manufacturer only.
≤ 0.5 7)
{0.25} 6) 7) Wiring protection
6)
Accuracy { } for pressure ranges ≥ 0.25 bar (100 INWC). Short-circuit proofness S+ towards U-
7)
Including non-linearity, hysteresis, zero point and full scale error (corresponds to Reverse polarity protection U+ towards U-
error of measurement per IEC 61298-2). Approx. 0.2 (approx. 0.4 lb)
Weight kg
Adjusted in vertical mounting position with lower pressure connection. Approx. 0.3 with option accuracy 0.25% of span due to longer case
Non-linearity % of span ≤ 0.2 (BFSL) according to IEC 61298-2 { } Items in curved brackets are optional extras for additional price.
12 WIKA Operating instructions/Betriebsanleitung/Mode d'emploi/Instrucciones de servicio S-10, S-11 WIKA Operating instructions/Betriebsanleitung/Mode d'emploi/Instrucciones de servicio S-10, S-11 13
7. Starting, operation GB 8. Adjustment of zero point / span GB
Specifications Oxygen version of model S-10 8. Adjustment of zero point / span (only for pressure transmitter with clamping nut)
Pressure ranges bar As of 0 ... 0.1 / 50 INWC
We do not recommend to adjust the span potentiometer. It is used for adjustment ex
Type of pressure Gauge pressure
factory and should not be adjusted by you unless you have adequate calibration equip-
ment at your disposal (at least three times more accurate than the instrument being
Materials
tested).
Wetted parts 316 Ti (up to 40 bar / 600 psi F 1058)
Internal transmission fluid 1) Halocarbon oil Make sure wires are not cut or pinche
1)
Not for model with pressure ranges > 25 bar / 300 psi during disassembly and reassembly of
Female B
Permissible temperature of the connector.
connector
Medium -20 ... +60 °C -4 ... +140 °F Remove the female connector. Open
the pressure transmitter by detaching Sealing
When designing your plant, take into account that the stated values (e.g.burst pressure, the clamping nut (see Fig. A ). Carefully Clamping
over pressure safety) apply depending on the material, thread and sealing element used. remove the male connector from the nut
case.
Adjust the zero point (Z) (see Fig. B ) by Male
connector
generating the lower limit of the pressure
range. Sealing
Adjust the span (S) by generating the S = Span
Functional test
higher limit of the pressure range.
The output signal must be proportional to the pressure. If not, this might point to a Case with Z = Zero
Check the zero point.
damage of the diaphragm. In that case refer to chapter 10 „Troubleshooting“. If the zero point is incorrect, repeat A
pressure
connection
Open pressure connections only after the system is without pressure! procedure as required.
Observe the ambient and working conditions outlined in section 7 „Technical Reassemble the instrument carefully.
data". Make sure all sealings and o-rings are
Warning
Please make sure that the pressure transmitter is only used within the over- not damaged and correctly installed to
14 WIKA Operating instructions/Betriebsanleitung/Mode d'emploi/Instrucciones de servicio S-10, S-11 WIKA Operating instructions/Betriebsanleitung/Mode d'emploi/Instrucciones de servicio S-10, S-11 15
9. Maintenance, accessories /10. Trouble shooting GB 10. Trouble shooting GB
9. Maintenance, accessories Failure Possible cause Procedure
WIKA pressure transmitters require no maintenance.
Have repairs performed by the manufacturer only. No output signal Cable break Check connections and cable
Accessories No/incorrect voltage supply or current Adjust the voltage supply to correspond
spike with the Operating Instructions *)
For details about the accessories (e. g. connectors), please refer to WIKA‘s price list, WIKA‘s
Incorrectly wired (e.g. Connected as Follow pin assignment (see Instrument
product catalog on CD or or contact our sales department. No/False output signal
2-wire instead of 3-wire system) Label / Operating Instructions)
Output signal unchanged after change Mechanical overload through over- Replace instrument; if failure reoccurs,
in pressure pressure consult the manufacturer *)
Mechanical overload through over- Replace instrument; if failure reoccurs,
Signal span dropping off/too small
10. Trouble shooting pressure consult the manufacturer *)
Open pressure connections only after the system is without pressure! Diaphragm is damaged, e.g. through
impact, abrasive/agressive media; Contact the manufacturer and replace
corrosion of diaphragm/pressure the instrument
connector; transmission fluid missing.
Warning
Seal/Sealing face damaged/conta-
Clean the seal/sealing face, possibly
Take precautions with regard to remaining media in removed pressure trans- minated, seal mounted incorrectly,
replace the seal.
!
Warning
mitters. Remaining media in the pressure port may be hazardous or
toxic! Signal span erratic / incorrect
threads crossed
Electromagnetic interference source in Shield the device; shield the cables;
the vicinity, e.g. inverter drive remove the interference source
Remove the pressure transmitter from service and mark it to prevent it from
Ensure permissible temperatures as per
being used again accidentally, if it becomes damaged or unsafe for opera- Working temperature too high/too low
the Operating Instructions
tion. Instrument not grounded Ground instrument
Have repairs performed by the manufacturer only. Violent fluctuations in the process
Damping; consult with manufacturer
Do not insert any pointed or hard objects into the pressure port for cleaning to prevent media pressure
damage to the diaphragm of the pressure connection. Abnormal zero point signal Working temperature too high/too low
Ensure permissible temperatures as per
the Operating Instructions
16 WIKA Operating instructions/Betriebsanleitung/Mode d'emploi/Instrucciones de servicio S-10, S-11 WIKA Operating instructions/Betriebsanleitung/Mode d'emploi/Instrucciones de servicio S-10, S-11 17
10. Trouble shooting / 11. Storage, disposal GB 1. Wichiges zu Ihrer Information / 2. Schneller Überblick D
If the problem persists, contact our sales department. 1. Wichtiges zu Ihrer Information
USA, Canada Lesen Sie diese Betriebsanleitung vor Montage und Inbetriebnahme des Druckmessgerätes.
If the problem continues, contact WIKA or an authorized agent for assistance. If the pres- Bewahren Sie die Betriebsanleitung an einem für alle Benutzer jederzeit zugänglichen Ort auf.
sure transmitter must be returned obtain an RMA (return material authorization) number and Die nachfolgenden Einbau- und Betriebshinweise haben wir mit Sorgfalt zusammengestellt.
shipping instructions from the place of purchase. Be sure to include detailed information about Es ist jedoch nicht möglich, alle erdenklichen Anwendungsfälle zu berücksichtigen. Sollten Sie
the problem. Pressure transmitters received by WIKA without a valid RMA number will not be Hinweise für Ihre spezielle Aufgabenstellung vermissen, können Sie hier weitere Informationen
accepted. finden:
Process material certificate (Contamination declaration for returned goods) Über unsere Internet-Adresse www.wika.de / www.wika.com
Purge / clean dismounted instruments before returning them in order to protect our employees Die Bezeichnung des zugehörigen Datenblattes ist PE 81.01
and the environment from any hazard caused by adherent remaining media. Anwendungsberater: (+49) 9372/132-295
Bei Sondertypennummer, z.B. S-10000 oder S-11000, beachten Sie die Spezifikationen
Service of instruments can only take place safely when a Product Return Form has been
gemäß Lieferschein.
submitted and fully filled-in. This Return Form contains information on all materials with which
Wird die Seriennummer und/oder der 2D-Code auf dem Sechskant unleserlich (z. B. durch
the instrument has come into contact, either through installation, test purposes, or cleaning.
mechanische Beschädigung oder Übermalen), ist eine Rückverfolgbarkeit nicht mehr möglich.
You can find the Product Return Form on our internet site (www.wika.de / www.wika.com).
Die in der Betriebsanleitung beschriebenen WIKA-Druckmessgeräte werden nach den
neuesten Erkenntnissen konstruiert und gefertigt. Alle Komponenten unterliegen während der
11. Storage, disposal Fertigung strengen Qualitäts- und Umweltkriterien. Unser Umweltmanagementsystem ist nach
When storing or disposing of the pressure transmitter, take precautions with DIN EN ISO 14001 zertifiziert.
! regard to remaining media in removed pressure transmitters. We recom-
mend cleaning the transmitter properly and carefully. Remaining media in
Bestimmungsgemäße Produktverwendung
Warning Verwenden Sie den Druckmessumformer, um Druck in ein elektrisches Signal zu wandeln.
the pressure port may be hazardous or toxic!
Ihre erforderlichen Kenntnisse
Storage
Montieren und nehmen Sie das Druckmessgerät nur in Betrieb, wenn Sie mit den zutreffenden
Mount the protection cap when storing the pressure transmitter in order to prevent any landesspezifischen Richtlinien vertraut sind und die entsprechende Qualifikation besitzen. Sie
damage to the diaphragm (S-11). müssen mit den Kenntnissen von Mess- und Regeltechnik sowie elektrischen Stromkreisen
Disposal vertraut sein, da das Druckmessgerät ein „elektrisches Betriebsmittel“ nach EN 50178 ist. Je
sitzt und dass die Dichtungen vorhanden und nicht beschädigt sind. Ziehen Sie die Aderquerschnitt bis max. 1,5 mm2 - 0,5 mm2 (AWG 20)
Verschraubung fest und überprüfen Sie den korrekten Sitz der Dichtungen, um die 6-8 mm
Schutzart zu gewährleisten. Kabeldurchmesser (Schiffszulassung: - 6,8 mm
10 bis 14 mm)
Stellen Sie bei Kabelausgängen sicher, dass am Ende des Kabels keine Feuchtigkeit
eintritt. Schutzart nach IEC 60 529 IP 65 IP 67 IP 67 oder IP 68
Die angegebenen Schutzarten gelten nur im gesteckten Zustand mit Leitungssteckern
entsprechender Schutzart.
1. Lösen Sie die Schraube (1). Berstdruck bar 96 400 550 800 1000 1200 1700 2) 2400 2) 3000
(6)
2. Lösen Sie die Kabelverschraubung (2). Dichtung
{Unterdruck, Überdruck, +/- , sowie Absolutdruck erhältlich}.
3. Ziehen Sie Winkelgehäuse (5)mit Klemm- 1)
Nur für Typ S-10 gültig.
block (6) vom Gerät ab. Griffring, 2)
Bei Typ S-11: Der Tabellenwert gilt ausschließlich bei Abdichtung mittels
Technische Daten Typ S-10,unterhalb
Dichtring S-11 vom Sechskant. Andernfalls gilt max. 1500 bar.
4. Hebeln Sie mit dem Schraubendreher in Gerätestecker(Stift),
die Montageöffnung (D), so dass Sie den Gehäuse mit Werkstoff
Klemmblock (6) aus dem Winkelgehäuse (5) Druckanschluss Messstoffberührte Teile (Andere Werkstoffe siehe WIKA Druckmittler-Programm)
herausdrücken. Drücken Sie nicht den » Druckanschluss 316 Ti, S-11: O-Ring NBR 3) {FPM/FKM}
Klemmblock (6) durch die Schraubenöffnung (1) bzw. Kabelverschraubung (2) heraus, » Drucksensor 316 Ti (ab 40 bar 13-8 PH)
sonst beschädigen Sie die Dichtungen des Winkelgehäuses. Gehäuse CrNi-Stahl
5. Wählen Sie den Leitungsaußendurchmesser passend zur Kabeldurchführung des Winkel Interne Übertragungsflüssigkeit 4)
Synthetisches Öl
gehäuses. Schieben Sie das Kabel durch Kabelverschraubung (2), Ring (3), Dichtung (4) 3)
O-Ring aus FPM/FKM bei Typ S-11 mit integrierter Kühlstrecke.
und Winkelgehäuse (5). 4)
Nicht vorhanden bei Typ S-10 für Messbereiche > 25 bar
6. Schließen Sie die Kabelenden entsprechend der Belegungszeichnung in den Anschluß
Hilfsenergie U+ U+ in VDC 10 < U+ ≤ 30 (14 … 30 bei Ausgang 0 … 10 V)
klemmen des Klemmblocks (6) an.
7. Drücken Sie das Winkelgehäuse (5) auf den Klemmblock (6). Ausgangssignal und zulässige RA in Ohm 4 … 20 mA, 2-Leiter RA ≤ (U+ – 10 V) / 0,02 A
8. Verschrauben Sie das Kabel mit der Kabelverschraubung (2). Achten Sie darauf, dass die max. ohmsche Bürde RA 0 … 20 mA, 3-Leiter RA ≤ (U+ – 3 V) / 0,02 A
26 WIKA Operating instructions/Betriebsanleitung/Mode d'emploi/Instrucciones de servicio S-10, S-11 WIKA Operating instructions/Betriebsanleitung/Mode d'emploi/Instrucciones de servicio S-10, S-11 27
7. Inbetriebnahme, Betrieb D 7. Inbetriebnahme, Betrieb D
Technische Daten Typ S-10, S-11 Technische Daten Typ S-10, S-11
Isolationsspannung VDC 500 5) CE- Kennzeichen
5)
NEC Class 02 Spannungsversorgung (Leistungsbegrenzung max. 100 VA Druckgeräterichtlinie 97/23/EG
auch im Fehlerzustand)
2004/108/EG, EN 61326 Emission (Gruppe 1, Klasse B) und
EMV-Richtlinie
Genauigkeit % d. Spanne ≤ 0,25 {0,125} 6) (BFSL) Störfestigkeit (industrieller Bereich)
≤ 0,5 7) {0,25} 6) 7) Schockbelastbarkeit g 1000 nach IEC 60068-2-27 (Schock mechanisch)
6)
Genauigkeit { } für Messbereiche ≥ 0,25 bar (100 INWC). Vibrationsbelastbarkeit g 20 nach IEC 60068-2-6 (Vibration bei Resonanz)
7)
Einschließlich Nichtlinearität, Hysterese, Nullpunkt- und Endwertabweichung Elektrische Schutzarten
(entspricht Messabweichung nach IEC 61298-2).
Kurzschlussfestigkeit S+ gegen U-
Kalibriert bei senkrechter Einbaulage Druckanschluss nach unten.
Verpolschutz U+ gegen U-
Nichtlinearität % d. Spanne ≤ 0,2 (BFSL) nach IEC 61298-2 Ca. 0,2
Nichtwiederholbarkeit % d. Spanne ≤ 0,1 nach IEC 61298-2 Gewicht kg Ca. 0,3 bei Option Kennlinienabweichung 0,25% der Spanne, höheres
Gehäuse
Stabilität pro Jahr % d. Spanne ≤ 0,2 (bei Referenzbedingungen)
Zulässige Temperaturbereiche { } Angaben in geschweiften Klammern beschreiben gegen Mehrpreis lieferbare Sonderheiten.
28 WIKA Operating instructions/Betriebsanleitung/Mode d'emploi/Instrucciones de servicio S-10, S-11 WIKA Operating instructions/Betriebsanleitung/Mode d'emploi/Instrucciones de servicio S-10, S-11 29
7. Inbetriebnahme, Betrieb D 8. Einstellung Nullpunkt / Spanne D
Funktionsprüfung 8. Einstellung Nullpunkt / Spanne (nur bei Geräten mit Griffring)
Das Ausgangssignal muss sich dem anstehenden Druck proportional verhalten. Wenn Wir empfehlen Ihnen, das Spannepotentiometer nicht zu verstellen. Es dient zur werk-
dies nicht so ist, kann das ein Hinweis auf eine Beschädigung der Membran sein. Lesen seitigen Justage und sollte nur von Ihnen verstellt werden, wenn Sie über die ausrei-
Sie in diesem Fall in Kapitel 10 „Störbeseitigung“ nach. chende Kalibrierausstattung (mindestens 3x genauer als die angegebene Genauigkeit)
Öffnen Sie Anschlüsse nur im drucklosen Zustand! verfügen.
Beachten Sie die Betriebsparameter gemäß Punkt 7„Technische Daten“.
Achten Sie bei der Steckerdemontage /-
Betreiben Sie das Druckmessgerät immer innerhalb des Überlastgrenzbe-
Warnung montage darauf, dass keine Litzen
reichs! Leitungs-
abgerissen bzw. eingequetscht werden. stecker B
Beachten Sie beim Berühren des Druckmessgerätes, dass die Oberflächen Ziehen Sie den Leitungstecker(Buchse) (Buchse)
der Gerätekomponenten während des Betriebes heiß werden können. ab. Öffnen Sie das Druckmessgerät, Dichtung
Vorsicht indem Sie den Griffring lösen (siehe
Abbildung A ). Ziehen Sie vorsichtig den Griffring
Gerätestecker(Stift) aus dem Gehäuse. Geräte-
Stellen Sie den Nullpunkt (Z) ein (siehe stecker
Abbildung B ), indem Sie den Druckan- (Stift)
fangswert anfahren. Dichtung
Stellen Sie die Spanne (S) ein, indem Z = Nullpunkt
Sie den Druckendwert anfahren. S = Spanne
Gehäuse
Überprüfen Sie den Nullpunkt. mit Druck-
Wenn der Nullpunkt nicht stimmt ggf. A anschluss
Prozedur wiederholen.
Schließen Sie das Druckmessgerät wieder
sorgfältig. Achten Sie darauf, dass die
Dichtungen unbeschädigt und sauber
30 WIKA Operating instructions/Betriebsanleitung/Mode d'emploi/Instrucciones de servicio S-10, S-11 WIKA Operating instructions/Betriebsanleitung/Mode d'emploi/Instrucciones de servicio S-10, S-11 31
9. Wartung, Zubehör / 10. Störbeseitigung D 10. Störbeseitigung D
9. Wartung, Zubehör Störung Mögliche Ursache Maßnahme
WIKA Druckmessgeräte sind wartungsfrei. Kein Ausgangssignal Leitungsbruch Durchgang überprüfen
Lassen Sie Reparaturen nur vom Hersteller durchführen. Keine/Falsche Versorgungsspannung Versorgungsspannung gemäß Betriebs-
Zubehör oder Stromstoß anleitung korrigieren *)
Entnehmen Sie bitte Zubehörangaben (z. B. Stecker) unserer aktuellen Standardpreisliste, dem Verdrahtungsfehler (z. B. 2-Leiter als Follow pin assignment (see Instrument
Kein/Falsches Ausgangssignal
3-Leiter verdrahtet) Label / Operating Instructions)
CD-Katalog oder setzen Sie sich mit unserem Vertriebsmitarbeiter in Verbindung.
Gleichbleibendes Ausgangssignal bei Mechanische Überlastung durch Gerät austauschen; bei wiederholtem
Druckänderung Überdruck Ausfall Rücksprache mit Hersteller *)
Mechanische Überlastung durch Gerät austauschen; bei wiederholtem
Signalspanne zu klein / fällt ab
Überdruck Ausfall Rücksprache mit Hersteller *)
Membranbeschädigung, z. B. durch
10. Störbeseitigung Schläge, abrasives/agressives Medium; Hersteller kontaktieren und Gerät
Öffnen Sie Anschlüsse nur im drucklosen Zustand! Korrosion an Membran/Druckan- austauschen
schluss; Übertragungsmedium fehlt
Dichtung/Dichtfläche beschädigt/
Dichtung/-Fläche säubern, evtl. Dich-
Warnung verschmutzt, Dichtung sitzt unkorrekt,
tung austauschen
Gewindegänge verkantet
Ergreifen Sie Vorsichtsmaßnahmen für Messstoffreste in ausgebauten
!
EMV-Störquellen in Umgebung, z. B. Gerät abschirmen; Leitungsabschir-
Druckmessgeräten. Messstoffreste können zur Gefährdung von Menschen, Signalspanne schwankend / ungenau
Frequenzumrichter mung; Störquelle entfernen
Warnung Umwelt und Einrichtung führen! Zulässige Temperaturen gemäß
Zu hohe/niedrige Einsatztemperaturen
Setzen Sie das Druckmessgerät außer Betrieb und schützen Sie es gegen Betriebsanleitung einhalten
versehentliche Inbetriebnahme, wenn Sie Störungen nicht beseitigen Gerät nicht geerdet Gerät erden
können. Stark schwankender Druck des
Dämpfung; Beratung durch Hersteller
Lassen Sie Reparaturen nur vom Hersteller durchführen. Prozessmediums
Zulässige Temperaturen gemäß
Verwenden Sie keine spitzen bzw. harten Gegenstände zur Reinigung, denn die Abweichendes Nullpunkt-Signal Zu hohe/niedrige Einsatztemperaturen
Betriebsanleitung einhalten
Membran des Druckanschlusses darf nicht beschädigt werden. Nullpunkt mittels Potentiometer oder
42 WIKA Operating instructions/Betriebsanleitung/Mode d'emploi/Instrucciones de servicio S-10, S-11 WIKA Operating instructions/Betriebsanleitung/Mode d'emploi/Instrucciones de servicio S-10, S-11 43
7. Mise en service, exploitation F 7. Mise en service, exploitation F
Données techniques Type S-10, S-11 Données techniques Type S-10, S-11
Réglage: point zero, gain % ± 5 par potentiomètres dans l‘instrument Coefficient de température sur
≤ 1 (≤ 10 ms avec temp. de fluide <-30 °C (-22°F) pour des étendues plage nominale
Temps de transmission (10 ... 90 %) ms
de mesure à 25 bar ou avec membrane affleurante (S-11). Coef. de temp. moy. du point 0 % du gain ≤ 0,2 / 10 K (< 0,4 pour étendue de mesure ≤ 0,25 mbar)
Tension d’isolement VDC 500 5) Coef. de temp. moy. % du gain ≤ 0,2 / 10 K
5)
Tension d’alimentation selon NEC Class 02 (basse tension et courant maxi 100 VA CE- conformitié
également en situation d’erreur)
Directive Equipements sous
Précision % du gain ≤ 0,25 {0,125} 6) (BFSL) 97/23/EC
Pression
≤ 0,5 7)
{0,25} 6) 7)
2004/108/EG, Emission de perturbations (group 1, classe B) et rési-
CEM Directive
6)
Précision { } étendue de mesure ≥ 0,25 bar (100 INWC). stance aux perturbations
7)
Inclusif non-linéarité, hystérésis, zéro et déviation de l’étendue de mesure Résistance aux chocs g 1000 selon IEC 60068-2-27 (chock méchanique)
(correspond à l’erreur de mesure selon IEC 61298-2). Résistance aux vibrations g 20 selon IEC 60068-2-6 (vibration en cas de résonance)
Calibré en position verticale, raccord de pression vers le bas. Protection électrique
Non-linéarité % du gain ≤ 0,2 (BFSL) selon IEC 61298-2 Résistance au court-circuit S+ contre U-
Non-répétabilité % du gain ≤ 0,1 selon IEC 61298-2 Protection fausse polarité U+ contre U-
Stabilité sur un an % du gain Environ 0,2
≤ 0,2 (pour les conditions de référence) Poids kg Environ 0,3 avec l‘option d’un erreur de non-linéarité 0,25; boîtier plus
grand
Température autorisée
{ } Les données entre accolades précisent les options disponibles contre supplément de prix.
Du fluide °C -30 ... +100
{-40 ... +125}
» S-11 avec élément intégré au
{-20 ... +150}
refroidissement
De l’environnement °C -20 ... +80
» S-11 avec élément intégré au
44 WIKA Operating instructions/Betriebsanleitung/Mode d'emploi/Instrucciones de servicio S-10, S-11 WIKA Operating instructions/Betriebsanleitung/Mode d'emploi/Instrucciones de servicio S-10, S-11 45
7. Mise en service, exploitation F 8. Réglage du zéro / gain F
Données techniques Exécution oxygène type S-10 8. Réglage du zéro / gain (uniquement pour appareils à anneau moleté)
Etendue de mesure bar A partir de 0 ... 0,1
Nous vous recommandons de ne pas dérégler le potentiomètre de gain. Il sert au
Type de pression La pression
réglage d’usine et ne devrait être réajusté de votre part que si vous disposez d’un équi-
Matériaux pement de calibration suffisant (au minimum 3x plus précis que la précision donnée).
Parties en contact avec le
316 Ti (a partir de 40 bar F 1058)
fluide Veillez lors du montage et démontage
Liquide interne de transmission de
Huile halocarbone
du connecteur à ce qu’aucun fil ne soit
pression 1) arraché ou pincé. Connecteur B
Non existant pour des étendues de mesure > 25 bar
femelle
1)
Débranchez le connecteur femelle. Ouvrez
Température autorisée l’appareil de mesure de pression (voir Joint
Du fluide °C -20 ... +60 image A ) en dévissant l’anneau moleté. d’etanchéité
Retirez le connecteur mâle du boîtier avec Anneau
précaution. moleté
Veuillez prendre en considération lors de la conception de votre installation, que les
Réglez le zéro (Z) (voir image B ) en Connecteur
valeurs indiquées (par exemple pression d’éclatement, limite de surcharge) dépendent mâle
de la matière utilisée, du filetage et du joint utilisé. appliquant la valeur de pression de départ.
Réglez le gain (S) en appliquant la valeur Joint
de pression finale. d’etanchéité
S = Gain
Vérification du fonctionnement Contrôlez le zéro.
Boîtier avec Z = Point zéro
Le signal de sortie doit se comporter proportionnellement à la pression présente. Si ce Au cas où le zéro n'est pas correct, répéter
raccord de
n’est pas le cas, ceci peut être une indication que la membrane est endommagée. Dans la procédure. A pression
ce cas veuillez lire “élimination de perturbations” dans le chapitre 10. Refermez soigneusement l’appareil de
N’ouvrez les raccords que hors pression! mesure de pression. Faites attention à ce
Prenez en considération les paramètres de service selon le chapitre 7 que les joints ne soient pas endommagés
“Caractéristiques techniques”. et à leur position correcte afin d’assurer
Avertissement
Attention
46 WIKA Operating instructions/Betriebsanleitung/Mode d'emploi/Instrucciones de servicio S-10, S-11 WIKA Operating instructions/Betriebsanleitung/Mode d'emploi/Instrucciones de servicio S-10, S-11 47
9. Entretien, Accessoires / 10. Elimination de perturbations F 10. Elimination de perturbations F
9. Entretien, accessoires Perturbations Cause Mesures à prendre
Les transmetteurs WIKA ne demandent aucune maintenance. Pas de signal de sortie Rupture de conducteur Contrôler le passage du courant
Ne faites effectuer les réparations que par le fabricant. Tension d‘alimentation manquante / Corriger la tension d‘alimentation selon
fausse ou pointe de surtension le mode d‘emploi *)
Accessoires Erreur de câblage (par ex. systeme a
Les renseignements concernant les accessoires (par exemple connecteurs) figurent dans le Respecter la position des raccords (voir
Pas de / ou faux signal de sortie deux fils connecté en systeme a trois
plaquette signalétique / mode d‘emploi)
tarif de stock actuel, le ”Product Catalog” en CD-Rom ou veuillez prendre contact avec notre fils)
Lors d‘une variation de pression le Surcharge mécanique par pression Remplacer l‘appareil; en cas de panne
département commercial. signal de sortie reste constant excessive répétitive consulter le fabricant *)
Surcharge mécanique par pression Remplacer l‘appareil; en cas de panne
Gain du signal trop faible / tombe
excessive répétitive consulter le fabricant *)
Endommagement de la membrane, par
10. Elimination de perturbations ex. par des coups, des fluides abrasifs
Prendre contact avec le fabricant et
N’ouvrez les raccords que hors pression! / agressifs; corrosion sur la membrane /
remplacer l‘appareil
sur les raccords de pression; liquide de
transmission manque
Avertissement Joint / surface d‘étanchéité endom- Nettoyer le joint / la surface
magé / souillé, le joint n‘est pas monté d‘étanchéité, éventuellement remplacer
Prenez des mesures de sécurité pour les restes de fluides se trouvant dans correctement, pas de vis coincé le joint
62 WIKA Operating instructions/Betriebsanleitung/Mode d'emploi/Instrucciones de servicio S-10, S-11 WIKA Operating instructions/Betriebsanleitung/Mode d'emploi/Instrucciones de servicio S-10, S-11 63
9. Mantenimiento, accessorios / 10. Eliminación de perturbaciones E 10. Eliminación de perturbaciones E
9. Mantenimiento, accessorios Avería Posible causa Medida
¡Los transmisores WIKA estan libres de mantenimiento!
Sin señal de salida Ruptura de línea Comprobar continuidad
Sólo el fabricante puede efectuar reparaciones.
Sin o falsa tensión de alimentación o Corregir tensión de alimentación según
golpe de corriente instrucciones de servicio *)
Accesorios Observar empleo de los conductores
Detalles para los accesorios (p. ej. conectores) encontrará en la lista de precios WIKA, Error de cableado (p. ej. sistema a 2
Sin o falsa señal de salida (ver placa indicad. de tipo / instruc-
hilos cableado en 3 hilos)
catálogo de productos WIKA sobre CD-Rom o póngase en contacto con nuestro departa- ciones de uso)
Cambiar el instrumento; en caso de
mento de venta. Señal de salida constante en caso de Sobrecarga mecánica por presión
fallo repetido, consultar con el fabri-
cambio de presión excesiva
cante *)
Cambiar el instrumento; en caso de
Alcance de la señal demasiado
Sobrecarga mecánica por sobrepresión fallo repetido, consultar con el fabri-
pequeño / dropping off
cante *)
10. Eliminación de perturbaciones Deterioro de membrana, p. ej. por
¡Abrir las conexiones de presión sólo en estado sin presión! golpes, medio abrasivo/agresivo; Contactar con el fabricante y cambiar
corrosión en membrana/racor de el instrumento
presión ; falta el medio de transmisión
Junta/superficie de obturación deterio-
Advertencia rada/ensuciada, posición incorrecta de
Limpiar junta/superficie de junta, even-
tualmente cambiar junta
la junta, espiras bloqueadas
¡Tome medidas de precaución en cuanto a residuos de medios de medición
!
Fuentes de interferencias perturbaci-
en transmisores de presión desmontados. Medios residuales pueden causar Alcance de la señal inconstante /
ones electromagnéticas en la proxi-
Blindar aparato; blindaje de línea;
inexacto eliminar fuente de interferencias
Advertencia daños en personas, medio ambiente y equipo! midad, p. ej. convertidor de frecuencias
Ponga fuera de servicio el instrumento y protejalo contra la puesta en Ensure permissible temperatures as per
Temperaturas de aplicación altas/bajas
the Operating Instructions
servicio por error, si no puede eliminar perturbaciones.
Instrumento no puesto a tierra Poner instrumento a tierra
Sólo el fabricante es autorizado para efectuar reparaciones.
Presión del medio de proceso muy
Atenuación; consultar con el fabricante
inestable
Para no dañar las membranas de la conexión de presión, no utilizar para la limpieza Observar temperaturas admisibles
Desviación de la señal del cero Temperaturas de aplicación altas/bajas
según instrucciones de uso
objetos puntiagudos ni duros.
Fig. 817 Type BR14 Fig. 816 Type BR12 Fig. 760 Type BR22 Fig. 761 Type BR23
10
10
10 9
1
1 1
2
2 2
3
3 3
4
4 4 4
13
B B
12
~--'
Fig. 762 Type BR24 Fig. 819 Type BR28 Fig. 763 Type BR25
1
1-
2 2-~
~~3 2-
~~4 3~
4~
5 " ~'
~6 5'~
7
11
Service maintenance - Loosen the tightening bolts and remove all component pieces.
Before putting in service, check the bolting torque as recom- - Clean the sealing and cushion surfaces very carefully, making
mended on top of this page. Tighten the bolts alternatively, sure that they are clear of any remnants of joints.
starting from centre of gauge. To avoid glass thermal shocks dur- - Smear the threads of the tightening bolts with a thin layer of
ing start-up, the gauge temperature must gradually increase in order graphite grease;
to allow both the metallic structure and the glass to reach the oper-
ating temperature. Proceed as follows: close bottom shut-off valve, Reassembling
completely open drain, partially open top shut-off valve to allow a - Fit in a new glass with new joints (never re-use joints which have
minimum flow outlet of steam. Maintain flow outlet until proper tem- already been in service!): remember that the sealing joint must be
perature is reached, then close drain valve; the condensate coming placed on the side where the grooves are.
through top valve will fill the gauge column. At this step completely - Reassemble all the components in the right sequence. Tighten the
open very slowly bottom shut-off valve, then completely open top bolts alternatively, starting from centre of gauge.
shut-off valve. - Never grip the level gauge body in a vice during the reassembling,
In case during operation fluid impurities affect glass, proceed to but put it on a plane surface.
gauge washing as above described - Never use adhesive or hermetic mastic. Remember that all surfa-
ces must be perfectly clean.
Important notice
Maintenance must be made immediately when: Spare parts
- leakage appears, even if very small. In this case: shut of and cool - When ordering spare parts please state:
down the gauge. Tighten the gauge nuts at the recommended - type and size of the gauge body
bolting torque; - item number of the spare part, as shown in the above list
- the glass appears opaque or slightly white specially in the steam - construction material.
area; - As regards reflex glasses and their joints, please remember that:
- grooves of the reflex glass show sign of corrosion and/or ero- - each type BR12, BR14 gauge is fitted with 1 reflex glass
type A (section 30x17 mm),
sion and the reading of the level is not clear.
The lack of maintenance and the lack of replacement of the deterio- - each type BR22, BR23, BR24, BR25, BR28 gauge is fitted with
rated parts can cause the breakage of the glass with all the relevant 1 reflex glass type B (section 34x17 mm).
consequences.
For type BR13, separate instructions on request.
Dismantling
- Shut off the valves, let out the pressure and remove the level
gauge body from the valves.
34 ~ BONT
BONT@ Level Gauges
Transparent Gauge Bodies
Description and Maintenance Instructions
1 Centre piece 6 Cover plate
Bolting torques 2 Sealing joint 7 Bolt with nut
- Type BT23 50 Nm - Type BT29 80 Nm 3 Glass protection sheet 8 Stud bolt with nut
- Type BT24 50 Nm - Type BT33 80 Nm (where applicable) 9 Stud with nut
- Type BT25 40 Nm - Type BT32 90 Nm 4 Plate glass 13 Angular Piece
- Type BT28 80 Nm 5 Cushion joint 14 Belleville Washer
Fig. 764 Type BT23 Fig. 765 Type BT24 Fig. 766 Type BT25
:~
4~~ ,
5'~
~~
"
"-"-,,-
7~, 6
7
Fig. 767 Type BT28 & BT29 Fig. 814.1 Type BT33 Fig. 815.1 Type BT32
1
1
2
2
3
3
4
4
5
5
13
13
6
6
14
14
8
9
Service maintenance - Loosen and take out the tightening bolts and remove all compo-
Before putting in service, check the bolting torque as recom- nent pieces as well.
mended on top of this page. Tighten the bolts alternatively, - Clean the sealing surfaces of the centre piece and the cushion
starting from centre of gauge. To avoid glass thermal shocks dur- surfaces of the cover plates very carefully, making sure that they
ing start-up, the gauge temperature must gradually increase in order are clear of any remnants of joints.
to allow both the metallic structure and the glass to reach the oper- - Smear the threads with a thin layer of graphite grease.
ating temperature. Proceed as follows: close bottom shut-off valve,
completely open drain, partially open top shut-off valve to allow a Reassembling
minimum flow outlet of steam. Maintain flow outlet until proper tem- - Fit in new glasses with new joints (never re-use joints which
perature is reached, then close drain valve; the condensate coming have already been in service!). Remember that the glass protec-
through top valve will fill the gauge column. At this step completely tion sheet must be in direct contact with the inner side of the
open very slowly bottom shut-off valve, then completely open top glasses (between the glass and the fluid), and that the sealing
shut-off valve. joint must be placed on the sealing surface of the centre piece.
In case during operation fluid impurities affect glass or protection Reassemble all the other components in the right sequence, and
shield, proceed to gauge washing as above described tighten the bolts alternatively, starting from centre of gauge.
- Never grip the level gauge body in a vice during the reassembling,
Important notice but put it on a plane surface.
Maintenance must be made immediately when: - Never use adhesive or hermetic mastic. Remember that all surfa-
- leakage appears, even if very small. In this case: shut of and cool ces must be perfectly clean.
down the gauge. Tighten the gauge nuts at the recommended
bolting torque; Spare parts
- the glasses appear opaque or slightly white specially in the steam - When ordering spare parts please state:
area; - type and size of the gauge body
- the reading of the level is not clear. - item number of the spare part, as shown in the above list
The lack of maintenance and the lack of replacement of the deterio- - construction material.
rated parts can cause the breakage of the glasses with all the rele- - As regards plate glasses their joints and protection sheets,
vant consequences. remember that each level gauge is fitted with 2 plate glasses
type B (section 34x17 mm).
Dismantling
- Shut off the valves, let out the pressure and remove the level For type BC1 (bicolour), separate instructions on request.
gauge body from the valves.
BONT~ 35
3.755.5275.201 Issue 7 - 2012
1. Safety information
3. Installation
6. Switch replacement
7. Maintenance
8. Trouble shooting
9. Conformity certificates
10. Cerificates
© Copyright 2012
1. Safety information
A safe operation of SENSILEVEL products is assured when they are properly installed, commissioned,
used and maintained by qualified personnel according to the operation instructions (see section
1.11 of present instruction paper). Compliance with installation and safety general instructions must
also be observed during piping and plant erection together to an appropriate use of equipment and
facilities for safety.
Note: products supplied by Spirax Sarco are classified as components and, in general, they
aren’t subjected to Machine Directive 89/392/EEC.
I) Products have been specifically designed for hazardous and not hazardous fluids that are
included in Group 1 and 2 of the above mentioned European Directive.
II) Verify suitability of material and the minimum and maximum values of pressure and temperature.
If the maximum operating limit conditions of the product are lower than those of the system
where it has to be used or if an improper operation of the product might cause a dangerous
excess of pressure and temperature, make sure to include in the system a safety device to
prevent limits overcoming.
III) Determine the correct position of the installation and the flow direction of the fluid.
IV) Our products cannot cope with external stress induced by the system in which they operate.
The installer is responsible of stress analysis and of adequate precautions to be taken inorder
to minimize the external stress.
V) Remove protective covers from all connections prior to installation.
1.2 Accessibility
Ensure safe access and, if the case, a safe and properly protected platform before working on the
product. Use suitable lifting mechanisms as necessary.
1.3 Lighting
Ensure adequate lighting, particularly where detailed or intricate work is required.
1.6 System
Consider the possible effects of the planned work on the whole system. Some operations (e.g. closure
of on/off valves, electrical isolation) may put other parts of the system or personnel at risk? Hazards
might include closure of vents or isolation of protective devices or jeopardize controls or alarms.
Ensure that isolation valves are gradually turned on and off to avoid system shocks.
1.7 Pressure
Ensure that all parts exposed to pressure are isolated or adequately vented to atmospheric pressure.
Consider double isolation (double block and venting) and blocking or labelling of closed valves.
Do not assume a system is de-pressurized even when the pressure gauge reads zero.
2 3.755.5275.201
1.8 Temperature
To avoid the risk of burns, wait until temperature has normalized after isolation.
1.15 Freezing
The non auto-drainage products have to be protected from damage caused by freeze where they
are exposed to temperatures under freezing point.
1.16 Disposal
Unless otherwise indicated in the instructions manuals, this product can be recycled. Therefore,
provided appropriate precautions will be taken, there is no potential ecological risk after its disposal.
3.755.5275.201 3
2. General product information
2.1 Declaration of CE conformity for Sensilevel Level Switches
Series 5500
Spirax-Sarco S.r.l., of Via per Cinisello 18 - 20834 Nova Milanese (MB) Italy, certifies that the product:
104 104
140
178
229
72
72
Mod. 5501, 5502, 5503, 5504 Mod. 5511, 5512, 5551, 5502
4 3.755.5275.201
2.5 Switching levels (mm) as funcion of density
Mod. Mod. Mod. 5511/12/51/52
Density
5501/02/03/04 5511/12/51/52 2 switch mechanisms SPDT
(kg/dm3)
1 switch mechanism 1 switch mechanism Lower Switch Higher Switch
B C B C B C B C
0,78 - - 72 106 - - - -
0,80 - - 74 108 74 108 50 89
0,83 9 32 77 110 77 110 54 91
0,90 13 35 93 115 93 115 61 95
1,00 18 38 101 121 101 121 70 101
Open
Contact status as Closed Open
function of level contact contact
Increasing level 2-3 and 5-6 1-2 and 4-5
Decreasing level 1-2 and 4-5 2-3 and 5-6
Close
External
circuit
External
circuit
3.755.5275.201 5
2.7 Pneumatic connections (for pneumatic switches)
Connect the instrument to the pneumatic circuit using the table and diagram below to obtain the
required function from the pneumatic switch (3 way valve, 2 way valve, selector, diverter).
Pipes must be connected to the ¼" NPT connectors on the housing base. These are identified by
the letters A, B and C, and are already connected within the housing to the 3 way pneumatic switch.
Pneumatic valve
3. Installation
3.1 Transport
The equipment is packed in palletized carton boxes, in which spacers are inserted to avoid shaking
during transport. The palletized support is suitable for movement with fork lift trucks. The gross
weight is externally indicated on the container.
3.3 Clamping
Appropriate support system will be used to avoid unwanted stress to the chamber and its connections.
Level controls working with liquids which might leave deposits must include T or cross type fittings to
allow periodic pipeline cleaning. A drain or blowdown valve (preferably with a straight line flow) will be
useful to clean the float chamber and the connection pipes to the process. During their operation all
on/off valves must be completely open with a full flow through them to avoid improper level switching.
Allow a free space of at least 200 mm above the housing to permit its removal. Switching levels B and C
are influenced by the specific gravity of the controlled liquid and are reported in the table of paragraph 2.5.
3.4 Grounding
Sensilevel must be electrically grounded using the proper terminals identified with a specific tag.
3.5 Commissioning
After installation or maintenance ensure that the system is completely operational.
Test each alarm and protective devices.
6 3.755.5275.201
4. Differential and switching level setting
(Electric switches 2-3)
In order to better understand the instructions, the following terms have to be defined:
- HIGH LEVEL: liquid level for which the switch mechanism is activated when the level itself is
increasing (B)
- LOW LEVEL: liquid level for which the switch mechanism is activated when the level itself is
decreasing (C)
- DIFFERENTIAL: difference between high and low level.
The instrument is normally calibrated in the factory to the minimum value of differential (there
must be a small amount of clearance between the pair of nuts holding the magnetic piston).
The value of differential can be increased after the installation by lowering the bottom pair of nuts
thus obtaining an increment of the high level switch.
The modification of the differential is possible within the following limits:
- Sensilevel 5511÷52 with one switching mechanism type 2 and 3: maximum increase of 50 mm
over factory calibration
- Sensilevel 5511÷52 with two switching mechanisms: maximum increase of 25 mm over factory
calibration
- Sensilevel 5511÷52 with three switching mechanisms: the minimum differential value is fixed as
calibrated at factory
- Sensilevel 5501÷02 with one switching mechanism type 2 and 3: maximum increase of 20 mm
over factory calibration
In addition to all general recommendations, to modify the original calibration of the differential
level the below indicated procedures have to be carefully followed.
C - Return to operation
Upon determination of the new nuts position relevant to the desired differential, proceed as follows
to return to operation:
1 - To avoid possible loosening during operation, tighten lower position nut and lock-nut.
2 - Reinsert the magnetic piston.
3 - Move the upper pair of nuts in the previous position, that noted prior to disassembly.
Tighten these nuts to avoid their potential loosening during operation.
4 - Reinstall the non-magnetic pocket and the whole housing.
5 - Restore the external connections to the housing.
3.755.5275.201 7
D - Modification of the switching level
This operation is executed by modifying the position of the switch mechanism. In the instruments
equipped with one or two switches type 1, 2 & 3 it is possible to move them up of 50 or 25 mm
respectively. This operation is necessary when an increment of the switching values B and C is
desired without modifying the process connections.
To reposition the mechanism loosen the locking screw (fig.6) permitting the switch to move along the
non-magnetic pocket; fix then the mechanism in the new position. For the lower position mechanism
it is also necessary to remove the locking screw from the plate.
Attention:
When the switches are shifted in an upper position the possibility to increase the differential is re-
duced of the same shift amount (e.g. if in a one only switch mechanism Sensilevel, the same switch
is moved up of 20 mm, the differential can be increased of maximum 30 mm instead of 50 mm).
After the modification of the differential and/or of the switching levels it is recommended to verify
the correct operation of the switch by moving the float manually.
Lower nuts
The differential increases
by lowering the position
of this pair of nuts
Magnetic Piston
Fig. 5
8 3.755.5275.201
5. Switch mechanism replacement
A - Electrical switch mechanism
Turn off the power, remove the cover of the housing and proceed as follows:
1 - Remove external connections from the terminal board and record the position of each wire.
Identify also the position of the mechanism on the enclosing non-magnetic pocket.
2 - Loosen the 2 "A" fixing screw of the mechanism (see Fig. 6 electric type); take out then the switch
mechanism from the enclosing tube.
3 - Replace the switch mechanism and reassemble the unit by performing above actions 2 and 1
reversely.
4 - Manually check the lever of the magnet holder and make sure it moves freely and that the switch
is correctly operated.
5 - Reconnect the electrical wires ensuring that they do not interfere with the movement of the
mechanism or with the housing.
Fixing Screws
A
3.755.5275.201 9
6. Switch replacement
A - Electrical switch
1 - Remove switch wires from the terminal board.
2 - Remove the locking screws "D" (Fig. 7 electric type) and then remove the switch.
3 - Replace the old switch with the new one and reassemble by performing above actions 2 and 1
reversely.
4 - Manually check the lever of the magnet holder ensuring that the switch opens and closes correctly.
If necessary make adjustments with screw "C" (see Fig. 7 electric type).
B - Pneumatic switch
1 - Remove pipes from the valve.
2 - Remove the 2 locking screw "D" (Fig.7 pneumatic type) and then the valve.
3 - Replace the old valve with the new one and reassemble by performing above actions 2 and 1
reversely.
4 - Manually check the lever of the magnet holder ensuring that the valve is correctly operated.
If necessary make adjustments with screw "C" (see Fig. 7 pneumatic type).
10 3.755.5275.201
7. Maintenance
Periodical inspections are necessary to guarantee a complete efficiency of the instrument. A regular
maintenance program starting from its installation is recommended. The suggested precautions are
important to obtain the best operating conditions of the level control.
2a - Microswitches
Verify alignment between the adjusting screw "C" and the lever operating the microswitch (Fig. 7
electric type). Check correct switching of the microswitch by manually operating the lever of the
magnet holder.
2b - Pneumatic switches
Verify alignment between the adjusting screw "C" and the pushbutton controlling the valve
(Fig. 7 pneumatic type). Check correct switching of the valve by manually operating the lever of
the magnet holder.
These functionality checks of the switches must also be carried out when potentially damaging
events such as short circuits, electrical discharges, or excess of pressure occur.
Avoid to leave in operation any faulty or incorrectly functioning instrument.
In case of parts replacement carefully follow the repair instructions supplied with the spare part.
Contact our central office or nearest sales point in case of doubt.
3.755.5275.201 11
8. Trouble shooting
SENSILEVEL level switches are designed for long lasting and for fault-free operation. However, if a
malfunction is anticipated, the below indicated checks can be performed to diagnose any problem.
1 - Is the level control correctly installed? (See instructions at point 3.2 - Installation).
2 - Is the level control operating within the limits of liquid pressure, temperature and density indicated
on the identification plate?
3 - Are the electrical or pneumatic connections intact? Is the instrument powered?
4 - Are the voltage and current or the control pressure applied to the switches within the limits
established and reported on the plate?
5 - Do the switch connections comply with the supplied instructions and the general plant diagram?
6 - Is the equipment controlled by the instrument correctly connected and operating?
7 - Is the switch mechanism fixed to the enclosing tube as in ex-factory position?
8 - Is the switch damaged?
Check that it is not cracked and that its wire terminals and pipes are not corroded. If any physical
damage is found, the switch must be replaced.
9 - Does the switch properly work when it is manually operated? Check the lever of the magnet
holder manually: it should not oppose any resistance. This manual movement will make the
switch working. Verify the contact continuity with an appropriate tool.
Note: ensure that the lever of the microswitch is not bended and that the adjusting screw is
positioned in its centre.
10 - Is the inside of the level control free from dirt and deposits?
a - Check that the enclosing tube has no external dents (the pipe must not be bent).
b - Check that the inside of the pipe has no deposits and dirt or it is corroded.
c - Check that the magnetic piston and the stem are not corroded, incrusted or bent.
d - The adjusting nuts are individually positioned in the factory for each level control. Ensure
that they have not been loosened and that their position allow the magnetic piston to move
inside and outside of the magnetic field upon a level variation.
11 - Should the above described checks have not traced the problem, contact our central or local office.
12 3.755.5275.201
9. Conformity certificates
"Here below is the Declaration of Conformity for the standard products covered in this instruction;
for all special versions derived from standard and supplied against a specific order, an "ad hoc"
declaration will be issue by our Documentation and Test Department".
Explosion-proof housing for usage in areas at risk of explosion. The instrument can be used with
process liquids at an operating temperature not exceeding 85°C.
The electrical cable connections utilized must have the appropriate ATEX certification. During
connection check inside the housing that all wires have a minimum clearance distance of 3 mm
from the housing wall.
Electrical characteristics
Metal strip switches
120 Vac / 15 Aac
380 Vac / 15 Aac
30 Vdc / 6 Adc
240 Vdc / 0,2 Adc
Note: The accessories utilized for cable connection must conform with Standars
CENELEC EN 60079-0, EN 60079-1, EN 60079-11, EN 60079-26 e EN 60079-31.
3.755.5275.201 13
Intrinsic safety explosion-proof for usage in areas at risk of explosion. The instrument can be used
with process liquids at an operating temperature not exceeding 85°C. The electrical cable connections
utilized must have the appropriate Atex certification. During connection check inside the housing
that all wires have a minimum clearance distance of 3 mm from the housing wall.
HEP series level switches in II 1G Ex ia or IIC T6 Ga execution must be protected with Associated
Apparatus in II (1)G [Ex ia] IIC execution, with safety parameters Uo and Io compatible with the
values indicated in the certificate.
Electrical characteristics
Metal strip switches
Ui : 30V
Ii : 100mA
Li ~ 0
Ci ~ 0
Note: The accessories utilized for cable connection must conform with Standars
CENELEC EN 60079-0, EN 60079-1, EN 60079-11, EN 60079-26 e EN 60079-31.
14 3.755.5275.201
Intrinsic safety explosion-proof for usage in areas at risk of explosion suitable for level control ap-
plications with flammable liquids, thanks to the interface design between Zone 0 and the housing
inside compliant to to EN 60079-26 regulation , and to the hermetic contacts use (avoiding ignition
sources inside the housing in standard operating conditions)(category 1/2G). The instrument can
be used with process liquids at an operating temperature not exceeding 85°C. The electrical cable
connections utilized must have the appropriate Atex certification. During connection check inside the
housing that all wires have a minimum clearance distance of 3 mm from the housing wall.
Electrical characteristics
Metal strip switches
120 Vac / 15 Aac
380 Vac / 15 Aac
30 Vdc / 6 Adc
240 Vdc / 0,2 Adc
Note: The accessories utilized for cable connection must conform with Standars
CENELEC EN 60079-0, EN 60079-1, EN 60079-11, EN 60079-26 e EN 60079-31.
3.755.5275.201 15
16 3.755.5275.201
3.755.5275.201 17
10. Certificates
18 3.755.5275.201
3.755.5275.201 19
REPAIRS
Contact our nearest branch or agency or contact Spirax Sarco - Ufficio Resi directly at Via per Cinisello, 18
20834 Nova Milanese (MB) - Tel.: 0362 4917248 - Fax: 0362 4917203
WARRANTY INVALIDITY
Verified partial or total non-observance of above described instructions shall cause the loss of all rights
relative to the warranty.
Spirax-Sarco S.r.l. - Via per Cinisello, 18 - 20834 Nova Milanese (MB) - Tel.: 0362 49 17.1 - Fax: 0362 49 17 307
LEVEL INDICATOR____________
VISCO 60
70
Type LL LF LT TF
____________________________
DESCRIPTION
- Body (1).
- Connections (2).
Flanged (all versions)
Threaded (only LL version).
- Float (3).
VISCO LL
The size of the fixing systems and floats, and the materials selected depend on the
working conditions such as pressure, temperature and type of liquid contained in the
tank.
Page 2 of 5
INSTRUCTION MANUAL VISCO 60 70
Type LL LF LT TF
OPERATION
WORKING PARAMETERS
Temperature____________________ – 60 + 400 °C
ACCESSORIES
The system is provided with bi-stable switches with SPDT contacts, fitted outside the
indicator’s body for easy level adjustment and for coupling to the automatic mode
controls.
In addition it is possible to couple the indicator to a 4-20 mA output transmitter.
The transmitter also comes in a version for certified hazard areas.
It is therefore possible to actuate an electrical signal that enables the
starting/stopping of pumps, opening/closing of solenoid valves, or activation of alarm
systems, as required by modern automation systems.
Page 3 of 5
INSTRUCTION MANUAL VISCO 60 70
Type LL LF LT TF
INSTALLATION
Level indicator is delivered with float packed and locked at its bottom flange.
Pay attention before installation to disassembly bottom flange and get out float from
its package.
Insert float inside indicator body following right direction:“ ” and “TOP” wrote on.
Reassembly bottom flange, positioning joint and tightening bolts.
Mount level indicator at tank.
We recommend to install interception valves among tank and indicator connections to
provide an easier remove.
DISASSEMBLY
It is absolutely forbidden disassembly level switch before have been close interception
valves. Please to assure nobody can accidentally open valves when level indicator will
be removed. If interception valves are not installed before proceed must be empty any
remaining pressure inside tank.
If contacts installed, disconnect electric circuit before operate.
Unscrew thread or flange bolts.
Pay attention to avoid any accidentally fall or damage at body and scale.
MAINTENANCE
Page 4 of 5
INSTRUCTION MANUAL VISCO 60 70
Type LL LF LT TF
SPARE PARTS
To order spare parts please to communicate serial number wrote on instrument tag.
Page 5 of 5
www.besa.it • technical@besa.it
BESA S.p.A. Società che opera con Sistema Qualità in accordo alla norma UNI EN ISO 9001 certificato da ICIM.
MANUALE USO E USE AND MAINTENANCE
MANUTENZIONE MANUAL
3 INSTALLAZIONE 12 3 INSTALLATION 12
3.1 • VERIFICA DEL PRODOTTO ACQUISTATO 12 3. 1 • CHECKING GOODS AS ORDERED 12
3.2 • CONDIZIONI PER L’ INSTALLAZIONE 13 3. 2 • INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS 13
3.3 • INSTALLAZIONE DELLA VALVOLA 14 3. 3 • INSTALLATION OF THE VALVE 14
3.4 • FORZE DI REAZIONE 15 3. 4 • REACTION FORCE 15
3.5 • APPLICAZIONE COMBINATA VALVOLE 3. 5 • COMBINED APPLICATION OF
DI SICUREZZA/DISCHI DI ROTTURA 16 SAFETY VALVES/RUPTURE DISCS 16
5 MANUTENZIONE 23 5 MAINTENANCE 23
5.1 • INFORMAZIONI GENERALI 24 5. 1 • GENERAL INFORMATION 24
5.2 • NORME DI SICUREZZA 24 5. 2 • SAFETY RULES 24
5.3 • ABBIGLIAMENTO 24 5. 3 • CLOTHING 24
5.4 • MANUTENZIONE ORDINARIA 24 5. 4 • ORDINARY MAINTENANCE 24
5.5 • PULIZIA E LUBRIFICAZIONE 24 5. 5 • CLEANING AND LUBRICATION 24
5.6 • REGOLAZIONE DELLA PRESSIONE 25 5. 6 • PRESSURE ADJUSTMENT 25
5.7 • SOSTITUZIONE DELLA MOLLA 33 5. 7 • REPLACEMENT SPRING 33
5.8 • ASSISTENZA TECNICA 36 5. 8 • TECHNICAL SUPPORT 36
5.9 • ELENCO PARTI DI RICAMBIO 36 5. 9 • SPARE PARTS LIST 36
6 IMMAGAZZINAMENTO 37 6 STORAGE 37
6.1 • MESSA FUORI SERVIZIO 37 6. 1 • DECOMMISSIONING 37
Page 3/42
MANUALE USO E USE AND MAINTENANCE
MANUTENZIONE MANUAL
Sezione 1 Section 1
Imballaggio, movimentazione e trasporto. Packaging, handling and transport.
Sezione 2 Section 2
Descrizione della valvola ed il relativo campo di Description of the valve and its applications.
applicazione.Vengono inoltre indicate tutte le Includes the valve’s technical specification.
caratteristiche tecniche della valvola.
Section 3
Sezione 3 Checking that the goods are as ordered; installing
Verifica del prodotto acquistato e installazione della the valve where it is to function.
valvola in opera.
Sezione 4 Section 4
Funzionamento normale della valvola durante Normal functioning of the valve in operation within
l’esercizio all’interno dell’impianto the plant
Sezione 5 Section 5
Manutenzione ordinaria, straordinaria e descrizione Ordinary and extraordinary maintenance; descrip-
dei sistemi di protezione adottati al fine di garanti- tion of protection arrangements to ensure the safe-
re l'incolumità delle persone che operano in prossi- ty of people working near the valve.
mità della valvola.
Sezione 6 Section 6
Immagazzinamento Storage
Allegati Appendices
s s
simbolo:
! !
Page 4/42
MANUALE USO E USE AND MAINTENANCE
MANUTENZIONE MANUAL
Le operazioni che richiedono personale qualificato Operations which must only be carried out by qual-
o specializzato sono evidenziate con il simbolo: ified staff or specialists are flagged with the follow-
ing symbol:
Si raccomanda di istruire il personale destinato We recommend that staff who are to install the
all’installazione. La manutenzione della valvola di valve be given proper training. Maintenance of the
sicurezza deve essere eseguita da personale BESA safety valve must be carried out by BESA staff or
o comunque da personale dalla stessa autorizzato. by BESA-authorised staff.
Il presente manuale di uso e manutenzione costi- This Use and Maintenance Manual is an integral
tuisce parte integrante della valvola e deve essere part of the valve, and must be readily available to
facilmente reperibile dal personale addetto all'uso staff assigned to use or maintain it.
e alla manutenzione della stessa.
L’utente e l’addetto alla manutenzione hanno l’ob- Operators and maintenance staff must be familiar
bligo di conoscere il contenuto del presente with the contents of this manual.
manuale.
Ferme restando le caratteristiche essenziali del tipo BESA reserves the right, without altering the
di valvola descritta, BESA si riserva il diritto di essential features of the type of valve described
apportare le eventuali modifiche di organi, dettagli here, to make such modifications to its parts,
e accessori, che riterrà opportuno per il migliora- details and accessories as in its opinion tend to
mento del prodotto o per esigenze di carattere improve the product or are required on technical or
costruttivo o commerciale, in qualunque momento commercial grounds, at any time and without any
e senza impegnarsi ad aggiornare tempestivamen- commitment to update this publication within a
te questa pubblicazione. Il manuale rispecchia le particular deadline. This manual is valid for the
caratteristiche della valvola venduta. characteristics of the valve as sold.
ATTENZIONE s
!
TUTTI I DIRITTI SONO RISERVATI, è vietata la
WARNING s
!
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED,No part of this
riproduzione di qualsiasi parte di questo manua- manual may be reproduced in any form what-
le, in qualsiasi forma, senza l'esplicito permesso soever without the explicit written permission
scritto di BESA Ing. Santangelo S.p.A. of BESA Ing. Santangelo S.p.A.
Il contenuto di questo manuale può essere The contents of this manual may be modified
modificato senza preavviso. without notice.
Page 5/42
MANUALE USO E USE AND MAINTENANCE
MANUTENZIONE MANUAL
Per qualsiasi problema o informazione contattare il For all problems or queries please contact BESA
servizio di assistenza tecnica BESA al seguente Technical Support at the following address:
indirizzo:
ATTENZIONE s
!
La configurazione originale della valvola non
WARNING s
!
The valve’s original configuration must not
deve essere assolutamente modificata. under any circumstances be modified.
I disegni e qualsiasi altro documento consegnato Drawings and all manner of other documents pro-
sono di proprietà BESA, che se ne riserva i diritti e vided remain the property of BESA, and must not
non possono essere messi a disposizione di terzi. be made available to others. All rights reserved.
GARANZIA WARRANTY
I prodotti BESA sono garantiti per un periodo di 12 BESA products are guaranteed for 12 months of func-
mesi di funzionamento (max. 24 mesi dalla data di tioning (max 24 months from the delivery from uor
consegna), per merce resa franco nostro stabilimento. warehouse), for material returned to our workshop.
Tutte le parti accertate difettose di materiale o di Any parts found to be defective in respect of mate-
lavorazione, saranno sostituite gratuitamente, fran- rials or manufacture will be replaced free of charge,
co nostro stabilimento. carriage payable.
Altre richieste dovute a danni per usura, sporcizia, BESA declines liability for other claims due to dam-
manipolazioni incompetenti, ecc., saranno respinte age caused by wear and tear, dirt, improper han-
da BESA, come pure ulteriori garanzie contrattuali. dling or treatment, etc., and for any claims alleging
any other contractual warranty.
Qualsiasi reclamo relativo alla merce giunta in Any complaint that the quantity or manufacture of
quantità o esecuzione diversa da quella ordinata, goods delivered does not match the goods ordered
dovrà pervenire a BESA per iscritto al massimo must be made in writing and reach BESA no more
entro 10 giorni dal ricevimento del materiale. than 10 days after receipt thereof.
.
Page 6/42
NORME DA OSSER VARE PER LE USE AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL
VALVOLE CONFORMI INTEGRATIVE
ALLA DIRETTIVA 94/9/CE (ATEX) DIRECTIVE 94/9/EC (ATEX)
1) Nel caso di installazione della valvola di sicurez- 1) Where the safety valve is installed in a potential-
za in atmosfera potenzialmente esplosiva, costi- ly explosive atmosphere composed of air mixed
tuita da miscele gas/aria, vapore/aria o with gases, vapours or mists, the temperature of
nebbia/aria, la temperatura del fluido che attra- the fluid passing through the safety valve must
versa la valvola di sicurezza, deve essere mino- not exceed 80% of the minimum ignition tem-
re dell’80% della temperatura minima (in gradi perature (in degrees Celsius) of the gas; where,
centigradi) di accensione del gas; nel caso, inve- on the other hand, it is installed in a potentially
ce, di installazione della valvola di sicurezza in explosive atmosphere composed of air/dust
atmosfera potenzialmente esplosiva, costituita mixtures, the temperature of the fluid passing
da miscela polvere/aria, la temperatura del flui- through it must not exceed 2/3 (two thirds) of the
do che attraversa la valvola di sicurezza, deve minimum ignition temperature (in degrees
essere minore dei 2/3 (due terzi)della tempera- Celsius) of the air/dust mixture, and it must also
tura minima (in gradi centigradi) di accensione be at least 75°C below the minimum ignition
della miscela polvere/aria, e minore, di almeno temperature of a layer of dust 5mm thick or less.
75°C, alla temperatura minima di accensione di 2) The safety valve must not be installed, removed
uno strato di polvere di spessore minore o from the plant or subjected to any maintenance
uguale a 5 mm. operation in the presence of a potentially explo-
2) La valvola di sicurezza non deve essere installa- sive atmosphere. The greatest care must be
ta, tolta dall’impianto o sottoposta a manuten- taken to ensure that the safety valve is not
zione in presenza di atmosfera potenzialmente knocked or jolted.
esplosiva. Prestare la massima attenzione affin- 3) Equipotential bonding must be ensured between
ché la valvola di sicurezza non subisca urti. the safety valve and the plant where it is
3) Collegare all’impianto, in maniera equipotenzia- installed.
le, la valvola di sicurezza installata. 4) The plant must have lightning protection.
4) Proteggere l’impianto dai fulmini. 5) The safety valve must be installed at a safe dis-
5) Installare la valvola di sicurezza ad una distanza di tance from possible sources of electromagnetic
sicurezza dalle possibili sorgenti di radiofrequenze. radiation.
6) Lo scarico della valvola di sicurezza, deve esse- 6) Discharges from the safety valve must be chan-
re convogliato fuori dalla zona con atmosfera nelled out of the potentially explosive atmos-
potenzialmente esplosiva. Il lay out della tuba- phere zone. The layout of the discharge piping
zione di scarico, inoltre, deve essere realizzato must also be suitably arranged to keep pressure
in maniera opportuna, al fine di ridurre al massi- losses to a minimum (the discharge pipe must
mo le perdite di carico (la tubazione di scarico be as straight as possible, changes of direction
deve essere, per quanto possibile, rettilinea, being kept to a minimum and, where unavoid-
limitando al massimo i cambiamenti di direzio- able, designed with a large radius of curvature;
ne. Quando necessari, i cambiamenti di direzio- all restrictions and obstructions of any kind
ne, devono essere realizzati con curve ad ampio whatsoever in the discharge flow must be avoid-
raggio. Sono assolutamente da evitare restringi- ed).
menti e ostruzioni di qualsiasi tipo nel condotto 7) Bonnets of bellow-type safety valve must be
di scarico). vented outside the potentially explosive atmos-
7) Il foro di sfiato, posto sul cappello delle valvole di phere zone, in such a way as to ensure that
sicurezza dotate di soffietto, deve essere convo- atmospheric pressure is maintained in the bon-
gliato fuori dalla zona con atmosfera potenzial- net space.
mente esplosiva, ed in modo adatto ad assicura- 8) Where the safety valve is installed in an atmos-
re il mantenimento della pressione atmosferica phere which is potentially explosive because of
all’interno del cappello-valvola. the presence of dust or powders in
8) Nel caso la valvola di sicurezza the environment, its surfaces must
sia installata in atmosfera poten- be kept clean.
zialmente esplosiva, a causa
della presenza di polveri nell’am-
biente, è necessario mantenerne EX II 2 GD = è la classificazione
dell’apparecchiatura
EX II 2 GD = valve classification
Page 7/42
MANUALE USO E USE AND MAINTENANCE
MANUTENZIONE MANUAL
1 TRASPORTO E 1 TRANSPORT AND
MOVIMENTAZIONE HANDLING
Le valvole di sicurezza BESA, secondo le Depending on their overall dimensions,
dimensioni di ingombro, possono essere BESA safety valves can be transported
trasportate prive di imballo o poste in either without packing or packed in wood-
casse di legno. Per facilitarne la movimen- en boxes. Use pallets for ease of handling.
s s
tazione bancale.
ATTENZIONE ! WARNING! !
Il personale addetto alla Staff handling these loads
manipolazione del carico must wear protective gloves
deve operare con guanti and industrial protective
protettivi e scarpe anti infor- footwear.
s s
tunistiche.
ATTENZIONE ! WARNING! !
Nel sollevare o movimentare la valvola When lifting or handling the valve, see that
provvedere a sgomberare ed a mantenere the manoeuvring area is cleared and kept
sgombra la zona delle operazioni, consi- clear, including a sufficient safety zone
derando anche una sufficiente zona di around it so as to avoid injury or damage
sicurezza intorno ad essa onde evitare to people, property or animals that might
danni a persone, animali od otherwise come within the radius
oggetti che possano trovarsi nel of manoeuvre.
raggio di manovra.
s s
che.
ATTENZIONE ! WARNING! !
È necessario seguire quanto indicato Carry out all instructions on packing
sull'imballo prima di procedere alla sua cases &c., before opening them.
apertura.
Page 8/42
MANUALE USO E USE AND MAINTENANCE
MANUTENZIONE MANUAL
s s
re sempre il numero di matricola.
ATTENZIONE ! WARNING! !
La targhetta, il piombino e i dati stampigliati non The plate, the leaden seal and the stamped details
devono essere rimossi o modificati per alcun motivo, must never be removed or modified for any reason,
anche qualora l’apparecchiatura venisse rivenduta. even on re-selling the apparatus.
I dati specifici della valvola di sicurezza sono The safety valve’s data are given on the inspec-
indicati sul certificato di collaudo. tion certificate
Page 9/42
MANUALE USO E USE AND MAINTENANCE
MANUTENZIONE MANUAL
Page 10/42
MANUALE USO E USE AND MAINTENANCE
MANUTENZIONE MANUAL
s s
e quella fornita dal fluido di processo.
ATTENZIONE! WARNING!
! 1) La leva alza-otturatore, atta a consentire ! 1) The disc-lifting lever, for the safety valve
l’apertura manuale della valvola di sicurezza, hand actuation, allows a partial disc lift only.
consente di ottenere solo l’alzata parziale dell’ottu- 2) Do not use the lifting lever for the valve transpor-
ratore. tation and handling,
2) Non utilizzare la leva alza-otturatore per le ope-
razioni di movimentazione della valvola.
Alcuni dei principali componenti della valvola di Some of the safety valve’s main parts are illustrat-
sicurezza sono illustrati in figura: ed in the figure below:
®®
Page 11/42
MANUALE USO E USE AND MAINTENANCE
MANUTENZIONE MANUAL
3 INSTALLAZIONE 3 INSTALLATION
s s
date of delivery of the valve.
vimento della valvola.
ATTENZIONE ! WARNING !
Assicurarsi che la piombatura non abbia Make sure that the lead seals have not
subito danneggiamenti. (vedi fig. 1) been damaged. (see fig. 1)
s s
movimenti bruschi che possano provocare perico-
lose oscillazioni della valvola.
ATTENZIONE ! WARNING !
Non utilizzare la leva alza-otturatore per le operazio- Do not handle the valve by the disc-lifthing lever
ni di movimentazione della valvola. (vedi fig. 2) (see fig. 2)
fig. 4
pict. 4
fig. 1 fig. 2 fig. 3
pict. 1 pict. 2 pict. 3
Page 12/42
MANUALE USO E USE AND MAINTENANCE
MANUTENZIONE MANUAL
ATTENZIONE ! s s
!
WARNING: the valve must be instal-
L’installazione della valvola deve
essere effettuata da PERSONALE led by QUALIFIED STAFF who have
QUALIFICATO e che abbia letto con read this manual carefully.
attenzione il presente manuale.
+ Sugli impianti devono essere installate valvole i cui + Only install valves manufactured from materials
materiali di costruzione siano idonei ad operare that are suitable for operation under the particular
nelle condizioni previste (natura e stato fisico del design conditions of the plant where they are to
fluido, pressione e temperatura di esercizio, function (nature and physical state of the fluid,
ambiente esterno); external environment).
+ verificare che gli attacchi delle valvole di sicurezza + Check that the safety valve’s connections (and in
siano conformi alle specifiche dell’impianto su cui particular the sizing of connection pipe to valve
devono essere installate; in par ticolare, nel dimen- inlet) are correct for the specifications of their
sionamento del bocchello di attacco della valvola, intended installation; bear in mind the forces and
tenere in opportuna considerazione le forze e i moments generated by the passage of the fluid
momenti generati dal passaggio del fluido attraver- through the valve.
so la valvola.
+ se lo scarico avviene in atmosfera, direzionare la + If the valve discharges to the open air, direct the
valvola in maniera tale da non provocare danni a valve in such a way as not to cause injury to peo-
persone o cose ple or damage to property
+ installare la valvola con il cappello in verticale e + Install the valve with the bonnet on top and upright.
rivolto verso l’alto.
+ apporre, in funzione dell’installazione, apposite + Affix suitable warning boards, depending on the
indicazioni (cartelli) che informino sui rischi residui installation, giving notice of potential hazards from
degli organi in movimento (moto) e della tempera- moving parts (e.g. the spring) and working tempe-
tura di esercizio. rature.
Page 13/42
MANUALE USO E USE AND MAINTENANCE
MANUTENZIONE MANUAL
Page 14/42
MANUALE USO E USE AND MAINTENANCE
MANUTENZIONE MANUAL
FY
FX
Page 15/42
MANUALE USO E USE AND MAINTENANCE
MANUTENZIONE MANUAL
Le valvole di sicurezza BESA, sono idonee ad BESA safety valves are suitable for installation
essere installate in combinazione con dischi di in combination with rupture discs arranged
rottura posti sia a monte che a valle delle stes- either upstream or downstream of the valve.
se. Nel caso di applicazioni di tale genere, è The rupture discs used in such applications
necessario prevedere, dal punto di vista strut- must be guaranteed non-fragmenting, from
turale, l'utilizzo di dischi di rottura per i quali the structural point of view. For the fluid
sia garantita la non frammentazione. Dal punto dynamics, on the other hand, any rupture disc
di vista fluidodinamico, invece, nel caso di sited upstream of the valve must be installed
disco montato a monte della valvola, l'installa- in such a way that:
zione deve essere realizzata in maniera tale 1) rupture disc flowing diameter is larger than
che: or equal to safety valve’s nominal inlet diame-
1°) il diametro di passaggio del fluido del disco ter
di rottura sia superiore o uguale al diametro 2) the total pressure drop (calculated from the
nominale di entrata della valvola di sicurezza nominal flow capacity multiplied by 1.15) from
2°) la perdita di carico totale (calcolata consi- the protected tank inlet to the valve inlet flange
derando la portata nominale moltiplicata per is less than 3% of the safety valve’s effective
1.15), dall'imbocco del tronchetto del recipien- set pressure. The space between the rupture
te protetto alla flangia di ingresso della valvo- disc and the valve must be vented to a 1/4”
la, sia inferiore al 3% della pressione relativa di pipe in such a way as to ensure that atmos-
taratura della valvola di sicurezza. Lo spazio pheric pressure is properly and safely main-
fra il disco di rottura e la valvola deve essere tained. For correct sizing of discs in terms of
provvisto di un foro (1/4") di sfiato convogliato fluid dynamics, the factor Fd (EN ISO 4126-3
in maniera idonea e sicura ed in modo adatto Pages 12. 13) must be taken into account, and
ad assicurare il mantenimento della pressione can be taken to be 0. 9.
atmosferica. Per il dimensionamento fluidodi-
namico, occorre considerare il fattore Fd (EN
ISO 4126-3 Pagg. 12,13) che può essere
assunto pari a 0,9.
Page 16/42
MANUALE USO E USE AND MAINTENANCE
MANUTENZIONE MANUAL
È buona norma che le valvole di sicurezza installa- It is good practice to check safety valves installed
te a protezione di impianti a vapore d’acqua venga- to protect steam systems regularly (once a week),
no periodicamente azionate (una volta alla settima- by operating them manually with the plant under
na), ossia fatte funzionare, con impianto in pressio- pressure using the manual disc lifting lever.
ne, mediante l’azionamento della leva di solleva-
mento manuale dell’otturatore.
Verificare una volta all’anno la taratura delle valvo- The setting of the safety valves should be checked
le di sicurezza direttamente sull’impianto oppure once a year, either in situ or on a test bench.
tramite prova su banco.
Page 17/42
MANUALE USO E USE AND MAINTENANCE
MANUTENZIONE MANUAL
In particolare, il Diametro Nominale (DN) del tron- In particular, the Nominal Diameter (ND) of the inlet
chetto d’ingresso deve essere maggiore o uguale connection pipe must not be smaller than the ND
al DN d’attacco della valvola di sicurezza; in ogni of its connection at the safety valve; and under no
caso la perdita di carico massima all’entrata non circumstances may the maximum pressure loss at
deve superare il 3% della pressione di taratura. the inlet exceed 3% of the set pressure.
Per quanto concerne, invece, le perdite di carico As for pressure losses in the discharge pipe, the
nel tubo di convogliamento dello scarico, i valori permitted values are shown on the BESA test cer-
ammessi sono riportati sul certificato di collaudo tificate.
BESA. When calculating the pressure losses (upstream or
Nel calcolo delle perdite di carico, sia a monte che downstream) the capacity declared on the BESA
a valle della valvola, è necessario moltiplicare x test certificate must be multiplied by 1.15.
1,15 la portata dichiarata sul certificato di collaudo
BESA.
Page 18/42
MANUALE USO E USE AND MAINTENANCE
MANUTENZIONE MANUAL
s s
esercizio, salvo diversa indicazione da parte di BESA a
fronte di opportuna verifica.
Attenzione! ! WARNING! !
Assicurarsi che dal foro di sfiato/ispezione non Make sure that no foreign object gets inside the
entri all’interno della valvola di sicurezza alcun safety valve through the vent/inspection hole;
oggetto o elemento capace di comprometterne il this could compromise its proper functioning
corretto funzionamento (vedere anche l’Analisi (see also the Risk analysis on page 48 of this
dei rischi a pag. 48 del presente Manuale). manual).
Page 19/42
MANUALE USO E USE AND MAINTENANCE
MANUTENZIONE MANUAL
4.7 VALVOLAEQUIPAGGIATACON
ATTUATORE PNEUMATICO 4.7 SAFETY VALVE
(VALVOLA ASSISTITA IN EQUIPPED WITH
ACCORDO A UNI EN ISO PNEUMATIC ACTUATOR
4126-1 CAP. 3 PAR. 3.1.1.2) (ACCORDING TO UNI EN
ISO 4126-1 CAP. 3 PAR. 3.1.1.2)
La funzione dell’attuatore pneumatico, è
quella di consentire l’alzata completa dell’ot- The pneumatic actuator allows the complete
turatore, in maniera comandata ed indipen- disc lifting, remote controlled and independ-
dentemente dalla pressione di esercizio del ently from the working pressure of the
fluido di processo. Le caratteristiche process fluid. Technical details (components,
costruttive e di funzionamento dell’attuatore material of construction and supply) are
(componenti, materiali di costruzione, ali- specified (when applicable) on the assembly
mentazione), sono specificate (se applica- drawing attached to this manual.
bile) sul disegno d’assieme allegato al pre-
sente manuale.
Page 20/42
MANUALE USO E USE AND MAINTENANCE
MANUTENZIONE MANUAL
vanti dalla sovrapressione. È necessario, pertanto, tected by the safety valve is operating, that is when
rimuovere la “vite di blocco” dal cappuccio della there is the possibility that the allowed limits of
valvola, quando l’impianto, a protezione del quale pressure are reached or exceeded.
è stata posta la valvola di sicurezza, è in esercizio, After having removed the “test gag”, the hole on
ossia quando sussiste la possibilità che vengano the cap must be closed with the “plug screw” (
raggiunti e superati i limiti ammessi di pressione. short and green coloured)
Dopo aver rimosso la “vite di blocco”, il foro sul Both the screws (“test gag”, long and red coloured;
cappuccio deve essere chiuso mediante la “vite “plug screw”, short and green coloured ) are con-
tappo” (corta e di colore verde), di cui è dotata la nected to the safety valve with a sealed lead wire.
valvola di sicurezza. Entrambe le viti (“vite di bloc- If the valve is gastight (cap H2 or H4) and without
co”, lunga e di colore rosso; “vite tappo”, corta e di bellow, the “plug screw” must be applied (using
colore verde) sono collegate alla valvola di sicurez- gaskets compatible with the operating conditions)
za mediante filo piombato. Se la valvola è del tipo in order to guarantee the valve tightness.
a tenuta (cappuccio H4 o H2) e sprovvista di sof-
fietto, l’applicazione della “vite tappo” deve essere
eseguita in maniera tale da garantire la tenuta della
valvola. A tale scopo utilizzare guarnizioni compa-
tibili con le condizioni di esercizio (natura del fluido
s s
e temperatura).
ATTENZIONE: ! ATTENTION: !
Affinché la valvola di sicurezza possa garan- In order to allow the safety valve protecting
tire la protezione dell’impianto dalla sovra- the plant from overpressure, it is necessary
pressione, è necessario rimuovere la “vite di to remove the “test gag”
blocco”.
Page 21/42
MANUALE USO E USE AND MAINTENANCE
MANUTENZIONE MANUAL
s s
ciò si verificasse, intervenire nel più breve tempo found, action must be taken to restore a proper
possibile per il ripristino della corretta tenuta. seal without delay.
ATTENZIONE ! WARNING !
una cessazione spontanea del trafilamento If a leak stops of its own accord, this could
rilevato, può significare l’incollamento delle mean that the seal surfaces are sticking,
superfici di tenuta, con conseguente bloc- which might jam the valve.
caggio della valvola.
Page 22/42
MANUALE USO E USE AND MAINTENANCE
MANUTENZIONE MANUAL
canto suo, BESA provvede a dotare sempre di foro di safety valves intended for discharging water or super-
drenaggio le valvole di sicurezza destinate a scaricare heated water (the threaded hole is located on the closed-
acqua o acqua surriscaldata (il foro filettato è posto sul type valve bonnet).
cappello valvola, tipo chiuso). As in the case of bellow-equipped valves which have a
Come nel caso delle valvole dotate di soffietto e di rela- bellow inspection hole on the valve bonnet, the User
tivo foro di ispezione posto sul cappello valvola, l’Utente must make sure that the fluid to be discharged from the
deve avere la cura di convogliare il fluido destinato ad
drain hole is piped away in such a manner that its dis-
essere scaricato dal foro di drenaggio, in modo che lo
scarico di tale fluido non costituisca pericolo alcuno per charge does not endanger people or property in any way.
s s
persone o cose.
ATTENZIONE! ! WARNING! !
Assicurarsi che dal foro di sfiato/ispezione non Make sure that no foreign object gets inside the
entri all’interno della valvola di sicurezza alcun safety valve through the vent/inspection hole;
oggetto o elemento capace di comprometterne il this could compromise its proper functioning
corretto funzionamento (vedere anche l’Analisi (see also the Risk analysis on page 48 of this
s s
dei rischi a pag. 48 del presente Manuale). manual).
ATTENZIONE! ! WARNING! !
È Buona norma, dopo ogni intervento delle valvo- It is good practice after carrying out any work on
la di sicurezza, eseguire un controllo della stessa a safety valve to check that it is clean and work-
al fine di verificarne lo stato di pulizia e l’efficenza. ing properly.
5 MANUTENZIONE 5 MAINTENANCE
5.1 INFORMAZIONI GENERALI 5.1 GENERAL INFORMATION
+ Usare solo pezzi di ricambio originali BESA. + Use only genuine BESA spare parts.
+ Le operazioni di manutenzione devono esse- + All maintenance operations should be car-
re svolte presso l’officina BESA o da perso- ried out either at the BESA workshop or by
nale dell’utente, o di aziende esterne, appo- duly BESA-trained and BESA-authorised
sitamente addestrato e autorizzato da BESA. staff (whether employees of the user or of an
Ogni intervento non autorizzato determina outside contractor).
la cessazione della responsabilità BESA BESA declines all liability for the product
sul prodotto. following any unauthorised servicing.
+ La vita utile della valvola di sicurezza è 20 + The safety valve’s working life is 20 years,
anni, con revisione generale a 10 anni dalla provided it is given a general overhaul after
fornitura. La vita utile è comunque subordina- 10 years. This working life depends however
ta alle condizioni di impiego: tipo del fluido, on the conditions of use: type of fluid, envi-
condizioni ambientali e di esercizio (pressio- ronmental and operating conditions (pres-
ne e temperatura). sure and temperature).
+ Le valvole di sicurezza che non sono mai + Safety valves which have not blown must be
intervenute, devono essere revisionate alme- overhauled at least every two years.
no ogni due anni. Safety valves which have blown, on the
Le valvole che, invece, sono intervenute, other hand, must be checked for fluid leaks
devono essere tenute sotto controllo al fine di and overhauled as soon as possible. Any
appurare che non vi sia trafilamento di fluido valves which show signs of fluid leakage
e sottoposte a revisione non appena possibi- must be overhauled without delay.
le. Le valvole che manifestano trafilamento di
fluido, devono essere al più presto sottopo-
ste a revisione.
L’attività di revisione consiste nella verifica dell’ef- Overhauling consists in safety valve’s proper
ficienza della valvola di sicurezza, ovvero della working inspection, i.e. set pressure, disc lift,
taratura, dell’alzata dell’otturatore, dello stato di materials integrity checkout.
conservazione dei materiali.
®
Page 23/42
MANUALE USO E USE AND MAINTENANCE
MANUTENZIONE MANUAL
Qualora la valvola fosse installata su contenitori di If the valve is installed on vessels containing acids,
acidi, utilizzare indumenti di protezione individua- personal protective gear such as GOGGLES,
le quale OCCHIALI, GUANTI ecc. secondo le pre- GLOVES etc. should be worn in accordance with
scrizioni di legge vigenti nei luoghi di utilizzo. local legal and regulatory requirements.
s s
rischi, pag. 38 del presente manuale). of this manual).
ATTENZIONE
! !
WARNING
BESA non si assume nessuna responsabilità BESA declines all liability in cases of unau-
per interventi non autorizzati! thorised servicing!
Page 24/42
MANUALE USO E USE AND MAINTENANCE
MANUTENZIONE MANUAL
s s
TIPO CAPPUCCIO H3
ATTENZIONE ! WARNING !
BESA non è più responsabile della valvola BESA declines all liability for the valve fol-
dopo riparazioni, ritarature, sostituzione di lowing any repair, re-setting, replacement of
pezzi o qualsiasi altro intervento eseguito parts or any other operation whatsoever
senza la sua autorizzazione. carried out without its authorisation.
GRUBSCREW
Page 25/42
MANUALE USO E USE AND MAINTENANCE
MANUTENZIONE MANUAL
PROCEDURA PROCEDURE
1) Prima di rimuovere il piombino verificare 1) Before removing the leaden seal, check the
l’impronta stampigliata. mark stamped on it.
2) Togliere il seeger facendo leva con la punta 2) Remove the Seeger ring by levering off with
del cacciavite. the screwdriver blade.
6) Allentare il controdado utilizzando la chiave 6) Loosen the lock nut with a wrench.
fissa.
7) Regolare la pressione di taratura bloccando 7) Adjust the set pressure by holding the spin-
l’asta e agendo sulla vite di pressione. dle still and turning the pressure adjustment
Ruotando in senso orario la vite di pressio- screw.
ne, si incrementa la compressione della Turn the pressure adjustment screw clock-
molla aumentando, di conseguenza, la wise to increase the compression of the
pressione di taratura. spring, so increasing the set pressure.
Ruotando la vite in senso antiorario, invece, Turn the pressure adjustment screw anti-
si ottiene l’abbassamento della pressione clockwise to reduce the set pressure.
di taratura.
8) Per il montaggio ripetere in senso inverso le 8) To reassemble, reverse the above steps.
operazioni suddette.
Page 26/42
MANUALE USO E USE AND MAINTENANCE
MANUTENZIONE MANUAL
5.6.2 VALVOLE SERIE: 130 - 240 - 250 5.6.2 130 - 240 - 250 - 249 - 260 –
- 249 - 260 - 271 - 280 - 290 271 - 280 - 290 SERIES VALVES
CON DISPOSITIVO DI SOLLEVAMENTO WITH MANUAL DISC LIFTING DEVI-
MANUALE DELL’OTTURATORE CE H4 TYPE CAP
s s
TIPO CAPPUCCIO H4
ATTENZIONE
! WARNING
!
BESA non è più responsabile della valvola BESA declines all liability for the valve follo-
dopo riparazioni, ritarature, sostituzione di wing any repair, re-setting, replacement of
pezzi o qualsiasi altro intervento eseguito parts or any other operation whatsoever
senza la sua autorizzazione. carried out without its authorisation.
Page 27/42
MANUALE USO E USE AND MAINTENANCE
MANUTENZIONE MANUAL
PROCEDURA PROCEDURE
Le seguenti operazioni devono essere ese- The following operations must be carried
guite al banco. out at the work bench.
1) Prima di rimuovere il piombino verifica- 1) Before removing the leaden seal, check the
re l’impronta stampigliata. mark stamped on it.
4) Agire sulla vite di regolazione come per 4) Turn the pressure adjustment screw as
il dispositivo H3. described for the H3 unit.
Page 28/42
MANUALE USO E USE AND MAINTENANCE
MANUTENZIONE MANUAL
ATTENZIONE s
!
BESA non è più responsabile della valvola
WARNING! s
!
BESA declines all liability for the valve follo-
dopo riparazioni, ritarature, sostituzione di wing any repair, re-setting, replacement of
pezzi o qualsiasi altro intervento eseguito parts or any other operation whatsoever
senza la sua autorizzazione. carried out without its authorisation.
Page 29/42
MANUALE USO E USE AND MAINTENANCE
MANUTENZIONE MANUAL
PROCEDURA PROCEDURE
Le seguenti operazioni devono essere ese- The following operations must be carried
guite al banco. out at the work bench.
1) Prima di rimuovere il piombino verificare 1) Before removing the leaden seal, check the
l’impronta stampigliata. mark stamped on it.
2) Togliere la spina ed estrarre il pomello. 2) Remove the pin and extract the knob.
3) Svitare il cappuccio. Nella versione H4 il 3) Unscrew the cap. In the H4 version the cap
cappuccio è dotato di un O-RING. is fitted with an O-RING.
Controllarne lo stato e l’efficienza. Check its condition and effectiveness
5) Regolare la pressione di taratura bloccando 5) Adjust the set pressure by holding the spin-
l’asta e agendo sulla vite di pressione. dle still and turning the pressure adjustment
Ruotando in senso orario la vite di pressio- screw. Turn the pressure adjustment screw
ne, si incrementa la compressione della clockwise to increase the compression of
molla aumentando, di conseguenza, la the spring, so increasing the set pressure.
pressione di taratura. Turn the pressure adjustment screw anti-
Ruotando la vite in senso antiorario, invece, clockwise to reduce the set pressure.
si ottiene l’abbassamento della pressione
di taratura.
6) To reassemble, reverse the above steps.
6) Per il montaggio ripetere in senso inverso le
operazioni suddette.
Page 30/42
MANUALE USO E USE AND MAINTENANCE
MANUTENZIONE MANUAL
ATTENZIONE! ! s
BESA non è più responsabile della val-
WARNING! s !
BESA declines all liability for the valve
vola dopo riparazioni, ritarature, sostitu- following any repair, re-setting, replace-
zione di pezzi o qualsiasi altro interven- ment of parts or any other operation
to eseguito senza la sua autorizzazione. whatsoever carried out without its
authorisation. .
Page 31/42
MANUALE USO E USE AND MAINTENANCE
MANUTENZIONE MANUAL
PROCEDURA PROCEDURE
Le seguenti operazioni devono essere ese- The following operations must be carried
guite al banco. out at the work bench.
1) Prima di rimuovere il piombino verificare 1) Before removing the leaden seal, check the
l’impronta stampigliata. mark stamped on it.
2) Svitare il cappuccio utilizzando una chiave 2) Unscrew the cap using a wrench.
fissa.
3) Loosen the lock nut.
3) Allentare il controdado.
4) Turn the pressure adjustment screw as
4) Agire sulla vite di regolazione come per il described for the H3 unit.
dispositivo H3.
5) To reassemble, reverse the above steps.
5) Per il montaggio ripetere in senso inverso le
operazioni suddette.
Page 32/42
MANUALE USO E USE AND MAINTENANCE
MANUTENZIONE MANUAL
ATTENZIONE ! s
BESA non è più responsabile della
WARNING s !
BESA declines all liability for the
valvola dopo riparazioni, ritarature, valve following any repair, re-setting,
sostituzione di pezzi o qualsiasi altro replacement of parts or any other
intervento eseguito senza la sua operation whatsoever carried out
autorizzazione without its authorisation
PROCEDURA PROCEDURE
Page 33/42
MANUALE USO E USE AND MAINTENANCE
MANUTENZIONE MANUAL
5) Bloccare l’asta (7) in modo che non possa 5) Preventing the spindle (7) from turning, fully
(12).
girare e contemporaneamente svitare com- unscrew the pressure adjustment screw
pletamente la vite di regolazione (12).
6) Svitare i dadi della flangia del cappello 6) Remove the bonnet flange nuts
(solo per serie 240 - 250 - 260 - 130 - 280 - (only for 240 - 250 - 260 - 130 - 280 - 290
290 - 271). - 271 series).
plate (9).
8) Sfilare la ralla portamolla supe- 8) Take out the top spring
riore (9).
Page 34/42
MANUALE USO E USE AND MAINTENANCE
MANUTENZIONE MANUAL
12) Pulire la sede, l’otturatore e l’interno del 12) Clean seating, disc and inside of valve
corpo. housing.
13) Rimontare l’asta con il piattello di guida e 13) Reassemble the spindle with guide
l’otturatore. plate and disc.
14) Montare l’anello in due metà con il relati- 14) Assemble the split ring with its safety ring
vo anello di sicurezza nella scanalatura in the spindle grooves, and fit the bottom
dell’asta e infilare la ralla spring plate.
inferiore.
15) Fit the spring.
15) Montare la molla.
RALLA SUPERIORE
TOP SPRING PLATE
16) Fit the top spring plate
16) Infilare la ralla superiore onto the spindle.
sull’asta.
MOLLA
17) Fit the bonnet by sliding
17) Montare il cappello introdu- SPRING the spindle into the pres-
cendo l’asta nella vite di sure adjustment screw.
regolazione.
Page 35/42
MANUALE USO E USE AND MAINTENANCE
MANUTENZIONE MANUAL
Per qualsiasi problema o informazione For any problem or query, contact BESA
contattare il Servizio di assistenza tecni- Technical Support at the address given
ca BESA all’indirizzo riportato a pagina 5 on page 5 of this manual.
del presente manuale.
Riportiamo di seguito l’elenco delle parti di The list of available spare parts is given
ricambio disponibili: below:
Page 36/42
MANUALE USO E USE AND MAINTENANCE
MANUTENZIONE MANUAL
6. IMMAGAZZINAMENTO 6. STORAGE
Qualora non si voglia utilizzare la valvola If the valve is not to be used for a while,
per un certo periodo, si consigliano le the following steps are recommended:
seguenti operazioni:
s s
li atte a salvaguardare l’ambiente.
ATTENZIONE ! WARNING !
Assicurarsi della completa assenza Make sure there is no fluid inside the
di fluido all’interno della valvola valve
Page 37/42
ANALISI DEI RISCHI
Page 38/42
Page 39/42
ANALISI DEI RISCHI
Rottura del corpo-valvola e/o della Sforzo dovuto a carichi esterni, per es. Perdita di fluido e possibili danni a Fermare l’impianto e contattare
®
tubazione di collegamento al sistema. espansione termica. persone o cose. l’Assistenza tecnica BESA.
Rottura del corpo-valvola e/o della Corrosione causata dal tipo di fluido e/o Perdita di fluido e possibili danni a Fermare l’impianto e contattare
tubazione di collegamento al sistema. dalle condizioni ambientali. persone o cose. l’Assistenza tecnica BESA.
®
Page 40/42
Presence of foreign matters between the
spring turns avoid the opening of the
ANALISYS OF RISKS
valve.
®
Pulsating flow of medium.
Vibrations induced by mechanic causes.
Page 41/42
ANALISYS OF RISKS
®
NOTE NOTES
MAINTENANCE REGISTRATION
Page 42/42
BESA S.p.A.
VALVOLE DI SICUREZZA
MANUALE USO E MANUTENZIONE
Ed. Maggio 2014
®
5
MANOMETRI/PRESSURE GAUGES
IDROMETRI/WATER GAUGES
CARATTERISTICHE COSTRUTTIVE modelli 543-544-545-546
CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATIONS models 543-544-545-546
Manometri industriali con elemento elastico a “C” tipo Bourdon. Strumenti realizzati per l’impiego generale con
fluidi liquidi o gassosi che non corrodano le leghe di rame e temperatura d’esercizio da -25 +80 °C.
Industrial pressure gauges with flexible “C” type Bourdon elements. Instruments designed for general use with li-
quid or gaseous fluids that do not corrode copper alloys at working temperatures from -25 to +80 °C
GRADO DI PROTEZIONE: IP 55
LEVEL OF PROTECTION: IP 55
543 Manometro attacco verticale 543 Vertical connection pressure gauge
544 Idrometro attacco verticale 544 Vertical connection waterr gauge
545 Vuotometro attacco verticale 545 Vertical connection vacuum gauge
546 Manovuotometro attacco verticale 546 Vertical connection pressure/vacuum gauge
DN 60-80-100 DN 60-80-100
PRECISIONE: classe 1,6 - 1xDN 80 e 100 PRECISION: class 1,6 - 1 for DN 80 and
CASSA E PERNO: in ottone nichelato 100
CALOTTA: in acciaio inox CASE & PIN: in nickel-plated brass
MOLLA BOURDON: in bronzo fosforoso COVER: in stainless steel
MOVIMENTO AMPLIFICATORE: in lega d’orologeria BOURDON SPRING: in phosphor bronze
QUADRANTE: in alluminio bianco con AMPLIFYING MOVEMENT: in horology alloy
graduazione in nero DIAL: in white aluminium with scale
LANCETTA: in alluminio ossidato nero in black
TRASPARENTE: in vetro HAND: in black oxidised aluminium
GRADO DI PROTEZIONE: IP 44 DIAL COVER: in glass
LEVEL OF PROTECTION: IP 44
DN 80-100-125-150-200-250
PRECISIONE: classe 1,6 - 1
DN 80-100-125-150-200-250
CASSA E ANELLO: in AISI 304 PRECISION: class 1,6 - 1
PERNO E ATTACCO AL PROCESSO:OT 58 CASE & RING: in AISI 304
MOLLA BOURDON: in bronzo fosforoso PROCESS CONNECTION PIN: OT 58
MOVIMENTO AMPLIFICATORE: in lega d’orologeria BOURDON SPRING: in phosphor bronze
QUADRANTE: in alluminio bianco con AMPLIFYING MOVEMENT: in horology alloy
graduazioni in nero DIAL: in white aluminium with scale
LANCETTA: in alluminio ossidato nero in black
TRASPARENTE: in vetro HAND: in black oxidised aluminium
GUARNIZIONE: in neoprene DIAL COVER: in glass
GRADO DI PROTEZIONE: IP 55 SEAL: in neoprene
LEVEL OF PROTECTION: IP 55
CARATTERISTICHE COSTRUTTIVE modelli 549-550-562
CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATIONS models 549-550-562
Manometri industriali con elemento elastico a “C” tipo Bourdon. Strumenti realizzati per l’impiego generale con
fluidi liquidi o gassosi che non corrodano le leghe di rame e temperatura d’esercizio da -25 +80 °C.
Industrial pressure gauges with flexible “C” type Bourdon elements. Instruments designed for general use with li-
quid or gaseous fluids that do not corrode copper alloys at working temperature from -25 to +80 °C
549 Manometro attacco posteriore 550 Manometro attacco posteriore con flangia
549 Rear connection pressure gauge 550 Rear connection pressure gauge with flange
562 Idrometro attacco posteriore
562 Rear connection water gauge
DN 60-80-100 DN 60-80-100
PRECISIONE: classe 1,6 - 1x DN 80 e PRECISION: class 1,6 - 1 for DN 80 and
100 100
CASSA E PERNO: in ottone nichelato CASE & PIN: in nickel-plated brass
CALOTTA: in acciaio inox COVER: in stainless steel
MOLLA BOURDON: in bronzo fosforoso BOURDON SPRING: in phosphor bronze
MOVIMENTO AMPLIFICATORE: in lega d’orologeria AMPLIFYING MOVEMENT: in horology alloy
QUADRANTE: in alluminio bianco con DIAL: in white aluminium with scale
graduazione in nero in black
LANCETTA: in alluminio ossidato nero HAND: in black oxidised aluminium
TRASPARENTE: in vetro DIAL COVER: in glass
GRADO DI PROTEZIONE: IP 44 LEVEL OF PROTECTION: IP 44
DN 80-100-125-150-200-250 DN 80-100-125-150-200-250
PRECISIONE: classe 1,6 - 1 PRECISION: class 1,6 - 1
CASSA E ANELLO: in AISI 304 CASE & RING: in AISI 304
PERNO E ATTACCO AL PROCESSO: OT 58 PROCESS CONNECTION PIN: OT 58
MOLLA BOURDON: in bronzo fosforoso BOURDON SPRING: in phosphor bronze
MOVIMENTO AMPLIFICATORE: in lega d’orologeria AMPLIFYING MOVEMENT: in horology alloy
QUADRANTE: in alluminio bianco con DIAL: in white aluminium with scale
graduazioni in nero in black
LANCETTA: in alluminio ossidato nero HAND: in black oxidised aluminium
TRASPARENTE: in vetro DIAL COVER: in glass
GUARNIZIONE: in neoprene SEAL: in neoprene
GRADO DI PROTEZIONE: IP 55 LEVEL OF PROTECTION: IP 55
CARATTERISTICHE COSTRUTTIVE modello 551
CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATIONS models 551
DN 60-80
PRECISIONE: classe 1,6
CASSA E CALOTTA: in acciaio cromato
PERNO ATTACCO AL PROCESSO: in ottone nichelato
MOLLA BOURDON: in bronzo fosforoso
MOVIMENTO AMPLIFICATORE: in lega d’orologeria
QUADRANTE: in alluminio bianco con graduazioni in nero
LANCETTA: in alluminio ossidato nero
TRASPARENTE: in vedril o vetro
GUARNIZIONE: in neoprene
GRADO DI PROTEZIONE: IP 44
DN 60-80
PRECISION: class 1,6
CASE & COVER: in chrome-plated steel
PROCESS CONNECTION PIN: in nickel-plated brass
BOURDON SPRING: in phosphor bronze
AMPLIFYING MOVEMENT: in horology alloy
DIAL: in white aluminium with scale in black
HAND: in black oxidised aluminium 551 - Manometro da cruscotto
DIAL COVER: in vedril or tempered glass 551 - Dashboard gauge
SEAL: in neoprene
LEVEL OF PROTECTION: IP 44
CONTATTI ELETTRICI
ELECTRICAL CONTACTS
Sono dispositivi che servono per aprire o chiudere dei circuiti elettrici. - Sono costituiti da contatti mobili in aria posizionabili sui 270 °C della scala.
Sono costruiti normalmente in argento; in severe condizioni di lavoro si consiglia il platino, mentre in presenza di vibrazioni sarà necessario
equipaggiarli con blocchetti magnetici. - Esecuzione possibile a tutti gli apparecchi superiori al DN 80.
CARATTERISTICHE ELETTRICHE
Contatti in aria normale: tensione max 220 V - potenza di rottura 10 VA - intensità di corrente max
0,4 A.
Contatti in aria con blocchetto magnetico: tensione max 220 V - potenza di rottura 30 VA -
intensità di corrente max 0,4 A.
PRECISIONE DI LETTURA
Contatti elettrici in aria normali: semplici ± 0,5%; doppi ± 1,5%
Contatti elettrici in aria con blocchetto magnetico: semplici ± 1%, doppi ± 2%
These are the devices used to open and close the electrical circuits. They are made up of mobile air
contacts which can be set over 270°C from the scale. They are normally constructed in silver; in heavy
duty working conditions platinum contacts are advised, while if there is vibration they must be fitted with
magnetic blocks. Versions possible for all equipment higher than DN 80.
ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS
Normal air contacts: max voltage 220 V - breaking power 10 VA - current strength 0,4 A. max
Air contacts with magnetic blocks: max voltage 220 V - breaking power 30 VA - current strength 0,4
A. max
READING PRECISION
Normal air contacts: single ± 0,5%; double ± 1,5%
Air contacts with magnetic blocks: single ± 1%, double ± 2%
Vuotometro 545 / Vacuum gauge 545 Manovuotometro 546 pressure/ Vacuum gauge 546
DIMENSIONI / DIMENSIONS
Tipo R - R/P / R - R/P Type Tipo P - P/I / P - P/I Type
556/1
558/E
560
558
556/P
556
559
557
556/P - R UBINETTI A PULSANTE PER GAS 556/P - P USH - BUTTON GAS TAPS
Costruzione in bronzo - PN 4 bar - attacco F F 1/4” - 3/8” - Made in bronze - PN 4 bar - F F 1/4” - 3/8” - 1/2”
1/2” connection
556 - R UBINETTI PORTAMANOMETRI A TRE VIE 556 - T HREE - WAY GAUGE HOLDING TAPS
Costruzione in bronzo - adatti per pressione fino a 16 bar - Made in bronze - suitable for pressures up to 16 bars - M F
attacchi M F 1/4” - 3/8” - 1/2” - tipo C/FLANGIA - tipo 1/4” - 3/8” - 1/2” connections - FLANGE type - FLANGE &
C/FLANGIA E PREMISTOPPA STUFFING type
556/I - R UBINETTI PORTAMANOMETRI INOX 556/I - S TAINLESS STEEL GAUGE HOLDING TAPS
Costruzione in acciaio inox AISI 316 adatti per pressioni fino a Made in AISI 316 stainless steel suitable for pressures up to
400 bar - attacchi M F 3/8” - 1/2” - tipo C/FLANGIA E PRE- 400 bars - M F 3/8” - 1/2” connections FLANGE & STUFFING
MISTOPPA type
557 - R UBINETTI PORTAMANOMETRI A DUE VIE 557 - T WO - WAY GAUGE HOLDING TAPS
Costruzione in bronzo - adatti per pressioni fino a 16 bar - Made in bronze - suitable for pressures up to 16 bars - M F
attacchi M F 1/4” - 3/8” - 1/2” 1/4” - 3/8” - 1/2” connections
558 - R ACCORDI SPECIALI ELASTICI - T IPO CIRCOLARE 558 - S PECIAL CIRCULAR TYPE FLEXIBLE CONNECTIONS
Costruzione in rame e ottone - tipo pesante - Costruzione in Versions in cooper and brass - heavy duty type – in stainless
acciaio inox - Costruzione in acciaio al carbonio - attacchi steel – in carbon steel – Fixed male and rotating female 1/4”
Maschio fisso - Femmina girevole 1/4” - 3/8” - 1/2” - 3/8” - 1/2” connections
560 - R ACCORDI SPECIALI ELASTICI - T IPO DIAPASON 560 - S PECIAL DIAPASON TYPE FLEXIBLE CONNECTIONS
Costruzione in rame e ottone - tipo pesante - Costruzione in Versions in copper and brass – heavy duty type – in stainless
acciaio inox - Costruzione in acciaio al carbonio - attacchi steel – in carbon steel – Fixed male and rotating female
Maschio fisso - Femmina girevole 1/4” - 3/8” - 1/2” 1/4” - 3/8” 1/2” connections
559 - A MMORTIZZATORI PER COLPI D ’ ARIETE 559 - S HOCK ABSORBERS AGAINST WATER HAMMERING
Costruzione in ottone nichelato - Costruzione in acciaio inox - Versions in nickel-plated brass – in stainless steel – 1/4” - 3/8”
attacchi 1/4” - 3/8” - 1/2” - 1/2” connections
558/E - R ACCORDI SPECIALI ELASTICI - T IPO CIRCOLARE 558/E - S PECIAL CIRCULAR TYPE FLEXIBLE CONNECTIONS
Costruzione in rame e ottone - attacchi Maschio fisso - Made in copper and brass – Fixed male and rotating female
Femmina girevole 3/8” - 1/2” 3/8” - 1/2” connections
F ratelli MaGNi s.r.l. Uffici e Stabilimento - 20064 GOrGONZOla (Mi) - Via PariNi, 60
teleFONO 02.95.30.28.68-69-60 ric. aut. - teleFaX 02.95.30.00.91 - C.F. / P.iVa 00686490152
email: info@fratellimagni.com - website: www.fratellimagni.com
FRATELLIMAGNI
PRATICA OPERATIVA
S.A.S.
CONTENTS
1. OBJECT
1.0 OBJECT
This operative documents related the working method for using and upkeeping of gauges.
ATTENTION:
INSTRUCTIONS.
¾ The installation of the gauge must be done only after checking the characteristics of
the gauge with the plant and the process fluid. The parts of the manometers wetted by
fluid should be of chemical material suitable for the operating conditions of the fluid
itself.
¾ The installation and upkeeping of the gauge must be done only by qualified personnel.
2.1 INSTALLATION
Position case vertical (this is the calibration position, unless otherwise specified).When
mounting the gauge on the plant connection, use a wrench prising the proper flats: do not
act on the case of the gauge.
If pipe connection is straight threaded,fit a proper gasket.
For gauges mounted on wall or panel it is necessary that the last part of the pipe connected
to the gauge, is flexible enaught so not to transmit efforts to the gauge, specially with
thermic dilatations.
A correct installation should always provide at least a shut-off valve in order to check
periodically the zero and to facilitate the substitution in case of upkeeping or breaking.
2.2 FUNCTIONING
When there is a shut off valve, close the drain and open slowly the interception valve in
order to avoid sudden variations of pressure.
FRATELLIMAGNI
PRATICA OPERATIVA
S.A.S.
2.4 VIBRATION
The instruments should not be submitted to mechanical vibrations. A solution is to mount
the gauge at wall or a bracket devoid of vibrations, making the connection between the
gauge and the equipment by using flexible pipes. It not possible, use a liquid filled gauge.
2.5 TEMPERATURE
The process fluid in contact with the sensing element must always be at a temperature
between the limits allowed for the selected gauge.
In case the process temperature is higher, use cooling pig tail siphon or seals.
Table of contents
English (GB)
Installation and operating instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
Български (BG)
Упътване за монтаж и експлоатация . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Čeština (CZ)
Montážní a provozní návod . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
Dansk (DK)
Monterings- og driftsinstruktion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
Deutsch (DE)
Montage- und Betriebsanleitung . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
Eesti (EE)
Paigaldus- ja kasutusjuhend . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
Ελληνικά (GR)
Οδηγίες εγκατάστασης και λειτουργίας . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
Español (ES)
Instrucciones de instalación y funcionamiento. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
Français (FR)
Notice d'installation et de fonctionnement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
Hrvatski (HR)
Montažne i pogonske upute . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
Italiano (IT)
Istruzioni di installazione e funzionamento. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
Қазақша (KZ)
Орнату жəне пайдалану нұсқаулықтары . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
Lietuviškai (LT)
Įrengimo ir naudojimo instrukcija . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
Magyar (HU)
Telepítési és üzemeltetési utasítás . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
Nederlands (NL)
Installatie- en bedieningsinstructies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174
Українська (UA)
Інструкції з монтажу та експлуатації . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186
Polski (PL)
Instrukcja montażu i eksploatacji . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198
Português (PT)
Instruções de instalação e funcionamento. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210
Русский (RU)
Паспорт, Руководство по монтажу и эксплуатации . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222
Română (RO)
Instrucţiuni de instalare şi utilizare . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234
Slovenčina (SK)
Návod na montáž a prevádzku . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246
Slovensko (SI)
Navodila za montažo in obratovanje . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258
Srpski (RS)
Uputstvo za instalaciju i rad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270
Suomi (FI)
Asennus- ja käyttöohjeet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282
3
CR, CRI, CRN
Table of contents
Svenska (SE)
Monterings- och driftsinstruktion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294
Türkçe (TR)
Montaj ve kullanım kılavuzu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306
Appendix 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 318
Appendix 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 338
Declaration of conformity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 346
4
English (GB) Installation and operating instructions
English (GB)
Original installation and operating instructions. 1. Symbols used in this document
CONTENTS Warning
Page If these safety instructions are not observed, it
1. Symbols used in this document 5 may result in personal injury.
2. Handling 5
Warning
3. Type designation 6
If these instructions are not observed, it may lead
3.1 Type key for CR, CRI, CRN 1s, 1, 3, 5, 10, 15 and 20 6
to electric shock with consequent risk of serious
3.2 Type key for CR, CRN 32, 45, 64, 90, 120 and 150 6
personal injury or death.
4. Applications 6
5. Technical data 6 If these safety instructions are not observed, it
5.1 Ambient temperature and altitude 6 Caution may result in malfunction or damage to the
5.2 Liquid temperature 7 equipment.
5.3 Maximum permissible operating pressure and liquid
temperature for the shaft seal 7 Notes or instructions that make the job easier
Note
5.4 Minimum inlet pressure 7 and ensure safe operation.
5.5 Minimum inlet pressure 8
5.6 Minimum flow rate 8 2. Handling
5.7 Electrical data 8 When lifting the entire pump with motor, follow these instructions:
5.8 Frequency of starts and stops 8 • Pump with motor sizes 0.37 - 5.5 kW:
5.9 Dimensions and weights 8 Lift the pump in the motor flange by means of straps or the
5.10 Sound pressure level 8 like.
6. Installation 8 • Pump with motor sizes 7.5 - 22 kW:
6.1 Foundation 9 Lift the pump by means of the motor eyebolts.
6.2 Vibration dampening 10
• Pump with motor sizes 30-45 kW:
6.3 Outdoor installation 10
Lift the pump by means of the lifting brackets on the motor
6.4 Hot surfaces 10
flange.
6.5 Torques 10
6.6 Flange forces and torques • Pump with motor sizes 55-75 kW:
11
Lift the pump by means of the eyebolts on the motor side.
7. Electrical connection 12
7.1 Cable entry/screwed connection 12
7.2 Three-phase connection 12
7.3 Single-phase connection 13
7.4 Terminal box positions 13
7.5 Frequency converter operation 13
8. Startup 14
8.1 Shaft seal run-in 14
9. Maintenance 14
TM04 0339 0608
Warning
Make sure that the pump remains in a stable
position during unpacking and installation by
means of the straps used for lifting the pump.
Note that typically the centre of gravity of the
pump is close to the motor.
5
3. Type designation 5. Technical data
English (GB)
3.1 Type key for CR, CRI, CRN 1s, 1, 3, 5, 10, 15 and 20 5.1 Ambient temperature and altitude
6
5.2 Liquid temperature 5.4 Minimum inlet pressure
English (GB)
The table on page 320 states the relationship between liquid
temperature range and maximum permissible operating pressure.
p [bar]
Hv
35
30 Fig. 4 Schematic view of open system with a CR pump
25
H H H H H
20 Q Q Q HQQE/V Q B The maximum suction lift "H" in metres head can be calculated as
15 Q Q Q Q Q follows:
HBQE/V
7
5.5 Minimum inlet pressure
Step Action
English (GB)
45 80
replacement.
55 50 Always protect the pump
75 50 against backflow by means of a
non-return valve (foot valve).
5.9 Dimensions and weights
5
Dimensions: See fig. C, page 322.
Weights: See label on the packing. Install the pipes so that air
locks do not occur, especially
TM02 0114 3800
6. Installation
6 Fit a vacuum valve close to the
The pump must be secured to a horizontal, plane and solid
foundation by bolts through the holes in the base plate. When pump if the installation has one
installing the pump, follow the procedure below in order to avoid of these characteristics:
damaging the pump. • The discharge pipe slopes
downwards away from the
Step Action pump.
TM02 0115 3800
8
6.1 Foundation
English (GB)
The foundation/installation must be carried out in
accordance with the following instructions.
Note
Non-compliance may result in functional faults
which will damage the pump components.
Grundfos recommends to install the pump on a concrete
foundation which is heavy enough to provide permanent and rigid
support to the entire pump. The foundation must be capable of
absorbing any vibration, normal strain or shock. The concrete
foundation must have an absolutely level and even surface.
Place the pump on the foundation, and fasten it. The base plate
must be supported on the whole area.
mpump × 1.5
TM04 0342 0608
hf =
Lf × Bf × δconcrete
The recommended length and width are shown in fig. 7. Note that
TM04 0362 0608
the length and width of the foundation for pumps with motor size
Shims
≤ 30 kW must be 200 mm larger than the base plate.
For pumps with motor size ≥ 37 kW, the length and width must
always be 1.5 x 1.5 (Lf x Bf) metres.
9
6.2 Vibration dampening 6.5 Torques
English (GB)
If vibration dampers are used, they must be installed under the The table shows the recommended torques for bolts in base and
foundation. Pumps with motor size ≤ 30 kW can use vibration flanges.
dampers as shown in fig. 11.
For pumps with motor sizes ≥ 37 kW, use a Sylomer® plate as Base Flange
CR, CRI, CRN
shown in fig. 12. [Nm] [Nm]
1s-5 40 50-60
10-20 50 60-70
32-150 70 70-80
Vibration dampers
Sylomer® plate
TM04 1692 1008
Warning
When pumping hot liquids, care should be taken
to ensure that persons cannot accidentally come
into contact with hot surfaces.
Figure 13 shows which pump parts get as hot as the pumped
liquid.
TM04 0361 0608
Pump head
Pump sleeve
Base
10
6.6 Flange forces and torques
English (GB)
If not all loads reach the maximum permissible value stated in the
tables below, one of these values may exceed the normal limit.
Contact Grundfos for further information.
Y-direction: Inlet/outlet
Z-direction: Direction of chamber stack
X-direction: 90 ° from inlet/outlet
Forces
CR, CRI, CRN
Y-direction
X-direction
Flange, DN
Z-direction
Force,
Force,
Force,
[mm]
[N]
[N]
[N]
Torques
CR, CRI, CRN
Y-direction
X-direction
Flange, DN
Z-direction
Torque,
Torque,
Torque,
[mm]
[Nm]
[Nm]
[Nm]
11
7. Electrical connection 7.2 Three-phase connection
English (GB)
Warning
Before removing the terminal box cover and W2 U1 W2 U2 V2
The operating voltage and frequency are marked on the motor Fig. 15 Delta connection
nameplate. Make sure that the motor is suitable for the power
supply on which it will be used and the motor terminal connection U1
is correct. You will find a wiring diagram in the terminal box.
W2 U2 V2
12
7.3 Single-phase connection 7.4 Terminal box positions
English (GB)
The terminal box can be turned to four positions, in 90 ° steps.
Mains supply [V] Follow this procedure:
"Low voltage" "High voltage" 1. If necessary, remove the coupling guards. Do not remove the
coupling.
50 Hz 220-230 / 240 2. Remove the bolts securing the motor to the pump.
3. Turn the motor to the required position.
4. Replace and tighten the bolts.
5. Replace the coupling guards.
Carry out the electrical connection as shown in the diagram
inside the terminal box cover.
Fig. 17 Connection, "low voltage", 0.37 - 0.75 kW 7.5.2 Phase insulation MG 71 and 80
MG motors, frame sizes 71 and 80, do not have phase insulation as
standard. The motors are not suitable for frequency converter
operation as they are not protected against the voltage peaks
caused by the frequency converter operation. Only motors with a
rated voltage equal to or above 460 V have phase insulation.
Frequency converter operation of MG motors
without phase insulation will cause damage to
TM04 1694 1008
Caution
the motor.
We recommend you to protect all other motors against voltage
peaks higher than 1200 V by 2000 V/μsec.
The above disturbances, i.e. both increased acoustic noise and
Fig. 18 Connection, "high voltage", 0.37 - 0.75 kW detrimental voltage peaks, can be eliminated by fitting an LC filter
between the frequency converter and the motor.
For further information, please contact the frequency converter or
motor supplier.
7.5.3 Other motor makes than those supplied by Grundfos
Please contact Grundfos or the motor manufacturer.
TM04 0345 0608
13
8. Startup 8.1 Shaft seal run-in
English (GB)
The seal faces are lubricated by the pumped liquid, meaning that
Do not start the pump until it has been filled with
there may be a certain amount of leakage from the shaft seal.
Caution liquid and vented. If the pump runs dry, the pump
bearings and the shaft seal may be damaged. When the pump is started up for the first time, or when a new
shaft seal is installed, a certain run-in period is required before
the leakage is reduced to an acceptable level. The time required
for this depends on the operating conditions, i.e. every time the
9. Maintenance
Warning
Fig. 21 Venting valve, standard and an optional solution with Before starting work on the pump, make sure that
hose connection. all power supplies to the pump have been
switched off and that they cannot be accidentally
switched on.
Warning
Pump bearings and shaft seal are maintenance-free.
Pay attention to the direction of the vent hole and
take care to ensure that the escaping water does Motor bearings
not cause injury to persons or damage to the Motors not fitted with grease nipples are maintenance-free.
motor or other components. Motors fitted with grease nipples should be lubricated with a high-
In hot-water installations, pay special attention to temperature, lithium-based grease. See the instructions on the
the risk of injury caused by scalding hot water. fan cover.
Follow the instructions on page 338. In the case of seasonal operation (motor is idle for more than
CR, CRI, CRN 1s to 5 6 months of the year), we recommend you to grease the motor
when the pump is taken out of operation.
For these pumps, we advise you to open the bypass valve during
startup, see fig. 22 for bypass valve location. The bypass valve Depending on the ambient temperature, the motor bearings must
connects the suction and discharge sides of the pump, thus be replaced or lubricated according to the table below. The table
making the filling procedure easier. Close the bypass valve again applies to 2-pole motors. The number of operating hours stated
when the operation is stable. for bearing replacement are guidelines only.
When pumping liquids containing air, we advise you to leave the
Motor size Bearing replacement interval [operating hours]
bypass valve open if the operating pressure is lower than 6 bar.
[kW] 40 °C 45 °C 50 °C 55 °C 60 °C
Close the bypass valve if the operating pressure constantly
exceeds 6 bar. Otherwise the material at the opening will be worn
because of the high liquid velocity. 0.37 - 0.75 18000 - - - -
Intervals for 4-pole motors are twice as long as those for 2-pole
motors.
If the ambient temperature is lower than 40 °C, bearings must be
replaced/lubricated at the intervals mentioned under 40 °C.
14
10. Frost protection
English (GB)
Pumps which are not being used during periods of frost should be
drained to avoid damage.
Drain the pump by loosening the vent screw in the pump head
and by removing the drain plug from the base.
Warning
Pay attention to the direction of the vent hole and
take care to ensure that the escaping water does
not cause injury to persons or damage to the
motor or other components.
In hot-water installations, pay special attention to
the risk of injury caused by scalding hot water.
Do not tighten the vent screw and replace the drain plug until the
pump is to be used again.
CR, CRI, CRN 1s to 5
Before replacing the drain plug in the base, screw the bypass
valve out against the stop. See fig. 22.
Drain plug
Bypass valve TM01 1243 4097
Fit the drain plug by tightening the large union nut followed by the
bypass valve.
11. Service
We recommend you to repair pumps with motors of 7.5 kW and
up at pump site. Necessary lifting equipment must be available.
15
12. Fault finding
English (GB)
Warning
Before removing the terminal box cover and before removing/dismantling the pump, make sure that the power
supply has been switched off and that it cannot be accidentally switched on.
13. Disposal
This product or parts of it must be disposed of in an
environmentally sound way:
1. Use the public or private waste collection service.
2. If this is not possible, contact the nearest Grundfos company
or service workshop.
Subject to alterations.
16
Български (BG) Упътване за монтаж и експлоатация
Български (BG)
Оригинални инструкции за монтаж и експлоатация. 1. Символи в този документ
СЪДЪРЖАНИЕ Предупреждение
Стр. Ако тези инструкции за безопасност не се
спазват, това може да доведе до
1. Символи в този документ 17 наранявания.
2. Транспорт 17
3. Обозначение на типа 18 Предупреждение
3.1 Код за типа за CR, CRI, CRN 1s, 1, 3, 5, 10, 15 и 20 18 Ако не се спазват тези инструкции, може да
3.2 Кода за типа за CR, CRN 32, 45, 64, 90, 120 и 150 18 се стигне до електрически удар със
4. Приложения съответната опасност от увреждане или
18
смърт.
5. Технически данни 18
5.1 Околна температура и надморска височина 18 Неспазването на тези инструкции за
5.2 Температура на течността 19 Внимание безопасност може да доведе до
5.3 Максимално допустимо работно налягане и неизправност или повреда на оборудването.
температура на течността за уплътнението на вала 19
5.4 Минимално входно налягане 19 Бележки и инструкции, които улесняват
Указание
5.5 Минимално входно налягане 20 работата и осигуряват безопасна работа.
5.6 Минимален дебит 20
5.7 Електрически данни 20 2. Транспорт
5.8 Честота на пускане и спиране 20
Когато повдигате цялата помпа с двигателя, следвайте
5.9 Размери и тегло 20
описаните по-долу инструкции:
5.10 Ниво на звуково налягане 20
• Помпа с мощност на двигателя 0,37 - 5,5 kW:
6. Монтаж 20
Вдигнете помпата с помощта на въжета, прикрепени към
6.1 Фундамент 21
фланеца на двигателя.
6.2 Гасене на вибрации 22
6.3 Монтаж на открито • Помпа с мощност на двигателя 7,5 - 22 kW:
22
Вдигнете помпата, като използвате халките за повдигане
6.4 Горещи повърхности 22
на двигателя.
6.5 Въртящи моменти 23
6.6 Сила и въртящ момент при фланците 23 • Помпа с мощност на двигателя 30 - 45 kW:
Вдигнете помпата, като използвате скобите за повдигане
7. Електрическо свързване 24
на фланеца на двигателя.
7.1 Вход за кабел/свързване с резба 24
7.2 Трифазно свързване 24 • Помпа с мощност на двигателя 55 - 75 kW:
7.3 Монофазно свързване 25 Вдигнете помпата, като използвате халките за повдигане
7.4 Позиция на клемната кутия 25 от страната на двигателя.
7.5 Работа с честотен конвертор 25
8. Пуск 26
8.1 Разработване на уплътнението на вала 26
9. Поддръжка 26
10. Защита от замръзване 27
11. Обслужване 27
11.1 Сервизни комплекти и ръководства 27
12. Откриване на повреди 28
TM04 0339 0608
Предупреждение
Преди инсталирането прочетете тези
инструкции за инсталиране и работа. 0,37 - 5,5 7,5 - 22 30-45 55-75
Монтажът и експлоатацията трябва да kW kW kW kW
отговарят на местната нормативна уредба
и утвърдените правила за добра практика. Фиг. 1 Правилно повдигане на помпа CR
Предупреждение
Уверете се, че помпата е в стабилно
положение по време на разопаковането и
инсталирането с помощта на въжетата,
използвани за повдигане на помпата.
Имайте предвид, че обикновено центърът на
тежестта на помпата е близо до двигателя.
17
3. Обозначение на типа 5. Технически данни
Български (BG)
3.1 Код за типа за CR, CRI, CRN 1s, 1, 3, 5, 10, 15 и 20 5.1 Околна температура и надморска височина
18
5.2 Температура на течността 5.4 Минимално входно налягане
Български (BG)
Таблицата на стр. 320 показва връзката между диапазона от
температури на течността и максимално допустимото
работно налягане.
19
5.5 Минимално входно налягане 6. Монтаж
Български (BG)
Таблицата на стр. 321 показва максимално допустимото Помпата трябва да бъде монтирана върху хоризонтален,
входно налягане. Но моментното входно налягане + равен и здрав фундамент посредством болтове през отворите
максималното налягане на помпата (без дебит) трябва винаги в опорната плоча. С цел предотвратяване на повреда на
да е по-малко от указаните стойности на фиг. A, стр. 320. помпата, при монтаж следвайте долната процедура.
Помпите са изпитани при налягане 1,5 пъти по-високо от
стойностите, посочени на фиг. B, стр. 321. Стъпка Действие
1
5.6 Минимален дебит
Поради опасност от прегряване, не използвайте помпата при Стрелките на основата на
20
Стъпка Действие
6.1 Фундамент
Български (BG)
За да се намали до минимум Фундаментът/монтажът трябва да се
евентуалния шум от помпата, изпълнят съгласно посочените по-долу
препоръчваме да монтирате инструкции. Ако тези инструкции не се
4 Указание
компенсатори от двете вземат предвид, това може да доведе до
страни на помпата. функционални повреди в компонентите на
Фундаментът/монтажът помпата.
трябва да се изпълни както е Grundfos препоръчва помпата да се монтира върху бетонен
описано в раздел 6.1. фундамент, достатъчно стабилен, за да осигури постоянна
Монтирайте спирателни здрава опора на цялата помпа. Фундаментът трябва да може
кранове от двете страни на да абсорбира вибрации, напрежения и удари. Бетонният
помпата, за да не се налага фундамент трябва да има абсолютно равни и гладки
източване на системата, повърхности.
когато помпата трябва да
Поставете помпата върху фундамента и я закрепете към него.
бъде демонтирана за
Опорната плоча трябва да бъде поддържана по цялата си
почистване, ремонт или
площ.
подмяна.
Винаги осигурявайте защита Следващата инструкция е в сила, когато помпата се монтира
TM02 0116 3800
въздушни възглавници,
особено откъм смукателната
страна на помпата.
ефект.
• При нечисти течности е
необходима защита срещу
обратен дебит.
21
6.2 Гасене на вибрации
Български (BG)
mпомпа × 1,5
hf =
Lf × Bf × δбетон
Плоча Sylomer®
Вложки
Глава на помпата
Кожух на помпата
Основа
22
6.5 Въртящи моменти
Български (BG)
В таблицата са показани препоръчителните въртящи моменти
за болтовете на основата и фланците.
Основа Фланец
CR, CRI, CRN
[Nm] [Nm]
1s-5 40 50-60
10-20 50 60-70
32-150 70 70-80
Направление Y: Вход/изход
Направление Z: Направление на комплекта камери
Направление X: 90 ° спрямо оста вход-изход
Сили
направление Y
направление X
направление Z
CR, CRI, CRN
Фланец, DN
Сила,
Сила,
Сила,
[mm]
[N]
[N]
[N]
Въртящ момент,
Въртящ момент,
направление Y
направление X
направление Z
CR, CRI, CRN
Фланец, DN
[mm]
[Nm]
[Nm]
[Nm]
23
7. Електрическо свързване 7.2 Трифазно свързване
Български (BG)
Предупреждение W2 U1 W2 U2 V2
24
7.3 Монофазно свързване 7.4 Позиция на клемната кутия
Български (BG)
Клемната кутия може да бъде завъртяна в четири позиции на
Електрическо захранване [V] стъпки през 90 °. Спазвайте следната процедура:
"Ниско "Високо 1. Ако е необходимо, свалете предпазителите на
напрежение" напрежение" съединенията. Не отстранявайте съединението.
2. Свалете болтовете, закрепващи двигателя към помпата.
50 Hz 220-230 / 240 3. Завъртете двигателя в нужната позиция.
4. Поставете болтовете по местата им и ги затегнете.
5. Поставете предпазителите на съединенията.
Свържете захранването, както е показано на схемата от
вътрешната страна на капака на клемната кутия.
25
8. Пуск 8.1 Разработване на уплътнението на вала
Български (BG)
9. Поддръжка
26
10. Защита от замръзване
Български (BG)
Помпи, които не се използват през периоди на ниски
температури, трябва да се източват, за да се предотврати
повреда поради замръзване.
Дренирайте помпата, като развиете винта за
обезвъздушаване и отстраните пробката за източване в
основата на помпата.
Предупреждение
Обърнете внимание на ориентацията на
обезвъздушаващия отвор и внимавайте
изтичащата вода да не причини наранявания
на персонала или повреда на двигателя или
други компоненти.
При системи с гореща вода трябва да
обърнете специално внимание на
опасността от наранявания, причинени от
контакт с горещата вода.
Не затягайте обезвъздушаващия винт и не поставяйте
обратно пробката за източване, докато не стане време да
използвате помпата отново.
CR, CRI, CRN 1s до 5
Преди да поставите отново пробката за източване в основата,
развийте обходния вентил. Вж. фиг. 22.
Пробка за
източване
Обходен вентил
TM01 1243 4097
11. Обслужване
Препоръчваме ви да ремонтирате на място помпите с
двигатели от 7,5 kW и повече. Необходимо е да разполагате с
подходящо подемно оборудване.
27
12. Откриване на повреди
Български (BG)
Предупреждение
Преди да отстраните капака на клемната кутия и преди да преместите/разглобите на помпата, се
уверете, че електрическото захранване е изключено и не може да бъде включено случайно.
28
Čeština (CZ) Montážní a provozní návod
Čeština (CZ)
Originální montážní a provozní návod. 1. Symboly použité v tomto návodu
OBSAH Varování
Strana Pokud nebudou tyto bezpečnostní pokyny
1. Symboly použité v tomto návodu 29 dodrženy, mohlo by dojít k újmě na zdraví osob.
2. Manipulace 29
Varování
3. Typové označení 30
Pokud nebudou tyto bezpečnostní pokyny
3.1 Typový štítek pro CR, CRI, CRN 1s, 1, 3, 5, 10, 15 a 20 30
dodrženy, mohlo by dojít k úrazu elektrickým
3.2 Typový štítek pro CR, CRN 32, 45, 64, 90, 120 a 150 30
proudem s následným rizikem vážné újmy na
4. Použití 30 zdraví nebo smrti osob.
5. Technické údaje 30
5.1 Okolní teplota a nadmořská výška 30 Pokud nebudou tyto bezpečnostní pokyny
5.2 Teplota kapaliny 31 Pozor dodrženy, mohlo by dojít k poruše nebo
5.3 Maximální přípustný provozní tlak a teplota kapaliny poškození zařízení.
pro ucpávku hřídele 31
5.4 Minimální tlak na vstupu 31 Doporučení nebo pokyny, které mají usnadnit
Pokyn
5.5 Minimální tlak na vstupu 32 práci a zajišťovat bezpečný provoz.
5.6 Minimální průtok 32
5.7 Elektrické údaje 32 2. Manipulace
5.8 Četnost zapnutí a vypnutí 32 Při zvedání kompletních čerpadel s motorem dodržujte
5.9 Rozměry a hmotnosti 32 následující instrukce:
5.10 Úroveň akustického tlaku 32 • Čerpadlo s motorem o velikosti 0,37 - 5,5 kW:
6. Instalace 32 Čerpadlo s přírubou motoru zvedejte pomocí popruhů nebo
6.1 Základ 33 podobného prostředku.
6.2 Tlumení vibrací 34 • Čerpadlo s motorem o velikosti 7,5 - 22 kW:
6.3 Venkovní instalace 34 Čerpadlo zvedejte pomocí šroubů s okem.
6.4 Horké povrchy 34
• Čerpadlo s motorem o velikosti 30-45 kW:
6.5 Utahovací momenty 34
Čerpadlo zvedejte pomocí šroubů s okem na přírubě motoru.
6.6 Síly a krouticí momenty na přírubě 35
• Čerpadlo s motorem o velikosti 55-75 kW:
7. Elektrická přípojka 36 Čerpadlo zvedejte pomocí šroubů s okem na straně motoru.
7.1 Kabelový přívod/průchodka se závitem 36
7.2 Trojfázové připojení 36
7.3 Jednofázové připojení 37
7.4 Polohy svorkovnice 37
7.5 Provoz z frekvenčním měničem 37
8. Spuštění 38
8.1 Záběh hřídelové ucpávky 38
9. Údržba 38
10. Ochrana proti mrazu 39
TM04 0339 0608
Varování
Ujistěte se, že čerpadlo se nachází ve stabilní
poloze během vybalování a instalace pomocí
popruhů, použitých pro zvedání čerpadla.
Dávejte pozor na to, že těžiště čerpadla se
nachází blízko motoru.
29
3. Typové označení 5. Technické údaje
Čeština (CZ)
3.1 Typový štítek pro CR, CRI, CRN 1s, 1, 3, 5, 10, 15 5.1 Okolní teplota a nadmořská výška
a 20
Maximální
Výkon Třída Maximální
Příklad CR 3- 10 X- X- X- X- XXXX Provedení nadmořská
motoru účinnosti okolní teplota
motoru výška
Typová řada: CR, CRI, CRN [kW] motoru [°C]
[m]
Jmenovitý průtok v m3/hod.
Grundfos
Počet oběžných kol 0,37 - 0,55 - +40 1000
MG
Kód provedení čerpadla Grundfos
0,75 - 22 IE3 +60 3500
Kód potrubní přípojky MG
Kód materiálového provedení 30 - 75 Siemens IE3 +55 2750
Kód pro pryžové části čerpadla Jestliže okolní teplota přesahuje výše uvedené hodnoty nebo je
Kód hřídelové ucpávky čerpadlo je instalováno v nadmořské výšce, která přesahuje výše
uvedené hodnoty nadmořských výšek, nesmí být motor plně
3.2 Typový štítek pro CR, CRN 32, 45, 64, 90, 120 a 150 zatížen, protože hrozí nebezpečí přehřátí. Přehřátí může
vyplynout z nadměrných okolních teplot nebo nízké hustoty
Příklad CR 32- 2 1- X- X- X- X- XXXX vzduchu s následkem nízkého chladicího efektu.
Řada čerpadel: CR, CRN V takových případech může být nutné použít motor s vyšším
3 jmenovitým výkonem.
Jmenovitý průtok v m /hod.
Počet stupňů
P2
Počet oběžných kol s redukovaným [%] 3
průměrem
100 2
Kód verze čerpadla
90
Kód potrubní přípojky
80 1
Kód materiálového 70
provedení
60
Kód pro pryžové části
50
Článková odstředivá in-line čerpadla Grundfos řady CR, CRI a Obr. 2 Výkon motoru závisí na teplotě/nadmořské výšce
CRN jsou určena pro širokou oblast použití.
CR, CRI, CRN Výkon motoru
Pol. Provedení motoru
Čerpadla CR, CRI a CRN jsou vhodná pro dopravu, cirkulaci a [kW]
zvyšování tlaku studené nebo horké čisté kapaliny.
0,37 - 0,55 MG
CRN 1
0,37 - 22 MGE
Čerpadla CRN se používají v soustavách, ve kterých všechny
2 0,75 - 22 MG
součásti přicházející do styku s čerpanou kapalinou jsou
vyrobeny z vysoce kvalitní korozivzdorné oceli. 3 30-75 Siemens
Čerpané kapaliny Příklad
Řídké, čisté, nehořlavé, nevýbušné kapaliny neobsahující pevné Obrázek 2 ukazuje, že zatížení motoru IE3 při okolní teplotě
nebo vláknité příměsi. Kapalina nesmí být chemicky ani 70 °C nesmí být větší než 89 % jmenovitého výkonu. Jestliže je
mechanicky agresivní vůči konstrukčním materiálům čerpadla. čerpadlo nainstalováno v nadmořské výšce 4750 m, motor nesmí
Při čerpání kapalin, které mají hustotu, popř. viskozitu vyšší než být zatížen více než 89 % jmenovitého výkonu.
voda, je případně nutno použít motor s odpovídajícím vyšším V případech, kde maximální teplota a maximální nadmořská
výkonem. výška přesahují uvedené hodnoty, musí být činitele odlehčení
navzájem znásobeny (0,89 x 0,89 = 0,79).
30
5.2 Teplota kapaliny 5.4 Minimální tlak na vstupu
Čeština (CZ)
Tabulka na straně 320 uvádí vztah mezi teplotou čerpané
kapaliny a maximálním dovoleným provozním tlakem.
p [bar]
35 Hv
30
25 Obr. 4 Schématické znázornění otevřené soustavy
H H H H H
20 Q Q Q HQQE/V Q B s čerpadlem CR
15 Q Q Q Q Q
31
5.5 Minimální tlak na vstupu
Krok Úkon
Čeština (CZ)
Krok Úkon
1
32
Doporučená délka a šířka jsou uvedeny na obr. 7.
Krok Úkon Vezměte v úvahu, že délka a šířka základu pro čerpadla ≤ 30 kW
Čeština (CZ)
Je nutno instalovat vakuový musí být o 200 mm větší než základová deska.
6 (podtlakový) ventil, jestliže Pro čerpadla s motory ≥ 37 kW, musí být vždy délka a šířka 1,5 x
instalace má jednu z těchto 1,5 (Lf x Bf) metru.
charakteristik:
• U nichž je výtlačné potrubí
spádováno směrem dolů od
čerpadla.
• Zde vzniká nebezpečí tzv.
6.1 Základ
Podložky
TM04 0343 0608
33
6.2 Tlumení vibrací 6.5 Utahovací momenty
Čeština (CZ)
Jestliže jsou použity antivibrační podložky, musí být instalovány V tabulce jsou uvedeny doporučené utahovací momenty šroubů
pod základ. Čerpadla s motory o velikosti ≤ 30 kW mohou použít v patní části a přírubě.
antivibrační podložky, jak je ukázáno na obr. 11.
Pro čerpadla s motory o velikosti ≥ 37 kW použijte desky Patní část Příruba
CR, CRI, CRN
z materiálu Sylomer® , jak je ukázáno na obr. 12. [Nm] [Nm]
1s-5 40 50-60
10-20 50 60-70
32-150 70 70-80
Tlumiče vibrací
Deska
TM04 1692 1008
z materiálu
Sylomer®
Varování
Při čerpání horkých kapalin dbejte, aby byl
vyloučen náhodný kontakt osob s horkými
povrchy.
Obrázek 13 ukazuje, které součásti čerpadla mohou být horké
jako čerpaná kapalina.
TM04 0361 0608
Hlava čerpadla
Plášť čerpadla
Patní část
34
6.6 Síly a krouticí momenty na přírubě
Čeština (CZ)
Jestliže všechna zatížení nedosahují maximální dovolené
hodnoty uvedené v tabulkách níže, jedna z těchto hodnot může
přesahovat normální limit. S žádostí o další informace se obraťte
na společnost Grundfos.
Směr Y: Vstup/výstup
Směr Z: Směr k ucpávkové komoře
Směr X: 90 ° na vstup/výstup
Síly
CR, CRI, CRN
Příruba, DN
Směr Y
Směr X
Směr Z
[mm]
Síla,
Síla,
Síla,
[N]
[N]
[N]
Utahovací momenty
Utahovací moment,
Utahovací moment,
Utahovací moment,
CR, CRI, CRN
Příruba, DN
Směr Y
Směr X
Směr Z
[mm]
[Nm]
[Nm]
[Nm]
35
7. Elektrická přípojka 7.2 Trojfázové připojení
Čeština (CZ)
Varování Zapojení do
Zapojení do hvězdy
trojúhelníku
Čerpadlo CR musí být připojeno k externímu
síťovém vypínači umístěnému v blízkosti 220-240 / 380-415
čerpadla a k ochrannému jističi motoru nebo 50 Hz
380-415 / 660-690
frekvenčnímu měniči CUE. Síťový vypínač musí
jít zablokovat v oddělené poloze OFF (vypnuto). 220-277 / 380-480 1)
60 Hz
Typ a požadavky podle EN 60204-1, 5.3.2. 380-480 / 660-690
Počet a velikost W1 V1 L1 L2 L3
Motor
kabelových Popis
[kW] Obr. 16 Zapojení do hvězdy
průchodek
Otvory mají připraveny Jestliže je motor vybaven snímači PTC nebo kontakty PTO,
závity a jsou uzavřeny připojení musí odpovídat schématu zapojení ve svorkovnici.
0,25 - 0,55 2 x M20 x 1,5
vylamovacími kabelovými Trojfázové motory musí být připojeny k ochrannému jističi
průchodkami motoru.
Otvory jsou uzavřeny
0,75 - 3,0 2 x M20 vylamovacími kabelovými
průchodkami
Otvory jsou uzavřeny
4,0 - 7,5 4 x M25 vylamovacími kabelovými
průchodkami
Otvory jsou uzavřeny
2 x M20
11-22 vylamovacími kabelovými
4 x M40
průchodkami
30-45 2 x M50 x 1,5 Zaslepovací zátka
55-75 2 x M63 x 1,5 Zaslepovací zátka
36
7.3 Jednofázové připojení 7.4 Polohy svorkovnice
Čeština (CZ)
Svorkovnici motoru je možno natočit do jedné ze čtyř poloh
Síťový přívod [V] odstupňovaných po 90 °. Dodržujte tento postup:
"Nízké napětí" "Vysoké napětí" 1. Pokud je to nutné, sejměte kryty spojky. Spojku nedemontujte.
2. Vyšroubujte šrouby připevňující motor k čerpadlu.
50 Hz 220-230 / 240
3. Motor otočte do požadované polohy.
4. Nasaďte a zašroubujte utahovací šrouby.
5. Nasaďte kryty spojky.
Elektrické síťové připojení čerpadla je nutno provést podle
schématu zapojení umístěného na krytu svorkovnice.
37
8. Spuštění 8.1 Záběh hřídelové ucpávky
Čeština (CZ)
9. Údržba
Varování
Obr. 21 Odvzdušňovací ventil, stanardní a volitelné řešení Než začnete pracovat s čerpadlem, musíte zajistit,
s připojením hadice. aby byly všechny zdroje napájecího napětí
vypnuty a nebyly náhodně zapnuty.
Ložiska a ucpávka čerpadla nevyžadují údržbu.
Varování
Dbejte na polohu odvzdušňovacího otvoru Ložiska motorů
a zajistěte, aby vytékající voda nemohla způsobit Motory nenainstalované s tlakovou maznicí jsou bezúdržbové.
újmu na zdraví osob ani poškození motoru či Motory instalované s tlakovou maznicí by měly být mazány při
jiného zařízení. vysoké teplotě vazelínou obsahující lithium. Viz mazací plán na
U horkovodních instalací věnujte zvláštní krytu ventilátoru motoru.
pozornost odvrácení rizika újmy na zdraví osob V případě sezónního provozu (motor není v provozu déle než
opařením vroucí vodou. 6 měsíců v roce) doporučujeme mazat motor, když je čerpadlo
Viz instrukce na straně 338. mimo provoz.
CR, CRI, CRN 1s až 5 V závislosti na okolní teplotě musí být ložiska motoru vyměněna
U těchto čerpadel doporučujeme otevřít během spouštění nebo namazána podle tabulky uvedené níže. Tabulka platí pro 2
obtokový ventil, umístění obtokového ventilu najdete na obr. 22. pólové motory. Počet provozních hodin uvedený pro výměnu
Tím dojde k propojení sací a výtlačné strany čerpadla a zaplnění ložiska je pouze orientační.
čerpadla tak bude snazší. Jakmile se provoz čerpadla ustálí,
můžete obtokový ventil zavřít. Velikost Interval výměny ložiska [provozní hodiny]
motoru
Jestliže čerpané kapaliny obsahují vzduch, je vhodné nechat 40 °C 45 °C 50 °C 55 °C 60 °C
[kW]
otevřený obtokový ventil, jestliže je provozní tlak nižší než 6 barů.
Jestliže provozní tlak trvale překračuje 6 barů, obtokový ventil 0,37 - 0,75 18000 - - - -
uzavřete. Jinak dojde k opotřebení materiálu v otvoru, protože
rychlost kapaliny bude vysoká. 1,1 - 7,5 20000 15500 12500 10000 7500
Intervaly pro 4pólové motory jsou dvakrát delší než pro 2 pólové
motory.
Jestliže je okolní teplota nižší než 40 °C, musí být ložiska
vyměněna/namazána při intervalech uvedených pod 40 °C.
38
10. Ochrana proti mrazu
Čeština (CZ)
Z čerpadel, která se v zimním období nepoužívají, vypusťte
veškerou kapalinu. Zabráníte tím jejich případnému poškození
mrazem.
Za tím účelem uvolněte zátku odvzdušňovacího otvoru v hlavě
čerpadla a vyšroubujte vypouštěcí zátku v patní části čerpadla.
Varování
Dbejte na polohu odvzdušňovacího otvoru
a zajistěte, aby vytékající voda nemohla způsobit
újmu na zdraví osob ani poškození motoru či
jiného zařízení.
U horkovodních instalací věnujte zvláštní
pozornost odvrácení rizika újmy na zdraví osob
opařením vroucí vodou.
Má-li být čerpadlo znovu použito, neutahujte zátku
odvzdušňovacího otvoru a nasaďte výpustnou zátku.
CR, CRI, CRN 1s až 5
Předtím, než znovu zašroubujete vypouštěcí zátku v patní části
čerpadla, vyšroubujte obtokový ventil až nadoraz. Viz obr. 22.
Vypouštěcí zátka
Obtokový ventil
TM01 1243 4097
11. Servis
Čerpadla s motory 7,5 kW a většími doporučujeme opravovat na
místě. Je nutno mít k dispozici zvedací zařízení.
39
12. Přehled poruch
Čeština (CZ)
Varování
Před odstraněním krytu svorkovnice a před jakýmkoliv vyjmutím/demontáží čerpadla se ujistěte, že byl odpojený
přívod elektrické energie a že nemůže dojít k náchodnému zapnutí.
40
Dansk (DK) Monterings- og driftsinstruktion
Dansk (DK)
Monterings- og driftsinstruktion 1. Symboler brugt i dette dokument
INDHOLDSFORTEGNELSE Advarsel
Side Hvis disse sikkerhedsanvisninger ikke overhol-
1. Symboler brugt i dette dokument 41 des, kan det medføre personskade.
2. Håndtering 41
Advarsel
3. Typebetegnelse 42
Hvis disse instruktioner ikke følges, er der risiko
3.1 Typebetegnelse for CR, CRI, CRN 1s, 1, 3, 5, 10, 15
og 20 for elektrisk stød og deraf følgende risiko for
42
alvorlig personskade eller dødsfald.
3.2 Typenøgle for CR, CRN 32, 45, 64, 90, 120 og 150 42
4. Anvendelse 42 Hvis disse sikkerhedsanvisninger ikke overhol-
5. Tekniske data 42 Forsigtig des, kan det medføre funktionsfejl eller skade på
5.1 Omgivelsestemperatur og højde 42 materiellet.
5.2 Medietemperatur 43
5.3 Maks. tilladeligt driftstryk og medietemperatur for Råd og anvisninger som letter arbejdet og sikrer
Bemærk
akseltætning 43 pålidelig drift.
5.4 Minimum tilløbstryk 43
5.5 Minimum tilløbstryk 44 2. Håndtering
5.6 Mininimumflow 44 Følg disse instruktioner ved løft af hele pumpen med motor:
5.7 Elektriske data 44
• Pumpe med motorstørrelser fra 0,37 - 5,5 kW:
5.8 Start/stop-hyppighed 44
Løft pumpen i motorflangen ved hjælp af stropper eller lig-
5.9 Mål og vægt 44
nende.
5.10 Lydtryksniveau 44
• Pumpe med motorstørrelser fra 7,5 - 22 kW:
6. Installation 44
Løft pumpen ved hjælp af motorens øjebolte.
6.1 Fundament 45
• Pumpe med motorstørrelser fra 30-45 kW:
6.2 Vibrationsdæmpning 46
Løft pumpen ved hjælp af løftebeslagene på motorflangen.
6.3 Udendørs installation 46
6.4 Varme overflader 46 • Pumpe med motorstørrelser fra 55-75 kW:
6.5 Momenter 46 Løft pumpen ved hjælp af motorens øjebolte.
6.6 Flangekræfter og -momenter 47
7. Eltilslutning 48
7.1 Kabelindføring/forskruninger 48
7.2 3-faset forbindelse 48
7.3 1-faset nettilslutning 49
7.4 Klemkassepositioner 49
7.5 Frekvensomformerdrift 49
8. Idriftsætning 50
8.1 Indkøring af akseltætning 50
TM04 0339 0608
41
3. Typebetegnelse 5. Tekniske data
Dansk (DK)
3.1 Typebetegnelse for CR, CRI, CRN 1s, 1, 3, 5, 10, 15 5.1 Omgivelsestemperatur og højde
og 20
Motorvirk- Maksimum Maks. højde
Motoref-
Eksempel CR 3- 10 X- X- X- X- XXXX Motorfa- nings- omgivelses- over hav-
fekt
brikat grads- temperatur overfladen
Typerække: CR, CRI, CRN [kW]
klasse [°C] [m]
Nominelt flow i m3/h
Grundfos
Antal løbere 0,37 - 0,55 - +40 1000
MG
Kode for pumpeversion Grundfos
0,75 - 22 IE3 +60 3500
Kode for rørtilslutning MG
Kode for materialer 30 - 75 Siemens IE3 +55 2750
Kode for gummidele i pumpen Hvis omgivelsestemperaturen overstiger ovennævnte tempera-
Kode for akseltætning turværdier, eller hvis pumpen er installeret i en højde som oversti-
ger ovennævnte højdeværdier, må motoren ikke belastes 100 %
3.2 Typenøgle for CR, CRN 32, 45, 64, 90, 120 og 150 på grund af risikoen for overophedning. Overophedning kan forår-
sages af for høj omgivelsestemperatur eller luftens lave masse-
Eksempel CR 32- 2 1- X- X- X- X- XXXX fylde og deraf følgende lave kølevirkning.
Pumpeserie: CR, CRN I sådanne tilfælde kan det være nødvendigt at bruge en motor
3 med en højere nominel ydelse.
Nominelt flow i m /h
Trinantal
P2
Antal løbere med reduceret diameter [%] 3
Kode for pumpeversion 100 2
Kode for rørtilslutning 90
Kode for materialer 80 1
Kode for gummidele i pum- 70
pen 60
Kode for akseltætning 50
42
5.2 Medietemperatur 5.4 Minimum tilløbstryk
Dansk (DK)
Tabellen på side 320 viser sammenhængen mellem medietempe-
raturområdet og maks. tilladeligt driftstryk.
p [bar]
35 Hv
30
25 Fig. 4 Skematisk billede af et åbent anlæg med en CR-
H H H H H
20 Q Q Q HQQE/V Q B pumpe
15 Q Q Q Q Q
43
5.5 Minimum tilløbstryk
Trin Handling
Dansk (DK)
45 80
eller udskiftning.
55 50 Pumpen skal altid beskyttes
75 50 mod tilbageløb ved hjælp af en
kontraventil (bundventil).
5.9 Mål og vægt
5
Mål: Se fig. C, side 322.
Vægte: Se mærkat på emballagen. Rørføringen skal være således
at der ikke opstår luftansamlin-
TM02 0114 3800
6. Installation
6 Montér en vacuumventil ved
Pumpen skal fastgøres forsvarligt til et jævnt, vandret og fast
underlag ved hjælp af bolte gennem hullerne i fodpladen. pumpen hvis anlægget er
Følg denne fremgangsmåde ved installation af pumpen for at karakteriseret ved følgende:
undgå at pumpen bliver beskadiget. • Afgangsledningen hælder
nedad væk fra pumpen.
Trin Handling • Der er risiko for hævertvirk-
TM02 0115 3800
ning.
1
• Det er nødvendigt at
beskytte anlægget mod tilba-
Pilene på pumpens fodstykke geløb af urene medier.
TM02 0013 3800
44
6.1 Fundament
Dansk (DK)
Fundering/installation skal udføres som beskre-
vet nedenfor. Hvis anvisningerne ikke følges, kan
Bemærk
det resultere i funktionsfejl som beskadiger pum-
pens komponenter.
Grundfos anbefaler at pumpen installeres på et betonfundament
der er tungt nok til at udgøre et permanent tiltrækkelig stift under-
lag for hele pumpen. Fundamentet skal kunne absorbere alle
vibrationer, normale deformationsbelastninger og stød. Betonfun-
damentet skal have en fuldstændig plan og jævn overflade.
Anbring pumpen på fundamentet, og fastgør den. Hele fodpladen
skal støtte på fundamentet.
mpumpe x 1,5
hf =
Lf × Bf × δbeton
Mellem-
Den anbefalede længde og bredde er vist i fig. 7. Bemærk at fun-
lægsplader
damentet altid skal være 200 mm længere og bredere end bund-
rammen ved pumper med motorer ≤ 30 kW.
Ved pumper med motorer ? 37 kW skal længden og bredden altid
være 1,5 x 1,5 (Lf x Bf) m. Fig. 10 Opretning med mellemlægsplader
45
6.2 Vibrationsdæmpning 6.5 Momenter
Dansk (DK)
Hvis der bruges vibrationsdæmpere, skal de monteres under fun- Tabellen angiver de anbefalede momenter for boltene i fodstykket
damentet. Pumper med en motorstørrelse ≤ 30 kW kan anvende og flangerne.
vibrationsdæmpere som vist i fig. 11.
Brug en Sylomer ®-plade til motorer med en motorstørrelse Fodstykke Flange
CR, CRI, CRN
≥ 37 kW som i fig. 12. [Nm] [Nm]
1s-5 40 50-60
10-20 50 60-70
32-150 70 70-80
Vibrationsdæmpere
Sylomer®-plade
TM04 1692 1008
Advarsel
Ved pumpning af varme medier skal man sikre at
personer ikke uforvarende kan komme i berøring
med varme overflader.
Figur 13 viser de overflader på pumpen som bliver lige så varme
som pumpemediet.
TM04 0361 0608
Pumpehoved
Pumpekappe
Fodstykke
46
6.6 Flangekræfter og -momenter
Dansk (DK)
Hvis ikke alle belastninger kommer op på den maksimalt tilladte
værdi i tabellerne nedenfor, må én af disse værdier overskride
den normale grænse. Kontakt Grundfos for yderligere oplysnin-
ger.
Y-retning: Tilgang/afgang
Z-retning: Kammerstammens retning
X-retning: 90 ° fra tilgang/afgang
Kræfter
CR, CRI, CRN
Flange, DN
Y-retning
X-retning
Z-retning
Kraft,
Kraft,
Kraft,
[mm]
[N]
[N]
[N]
Momenter
CR, CRI, CRN
Flange, DN
Y-retning
X-retning
Z-retning
Moment,
Moment,
Moment,
[mm]
[Nm]
[Nm]
[Nm]
47
7. Eltilslutning 7.2 3-faset forbindelse
Dansk (DK)
7.1 Kabelindføring/forskruninger W2 U2 V2
48
7.3 1-faset nettilslutning 7.4 Klemkassepositioner
Dansk (DK)
Klemkassen kan drejes til fire positioner med spring på 90 °.
Netforsyning [V] Følg denne fremgangsmåde:
"Lav spænding" "Høj spænding" 1. Fjern koblingsskærmene hvis det er nødvendigt. Koblingen
skal ikke afmonteres.
50 Hz 220-230 / 240 2. Fjern boltene som sammenspænder pumpe og motor.
3. Drej motoren til den ønskede position.
4. Montér og fastspænd boltene.
5. Montér koblingsskærmene.
Udfør den elektriske tilslutning som vist på diagrammet i klemkas-
sedækslet.
7.5 Frekvensomformerdrift
49
8. Idriftsætning 8.1 Indkøring af akseltætning
Dansk (DK)
9. Vedligeholdelse
Advarsel
Fig. 21 Udluftningsventil, standard og en valgfri løsning med Før der foretages arbejde på pumpen, skal al
slangetilslutning. strømforsyning til pumpen være afbrudt, og det
skal sikres at den ikke uforvarende kan genind-
kobles.
Advarsel
Pumpens lejer og akseltætning er vedligeholdelsesfrie.
Vær opmærksom på udluftningshullets retning,
og sørg for at det udstrømmende vand ikke forår- Motorlejer
sager personskade eller beskadigelse af motoren Motorer uden smørenipler er vedligeholdelsesfrie.
eller andre komponenter. Motorer med smørenipler skal smøres med højtemperaturfedt på
I varmtvandsanlæg skal man være særligt lithiumbasis. Se smøreinstruktion på ventilatorskærmen.
opmærksom på risikoen for skoldningsskader. Ved sæsonbetonet drift (ude af drift i mere end 6 måneder årligt)
Følg anvisningerne på side 338. anbefaler vi at smøre motoren når pumpen tages ud af drift.
CR, CRI, CRN 1s til 5 Afhængig af omgivelsestemperatur skal motorlejer udskiftes eller
For disse pumper kan det være en fordel at åbne omløbsventilen smøres i henhold til tabellen nedenfor. Tabellen gælder 2-polede
under opstart. Se omløbsventilens placering på fig. 22. Omløbs- motorer. Antallet af driftstimer inden udskiftning af lejer er kun vej-
ventilen forbinder til- og afgangssiden på pumpen hvilket gør ledende.
spædningen nemmere. Når stabil drift er opnået, kan omløbsven-
tilen lukkes. Motor- Interval for udskiftning af lejer [driftstimer]
størrelse
Ved pumpning af luftholdige medier kan det være en fordel at 40 °C 45 °C 50 °C 55 °C 60 °C
[kW]
omløbsventilen er åben hvis driftstrykket er lavere end 6 bar.
Hvis driftstrykket konstant er højere end 6 bar, skal omløbsventi- 0,37 - 0,75 18000 - - - -
len lukkes. Ellers vil materialet ved åbningen blive slidt på grund
af den høje strømningshastighed. 1,1 - 7,5 20000 15500 12500 10000 7500
50
10. Frostsikring
Dansk (DK)
Pumper der ikke bruges i frostperioder, skal tømmes for at undgå
skader.
Tøm pumpen ved at løsne udluftningsskruen i topstykket og
fjerne tømmeproppen i fodstykket.
Advarsel
Vær opmærksom på udluftningshullets retning,
og sørg for at det udstrømmende vand ikke forår-
sager personskade eller beskadigelse af motoren
eller andre komponenter.
I varmtvandsanlæg skal man være særligt
opmærksom på risikoen for skoldningsskader.
Spænd ikke udluftningsskruen og montér ikke drænproppen igen
før pumpen skal tages i brug igen.
CR, CRI, CRN 1s til 5
Før tømmeproppen monteres i fodstykket, skrues omløbsventilen
ud mod stop. See fig. 22.
Tømmeprop
Bypass-ventil TM01 1243 4097
11. Service
Vi anbefaler at pumper med motorer på 7,5 kW eller mere repare-
res på stedet. Det nødvendige løfteudstyr skal være til stede.
51
12. Fejlfinding
Dansk (DK)
Advarsel
Før klemkassedækslet fjernes, og før pumpen fjernes/adskilles, skal strømforsyningen være afbrudt, og det skal sik-
res at den ikke uforvarende kan genindkobles.
13. Bortskaffelse
Dette produkt eller dele deraf skal bortskaffes på en miljørigtig
måde.
1. Brug de offentlige eller godkendte, private renovationsordnin-
ger.
2. Hvis det ikke er muligt, kontakt nærmeste Grundfos-selskab
eller -serviceværksted.
52
Deutsch (DE) Montage- und Betriebsanleitung
Deutsch (DE)
Übersetzung des Originaldokuments (englischsprachig). 1. Verwendete Symbole
INHALTSVERZEICHNIS Warnung
Seite Ein Nichtbeachten der Sicherheitshinweise kann
1. Verwendete Symbole 53 zu Personenschäden führen.
2. Transport 53
Warnung
3. Typenbezeichnung 54
Ein Nichtbeachten dieser Hinweise kann zu
3.1 Typenschlüssel für CR, CRI, CRN 1s, 1, 3, 5, 10, 15
und 20 einem elektrischen Schlag führen, der schwere
54
Personenschäden oder den Tod zur Folge haben
3.2 Typenschlüssel für CR, CRN 32, 45, 64, 90, 120 und
150 54 kann.
4. Verwendungszweck 54 Ein Nichtbeachten dieser Sicherheitshinweise
5. Technische Daten 54 Achtung kann Fehlfunktionen oder Beschädigungen an
5.1 Umgebungstemperatur und Aufstellungshöhe 54 der Anlage zur Folge haben.
5.2 Medientemperatur 55
5.3 Maximal zulässiger Betriebsdruck und Medientempe- Hinweise oder Anweisungen, die die Arbeit
ratur für die Wellendichtung 55 Hinweis erleichtern und einen sicheren Betrieb gewähr-
5.4 Mindestzulaufdruck 55 leisten.
5.5 Mindestzulaufdruck 56
5.6 Mindestförderstrom 56 2. Transport
5.7 Elektrische Daten 56 Beim Anheben des kompletten Pumpenaggregats mit Motor ist
5.8 Schalthäufigkeit 56 wie folgt vorzugehen:
5.9 Maße und Gewichte 56
• Pumpen mit Motorleistungen von 0,37 bis 5,5 kW:
5.10 Schalldruckpegel 56
Die Pumpe ist mit Gurten oder gleichwertigen Hebezeugen am
6. Installation 56 Motorflansch anzuheben.
6.1 Fundamentaufstellung 57
• Pumpen mit Motorleistungen von 7,5 bis 22 kW:
6.2 Schwingungsdämpfung 58
Die Pumpe ist mit Hilfe der am Motor montierten Ringschrau-
6.3 Aufstellung im Freien 58
ben anzuheben.
6.4 Heiße Oberflächen 58
6.5 Momente 58 • Pumpen mit Motorleistungen von 30 kW bis 45 kW:
6.6 Flanschkräfte und -momente Die Pumpe ist an den am Motorflansch montierten Hebebü-
59
geln anzuheben.
7. Elektrischer Anschluss 60
• Pumpen mit Motorleistungen von 55 kW bis 75 kW:
7.1 Kabeleinführung/PG-Verschraubungen 60
Die Pumpe ist mit Hilfe der am Motorflansch montierten Ring-
7.2 Dreiphasiger Anschluss 60
schrauben anzuheben.
7.3 Einphasiger Netzanschluss 61
7.4 Klemmenkastenstellungen 61
7.5 Frequenzumrichterbetrieb 61
8. Inbetriebnahme 62
8.1 Einlaufzeit der Gleitringdichtung 62
9. Wartung 62
10. Schutz vor Frosteinwirkungen 63
11. Instandhaltung 63
11.1 Ersatzteilsätze und Serviceanleitungen 63
TM04 0339 0608
12. Störungsübersicht 64
13. Entsorgung 64
Warnung
Vor der Installation ist die Montage- und 0,37 - 5,5 7,5 - 22 30-45 55-75
Betriebsanleitung sorgfältig zu lesen. Die Mon- kW kW kW kW
tage und der Betrieb müssen nach den örtlichen
Abb. 1 Korrektes Anheben der CR-Pumpe
Vorschriften und den Regeln der Technik erfol-
gen. Es wird empfohlen, CR-, CRI- und CRN-Pumpen, die mit anderen
als MG- oder Siemens-Motoren ausgestattet sind, mit Hilfe von
Gurten anzuheben, die am Motorflansch angreifen.
Warnung
Es ist sicherzustellen, dass die Pumpe beim Ent-
packen und während der Montage mit Hilfe der
Gurte, die zum Anheben der Pumpe verwendet
werden, in einer stabilen Position gehalten wird.
Es ist zu beachten, dass sich der Schwerpunkt
der Pumpe in der Regel nahe am Motor befindet.
53
3. Typenbezeichnung 5. Technische Daten
Deutsch (DE)
3.1 Typenschlüssel für CR, CRI, CRN 1s, 1, 3, 5, 10, 15 5.1 Umgebungstemperatur und Aufstellungshöhe
und 20
Maximal
Maximal
Beispiel CR 3- 10 X- X- X- X- XXXX Effizienz- zulässige
Motorleis- zulässige
Motorfab- klasse Aufstel-
Baureihe: CR, CRI, CRN tung Umgebungs-
rikat des lungshöhe
Nennförderstrom in m3/h [kW] temperatur
Motors über NN
[°C]
Anzahl der Laufräder [m]
Code für die Pumpenausfüh- Grundfos
0,37 - 0,55 - +40 1000
rung MG
Code für den Rohrleitungsan- Grundfos
0,75 - 22 IE3 +60 3500
schluss MG
Code für die Werkstoffe 30 - 75 Siemens IE3 +55 2750
Code für die in der Pumpe ver- Falls die Umgebungstemperatur die oben aufgeführten Werte
wendeten Elastomerteile übersteigt oder die Pumpe oberhalb der in der Tabelle aufgeführ-
Code für die Wellendichtung ten Höhe über dem Meeresspiegel aufgestellt wird, darf der Motor
wegen der Gefahr einer Überhitzung nicht mit voller Leistung
3.2 Typenschlüssel für CR, CRN 32, 45, 64, 90, 120 betrieben werden. Hohe Umgebungstemperaturen oder eine
und 150 geringe Dichte und damit eine unzureichende Kühlwirkung der
Luft können ein Grund für eine Überhitzung eines Motors sein.
Beispiel CR 32- 2 1- X- X- X- X- XXXX In diesen Fällen kann es erforderlich sein, einen Motor mit einer
Pumpenbaureihe: CR, CRN höheren Nennleistung einzusetzen.
Nennförderstrom in m3/h
P2
Stufenzahl [%] 3
Anzahl der Laufräder mit reduziertem
100 2
Durchmesser
90
Code für die Pumpenaus-
führung 80 1
70
Code für den Rohrleitungsanschluss
60
Code für die Werkstoffe
50
54
5.2 Medientemperatur 5.4 Mindestzulaufdruck
Deutsch (DE)
Die Tabelle auf Seite 320 zeigt die Abhängigkeit zwischen der
Medientemperatur und dem maximal zulässigen Betriebsdruck.
p [bar]
Hv
35
30 Abb. 4 Schematische Ansicht eines offenen Systems mit
25 einer CR-Pumpe
H H H H H
20 Q Q Q Q B
HQQE/V
15 Q Q Q Q Q Die maximale Saughöhe "H" in m lässt sich wie folgt berechnen:
HBQE/V
55
5.5 Mindestzulaufdruck
Schritt Beschreibung
Deutsch (DE)
In der Tabelle auf Seite 321 ist der maximal zulässige Zulauf-
druck angegeben. Die Summe aus tatsächlichem Zulaufdruck Diese Informationen befinden
2
und maximalem Pumpendruck muss jedoch immer niedriger als sich auf Seite 322:
die in Abb. A auf Seite 320 aufgeführten Werte sein. • Einbaulänge
Die Druckprüfung der Pumpen erfolgt bei einem Druck, der 1,5-
4xø • Abmessungen des Fuß-
Die Pumpe ist auf einem ebenen und festen Untergrund aufzu- ders in der Saugleitung keine
stellen und mit Bolzen, die durch die Bohrungen im Fußstück Luft ansammeln kann.
geführt werden, sicher zu befestigen. Um Beschädigungen an der
Pumpe zu vermeiden, ist bei der Aufstellung wie folgt vorzuge-
hen: 6 Dicht an der Pumpe ist ein
Rohrbelüfter einzubauen, wenn
Schritt Beschreibung die Anlage folgende Merkmale
aufweist:
1
• Die Druckleitung verläuft
zum Teil fallend.
Pfeile auf dem Fußstück der
• Es besteht die Gefahr einer
TM02 0115 3800
TM02 0013 3800
56
6.1 Fundamentaufstellung
Deutsch (DE)
Das Fundament sowie die Aufstellung müssen
unbedingt in Übereinstimmung mit den nachfol-
Hinweis genden Richtlinien ausgeführt werden. Ein Nicht-
beachten kann zu Funktionsfehlern und Beschä-
digung der Pumpenkomponenten führen.
Grundfos empfiehlt, die Pumpe auf einem Betonfundament zu
montieren, das so dimensioniert ist, dass eine sichere Befesti-
gung der Pumpe dauerhaft gewährleistet ist. Zudem muss das
Fundament Schwingungen und die im ordnungsgemäßen Betrieb
auftretenden Kräfte und Stöße aufnehmen können. Die Oberflä-
che des Betonfundaments muss absolut waagerecht und eben
sein.
mPumpe × 1,5
Hf =
Lf × Bf × δBeton
Für die Dichte (δ) des Betons wird in der Regel ein Wert von
2.200 kg/m3 angesetzt.
TM04 0342 0608
Unterleg-
Abb. 7 Fundament, vertikale Montage bleche
Die empfohlene Länge und Breite sind in Abb. 7 angegeben.
Es ist zu beachten, dass die Länge und Breite des Fundaments
bei Pumpen mit einer Motorleistung ≤ 30 kW mindestens Abb. 10 Ausrichten mit Unterlegblechen
200 mm größer als der Pumpenfuß sein müssen.
Bei Pumpen mit einer Motorleistung ? 37 kW muss die Länge und
Breite immer 1,5 x 1,5 (Lf x Bf ) betragen.
57
6.2 Schwingungsdämpfung 6.5 Momente
Deutsch (DE)
Werden Schwingungsdämpfer verwendet, sind diese unterhalb Die empfohlenen Momente für die Fußstückbolzen und Flansche
des Fundaments zu installieren. Bei Pumpen mit einer Motor- sind der Tabelle zu entnehmen.
größe ≤ 30 kW können Schwingungsdämfer wie in Abb. 11 dar-
gestellt eingebaut werden. Fußstück Flansch
CR, CRI, CRN
Bei Pumpen mit einer Motorgröße ≥ 37 kW ist eine Sylomer®- [Nm] [Nm]
Unterlage wie in Abb. 12 gezeigt zu verwenden.
1s-5 40 50-60
10-20 50 60-70
32-150 70 70-80
Schwingungsdämpfer
Sylomer®-Platte
TM04 1692 1008
Warnung
Bei der Förderung von heißen Medien ist sicher-
zustellen, dass Personen nicht versehentlich mit
heißen Oberflächen in Berührung kommen kön-
nen.
Abb. 13 zeigt die Pumpenbauteile, die die Temperatur des heißen
Mediums annehmen können.
TM04 0361 0608
Pumpenkopf
Pumpengehäuse
Fußstück
58
6.6 Flanschkräfte und -momente
Deutsch (DE)
Erreichen nicht alle Lastzustände den in den nachfolgenden
Tabellen aufgeführten Maximalwert, darf einer der Werte den
regulären Grenzwert überschreiten. Für weitergehende Informati-
onen wenden Sie sich bitte an Grundfos.
Y-Richtung: Zulauf/Abgang
Z-Richtung: Richtung Laufradsatz
X-Richtung: 90 ° vom Zulauf/Abgang
Kräfte
CR, CRI, CRN
Flansch, DN
Y-Richtung
X-Richtung
Z-Richtung
Kraft,
Kraft,
Kraft,
[mm]
[N]
[N]
[N]
Momente
CR, CRI, CRN
Flansch, DN
Y-Richtung
X-Richtung
Z-Richtung
Moment,
Moment,
Moment,
[mm]
[Nm]
[Nm]
[Nm]
59
7. Elektrischer Anschluss 7.2 Dreiphasiger Anschluss
Deutsch (DE)
Abb. 15 Dreieckschaltung
Es liegt in der Verantwortung des Betreibers/
Achtung Anlagenbauers, zu entscheiden, ob ein NOT-AUS-
U1
Schalter installiert werden muss.
W2 U2 V2
Die Betriebsspannung und Frequenz sind auf dem Typenschild
des Motors angegeben. Es ist darauf zu achten, dass die auf dem
60
7.3 Einphasiger Netzanschluss 7.4 Klemmenkastenstellungen
Deutsch (DE)
Der Klemmenkasten kann um jeweils 90 ° gedreht werden. Vor-
Netzversorgung [V] gehensweise:
"Niedrige Span- 1. Gegebenenfalls den Kupplungsschutz entfernen. Jedoch nicht
"Hohe Spannung" die Kupplung abbauen.
nung"
2. Die Bolzen, die die Pumpe und den Motor miteinander verbin-
50 Hz 220-230 / 240 den, herausdrehen.
3. Den Motor in die gewünschte Position drehen.
4. Die Bolzen wieder einsetzen und fest anziehen.
5. Den Kupplungsschutz wieder montieren.
Der elektrische Anschluss ist gemäß dem im Klemmenkastende-
ckel befindlichen Schaltplan vorzunehmen.
7.5 Frequenzumrichterbetrieb
61
8. Inbetriebnahme 8.1 Einlaufzeit der Gleitringdichtung
Deutsch (DE)
9. Wartung
Abb. 21 Belüftungsventil, Standardlösung und optionale
Lösung mit Schlauchanschluss. Warnung
Vor Beginn jedweder Arbeiten an der Pumpe ist
die Pumpe allpolig vom Netz zu trennen und
Warnung gegen unbeabsichtigtes Wiedereinschalten zu
Es ist darauf zu achten, an welcher Stelle sich die sichern.
Entlüftungsöffnung befindet, um sicherzugehen, Die Lager und die Wellendichtung der Pumpen sind wartungsfrei.
dass durch austretende Flüssigkeit keine Perso-
nen verletzt oder der Motor oder andere Kompo- Motorlager
nenten beschädigt werden. Motoren ohne Schmiernippel sind wartungsfrei.
Besonders bei Anlagen zur Förderung von heißen Motoren mit Schmiernippel sind mit Hochtemperaturfett auf Lithi-
Medien ist sicherzustellen, dass keine Verbrü- umbasis zu schmieren. Siehe die Schmieranweisung auf der Lüf-
hungsgefahr für Personen besteht. terhaube des Motors.
Befolgen Sie die Anweisungen auf Seite 338. Erfolgt der Betrieb nur zweitweise (wenn der Motor länger als
CR, CRI, CRN 1s bis 5 sechs Monate pro Jahr außer Betrieb ist), wird empfohlen, die
Motorlager bei der Außerbetriebnahme zu schmieren.
Bei diesen Pumpen wird empfohlen, während der Inbetriebnahme
das Bypassventil zu öffnen. Zur Position des Bypassventils siehe Je nach Umgebungstemperatur sollten die Motorlager gemäß der
Abb. 22. Das Bypassventil verbindet die Druck- und Saugseite nachfolgenden Tabelle nachgeschmiert oder ausgetauscht wer-
der Pumpe und erleichtert dadurch das Befüllen und Entlüften der den. Die Tabelle gilt für 2-polige Motoren. Die Angaben, nach wie
Pumpe. Sobald die Pumpe ordnungsgemäß fördert, ist das vielen Betriebsstunden die Lager ausgetauscht werden sollten,
Bypassventil zu schließen. sind nur Richtwerte.
Bei Förderung von lufthaltigen Medien wird empfohlen, das
Motorleis- Lageraustauschintervall [Betriebsstunden]
Bypassventil zu öffnen, falls der Betriebsdruck niedriger als 6 bar
ist. tung [kW] 40 °C 45 °C 50 °C 55 °C 60 °C
Liegt der Betriebsdruck ständig über 6 bar, muss das Bypassven-
til geschlossen sein. Andernfalls kommt es aufgrund der hohen 0,37 - 0,75 18000 - - - -
Strömungsgeschwindigkeit zu einem Verschleiß des an der Öff- 1,1 - 7,5 20000 15500 12500 10000 7500
nung befindlichen Werkstoffs.
Motorleis- Schmierintervall [Betriebsstunden]
tung [kW] 40 °C 45 °C 50 °C 55 °C 60 °C
Die Intervalle für 4-polige Motoren sind doppelt so lang wie für
2-polige Motoren.
Ist die Umgebungstemperatur niedriger als 40 °C, sind die Lager
entsprechend den unter 40 °C angegebenen Intervallen zu
schmieren bzw. auszutauschen.
62
10. Schutz vor Frosteinwirkungen
Deutsch (DE)
Zum Entleeren der Pumpe ist die Entlüftungsschraube im Pum-
penkopf zu lösen, anschließend ist der Entleerungsstopfen im
Fußstück zu entfernen.
Zum Entleeren der Pumpe ist die Entlüftungsschraube im Pum-
penkopf zu lösen, anschließend ist der Entleerungsstopfen im
Fußstück zu entfernen.
Warnung
Es ist darauf zu achten, an welcher Stelle sich die
Entlüftungsöffnung befindet, um sicherzugehen,
dass durch austretende Flüssigkeit keine Perso-
nen verletzt oder der Motor oder andere Kompo-
nenten beschädigt werden.
Besonders bei Anlagen zur Förderung von heißen
Medien ist sicherzustellen, dass keine Verbrü-
hungsgefahr für Personen besteht.
Die Entlüftungsschraube erst wieder festziehen und die Entlee-
rungsstopfen erst wieder einsetzen, wenn die Pumpe erneut in
Betrieb genommen wird.
CR, CRI, CRN 1s bis 5
Vor dem Einsetzen des Entleerungsstopfens in das Fußstück das
Bypassventil bis zum Anschlag herausdrehen. Siehe Abb. 22.
Entleerungs-
stopfen
Bypassventil
TM01 1243 4097
11. Instandhaltung
Es wird empfohlen, Pumpen mit 7,5-kW-Motoren oder höher vor
Ort zu reparieren. Dazu muss geeignetes Hebezeug verfügbar
sein.
63
12. Störungsübersicht
Deutsch (DE)
Warnung
Vor dem Öffnen des Klemmenkastens und vor dem Ausbauen/Zerlegen der Pumpe ist sicherzustellen, dass die
Spannungsversorgung ausgeschaltet ist und nicht versehentlich wieder eingeschaltet werden kann.
13. Entsorgung
Technische Änderungen vorbehalten.
Dieses Produkt bzw. seine Bestandteile muss/müssen auf
umweltgerechte Art und Weise entsorgt werden:
1. Für die Entsorgung sollten zunächst geeignete öffentliche
oder private Entsorgungsgesellschaften vor Ort in Anspruch
genommen werden.
2. Ist das nicht möglich, wenden Sie sich bitte an die nächste
Grundfos-Niederlasssung oder -Werkstatt.
64
Eesti (EE) Paigaldus- ja kasutusjuhend
Eesti (EE)
Paigaldus- ja kasutusjuhend. 1. Selles dokumendis kasutatud sümbolid
SISUJUHT Hoiatus
Lk Kui neid ohutusjuhiseid eirata võivad tagajärjeks
1. Selles dokumendis kasutatud sümbolid 65 olla kehalised vigastused.
2. Käsitlemine 65
Hoiatus
3. Tüübitähis 66
Kui neid ohutusjuhiseid eirata võivad tagajärjeks
3.1 Tüübitähis CR, CRI, CRN 1s, 1, 3, 5, 10, 15 ja 20 66
olla elektrilöök, mis võib põhjustada tõsiseid
3.2 Tüübitähis CR, CRN 32, 45, 64, 90, 120 ja 150 66
kehavigastusi või surma.
4. Kasutusvaldkonnad 66
5. Tehnilised andmed 66 Neist ohutuseeskirjadest mittekinnipidamine võib
Ettevaatust
5.1 Keskkonna temperatuur ja kõrgus 66 põhjustada seadmete mittetöötamise.
5.2 Vedeliku temperatuur 67
Märkused või juhendid, mis muudavad töö
5.3 Võllitihendi maksimaalne lubatav töösurve ja vedeliku Märkus
temperatuur 67 lihtsamaks ja kindlustavad ohutu tegutsemise.
5.4 Minimaalne sisendrõhk 67
5.5 Minimaalne sisendrõhk 68 2. Käsitlemine
5.6 Minimaalne vooluhulk 68 Terve pumba koos mootoriga tõstmiseks järgi neid juhendeid:
5.7 Elektrilised andmed 68 • Pump mootorivõimsustega 0,37 - 5,5 kW:
5.8 Käivituste ja peatamiste sagedus 68 Tõstke pumpa mootori äärikust rihmadega vms.
5.9 Mõõtmed ja kaal 68
• Pump mootorivõimsustega 7,5 - 22 kW:
5.10 Helirõhu tase 68
Tõstke pumpa mootori silmuspoltidest.
6. Paigaldus 68
• Pump mootorivõimsustega 30-45kW:
6.1 Vundament 69
Tõstke pumpa mootori äärikul asuvatest tõstmiskronsteinidest.
6.2 Vibratsiooni summutamine 70
6.3 Välispaigaldus 70 • Pump mootorivõimsustega 55-75kW:
6.4 Kuumad pinnad 70 Tõstke pumpa mootori poolel asuvatest silmuspoltidest.
6.5 Jõumomendid 70
6.6 Äärikutele mõjuvad jõud ja jõumomendid 71
7. Elektriühendus 72
7.1 Kaablisisend/kruviühendus 72
7.2 Kolmefaasilise ühendus 72
7.3 Ühefaasiline ühendus 73
7.4 Klemmkarbi asendid 73
7.5 Sagedusmuunduri käsitsemine 73
8. Kasutuselevõtmine 74
TM04 0339 0608
65
3. Tüübitähis 5. Tehnilised andmed
Eesti (EE)
3.1 Tüübitähis CR, CRI, CRN 1s, 1, 3, 5, 10, 15 ja 20 5.1 Keskkonna temperatuur ja kõrgus
Võllitihendi kood 70
60
4. Kasutusvaldkonnad 50
66
5.2 Vedeliku temperatuur 5.4 Minimaalne sisendrõhk
Eesti (EE)
Tabel lehelüljel 320 näitab suhet vedeliku temperatuurivahemiku
ja maksimaalse lubatava töösurve vahel.
p [bar]
35 Hv
30
25 Joonis 4 Skeem näitab CR pumbaga avatud süsteemi.
H H H H H
20 Q Q Q Q B
HQQE/V
15 Q Q Q Q Q Maksimaalset imikõrgust "H" meetrites saab arvutada järgmiselt:
67
5.5 Minimaalne sisendrõhk
Samm Tegevus
Eesti (EE)
6. Paigaldus 6
Pump peab olema kinnitatud poltidega läbi alusplaadi avade Paigalda pumba lähedusse
horisontaalsele, tasasele ja kõvale alusele. Pumba paigaldamisel vaakumklapp, kui
järgi pumba vigastuste vältimiseks allpool toodud tegevuskorda. installatsioonis on üks
järgnevaist tunnustest:
Samm Tegevus • Survetoru kalle on pumbast
eemaldudes allapoole.
TM02 0115 3800
1
• On sifooniefekti oht.
• On vajalik kaitse ebapuhaste
Nooled pumba alusel näitavad vedelike tagasivoolu eest.
TM02 0013 3800
68
6.1 Vundament
Eesti (EE)
Vundament/paigaldamine tuleb teostada
vastavalt järgmistele juhistele. Sellest erinev
Märkus
toimimine võib põhjustada funktsionaalseid vigu,
mis kahjustavad pumba detaile.
Grundfos soovitab paigaldada pumba betoonist vundamendile,
mis on piisavalt raske pakkumaks püsivat ja jäika tuge kogu
pumbale. Vundament peab olema võimeline neelama kogu
vibratsiooni, tavakoormused või hüdrolöögid. Betoonvundament
peab olema täiesti horisontaalne ja tasase pinnaga.
Paigaldage pump vundamendile ja kinnitage pump. Alusplaat
peab olema toestatud kogu ala ulatuses.
mpump × 1,5
hf =
TM04 0342 0608
Lf × Bf × δbetoon
Seibid
Soovitatavad pikkus ja laius on näidatud joonisel 7. Pidage
meeles, et aluse pikkus ja laius pumpade korral mootoriga
≤ 30 kW peab olema 200 mm alusplaadist suurem.
Pumpade korral mootoriga ≥ 37 kW peab pikkus ja laius olema
alati 1,5 x 1,5 (Lf x Bf) meetrit. Joonis 10 Joondamine seibidega
69
6.2 Vibratsiooni summutamine 6.5 Jõumomendid
Eesti (EE)
Vibratsioonisummutite kasutamisel tuleb need paigaldada aluse Tabel näitab aluse ja ääriku poltide pingutusjõudu.
alla. Pumpadel mootoriga δ 30 kW võib kasutada
vibratsioonisummuteid nii, nagu näidatud joonisel 11. Alus Äärik
CR, CRI, CRN
Pumpadel mootoriga ≥ 37 kW kasutage Sylomer® plaati nii, [Nm] [Nm]
nagu näidatud joon. 12.
1s-5 40 50-60
10-20 50 60-70
32-150 70 70-80
Vibratsioonisummutid
Sylomer® plaat
TM04 1692 1008
6.3 Välispaigaldus
Kui pump paigaldatakse välja siis peab paigaldama ka
vihmakatte. Soovitav on ka avada äravooluava mootoriäärikus.
Hoiatus
Kuumade vedelike pumpamisel tuleb hoolt kanda,
et inimesed ei puutuks kokku pumba kuumade
pindadega.
Joonisel 13 on näidatud, millised pumba osad muutuvad sama
kuumaks kui pumbatav vedelik.
TM04 0361 0608
Pumbapea
Pumba kest
Põhi
70
6.6 Äärikutele mõjuvad jõud ja jõumomendid
Eesti (EE)
Kui kõik koormused ei saavuta maksimaalselt lubatud väärtust,
tohib üks väärtustest ületada normaalset piirväärtust.
Lisateabe saamiseks pöörduge Grundfosi poole.
Y-suund: Sisselase/väljalase
Z-suund: Kambrivirna suund
X-suund: 90 ° sisse/väljalaskest
Jõud
CR, CRI, CRN
Aärik, DN
Y-suund:
X-suund
Z-suund
Jõud,
Jõud,
Jõud,
[mm]
[N]
[N]
[N]
Jõumomendid
CR, CRI, CRN
Jõumoment,
Jõumoment,
Jõumoment,
Äärik, DN
Y-suund:
X-suund
Z-suund
[mm]
[Nm]
[Nm]
[Nm]
71
7. Elektriühendus 7.2 Kolmefaasilise ühendus
Eesti (EE)
7.1 Kaablisisend/kruviühendus W2 U2 V2
Mootor Kaablisisendite W1 V1 L1 L2 L3
Kirjeldus
[kW] arv ja suurus
Joonis 16 Tähtühendus
Avadel on valmiskeermed ja
need on suletud Kui mootoril on PTC andurid või PTO kontaktid, peab ühendus
0,25 - 0,55 2 x M20 x 1,5
väljalöödavate vastama elektriskeemile klemmikarbis.
kaablisisenditega Kolmefaasilised mootorid tuleb ühendada mootorikaitselülitiga.
Avad on suletud
0,75 - 3,0 2 x M20 väljalöödavate
kaablisisenditega
Avad on suletud
4,0 - 7,5 4 x M25 väljalöödavate
kaablisisenditega
Avad on suletud
2 x M20
11-22 väljalöödavate
4 x M40
kaablisisenditega
30-45 2 x M50 x 1,5 Sulgkork
55-75 2 x M63 x 1,5 Sulgkork
72
7.3 Ühefaasiline ühendus 7.4 Klemmkarbi asendid
Eesti (EE)
Klemmkarpi saab pöörata 90 ° sammuga nelja asendisse.
Võrgutoide [V] Toimige vastavalt järgmisele tegevuskavale:
"Madalpinge" "Kõrgepinge" 1. Vajadusel eemalda ühendusmuhvi kaitsekatted. Ära eemalda
ühendusmuhvi.
50 Hz 220-230 / 240 2. Eemaldage poldid, mis ühendavad mootorit pumbaga.
3. Pöörake mootor soovitud asendisse.
4. Paigaldage ja keerake poldid kinni.
5. Paigalda ühendusmuhvi kate.
Teostage elektriühendused nii, nagu on näidatud skeemil
klemmkarbi kaane siseküljel.
73
8. Kasutuselevõtmine 8.1 Võllitihendi sissetöötamine
Eesti (EE)
9. Hooldus
Hoiatus
Joonis 21 Õhutusventiil, standard ja lisalahendusena koos Enne mistahes tööde alustamist pumbaga
voolikuühendusega. veenduge, et pumba toitepinge on välja lülitatud
ning seda ei ole võimalik kogemata sisse lülitada.
Pumba laagrid ja võllitihend on hooldusvabad.
Hoiatus
Pöörake tähelepanu õhutusava suunale ja Mootori laagrid
veenduge, et väljuv vesi ei vigasta inimesi ega Mootorid, millel puuduvad määrdeniplid, on hooldusvabad.
kahjusta mootorit või teisi komponente. Määrdeniplitega mootoreid tuleb määrida kõrge temperatuuri
Kuumaveepaigaldiste korral pöörake erilist jaoks mõeldud liitiummäärdega. Vaata juhiseid ventilaatori kattel.
tähelepanu vigastusohule kuuma vee tõttu. Hooajalise töö korral (mootor ei tööta üle 6 kuu aastas)
Järgige juhiseid lk 338. soovitame määrida mootorit, kui pump jäetakse hooaja lõpus
CR, CRI, CRN 1s kuni 5 seisma.
Nende pumpade jaoks on soovitatav käivituse ajaks avada Sõltuvalt ümbritsevast temperatuurist tuleb mootori laagreid
mõõdavooluklapp, mille asukoha leiate joon. 22. vahetada või määrida vastavalt allpool toodud tabelile. Tabel
Möödavooluklapp ühendab pumba sisse- ja väljalaskekülgi, puudutab 2-pooluselisi mootoreid. Juhendis antud laagri
muutes nii täitmisprotseduuri lihtsamaks. Sulgege töötundide arv on soovituslik.
möödavooluklapp uuesti, kui töö on stabiilne.
Mootori Laagrite vahetamise intervall [töötunnid]
Õhusisaldusega vedelike pumpamisel soovitame jätta
võimsus
möödavooluklapi lahti, kui töörõhk on alla 6 baari. 40 °C 45 °C 50 °C 55 °C 60 °C
[kW]
Sulgege möödavooluklapp, kui töörõhk ületab pidevalt 6 baari.
Vastasel juhul võib ava materjal kuluda vedeliku kõrge kiiruse 0,37 - 0,75 18000 - - - -
pärast.
1,1 - 7,5 20000 15500 12500 10000 7500
74
10. Kaitse külmumise eest
Eesti (EE)
Pumpasid, mida külmaperioodil ei kasutata, peab kahjustuste
vältimiseks tühjendama.
Pumba tühjendamiseks keerake lahti õhutuskruvi pumba peas ja
eemaldage põhja alt tühjenduskork.
Hoiatus
Pöörake tähelepanu õhutusava suunale ja
veenduge, et väljuv vesi ei vigasta inimesi ega
kahjusta mootorit või teisi komponente.
Kuumaveepaigaldiste korral pöörake erilist
tähelepanu vigastusohule kuuma vee tõttu.
Ära sulge õhutusventiili ega paigalda tühjenduskorki enne pumba
uuesti kasutuselevõtmist.
CR, CRI, CRN 1s kuni 5
Enne tühjenduskorgi tagasi paigaldamist kruvige
möödavooluklapp välja kuni peatumiseni. Vaadake joon. 22.
Tühjenduskork
Möödavooluventiil
TM01 1243 4097
11. Remont
Me soovitame parandada pumbad, mis on 7,5 kW või suuremad,
kohapeal. Saadaval peavad olema vajalikud tõstevahendid.
75
12. Rikkeotsing
Eesti (EE)
Hoiatus
Veenduge enne klemmikarbi katte eemaldamist ja enne pumba eemaldamist/demonteerimist, et elektrivarustus on
välja lülitatud ja et seda ei saa kogemata uuesti sisse lülitada.
13. Utiliseerimine
Toode või selle osad tuleb utiliseerida keskkonnasõbralikul viisil:
1. Kasutage avalikku või erasektori jäätmekogumisteenust.
2. Kui see ei ole võimalik, võtke ühendust lähima Grundfosi
esindaja või hooldustöökojaga.
76
Ελληνικά (GR) Οδηγίες εγκατάστασης και λειτουργίας
Ελληνικά (GR)
Αρχικές οδηγίες εγκατάστασης και λειτουργίας. 1. Σύμβολα που χρησιμοποιούνται στο παρόν
έντυπο
ΠΕΡΙΕΧΟΜΕΝΑ
Σελίδα Προειδοποίηση
1. Σύμβολα που χρησιμοποιούνται στο παρόν έντυπο 77 Η μη συμμόρφωση με τις παρούσες οδηγίες
2. Μεταφορά ασφαλείας μπορεί να καταλήξει σε τραυματισμό.
77
3. Χαρακτηρισμός τύπου 78
Προειδοποίηση
3.1 Επεξήγηση τύπου για CR, CRI, CRN 1s, 1, 3, 5, 10, 15
και 20 78 Η μη συμμόρφωση με τις παρούσες οδηγίες
3.2 Επεξήγηση τύπου για CR, CRN 32, 45, 64, 90, 120 και ασφαλείας μπορεί να οδηγήσει σε ηλεκτροπληξία
150 78 με επακόλουθο σοβαρό τραυματισμό ή θάνατο.
4. Εφαρμογές 78
Η μη συμμόρφωση με τις παρούσες οδηγίες
5. Τεχνικά στοιχεία 78 Προσοχή ασφαλείας μπορεί να προκαλέσει δυσλειτουργία
5.1 Θερμοκρασία περιβάλλοντος και υψόμετρο 78 ή βλάβη του εξοπλισμού.
5.2 Θερμοκρασία υγρού 79
5.3 Μέγιστη επιτρεπόμενη πίεση λειτουργίας και Σημειώσεις ή οδηγίες που καθιστούν την εργασία
Σημείωση
θερμοκρασία υγρού για το στυπιοθλίπτη άξονα 79 ευκολότερη και διασφαλίζουν ασφαλή λειτουργία.
5.4 Ελάχιστη πίεση εισόδου 79
5.5 Ελάχιστη πίεση εισόδου 80 2. Μεταφορά
5.6 Ελάχιστη παροχή 80
5.7 Ηλεκτρικά στοιχεία Όταν ανυψώνετε ολόκληρη την αντλία με τον κινητήρα,
80
ακολουθήστε τις παρακάτω οδηγίες:
5.8 Συχνότητα εκκινήσεων και παύσεων 80
5.9 ∆ιαστάσεις και βάρη 80 • Αντλία με μεγέθη κινητήρα 0,37 - 5,5 kW:
5.10 Στάθμη ηχητικής πίεσης 80 Ανυψώστε την αντλία στη φλάντζα κινητήρα με τη βοήθεια
ιμάντων ή παρεμφερούς εξοπλισμού.
6. Εγκατάσταση 80
6.1 Βάση έδρασης 81 • Αντλία με μεγέθη κινητήρα 7,5 - 22 kW:
6.2 Απόσβεση κραδασμών 82 Ανυψώστε την αντλία με τη βοήθεια των κρίκων του κινητήρα.
6.3 Τοποθέτηση σε εξωτερικό χώρο 82 • Αντλία με μεγέθη κινητήρα 30-45 kW:
6.4 Καυτές επιφάνειες 82 Ανυψώστε την αντλία με τη βοήθεια των βραχιόνων ανύψωσης
6.5 Ροπές 82 στη φλάντζα του κινητήρα.
6.6 ∆υνάμεις και ροπές στρέψης φλάντζας 83 • Αντλία με μεγέθη κινητήρα 55-75 kW:
7. Ηλεκτρική σύνδεση 84 Ανυψώστε την αντλία με τη βοήθεια των κρίκων στην πλευρά
7.1 Είσοδος καλωδίου/κοχλιωτή σύνδεση 84 του κινητήρα.
7.2 Τριφασική σύνδεση 84
7.3 Μονοφασική σύνδεση 85
7.4 Θέσεις ακροκιβωτίου 85
7.5 Λειτουργία μετατροπέα συχνότητας 85
8. Πρώτη εκκίνηση 86
8.1 Στρώσιμο στυπιοθλίπτη άξονα 86
9. Συντήρηση 86
10. Προστασία από παγετό 87
TM04 0339 0608
11. Σέρβις 87
11.1 Σετ ανταλλακτικών και εγχειρίδια 87
12. Εύρεση βλάβης 88
13. Απόρριψη 88
0,37 - 5,5 7,5 - 22 30-45 55-75
Προειδοποίηση kW kW kW kW
Πριν την εγκατάσταση, διαβάστε αυτές τις
οδηγίες εγκατάστασης και λειτουργίας. Η Σχ. 1 Σωστός τρόπος ανύψωσης μιας αντλίας CR
εγκατάσταση και η λειτουργία πρέπει να
Στην περίπτωση αντλιών CR, CRI και CRN με άλλους κινητήρες
συμμορφώνονται με τους τοπικούς κανονισμούς
εκτός της MG ή της Siemens, συνιστούμε να ανυψώνετε την
και τους αποδεκτούς κώδικες ορθής πρακτικής.
αντλία με τη βοήθεια ιμάντων στη φλάντζα του κινητήρα.
Προειδοποίηση
Βεβαιωθείτε ότι η αντλία παραμένει σε σταθερή
θέση κατά τη διάρκεια της αφαίρεσης της
συσκευασίας και της εγκατάστασης με τη βοήθεια
των ιμάντων που χρησιμοποιούνται για την
ανύψωση της αντλίας.
Λάβετε υπόψη ότι κατά κανόνα το κέντρο βάρους
της αντλίας βρίσκεται κοντά στον κινητήρα.
77
3. Χαρακτηρισμός τύπου 5. Τεχνικά στοιχεία
Ελληνικά (GR)
3.1 Επεξήγηση τύπου για CR, CRI, CRN 1s, 1, 3, 5, 10, 5.1 Θερμοκρασία περιβάλλοντος και υψόμετρο
15 και 20
Μέγιστο
Παράδειγμα CR 3- 10 X- X- X- X- XXXX Μέγιστη υψόμετρο
Ισχύς Κατηγορία
Μάρκα θερμοκρασία από τη
Σειρά: CR, CRI, CRN κινητήρα απόδοσης
κινητήρα περιβάλλοντος στάθμη της
Ονομαστική παροχή σε m 3/h [kW] κινητήρα
[°C] θάλασσας
Αριθμός πτερωτών [m]
Κωδικός για έκδοση αντλίας Grundfos
0,37 - 0,55 - +40 1000
Κωδικός για σύνδεση MG
σωληνώσεων Grundfos
0,75 - 22 IE3 +60 3500
Κωδικός για υλικά MG
78
5.2 Θερμοκρασία υγρού 5.4 Ελάχιστη πίεση εισόδου
Ελληνικά (GR)
Ο πίνακας στη σελίδα 320 αναφέρει τη σχέση μεταξύ της
θερμοκρασίας του υγρού και της μέγιστης επιτρεπόμενης πίεσης
λειτουργίας.
79
5.5 Ελάχιστη πίεση εισόδου
Βήμα Ενέργεια
Ελληνικά (GR)
80
Βήμα Ενέργεια
Ελληνικά (GR)
Τοποθετήστε μία βαλβίδα
κενού κοντά στην αντλία σε
6 περίπτωση που η εγκατάσταση
διαθέτει ένα από τα παρακάτω
χαρακτηριστικά:
• Ο σωλήνας κατάθλιψης έχει
μία κλίση προς τα κάτω
καθώς απομακρύνεται από
την αντλία.
• Υπάρχει κίνδυνος
TM02 0115 3800
παρουσίασης του
φαινομένου σιφωνισμού.
• Απαιτείται προστασία κατά
της αναρροής των μη
καθαρών υγρών.
mαντλίας × 1,5
hf =
Lf × Bf × δσκυροδέματος
81
Η πυκνότητα (δ) του σκυροδέματος λαμβάνεται συνήθως ως
2.200 kg/m3.
Ελληνικά (GR)
Έλασμα
Όταν οι βίδες βάσης είναι στη θέση τους, τότε μπορεί η αντλία να 6.3 Τοποθέτηση σε εξωτερικό χώρο
τοποθετηθεί στη βάση. Το έλασμα βάσης μπορεί τώρα να Κατά την τοποθέτηση σε εξωτερικούς χώρους, συνιστούμε να
ευθυγραμμιστεί με τη βοήθεια ροδέλων, εάν χρειάζεται, έτσι ώστε καλύπτετε τον κινητήρα με ένα σκέπαστρο βροχής. Συνιστούμε
να είναι απόλυτα οριζόντιο. Βλέπε σχήμα 10. επίσης να ανοίγετε μία από τις οπές αποστράγγισης στη φλάντζα
του κινητήρα.
Προειδοποίηση
Κατά την άντληση καυτών υγρών, θα πρέπει να
λαμβάνονται τα ανάλογα μέτρα ώστε τα άτομα να
μην ακουμπήσουν τυχαία τις επιφάνειες που
καίνε.
TM04 0362 0608
Ροδέλες
Στο σχήμα 13 φαίνεται ποια μέρη της αντλίας μπορούν να γίνουν
τόσο καυτά όσο και το αντλούμενο υγρό.
6.5 Ροπές
Ο πίνακας παρουσιάζει τις συνιστώμενες ροπές για τις βίδες στη
βάση και τις φλάντζες.
Βάση Φλάντζα
CR, CRI, CRN
[Nm] [Nm]
1s-5 40 50-60
Αποσβεστήρες
10-20 50 60-70
κραδασμών
32-150 70 70-80
TM04 1691 1008
82
6.6 ∆υνάμεις και ροπές στρέψης φλάντζας
Ελληνικά (GR)
Εάν δεν φτάνουν όλα τα φορτία τη μέγιστη επιτρεπόμενη τιμή που
αναφέρεται στους παρακάτω πίνακες, μία από αυτές τις τιμές
μπορεί να υπερβαίνει το κανονικό όριο. Επικοινωνήστε με τη
Grundfos για περαιτέρω πληροφορίες.
Κατεύθυνση Υ: Είσοδος/έξοδος
Κατεύθυνση Ζ: Κατεύθυνση συγκροτήματος βαθμίδων
Κατεύθυνση Χ: 90 ° από την είσοδο/έξοδο
∆υνάμεις
κατεύθυνση Υ
κατεύθυνση Χ
κατεύθυνση Ζ
CR, CRI, CRN
Φλάντζα, DN
∆ύναμη,
∆ύναμη,
∆ύναμη,
[mm]
[N]
[N]
[N]
κατεύθυνση Χ
κατεύθυνση Ζ
CR, CRI, CRN
Φλάντζα, DN
Ροπή,
Ροπή,
Ροπή,
[mm]
[Nm]
[Nm]
[Nm]
83
7. Ηλεκτρική σύνδεση 7.2 Τριφασική σύνδεση
Ελληνικά (GR)
Προειδοποίηση W2 U1 W2 U2 V2
84
7.3 Μονοφασική σύνδεση 7.4 Θέσεις ακροκιβωτίου
Ελληνικά (GR)
Το ακροκιβώτιο μπορεί να στραφεί σε τέσσερις θέσεις, σε βήματα
Παροχή δικτύου [V] των 90 °. Ακολουθήστε την παρακάτω διαδικασία:
"Χαμηλή τάση" "Υψηλή τάση" 1. Εάν χρειάζεται, αφαιρέστε τα προστατευτικά του συνδέσμου.
Μην αφαιρέσετε το σύνδεσμο.
50 Hz 220-230 / 240 2. Αφαιρέστε τις βίδες που συγκρατούν τον κινητήρα στην
αντλία.
3. Γυρίστε τον κινητήρα στην επιθυμητή θέση.
4. Ξανατοποθετήστε και σφίξτε τις βίδες.
5. Ξανατοποθετήστε τα προστατευτικά του συνδέσμου.
Πραγματοποιήστε την ηλεκτρική σύνδεση όπως φαίνεται στο
διάγραμμα καλωδίωσης στο εσωτερικό του καπακιού του
ακροκιβωτίου.
85
8. Πρώτη εκκίνηση 8.1 Στρώσιμο στυπιοθλίπτη άξονα
Ελληνικά (GR)
9. Συντήρηση
Προειδοποίηση
Σχ. 21 Βαλβίδα εξαέρωσης, πρότυπος εξοπλισμός και Πριν ξεκινήσετε οποιαδήποτε εργασία στην
προαιρετική λύση με σύνδεση εύκαμπτου σωλήνα. αντλία, βεβαιωθείτε ότι όλες οι παροχές ρεύματος
προς την αντλία είναι κλειστές και ότι δεν
μπορούν να ανοίξουν κατά λάθος.
Προειδοποίηση
Τα έδρανα της αντλίας και ο στυπιοθλίπτης άξονα δεν χρειάζονται
Προσέξτε ιδιαίτερα τη φορά της οπής εξαερισμού συντήρηση.
και λάβετε τα κατάλληλα μέτρα ώστε το νερό που
εξέρχεται να μην προκαλέσει τραυματισμό στα Έδρανα κινητήρα
άτομα ή βλάβες στον κινητήρα ή στα άλλα Οι κινητήρες που δεν διαθέτουν γρασαδόρους δεν χρειάζονται
εξαρτήματα. συντήρηση.
Σε εγκαταστάσεις ζεστού νερού, ιδιαίτερη Οι κινητήρες που διαθέτουν γρασαδόρους πρέπει να λιπαίνονται
προσοχή θα πρέπει να δοθεί στον κίνδυνο με γράσο λιθίου υψηλής θερμοκρασίας. Βλέπε τις οδηγίες στο
τραυματισμού ατόμων από το καυτό νερό. καπάκι του ανεμιστήρα.
Ακολουθήστε τις οδηγίες στη σελίδα 338. Σε περίπτωση εποχιακής λειτουργίας (ο κινητήρας δεν
CR, CRI, CRN 1s έως 5 χρησιμοποιείται για περισσότερο από 6 μήνες το χρόνο),
συνιστάται η λίπανση του κινητήρα όταν η αντλία τίθεται εκτός
Για αυτές τις αντλίες, συνιστούμε να ανοίξετε τη βαλβίδα
λειτουργίας.
παράκαμψης κατά την εκκίνηση, βλέπε σχήμα 22 για τη θέση της
βαλβίδας παράκαμψης. Η βαλβίδα παράκαμψης συνδέει τις Ανάλογα με τη θερμοκρασία περιβάλλοντος, τα έδρανα κινητήρα
πλευρές αναρρόφησης και κατάθλιψης της αντλίας, πρέπει να αντικαθίστανται ή να λιπαίνονται σύμφωνα με τον
διευκολύνοντας έτσι τη διαδικασία πλήρωσης. Κλείστε τη βαλβίδα παρακάτω πίνακα. Ο πίνακας εφαρμόζεται σε 2πολικούς
παράκαμψης ξανά όταν η λειτουργία σταθεροποιηθεί. κινητήρες. Ο αριθμός ωρών λειτουργίας για αντικατάσταση των
εδράνων είναι απλά ενδεικτικός.
Στις περιπτώσεις που αντλούνται υγρά που περιέχουν αέρα,
συνιστάται να αφήνετε τη βαλβίδα παράκαμψης ανοικτή εάν η
Μέγεθος ∆ιάστημα αντικατάστασης εδράνων [ώρες
πίεση λειτουργίας είναι μικρότερη από 6 bar.
κινητήρα λειτουργίας]
Κλείστε τη βαλβίδα παράκαμψης εάν η πίεση λειτουργίας
υπερβαίνει συνεχώς τα 6 bar. ∆ιαφορετικά, το υλικό στο άνοιγμα [kW] 40 °C 45 °C 50 °C 55 °C 60 °C
θα φθαρεί λόγω της υψηλής ταχύτητας του υγρού.
0,37 - 0,75 18000 - - - -
86
10. Προστασία από παγετό
Ελληνικά (GR)
Οι αντλίες που δεν χρησιμοποιούνται κατά τη διάρκεια περιόδων
παγετού, θα πρέπει να αποστραγγίζονται ώστε να αποφεύγονται
οι βλάβες.
Αποστραγγίστε την αντλία χαλαρώνοντας τη βίδα εξαέρωσης
στην κεφαλή της αντλίας και αφαιρώντας το πώμα
αποστράγγισης από τη βάση.
Προειδοποίηση
Προσέξτε ιδιαίτερα τη φορά της οπής εξαερισμού
και λάβετε τα κατάλληλα μέτρα ώστε το νερό που
εξέρχεται να μην προκαλέσει τραυματισμό στα
άτομα ή βλάβες στον κινητήρα ή στα άλλα
εξαρτήματα.
Σε εγκαταστάσεις ζεστού νερού, ιδιαίτερη
προσοχή θα πρέπει να δοθεί στον κίνδυνο
τραυματισμού ατόμων από το καυτό νερό.
Μην σφίγγετε τη βίδα εξαέρωσης και μην τοποθετείτε στη θέση
του το πώμα αποστράγγισης μέχρι η αντλία να χρησιμοποιηθεί
ξανά.
CR, CRI, CRN 1s έως 5
Πριν τοποθετήσετε το πώμα αποστράγγισης στη θέση του,
ξεβιδώστε μέχρι τέρμα τη βαλβίδα παράκαμψης.
Βλέπε σχήμα 22.
Πώμα
αποστράγγισης
Βαλβίδα παράκαμψης
TM01 1243 4097
11. Σέρβις
Συνιστούμε να επισκευάζετε τις αντλίες με κινητήρες των 7,5 kW
και πάνω στη θέση όπου βρίσκεται η αντλία. Πρέπει να είναι
διαθέσιμος ο απαραίτητος εξοπλισμός ανύψωσης.
87
12. Εύρεση βλάβης
Ελληνικά (GR)
Προειδοποίηση
Πριν αφαιρέσετε το καπάκι του ακροκιβωτίου και πριν βγάλετε/αποσυναρμολογήσετε την αντλία, βεβαιωθείτε ότι η
παροχή ρεύματος είναι κλειστή και ότι δεν μπορεί να ανοίξει τυχαία.
13. Απόρριψη 2. Εάν κάτι τέτοιο δεν είναι δυνατόν, επικοινωνήστε με την
πλησιέστερη εταιρία ή συνεργείο Grundfos.
Το παρόν προϊόν ή τα εξαρτήματα αυτού πρέπει να
απορρίπτονται με περιβαλλοντικά ασφαλή τρόπο:
1. Χρησιμοποιήστε τη δημόσια ή ιδιωτική υπηρεσία
Υπόκειται σε τροποποιήσεις.
περισυλλογής αποβλήτων.
88
Español (ES) Instrucciones de instalación y funcionamiento
Español (ES)
Instrucciones originales de instalación y funcionamiento. 1. Símbolos utilizados en este documento
ÍNDICE Advertencia
Página No respetar estas instrucciones de seguridad
1. Símbolos utilizados en este documento 89 puede dar lugar a lesiones personales.
2. Manipulación 89
Advertencia
3. Denominación de tipo 90
No respetar estas instrucciones puede dar lugar
3.1 Clave de tipo para bombas CR, CRI y CRN 1s, 1, 3,
5, 10, 15 y 20 a descargas eléctricas con riesgo de lesión per-
90
sonal grave o muerte.
3.2 Clave de tipo para bombas CR y CRN 32, 45, 64, 90,
120 y 150 90
No respetar estas instrucciones de seguridad
4. Aplicaciones 90 Precaución puede dar lugar a un mal funcionamiento del
5. Datos técnicos 90 equipo o daños en el mismo.
5.1 Temperatura ambiente y altitud 90
5.2 Temperatura del líquido 91 Notas o instrucciones que facilitan el trabajo y
Nota
5.3 Presión máxima de funcionamiento y temperatura del garantizan un funcionamiento seguro.
líquido para el cierre mecánico 91
5.4 Presión mínima de entrada 91 2. Manipulación
5.5 Presión mínima de entrada 92
Siga las instrucciones descritas a continuación al izar la bomba
5.6 Caudal nominal mínimo 92
completa con el motor:
5.7 Datos eléctricos 92
• Bombas con motores de 0,37 - 5,5 kW:
5.8 Frecuencia de arranques y paradas 92
Ice la bomba por la brida del motor empleando correas o apa-
5.9 Dimensiones y pesos 92
rejos similares.
5.10 Nivel de ruido 92
• Bombas con motores de 7,5 - 22 kW:
6. Instalación 92
Ice la bomba por las argollas del motor.
6.1 Cimentación 93
6.2 Amortiguación de vibraciones 94 • Bombas con motores de 30-45 kW:
6.3 Instalación en exteriores 94 Ice la bomba por los enganches situados en la brida del motor.
6.4 Superficies calientes 94 • Bombas con motores de 55-75 kW:
6.5 Pares de apriete 94 Ice la bomba por las argollas situadas a los lados del motor.
6.6 Fuerzas y pares de torsión de las bridas 95
7. Conexión eléctrica 96
7.1 Entrada de cable/conexión atornillada 96
7.2 Conexión trifásica 96
7.3 Conexión monofásica 97
7.4 Posiciones de la caja de conexiones 97
7.5 Funcionamiento con convertidor de frecuencia 97
8. Puesta en marcha 98
8.1 Rodaje del cierre mecánico 98
TM04 0339 0608
89
3. Denominación de tipo 5. Datos técnicos
Español (ES)
3.1 Clave de tipo para bombas CR, CRI y CRN 1s, 1, 3, 5.1 Temperatura ambiente y altitud
5, 10, 15 y 20
Altitud
Ejemplo CR 3- 10 X- X- X- X- XXXX Temperatura máxima
Potencia Fabri- Clase de
ambiente sobre el
Gama: CR, CRI, CRN del motor cante del eficiencia
máxima nivel del
Caudal nominal en m3/h [kW] motor del motor
[°C] mar
Número de impulsores [m]
Código de versión de la bomba Grundfos
0,37 - 0,55 - +40 1000
Código de la conexión a tube- MG
rías Grundfos
0,75 - 22 IE3 +60 3500
Código de los materiales MG
90
5.2 Temperatura del líquido 5.4 Presión mínima de entrada
Español (ES)
La tabla de la página 320 detalla la relación entre el rango de
temperatura del líquido y la presión máxima de funcionamiento.
p [bar]
Hv
35
30 Fig. 4 Esquema de un sistema abierto con una bomba CR
25
H H H H H
20 Q Q Q HQQE/V Q B La altura máxima de aspiración "H" en m.c.a. puede calcularse
15 Q Q Q Q Q empleando la siguiente fórmula:
HBQE/V
91
5.5 Presión mínima de entrada
Paso Acción
Español (ES)
0
al ventilador de refrigeración
del motor.
40 60 80 100 120 140 160 180 t [°C] Los motores de más de 4 kW
deben contar con un soporte.
Fig. 5 Caudal mínimo
(Soporte complementario para
3a el uso naval).
La bomba no debe funcionar nunca contra una Es posible instalar soportes
Precaución
válvula de descarga cerrada. complementarios para minimi-
zar las vibraciones generadas
5.7 Datos eléctricos
por la bomba. Los soportes
Consulte la placa de características del motor. pueden instalarse entre el
motor o la bancada del motor y
5.8 Frecuencia de arranques y paradas el mamparo del buque, y deben
montarse en posición horizon-
Tamaño del tal. Para minimizar las vibracio-
daños en la misma.
especialmente en el lado de
Paso Acción aspiración de la bomba.
92
La longitud y anchura recomendadas se muestran en la fig. 7.
Paso Acción Tenga en cuenta que, para bombas con motor de ≤ 30 kW, la
Español (ES)
6 Instale una válvula de vacío longitud y la anchura del cimiento deben ser 200 mm superiores
cerca de la bomba si la instala- a las de la bancada.
ción presenta una de estas Para bombas con un motor de ≥ 37 kW, la longitud y la anchura
características: deben ser siempre de 1,5 x 1,5 (L f x Bf) metros.
• la tubería de descarga se
aleja de la bomba formando
una pendiente descendente;
6.1 Cimentación
mbomba × 1,5
hf =
Lf × Bf × δhormigón
bomba.
El cimiento debe contar con pernos para fijar la bancada.
Consulte la fig. 9.
6.2 Amortiguación de vibraciones
Fig. 6 Instalación correcta
Calzos
93
6.2 Amortiguación de vibraciones 6.5 Pares de apriete
Español (ES)
Si se usan amortiguadores de vibraciones, deberán instalarse La tabla muestra los pares de apriete recomendados para los
bajo el cimiento. Para bombas con motores de ≤ 30 kW, los pernos de la bancada y las bridas.
amortiguadores de vibraciones se pueden instalar como muestra
la fig. 11. Base Brida
CR, CRI, CRN
Para bombas con motores de ≥ 37 kW, instale una placa de [N·m] [N·m]
Sylomer®, como muestra la fig. 12.
1s-5 40 50-60
10-20 50 60-70
32-150 70 70-80
Amortiguadores de
vibraciones
Placa de
TM04 1692 1008
Sylomer®
Advertencia
Al bombear líquidos calientes, se debe tener cui-
dado para que nadie pueda entrar accidental-
mente en contacto con superficies calientes.
La fig. 13 muestra qué piezas de la bomba alcanzan la misma
temperatura que el líquido bombeado.
TM04 0361 0608
Cabezal de bomba
Camisa de la bomba
Base
94
6.6 Fuerzas y pares de torsión de las bridas
Español (ES)
Si no todas las cargas alcanzan el valor máximo fijado en las
tablas siguientes, uno de estos valores puede exceder el límite
normal. Póngase en contacto con Grundfos si desea obtener más
información.
Dirección Y: Entrada/salida
Dirección Z: Dirección del paquete hidráulico
Dirección X: 90 ° desde la entrada/salida
Fuerzas
CR, CRI, CRN
dirección Y
dirección X
dirección Z
Brida, DN
Fuerza,
Fuerza,
Fuerza,
[mm]
[N]
[N]
[N]
Pares de torsión
Par de torsión,
Par de torsión,
Par de torsión,
CR, CRI, CRN
dirección Y
dirección X
dirección Z
Brida, DN
[N·m]
[N·m]
[N·m]
[mm]
95
7. Conexión eléctrica 7.2 Conexión trifásica
Español (ES)
Advertencia
Antes de quitar la tapa de la caja de conexiones y W2 U1 W2 U2 V2
96
7.3 Conexión monofásica 7.4 Posiciones de la caja de conexiones
Español (ES)
La caja de conexiones puede colocarse en cuatro posiciones,
Suministro eléctrico [V] girándola en pasos de 90 °. Siga el procedimiento descrito a con-
tinuación:
"Baja tensión" "Alta tensión"
1. Si es necesario, desmonte las protecciones del acoplamiento.
50 Hz 220-230 / 240 No desmonte el acoplamiento.
2. Retire los pernos que sujetan el motor a la bomba.
3. Gire el motor hasta que alcance la posición correspondiente.
4. Vuelva a enroscar los pernos y apriételos.
5. Vuelva a colocar las protecciones del acoplamiento.
Lleve a cabo la conexión eléctrica como se indica en el esquema
situado en la cara interior de la cubierta de la caja de conexiones.
fases.
El uso de motores MG sin aislamiento entre fases
Precaución con un convertidor de frecuencia puede dar lugar
a daños en los motores.
Fig. 18 Conexión, "alta tensión", 0,37 - 0,75 kW Se recomienda proteger todos los demás motores contra picos
de tensión superiores a 1200 V a 2000 V/µs.
Los problemas anteriormente indicados, es decir, tanto el incre-
mento del ruido acústico como los picos de tensión perjudiciales,
pueden eliminarse colocando un filtro LC entre el convertidor de
frecuencia y el motor.
Si desea obtener más información, póngase en contacto con el
fabricante del convertidor de frecuencia o el motor.
TM04 0345 0608
97
8. Puesta en marcha 8.1 Rodaje del cierre mecánico
Español (ES)
9. Mantenimiento
98
10. Protección contra heladas
Español (ES)
Las bombas que no deban funcionar durante los períodos de
heladas deben drenarse para evitar que resulten dañadas.
Drene la bomba aflojando el tapón de purga del cabezal de la
bomba y retirando el tapón de drenaje de la base.
Advertencia
Preste atención a la dirección del orificio de
purga y asegúrese de que las fugas de agua no
causen lesiones a personas ni daños al motor u
otros componentes.
En instalaciones de agua caliente debe prestarse
especial atención al riesgo de lesiones causadas
por agua próxima al punto de ebullición.
No apriete el tapón de purga ni coloque de nuevo el tapón de dre-
naje hasta que sea preciso volver a usar la bomba.
Bombas CR, CRI y CRN 1s a 5
Antes de volver a colocar el tapón de drenaje de la base, gire la
válvula de bypass contra el tope. Consulte la fig. 22.
Tapón de drenaje
Válvula de bypass
TM01 1243 4097
11. Servicio
Se recomienda reparar in situ las bombas con motores de poten-
cia igual o superior a 7,5 kW. Deberá disponerse del equipo de
izado necesario.
99
12. Localización de averías
Español (ES)
Advertencia
Antes de quitar la tapa de la caja de conexiones y antes de retirar/desmontar la bomba, asegúrese de que se ha des-
conectado el suministro eléctrico y de que no se puede conectar accidentalmente.
100
13. Eliminación
Español (ES)
La eliminación de este producto o partes de él debe realizarse de
forma respetuosa con el medio ambiente:
1. Utilice un servicio de recogida de residuos público o privado.
2. Si ello no fuese posible, póngase en contacto con el distribui-
dor o establecimiento de asistencia técnica de Grundfos más
cercano.
101
Français (FR) Notice d'installation et de fonctionnement
Français (FR)
SOMMAIRE Avertissement
Page Si ces consignes de sécurité ne sont pas respec-
tées, des blessures personnelles peuvent surve-
1. Symboles utilisés dans cette notice 102 nir.
2. Manutention 102
3. Désignation 103 Avertissement
3.1 Références de CR, CRI, CRN 1s, 1, 3, 5, 10, 15 et 20 103 Si ces consignes ne sont pas respectées, vous
3.2 Référence de CR, CRN 32, 45, 64, 90, 120 et 150 103 pouvez subir un choc électrique. Les risques de
4. Applications blessure grave, voire de mort, sont élevés.
103
5. Caractéristiques techniques 103 Si ces consignes de sécurité ne sont pas respec-
5.1 Température ambiante et altitude 103 Précautions tées, il y a risque de dysfonctionnement ou de
5.2 Température du liquide 104 détérioration de l'équipement.
5.3 Pression de service maximum autorisée et tempéra-
ture du liquide pour la garniture mécanique 104 Remarques ou instructions facilitant le travail et
Nota
5.4 Pression d’entrée mini 104 garantissant une utilisation sécurisée.
5.5 Pression d’entrée mini 105
5.6 Débit mini 105 2. Manutention
5.7 Données électriques 105
Pour soulever l'ensemble de la pompe avec le moteur, suivez les
5.8 Fréquence de démarrages et d’arrêts 105
consignes suivantes :
5.9 Dimensions et poids 105
5.10 Niveau de pression sonore 105 • Pompe avec moteurs 0,37 - 5,5 kW :
Soulever la pompe de la bride du moteur au moyen de sangles
6. Installation 105
ou autres.
6.1 Fondation 106
6.2 Amortissement des vibrations • Pompe avec moteurs 7,5 - 22 kW :
107
6.3 Installation en extérieur Soulever la pompe au moyen des boulons à oeil du moteur.
107
6.4 Surfaces chaudes 107 • Pompe avec moteurs 30-45 kW :
6.5 Couples de serrage 107 Soulevez la pompe au moyen des ferrures de levage situées
6.6 Forces sur la bride et torsions 108 sur la bride du moteur.
7. Connexion électrique 109 • Pompe avec moteurs 55-75 kW :
7.1 Entrée de câble / connexion vissée 109 Soulevez la pompe au moyen des boulons à oeil situés sur la
7.2 Connexion triphasée 109 partie latérale du moteur.
7.3 Connexion monophasée 110
7.4 Positions de la boîte à bornes 110
7.5 Fonctionnement avec convertisseur de fréquence 110
8. Mise en service 111
8.1 Fonctionnement de la garniture mécanique 111
9. Maintenance 111
10. Protection contre le gel 112
11. Entretien 112
TM04 0339 0608
Avertissement
Assurez-vous que la pompe reste en position
stable pendant le déballage et l'installation au
moyen des sangles utilisées pour la soulever.
Notez que le centre de gravité de la pompe est
proche du moteur.
102
3. Désignation 5. Caractéristiques techniques
Français (FR)
3.1 Références de CR, CRI, CRN 1s, 1, 3, 5, 10, 15 et 20 5.1 Température ambiante et altitude
103
5.2 Température du liquide 5.4 Pression d’entrée mini
Français (FR)
104
5.5 Pression d’entrée mini
Étape Action
Français (FR)
Le tableau sur la page 321 indique la pression d'entrée maximum
autorisée. Cependant, la pression d'entrée réelle + la pression Cette information est indiquée
2
maximum de la pompe (à un débit nul) doivent toujours être infé- sur la page 322 :
rieures aux valeurs indiquées sur la fig. A, page 320. • entr'axes
Les pompes sont testées à des pressions 1,5 fois supérieures
4xø • dimensions de la base
Étape Action
1
105
La longueur et la largeur recommandées sont indiquées sur la
Étape Action figure 7. Notez que la longueur et la largeur de la fondation pour
Français (FR)
Installez un clapet de dépres- les pompes avec moteur de ≤ 30 kW doivent être 200 mm plus
6 sion près de la pompe si l'ins- larges que la plaque de base.
tallation présente l'une des Pour les pompes avec moteur de ≥ 37 kW, la longueur et la lar-
caractéristiques suivantes : geur doivent toujours être de 1,5 x 1,5 (Lf x Bf) mètres.
• Le tuyau d'évacuation est à
un niveau plus bas que celui
de la pompe.
• Il existe un risque de siphon-
6.1 Fondation
Cales
TM04 0343 0608
106
6.2 Amortissement des vibrations 6.5 Couples de serrage
Français (FR)
En cas d'utilisation d'amortisseurs de vibrations, ils doivent être Le tableau indique les couples de serrage recommandés pour les
installés sous la fondation. Les pompes avec moteur de ≤ 30 kW boulons dans l'embase et dans les brides.
peuvent être équipées d'amortisseurs de vibrations comme pré-
senté sur la figure 11. Socle Bride
CR, CRI, CRN
Pour les pompes avec moteur de ≥ 37 kW, utilisez une plaque [Nm] [Nm]
Sylomer® comme indiqué sur la figure 12.
1s-5 40 50-60
10-20 50 60-70
32-150 70 70-80
Amortisseurs de
vibrations
®
Plaque Sylomer
TM04 1692 1008
®
Fig. 12 Pompe sur la plaque Sylomer
Avertissement
En cas de pompage de liquides chauds, réalisez
l’installation de manière à ce que personne ne
puisse accidentellement entrer en contact avec
des surfaces chaudes.
La figure 13 montre quelles pièces de la pompe deviennent aussi
chaudes que le liquide pompé.
TM04 0361 0608
Tête de pompe
Chemise de pompe
Socle
107
6.6 Forces sur la bride et torsions
Français (FR)
Forces
CR, CRI, CRN
Direction Y
Direction X
Direction Z
Bride, DN
Force,
Force,
Force,
[mm]
[N]
[N]
[N]
Couples de serrage
Couple de serrage,
Couple de serrage,
Couple de serrage,
CR, CRI, CRN
Direction Y
Direction X
Direction Z
Bride, DN
[mm]
[Nm]
[Nm]
[Nm]
108
7. Connexion électrique 7.2 Connexion triphasée
Français (FR)
La connexion électrique doit être réalisée par un électricien
agréé, conformément aux réglementations locales. Secteur [V]
La tension de service et la fréquence sont indiquées sur la plaque Fig. 15 Connexion en triangle
signalétique du moteur. Assurez-vous que le moteur convient à
l'alimentation électrique sur laquelle il est utilisé et que la U1
connexion des bornes est effectuée correctement. Vous trouve-
W2 U2 V2
rez un schéma de câblage à l'intérieur de la boîte à bornes.
109
7.3 Connexion monophasée 7.4 Positions de la boîte à bornes
Français (FR)
110
8. Mise en service 8.1 Fonctionnement de la garniture mécanique
Français (FR)
Les faces de la garniture mécanique sont lubrifiées par le liquide
Ne pas démarrez la pompe avant que celle-ci n'ait
pompé. Une petite fuite est donc possible.
été remplie de liquide et purgée. Si la pompe
Précautions Lors de la première mise en service de la pompe, ou lorsqu'une
tourne à sec, les roulements et la garniture méca-
nouvelle garniture mécanique est installée, un certain temps de
nique de la pompe peuvent être endommagés.
fonctionnement est nécessaire avant que la fuite ne soit réduite à
un niveau acceptable. Le temps nécessaire dépend des condi-
tions de fonctionnement. À chaque changement de conditions, un
9. Maintenance
Les intervalles pour les moteurs 4 pôles sont deux fois plus longs
que pour les moteurs 2 pôles.
Si la température ambiante est inférieure à 40 °C, les roulements
doivent être remplacés/lubrifiés aux intervalles mentionnés en
dessous de 40 °C.
111
10. Protection contre le gel
Français (FR)
Avertissement
Faites attention au sens de l’orifice de purge et à
ce que le liquide qui s'échappe ne blesse per-
sonne ni n’endommage le moteur ou d’autres
composants.
Dans les installations d’eau chaude, évitez les
risques de blessure en faisant très attention au
liquide brûlant.
Ne serrez pas la vis de purge et remplacez le bouchon de
vidange jusqu'à la prochaine utilisation de la pompe.
CR, CRI, CRN 1s à 5
Avant d'installer le bouchon de purge sur la base, vissez la vanne
by-pass à l'extérieur contre l'arrêt. Référez-vous à la figure 22.
Bouchon de purge
Vanne by-pass
TM01 1243 4097
11. Entretien
Nous vous recommandons de réparer les pompes avec des
moteurs de 7,5 kW et plus à des stations de pompage.
L'équipement de levage nécessaire doit être disponible.
112
12. Grille de dépannage
Français (FR)
Avertissement
Avant de démonter le couvercle de la boîte à bornes et avant de démonter / détruire la pompe, assurez-vous que l’ali-
mentation électrique ait été coupée et qu’elle ne risque pas d'être réenclenchée accidentellement.
113
Hrvatski (HR) Montažne i pogonske upute
Hrvatski (HR)
SADRŽAJ Upozorenje
Stranica Nepridražavanjem ovih sigurnosnih uputa može
1. Simboli korišteni u ovom dokumentu 114 doći do ozljeda.
2. Rukovanje 114
Upozorenje
3. oznaka tipa 115
Nepridražavanjem ovih sigurnosnih uputa može
3.1 Označni ključ CR, CRI, CRN 1s, 1, 3, 5, 10, 15 i 20 115
doći električnog udara s posljedicom ozbiljnih
3.2 Označni ključ za CR, CRN 32, 45, 64, 90, 120 i 150 115
ozljeda ili smrti.
4. Primjena 115
5. Tehnički podaci 115 Nepridržavanje ovih sigurnosnih uputa može
Upozorenje
5.1 Temperatura okoline i nadmorska visina 115 izazvati loše funkcioniranje ili oštećenje opreme.
5.2 Temperatura tekućine 116
Napomene ili upute koje olakšavaju posao i
5.3 Maksimalno dozvoljeni radni tlak i temperatura Uputa
tekućine za brtvu vratila 116 osiguravaju pouzdan rad.
5.4 Minimalni ulazni tlak 116
5.5 Minimalni ulazni tlak 117 2. Rukovanje
5.6 Minimalni protok 117 Kad podižete kompletnu crpku s motorom, slijedite ove upute:
5.7 Električni podaci 117 • Crpka s veličinama motora 0,37 - 5,5 kW:
5.8 Učestalost startanja i zaustavljanja 117 Podignite crpku na prirubnicu motora pomoću traka ili sličnog.
5.9 Dimenzije i težine 117
• Crpka s veličinama motora 7,5 - 22 kW:
5.10 Razina zvučnog tlaka 117
Podignite crpku pomoću motornih vijaka s okom.
6. Montaža 117
• Crpka s veličinama motora 30-45 kW:
6.1 Temelj 118
Podignite crpku pomoću obujmica za podizanje na prirubnici
6.2 Prigušivanje vibracija 119
motora.
6.3 Montaža na otvorenom 119
6.4 Vruće površine 119 • Crpka s veličinama motora 55-75 kW:
6.5 Okretni momenti 119 Podignite crpku pomoću vijaka s okom na strani motora.
6.6 Sile prirubnice i zakretni momenti 120
7. Električni priključak 121
7.1 Kabelska uvodnica/navojni priključak 121
7.2 Trofazni spoj 121
7.3 Jednofazni spoj 122
7.4 Položaji priključne kutije 122
7.5 Rad s frekvencijskim pretvaračem 122
8. Puštanje u pogon 123
8.1 Početni period rada brtve vratila 123
TM04 0339 0608
114
3. oznaka tipa 5. Tehnički podaci
Hrvatski (HR)
3.1 Označni ključ CR, CRI, CRN 1s, 1, 3, 5, 10, 15 i 20 5.1 Temperatura okoline i nadmorska visina
Grundfosove višestupanjske in-line centrifugalne crpke tipa CR, Slika 2 Snaga motora ovisi o temperaturi/nadmorskoj visini
CRI i CRN konstruirane su za brojne mogućnosti primjene.
CR, CRI, CRN Snaga motora
CR, CRI i CRN crpke pogodne su za transport tekućine, Poz. Vrsta motora
[kW]
cirkulaciju i povišenje tlaka hladne ili tople čiste tekućine.
0,37 - 0,55 MG
CRN 1
0,37 - 22 MGE
CRN crpke rabite u sustavima u kojima su svi dijelovi u dodiru s
tekućinom izrađeni od kvalitetnog nehrđajućeg čelika. 2 0,75 - 22 MG
3 30-75 Siemens
Dizane tekućine
Rijetke, čiste, rijetke, nezapaljive ili neeksplozivne tekućine, koje Primjer
ne sadrže krute čestice ili vlakna. Tekućina ne smije biti kemijski Slika 2 pokazuje da opterećenje IE3 motora uz temperaturu
agresivna na materijale crpke. okoline od 70 °C ne smije biti veće od 89 % nazivne izlazne
Pri dizanju tekućine gustoće i/ili viskoznosti veće od one vode, po snage. Ukoliko je crpka montirana na nadmorskoj visini od 4750
potrebi rabite motore odgovarajuće veće snage. metara, motor se ne smije opteretiti više od 89 % nazivne izlazne
snage.
U slučaju kad su prijeđene i maksimalna temperatura i
maksimalna nadmorska visina, faktore treba pomnožiti (0,89 x
0,89 = 0,79).
115
5.2 Temperatura tekućine 5.4 Minimalni ulazni tlak
Hrvatski (HR)
p [bar]
35 Hv
30
25 Slika 4 Shematski prikaz otvorenog uređaja s CR crpkom
H H H H H
20 Q Q Q Q B
HQQE/V
15 Q Q Q Q Q Maksimalna visina usisa "H" u metrima može se izračunati na
116
5.5 Minimalni ulazni tlak
Korak Postupak
Hrvatski (HR)
Tabela na stranici 321 prikazuje maksimalni dozvoljeni ulazni tlak.
Međutim, aktualni ulazni tlak + maksimalni tlak crpke 2 Ova informacija je navedena
(bez protoka) uvijek mora biti niži odvrijednosti navedene na sl. A, na stranici 322:
stranica 320. • dužine između portova
praznili uređaj.
45 80
Crpku uvijek zaštitite pomoću
55 50 nepovratnog ventila (nožnog
75 50 ventila) od povratnog strujanja.
Korak Postupak
sifona.
1 • Ukoliko je potrebna zaštita
od povratnog strujanja
Strjelice na postolju crpke zaprljanjih tekućina.
TM02 0013 3800
117
6.1 Temelj
Hrvatski (HR)
mcrpka × 1,5
hf =
TM04 0342 0608
Lf × Bf × δbeton
Podlošci
Preporučene duljine i širine prikazane su na slici 7. Imajte na umu
da dužina i širina temelja za crpke s veličinom motora ≤ 30 kW
mora biti 200 mm veća od temeljne ploče.
Za crpke s veličinom motora ≥ 37 kW, dužina i širina uvijek mora
bit 1,5 x 1,5 (Lf x Bf) metara. Slika 10 Centriranje pomoću podložaka
118
6.2 Prigušivanje vibracija 6.5 Okretni momenti
Hrvatski (HR)
Ukoliko se koriste prigušivači vibracija, moraju se montirati ispod Tablica prikazuje preporučene momente za vijke postolja i
temelja. Crpke s motorom veličine ≤ 30 kW mogu korisititi prirubnica.
prigušivače vibracija kao što je prikazano na sl. 11.
Za crpke s motorom veličina ≥ 37 kW, koristite Sylomer® ploču Postolje Prirubnica
CR, CRI, CRN
kao što je prikazano na sl. 12. [Nm] [Nm]
1s-5 40 50-60
10-20 50 60-70
32-150 70 70-80
Prigušivači vibracija
Sylomer® ploča
TM04 1692 1008
Upozorenje
Kod uređaja za dizanje vrućih tekućina posebno
paziti na to, da nepažnjom osoblje ne može doći u
dodir s vrućim površinama.
Slika 13 prikazuje koji dijelovi crpke postaju vrući kao i dizani
medij.
TM04 0361 0608
Glava crpke
plašt crpke
Postolje
119
6.6 Sile prirubnice i zakretni momenti
Hrvatski (HR)
Y-smjer: Ulaz/izlaz
Z-smjer: Smjer seta komora
X-smjer : 90 ° od ulaza/izlaza
Sile
Prirubnica, DN
Y-smjer
X-smjer
Z-smjer
[mm]
Sila,
Sila,
Sila,
[N]
[N]
[N]
Okretni momenti
Okretni moment,
Okretni moment,
Okretni moment,
Prirubnica, DN
Y-smjer
X-smjer
Z-smjer
[mm]
[Nm]
[Nm]
[Nm]
120
7. Električni priključak 7.2 Trofazni spoj
Hrvatski (HR)
Električno spajanje mora izvesti ovlašteni električar sukladno
lokalnim propisima. Opskrbni napon [V]
121
7.3 Jednofazni spoj 7.4 Položaji priključne kutije
Hrvatski (HR)
122
8. Puštanje u pogon 8.1 Početni period rada brtve vratila
Hrvatski (HR)
Površine brtve podmazuju se dizanom tekućinom, što znači da
Nemojte pokretati crpku prije no što je napunjena
može doći do određenog propuštanja iz brtve vratila.
Upozorenje tekućinom i odzračena. Kod rada na suho postoji
opasnost oštećenja ležaja crpke i brtve vratila. Kada se crpka prvi put pušta u rad, ili kada je instalirana nova
brtva vratila, potreban je određeni početni period rada prije nego
se propuštanje smanji na prihvatljivu razinu. Vrijeme koje je za to
potrebno ovisi o radnim uvjetima, npr. svaki put kada se radni
9. Održavanje
Upozorenje
Slika 21 Odzračni ventil, standardno i moguće rjeđenje sa Prije početka bilo kakvih radova na crpki,
spojem crijeva. provjerite je li električno napajanje isključeno i
osigurajte da se ne može nehotice uključiti.
Ležajevi crpke i brtve vratila ne zahtijevaju održavanje.
Upozorenje
Obratite pažnju na položaj odzračnog otvora i Ležajevi motora
osigurajte kako voda ne bi pobjegla te time Motori bez bez mazalica ne zahtijevaju održavanje.
uzrokovala ozljede ljudi ili oštetila motor ili pak Motori s mazalicama podmazuju se mašću na bazi litija,
druge dijelove. otpornom na visoke temperature. Pogledajte upute na poklopcu
U vrelovodnim instalacijama posebno pripazite ventilatora.
na opasnost ozljeda izazvanih vrelom vodom. U slučaju sezonskog rada (motor miruje dulje od 6 mjeseci
Pratite upute na stranici 338. godišnje), preporučamo podmazivanje motora tijekom razdoblja
CR, CRI, CRN 1s do 5 mirovanja.
Za ove crpke, savjetujemo vam otvaranje premosnog ventila Ovisno o temperaturi okoline, ležajeve motora potrebno je
tijekom pokretanja, pogledajte sl. 22 za položaj premosnog izmijeniti ili podmazati sukladno tabeli u nastavku. Tabela se
ventila. Mimovodni ventil povezuje usisnu i ispusnu stranu crpke i odnosi na 2-polne motore. Broj radnih sati naveden za zamjenu
time olakšava punjenje. Nakon stabilizacije rada ponovno ležaja je samo smjernica.
zatvorite mimovodni ventil.
Veličina Interval izmjene ležaja [radni sati]
Pri dizanju tekućina u kojima ima zraka, preporučamo da
motora
mimovodni ventil ostavite otvorenim, ukoliko je radni tlak niži od 40 °C 45 °C 50 °C 55 °C 60 °C
[kW]
6 bara.
Zatvorite mimovodni ventil ukoliko radni tlak stalno prelazi 6 bara. 0,37 - 0,75 18000 - - - -
U suprotnom će doći do trošenja materijala na otvoru zbog velike
brzine tekućine. 1,1 - 7,5 20000 15500 12500 10000 7500
123
10. Zaštita od smrzavanja
Hrvatski (HR)
Upozorenje
Obratite pažnju na položaj odzračnog otvora i
osigurajte kako voda ne bi pobjegla te time
uzrokovala ozljede ljudi ili oštetila motor ili pak
druge dijelove.
U vrelovodnim instalacijama posebno pripazite
na opasnost ozljeda izazvanih vrelom vodom.
Ne zatežite vijak za odzračivanje i nemojte zamjenjivati drenažni
čep sve dok crpka neće biti ponovno korištena.
CR, CRI, CRN 1s do 5
Prije vraćanja drenažnog čepa, odvijčajte mimovodni ventil do
zaustavljanja. Pogledajte sl. 22.
Čep za pražnjenje
Obilazni ventil TM01 1243 4097
11. Servis
Preporučuje se popravak crpki s motorima od 7,5 kW na mjestu
crpke. Neophodna oprema za dizanje mora biti na raspolaganju.
124
12. Traženje grešaka
Hrvatski (HR)
Upozorenje
Prije uklanjanja poklopca priključne kutije i prije uklanjanja/rastavljanja crpke, osigurajte da je opskrbni napon
isključen i da se ne može nehotice ponovno uključiti.
13. Zbrinjavanje
Ovaj proizvod ili njegove dijelove treba ekološki zbrinuti:
1. Koristite javne ili privatne usluge za prikupljanje otpada.
2. Ukoliko to nije moguće, kontakirajte najbližu Grundfos tvrtku ili
servis.
125
Italiano (IT) Istruzioni di installazione e funzionamento
Italiano (IT)
INDICE Avvertimento
Pagina La mancata osservanza di queste istruzioni di
1. Simboli utilizzati in questo documento 126 sicurezza può causare danni a persone.
2. Movimentazione 126
Avvertimento
3. Designazione modello 127
La mancata osservanza di queste istruzioni di
3.1 Designazione del modello per CR, CRI, CRN 1s, 1, 3,
5, 10, 15 e 20 sicurezza può causare scosse elettriche con con-
127
seguenti rischi di danni gravi a persone o
3.2 Designazione del modello per CR, CRN 32, 45, 64,
90, 120 e 150 127 decesso.
4. Applicazioni 127 La mancata osservanza di queste istruzioni di
5. Caratteristiche tecniche 127 Attenzione sicurezza può provocare danni alle apparecchia-
5.1 Temperatura ambiente e altitudine 127 ture o funzionamento irregolare.
5.2 Temperatura liquido 128
5.3 Pressione di funzionamento e temperatura del liquido Nota o istruzione che rende più semplice il lavoro
Nota
massime consentite per la tenuta meccanica 128 e garantisce un funzionamento sicuro.
5.4 Min. pressione in aspirazione 128
5.5 Min. pressione in aspirazione 129 2. Movimentazione
5.6 Min. portata 129
Per sollevare l'intera pompa, compreso il motore, procedere
5.7 Caratteristiche elettriche 129 come descritto di seguito:
5.8 Frequenza avviamenti e arresti 129
• Pompa con potenza motore 0,37 - 5,5 kW:
5.9 Dimensioni e pesi 129
Sollevare la pompa nella flangia del motore per mezzo di cin-
5.10 Livello di pressione sonora 129
ghie o simili.
6. Installazione 129
• Pompa con potenza motore 7,5 - 22 kW:
6.1 Fondazione 130
Sollevare la pompa per mezzo dei golfari del motore.
6.2 Smorzamento delle vibrazioni 131
6.3 Installazione all'esterno 131 • Pompa con potenza motore 30-45 kW:
6.4 Superfici bollenti 131 Sollevare la pompa per mezzo di staffe di sollevamento sulla
6.5 Coppie di serraggio 131 flangia del motore.
6.6 Forze e coppie di serraggio delle flange 132 • Pompa con potenza motore 55-75 kW:
Sollevare la pompa per mezzo dei golfari sul lato motore.
7. Collegamento elettrico 133
7.1 Pressacavi/collegamento a vite 133
7.2 Collegamento trifase 133
7.3 Collegamento monofase 134
7.4 Posizioni morsettiera 134
7.5 Funzionamento con convertitore di frequenza 134
8. Avviamento 135
8.1 Rodaggio tenuta meccanica 135
9. Manutenzione 135
TM04 0339 0608
126
3. Designazione modello 5. Caratteristiche tecniche
Italiano (IT)
3.1 Designazione del modello per CR, CRI, CRN 1s, 1, 5.1 Temperatura ambiente e altitudine
3, 5, 10, 15 e 20
Pot. Classe Max temp. Max. alt. s/l
Marca
Esempio CR 3- 10 X- X- X- X- XXXX motore eff. ambiente del mare
motore
[kW] motore [°C] [m]
Denominazione gamma: CR,
CRI, CRN Grundfos
0,37 - 0,55 - +40 1000
MG
Portata nominale in m3/h
Grundfos
Numero di giranti 0,75 - 22 IE3 +60 3500
MG
Codice versione pompa
30 - 75 Siemens IE3 +55 2750
Codice per attacco tubazione
In caso di temperatura ambiente superiore ai valori indicati o in
Codice materiali
caso di installazione della pompa a un'altitudine superiore a
Codice delle parti in gomma quella indicata, il motore non deve funzionare a pieno carico per
della pompa evitare il rischio di surriscaldamento. Il surriscaldamento può
Codice della tenuta meccanica essere causato da un'eccessiva temperatura ambiente o da una
bassa densità dell'aria con conseguente riduzione dell'effetto raf-
3.2 Designazione del modello per CR, CRN 32, 45, 64, freddante.
90, 120 e 150 In questi casi, può essere necessario utilizzare un motore con
potenza nominale superiore.
Esempio CR 32- 2 1- X- X- X- X- XXXX
Gamma pompa: CR, CRN P2
Portata nominale in m3/h [%] 3
Numero di stadi 100 2
Numero di giranti con diametro ridotto 90
Codice versione pompa 80 1
70
Codice per attacco tubazione
60
Codice materiali
50
127
5.2 Temperatura liquido 5.4 Min. pressione in aspirazione
Italiano (IT)
128
5.5 Min. pressione in aspirazione
Fase Azione
Italiano (IT)
La tabella a pag. 321 riporta la pressione massima in aspirazione
consentita. Tuttavia, la pressione in aspirazione effettiva + la 2 Queste informazioni si trovano
pressione massima della pompa (in assenza di mandata) devono a pagina 322:
essere sempre inferiori ai valori indicati nella fig. A a pag. 320. • lunghezza da porta a porta
75 50
zione della pompa.
5.9 Dimensioni e pesi Proteggere sempre la pompa
dal riflusso con una valvola di
Dimensioni: Vedi fig. C a pag. 322.
non ritorno (valvola di fondo).
Pesi: Vedi l'etichetta sull'imballo.
5
5.10 Livello di pressione sonora
Installare i tubi in modo da evi-
Vedi fig. D, a pag. 323. tare sacche d’aria, special-
TM02 0114 3800
129
6.1 Fondazione
Italiano (IT)
mpompa × 1,5
TM04 0342 0608
hf =
Lf × Bf × δcemento
130
6.2 Smorzamento delle vibrazioni 6.5 Coppie di serraggio
Italiano (IT)
Se vengono utilizzati degli smorzatori di vibrazioni, questi devono La tabella mostra le coppie di serraggio consigliate per i bulloni
essere installati sotto la fondazione. Pompe con potenza del nella base e nelle flange.
motore ≤ 30 kW possono usare smorzatori di vibrazioni come
mostrato nella fig. 11. Base Flangia
CR, CRI, CRN
Per pompe con potenze del motore ≥ 37 kW, usare una piastra [Nm] [Nm]
Sylomer® come mostrato nella fig. 12.
1s-5 40 50-60
10-20 50 60-70
32-150 70 70-80
Smorzatori di
vibrazioni
Piastra
TM04 1692 1008
Sylomer®
Avvertimento
In caso di pompaggio di liquidi caldi, assicurarsi
che nessuno possa entrare accidentalmente a
contatto con le superfici calde.
La figura 13 mostra quali componenti della pompa diventano caldi
quanto il liquido pompato.
TM04 0361 0608
131
6.6 Forze e coppie di serraggio delle flange
Italiano (IT)
Direzione Y: Ingresso/uscita
Direzione Z: Direzione della camera sovrapposta
Direzione X: 90 ° dall'ingresso/uscita
Forze
CR, CRI, CRN
Flangia, DN
Direzione Y
Direzione X
Direzione Z
Forza,
Forza,
Forza,
[mm]
[N]
[N]
[N]
Coppie di serraggio
Coppia di serraggio,
Coppia di serraggio,
Coppia di serraggio,
CR, CRI, CRN
Flangia, DN
Direzione Y
Direzione X
Direzione Z
[mm]
[Nm]
[Nm]
[Nm]
132
7. Collegamento elettrico 7.2 Collegamento trifase
Italiano (IT)
I collegamenti elettrici devono essere effettuati da personale qua-
lificato, nel rispetto delle normative locali. Alimentazione [V]
133
7.3 Collegamento monofase 7.4 Posizioni morsettiera
Italiano (IT)
Attenzione
serà danni al motore.
Si raccomanda di proteggere tutti gli altri motori da picchi di ten-
sione superiori a 1200 V per 2000 V/µsec.
Problemi come i picchi di tensione o l’aumentata rumorosità pos-
Fig. 18 Collegamento, "alta tensione", 0,37 - 0,75 kW sono essere eliminati interponendo un opportuno filtro LC tra il
convertitore di frequenza ed il motore.
Per ulteriori informazioni, contattare il fornitore del convertitore di
frequenza o del motore.
7.5.3 Motori di marca diversa da quelli forniti da Grundfos
Contattare Grundfos o il produttore del motore.
TM04 0345 0608
134
8. Avviamento 8.1 Rodaggio tenuta meccanica
Italiano (IT)
Le facce della tenuta meccanica sono lubrificate dal liquido pom-
Non avviare la pompa finché non sia stata riem-
pato, il che comporta che possa verificarsi una certa perdita dalla
pita con liquido e sfiatata opportunamente. Se la tenuta meccanica.
Attenzione
pompa marcia a secco, i cuscinetti e la tenuta
Se si avvia la pompa per la prima volta o se viene installata una
meccanica possono danneggiarsi.
nuova tenuta meccanica, è necessario un certo periodo di rodag-
gio prima che la perdita si riduca a livelli minimi. Il tempo richiesto
dipende dalle condizioni di funzionamento, ovvero, cambiando le
9. Manutenzione
Fig. 21 Valvola di sfiato, standard e una soluzione opzionale
con attacco tubo flessibile. Avvertimento
Prima di iniziare un intervento sulla pompa,
accertarsi che l’alimentazione elettrica sia stata
Avvertimento disinserita e non possa essere ripristinata acci-
Fare attenzione alla direzione del foro di sfiato e dentalmente.
accertarsi che l’acqua in uscita non possa cau- I cuscinetti della pompa e la tenuta meccanica non richiedono
sare lesioni alle persone o danni al motore o ad manutenzione.
altri componenti.
Negli impianti ad acqua calda, prestare partico- Cuscinetti motore
lare attenzione al rischio di danni alle persone, I motori sprovvisti di ingrassatori non richiedono manutenzione.
causate dal liquido bollente. I motori dotati di ingrassatori devono essere lubrificati con grasso
Seguire le istruzioni a pag. 338. a base di litio per alte temperature. Vedere le istruzioni sul coper-
chio della ventola.
CR, CRI, CRN da 1s a 5
In caso di esercizio stagionale (il motore rimane fermo per oltre
Per queste pompe, si consiglia di aprire la valvola di bypass
6 mesi all'anno), si consiglia di lubrificare il motore quando la
durante l'avviamento. Vedi fig. 22 per la posizione della valvola di
pompa non è in funzione.
bypass. La valvola di bypass collega i lati di aspirazione e di sca-
rico della pompa, facilitando la procedura di riempimento. A seconda della temperatura ambiente, i cuscinetti del motore
Una volta che il funzionamento è stabile, richiudere la valvola di devono essere sostituiti o lubrificati secondo la tabella seguente.
bypass. La tabella si riferisce a motori a 2 poli. Il numero di ore di funzio-
namento indicato per la sostituzione dei cuscinetti è da ritenersi
Quando si pompano liquidi contenenti aria, si consiglia di lasciare
solo come indicativo.
aperta la valvola di bypass nel caso in cui la pressione sia infe-
riore a 6 bar.
Potenza Intervallo sostituzione cuscinetti
Se la pressione di esercizio supera costantemente i 6 bar, chiu- [ore di funzionamento]
motore
dere la valvola di bypass. In caso contrario, il materiale all'aper-
[kW] 40 °C 45 °C 50 °C 55 °C 60 °C
tura è soggetto ad usura a causa della elevata velocità del
liquido.
0,37 - 0,75 18000 - - - -
Gli intervalli per i motori a 4 poli sono due volte più lunghi rispetto
a quelli dei motori a 2 poli.
Se la temperatura ambiente è inferiore a 40 °C, i cuscinetti
devono essere sostituiti/lubrificati agli intervalli indicati per una
temperatura ambiente di 40 °C.
135
10. Protezione antigelo
Italiano (IT)
Avvertimento
Fare attenzione alla direzione del foro di sfiato e
accertarsi che l’acqua in uscita non possa cau-
sare lesioni alle persone o danni al motore o ad
altri componenti.
Negli impianti ad acqua calda, prestare partico-
lare attenzione al rischio di danni alle persone,
causate dal liquido bollente.
Non serrare la vite di sfiato e non reinserire il tappo di scarico fino
al successivo riutilizzo della pompa.
CR, CRI, CRN da 1s a 5
Prima di reinserire il tappo di scarico nella base, avvitare la val-
vola di bypass fino all'arresto. Vedi fig. 22.
Tappo di scarico
Valvola di bypass
TM01 1243 4097
11. Assistenza
Si consiglia di riparare le pompe con motori di 7,5 kW e superiori
in situ. Devono essere disponibili le necessarie apparecchiature
di sollevamento.
136
12. Ricerca guasti
Italiano (IT)
Avvertimento
Prima di aprire il coperchio della morsettiera e rimuovere/smontare la pompa, accertarsi che l’alimentazione elettrica
sia stata disattivata e che non possa venire accidentalmente ripristinata.
13. Smaltimento
Lo smaltimento di questo prodotto o di parte di esso deve essere
effettuato in maniera rispettosa dell'ambiente.
1. Usare i servizi locali, pubblici o privati, di raccolta dei rifiuti.
2. Nel caso in cui non fosse possibile, contattare Grundfos o
l'officina di assistenza autorizzata più vicina.
Soggetto a modifiche.
137
Қазақша (KZ) Орнату жəне пайдалану нұсқаулықтары
Қазақша (KZ)
Назар аударыңыз
Орамадан шығару жəне орнату кезінде
сорғыны көтеру үшін пайдаланылатын
шынжырлар көмегімен сорғыны тұрақты
күйде ұстаңыз.
Əдетте сорғының ауырлық ортасы
қозғалтқышқа жақын екенін ескеріңіз.
138
3. Типтік белгі 5. Техникалық деректер
Қазақша (KZ)
3.1 CR, CRI, CRN 1s, 1, 3, 5, 10, 15 жəне 20 5.1 Қоршаған орта температурасы жəне теңіз
сорғыларының шартты белгілері деңгейінен биіктік
139
5.2 Сұйықтық темпера-турасы 5.4 Кірістегі ең аз қысым
Қазақша (KZ)
CR, CRI, CRN 1-ден 20-ға дейін жəне CR, CRN 32-ден 150-ге
дейін 4. сур. CR сорғысы бар ашық жүйенің схемалық көрінісі
140
5.5 Кірістегі ең аз қысым
Қадам Əрекет
Қазақша (KZ)
321-беттегі кесте ең жоғары рұқсатты кіріс қысымды
көрсетеді. Дегенмен, нақты кіріс қысымы + ең жоғары сорғы Бұл ақпарат 322-бетте
қысымы (ағын болмаған кезде) əрқашан 320-беттегі А 2 берілген:
суретінде берілген мəндерден төменірек болуы керек. • порттан портқа дейінгі
ұзындықтар
Сорғылар 321-беттегі В суретінде берілген мəндерден 1,5 есе 4xø
үлкен қысымда қысыммен сыналған 321. • тіреудің өлшемдері
0
жеткілікті болуын қамтамасыз
ету керек.
40 60 80 100 120 140 160 180 t [°C] Қуаты 4 кВт-тан жоғары
қозғалтқыштарды тіреу керек.
5. сур. Ең аз ағын жылдамдығы
(Кемелерде пайдалануға
3a арналған қосымша тірек)
Сорғы шығару клапаны жабулы болғанда Сорғы дірілдерін барынша
Сақтан
жұмыс істемеуі керек. азайту үшін қосымша тірек
кронштейндерді орнатуға
5.7 Электр жабдықтары деректері
болады. Кронштейндерді
Қозғалтқыштың фирмалық тақташасын қараңыз. қозғалтқыштан немесе
қозғалтқыш үстелінен кеменің
5.8 Қосу жиілігі қоршауына орнатуға болады.
Кронштейнді көлденең күйде
Сорғының табанындағы
TM02 0013 3800
көрсеткілер сорғыарқылы
сұйықтық ағынының бағытын
көрсетеді.
141
Ұсынылатын ұзындығы жəне ені 7 суретінде көрсетілген.
Қадам Əрекет Қозғалтқыш өлшемі ≤ 30 кВт қозғалтқышы бар сорғылардың
Қазақша (KZ)
6 Егерде орнатуда төмендегі негізінің ұзындығы мен ені астыңғы плитадан 200 мм артық
сипаттамалардың біреуі болуы керек екенін ескеріңіз.
болса, вакумдық клапанды Қозғалтқыш өлшемі ≥ 37 кВт сорғылар үшін ұзындығы мен
сорғыға жақын ені əрқашан 1,5 x 1,5 (Lf x Bf) метр болуы керек.
орналастырыңыз:
• шығару құбыры сорғыдан
төмен қарай көлбеу келеді.
6.1 Фундамент
mсорғы × 1,5
hf =
Lf × Bf × δбетон
Аралық
қабаттар
TM04 0343 0608
142
6.2 Дірілді азайту 6.5 Айналдыру моменттері
Қазақша (KZ)
Егер дірілді азайтқыштар қолданылса, оларды негіздің астына Кестеде табандағы жəне фланецтердегі бұрандалар үшін
орнату керек. Қозғалтқыш өлшемі ≤ 30 кВт сорғылар ұсынылатын айналдыру моменттері берілген.
11 суретте көрсетілгендей дірілді азайтқышларды пайдалану
мүмкін. Табаны Фланец
CR, CRI, CRN
Қозғалтқыш өлшемдері ≥ 37 кВт сорғылар үшін Sylomer® [Нм] [Нм]
плитасын 12 суретінде көрсетілгендей пайдаланыңыз.
1s-5 40 50-60
10-20 50 60-70
32-150 70 70-80
Дірілді
азайтқыштар
Sylomer®
TM04 1692 1008
плитасы
Назар аударыңыз
Ыстық сұйықтықтарды айдау кезінде
қызметкерлердің ыстық беттерге кездейсоқ
тиюіне жол бермеңіз.
13 суретінде сорғының қай бөліктері айдалатын сұйықтықпен
бірдей қызатынын көрсетеді.
TM04 0361 0608
Сорғының басы
Сорғының келте
құбыры
Табан
143
6.6 Фланецтегі күштер мен айналдыру моменттері
Қазақша (KZ)
Y- бағыты: Кіріс/шығыс
Z- бағыты: Камера жиынтығының бағыты
X- бағыты: Кірістен/шығыстан 90 °
Күштер
CR, CRI, CRN
Фланец, DN
Y- бағыты
X- бағыты
Z- бағыты
Күш,
Күш,
Күш,
[мм]
[N]
[N]
[N]
1-ден 5-ке
25/32 900 1050 850
дейін
40 10 1100 1250 1000
50 15 жəне 20 1500 1550 1350
65 32 1850 2100 1700
80 45 2500 2050 2250
100 64 жəне 90 3350 2700 3000
125/150 120 жəне 150 3350 2700 3000
Айналдыру моменттері
Айналдыру моменті,
Айналдыру моменті,
Айналдыру моменті,
CR, CRI, CRN
Фланец, DN
Y- бағыты
X- бағыты
Z- бағыты
[мм]
[Нм]
[Нм]
[Нм]
1-ден 5-ке
25/32 1100 850 750
дейін
40 10 1300 1050 900
50 15 жəне 20 1400 1150 1000
65 32 1500 1200 1100
80 45 1150 1300 1600
100 64 жəне 90 1250 1450 1750
125/150 120 жəне 150 1250 1450 1750
144
7. Электр жабдығын жалғау 7.2 Үш фазалы қосылым
Қазақша (KZ)
Электр жабдығын қосуды маман жергілікті ережелерге сəйкес
орындауы қажет. Қуат [В]
Жұмыс кернеуі жəне жиілігі қозғалтқыштың фирмалық 15. сур. Дельта түріндегі қосылым
тақташасында белгіленген. Қозғалтқыштың өзі
пайдаланылатын қуат көзі үшін жарамды екенін жəне U1
қозғалтқыштың клемма қосылымы дұрыс екенін тексеріңіз.
W2 U2 V2
Сымдарды өткізу схамасын клеммалар қорабынан
табуыңызға болады.
145
7.3 Бір фазалы қосылым 7.4 Клеммалық қораптардың орналасуы
Қазақша (KZ)
маркалары
Grundfos фирмасына немесе қозғалтқыш өндірушісіне
хабарласыңыз.
146
8. Іске қосу 8.1 Білік тығыздауышы жұмыс атқарып жатыр
Қазақша (KZ)
Тығыздағыштардың беті айдалынатын сұйықтықпен
Сорғыны қосудан бұрын оған сұйықтықты
сыланады, осыған байланысты білік тығыздағышынан
құйып, желдету керек. Құрғақ күйде іске сұйықтықтың белгілі бір мөлшері ағып кетеді.
Сақтан
қосқан жағдайда подшипниктер мен білік
Сорғы іске бірінші рет қосылғанда немесе жаңа білік
тығыздағышы зақымдануы мүмкін.
тығыздағышын орнатқан кезде сұйықтықтың ағып кету
мөлшері қабылдауға болатын деңгейге жетуі үшін белгілі бір
уақыт қажет. Бұл үшін қажет уақыт мөлшері жұмыс
147
10. Төмен температурадан қорғау
Қазақша (KZ)
Назар аударыңыз
Төгу тесігінің бағытына назар аударыңыз
жəне шыққан судың адамдарды
жарақаттамауын немесе қозғалтқышты
немесе басқа құрамдастарды зақымдамауын
қадағалаңыз.
Ыстық су орнатымдарында күйдіретін
ыстық судың жарақаттау қаупіне ерекше
көңіл бөлу керек.
Сорғы қайтадан пайдаланылғанша төгу бұрандасын
бекемдемеңіз жəне төгу тығынын қайта орнатыңыз.
1s пен 5 арасындағы CR, CRI, CRN
Табандағы төгу тығынын қайта орнатпай тұрып айналма
клапанды тоқтатқышқа қарай бұраңыз. 22 суретін қараңыз.
Төгу тығыны
Айналма
TM01 1243 4097
148
12. Ақаулықтарды шолу
Қазақша (KZ)
Назар аударыңыз
Клеммалық қораптан қақпақты алу алдында жəне сорғыны алу/бөлшектеу алдында қуатты өшіру керек
жəне оның байқаусызда қосылмайтынына көз жеткізу керек.
149
Lietuviškai (LT) Įrengimo ir naudojimo instrukcija
Lietuviškai (LT)
TURINYS Įspėjimas
Puslapis Nesilaikant šių saugumo nurodymų, iškyla kūno
1. Šiame dokumente naudojami simboliai 150 sužalojimo pavojus.
2. Tvarkymas 150
Įspėjimas
3. Tipas 151
Nepaisant šių nurodymų, galima gauti elektros
3.1 CR, CRI, CRN 1s, 1, 3, 5, 10, 15 ir 20 tipo žymėjimo
paaiškinimai smūgį, kuris gali sukelti sunkią traumą ar net
151
mirtį.
3.2 CR, CRN 32, 45, 64, 90, 120 ir 150 tipo žymėjimo
paaiškinimai 151
Nesilaikant šių saugumo nurodymų, gali blogai
4. Paskirtis 151 Dėmesio
veikti arba sugesti įranga.
5. Techniniai duomenys 151
5.1 Aplinkos temperatūra ir aukštis virš jūros lygio 151 Pastabos arba nurodymai, padedantys lengviau
Pastaba
5.2 Skysčio temperatūra 152 atlikti darbą ir užtikrinti saugų eksploatavimą.
5.3 Maksimalus leistinas darbinis slėgis ir maksimali
skysčio temperatūra veleno sandarikliui 152 2. Tvarkymas
5.4 Minimalus slėgis įvade 152
Keldami visą siurblį su varikliu laikykitės šių nurodymų:
5.5 Minimalus slėgis įvade 153
5.6 Minimalus debitas 153 • Siurbliai su 0,37 - 5,5 kW varikliais:
5.7 Elektrotechniniai duomenys Kelkite siurblį už variklio flanšo diržais ar pan.
153
5.8 Paleidimų ir sustabdymų dažnumas 153 • Siurbliai su 7,5 - 22 kW varikliais:
5.9 Matmenys ir masės 153 Kelkite siurblį už variklio ąsinių varžtų.
5.10 Garso slėgio lygis 153 • Siurbliai su 30-45 kW varikliais:
6. Įrengimas 153 Kelkite siurblį už kėlimo laikiklių, esančių ant variklio flanšo.
6.1 Pamatas 154 • Siurbliai su 55-75 kW varikliais:
6.2 Vibracijų slopinimas 155 Kelkite siurblį už variklio asinių varžtų variklio pusėje.
6.3 Įrengimas lauke 155
6.4 Karšti paviršiai 155
6.5 Užveržimo momentai 155
6.6 Flanšus veikiančios jėgos ir sukimo momentai 156
7. Elektros jungtys 157
7.1 Kabelio įvadas/srieginė jungtis 157
7.2 Trifazis prijungimas 157
7.3 Vienfazis prijungimas 158
7.4 Kontaktų dėžutės padėtys 158
TM04 0339 0608
150
3. Tipas 5. Techniniai duomenys
Lietuviškai (LT)
3.1 CR, CRI, CRN 1s, 1, 3, 5, 10, 15 ir 20 tipo žymėjimo 5.1 Aplinkos temperatūra ir aukštis virš jūros lygio
paaiškinimai
Maksimali Maksimalus
Variklio Variklio
Pavyzdys CR 3- 10 X- X- X- X- XXXX Variklio aplinkos aukštis virš
galia efektyvum
markė temperatūra jūros lygio
Tipas: CR, CRI, CRN [kW] o klasė
[°C] [m]
Nominalus debitas, m3/h
Grundfos
Darbaračių skaičius 0,37 - 0,55 - +40 1000
MG
Siurblio versijos kodas Grundfos
0,75 - 22 IE3 +60 3500
Vamzdžių prijungimo kodas MG
Medžiagų kodas 30 - 75 Siemens IE3 +55 2750
Guminių siurblio dalių kodas Jei aplinkos temperatūra viršija aukščiau nurodytas temperatūros
Veleno sandariklio kodas vertes arba jei siurblys įrengiamas didesniame nei nurodyta
aukštyje virš jūros lygio, variklis neturi būti pilnai apkraunamas,
3.2 CR, CRN 32, 45, 64, 90, 120 ir 150 tipo žymėjimo nes gali perkaisti. Perkaitimo priežastis gali būti aukšta aplinkos
paaiškinimai temperatūra arba mažas oro tankis, dėl kurio sumažėja aušinimo
efektyvumas.
Pavyzdys CR 32- 2 1- X- X- X- X- XXXX Tokiais atvejais gali prireikti naudoti didesnės nominalios galios
Tipas: CR, CRN variklį.
151
5.2 Skysčio temperatūra 5.4 Minimalus slėgis įvade
Lietuviškai (LT)
p [bar]
Hv
35
30 4 pav. Principinė atviros sistemos su CR siurbliu schema
25
H H H H H
20 Q Q Q HQQE/V Q B Maksimalų siurbimo gylį H metrais galima apskaičiuoti taip:
15 Q Q Q Q Q
HBQE/V H = p b x 10,2 - NPSH - Hf - Hv - Hs
152
5.5 Minimalus slėgis įvade
Žingsnis Veiksmas
Lietuviškai (LT)
321 psl. pateiktoje lentelėje nurodyti maksimalūs leistini slėgiai
įvade. Tačiau esamo slėgio įvade ir maksimalaus siurblio slėgio 2 Ši informacija nurodyta
(esant nuliniam debitui) suma visada turi būti mažesnė už vertes 322 psl.:
nurodytas A pav., 320 psl. • atstumas tarp įvado ir išvado
sifono efektas.
Ant siurblio pagrindo esančios
TM02 0013 3800
153
6.1 Pamatas
Lietuviškai (LT)
msiurblio × 1,5
TM04 0342 0608
hf =
Lf × Bf × δbetono
154
6.2 Vibracijų slopinimas 6.5 Užveržimo momentai
Lietuviškai (LT)
Jei naudojami vibracijų slopintuvai, jie turi būti sumontuoti po Šioje lentelėje pateikti rekomenduojami pagrindo ir flanšų varžtų
pamatu. Siurbliams su ≤ 30 kW varikliais galima naudoti užveržimo momentai.
vibracijų slopintuvus, kaip parodyta 11 pav.
Siurbliams su ≥ 37 kW varikliais naudokite "Sylomer®" plokštę, Pagrindas Flanšas
CR, CRI, CRN
kaip parodyta 12 pav. [Nm] [Nm]
1s-5 40 50-60
10-20 50 60-70
32-150 70 70-80
Vibracijų slopintuvai
"Sylomer®"
TM04 1692 1008
plokštė
Įspėjimas
Jei siurbiami karšti skysčiai, reikia pasirūpinti,
kad žmonės negalėtų atsitiktinai prisiliesti prie
karštų paviršių.
13 pav. parodyta, kurios siurblio dalys įkaista iki siurbiamo
skysčio temperatūros.
TM04 0361 0608
Siurblio galvutė
Siurblio korpusas
Pagrindas
155
6.6 Flanšus veikiančios jėgos ir sukimo momentai
Lietuviškai (LT)
Y kryptis: įvadas/išvadas
Z kryptis: kryptis į darbaračių kamerą
X kryptis: 90 ° nuo įvado/išvado
Jėgos
CR, CRI, CRN
Flanšas, DN
Y kryptimi
X kryptimi
Z kryptimi
[mm]
Jėga
Jėga
Jėga
[N]
[N]
[N]
Sukimo momentai
Sukimo momentas
Sukimo momentas
Sukimo momentas
CR, CRI, CRN
Flanšas, DN
Y kryptimi
X kryptimi
Z kryptimi
[mm]
[Nm]
[Nm]
[Nm]
156
7. Elektros jungtys 7.2 Trifazis prijungimas
Lietuviškai (LT)
Elektros maitinimą turi prijungti įgaliotas elektrikas pagal vietines
taisykles. Tinklo įtampa [V]
Darbinė įtampa ir dažnis nurodyti variklio vardinėje plokštelėje. 15 pav. Prijungimas trikampiu
Patikrinkite, ar variklis tinka elektros tinklui, į kurį jis bus
jungiamas, ir ar teisingai prijungti variklio gnybtai. U1
Laidų prijungimo schemą rasite kontaktų dėžutėje.
W2 U2 V2
157
7.3 Vienfazis prijungimas 7.4 Kontaktų dėžutės padėtys
Lietuviškai (LT)
158
8. Paleidimas 8.1 Veleno sandariklio įsidirbimas
Lietuviškai (LT)
Sandariklio paviršius tepa siurbiamas skystis, todėl pro veleno
Nepaleiskite siurblio, kol jis nepripildytas
sandariklį jo gali šiek tiek sunktis.
skysčio ir iš jo neišleistas oras. Jei siurblys dirba
Dėmesio Kai siurblys paleidžiamas pirmą kartą, arba kai sumontuojamas
be skysčio, gali būti pažeisti siurblio guoliai ir
naujas veleno sandariklis, kol sunkimasis sumažėja iki priimtino
veleno sandariklis.
lygio, turi praeiti tam tikras įsidirbimo laikas. Šis laikas priklauso
nuo darbo sąlygų, t.y. kiekvieną kartą pasikeitus darbo sąlygoms,
vėl turi praeiti įsidirbimo laikas.
9. Techninė priežiūra
Įspėjimas
Prieš pradedant dirbti su siurbliu, reikia
21 pav. Oro išleidimo vožtuvas, standartinis ir pasirenkamas pasirūpinti, kad būtų išjungtas siurblio elektros
sprendimas su jungtimi žarnai maitinimas, ir kad jis negalėtų būti atsitiktinai
įjungtas.
Siurblio guoliams ir veleno sandarikliui nereikalinga jokia
Įspėjimas
priežiūra.
Atkreipkite dėmesį į oro išleidimo angos kryptį ir
pasirūpinkite, kad išbėgantis vanduo nesužeistų Variklio guoliai
žmonių ir nepažeistų variklio ar kitų detalių. Varikliams, kurie neturi tepimo nipelių, nereikia jokios priežiūros.
Karšto vandens sistemose reikia atkreipti Varikliai su tepimo nipeliais turi būti tepami aukštai temperatūrai
ypatingą dėmesį į pavojų nusideginti plikinančiai atspariu ličio tepalu. Žr. nurodymus ant ventiliatoriaus gaubto.
karštu vandeniu. Sezoninio eksploatavimo atveju (variklis nedirba daugiau kaip
Laikykitės nurodymų, pateiktų 338 psl. 6 mėnesius per metus), rekomenduojama baigus siurblio
CR, CRI, CRN nuo 1s iki 5 eksploatavimą variklį sutepti.
Šių siurblių paleidimo metu rekomenduojama atidaryti aplankos Variklio guolius reikia keisti ir tepti, priklausomai nuo aplinkos
vožtuvą; aplankos vožtuvo vieta nurodyta 22 pav. Aplankos temperatūros, žemiau pateiktoje lentelėje nurodytais intervalais.
vožtuvas jungia siurblio įvado ir išvado puses ir padeda atlikti Lentelėje pateikti duomenys galioja 2 polių varikliams. Nurodytos
užpildymą. Kai siurblio darbas stabilizuojasi, aplankos vožtuvą darbo valandos, po kurių reikia keisti guolius, yra tik
reikia uždaryti. rekomendacinio pobūdžio.
Jei siurbiamame skystyje yra oro ir jei darbinis slėgis yra
Variklio Guolių keitimo intervalas [darbo valandos]
mažesnis kaip 6 bar, rekomenduojama aplankos vožtuvą palikti
atidarytą. galia [kW] 40 °C 45 °C 50 °C 55 °C 60 °C
Jei darbinis slėgis nuolat viršija 6 bar, aplankos vožtuvas turi būti
uždarytas. To nepadarius, dėl didelio skysčio greičio medžiagos 0,37 - 0,75 18000 - - - -
prie angos greitai susidėvės. 1,1 - 7,5 20000 15500 12500 10000 7500
159
10. Apsauga nuo šalčio
Lietuviškai (LT)
Įspėjimas
Atkreipkite dėmesį į oro išleidimo angos kryptį ir
pasirūpinkite, kad išbėgantis vanduo nesužeistų
žmonių ir nepažeistų variklio ar kitų detalių.
Karšto vandens sistemose reikia atkreipti
ypatingą dėmesį į pavojų nusideginti plikinančiai
karštu vandeniu.
Neužveržkite oro išleidimo varžto ir neįsukite skysčio išleidimo
kamščio tol, kol siurblys bus vėl pradėtas naudoti.
CR, CRI, CRN nuo 1s iki 5
Prieš įsukdami į pagrindą skysčio išleidimo kamštį, išsukite
aplankos vožtuvą. Žr. 22 pav.
Išleidimo kamštis
Aplankos vožtuvas
TM01 1243 4097
11. Remontas
Siurblius su 7,5 kW ir didesnės galios varikliais rekomenduojama
remontuoti jų įrengimo vietoje. Remonto vietoje turi būti reikiama
kėlimo įranga.
160
12. Sutrikimų paieška
Lietuviškai (LT)
Įspėjimas
Prieš nuimant kontaktų dėžutės dangtelį ir prieš bet kokį siurblio išmontavimą/ardymą reikia pasirūpinti, kad būtų
išjungtas elektros maitinimas ir kad jis negalėtų būti atsitiktinai įjungtas.
Galimi pakeitimai.
161
Magyar (HU) Telepítési és üzemeltetési utasítás
Magyar (HU)
TARTALOM Figyelmeztetés!
Oldal Ha nem tartják be ezeket a biztonsági
utasításokat, akkor ez személyi sérüléshez
1. A dokumentumban alkalmazott jelölések 162 vezethet.
2. Kezelés 162
3. Típusmegjelölés 163 Figyelmeztetés!
3.1 Típuskód a következőkhöz: CR, CRI, CRN 1s, 1, 3, 5, Ha nem tartják be ezeket az utasításokat, akkor az
10, 15 és 20 163 elektromos áramütéshez, és ennek
3.2 Típuskód a következőkhöz: CR, CRN 32, 45, 64, 90, következtében súlyos személyi sérüléshez vagy
120 és 150 163 halálhoz vezethet.
4. Alkalmazási területek 163
Ha ezeket a biztonsági utasításokat nem tartják
5. Műszaki adatok 163 Vigyázat be, az a berendezés hibás működését vagy
5.1 Környezeti hőmérséklet és tengerszint feletti sérülését okozhatja!
magasság 163
5.2 Folyadék hőmérséklet 164 A megjegyzések és utasítások egyszerűbbé, és
5.3 Maximálisan megengedett üzemi nyomás és Megjegyz.
biztonságosabbá teszik az üzemeltetést.
közeghőmérséklet a tengelytömítésre vonatkozóan 164
5.4 Minimum hozzáfolyási nyomás 164
5.5 Minimum hozzáfolyási nyomás
2. Kezelés
165
5.6 Minimális térfogatáram 165 A teljes szivattyú-motor gépegység emelésénél a következők
5.7 Elektromos adatok 165 szerint kell eljárni:
5.8 Kapcsolási gyakoriság 165 • 0,37 - 5,5 kW teljesítményű motorral szerelt szivattyú:
5.9 Méretek és tömegek 165 A szivattyút a motorkarimánál emelje meg hevederek vagy
5.10 Hangnyomás szint 165 hasonlók segítségével.
6. Telepítés 165 • 7,5 - 22 kW teljesítményű motorral szerelt szivattyú:
6.1 Alapozás 166 A szivattyút a motor emelőszemei segítségével emelje meg.
6.2 Rezgéscsillapítás 167 • 30-45 kW teljesítményű motorral szerelt szivattyú:
6.3 Kültéri telepítés 167 A szivattyút a motorkarima emelőszemeinél fogva emelje meg.
6.4 Forró felületek 167 • 55-75 kW teljesítményű motorral szerelt szivattyú:
6.5 Nyomatékok 167 A szivattyút a motor szemescsavarjainál fogva emelje meg.
6.6 Karimákra ható erők és nyomatékok 168
7. Elektromos csatlakozás 169
7.1 Kábelbemenet/csavaros kapcsolat 169
7.2 Háromfázisú csatlakozás 169
7.3 Egyfázisú csatlakozás 170
7.4 Kapocsdoboz helyzetek 170
7.5 Frekvenciaváltós üzem 170
8. Beüzemelés 171
8.1 Tengelytömítés bejáratás 171
TM04 0339 0608
162
3. Típusmegjelölés 5. Műszaki adatok
Magyar (HU)
3.1 Típuskód a következőkhöz: CR, CRI, CRN 1s, 1, 3, 5.1 Környezeti hőmérséklet és tengerszint feletti
5, 10, 15 és 20 magasság
163
5.2 Folyadék hőmérséklet 5.4 Minimum hozzáfolyási nyomás
Magyar (HU)
164
5.5 Minimum hozzáfolyási nyomás
Lépés Tennivaló
Magyar (HU)
A 321. oldalon lévő táblázat a maximálisan megengedett üzemi
nyomást mutatja. Azonban a pillanatnyi hozzáfolyási nyomás + 2 Ez az információ a 322. oldalon
maximális szivattyú nyomás (ha nincs szállítás) mindig látható:
alacsonyabb legyne, mint a 320. oldalon az A ábrán megadott • beépítési hossz
1 • Szennyezett közeg
visszaáramlása elleni
A közeg átáramlási irányát védelem szükséges.
TM02 0013 3800
a szivattyútalpon elhelyezett
nyilak mutatják.
165
6.1 Alapozás
Magyar (HU)
mszivattyú × 1,5
hf =
Lf × Bf × δbeton
TM04 0342 0608
Alátét-
Az ajánlott hosszúság és szélesség a 7. ábrán látható. Felhívjuk
lemezek
figyelmét, hogy a 30 kW-os vagy annál kisebb motorral szerelt
szivattyúk alapjának hossza és szélessége legyen 200 mm-rel
nagyobb mint az alaplemez.
A 37 kW-os vagy nagyobb motorral szerelt szivattyúk esetén az 10. ábra Beállítás alátétlemezekkel
alapozásnak mindig 1,5 x 1,5 (Lf x Bf) méternek kell lennie.
166
6.2 Rezgéscsillapítás 6.5 Nyomatékok
Magyar (HU)
Rezgéscsillapítók használata esetén a csillapítókat az alapozás A táblázat az alap és a karimák csavarjainak javasolt meghúzási
alatt kell elhelyezni. A 30 kW-os vagy kisebb motorral szerelt nyomatékait tartalmazza.
szivattyúknál a 11. ábra szerinti rezgéscsillapítók használhatók.
A 37 kW-os vagy nagyobb motorral szerelt szivattyúk esetén Alap Karima
CR, CRI, CRN
használjon Sylomer® lemezt a 12. ábrán látható módon. [Nm] [Nm]
1s-5 40 50-60
10-20 50 60-70
32-150 70 70-80
Rezgéscsillapítók
Sylomer® lemez
TM04 1692 1008
Figyelmeztetés!
Forró folyadékok szivattyúzásakor ügyelni kell
arra, hogy a személyzet ne érintkezhessen forró
felülettel.
A 13. ábra mutatja, hogy mely szivattyúalkatrészek forrósodnak
fel úgy, mint a szállított közeg.
TM04 0361 0608
Szivattyú fej
Szivattyú köpeny
Alap
167
6.6 Karimákra ható erők és nyomatékok
Magyar (HU)
Y-irány: Szívó/nyomócsonk
Z-irány: A kamracső iránya
X-irány: 90 ° a szívó/nyomócsonktól
Erők
CR, CRI, CRN
Karima, DN
Y-irány
X-irány
Z-irány
[mm]
Erő,
Erő,
Erő,
[N]
[N]
[N]
Nyomatékok
CR, CRI, CRN
Karima, DN
Nyomaték,
Nyomaték,
Nyomaték,
Y-irány
X-irány
Z-irány
[mm]
[Nm]
[Nm]
[Nm]
168
7. Elektromos csatlakozás 7.2 Háromfázisú csatlakozás
Magyar (HU)
Az elektromos bekötést egy erre jogosult villanyszerelőnek kell
végeznie, a helyi előírásoknak megfelelően. Tápfeszültség [V]
Figyelmeztetés!
Mielőtt eltávolítja a kapocsdoboz fedelét vagy W2 U1 W2 U2 V2
169
7.3 Egyfázisú csatlakozás 7.4 Kapocsdoboz helyzetek
Magyar (HU)
170
8. Beüzemelés 8.1 Tengelytömítés bejáratás
Magyar (HU)
A tengelytömítés csúszófelületeit a szivattyúzott folyadék keni,
Ne indítsa el a szivattyút addig, amíg nincs
ami azt jelenti, hogy bizonyos mennyiségű szivárgás várható
feltöltve folyadékkal és nincs légtelenítve. a tengelytömítésen.
Vigyázat
Ha a szivattyú szárazon fut, a szivattyú csapágyai
A szivattyú első indításakor, illetve új tengelytömítés beszerelése
és tengelytömítései tönkremehetnek.
után bizonyos bejáratási időre szükség van, amíg a szivárgás
elfogadható szintre csökken. A szükséges időtartam az üzemi
körülményektől függ, vagyis minden alkalommal, amikor az üzemi
9. Karbantartás
Figyelmeztetés!
21. ábra Légtelenítő szelep, normál és opcionális megoldás Mielőtt megkezdené a munkát a szivattyún,
tömlőcsatlakozással. győződjön meg arról, hogy a szivattyút tápláló
minden villamos tápfeszültség ki van kapcsolva,
és véletlen visszakapcsolás ellen biztosított.
Figyelmeztetés!
A szivattyú csapágyai és tengelytömítései karbantartást nem
Ügyeljen a légtelenítő nyílás irányára és fordítson igényelnek.
gondot annak biztosítására, hogy a kiszökő víz ne
okozhasson személyi sérülést, vagy károsodást a Motorcsapágyak
motorban vagy más komponensekben. A zsírzófej nélküli motorok karbantartásmentesek.
Forró víz szivattyúzása esetén különösen A zsírzófejjel ellátott motorokat magas hőmérsékleten
ügyeljen a balesetek megelőzésére. használható litiumbázisú zsírral kell kenni. Lásd a ventilátor
Kövesse a 338. oldalon lévő utasításokat. burkolaton lévő tájékoztatót.
CR, CRI, CRN 1s ... 5 Időszakos üzem esetén (a motor az év több mint 6 hónapjában
üzemen kívül van), ajánlott üzemszünet előtt elvégezni a motor
Ezeknél a szivattyúknál javasoljuk, hogy inditás idejére nyissa ki
zsírozását.
a túláram szelepet. A túláram szelep helyét lásd a 22. ábrán.
A túláram szelep összeköti a szivattyú nyomó- és szívóoldalát és A környezeti hőmérséklettől függően a motor csapágyait az
ezáltal megkönnyíti a feltöltést. Zárja el a túláram szelepet, ha az alábbi táblázat szerint kell cserélni vagy kenni. A táblázat
üzem stabilizálódott. kétpólusú motorokra vonatkozik. A csapágyak cseréjéhez
megadott üzemóra számok csak tájékoztató értékek.
Ha a szivattyúzott közeg levegős, ajánlott nyitva hagyni a túláram
szelepet, de csak akkor, ha az üzemi nyomás kisebb, mint 6 bar.
Motor Csapágycsere intervallumok [üzemóra]
Ha a nyomás tartósan meghaladja a 6 bart, a túláram szelepet
[kW] 40 °C 45 °C 50 °C 55 °C 60 °C
zárja el. Máskülönben a nyílásnál lévő anyag elkopik a nagy
folyadéksebesség miatt.
0,37 - 0,75 18000 - - - -
171
10. Fagyvédelem
Magyar (HU)
Figyelmeztetés!
Ügyeljen a légtelenítő nyílás irányára és fordítson
gondot annak biztosítására, hogy a kiszökő víz ne
okozhasson személyi sérülést, vagy károsodást
a motorban vagy más komponensekben.
Forró víz szivattyúzása esetén különösen
ügyeljen a balesetek megelőzésére.
Ne szorítsa meg a légtelenítő csavart és ne tegye vissza
a leeresztő dugót, amíg a szivattyút ismét üzembe nem helyezi.
CR, CRI, CRN 1s ... 5
A talpon lévő leeresztő csavar cseréje előtt csavarja ki a túláram
szelepet ütközésig. Lásd a 22. ábrát.
Leeresztő csavar
Túláram szelep
TM01 1243 4097
11. Szerviz
Javasoljuk a 7,5 kW-os vagy ennél nagyobb motort használó
szivattyúk helyszíni javítását. A szükséges emelőberendezésnek
rendelkezésre kell állnia.
172
12. Hibakereső táblázat
Magyar (HU)
Figyelmeztetés!
Mielőtt eltávolítja a kapocsdoboz fedelét vagy kiszereli a szivattyút, győződjünk meg arról, hogy azt az elektromos
hálózatról lekapcsolták és véletlenül nem kapcsolható vissza.
13. Hulladékkezelés
Ezt a terméket vagy részeit környezetbarát módon szabad csak
elhelyezni a hulladékban:
1. Vegye igénybe a helyi, közületi vagy magán hulladékkezelő
vállalatok szolgáltatásait.
2. Ha ez nem lehetséges, vegye fel a kapcsolatot a legközelebbi
Grundfos vállalattal vagy szervizzel.
173
Nederlands (NL) Installatie- en bedieningsinstructies
Nederlands (NL)
Waarschuwing
Zorg ervoor dat de pomp stabiel blijft tijdens uit-
pakken en installatie d.m.v de riemen die gebruikt
worden voor het hijsen van de pomp.
Houd er rekening mee dat het zwaartepunt van de
pomp dicht bij de motor ligt.
174
3. Typeaanduiding 5. Technische specificaties
Nederlands (NL)
3.1 Typesleutel voor CR, CRI, CRN 1s, 1, 3, 5, 10, 15 5.1 Omgevingstemperatuur en hoogte
en 20
Rende- Maximale
Maximale
Voorbeeld CR 3- 10 X- X- X- X- XXXX Motorver- ments- hoogte
Motorfa- omgevings-
mogen klasse boven zeeni-
Serie: CR, CRI, CRN brikant temperatuur
[kW] van de veau
Nominaal debiet in m3/h [°C]
motor [m]
Aantal waaiers Grundfos
0,37 - 0,55 - +40 1000
Code voor pompuitvoering MG
Code voor leidingaansluiting Grundfos
0,75 - 22 IE3 +60 3500
Materiaalcode MG
175
5.2 Vloeistoftemperatuur 5.4 Minimale voordruk
Nederlands (NL)
De tabel op pagina 320 laat de relatie zien tussen het bereik van
de vloeistoftemperatuur en de maximaal toelaatbare werkdruk.
p [bar]
Hv
35
30 Afb. 4 Schematisch overzicht van een open systeem met een
25 CR pomp
H H H H H
20 Q Q Q Q B
HQQE/V
15 Q Q Q Q Q De maximale aanzuigstijging "H" in meter opvoerhoogte kan als
HBQE/V
176
5.5 Minimale voordruk
Stap Actie
Nederlands (NL)
De tabel op pagina 321 laat de max. toelaatbare voordruk zien.
Echter, de actuele voordruk + de maximale pompdruk (bij nullast), Deze informatie wordt aange-
moet altijd lager zijn dan de waarden vermeld in afb. A op 2 geven op pagina 322:
pagina 320. • de lengtes van poort tot
poort
De pompen worden druk-getest bij een druk van 1,5 keer de 4xø
waarden vermeld in afb. B, pagina 321. • afmetingen van het basisli-
Stap Actie
1
177
De voorgeschreven lengte en breedte staan aangegeven in
Stap Actie afb. 7. Houd er rekening mee dat de lengte en breedte van de
Nederlands (NL)
6 Plaats een vacuümstop dicht- fundering voor pompen met motorvermogens ≤ 30 kW 200 mm
bij de pomp als de installatie groter moet zijn dan de voetplaat.
één van de volgende karakte- Voor pompen met een motorvermogen van ≥ 37 kW, moeten de
ristieken heeft: lengte en breedte altijd 1,5 x 1,5 (Lf x Bf) meter bedragen.
• De persleiding loopt schuin
weg van de pomp.
• Er kan een heveleffect ont-
6.1 Fundatie
mpomp × 1,5
hf =
Lf × Bf × δbeton
Opvulplaten
178
6.2 Trillingsdemping 6.5 Aandraaimomenten
Nederlands (NL)
Als er trillingsdempers worden gebruikt, moeten deze onder de In de tabel worden de aanbevolen aandraaimomenten weergege-
fundatie worden geïnstalleerd. Bij pompen met motorvermogens ven voor bouten in basislichaam en flenzen.
≤ 30 kW kunnen trillingsdempers worden gebruikt zoals getoond
in afb. 11. Basislichaam Flens
CR, CRI, CRN
Gebruik bij pompen met motorvermogens ≥ 37 kW een [Nm] [Nm]
Sylomer® plaat zoals getoond in afb. 12.
1s-5 40 50-60
10-20 50 60-70
32-150 70 70-80
Trillingsdempers
Sylomer® plaat
TM04 1692 1008
Waarschuwing
Wanneer hete vloeistoffen worden verpompt, dan
dient men ervoor te zorgen dat personen niet per
ongeluk in contact kunnen komen met hete
oppervlakken.
Afb. 13 toont welke onderdelen van de pomp net zo heet worden
als de verpompte vloeistof.
TM04 0361 0608
Pompkop
Pompmantel
Basislichaam
179
6.6 Flenskrachten en aandraaimomenten
Nederlands (NL)
Y-richting: Inlaat/uitlaat
Z-richting: Richting van kamerboom
X-richting: 90 ° van inlaat/uitlaat
Krachten
CR, CRI, CRN
Y-richting
X-richting
Z-richting
Flens, DN
Kracht,
Kracht,
Kracht,
[mm]
[N]
[N]
[N]
Aandraaimomenten
Aandraaimoment,
Aandraaimoment,
Aandraaimoment,
CR, CRI, CRN
Y-richting
X-richting
Z-richting
Flens, DN
[mm]
[Nm]
[Nm]
[Nm]
180
7. Elektrische aansluiting 7.2 Driefasenaansluiting
Nederlands (NL)
De elektrische aansluitingen dienen door een erkend installateur
te worden uitgevoerd, in overeenstemming met de lokale regelge- Netvoeding [V]
ving.
Driehoeksaanslui-
Steraansluiting
Waarschuwing ting
De CR pomp moet worden aangesloten op een 220-240 / 380-415
externe netschakelaar die dicht bij de pomp is 50 Hz
380-415 / 660-690
geplaatst en op een motorbeveiliging of een CUE-
frequentieomzetter. Het moet mogelijk zijn om de 220-277 / 380-480 1)
60 Hz
netschakelaar in positie OFF (geïsoleerd) vast te 380-480 / 660-690
zetten. Type en eisen zoals gespecificeerd in
EN 60204-1, 5.3.2. 1) 60 Hz motoren, 0,37 - 1,1 kW: 220-277/380-440 V.
Waarschuwing
Alvorens het deksel van de klemmenkast te ver- W2 U1 W2 U2 V2
181
7.3 Eénfase-aansluiting 7.4 Posities in de klemmenkast
Nederlands (NL)
182
8. In bedrijf nemen 8.1 Aanloop asafdichting
Nederlands (NL)
Het afdichtingsloopvlak wordt gesmeerd met de verpompte vloei-
Schakel de pomp pas in wanneer deze met vloei-
stof, en dit betekent dat een bepaalde lekkage vanuit de asaf-
stof is gevuld en is ontlucht. Als de pomp droog dichting kan komen.
Voorzichtig
loopt, kunnen de lagers en de asafdichting van
Wanneer de pomp voor de eerste keer wordt ingeschakeld, of
de pomp beschadigd raken.
wanneer een nieuwe asafdichting is geïnstalleerd, dan is een
bepaalde aanloopperiode nodig voordat de lekkage is geredu-
ceerd tot een aanvaardbaar niveau. De benodigde tijd hiervoor
9. Onderhoud
183
10. Bescherming tegen vorst
Nederlands (NL)
Waarschuwing
Let op in welke richting de ontluchtingsopening
wijst en zorg ervoor dat het ontsnappende water
geen personen kan verwonden of schade kan toe-
brengen aan de motor of andere onderdelen.
Bij warmwaterinstallaties dient in het bijzonder
rekening te worden gehouden met het gevaar van
kokend heet water.
Draai de ontluchtingschroef niet vast en plaats de afvoerplug niet
terug tot de pomp opnieuw wordt gebruikt.
CR, CRI, CRN 1s t/m 5
Alvorens de aftapplug in het basislichaam terug te plaatsen,
draait u de omloopregelklep geheel los en trekt u deze tot de aan-
slag naar buiten. Zie afb. 22.
Aftapplug
Omloopregelklep
TM01 1243 4097
11. Service
Wij adviseren u pompen met motoren van 7,5 kW of meer op de
pomplocatie te repareren. Noodzakelijke hijsapparatuur moet
beschikbaar zijn.
184
12. Opsporen van storingen
Nederlands (NL)
Waarschuwing
Alvorens het deksel van de klemmenkast te verwijderen of de pomp te verwijderen/demonteren dient u er zeker van
te zijn dat de voedingsspanning naar de pomp is uitgeschakeld en niet per ongeluk weer kan worden ingeschakeld.
13. Afvalverwijdering
Dit product of delen ervan dienen te worden afgevoerd op een
milieuverantwoorde wijze:
1. Maak gebruik van de plaatselijke reinigingsdienst.
2. Als dat niet mogelijk is, neem dan contact op met een filiaal of
servicedienst van Grundfos het dichtst bij u in de buurt.
Wijzigingen voorbehouden.
185
Українська (UA) Інструкції з монтажу та експлуатації
Українська (UA)
ЗМІСТ Попередження
Сторінка Недотримання цих правил техніки безпеки
1. Значення символів та написів 186 може призвести до тілесного ушкодження.
2. Розвантаження 186
Попередження
3. Позначення типу 187
Недотримання цієї інструкції може
3.1 Типовий код для CR, CRI, CRN 1s, 1, 3, 5, 10, 15 і
20 призвести до ураження електричним
187
струмом з наступним ризиком тяжкого
3.2 Типовий код для CR, CRN 32, 45, 64, 90, 120 і 150 187
тілесного ушкодження або смерті.
4. Застосування 187
5. Технічні дані 187 Недотримання цих правил техніки безпеки
5.1 Температура оточуючого середовища та висота Увага може стати причиною несправності або
над рівнем моря 187 пошкодження обладнання.
5.2 Температура рідини, що перекачується 188
5.3 Максимально допустимий робочий тиск та Примітки або інструкції, які можуть
температура рідини для ущільнення валу 188 Вказівка полегшити роботу та забезпечити надійну
5.4 Мінімальний тиск на вході 188 експлуатацію.
5.5 Мінімальний тиск на вході 189
5.6 Мінімальне значення потоку 189 2. Розвантаження
5.7 Електричні характеристики 189 Під час піднімання насосної установки разом з двигуном
5.8 Частота пусків та зупинок 189 необхідно дотримуватися цих інструкцій:
5.9 Розмір та вага 189
• Насос з двигуном 0,37 - 5,5 кВт:
5.10 Рівень звукового тиску 189
Піднімайте насос за фланець двигуна за допомогою
6. Монтаж 189 відповідних ременів або у подібний спосіб.
6.1 Фундамент 190
• Насос з двигуном 7,5 - 22 кВт:
6.2 Поглинання вібрації 191
Піднімайте насос використовуючи рим-болти двигуна.
6.3 Монтаж поза приміщенням 191
6.4 Гарячі поверхні 191 • Насос з двигуном 30-45 кВт:
6.5 Крутні моменти 191 Піднімайте насос за підйомні кронштейни на фланці
6.6 Зусилля і крутні моменти на фланцях двигуна.
192
• Насос з двигуном 55-75 кВт:
7. Електричні підключення 193
Піднімайте насос за рим-болти на стороні двигуна.
7.1 Кабельний ввід/гвинтове з'єднання 193
7.2 Трифазне з'єднання 193
7.3 Однофазне з'єднання 194
7.4 Положення клемної коробки 194
7.5 Робота з перетворювачем частоти 194
8. Запуск 195
8.1 Обкатка ущільнення валу 195
9. Технічне обслуговування 195
10. Захист від замерзання 196
TM04 0339 0608
186
3. Позначення типу 5. Технічні дані
Українська (UA)
3.1 Типовий код для CR, CRI, CRN 1s, 1, 3, 5, 10, 15 5.1 Температура оточуючого середовища та висота
і 20 над рівнем моря
3.2 Типовий код для CR, CRN 32, 45, 64, 90, 120 і 150 30 - 75 Siemens IE3 +55 2750
187
5.2 Температура рідини, що перекачується 5.4 Мінімальний тиск на вході
Українська (UA)
188
5.5 Мінімальний тиск на вході Етап Дія
Українська (UA)
У таблиці на сторінці 321 зазначено максимально допустимий
2 Ця інформація приводиться
тиск на вході. Проте сумарне значення фактичного тиску на
на стор. 322:
вході і тиску, коли насос працює на закриту засувку, не
• монтажна довжина;
повинне перевищувати значень, приведених на рис. A,
189
Рекомендована довжина і ширина показані на рис. 7.
Етап Дія
Пам'ятайте, що довжина та ширина фундаменту для насосів з
Українська (UA)
Встановіть вакуумний фільтр двигунами потужністю ≤ 30 кВт мають бути на 200 мм більші,
6 поряд з насосом, якщо ніж плита-основа.
установка має одну з таких Для насосів з двигунами потужністю ≥ 37 кВт довжина та
характеристик: ширина повинні бути завжди 1,5 x 1,5 (Lf x Bf) метра.
• Напірний патрубок
встановлено під нахилом
вниз від насоса.
• Існує ризик ефекту
6.1 Фундамент
Прокладки
TM04 0343 0608
190
6.2 Поглинання вібрації 6.5 Крутні моменти
Українська (UA)
Якщо використовуються амортизатори вібрацій, вони мають У приведеній нижче таблиці вказані крутні моменти, що
бути встановлені під основою. Для насосів з двигунами рекомендуються, для болтів в основі і фланцях.
≤ 30 кВт можна використовувати амортизатори вібрації, як
зображено на рис. 11. Основа Фланець
CR, CRI, CRN
Для насосів з двигунами ≥ 37 кВт використовуйте плиту [Нм] [Нм]
Sylomer®, як зображено на рис. 12.
1s-5 40 50-60
10-20 50 60-70
32-150 70 70-80
Амортизатори
вібрацій
Плита Sylomer®
TM04 1692 1008
Попередження
При перекачуванні гарячих рідин необхідно
вжити заходів, щоб персонал не міг
випадково торкнутися поверхонь, що мають
високу температуру.
На рисунку 13 зображено, які частини насосу нагріваються до
температури рідини, що перекачується.
Головна частина
TM04 0361 0608
насоса
Муфта насоса
Основа
191
6.6 Зусилля і крутні моменти на фланцях
Українська (UA)
Напрямок Y: впуск/випуск
Напрямок Z: напрямок витяжної труби камери
Напрямок Х: 90 ° від впуску/випуску
Зусилля
CR, CRI, CRN
Фланець, DN
напрямок Y
напрямок Х
напрямок Z
Зусилля,
Зусилля,
Зусилля,
[мм]
[N]
[N]
[N]
Крутні моменти
Крутний момент,
Крутний момент,
Крутний момент,
CR, CRI, CRN
Фланець, DN
напрямок Y
напрямок Х
напрямок Z
[мм]
[Нм]
[Нм]
[Нм]
192
7. Електричні підключення 7.2 Трифазне з'єднання
Українська (UA)
Електричне підключення має здійснюватись кваліфікованим
електриком відповідно до місцевих норм та правил. Електроживлення від мережі [В]
Попередження З'єднання за
З'єднання за
схемою
Насос CR необхідно підключити до схемою "зірка"
"трикутник"
зовнішнього мережевого вимикача,
розташованого поблизу насоса, і до 220-240 / 380-415
захисного автоматичного вимикача двигуна 50 Гц
380-415 / 660-690
або перетворювача частоти CUE. Має бути
220-277 / 380-480 1)
передбачена можливість блокування 60 Гц
мережевого вимикача в положенні OFF 380-480 / 660-690
(ВИКЛ.). Тип та вимоги, як зазначено в
EN 60204-1, 5.3.2. 1) Двигуни 60 Гц, 0,37 - 1,1 кВт: 220-277/380-440 В.
Попередження
Перед зняттям кришки клемної коробки і W2 U1 W2 U2 V2
193
7.3 Однофазне з'єднання 7.4 Положення клемної коробки
Українська (UA)
Рис. 17 Під'єднання, "низька напруга", 0,37 - 0,75 кВт 7.5.2 Фазова ізоляція MG 71 та 80
У стандартному виконанні двигуни MG типорозмірів 71 і 80 не
оснащені фазовою ізоляцією. Ці двигуни не призначені для
експлуатації з перетворювачем частоти, оскільки вони не
захищені від пікових значень напруги, що викликаються
перетворювачем частоти. Лише двигуни з номінальною
напругою, яка дорівнює або перевищує 460 В, оснащені
фазовою ізоляцією.
TM04 1694 1008
двигунів.
7.5.3 Двигуни іншого виробника (не Grundfos)
Зверніться до компанії Grundfos або до виробника двигуна.
194
8. Запуск 8.1 Обкатка ущільнення валу
Українська (UA)
Ущільнення змащуються рідиною, що перекачується. Це
Не запускайте насос, доки не наповните його
означає, що можливий витік певної кількості рідини з
рідиною та не провентилюєте. Якщо насос ущільнення валу.
Увага
працює у режимі сухого ходу, підшипники та
При першому пуску насоса або при установці нового
ущільнення валу можуть пошкодитися.
ущільнення валу необхідний певний період обкатки, перш ніж
рівень витоку зменшиться до прийнятного. Час, необхідний
для цього, залежить від умов експлуатації, тобто кожен раз,
9. Технічне обслуговування
195
10. Захист від замерзання
Українська (UA)
Попередження
Зверніть увагу на напрямок вентиляційного
отвору та будьте обережні, щоб вода, що
витікає, не травмувала персонал або не
пошкодила двигун чи інші деталі.
В системах гарячого водопостачання
необхідно звернути особливу увагу на
небезпеку отримання опіків внаслідок
контакту з гарячою водою.
Не затягуйте вентиляційний гвинт і не встановлюйте на місце
зливну пробку, доки насос не почне використовуватися знову.
CR, CRI, CRN від 1s до 5
Перед заміною зливної пробки основи необхідно відгвинтити
перепускний клапан до кінця. Див. рис. 22.
Пробка зливного
отвору
Перепускний клапан
TM01 1243 4097
196
12. Пошук несправностей
Українська (UA)
Попередження
Перед зняттям кришки клемної коробки і демонтажем насоса необхідно переконатися, що живлення насоса
вимкнуто, і вжити заходів, щоб запобігти його випадковому ввімкненню.
197
Polski (PL) Instrukcja montażu i eksploatacji
Polski (PL)
Ostrzeżenie
Należy zapewnić stabilne położenie pompy
podczas rozładunku i montażu za pomocą pasów
wykorzystywanych do podnoszenia pompy.
Środek ciężkości pompy znajduje się blisko
silnika.
198
3. Oznaczenie typu 5. Dane techniczne
Polski (PL)
3.1 Klucz oznaczeń typu dla pomp CR, CRI, CRN 1s, 1, 5.1 Temperatura otoczenia i wysokość
3, 5, 10, 15 i 20
Maksymalna
Przykład CR 3- 10 X- X- X- X- XXXX Maksymalna wysokość
Moc Klasa
Marka temperatura nad
Typoszereg: CR, CRI, CRN silnika sprawności
silnika otoczenia poziomem
Wydajność nominalna w m3/h [kW] silnika
[°C] morza
Liczba wirników [m]
Wykonanie pompy Grundfos
0,37 - 0,55 - +40 1000
Przyłącze rurowe MG
Materiały Grundfos
0,75 - 22 IE3 +60 3500
MG
Części gumowe pompy
30 - 75 Siemens IE3 +55 2750
Uszczelnienie wału
Jeżeli temperatura otoczenia przekracza powyższe wartości lub
3.2 Klucz oznaczeń typu dla pomp CR, CRN 32, 45, 64, pompa jest zamontowana na wyższej wysokości, silnik nie może
90, 120 i 150 pracować z pełnym obciążeniem z powodu ryzyka przegrzania.
Przegrzanie może być spowodowane zbyt wysoką temperaturą
Przykład CR 32- 2 1- X- X- X- X- XXXX otoczenia lub zbyt niską gęstością, a w rezultacie zbyt słabym
efektem chłodzenia powietrza.
Typoszereg: CR, CRN
W takich przypadkach może być konieczne zastosowanie silnika
Wydajność nominalna o większej mocy znamionowej.
w m3/h
Liczba stopni P2
Liczba wirników o zmniejszonej średnicy [%] 3
Wykonanie pompy 100 2
Przyłącze rurowe 90
Materiały 80 1
Części gumowe pompy 70
Uszczelnienie wału 60
50
199
5.2 Temperatura cieczy 5.4 Minimalne ciśnienie wlotowe
Polski (PL)
200
5.5 Minimalne ciśnienie wlotowe
Krok Czynność
Polski (PL)
W tabeli na stronie 321 podane są wartości maksymalnego
dopuszczalnego ciśnienia wlotowego. Jednakże aktualne 2 Ta informacja jest podana na
ciśnienie wlotowe + maksymalne ciśnienie pompy (przy braku stronie 322:
przepływu) musi być zawsze niższe od wartości podanych na • długość montażowa
podłoża śrubami przez otwory znajdujące się w płycie podstawy. powstawaniu korków
Przy montażu pompy należy postępować zgodnie z poniższymi powietrznych, szczególnie po
wskazówkami, aby uniknąć uszkodzenia pompy. stronie ssawnej pompy.
Krok Czynność
1
201
Zalecana długość i szerokość jest pokazana na rys. 7. Zwrócić
Krok Czynność uwagę, że długość i szerokość fundamentu dla pomp z silnikami
Polski (PL)
6.1 Fundament
Podkładki
TM04 0343 0608
202
6.2 Tłumienie drgań 6.5 Momenty dokręcania
Polski (PL)
Jeżeli zastosowano amortyzatory drgań, należy je zamontować W tabeli podano zalecane wartości momentów dokręcenia śrub
pod fundamentem. Do pomp z silnikami o mocy ≤ 30 kW można w podstawie i kołnierzach.
zastosować amortyzatory drgań pokazane na rys. 11.
Do pomp z silnikami o mocy ≥ 37 kW stosować płytę Sylomer® Podstawa Kołnierz
CR, CRI, CRN
pokazaną na rys. 12. [Nm] [Nm]
1s-5 40 50-60
10-20 50 60-70
32-150 70 70-80
Amortyzatory drgań
Płyta Sylomer®
TM04 1692 1008
Ostrzeżenie
W przypadku tłoczenia cieczy gorących należy
zabezpieczyć gorące powierzchnie przed
możliwością przypadkowego dotknięcia przez
osoby.
Na rysunku 13 pokazano, które elementy pompy mogą być
gorące w czasie tłoczenia cieczy.
TM04 0361 0608
Głowica pompy
Płaszcz pompy
Podstawa
203
6.6 Dopuszczalne siły i momenty
Polski (PL)
Kierunek-Y: Wlot/wylot
Kierunek-Z: Kierunek wkładu wirującego
Kierunek-X: 90 ° od wlotu/wylotu
Siły
CR, CRI, CRN
Kołnierz, DN
kierunek-Y
kierunek-X
kierunek-Z
[mm]
Siła,
Siła,
Siła,
[N]
[N]
[N]
Momenty dokręcania
CR, CRI, CRN
Kołnierz, DN
kierunek-Y
kierunek-X
kierunek-Z
Moment,
Moment,
Moment,
[mm]
[Nm]
[Nm]
[Nm]
204
7. Podłączenie elektryczne 7.2 Podłączenie trójfazowe
Polski (PL)
Połączenia elektryczne powinny zostać wykonane przez
upoważnionego elektryka zgodnie z miejscowymi przepisami. Napięcie zasilania [V]
Ostrzeżenie
Przed zdjęciem pokrywy skrzynki zaciskowej W2 U1 W2 U2 V2
205
7.3 Podłączenie jednofazowe 7.4 Położenie skrzynki zaciskowej
Polski (PL)
206
8. Uruchomienie 8.1 Uszczelnienie wału
Polski (PL)
Powierzchnie uszczelnienia są smarowane tłoczoną cieczą, co
Nie wolno uruchamiać pompy, dopóki nie
oznacza, że może pojawić się niewielki wyciek cieczy.
zostanie ona napełniona cieczą i odpowietrzona.
Uruchomienie pompy na sucho może W przypadku pierwszego uruchomienia pompy lub po montażu
UWAGA
nowego uszczelnienia wału musi minąć pewien okres docierania,
doprowadzić do zniszczenia łożysk
zanim wycieki zostaną zredukowane do normalnego poziomu.
i uszczelnienia wału.
Potrzebna ilość czasu jest zależna od warunków pracy, tzn. po
każdej zmianie warunków pracy rozpoczynał się będzie nowy
okres docierania.
9. Konserwacja
207
10. Zabezpieczenie przed mrozem
Polski (PL)
Ostrzeżenie
W celu wykluczenia niebezpieczeństwa obrażeń
osób lub uszkodzenia silnika lub innych
elementów przez wypływającą ciecz należy
zwrócić uwagę na położenie otworu
odpowietrzającego.
Jeżeli pompa pracuje w instalacji wody gorącej,
należy zwrócić szczególną uwagę na ryzyko
poparzenia gorącą wodą.
Nie należy dokręcać śruby odpowietrzającej i montować korka
spustowego do momentu ponownego uruchomienia.
CR, CRI, CRN 1s do 5
Przed wkręceniem korka spustowego do podstawy pompy
wykręcić zawór obejściowy aż do oporu. Zob. rys. 22.
Korek spustowy
Zawór obejściowy
TM01 1243 4097
11. Serwis
Zalecamy wykonywanie napraw pomp z silnikami o mocy 7,5 kW
i wyższej na miejscu montażu. Dostępne musi być odpowiednie
urządzenie do podnoszenia.
208
12. Przegląd zakłóceń
Polski (PL)
Ostrzeżenie
Przed zdjęciem pokrywy skrzynki zaciskowej i przed wyjęciem/demontażem pompy należy upewnić się, że zasilanie
elektryczne zostało wyłączone i nie może zostać przypadkowo włączone.
13. Utylizacja
Niniejszy produkt lub jego części należy zutylizować zgodnie
z zasadami ochrony środowiska:
1. Należy skorzystać z usług publicznych lub prywatnych
zakładów utylizacyjnych.
2. Jeżeli nie jest to możliwe, należy dostarczyć urządzenie do
najbliższej siedziby lub warsztatu serwisowego firmy
Grundfos.
209
Português (PT) Instruções de instalação e funcionamento
Português (PT)
CONTEÚDO Aviso
Página O não cumprimento destas instruções de segu-
1. Símbolos utilizados neste documento 210 rança poderá resultar em lesões.
2. Manuseamento 210
Aviso
3. Designação do tipo 211
O não cumprimento destas instruções poderá
3.1 Código de identificação de CR, CRI, CRN 1s, 1, 3, 5,
10, 15 e 20 levar a choques eléctricos com o subsequente
211
risco de lesões graves ou morte.
3.2 Código de identificação de CR, CRN 32, 45, 64, 90,
120 e 150 211
O não cumprimento destas instruções de segu-
4. Aplicações 211 Atenção rança poderá resultar em mau funcionamento ou
5. Características técnicas 211 danos no equipamento.
5.1 Temperatura ambiente e altitude 211
5.2 Temperatura do líquido 212 Notas ou instruções que facilitam o trabalho,
Nota
5.3 Pressão máxima de funcionamento permitida e tem- garantindo um funcionamento seguro.
peratura do líquido para o empanque 212
5.4 Pressão mínima de entrada 212 2. Manuseamento
5.5 Pressão mínima de entrada 213
Ao elevar a bomba completa com o motor, siga estas instruções:
5.6 Caudal mínimo 213
5.7 Características eléctricas • Bombas com capacidades de motor de 0,37 a 5,5 kW:
213
Eleve a bomba na flange do motor utilizando cintas ou algo
5.8 Frequência de arranques e paragens 213
semelhante.
5.9 Dimensões e pesos 213
5.10 Nível de pressão sonora 213 • Bombas com capacidades de motor de 7,5 a 22 kW:
Eleve a bomba utilizando os parafusos guia no motor.
6. Instalação 213
6.1 Maciço 214 • Bombas com capacidades de motor de 30 a 45 kW:
6.2 Amortecimento de vibrações 215 Eleve a bomba através de suportes de elevação na flange do
6.3 Instalação no exterior 215 motor.
6.4 Superfícies quentes 215 • Bombas com capacidades de motor de 55 a 75 kW:
6.5 Binários 215 Eleve a bomba utilizando os parafusos guia no lado do motor.
6.6 Forças e binários da flange 216
7. Ligação eléctrica 217
7.1 Entrada de cabo/ligação roscada 217
7.2 Ligação trifásica 217
7.3 Ligação monofásica 218
7.4 Posições da caixa de terminais 218
7.5 Funcionamento com conversor de frequência 218
8. Arranque 219
8.1 Período de adaptação do empanque 219
TM04 0339 0608
210
3. Designação do tipo 5. Características técnicas
Português (PT)
3.1 Código de identificação de CR, CRI, CRN 1s, 1, 3, 5.1 Temperatura ambiente e altitude
5, 10, 15 e 20
Altitude
Temperatura
Exemplo CR 3- 10 X- X- X- X- XXXX Potência Classe de máxima
Marca do ambiente
do motor eficiência acima do
Gama do tipo: CR, CRI, CRN motor máxima
[kW] do motor nível do mar
Caudal nominal em m3/h [°C]
[m]
Número de impulsores Grundfos
0,37 - 0,55 - +40 1000
Código da versão da bomba MG
Código da ligação da tubagem Grundfos
0,75 - 22 IE3 +60 3500
Código dos materiais MG
CRN 2 0,75 - 22 MG
Utilize bombas CRN em sistemas nos quais todas as peças em 3 30-75 Siemens
contacto com o líquido sejam em aço inoxidável de alta quali- Exemplo
dade.
A figura 2 mostra que a carga de um motor IE3 a uma tempera-
Líquidos bombeados tura ambiente de 70 °C não deverá exceder 89 % da potência
Líquidos finos, limpos, não inflamáveis, não combustíveis ou não nominal. Se a bomba estiver instalada a 4750 metros acima do
explosivos que não contenham partículas sólidas ou fibras. nível do mar, o motor não pode ser carregado a mais de 89 % da
O líquido não pode atacar quimicamente os materiais da bomba. potência nominal.
Ao bombear líquidos com uma densidade e/ou viscosidade cine- Nos casos em que tanto a temperatura máxima como a altitude
mática superior à da água, utilize motores com potências supe- máxima sejam excedidas, os factores de redução de potência
riores correspondentes, se necessário. deverão ser multiplicados (0,89 x 0,89 = 0,79).
211
5.2 Temperatura do líquido 5.4 Pressão mínima de entrada
Português (PT)
212
5.5 Pressão mínima de entrada
Passo Acção
Português (PT)
A tabela na página 321 mostra a pressão máxima de entrada per-
mitida. Contudo, a pressão de entrada efectiva + a pressão 2 Esta informação pode ser con-
máxima da bomba (sem caudal) deve ser sempre inferior aos sultada na página 322:
valores referidos na fig. A, na página 320. • distâncias entre flanges
tuição.
Dimensões: Consulte a fig. C, página 322.
Proteja sempre a bomba contra
Pesos: Consulte a etiqueta na embalagem. retorno utilizando uma válvula
de retenção (válvula de pé).
5.10 Nível de pressão sonora
5
Consulte a fig. D, página 323.
Instale as tubagens de forma a
6. Instalação evitar que se formem bolsas de
TM02 0114 3800
A bomba deve ser fixada a um maciço horizontal plano e sólido, ar, especialmente no lado da
com parafusos nos orifícios da base de assentamento. Ao insta- aspiração da bomba.
lar a bomba, siga o procedimento abaixo descrito, de forma a evi-
tar danos na bomba.
Instale uma válvula de vácuo
6
Passo Acção próximo da bomba caso a ins-
talação possua alguma das
1 seguintes características:
• A tubagem de descarga tem
As setas na base da bomba uma inclinação descen-
TM02 0013 3800
sifão.
• É necessária protecção con-
tra o retorno de líquidos con-
taminados.
213
6.1 Maciço
Português (PT)
mbomba × 1,5
hf =
TM04 0342 0608
Lf × Bf × δmaciço
214
6.2 Amortecimento de vibrações 6.5 Binários
Português (PT)
Caso sejam utilizados amortecedores de vibração, estes devem A tabela apresenta os binários recomendados para os parafusos
ser instalados sob o maciço. As bombas com capacidades de na base e nas flanges.
motor ≤ 30 kW podem utilizar amortecedores de vibração con-
forme indicado na fig. 11. Base Flange
CR, CRI, CRN
Para bombas com capacidades de motor ≥ 37 kW, utilize uma [Nm] [Nm]
placa Sylomer®, conforme indicado na fig. 12.
1s-5 40 50-60
10-20 50 60-70
32-150 70 70-80
Amortecedores de
vibração
Placa Sylomer®
TM04 1692 1008
Aviso
Ao bombear líquidos quentes, deverá tomar-se
cuidado para impedir o contacto inadvertido de
pessoas com as superfícies quentes.
A figura 13 mostra as peças da bomba que aquecem tanto como
o líquido bombeado.
TM04 0361 0608
Cabeça da bomba
Camisa da bomba
Base
215
6.6 Forças e binários da flange
Português (PT)
Direcção Y: Entrada/saída
Direcção Z: Direcção do bloco de câmaras
Direcção X: 90 ° da entrada/saída
Forças
CR, CRI, CRN
Flange, DN
direcção Y
direcção X
direcção Z
Força,
Força,
Força,
[mm]
[N]
[N]
[N]
Binários
CR, CRI, CRN
Flange, DN
direcção Y
direcção X
direcção Z
Binário,
Binário,
Binário,
[mm]
[Nm]
[Nm]
[Nm]
216
7. Ligação eléctrica 7.2 Ligação trifásica
Português (PT)
A ligação eléctrica deve ser executada por um electricista autori-
zado, de acordo com as regulamentações locais. Alimentação eléctrica [V]
217
7.3 Ligação monofásica 7.4 Posições da caixa de terminais
Português (PT)
218
8. Arranque 8.1 Período de adaptação do empanque
Português (PT)
As faces do vedante são lubrificadas pelo líquido bombeado, o
Não proceda ao arranque da bomba sem que esta
que significa que pode haver fugas no empanque.
tenha sido abastecida de líquido e purgada.
Atenção Quando a bomba arranca pela primeira vez ou quando um novo
Se a bomba funcionar em seco, os rolamentos da
empanque é instalado, é necessário um período de adaptação
bomba e o empanque poderão ficar danificados.
antes de a fuga ser reduzida a um nível aceitável. O tempo
necessário para isto depende das condições de funcionamento,
ou seja, sempre que as condições mudem, um novo período de
9. Manutenção
219
10. Protecção anticongelamento
Português (PT)
Aviso
Preste atenção à orientação do orifício de purga e
certifique-se de que a água que sai não causa
lesões, nem danifica o motor ou outros compo-
nentes.
Em instalações de água quente deverá prestar-se
especial atenção ao risco de lesões resultantes
da água a ferver.
Não aperte o parafuso de purga nem volte a colocar o bujão de
drenagem até que a bomba deva ser novamente utilizada.
CR, CRI, CRN 1s a 5
Antes de voltar a colocar o bujão de drenagem na base, aperte a
válvula de bypass até ao batente. Consulte a fig. 22.
Bujão de
drenagem
Válvula de bypass
TM01 1243 4097
11. Serviço
Recomendamos que a reparação de bombas com motores de
7,5 kW e de potência superior seja realizada no local. Deverá
estar disponível o equipamento de elevação necessário.
220
12. Detecção de avarias
Português (PT)
Aviso
Antes de retirar a tampa da caixa de terminais e de efectuar a desmontagem/desmantelamento da bomba, certifique-
se de que a alimentação foi desligada e que não pode ser ligada inadvertidamente.
13. Eliminação
Este produto ou as suas peças devem ser eliminados de forma
ambientalmente segura:
1. Utilize um serviço público ou privado de recolha de resíduos.
2. Caso não seja possível, contacte os serviços Grundfos ou a
oficina Grundfos autorizada mais próximos.
Sujeito a alterações.
221
Русский (RU) Паспорт, Руководство по монтажу и эксплуатации
Русский (RU)
СОДЕРЖАНИЕ Предупреждение
Стр. Несоблюдение данных правил техники
безопасности может привести к травмам и
1. Значение символов и надписей в документе 222 несчастным случаям.
2. Перемещение 222
3. Типовое обозначение 223 Предупреждение
3.1 Типовое обозначение CR, CRI, CRN 1s, 1, 3, 5, 10, Несоблюдение данных правил может
15 и 20 223 привести к поражению электрическим током
3.2 Типовое обозначение CR, CRN 32, 45, 64, 90, 120 и с риском серьёзного травмирования или
150 223 летального исхода.
4. Область применения 223
Несоблюдение данных правил техники
5. Технические данные 223 Внимание безопасности может вызвать отказ или
5.1 Температура окружающей среды и высота над повреждение оборудования.
уровнем моря 223
5.2 Температура жидкости 224 Примечания или указания, упрощающие
5.3 Максимально допустимое рабочее давление и Указание работу и гарантирующие безопасную
температура рабочей жидкости для уплотнения эксплуатацию.
вала 224
5.4 Минимальное давление на входе 224
5.5 Минимальное давление на входе 225
2. Перемещение
5.6 Минимальный расход 225 При подъёме насоса в сборе с электродвигателем
5.7 Данные электрооборудования 225 необходимо учитывать следующее:
5.8 Частота включений 225 • Насос с электродвигателем мощностью 0,37 - 5,5 кВт:
5.9 Размеры и масса 225 Насос разрешается поднимать с помощью строп или
5.10 Уровень звукового давления 225 аналогичных приспособлений за фланец
6. Монтаж 226 электродвигателя.
6.1 Фундамент 227 • Насос с электродвигателем мощностью 7,5 - 22 кВт:
6.2 Гашение вибраций 228 Насос разрешается поднимать, используя рым-болты
6.3 Монтаж вне помещения 228 электродвигателя.
6.4 Горячие поверхности 228 • Насосы с электродвигателями мощностью 30-45 кВт:
6.5 Моменты затяжки 228 Насос разрешается поднимать, используя грузоподъёмные
6.6 Усилия и моменты на фланцах 228 скобы на фланце электродвигателя.
7. Электрические подключения 229 • Насосы с электродвигателями мощностью 55-75 кВт:
7.1 Кабельный ввод/винтовое соединение 229 Насос разрешается поднимать, используя рым-болты со
7.2 Трёхфазное соединение 229 стороны электродвигателя.
7.3 Однофазное соединение 230
7.4 Расположение клеммной коробки 230
7.5 Эксплуатация с преобразователем частоты 230
8. Ввод в эксплуатацию 231
8.1 Обкатка уплотнения вала 231
9. Техническое обслуживание 231
10. Защита от низких температур 232
11. Сервис 232
11.1 Комплекты запчастей и руководства 232
TM04 0339 0608
Предупреждение
0,37 - 5,5 7,5 - 22 30-45 55-75
Прежде чем приступать к монтажу
кВт кВт кВт кВт
оборудования, необходимо внимательно
изучить данное руководство по монтажу и Рис. 1 Правильный способ строповки насоса CR
эксплуатации. Монтаж и эксплуатация
должны соответствовать местным нормам Если насос CR, CRI и CRN оснащён не электродвигателем
и принятым правилам работы. MG или электродвигателем, произведенным не компанией
Siemens, рекомендуется поднимать насос с помощью строп
за фланец электродвигателя.
Предупреждение
Необходимо удерживать насос в устойчивом
положении во время распаковки и установки
с помощью ремней для подъёма.
Обратите внимание, что обычно центр
тяжести насоса расположен ближе к
электродвигателю.
222
3. Типовое обозначение 5. Технические данные
Русский (RU)
3.1 Типовое обозначение CR, CRI, CRN 1s, 1, 3, 5, 10, 5.1 Температура окружающей среды и высота над
15 и 20 уровнем моря
223
5.2 Температура жидкости 5.4 Минимальное давление на входе
Русский (RU)
224
5.5 Минимальное давление на входе
Русский (RU)
В таблице на стр. 321 приведены максимально допустимые
значения давления на входе. Однако суммарное значение
фактического давления на входе и давления при работе на
закрытую задвижку не должно превышать значений,
приведённых на рис. A, стр. 320.
Насосы испытываются под давлением, которое в 1,5 раза
превышает значения, приведенные на рис. B, стр. 321.
Qmin
[%]
30
20
Типоразмер
электродвигателя Макс. кол-во пусков в час
[кВт]
≤ 2,2 250
3-4 100
5,5 - 11 50
18,5 - 22 40
30 90
37 50
45 80
55 50
75 50
225
6. Монтаж Этап Действие
Русский (RU)
4xø
• размеры основания; замене насоса.
Чтобы исключить обратный
последующих вибраций
следует установить
кронштейн под углом 30-40 °
к стене.
226
6.1 Фундамент
Русский (RU)
Насос должен устанавливаться в
соответствии с приведёнными далее
Указание указаниями. Несоблюдение этих указаний
может привести к сбоям при эксплуатации и
к повреждению узлов и деталей насоса.
Компания Grundfos рекомендует устанавливать насос на
бетонном фундаменте, способном обеспечить постоянное и
прочное крепление всего насоса. Основание должно быть в
состоянии поглощать любые вибрации, линейные
деформации и ударные нагрузки. Поверхность бетонного
основания должна быть абсолютно горизонтальной и ровной.
Установите насос на фундамент и зафиксируйте его. Плита-
mнасоса × 1,5
hf =
Lf × Bf × δбетона
227
6.2 Гашение вибраций 6.5 Моменты затяжки
Русский (RU)
Если используются виброгасящие опоры, их необходимо В приведенной ниже таблице указаны рекомендуемые
установить под фундамент. Для насосов с моменты затяжки для болтов в основании и фланцах.
электродвигателями мощностью ≤ 30 кВт виброгасящие
опоры можно использовать так, как показано на рис. 11. Основание Фланец
CR, CRI, CRN
Для насосов с электродвигателями мощностью ≥ 37 кВт [Нм] [Нм]
используется плита Sylomer®, как показано на рис. 12.
1s-5 40 50-60
10-20 50 60-70
32-150 70 70-80
Виброгасящие
опоры
Направление Y: вход/выход
Направление Z: направление комплекта камер
Действующие силы
направление Y
направление X
направление Z
CR, CRI, CRN
Фланец, DN
Сила,
[N]
[N]
Момент затяжки,
Момент затяжки,
направление X
направление Z
CR, CRI, CRN
Фланец, DN
[мм]
[Нм]
[Нм]
[Нм]
228
7. Электрические подключения 7.2 Трёхфазное соединение
Русский (RU)
Подключение электрооборудования должно выполняться
только специалистом-электриком в соответствии с местными Питание от сети [В]
нормами и правилами.
Подключение по
Подключение по
Предупреждение схеме
схеме звезда
треугольник
Насос CR необходимо подключить к
внешнему сетевому выключателю, 220-240 / 380-415
расположенному вблизи насоса, и к автомату 50 Гц
380-415 / 660-690
защиты электродвигателя или
220-277 / 380-480 1)
преобразователю частоты CUE. 60 Гц
Должна быть предусмотрена возможность 380-480 / 660-690
блокировки сетевого выключателя в
положении OFF (выкл.). Тип и требования 1) Электродвигатели 60 Гц, 0,37 - 1,1 кВт: 220-277/380-440 В.
соответствуют стандарту EN 60204-1,
5.3.2.
W2 U1 W2 U2 V2
Предупреждение
7.1 Кабельный ввод/винтовое соединение Если электродвигатель оснащён датчиками PTC или
контактами PTO, подключение электрооборудования следует
Все электродвигатели поставляются без кабельных вводов.
производить в соответствии со схемой, находящейся внутри
В таблице ниже указаны количество и размер отверстий для
клеммной коробки.
кабельных вводов в клеммной коробке (стандарт: EN 50262).
Трехфазные электродвигатели должны быть подключены к
Электрод Кол-во и размер автомату защиты электродвигателя.
вигатель кабельных Наименование
[кВт] вводов
Отверстия имеют литую
0,25 - 0,55 2 x M20 x 1,5 резьбу и закрыты
вышибными заглушками
Отверстия закрыты
0,75 - 3,0 2 x M20
вышибными заглушками
Отверстия закрыты
4,0 - 7,5 4 x M25
вышибными заглушками
2 x M20 Отверстия закрыты
11-22
4 x M40 вышибными заглушками
30-45 2 x M50 x 1,5 Заглушка
55-75 2 x M63 x 1,5 Заглушка
229
7.3 Однофазное соединение 7.4 Расположение клеммной коробки
Русский (RU)
Рис. 17 Подключение "низкого напряжения", 0,37 - 0,75 кВт 7.5.2 Фазовая изоляция MG 71 и 80
В стандартном исполнении электродвигатели MG типоразмеров
71 и 80 не оснащены фазовой изоляцией. Данные
электродвигатели не предназначены для эксплуатации с
преобразователем частоты, так как на них отсутствует защита
от пиковых значений напряжения, вызываемых
преобразователем частоты. Только электродвигатели с
номинальным напряжением равным или превышающим 460 В
TM04 1694 1008
230
8. Ввод в эксплуатацию 8.1 Обкатка уплотнения вала
Русский (RU)
Рабочие поверхности уплотнения вала смазываются
Перед включением насоса необходимо залить
перекачиваемой жидкостью, поэтому через уплотнение может
в него рабочую жидкость и удалить воздух. вытекать некоторое количество этой жидкости.
Внимание
При сухом ходе подшипники и уплотнение
При первом пуске насоса или при установке нового
вала могут быть повреждены.
уплотнения вала необходим определённый период обкатки,
прежде чем уровень утечки уменьшится до приемлемого.
Продолжительность данного периода зависит от условий
9. Техническое обслуживание
Рис. 21 Вентиляционный клапан, стандартное и
дополнительное решение с соединительным Предупреждение
шлангом. Перед началом работ необходимо убедиться
в том, что питание насоса отключено, и
принять меры, чтобы предотвратить его
Предупреждение случайное включение.
Обращайте внимание на положение Подшипники и уплотнение вала насоса не требуют
вентиляционного отверстия и следите за технического обслуживания.
тем, чтобы выходящая жидкость не
причинила вреда обслуживающему Подшипники электродвигателя
персоналу, а также электродвигателю или Электродвигатели, не оборудованные пресс-маслёнками, не
другим узлам и деталям насоса. требуют технического обслуживания.
В системах с горячей водой необходимо Если же электродвигатели оборудованы пресс-маслёнками,
принять меры, исключающие ошпаривание. то для дозаправки следует использовать тугоплавкую
Необходимо выполнять указания, приведенные на стр. 338. консистентную смазку на литиевой основе. Смотрите
указания на крышке вентилятора.
CR, CRI, CRN c 1 по 5
В случае сезонной эксплуатации (электродвигатель
У насосов этих типов при вводе в эксплуатацию следует
простаивает больше шести месяцев в году) рекомендуется
открыть перепускной клапан; местоположение перепускного
после выведения насоса из эксплуатации смазать
клапана показано на рис. 22. Перепускной клапан соединяет
электродвигатель.
напорную и всасывающую стороны насоса, что облегчает
процесс его заполнения. При стабильной работе насоса В соответствии с приведенной ниже таблицей подшипники
перепускной клапан можно закрыть. электродвигателя необходимо заменить или смазать в
зависимости от температуры окружающей среды. Таблица
При эксплуатации с водой, в которой содержатся пузырьки
относится к 2-полюсным электродвигателям. Часы наработки
воздуха, и рабочем давлении ниже 6 бар, перепускной клапан
для замены подшипника указаны только как рекомендация.
должен оставаться открытым.
Если рабочее давление постоянно превышает 6 бар, Мощность Периодичность замены подшипников
перепускной клапан должен быть закрыт. В противном случае электродв [часы эксплуатации]
это приведёт к износу материала на выпускном отверстии из- игателя
за высокой вязкости перекачиваемой жидкости. [кВт] 40 °C 45 °C 50 °C 55 °C 60 °C
231
10. Защита от низких температур
Русский (RU)
Предупреждение
Обращайте внимание на положение
вентиляционного отверстия и следите за
тем, чтобы выходящая жидкость не
причинила вреда обслуживающему
персоналу, а также электродвигателю или
другим узлам и деталям насоса.
В системах с горячей водой необходимо
принять меры, исключающие ошпаривание.
Не затягивайте воздухоотводный винт и не вкручивайте
резьбовую пробку сливного отверстия до тех пор, пока насос
не будет использоваться снова.
CR, CRI, CRN c 1 по 5
Перед заменой резьбовой пробки сливного отверстия
выверните до упора перепускной клапан. См. рис. 22.
Резьбовая пробка
сливного отверстия
Перепускной клапан
TM01 1243 4097
11. Сервис
Рекомендуется ремонтировать насосы с электродвигателями
мощностью 7,5 кВт и выше на месте установки насоса.
Должно быть подготовлено всё необходимое подъёмное
оборудование.
232
12. Обнаружение и устранение неисправностей
Русский (RU)
Предупреждение
Перед снятием крышки клеммной коробки и демонтажем насоса необходимо убедиться, что питание
насоса отключено, и принять меры, чтобы предотвратить его случайное включение.
233
Română (RO) Instrucţiuni de instalare şi utilizare
Română (RO)
CUPRINS Avertizare
Pagina Dacă aceste instrucțiuni privind siguranța nu
1. Simboluri folosite în acest document 234 sunt respectate, se pot produce accidentări.
2. Manipulare 234
Avertizare
3. Denumirea tipului 235
Nerespectarea acestor instrucțiuni poate cauza
3.1 Codul tipului pentru CR, CRI, CRN 1s, 1, 3, 5, 10, 15
și 20 electrocutare cu risc de accidentare gravă sau
235
deces.
3.2 Codul tipului pentru CR, CRN 32, 45, 64, 90, 120 și
150 235
Nerespectarea acestor instrucțiuni de siguranță,
4. Aplicaţii 235 Atenţie poate cauza defectarea sau deteriorarea
5. Date tehnice 235 echipamentului.
5.1 Temperatură ambiantă şi altitudine 235
5.2 Temperatura lichidului 236 Observaţii sau instrucțiuni care ușurează lucrul
Notă
5.3 Valorile maxime admisibile ale presiunii de exploatare şi asigură exploatarea în condiții de siguranță.
şi temperaturii lichidului pentru etanşarea arborelui 236
5.4 Presiunea minimă pe aspiraţie 236 2. Manipulare
5.5 Presiunea minimă pe aspiraţie 237
Când ridicați întreaga pompă cu motorul, urmați aceste
5.6 Debit minim 237
instrucțiuni:
5.7 Caracteristici electrice 237
• Pompă cu motor de 0,37 - 5,5 kW:
5.8 Frecvenţa opririlor şi pornirilor 237
Ridicaţi pompa de flanşa motorului cu ajutorul chingilor sau
5.9 Dimensiuni şi greutate 237
unor mijloace similare.
5.10 Nivelul de zgomot 237
• Pompă cu motor de 7,5 - 22 kW:
6. Instalarea 237
Ridicați pompa cu ajutorul şuruburilor cu cap-inel ale
6.1 Fundaţia 238
motorului.
6.2 Amortizarea vibraţiilor 239
6.3 Instalarea în exterior 239 • Pompă cu motor de 30-45 kW:
6.4 Suprafeţe fierbinţi 239 Ridicați pompa cu ajutorul unor guseurilor de ridicare de pe
6.5 Cupluri 239 flanșa motorului.
6.6 Forţele şi cuplurile de torsiune ale flanşelor 240 • Pompă cu motor de 55-75 kW:
Ridicați pompa cu ajutorul şuruburilor cu cap-inel de pe partea
7. Conexiuni electrice 241
motorului.
7.1 Intrarea cablului/conexiunea cu şurub 241
7.2 Conexiune cu trei faze 241
7.3 Conexiunea monofazată 242
7.4 Poziţiile cutiei de borne 242
7.5 Funcţionarea cu convertizor de frecvenţă 242
8. Punere în funcţiune 243
8.1 Etanşare arbore 243
9. Întreţinere 243
10. Protecţie la îngheţ 244
TM04 0339 0608
Avertizare
Asiguraţi-vă că pompa rămâne într-o poziţie
stabilă în timpul despachetării şi instalării
folosind chingile pentru ridicarea pompei.
Rețineți că de obicei, centrul de greutate al
pompei este aproape de motor.
234
3. Denumirea tipului 5. Date tehnice
Română (RO)
3.1 Codul tipului pentru CR, CRI, CRN 1s, 1, 3, 5, 10, 15 5.1 Temperatură ambiantă şi altitudine
și 20
Altitudinea
Exemplu CR 3- 10 X- X- X- X- XXXX Temperatura maximă
Putere Clasa de
Modelul maximă a deasupra
Gama tipului: CR, CRI, CRN motor eficienţă a
motorului mediului nivelului
Debit nominal în m3/h [kW] motorului
[°C] mării
Număr de rotoare [m]
Cod pentru versiunea de Grundfos
0,37 - 0,55 - +40 1000
pompă MG
Cod pentru conexiunea la Grundfos
0,75 - 22 IE3 +60 3500
conductă MG
Cod de materiale 30 - 75 Siemens IE3 +55 2750
Codul pieselor din cauciuc ale Dacă temperatura mediului depăşeşte temperaturile de mai sus
pompei sau pompa este instalată la o altitiudine mai mare decât valorile
Codul etanşării arborelui de mai sus ale altitudinii, motorul nu trebuie solicitat la maxim din
cauza riscului de supraîncălzire. Supraîncălzirea poate rezulta
3.2 Codul tipului pentru CR, CRN 32, 45, 64, 90, 120 datorită temperaturii ambientale excesive sau a densităţii scăzute
și 150 a aerului, având drept consecință diminuarea efectului de răcire.
În astfel de cazuri poate fi necesară utilizarea unui motor cu
Exemplu CR 32- 2 1- X- X- X- X- XXXX putere nominală mai mare.
Gama de pompe: CR, CRN
Debit nominal în m3/h P2
[%] 3
Număr de trepte
100 2
Număr de rotoare cu diametru redus
90
Cod pentru versiunea de
pompă 80 1
70
Cod pentru conexiunea la conductă
60
Cod de materiale
50
235
5.2 Temperatura lichidului 5.4 Presiunea minimă pe aspiraţie
Română (RO)
236
5.5 Presiunea minimă pe aspiraţie
?Pas Acţiune
Română (RO)
Tabelul de la pagina 321 specifică presiunile maxime admisibile
pe aspiraţie. Totuși, presiunea de aspiraţie efectivă + presiunea 2 Aceste informații sunt
maximă a pompei (debit zero) trebuie să fie întotdeauna mai mică specificate la pagina 322:
decât valorile specificate în fig. A la pagina 320. • distanțele dintre orificii
sifon.
arată direcția fluxului de lichid
prin pompă. • Este necesară protecţia
împotriva curgerii inverse a
lichidelor murdare.
237
6.1 Fundaţia
Română (RO)
mpompă × 1,5
hf =
TM04 0342 0608
Lf × Bf × δbeton
238
6.2 Amortizarea vibraţiilor 6.5 Cupluri
Română (RO)
Dacă se utilizează amortizoare de vibraţii, acestea trebuie Tabelul prezintă cuplurile recomandate pentru strângerea
instalate sub fundaţie. Pompele cu motoare ≤ 30 kW pot folosi șuruburilor în bază și în flanșe.
amortizoare de vibraţii aşa cum se prezintă în fig. 11.
Pentru pompele cu motoare ≥ 37 kW, folosiţi o placă Sylomer® Bază Flanşă
CR, CRI, CRN
așa cum se prezintă în fig. 12. [Nm] [Nm]
1s-5 40 50-60
10-20 50 60-70
32-150 70 70-80
Amortizoare de
vibraţii
Placă Sylomer®
TM04 1692 1008
Avertizare
Când se pompează lichide fierbinţi, trebuie să vă
asiguraţi că personalul nu poate veni în mod
accidental în contact cu suprafeţele fierbinţi.
Figura 13 arată care părţi ale pompei devin la fel de fierbinţi ca şi
lichidul pompat.
TM04 0361 0608
Capul pompei
Manşonul pompei
Bază
239
6.6 Forţele şi cuplurile de torsiune ale flanşelor
Română (RO)
Direcţia Y: Intrare/ieşire
Direcţia Z: Direcţia zonei camerei.
Direcţia X: 90 ° de la intrare/ieşire
Forţe
CR, CRI, CRN
Flanşă, DN
Direcţia Y
Direcţia X
Direcţia Z
Forță,
Forță,
Forță,
[mm]
[N]
[N]
[N]
Cupluri
CR, CRI, CRN
Flanşă, DN
Direcţia Y
Direcţia X
Direcţia Z
Cuplu,
Cuplu,
Cuplu,
[mm]
[Nm]
[Nm]
[Nm]
240
7. Conexiuni electrice 7.2 Conexiune cu trei faze
Română (RO)
Conexiunea electrică trebuie realizată de către un electrician
autorizat în conformitate cu normativele locale. Alimentare de la reţea [V]
Avertizare Conexiune în
Conexiune în stea
triunghi
Pompa CR trebuie conectată la un întrerupător
extern de rețea plasat aproape de pompă şi la un 220-240 / 380-415
disjunctor de protecție a motorului sau un 50 Hz
380-415 / 660-690
convertizor de frecvenţă CUE. Întrerupătorul de
reţea trebuie să poată fi blocat în poziţia OFF 220-277 / 380-480 1)
60 Hz
(izolat). Tipul şi cerinţele specificate în 380-480 / 660-690
EN 60204-1, 5.3.2.
1) Motoare de 60 Hz, 0,37 - 1,1 kW: 220-277/380-440 V.
Avertizare
Înainte de a scoate capacul cutiei de borne și
înainte de a scoate/demonta pompa, asigurați-vă W2 U1 W2 U2 V2
241
7.3 Conexiunea monofazată 7.4 Poziţiile cutiei de borne
Română (RO)
242
8. Punere în funcţiune 8.1 Etanşare arbore
Română (RO)
Suprafețele de etanșare ale arborelui sunt lubrifiate de lichidul
Nu porniţi pompa decât după ce este umplută cu
pompat ceea ce înseamnă că se poate produce o anumită
lichid şi aerisită. Dacă pompa merge în gol, scurgere pe la etanșarea arborelui.
Atenţie
lagărele pompei şi etanşarea arborelui se pot
Când pompa este pusă în funcțiune pentru prima oară, sau când
deteriora.
se instalează o nouă etanșare a arborelui, este nevoie de o
perioadă de rodaj până ce scurgerea se reduce la un nivel
acceptabil. Timpul necesar depinde de condițiile de funcţionare,
9. Întreţinere
Fig. 21 Ventil de aerisire, standard și o soluție opțională cu
racord de furtun. Avertizare
Înainte de a începe orice lucrare la pompă,
asiguraţi-vă că alimentarea de la rețea a fost
Avertizare deconectată şi că nu poate fi reconectată
Fiţi atenţi la direcţia orificiului de aerisire şi aveți accidental.
grijă ca scăpările de apă să nu producă vătămări Lagărele pompelor şi etanșarea arborelui nu necesită întreținere.
persoanelor sau defecțiuni motorului sau altor
componente. Lagărele motorului
În instalațiile de apă caldă, acordați o atenție Motoarele care nu sunt echipate cu nipluri de gresare nu necesită
sporită pericolului de opărire cu apă fierbinte. întreținere.
Urmaţi instrucţiunile de la pagina 338. Motoarele echipate cu nipluri de gresare trebuie gresate cu o
vaselină rezistentă la temperaturi înalte, pe bază de litiu.
CR, CRI, CRN 1s la 5
Vezi instrucţiunile de pe capacul ventilatorului.
Pentru aceste pompe, vă sfătuim să deschideţi ventilele de
În cazul funcţionării sezoniere (motorul este inactiv mai mult de
ocolire pe timpul pornirii.vezi fig. 22 pentru amplasarea ventilului
6 luni pe an), vă recomandăm să gresați motorul când pompa
de ocolire. Ventilul de ocolire conectează partea de aspiraţie şi
este scoasă din funcţiune.
cea de refulare a pompei, astfel facilitând procedura de umplere.
Închideţi ventilul de ocolire din nou atunci când funcţionarea este În funcție de temperatura ambiantă, lagărele motorului trebuie
stabilă. înlocuite sau lubrifiate conform tabelului de mai jos. Tabelul este
valabil pentru motoarele cu 2 poli. Numărul de ore de funcţionare
Când se pompează lichide care conțin aer, vă sfătuim să lăsați
de pe lagărul de schimb are caracter informativ.
ventilul de ocolire deschis dacă presiunea de funcţionare este
mai mică de 6 bar.
Putere Interval de înlocuire lagăre [ore de funcţionare]
Închideţi ventilul de ocolire dacă presiunea de funcţionare motor
depășește în mod constant 6 bar. În caz contrar, materialul de la [kW] 40 °C 45 °C 50 °C 55 °C 60 °C
deschidere se va uza din cauza vitezei mari a lichidului.
0,37 - 0,75 18000 - - - -
243
10. Protecţie la îngheţ
Română (RO)
Avertizare
Fiţi atenţi la direcţia orificiului de aerisire şi aveți
grijă ca scăpările de apă să nu producă vătămări
persoanelor sau defecțiuni motorului sau altor
componente.
În instalațiile de apă caldă, acordați o atenție
sporită pericolului de opărire cu apă fierbinte.
Nu strângeți șurubul de aerisire şi nu montați la loc dopul de
golire până când pompa nu este utilizată din nou.
CR, CRI, CRN 1s la 5
Înainte de a pune la loc dopul de golire în bază, deșurubați
ventilul de ocolire până la capăt. Vezi fig. 22.
Dop de golire
Ventil de ocolire TM01 1243 4097
11. Service
Vă recomandăm să reparați pompele cu motoare de 7,5 kW și
mai mari la amplasamentul pompei. Trebuie să fie disponibile
echipamente de ridicare adecvate.
244
12. Identificare avarii
Română (RO)
Avertizare
Înainte de a scoate capacul cutiei de borne și înainte de a scoate/demonta pompa, asigurați-vă că alimentarea de la
rețea a fost decuplată și că nu poate fi cuplată accidental.
245
Slovenčina (SK) Návod na montáž a prevádzku
Slovenčina (SK)
OBSAH Varovanie
Strana Pri nedodržaní týchto bezpečnostných pokynov
1. Symboly použité v tomto návode 246 môže dôjsť k ujme na zdraví .
2. Manipulácia 246
Varovanie
3. Typové označenie 247
Pri nedodržaní týchto pokynov môže dôjsť k
3.1 Typový kľúč pre CR, CRI, CRN 1s, 1, 3, 5, 10, 15 a 20 247
zasiahnutiu elektrickým prúdom s následným
3.2 Typový kľúč pre CR, CRN 32, 45, 64, 90, 120 a 150 247
rizikom vážnej ujmy na zdraví alebo úmrtia.
4. Použitie 247
5. Technické údaje 247 Nedodržanie týchto pokynov môže spôsobiť
Pozor
5.1 Teplota okolia a nadmorská výška 247 poruchy alebo poškodiť zariadenie.
5.2 Teplota kvapaliny 248
Poznámky a pokyny, ktoré uľahčujú prácu a
5.3 Maximálny prípustný prevádzkový tlak a teplota Dôležité
čerpanej kvapaliny pre upchávku hriadeľa 248 zabezpečujú bezpečnú prevádzku.
5.4 Minimálna nátoková výška 248
5.5 Minimálna nátoková výška 249 2. Manipulácia
5.6 Minimálny prietok 249 Pri zdvíhaní kompletných čerpadiel s motorom dodržiavajte
5.7 Elektrické údaje 249 nasledovné pokyny:
5.8 Početnosť spínania 249 • Čerpadlo s motorom veľkosti 0,37 - 5,5 kW:
5.9 Rozmery a hmotnosti 249 Čerpadlo zdvíhajte v mieste príruby motora pomocou
5.10 Hladina akustického tlaku 249 popruhov alebo podobných prostriedkov.
6. Inštalácia 249 • Čerpadlo s motorom veľkosti 7,5 - 22 kW:
6.1 Základ 250 Čerpadlo zdvíhajte pomocou skrutiek s okom.
6.2 Tlmenie vibrácií 251
• Čerpadlo s motorom veľkosti 30-45 kW:
6.3 Inštalácia vonku 251
Čerpadlo dvíhajte pomocou zdvíhacích konzol na prírube
6.4 Horúce povrchy 251
motora.
6.5 Krútiace momenty 251
6.6 Sily a uťahovacie momenty na prírube • Čerpadlo s motorom veľkosti 55-75 kW:
252
Čerpadlo zdvíhajte pomocou skrutiek s okom na strane
7. Elektrické pripojenie 253 motora.
7.1 Káblový prívod/skrutkové spojenie 253
7.2 Trojfázové pripojenie 253
7.3 Jednofázové pripojenie 254
7.4 Polohy svorkovnice 254
7.5 Prevádzka s frekvenčným meničom 254
8. Uvedenie do prevádzky 255
8.1 Zábeh hriadeľovej upchávky 255
9. Údržba 255
10. Odolnosť proti mrazu 256
TM04 0339 0608
Varovanie
Zabezpečte, aby čerpadlo zostalo v stabilnej
polohe počas vybaľovania a inštalácie pomocou
popruhov na zdvíhanie čerpadla.
Dajte pozor na to, že ťažisko čerpadla sa
nachádza blízko motora.
246
3. Typové označenie 5. Technické údaje
Slovenčina (SK)
3.1 Typový kľúč pre CR, CRI, CRN 1s, 1, 3, 5, 10, 15 5.1 Teplota okolia a nadmorská výška
a 20
Maximálna
Výkon Trieda Maximálna
Príklad CR 3- 10 X- X- X- X- XXXX Verzia nadmorská
motora účinnosti teplota okolia
motora výška
Typový rozsah: CR, CRI, CRN [kW] motora [°C]
[m]
Nominálny prietok v m3/h
Grundfos
Počet obežných kolies 0,37 - 0,55 - +40 1000
MG
Kód verzie čerpadla Grundfos
0,75 - 22 IE3 +60 3500
Kód pre pripojenie potrubia MG
Kód pre materiál 30 - 75 Siemens IE3 +55 2750
Kód pre gumené časti čerpadla Ak teplota okolia alebo nadmorská výška, v ktorej je čerpadlo
Kód hriadeľovej upchávky nainštalované, presahujú vyššie uvedené hodnoty teplôt
a nadmorských výšok, motor nesmie byť plne zaťažený, pretože
3.2 Typový kľúč pre CR, CRN 32, 45, 64, 90, 120 a 150 hrozí nebezpečenstvo prehriatia. Prehriatie môže byť následkom
nadmernej okolitej teploty alebo nízkej hustoty a z toho
Príklad CR 32- 2 1- X- X- X- X- XXXX vyplývajúceho nízkeho chladiaceho efektu vzduchu.
Rad čerpadiel: CR, CRN V takých prípadoch je nutné použiť motor s vyšším menovitým
3 výkonom.
Nominálny prietok v m /h
počet článkov
P2
Počet obežných kolies s redukovaným [%] 3
priemerom
100 2
Kód verzie čerpadla
90
Kód pre pripojenie potrubia
80 1
Kód pre materiál 70
Kód pre gumené časti 60
čerpadla
50
247
5.2 Teplota kvapaliny 5.4 Minimálna nátoková výška
Slovenčina (SK)
p [bar]
Hv
35
30 Obr. 4 Schematické znázornenie otvorenej sústavy
25 s čerpadlom CR
H H H H H
20 Q Q Q Q B
HQQE/V
15 Q Q Q Q Q Maximálna sacia výška "H" v metroch vodného stĺpca sa vypočíta
HBQE/V
248
5.5 Minimálna nátoková výška
Krok Úkon
Slovenčina (SK)
Tabuľka na strane 321 uvádza hodnoty maximálnej prípustnej
vtokovej výšky. Avšak skutočný sací tlak + maximálny tlak 2 Informácia je uvedená na
v čerpadle (bez prietoku) musia byť vždy nižšie ako hodnoty strane 322:
uvedené na obr. A, strana 320. • inštalačná dĺžka
249
Odporúčaná dĺžka a šírka sú uvedené na obr. 7. Vezmite do
Krok Úkon úvahy, že dĺžka a šírka základu pre čerpadlá s veľkosťou motora
Slovenčina (SK)
6 Je nutné nainštalovať vákuový ≤ 30 kW musí byť o 200 mm väčšia než základová doska.
(podtlakový) ventil, ak má Pre čerpadlá s motormi veľkosti ≥ 37 kW musí byť dĺžka a šírka
inštalácia tieto charakteristiky: vždy 1,5 x 1,5 (Lf x Bf) metrov.
• Výtlačné potrubie je
vyspádované smerom nadol
od čerpadla.
• Tu vzniká nebezpečenstvo
6.1 Základ
Podložky
TM04 0343 0608
250
6.2 Tlmenie vibrácií 6.5 Krútiace momenty
Slovenčina (SK)
Ak sú použité antivibračné podložky, musia byť nainštalované Tabuľka zobrazuje odporúčacie krútiace momenty pre skrutky
pod základ. Pre čerpadlá s veľkosťou motora ≤ 30 kW môžeme v základni a prírubách.
použiť antivibračné podložky zobrazené na obr. 11.
Pre čerpadlá s veľkosťou motora ≥ 37 kW použite dosku Základ Príruba
CR, CRI, CRN
z materiálu Sylomer® uvedenej na obr. 12. [Nm] [Nm]
1s-5 40 50-60
10-20 50 60-70
32-150 70 70-80
Antivibračné
podložky
Doska z materiálu
TM04 1692 1008
Sylomer®
Varovanie
Pri čerpaní horúcich kvapalín je treba dbať o
zvýšenú opatrnosť a zamedziť náhodnému
kontaktu osôb s horúcimi povrchmi.
Obrázok 13 ukazuje, ktoré časti čerpadla môžu byť také horúce
ako čerpaná kvapalina.
Dopravná výška
TM04 0361 0608
čerpadla
Plášť čerpadla
Základ
251
6.6 Sily a uťahovacie momenty na prírube
Slovenčina (SK)
Smer Y: Vstup/výstup
Smer Z: Smer k upchávkovej komore
Smer X: 90 ° na vstup/výstup
Sily
CR, CRI, CRN
Príruba, DN
Smer Y
Smer X
Smer Z
[mm]
Sila,
Sila,
Sila,
[N]
[N]
[N]
Krútiace momenty
Krútivý moment,
Krútivý moment,
Krútivý moment,
CR, CRI, CRN
Príruba, DN
Smer Y
Smer X
Smer Z
[mm]
[Nm]
[Nm]
[Nm]
252
7. Elektrické pripojenie 7.2 Trojfázové pripojenie
Slovenčina (SK)
Elektrické pripojenia môže vykonávať len oprávnený elektrikár
v súlade s platnými miestnymi predpismi. Prívod napájacieho napätia [V]
253
7.3 Jednofázové pripojenie 7.4 Polohy svorkovnice
Slovenčina (SK)
254
8. Uvedenie do prevádzky 8.1 Zábeh hriadeľovej upchávky
Slovenčina (SK)
Plochy upchávky sú mazané čerpanou kvapalinou, čo znamená,
Čerpadlo nezapínajte, kým nie je naplnené
že tam môže byť určité množstvo úniku z hriadeľového tesnenia.
čerpanou kvapalinou a riadne odvzdušnené.
V prípade, že čerpadlo beží nasucho, sa môžu Ak je čerpadlo prvýkrát uvedené do prevádzky alebo pri inštalácii
Pozor
novej upchávky, určité množstvo úniku z hriadeľovej upchávky sa
poškodiť ložiská čerpadla a mechanická
vyžaduje, až sa zredukuje na prijateľnú úroveň. Doba, ktorá je
upchávka.
k tomu potrebná záleží na prevádzkových podmienkach, t.j. vždy,
keď sa prevádzkové podmienky zmenia, bude iniciované nové
obdobie zábehu.
9. Údržba
Varovanie
Obr. 21 Odvzdušňovací ventil, štandardné a voliteľné riešenie Pred začiatkom všetkých prác na čerpadle sa
s pripojením hadice. uistite, že všetky zdroje napájania čerpadla sú
vypnuté a nemôžu sa nepredvídateľne zapnúť.
Ložiská a upchávka hriadeľa čerpadla nevyžadujú údržbu.
Varovanie
Všímajte si smer, ktorým sú obrátené Ložiská motora
odvzdušňovacie otvory a dbajte, aby unikajúca Motory, ktoré nie sú vybavené mazivom, sú bezúdržbové.
voda nespôsobila žiadnu ujmu na zdraví osôb ani Motory vybavené mazivom by sa mali mazať mazivom na báze
škodu na motore alebo inom zariadení. lítia pre vysoké prevádzkové teploty. Pozri pokyny na kryte
Pri sústavách s horúcou vodou obzvlášť dbajte ventilátora.
o to, aby sa predišlo riziku zranenia a nevznikla V prípade sezónnej odstávky čerpadiel z prevádzky (motor
ujma na zdraví osôb oparením vriacou vodou. nepracuje viac ako 6 mesiacov v roku), odporúčame namazať
Postupujte podľa pokynov na str. 338. ložiská motora ihneď po odstavení čerpadla z prevádzky.
CR, CRI, CRN 1s až 5 V závislosti od okolitej teploty sa musia ložiská motora vymieňať
Pri týchto čerpadlách vám odporúčame počas rozbehu otvoriť alebo mazať podľa nižšie uvedenej tabuľky. Tabuľka platí pre
obtokový ventil, ktorého umiestnenie nájdete na obr. 22. 2-pólové motory. Počet prevádzkových hodín uvedený pre
Tým dôjde k prepojeniu sacej a výtlačnej strany čerpadla a výmenu ložiska je iba návod, odporúčanie.
zahltenie čerpadla bude jednoduchšie. Hneď ako sa prevádzka
čerpadla ustáli, môžete obtokový ventil zatvoriť. Veľkosť Interval výmeny ložiska [prevádzkové hodiny]
motora
Ak čerpané kvapaliny obsahujú vzduch, je vhodné ponechať 40 °C 45 °C 50 °C 55 °C 60 °C
[kW]
obtokový ventil otvorený, ak je prevádzkový tlak nižší ako
6 barov. 0,37 - 0,75 18000 - - - -
Ak prevádzkový tlak trvalo prekračuje 6 barov, obtokový ventil
uzatvorte. Inak dôjde k opotrebovaniu materiálu pri otvore kvôli 1,1 - 7,5 20000 15500 12500 10000 7500
vysokej rýchlosti kvapaliny. Veľkosť Interval mazania [prevádzkové hodiny]
motora
[kW] 40 °C 45 °C 50 °C 55 °C 60 °C
255
10. Odolnosť proti mrazu
Slovenčina (SK)
Varovanie
Všímajte si smer, ktorým sú obrátené
odvzdušňovacie otvory a dbajte, aby unikajúca
voda nespôsobila žiadnu ujmu na zdraví osôb ani
škodu na motore alebo inom zariadení.
Pri sústavách s horúcou vodou obzvlášť dbajte
o to, aby sa predišlo riziku zranenia a nevznikla
ujma na zdraví osôb oparením vriacou vodou.
Neuťahujte odvzdušňovaciu skrutku a nenasaďte vypúšťaciu
zátku, až kým nejdete čerpadlo znovu použiť.
CR, CRI, CRN 1s až 5
Predtým, než znovu nasadíte vypúšťaciu zátku v spodnej časti
čerpadla, vyskrutkujte obtokový ventil až na doraz. Pozri obr. 22.
Vypúšťacia zátka
Obtokový ventil
TM01 1243 4097
11. Servis
Čerpadlá s motormi 7,5 kW a viac odporúčame opravovať na
mieste. Je potrebné mať k dispozícii zdvíhacie zariadenie.
256
12. Identifikácia porúch
Slovenčina (SK)
Varovanie
Pred odstránením krytu svorkovnice a pred akýmkoľvek premiestnením/demontážou čerpadla sa uistite, že bol
odpojený prívod elektrickej energie a že nemôže dôjsť k jeho neúmyselnému zapnutiu.
257
Slovensko (SI) Navodila za montažo in obratovanje
Slovensko (SI)
VSEBINA Opozorilo
Stran Neupoštevanje varnostnih navodil lahko povzroči
1. Simboli, uporabljeni v tem dokumentu 258 telesne poškodbe.
2. Ravnanje 258
Opozorilo
3. Tipska oznaka 259
Neupoštevanje teh navodil lahko povzroči
3.1 Tipska tipka za CR, CRI, CRN 1s, 1, 3, 5, 10, 15 in 20 259
električni udar in posledično tveganje resne
3.2 Tipska tipka za CR, CRN 32, 45, 64, 90, 120 in 150 259
telesne poškodbe ali smrti.
4. Namen 259
5. Tehnični podatki 259 Neupoštevanje teh varnostnih navodil lahko
Opozorilo
5.1 Temperatura okolice in nadmorska višina 259 povzroči okvaro ali poškodbo opreme.
5.2 Temperatura tekočine 260
Opombe in navodila olajšajo delo ter zagotavljajo
5.3 Največji dopustni delovni tlak in temperatura tekočine Nasvet
glede na tesnilo osi 260 varno delovanje.
5.4 Minimalni vstopni tlak 260
5.5 Minimalni vstopni tlak 261 2. Ravnanje
5.6 Najmanjša hitrost pretoka 261 Pri dviganju celotne črpalke z motorjem upoštevajte spodnja
5.7 Električni podatki 261 navodila:
5.8 Pogostost vklopov in izklopov 261 • Črpalka z velikostjo motorja 0,37 - 5,5 kW:
5.9 Dimenzije in teže 261 Dvignite črpalko v prirobnici motorja z namenom pritrditve ali
5.10 Nivo zvočnega tlaka 261 podobno.
6. Montaža 261 • Črpalka z velikostjo motorja 7,5 - 22 kW:
6.1 Betonska osnova 262 Dvignite črpalko s pomočjo motorjevih vijakov z ušesom.
6.2 Blaženje vibracij 263
• Črpalka z velikostjo motorja 30-45 kW:
6.3 Zunanja namestitev 263
Črpalko dvignite s pomočjo dvižnih nosilcev na prirobnici
6.4 Vroča površina 263
motorja.
6.5 Navori 263
6.6 Sile in navori prirobnic • Črpalka z velikostjo motorja 55-75 kW:
264
Črpalko dvignite s pomočjo vijakov z ušesom na strani
7. Električna priključitev 265 motorja.
7.1 Vhod kabla/vijačni priključek 265
7.2 Trifazni priključek 265
7.3 Enofazni priključek 266
7.4 Mesta namestitve priključnih omaric 266
7.5 Delovanje frekvenčnega pretvornika 266
8. Zagon 267
8.1 Utečeno tesnilo gredi 267
9. Vzdrževanje 267
10. Zaščita pred zamrzovanjem 268
TM04 0339 0608
Opozorilo
Zagotovite, da črpalka ostane v nespremenjenem
položaju med razpakiravanjem in namestitvijo s
pomočjo jermenov za dvig črpalke.
Bodite pozorni da je center ravnotežja črpalke v
bližini motorja.
258
3. Tipska oznaka 5. Tehnični podatki
Slovensko (SI)
3.1 Tipska tipka za CR, CRI, CRN 1s, 1, 3, 5, 10, 15 5.1 Temperatura okolice in nadmorska višina
in 20
Maksimalna Maksimalna
Moč Razred
Primer CR 3- 10 X- X- X- X- XXXX Model temperatura nadmorska
motorja učinkovito
motorja okolja višina
Tipsko območje: CR, CRI, CRN [kW] sti motorja
[°C] [m]
Nominalna hitrost pretoka m 3/h
Grundfos
Število tekačev 0,37 - 0,55 - +40 1000
MG
Koda različice črpalke Grundfos
0,75 - 22 IE3 +60 3500
Koda za povezavo cevi MG
Koda materialov 30 - 75 Siemens IE3 +55 2750
Koda gumijastih delov črpalke Če temperatura okolice preseže zgoraj navedene vrednosti, ali če
Koda tesnila osi je črpalka nameščena na nadmorski višini, ki presega zgoraj
navedene vrednosti, motor ne sme biti polno obremenjen, zaradi
3.2 Tipska tipka za CR, CRN 32, 45, 64, 90, 120 in 150 nevarnosti pregretja. Pregrevanje je lahko posledica prekomernih
temperatur okolja ali nizke gostote zraka in posledično slabega
Primer CR 32- 2 1- X- X- X- X- XXXX učinka hlajenja.
Velikost črpalke: CR, CRN V teh primerih je treba izbrati močnejši motor.
Nominalna hitrost pretoka
m3/h P2
[%] 3
Število stopenj
100
Število tekačev z zmanjšanim premerom 2
90
Koda verzije črpalke
80 1
Koda za povezavo cevi
70
Koda materialov
60
Koda gumijastih delov
50
Grundfos večstopenjske linijske centrifugalne črpalke serije Slika 2 Učinkovitost motorja je odvisna od temperature/
CR, CRI in CRN so primerne za uporabo na več področjih. nadmorske višine
CR, CRI, CRN
Črpalke CR, CRI in CRN so primerne za prenos tekočin, kroženje Moč motorja
Pol. Model motorja
in tlačno pospeševanje mrzlih ali vročih čistih tekočin. [kW]
CRN 0,37 - 0,55 MG
1
Uporabite CRN črpalke in sisteme, kjer so vsi deli, ki so v 0,37 - 22 MGE
kontaktu s črpano tekočino, narejeni iz visokokakovostnega
2 0,75 - 22 MG
nerjavečega jekla.
3 30-75 Siemens
Črpane tekočine
Redke, čiste, nevnetljive, negorljive ali neeksplozivne tekočine, Primer
ki ne vsebujejo trdih delcev ali vlaken. Tekočina ne sme biti Številka 2 kaže, da obremenitev motorja IE3 pri sobni temperaturi
kemijsko agresivna do materialov črpalke. 70 °C ne sme biti višja od 89 % nazivnega donosa. Če je črpalka
Pri črpanju tekočin z gostoto in/ali viskoznostjo višjo od vode, nameščena na nadmorski višini 4750 metrov, je lahko motor
uporabite motorje ustrezno višjih zmogljivosti, če je to zahtevano. obremenjen največ do 89 % svoje nominalne moči.
V primerih, kjer sta maksimalna temperatura in maksimalna
višina hkrati preseženi, je dejavnike redukcije treba razmnožiti
(0,89 x 0,89 = 0,79).
259
5.2 Temperatura tekočine 5.4 Minimalni vstopni tlak
Slovensko (SI)
p [bar]
35 Hv
30
25 Slika 4 Shematski prikaz odprtega sistema s črpalko CR
H H H H H
20 Q Q Q Q B
HQQE/V
15 Q Q Q Q Q Maksimalno globino črpanja "H" v metrih lahko izračunate na
260
5.5 Minimalni vstopni tlak
Korak Postopek
Slovensko (SI)
Preglednica na strani 321 kaže največji dopustni vhodni tlak.
Vendar mora biti dejanski vhodni tlak skupaj z največjim tlakom 2 Te informacije so navedene na
črpalke (brez pretoka) vedno nižja od vrednosti, ki so navedene strani 322:
na sliki A, stran 320. • dolžine vhod-do-vhoda
37 50
zamenjave črpalke.
45 80 Vedno uporabite nepovratni
55 50 ventil (sesalni ventil) za zaščito
črpalke pred povratnim tokom.
75 50
5
5.9 Dimenzije in teže
Cevni vodi morajo biti
Dimenzije: Glejte sliko C, stran 322.
nameščeni tako, da se prepreči
TM02 0114 3800
261
6.1 Betonska osnova
Slovensko (SI)
mčrpalka × 1,5
hf =
TM04 0342 0608
Lf × Bf × δbeton
Podložne
Slika 7 Temelj, navpična namestitev ploščice
Priporočena dolžina in širina sta prikazani na sliki 7. Upoštevajte,
da morata biti dolžina in širina temelja črpalke z velikostjo motorja
≤ 30 kW, 200mm večji kot podnožje. Slika 10 Uravnavanje s podložnimi ploščicami
Za črpalke z velikostjo motorja ≥ 37 kW morata dolžina in širina
vedno znašati 1,5 x 1,5 (Lf x Bf) metra.
262
6.2 Blaženje vibracij 6.5 Navori
Slovensko (SI)
Če je uporabljeno blaženje vibracij, je potrebna instalacija pod Preglednica prikazuje priporočene navore za vijake, podnožje in
temeljem. Črpalke z velikostjo motorja ≤ 30 kW lahko uporabijo prirobnice.
blaženje vibracij, kot je prikazano na sliki 11.
Za črpalke z velikostjo motorja ≥ 37 kW uporabite ploščo Podnožje Prirobnica
CR, CRI, CRN
Sylomer® , kot je prikazano na sliki 12. [Nm] [Nm]
1s-5 40 50-60
10-20 50 60-70
32-150 70 70-80
Blažilniki vibracij
Plošča Sylomer®
TM04 1692 1008
Opozorilo
Pri črpanju vročih tekočin je potrebno preprečiti
neželene stike osebja z vročimi površinami.
Slika 13 prikazuje, kateri deli črpalke se segrejejo enako kot
črpalna tekočina.
TM04 0361 0608
Glava črpalke
Oklep črpalke
Podnožje
263
6.6 Sile in navori prirobnic
Slovensko (SI)
Y- smer: vhodni/izhodni
Z-smer: Smer sestave komor
X-smer: 90 ° od vhoda/izhoda
Sile
Prirobnica, DN
Y-smer
X-smer
Z-smer
[mm]
Sila,
Sila,
Sila,
[N]
[N]
[N]
Navori,
Y-smer
X-smer
Z-smer
Navor,
Navor,
[mm]
[Nm]
[Nm]
[Nm]
264
7. Električna priključitev 7.2 Trifazni priključek
Slovensko (SI)
Električno priključitev mora opraviti pooblaščeni strokovnjak
skladno s krajevnimi predpisi. Glavna napetost [V]
Opozorilo
Preden odstranite pokrov priključne omarice in W2 U1 W2 U2 V2
Obratovalna napetost in frekvenca sta navedeni na tipski ploščici Slika 15 Trikotna vezava
motorja. Prepričajte se, da je motor primeren za napajanje, s
katerim bo uporabljen, ter da je priključek motorja pravilen. U1
Diagaram ožičenja najdete v priključni omarici.
W2 U2 V2
265
7.3 Enofazni priključek 7.4 Mesta namestitve priključnih omaric
Slovensko (SI)
Opozorilo
motorju.
Priporočamo, da zaščitite vse ostale motorje proti napetostnim
konicam, ki so višje od 1200 V za 2000 V/μsec.
Omenjene motnje v obliki večjega hrupa in škodljivih napetostnih
Slika 18 Priključek, "visoka napetost", 0,37 - 0,75 kW konic je mogoče odpraviti z namestitvijo filtra LC med
frekvenčnim pretvornikom in motorjem.
Za nadaljnje informacije kontaktirajte dobavitelja frekvenčnega
pretvornika ali motorja.
7.5.3 Drugi motorji, razen motorjev, ki jih dobavlja družba
Grundfos
Kontaktirajte družbo Grundfos ali proizvajalca motorjev.
TM04 0345 0608
266
8. Zagon 8.1 Utečeno tesnilo gredi
Slovensko (SI)
Stranice tesnila so namazane s črpano tekočino, kar pomeni, da
Pred zagonom je potrebno črpalko obvezno
lahko pride do določene količine uhajanja skozi tesnila gredi.
napolniti s tekočino in jo odzračiti. Če črpalka
Opozorilo Ko se črpalka prvič zažene ali ko je nameščeno novo tesnilo
deluje v suhem teku, se lahko poškodujejo ležaji
gredi, je potrebno določeno obdobje delovanja (utekanja) črpalke,
črpalke in tesnilo osi.
preden se uhajanje zmanjša na sprejemljivo raven. Čas, ki je za
to potreben, je odvisen od delovnih pogojev, kar pomeni, da je
vsakič, ko se spremenijo delovni pogoji, potrebno novo utekanje.
9. Vzdrževanje
Opozorilo
Pred pričetkom del na črpalki izključite električno
Slika 21 Odzračni ventil, standardna in morebitna rešitev s napajanje do črpalke in preprečite možnost
cevnim priključkom. nenamernega vklopa.
Ležaji črpalke in tesnilo osi ne potrebujejo vzdrževanja.
Opozorilo Ležaji motorja
Da bi preprečili poškodbe oseb, okvaro motorja Motorji, ki nimajo nastavkov za podmazovanje, ne potrebujejo
ali drugih delov zaradi izlitja medija, bodite vzdrževanja.
pozorni na to, kam je usmerjena odzračevalna Motorje z nastavki za podmazovanje je treba mazati z vročo, na
odprtina. litiju bazirano mastjo. Glejte navodila na pokrovu ventilatorja.
V primeru instalacij z vročo vodo bodite še V primeru sezonskega delovanja (motor miruje več kot 6
posebej pozorni na nevarnost poškodb z vročo mesecev na leto) priporočamo, da motor namažete, ko črpalka
vodo. preneha delovati.
Sledite navodilom na strani 338. Odvisno od temperature okolice morajo biti motorni ležaji
CR, CRI, CRN 1s do 5 zamenjani ali premazani z lubrikantom, kot je prikazano v spodnji
Za te črpalke priporočamo, da med zagonom odprete obvodni preglednici. Tabela vsebuje 2-polne motorje. Število obratovalnih
ventil, glejte sliko 22 za lokacijo obvodnega ventila. Obvodni ur, ki je navedeno za zamenjavo ležajev, velja samo kot okvirna
ventil povezuje sesalno in tlačno stran črpalke in tako olajša smernica.
polnjenje. Ko je delovanje stabilno lahko ponovno zaprete
obvodni ventil. Velikost Interval zamenjave ležajev [delovne ure]
motorja
Pri črpanju tekočin z vsebnostjo zraka, vam priporočamo, da 40 °C 45 °C 50 °C 55 °C 60 °C
[kW]
pustite obvodni ventil odprt, če je delovni tlak nižji od 6 bar.
Obvodni ventil zaprite, če delovni tlak stalno presega 6 bar. 0,37 - 0,75 18000 - - - -
V nasprotnem primeru se lahko snov pri odprtini obrabi zaradi
visoke hitrosti tekočine. 1,1 - 7,5 20000 15500 12500 10000 7500
267
10. Zaščita pred zamrzovanjem
Slovensko (SI)
Opozorilo
Da bi preprečili poškodbe oseb, okvaro motorja
ali drugih delov zaradi izlitja medija, bodite
pozorni na to, kam je usmerjena odzračevalna
odprtina.
V primeru namestitev z vročo vodo bodite še
posebej pozorni na nevarnost poškodb z vročo
vodo.
Ne privijte odzračevalnega vijaka in zamenjajte odtočnega čepa,
dokler črpalke ponovno ne uporabite.
CR, CRI, CRN 1s do 5
Pred namestitvijo odtočnega čepa v podlago, odvijte obvodni
ventil do konca. Glejte sliko 22.
Odtočni čep
Obvodni ventil
TM01 1243 4097
11. Servis
Priporočamo, da črpalke z motorji, z močjo 7,5 kW ali več,
popravite na mestu črpalke. Nujna dvižna oprema mora biti na
razpolago.
268
12. Odpravljanje napak
Slovensko (SI)
Opozorilo
Preden odstranite pokrov priključne omarice in preden odstranite/razstavite črpalko, se prepričajte, da je napajanje
izklopljeno in ga ni mogoče vklopiti po pomoti.
13. Odstranitev
Izdelek in njegove dele je treba odstraniti na okolju prijazen
način:
1. Uporabite javna ali zasebna podjetja za odvoz odpadkov.
2. Če to ni mogoče, kontaktirajte najbližje Grundfosovo podjetje
ali servisno službo Grundfos.
269
Srpski (RS) Uputstvo za instalaciju i rad
Srpski (RS)
SADRŽAJ Upozorenje
Strana Ako se ne pridržavate ovih bezbednosnih
1. Simboli korišćeni u ovom dokumentu 270 uputstava, može doći to telesnih povreda.
2. Rukovanje 270
Upozorenje
3. Određivanje tipa 271
Ako se ne pridržavate ovih uputstava, može doći
3.1 Tipski ključ za CR, CRI, CRN 1s, 1, 3, 5, 10, 15 i 20 271
do strujnog udara uz rizik ozbiljne telesne
3.2 Tipski ključ za CR, CRN 32, 45, 64, 90, 120 I 150 271
povrede ili smrti.
4. Primene 271
5. Tehnički podaci 271 Ako se ne pridržavate ovih bezbednosnih
5.1 Temperatura okoline i nadmorska visina 271 Pažnja uputstava, može doći do kvara ili oštećenja
5.2 Temperaturu tečnosti 272 opreme.
5.3 Maksimalni dozvoljeni radni pritisak i temperatura
tečnosti za zaptivku vratila 272 Napomene ili uputstva čine posao lakšim i
Savet
5.4 Minimalni ulazni pritisak 272 obezbeđuju bezbedan rad.
5.5 Minimalni ulazni pritisak 273
5.6 Minimalni protok 273 2. Rukovanje
5.7 Elekto podaci 273 Kada podižete kompletnu pumpu sa motorom pratite sledeća
5.8 Frekvencija uključivanja i isključivanja 273 uputstva:
5.9 Dimenzije i težina 273 • Pumpa sa motorom veličine 0,37 - 5,5 kW:
5.10 Nivo pritiska buke 273 Podignite pumpu na prirubnicu motora uz pomoć kaiševa ili
6. Instalacija 273 sličnog.
6.1 Osnova 274 • Pumpa sa motorom veličine 7,5 - 22 kW:
6.2 Ublažavanje vibracija 275 Podignite pumpu uz pomoć kukica motora.
6.3 Instalacija na otvorenom 275
• Pumpa sa motorom veličine 30-45 kW:
6.4 Vruće površine 275
Podignite pumpu uz pomoć držača za podizanje na prirubnici
6.5 Momenti zatezanja 275
motora.
6.6 Sile na ivicama i obrtni momenti 276
• Pumpa sa motorom veličine 55-75 kW:
7. Elektro povezivanje 277 Podignite pumpu uz pomoć ušičastih zavrtanja na boku
7.1 Kablovska uvodnica/spojnica zavrtnja 277 motora.
7.2 Trofazno povezivanje 277
7.3 Monofazno povezivanje 278
7.4 Položaji priključne kutije 278
7.5 Rad sa konvertorom frekvencije 278
8. Puštanje u rad 279
8.1 Period adaptacije zaptivke vratila 279
9. Održavanje 279
10. Zaštita od zamrzavanja 280
11. Servis 280
TM04 0339 0608
Upozorenje
Osigurajte da pumpa ostane u stabilnom položaju
tokom raspakivanja i instaliranja uz pomoć
kaiševa korišćenih za podizanje pumpe.
Zapamtite da je centar gravitacije pumpe blizu
motora.
270
3. Određivanje tipa 5. Tehnički podaci
Srpski (RS)
3.1 Tipski ključ za CR, CRI, CRN 1s, 1, 3, 5, 10, 15 i 20 5.1 Temperatura okoline i nadmorska visina
271
5.2 Temperaturu tečnosti 5.4 Minimalni ulazni pritisak
Srpski (RS)
p [bar]
35 Hv
30
25 Slika 4 Šematski prikaz otvorenog sistema sa CR pumpom
H H H H H
20 Q Q Q Q B
HQQE/V
15 Q Q Q Q Q Maksimalna visina usisa "H" u metrima može da se izračuna na
272
5.5 Minimalni ulazni pritisak
Korak Postupak
Srpski (RS)
Tabela na strani 321 prikazuje maksimalni dozvoljeni pritisak na
ulazu. Međutim, stvarni pritisak na ulazu + maksimalni pritisak u 2 Ova informacija je data na
pumpi (kada nema protoka) mora uvek biti niži od vrednosti datih strani 322:
na sl. A, na strani 320. • Dužine između otvora
6. Instalacija
Pumpa mora biti pričvršćena na horizontalnu, ravnu i čvrstu 6
podlogu zavrtnjima kroz rupe na osnovnoj ploči. Prilikom montaže Postavite vakum ventil blizu
pumpe pridržavati se sledećih uputstava, kako ne bi došlo do pumpe ukoliko instalacija ima
njenog oštećenja. jednu od sledećih
karakteristika:
Korak Postupak • Ispusna cev se spušta
nadole od pumpe.
TM02 0115 3800
273
6.1 Osnova
Srpski (RS)
mpumpe × 1,5
hf =
TM04 0342 0608
Lf × Bf × δbetona
Podmetači
Preporučena dužina i širina su prikazane na sl. 7. Zapamtite da
dužina i širina osnove pumpe sa veličinom motora ≤ 30 kW mora
biti za 200 mm veća od osnovne ploče.
Za pumpe sa motorom veličine ≥ 37 kW, dužina i širina uvek
moraju biti 1,5 x 1,5 (Lf x Bf) metara. Slika 10 Nivelisanje podmetačima
274
6.2 Ublažavanje vibracija 6.5 Momenti zatezanja
Srpski (RS)
Ako se koriste prigušivači vibracija, oni se moraju instalirati ispod Tabela pokazuje preporučene momente za zavrtnje sa navrtkom
osnove. Pumpe sa veličinom motora ≤ 30 kW mogu koristiti pri osnovi i na prirubnicama.
prigušivače vibracija kao što je prikazano na sl. 11.
Za pumpe sa veličinom motora ≥ 37 kW, koristite Sylomer® Osnova Prirubnica
CR, CRI, CRN
ploču kako je prikazano na sl. 12. [Nm] [Nm]
1s-5 40 50-60
10-20 50 60-70
32-150 70 70-80
Prigušivači vibracija
Sylomer® ploča
TM04 1692 1008
Upozorenje
Kad pumpa vruće tečnosti, mora se osigurati
kako se ljudi ne bi povredili pri kontaktu sa
vrućom površinom.
Slika 13 pokazuje koji su delovi pumpe vrući koliko i pumpana
tečnost.
TM04 0361 0608
Glava pumpe
Plašt pumpe
Osnova
275
6.6 Sile na ivicama i obrtni momenti
Srpski (RS)
Y-pravac: Ulaz/izlaz
Z-pravac: Smer komore
X-pravac: 90 ° sa ulaza/izlaza
Sile
Prirubnica, DN
Y-pravac
X-pravac
Z-pravac
[mm]
Sila,
Sila,
Sila,
[N]
[N]
[N]
Obrtni moment,
Obrtni moment,
Prirubnica, DN
Y-pravac
X-pravac
Z-pravac
[mm]
[Nm]
[Nm]
[Nm]
276
7. Elektro povezivanje 7.2 Trofazno povezivanje
Srpski (RS)
Električno povezivanje bi trebalo da izvede ovlašćeni električar u
skladu sa lokalnim propisima. Mrežno napajanje [V]
277
7.3 Monofazno povezivanje 7.4 Položaji priključne kutije
Srpski (RS)
278
8. Puštanje u rad 8.1 Period adaptacije zaptivke vratila
Srpski (RS)
Lica zaptivke se podmazuju dizanom tečnosti, što znači da može
Ne puštati pumpu u rad dok ne bude napunjena
doći do određenog propuštanja zaptivke vratila.
radnim fluidom i odzračena. Ako pumpa radi na
Pažnja Kada se pumpa prvi put pušta u rad ili kada se instalira nova
suvo, ležajevi pumpe i zaptivač vratila se mogu
zaptivka vratila, potreban je određeni period adaptacije pre nego
oštetiti.
se propuštanje smanji na prihvatljiv nivo. Vreme koje je za to
potrebno zavisi od radnih uslova, npr. svaki put kada se radni
uslov promeni započinje novi period adaptacije.
9. Održavanje
Upozorenje
Pre početka bilo kakvih radova na pumpi,
Slika 21 Odzračni ventil, standard i opciono rešenje sa proverite da li je električno napajanje isključeno i
priključkom za crevo. osigurajte da se ne može nehotice uključiti.
Ležajevi i zaptivka vratila pumpe ne zahtevaju nikakvo
održavanje.
Upozorenje
Obratite pažnju na položaj otvora za odzračivanje Ležajevi motora
kako bi se otklonila opasnost od povreda i Motorima koji nemaju mazalice nije potrebno održavanje.
oštećenja motora i drugih komponenti. Motori sa mazalicama moraju se podmazivati mašću na bazi
Kod instalacija sa vrućom vodom, treba posebno litijuma otpornom na visoke temperature. Pogledajte uputstva na
obratiti pažnju na opasnost od povreda vrelom poklopcu ventilatora.
vodom. U slučaju sezonskog rada (motor ne radi više od 6 meseci u toku
Pratite uputstva na strani 338. godine) preporučujemo podmazivanje motora kad se pumpa
CR, CRI, CRN 1s do 5 povuče iz rada.
Za ove pumpe vam savetujemo da otvorite ventil bajpasa prilikom U zavisnosti od temperature okoline, ležajevi motora se moraju
startovanja, pogledajte sl. 22 za lokaciju ventila bajpasa. Bajpas zameniti ili podmazati prema tabeli ispod. Tabela se odnosi na
ventil spaja usisnu i ispusnu stranu pumpe i tako olakšava 2-polne motore. Broj radnih sati naveden za zamenu ležaja je
proceduru punjenja. Zatvorite bajpas ventil kad se rad stabilizuje. samo smernica.
Kada pumpane tečnosti sadrže vazduh savetujemo da ostavite
Veličina Interval zamene ležajeva [radni sati]
bajpas ventil otvoren ukoliko je radni pritisak niži od 6 bara.
motora
Zatvorite bajpas ventil ukoliko radni pritisak konstantno prelazi [kW] 40 °C 45 °C 50 °C 55 °C 60 °C
6 bara. Inače će se zbog visoke brzine tečnosti habati materijal
otvora. 0,37 - 0,75 18000 - - - -
279
10. Zaštita od zamrzavanja
Srpski (RS)
Upozorenje
Obratite pažnju na položaj otvora za odzračivanje
kako bi se otklonila opasnost od povreda i
oštećenja motora i drugih komponenti.
Kod instalacija sa vrućom vodom, treba posebno
obratiti pažnju na opasnost od povreda vrelom
vodom.
Nemojte zatezati zavrtanj za odzračivanje i vraćati drenažni čep
dok se pumpa ne bude ponovo koristila.
CR, CRI, CRN 1s do 5
Pre zamene ispusnog čepa odvrnite bajpas ventil do kraja.
Pogledajte sl. 22.
Čep za pražnjenje
Bajpas ventil TM01 1243 4097
11. Servis
Preporučujemo vam da pumpe sa motorima od 7,5 kW i više
popravljate na lokaciji pumpe. Neophodno je da se obezbedi
opremu za podizanje.
280
12. Traženje grešaka
Srpski (RS)
Upozorenje
Pre uklanjanja poklopca kutije sa priključcima i pre uklanjanja/rastavljanja pumpe, osigurajte da je napajanje strujom
isključeno i da se ne može nehotice uključiti.
13. Uklanjanje
Proizvod ili delovi se moraju odstraniti na ekološki bezbedan
način:
1. Koristiti lokalne javne ili privatne firme za otklanjanje otpadnih
materija.
2. Ukoliko ovo nije moguće kontaktirati najbliže Grundfos
predstavništvo ili servis.
281
Suomi (FI) Asennus- ja käyttöohjeet
Suomi (FI)
SISÄLTÖ Varoitus
Sivu Näiden turvallisuusohjeiden laiminlyönti voi aihe-
1. Tässä julkaisussa käytettävät symbolit 282 uttaa henkilövahinkoja.
2. Käsittely 282
Varoitus
3. Tyyppimerkintä 283
Näiden ohjeiden laiminlyönti voi johtaa sähköis-
3.1 CR-, CRI- ja CRN-pumppumallien 1s, 1, 3, 5, 10, 15
ja 20 tyyppikoodi kusta aiheutuvaan vakavaan vammaan tai kuole-
283
maan.
3.2 CR- ja CRN-pumppumallien 32, 45, 64, 90, 120 ja
150 tyyppikoodi 283
Näiden turvallisuusohjeiden laiminlyönti voi aihe-
4. Käyttökohteet 283 Huomio
uttaa toimintahäiriön tai laitevaurion.
5. Tekniset tiedot 283
5.1 Ympäristön lämpötila ja korkeus merenpinnasta 283 Huomautukset tai ohjeet, jotka helpottavat työs-
Huomaa
5.2 Nesteen lämpötila 284 kentelyä ja takaavat turvallisen toiminnan.
5.3 Akselitiivisteen suurin sallittu käyttöpaine ja nesteen
lämpötila 284 2. Käsittely
5.4 Pienin tulopaine 284
Kun koko pumppu nostetaan moottoreineen, noudata seuraavia
5.5 Pienin tulopaine 285
ohjeita:
5.6 Minimivirtaama 285
5.7 Sähköiset tiedot • Pumppu, jossa on 0,37 - 5,5 kW:n moottori:
285
Nosta pumppu moottorin laipasta nostoliinojen tai vastaavien
5.8 Käynnistys- ja pysäytystiheys 285
nostovälineiden avulla.
5.9 Mitat ja painot 285
5.10 Äänenpainetaso 285 • Pumppu, jossa on 7,5 - 22 kW:n moottori:
Nosta pumppu moottorin silmukkapulteista.
6. Asennus 285
6.1 Perustus 286 • Pumppu, jossa on 30-45 kW:n moottori:
6.2 Tärinän vaimentaminen 287 Nosta pumppu moottorin laipan nostosilmukoista.
6.3 Ulkoasennus 287 • Pumppu, jossa on 55-75 kW:n moottori:
6.4 Kuumat pinnat 287 Nosta pumppu moottorin sivussa olevista silmukkapulteista.
6.5 Momentit 287
6.6 Laippavoimat ja -momentit 288
7. Sähköliitäntä 289
7.1 Kaapeliläpivienti/läpivientiholkki 289
7.2 Kolmivaiheinen kytkentä 289
7.3 Yksivaiheinen kytkentä 290
7.4 Liitäntäkotelon asennot 290
7.5 Taajuusmuuttajakäyttö 290
8. Käyttöönotto 291
TM04 0339 0608
Jos CR-, CRI- tai CRN-pumpuissa on muu kuin MG- tai Siemens-
Varoitus
moottori, pumppu kannattaa nostaa nostoliinoilla moottorin lai-
Lue nämä asennus- ja käyttöohjeet ennen asen- pasta.
nusta. Asennuksessa ja käytössä on noudatet-
tava paikallisia määräyksiä ja vakiintuneita käy- Varoitus
täntöjä. Varmista, että pumppu pysyy vakaassa asen-
nossa pakkauksesta purkamisen ja asennuksen
aikana. Kannattele pumppua nostoliinoilla.
Pumpun painopiste on tyypillisesti lähellä moot-
toria.
282
3. Tyyppimerkintä 5. Tekniset tiedot
Suomi (FI)
3.1 CR-, CRI- ja CRN-pumppumallien 1s, 1, 3, 5, 10, 15 5.1 Ympäristön lämpötila ja korkeus merenpinnasta
ja 20 tyyppikoodi
Ympäristön Maksimikor-
Moottorin Moottorin
Esimerkki CR 3- 10 X- X- X- X- XXXX Moottori- maksimiläm- keus meren-
teho hyötysuh-
merkki pötila pinnasta
Mallisarja: CR, CRI, CRN [kW] deluokka
[°C] [m]
Nimellisvirtaama m3/h
Grundfos
Juoksupyörien määrä 0,37 - 0,55 - +40 1000
MG
Pumppuversion koodi Grundfos
0,75 - 22 IE3 +60 3500
Putkiliitännän koodi MG
Materiaalikoodi 30 - 75 Siemens IE3 +55 2750
Pumpun kumiosien koodi Jos ympäristön lämpötila on edellä mainittuja lämpötila-arvoja
Akselitiivisteen koodi korkeampi tai moottori asennetaan edellä mainittuja arvoja kor-
keammalle merenpinnasta, moottoria ei saa kuormittaa täydellä
3.2 CR- ja CRN-pumppumallien 32, 45, 64, 90, 120 ja kuormalla ylikuumenemisriskin takia. Ylikuumeneminen voi
150 tyyppikoodi aiheutua liian korkeasta ympäristön lämpötilasta tai ilman pie-
nemmästä tiheydestä, jolloin moottoria ei voida jäähdyttää tar-
Esimerkki CR 32- 2 1- X- X- X- X- XXXX peeksi tehokkaasti.
Pumppusarja: CR, CRN Tällaisissa tapauksissa on valittava suurempitehoinen moottori.
3
Nimellisvirtaama m /h
P2
Jaksojen määrä [%] 3
Pienen halkaisijan juoksupyörien luku-
100 2
määrä
90
Pumppuversion koodi
80 1
Putkiliitännän koodi
70
Materiaalikoodi
60
Pumpun kumiosien koodi 50
283
5.2 Nesteen lämpötila 5.4 Pienin tulopaine
Suomi (FI)
p [bar]
35 Hv
30
25 Kuva 4 Kaaviokuva avoimesta järjestelmästä, jossa on
H H H H H
20 Q Q Q HQQE/V Q B CR-pumppu
15 Q Q Q Q Q
284
5.5 Pienin tulopaine
Vaihe Toimenpide
Suomi (FI)
Suurin sallittu imupaine on ilmoitettu sivun 321 taulukossa.
Todellisen imupaineen ja pumpun maksimipaineen yhteenlaske- 2
Tiedot löytyvät sivulta 322:
tun arvon (ilman virtausta) on kuitenkin aina oltava pienempi kuin • rakennepituudet
sivun 320 kuvassa A.
vaihtoa varten.
45 80 Suojaa pumppu vastavirtauk-
55 50 selta takaiskuventtiilillä (pohja-
75 50 venttiilillä).
285
6.1 Perustus
Suomi (FI)
mpumppu × 1,5
hf =
Lf × Bf × δbetoni
286
6.2 Tärinän vaimentaminen 6.5 Momentit
Suomi (FI)
Tärinänvaimentimia käytettäessä ne on asennettava perustuksen Taulukossa näkyvät pohjalaatan ja laippojen pulttien suositellut
alle. ≤ 30 kW:n moottoreilla varustetuissa pumpuissa voidaan kiristysmomentit.
käyttää kuvan 11 mukaisia tärinänvaimentimia.
≥ 37 kW:n moottoreilla varustetuissa pumpuissa on käytettävä Runko Laippa
CR, CRI, CRN
kuvan 12 mukaista Sylomer®-levyä. [Nm] [Nm]
1s-5 40 50-60
10-20 50 60-70
32-150 70 70-80
Tärinänvaimentimet
Sylomer®-levy
TM04 1692 1008
6.3 Ulkoasennus
Ulkoasennuksessa moottori on suojattava sateelta. Myös mootto-
rin laipan yksi tyhjennysaukko kannattaa avata.
Varoitus
Kuumia nesteitä pumpattaessa on varmistettava,
ettei kukaan voi koskettaa pumpun kuumia pin-
toja epähuomiossa.
Kuva 13 osoittaa, mitkä pumpun osat kuumenevat pumpattavan
nesteen lämpötilaan.
TM04 0361 0608
Moottoriosa
Pumpun vaippa
Runko
287
6.6 Laippavoimat ja -momentit
Suomi (FI)
Y-suunta: Imuaukko/paineaukko
Z-suunta: Jaksokammion suunta
X-suunta: 90 ° imuaukon/paineaukon suhteen
Voimat
CR, CRI, CRN
Laippa, DN
Y-suunta
X-suunta
Z-suunta
Voima,
Voima,
Voima,
[mm]
[N]
[N]
[N]
Momentit
CR, CRI, CRN
Laippa, DN
Momentti,
Momentti,
Momentti,
Y-suunta
X-suunta
Z-suunta
[mm]
[Nm]
[Nm]
[Nm]
288
7. Sähköliitäntä 7.2 Kolmivaiheinen kytkentä
Suomi (FI)
Sähköasennuksen saa suorittaa vain valtuutettu sähköasentaja
paikallisten määräysten mukaisesti. Verkkojännite [V]
7.1 Kaapeliläpivienti/läpivientiholkki W2 U2 V2
Moottori Kaapeliläpivien- W1 V1 L1 L2 L3
Kuvaus
[kW] tien määrä ja koko
Kuva 16 Tähtikytkentä
Aukoissa on esivaletut kier-
0,25 - 0,55 2 x M20 x 1,5 teet ja valmiiksi puhkaista- Jos moottorissa on PTC-anturit tai PTO-koskettimet, kytkentä on
vat peitelevyt tehtävä liitäntäkotelossa olevan kytkentäkaavion mukaisesti.
Aukot on suljettu valmiiksi 3-vaiheisiin moottoreihin on liitettävä moottorinsuojakytkin.
0,75 - 3,0 2 x M20
puhkaistavilla peitelevyillä
Aukot on suljettu valmiiksi
4,0 - 7,5 4 x M25
puhkaistavilla peitelevyillä
2 x M20 Aukot on suljettu valmiiksi
11-22
4 x M40 puhkaistuilla peitelevyillä
30-45 2 x M50 x 1,5 Peitetulppa
55-75 2 x M63 x 1,5 Peitetulppa
289
7.3 Yksivaiheinen kytkentä 7.4 Liitäntäkotelon asennot
Suomi (FI)
7.5 Taajuusmuuttajakäyttö
290
8. Käyttöönotto 8.1 Akselitiivisteen totutuskäyttö
Suomi (FI)
Pumpattava neste voitelee akselitiivisteen pinnat, joten akselitii-
Älä käynnistä pumppua ennen kuin se on täytetty
viste voi vuotaa hieman.
nesteellä ja ilmattu. Jos pumppu käy kuivana,
Huomio Kun pumppu käynnistetään ensimmäisen kerran tai kun pump-
pumpun laakerit ja akselitiiviste saattavat vauri-
puun on asennettu uusi akselitiiviste, pumppu vaatii tietyn totu-
oitua.
tuskäyttöjakson ennen kuin vuoto pienenee hyväksyttävälle
tasolle. Tähän vaadittava aika riippuu käyttöolosuhteista, ts. aina
käyttöolosuhteiden muuttuessa alkaa uusi totutuskäyttöjakso.
9. Kunnossapito
Varoitus
Varmista ennen pumpun käsittelyä, että kaikki
Kuva 21 Ilmausruuvi, vakiomalli ja letkuliitäntä lisävarusteena. pumpun virtalähteet on katkaistu eikä niitä voida
epähuomiossa kytkeä takaisin.
Pumpun laakereita ja akselitiivistettä ei tarvitse huoltaa.
Varoitus
Tarkista ilmausreiän suunta, jotta ulos virtaava Moottorin laakerit
vesi ei aiheuta henkilövahinkoja tai vaurioita Moottoreita, joissa ei ole rasvanippoja ei tarvitse huoltaa.
moottoria tai muita komponentteja. Rasvanipoilla varustetut moottorit on voideltava korkeaan lämpö-
Kuumavesijärjestelmissä on erityisesti varot- tilaan tarkoitetulla litiumpohjaisella rasvalla. Katso ohjeet tuuletti-
tava, ettei kuuma vesi aiheuta palovammoja. men kotelosta.
Noudata sivun 338 ohjeita. Jos pumppua käytetään kausittain (moottori seisoo yli 6 kuu-
CR, CRI, CRN 1s - 5 kautta vuodessa), suosittelemme moottorin rasvausta ennen
pumpun poistamista käytöstä.
Näissä pumpuissa ohitusventtiili kannattaa avata käynnistyksen
ajaksi. Ohitusventtiilin sijainti näkyy kuvassa 22. Ohitusventtiili Ympäristön lämpötilasta riippuen moottorin laakerit on vaihdet-
yhdistää pumpun imu- ja painepuolen toisiinsa, mikä helpottaa tava tai voideltava alla olevan taulukon mukaisesti. Taulukko kos-
pumpun täyttöä. Sulje ohitusventtiili, kun pumpun toiminta on kee 2-napaisia moottoreita. Laakerien vaihtoa varten ilmoitettu
vakiintunut. käyttötuntimäärä on vain ohjeellinen.
Pumpattaessa ilmaa sisältäviä nesteitä ohitusventtiili kannattaa
Moottori- Laakerien vaihtoväli [käyttötunnit]
jättää auki, jos käyttöpaine on alle 6 baaria.
koko [kW] 40 °C 45 °C 50 °C 55 °C 60 °C
Sulje ohitusventtiili, jos käyttöpaine on jatkuvasti yli 6 baaria.
Nopea nestevirtaus kuluttaa aukon materiaalia.
0,37 - 0,75 18000 - - - -
291
10. Pakkassuojaus
Suomi (FI)
Varoitus
Tarkista ilmausreiän suunta, jotta ulos virtaava
vesi ei aiheuta henkilövahinkoja tai vaurioita
moottoria tai muita komponentteja.
Kuumavesijärjestelmissä on erityisesti varot-
tava, ettei kuuma vesi aiheuta palovammoja.
Älä kiristä ilmausruuvia tai kiinnitä tyhjennystulppaa ennen kuin
pumppu otetaan uudelleen käyttöön.
CR, CRI, CRN 1s - 5
Ennen tyhjennystulpan asennusta kierrä ohitusventtiili ulos ääri-
asentoonsa. Katso kuva 22.
Tyhjennystulppa
Ohitusventtiili
TM01 1243 4097
11. Huolto
7,5 kW:n moottoreilla varustetut pumput kannattaa korjata niiden
käyttöpaikalla. Asianmukaisia nostolaitteita on käytettävä.
292
12. Vianetsintä
Suomi (FI)
Varoitus
Ennen kuin irrotat liitäntäkotelon kannen tai irrotat/purat pumpun, varmista, että sähkövirta on katkaistu eikä sitä
voida epähuomiossa kytkeä päälle.
13. Hävittäminen
Tämä tuote tai sen osat on hävitettävä ympäristöystävällisesti:
1. Käytä kunnallista tai yksityistä jätteenkeräyspalvelua.
2. Jos se ei ole mahdollista, ota yhteys lähimpään Grundfos-
edustajaan tai -huoltoliikkeeseen.
293
Svenska (SE) Monterings- och driftsinstruktion
Svenska (SE)
Monterings- och driftsinstruktion översatt från engelska. 1. Symboler som förekommer i denna instruktion
INNEHÅLLSFÖRTECKNING Varning
Sida Om dessa säkerhetsinstruktioner inte följs kan
1. Symboler som förekommer i denna instruktion 294 det leda till personskador.
2. Hantering 294
Varning
3. Typbeteckning 295
Om dessa säkerhetsinstruktioner inte följs kan
3.1 Typnyckel för CR, CRI, CRN 1s, 1, 3, 5, 10, 15 och 20 295
det leda till elektriska stötar med medföljande
3.2 Typnyckel för CR, CRN 32, 45, 64, 90, 120 och 150 295
risk för allvarliga personskador eller dödsfall.
4. Användningsområden 295
5. Tekniska data 295 Om dessa säkerhetsinstruktioner inte följs finns
Varning
5.1 Omgivningstemperatur och höjd över havet 295 risk för funktionsfel eller skador på utrustningen.
5.2 Vätsketemperatur 296
Rekommendationer eller instruktioner som
5.3 Högsta tillåtna driftstryck och vätsketemperatur för Anm.
axeltätningen 296 underlättar arbetet och säkerställer säker drift.
5.4 Min. inloppstryck 296
5.5 Min. inloppstryck 297 2. Hantering
5.6 Min. flöde 297 Följ dessa instruktioner när hela pumpen med motor ska lyftas:
5.7 Elektriska data 297 • Pumpar med motorstorlek 0,37 - 5,5 kW:
5.8 Start- och stoppfrekvens 297 Lyft pumpen i motorflänsen med hjälp av stroppar eller lik-
5.9 Mått och vikt 297 nande.
5.10 Ljudtrycksnivå 297
• Pumpar med motorstorlek 7,5 - 22 kW:
6. Installation 297 Lyft pumpen med hjälp av motorns öglebultar.
6.1 Fundament 298
• Pumpar med motorstorlek 30-45 kW:
6.2 Vibrationsdämpning 299
Lyft pumpen i lyftbyglarna på motorflänsen.
6.3 Installation utomhus 299
6.4 Heta ytor 299 • Pumpar med motorstorlek 55-75 kW:
6.5 Åtdragningsmoment 299 Lyft pumpen i lyftöglorna på motorsidan.
6.6 Flänskrafter och vridmoment 300
7. Elanslutning 301
7.1 Kabelgenomföring/skruvanslutning 301
7.2 3-fasanslutning 301
7.3 1-fasanslutning 302
7.4 Placering av kopplingsbox 302
7.5 Drift med frekvensomformare 302
8. Igångkörning 303
8.1 Inkörning av axeltätning 303
TM04 0339 0608
294
3. Typbeteckning 5. Tekniska data
Svenska (SE)
3.1 Typnyckel för CR, CRI, CRN 1s, 1, 3, 5, 10, 15 5.1 Omgivningstemperatur och höjd över havet
och 20
Motorns
Max. omgiv-
Exempel CR 3- 10 X- X- X- X- XXXX Motoref- verk- Max. höjd
Motorfa- ningstempe-
fekt nings- över havet
Typbeteckning: CR, CRI, CRN brikat ratur
[kW] grads- [m]
Nominellt flöde i m3/h [°C]
klass
Antal pumphjul Grundfos
0,37 - 0,55 - +40 1000
Kod för pumputförande MG
Kod för röranslutning Grundfos
0,75 - 22 IE3 +60 3500
Kod för material MG
295
5.2 Vätsketemperatur 5.4 Min. inloppstryck
Svenska (SE)
p [bar]
35 Hv
30
25 Fig. 4 Schematisk skiss över öppet system med en CR-pump
H H H H H
20 Q Q Q Q B
HQQE/V
15 Q Q Q Q Q Max. sughöjd "H" i meter kan beräknas enligt följande:
296
5.5 Min. inloppstryck
Steg Åtgärd
Svenska (SE)
I tabellen på sidan 321 anges högsta tillåtna inloppstryck.
Det faktiska inloppstrycket + max. pumptryck (utan flöde) måste 2 Denna information anges på
dock alltid vara lägre än de värden som anges i figur A på sidan 322:
sidan 320. • inbyggnadslängd
45 80 utbyte.
Skydda alltid pumpen mot bak-
55 50
strömning med en backventil
75 50 (bottenventil).
5.9 Mått och vikt 5
Mått: Se figur C på sidan 322.
Vikt: Se etiketten på förpackningen. Dra rörledningar så att luftfickor
TM02 0114 3800
6. Installation 6
Pumpen ska installeras på ett stadigt, horisontellt och plant fun- Montera en vakuumventil nära
dament med hjälp av bultar genom hålen i bottenplattan. pumpen om installationen har
Följ anvisningarna nedan för att undvika skador på pumpen vid någon av följande egenskaper:
installation. • Utloppsledningen löper
nedåt bort från pumpen.
Steg Åtgärd • Det finns risk för hävertef-
TM02 0115 3800
fekt.
1
• Skydd mot bakströmning av
orena vätskor krävs.
Pilar på pumpens bottenplatta
TM02 0013 3800
297
6.1 Fundament
Svenska (SE)
mpump × 1,5
TM04 0342 0608
hf =
Lf × Bf × δbetong
298
6.2 Vibrationsdämpning 6.5 Åtdragningsmoment
Svenska (SE)
Eventuella vibrationsdämpare ska vara monterade under funda- I tabellen visas rekommenderade åtdragningsmoment för bultar i
mentet. Pumpar med motorstorlek ≤ 30 kW kan ha vibrations- fot och flänsar.
dämpare enligt figur 11.
För pumpar med motorstorlek ≥ 37 kW, används en Sylomer®- Fot Fläns
CR, CRI, CRN
platta enligt figur 12. [Nm] [Nm]
1s-5 40 50-60
10-20 50 60-70
32-150 70 70-80
Vibrationsdämpare
Sylomer®-platta
TM04 1692 1008
Varning
Vid pumpning av heta vätskor ska åtgärder vidtas
för att säkerställa att personer inte kan komma i
kontakt med heta ytor.
I figur 13 visas de pumpdelar som blir lika varma som den pum-
pade vätskan.
TM04 0361 0608
Pumphuvud
Pumphylsa
Fot
299
6.6 Flänskrafter och vridmoment
Svenska (SE)
Om inte alla laster når det högsta tillåtna värde som anges i tabel-
lerna nedan, kan ett av dessa värden överskrida den normala
gränsen. Kontakta Grundfos för mer information.
Y-riktning: Inlopp/utlopp
Z-riktning: Pumpstammens riktning
X-riktning: 90 ° från inlopp/utlopp
Krafter
CR, CRI, CRN
Y-riktning
X-riktning
Z-riktning
Fläns, DN
Kraft,
Kraft,
Kraft,
[mm]
[N]
[N]
[N]
Vridmoment
CR, CRI, CRN
Vridmoment,
Vridmoment,
Vridmoment,
Y-riktning
X-riktning
Z-riktning
Fläns, DN
[mm]
[Nm]
[Nm]
[Nm]
300
7. Elanslutning 7.2 3-fasanslutning
Svenska (SE)
Elektrisk anslutning ska utföras av behörig elektriker i enlighet
med lokala bestämmelser. Nätspänning [V]
7.1 Kabelgenomföring/skruvanslutning
301
7.3 1-fasanslutning 7.4 Placering av kopplingsbox
Svenska (SE)
Varning
motorn.
Vi rekommenderar att alla andra motorer skyddas mot spännings-
toppar högre än 1 200 V vid 2 000 V/µsec.
Ovanstående problem (förhöjd ljudnivå och skadliga spännings-
Fig. 18 Anslutning, "hög spänning", 0,37 - 0,75 kW toppar) kan elimineras med ett LC-filter mellan frekvensomfor-
mare och motor.
Kontakta leverantören av frekvensomvandlaren eller motorn för
mer information.
7.5.3 Andra motorfabrikat än de som levereras av Grundfos
Vänligen kontakta Grundfos eller motortillverkaren.
TM04 0345 0608
302
8. Igångkörning 8.1 Inkörning av axeltätning
Svenska (SE)
Tätningsytorna smörjs av den pumpade vätskan, vilket innebär
Starta inte pumpen förrän den fyllts med vätska
att det kan finnas ett visst mått av läckage från axeltätningen.
Varning och avluftats. Om pumpen körs torr kan pumpla-
ger och axeltätning skadas. När pumpen startas för första gången, eller när en ny axeltätning
monterats, krävs det en viss inkörningsperiod innan läckaget
reduceras till acceptabel nivå. Den tid som krävs för detta beror
på driftsförhållandena, det vill säga varje gång driftsförhållandena
9. Underhåll
303
10. Frostskydd
Svenska (SE)
Pumpar som står stilla när frostrisk föreligger måste tömmas för
att inte frysa sönder.
Töm pumpen genom att lossa avluftningsskruven i pumphuvudet
och ta bort avtappningspluggen i foten.
Varning
Beakta avluftningshålets riktning och säkerställ
att utströmmande vätska inte orsakar personska-
dor eller skador på motorn eller andra komponen-
ter. I varmvatteninstallationer måste risken för
skållningsskador beaktas särskilt.
Dra inte åt avluftningsskruven och sätt inte tillbaka avtappnings-
pluggen förrän pumpen ska användas igen.
CR, CRI, CRN 1s till 5
Skruva ut bypassventilen till stoppet innan dräneringspluggen
sätts tillbaka. Se figur 22.
Avtappningsplugg
Bypassventil
TM01 1243 4097
11. Service
Vi rekommenderar att pumpar med motorer på 7,5 kW och större
motorer repareras på pumpens installationsplats. Erforderlig lyft-
utrustning måste finnas på plats.
304
12. Felsökning
Svenska (SE)
Varning
Kontrollera att spänningsförsörjningen till pumpen är bruten och säkerställ att den inte kan kopplas på av misstag
innan kopplingsboxens lock avlägsnas och innan pumpen tas bort/demonteras.
13. Destruktion
Den här produkten och dess beståndsdelar ska avfallshanteras
på ett miljöanpassat sätt.
1. Använd offentliga eller privata återvinningsstationer.
2. Om detta inte är möjligt, kontakta närmaste Grundfosbolag
eller -serviceverkstad.
305
Türkçe (TR) Montaj ve kullanım kılavuzu
Türkçe (TR)
İÇİNDEKİLER Uyarı
Sayfa Bu güvenlik talimatlarına uyulmaması, kişisel
1. Bu dokümanda kullanılan semboller 306 yaralanmalara neden olabilir.
2. Kullanım 306
Uyarı
3. Tip tanımlaması 307
Bu talimatlara uyulmazsa, ciddi kişisel yaralanma
3.1 CR, CRI, CRN 1s, 1, 3, 5, 10, 15 ve 20 için tip
anahtarı veya ölüm riskiyle birlikte elektrik çarpmasına
307
neden olabilir.
3.2 CR, CRN 32, 45, 64, 90, 120 ve 150 tip anahtarı 307
4. Uygulama Alanları 307 Bu güvenlik uyarılarının dikkate alınmaması,
5. Teknik bilgiler 307 İkaz cihazların arızalanmasına veya hasar görmesine
5.1 Ortam sıcaklığı ve yükseklik 307 neden olabilir.
5.2 Sıvı sıcaklığı 308
5.3 Salmastra için izin verilen maksimum çalışma basıncı İşi kolaylaştıran ve güvenli kullanım sağlayan
Not
ve sıvı sıcaklığı 308 notlar veya talimatlar.
5.4 Minimum giriş basıncı 308
5.5 Minimum giriş basıncı 309 2. Kullanım
5.6 Minimum debi 309 Tüm pompayı motor ile kaldırırken aşağıdaki talimatları izleyin:
5.7 Elektrik bilgileri 309
• Motor gücü 0,37 - 5,5 kW arası pompalar:
5.8 Başlatma ve durdurma sıklığı 309
Pompayı motor flanşında askı veya benzeri bir alet ile kaldırın.
5.9 Boyutlar ve ağırlıklar 309
5.10 Ses basıncı seviyesi 309 • Motor gücü 7,5 - 22 kW arası pompalar:
Pompayı mapa yardımı ile kaldırın.
6. Kurulum 309
6.1 Zemin • Motor gücü 30-45 kW arası pompalar:
310
Pompayı motor flanşındaki kaldırma braketleriyle kaldırın.
6.2 Titreşim sönümleme 311
6.3 Açık alana montaj 311 • Motor gücü 55-75 kW arası pompalar:
6.4 Sıcak yüzeyler 311 Pompayı motor tarafındaki mapa yardımı ile kaldırın.
6.5 Torklar 311
6.6 Flanş kuvvetleri ve torkları 312
7. Elektrik bağlantısı 313
7.1 Kablo girişi/vidalı bağlantı 313
7.2 Üç fazlı bağlantı 313
7.3 Tek fazlı bağlantı 314
7.4 Klemens kutusunun konumları 314
7.5 Frekans konvertörünün kullanımı 314
8. Başlatma 315
TM04 0339 0608
306
3. Tip tanımlaması 5. Teknik bilgiler
Türkçe (TR)
3.1 CR, CRI, CRN 1s, 1, 3, 5, 10, 15 ve 20 için tip 5.1 Ortam sıcaklığı ve yükseklik
anahtarı
Deniz
Örnek CR 3- 10 X- X- X- X- XXXX Maksimum seviyesinden
Motor Motorun
Motor ortam itibaren
Tip aralığı: CR, CRI, CRN gücü verimlilik
markası sıcaklığı maksimum
m3/saat cinsinden nominal debi [kW] sınıfı
[°C] yükseklik
Çark sayısı [m]
Pompa versiyonu kodu Grundfos
0,37 - 0,55 - +40 1000
Boru bağlantısı kodu MG
Salmastra kodu 70
60
4. Uygulama Alanları 50
307
5.2 Sıvı sıcaklığı 5.4 Minimum giriş basıncı
Türkçe (TR)
p [bar]
35 Hv
30
25 Şekil 4 CR pompasına sahip açık sistemin şematik
H H H H H
20 Q Q Q HQQE/V Q B görünümü
15 Q Q Q Q Q
308
5.5 Minimum giriş basıncı
Adım İşlem
Türkçe (TR)
Sayfa 321’deki tabloda izin verilen maksimum giriş basıncı
görülmektedir. Fakat gerçek giriş basıncı + maksimum pompa 2 Bu bilgiler, sayfa 322'de
basıncı (debisiz) her zaman şek. A'da belirtilen değerlerden belirtilmiştir:
düşük olmalıdır, sayfa 320. • porttan porta uzunluklar
6. Kurulum 6
Pompa, cıvatalarla taban plakasındaki deliklere doğru yatay, düz Montajda aşağıdaki
ve sağlam bir kaideye oturtulmalıdır. Pompayı monte ederken, özelliklerden biri mevcutsa
pompaya zarar vermemek için aşağıdaki prosedürü uygulayın. pompanın yakınına bir vakum
vanası yerleştirin:
Adım İşlem • Tahliye borusu pompadan
aşağı doğru iniyor.
TM02 0115 3800
309
6.1 Zemin
Türkçe (TR)
mpompa × 1,5
TM04 0342 0608
hf =
Lf × Bf × δbeton
310
6.2 Titreşim sönümleme 6.5 Torklar
Türkçe (TR)
Titreşim tamponları kullanılacaksa, tamponlar kaide altına monte Tabloda, taban ve flanşlardaki cıvatalar için tavsiye edilen torklar
edilmelidir. Motor boyutu ≤ 30 kW olan pompalarda, titreşim görülmektedir.
tamponları şekil 11'de gösterildiği gibi kullanılabilir.
Motor boyutu ≥ 37 kW olan pompalar için şekil 12'de gösterildiği Taban Flanş
CR, CRI, CRN
gibi bir Sylomer® plaka kullanın. [Nm] [Nm]
1s-5 40 50-60
10-20 50 60-70
32-150 70 70-80
Titreşim tamponları
Sylomer® plaka
TM04 1692 1008
Uyarı
Sıcak sıvıların transferi sırasında ortamda
bulunan kişilerin sıcak yüzeylerle temas
etmemesi için gerekli önlemler alınmalı ve
dikkatli olunmalıdır.
Şekil 13'te hangi pompa parçalarının pompalanan sıvı kadar
sıcak olacağı gösterilmiştir.
TM04 0361 0608
Pompa kafası
Pompa gömleği
Taban
311
6.6 Flanş kuvvetleri ve torkları
Türkçe (TR)
Y yönü: Giriş/çıkış
Z yönü: Çark grubu yönü
X yönü: Giriş/çıkıştan 90 °
Kuvvetler
CR, CRI, CRN
Flanş, DN
Kuvvet,
Kuvvet,
Kuvvet,
Y yönü
X yönü
Z yönü
[mm]
[N]
[N]
[N]
Torklar
CR, CRI, CRN
Flanş, DN
Y yönü
X yönü
Z yönü
Tork,
Tork,
Tork,
[mm]
[Nm]
[Nm]
[Nm]
312
7. Elektrik bağlantısı 7.2 Üç fazlı bağlantı
Türkçe (TR)
Elektrik bağlantıları yerel yönetmeliklere uygun olarak yetkili bir
elektrik teknisyeni tarafından yapılmalıdır. Şebeke voltajı [V]
313
7.3 Tek fazlı bağlantı 7.4 Klemens kutusunun konumları
Türkçe (TR)
314
8. Başlatma 8.1 Salmastranın çalıştırılması
Türkçe (TR)
Salmastranın sızdırmazlık yüzleri pompa sıvısı ile yağlanır.
Suyla doldurulup havası alınmadan pompayı
Bu durum, salmastrada belirli bir miktar sızıntı meydana
İkaz başlatmayın. Pompa kuru çalışırsa, pompa getirebilir.
yatakları ve salmastra hasar görebilir.
Pompa ilk defa başlatıldığında veya yeni bir salmastra
takıldığında, sızıntının makul bir seviyeye inmesi için
salmastranın belirli bir süre çalıştırılması gerekir. Bu sürenin
9. Bakım
315
10. Donmaya karşı koruma
Türkçe (TR)
Uyarı
Hava purjörünün yönüne dikkat edin ve sızan
suyun insanları yaralamayacağından veya motora
ve diğer parçalara hasar vermeyeceğinden emin
olun.
Sıcak su kurulumlarında, sıcak su yanığından
kaynaklanacak yaralanma risklerine özellikle
dikkat edin.
Pompa tekrar kullanılana kadar hava purjörünü sıkmayın ve
tahliye tapasını yerine takmayın.
CR, CRI, CRN 1s - 5
Tabandaki tahliye tapasını geri takmadan önce, bypass vanasını
durana kadar sıkın. Bkz. şek. 22.
Tahliye tapası
Bypass vanası
TM01 1243 4097
11. Servis
7,5 kW ve üzeri güce sahip motorlu pompaları pompa sahasında
onarmanızı tavsiye ederiz. Gerekli kaldırma ekipmanları mutlaka
olmalıdır.
316
12. Arıza tespiti
Türkçe (TR)
Uyarı
Terminal kutusunun kapağını çıkarmadan ve pompayı sökmeden/dağıtmadan önce güç kaynağının kapatıldığından
ve kazara açılmayacağından emin olun.
Değişime tabidir.
317
Appendix
318
NPSH
Appendix
TM02 7125 2703 TM01 9884 3801 TM01 9883 3300 TM01 9882 3801 TM02 7387 3403
TM01 1936 0899 TM01 1935 0899 TM01 1934 0899 TM02 7127 2703 TM02 7126 2703
1
TM03 8765 2507 TM03 8764 2507 TM01 1937 0899
319
Appendix
Fig. A
Appendix
320
Fig. B
Appendix
Maximum inlet pressure for CR, CRI and CRN
50 Hz 60 Hz
CR, CRN 32
CR, CRN 32-1-1 → CR, CRN 32-4 4 bar CR, CRN 32-1-1 → CR, CRN 32-2 4 bar
CR, CRN 32-5-2 → CR, CRN 32-10 10 bar CR, CRN 32-3-2 → CR, CRN 32-6 10 bar
CR, CRN 32-11-2 → CR, CRN 32-14 15 bar CR, CRN 32-7-2 → CR, CRN 32-10-2 15 bar
CR, CRN 45
CR, CRN 45-1-1 → CR, CRN 45-2 4 bar CR, CRN 45-1-1 → CR, CRN 45-1 4 bar
CR, CRN 45-3-2 → CR, CRN 45-5 10 bar CR, CRN 45-2-2 → CR, CRN 45-3 10 bar
CR, CRN 45-6-2 → CR, CRN 45-13-2 15 bar CR, CRN 45-4-2 → CR, CRN 45-7 15 bar
CR, CRN 64
CR, CRN 64-1-1 → CR, CRN 64-2-2 4 bar CR, CRN 64-1-1 4 bar
CR, CRN 64-2-1 → CR, CRN 64-4-2 10 bar CR, CRN 64-1 → CR, CRN 64-2-1 10 bar
CR, CRN 64-4-1 → CR, CRN 64-8-1 15 bar CR, CRN 64-2 → CR, CRN 64-5-2 15 bar
CR, CRN 90
CR, CRN 90-1-1 → CR, CRN 90-1 4 bar CR, CRN 90-1-1 → CR, CRN 90-2-2 10 bar
CR, CRN 90-2-2 → CR, CRN 90-3-2 10 bar CR, CRN 90-2-1 → CR, CRN 90-4-2 15 bar
CR, CRN 90-3 → CR, CRN 90-6 15 bar
321
Appendix
322
Fig. C
D D DN 4xø
D
Pump
H
H
H
H
Type L1 B1
L L L D L L
L2 B2
L H D L H D L H D L H D L H L1 L2 B1 B2 ∅
[mm] [mm] [Rp] [mm] [mm] [mm] [mm] [mm] [mm] [mm] [mm] [G] [mm] [mm] DN [mm] [mm] [mm] [mm] [mm]
CRI, CRN 1s - - - 210 50 42.2 162 50 30 228 50 2 250 75 25/32 100 150 180 220 13
CRI, CRN 1 - - - 210 50 42.2 162 50 30 228 50 2 250 75 25/32 100 150 180 220 13
CRI, CRN 3 - - - 210 50 42.2 162 50 30 228 50 2 250 75 25/32 100 150 180 220 13
CRI, CRN 5 - - - 210 50 42.2 162 50 30 228 50 2 250 75 25/32 100 150 180 220 13
CRI, CRN 10 - - - 261 80 60.1 202 80 50 - - - 280 80 40 130 200 215 248 13
CRI, CRN 15 - - - 261 90 60.1 202 90 50 - - - 300 90 50 130 200 215 248 13
CRI, CRN 20 - - - 261 90 60.1 202 90 50 - - - 300 90 50 130 200 215 248 13
Appendix
Airborne noise emitted by pumps with motors fitted by Grundfos
50 Hz 60 Hz
Motor
[kW] LpA LpA
[dB(A)] [dB(A)]
0.37 50 55
0.55 50 53
0.75 50 54
1.1 52 57
1.5 54 59
2.2 54 59
3.0 55 60
4.0 62 66
5.5 60 65
7.5 60 65
11 60 65
15 60 65
18.5 60 65
22 66 70
30 71 75
37 71 75
45 71 75
55 71 75
75 73 77
Fig. E
tm Hv
(°C) (m)
190 126
180 100
170 79
160 62
150 45
40
140 35
30
130
25
120 20
110 15
12
100 10
8,0
90
6,0
80 5,0
4,0
70 3,0
60 2,0
1,5
50
1,0
40 0,8
0,6
30 0,4
TM02 7445 3503
0,3
20
0,2
10
0,1
0
323
CR, CRI, CRN 1s, 1, 3 and 5
Appendix
Fig. F
A B
M6 - 13 Nm
M8 - 31 Nm
M10 - 62 Nm
M5 - 2.5 Nm
x
324
E
C
A
Fig. G
M8 - 31 Nm
M6 - 13 Nm
M10 - 62 Nm
CR, CRI, CRN 10, 15 and 20
F
D
B
M5 - 2.5 Nm
325
Appendix
Appendix
C
B
A
326
Fig. H
CR, CRN 32, 45, 64, 90
1
2
1.7 mm
F
D
B
327
Appendix
Appendix
Designation
Pos.
GB BG CZ DK DE EE
1 Adapter flange Преходен фланец Mezipříruba Mellemflange Zwischenflansch Ülemineku äärik
1a Motor stool Столче на двигателя Lucernaty motoru Mellemstykke Laterne Mootoripukk
2 Pump head Глава на помпата Hlava čerpadla Topstykke Kopfstück Pumba pea
3 Chamber, top Горна камера Horní článek Kammer, øverste Oberste Kammer Ülemine vahepesa
Článek bez mezerového
3a Chamber without neck ring Камера без пръстен Kammer uden tætningsring Kammer ohne Spaltring Tihendusrõngata vahepesa
kroužku
4 Chamber complete Камера - комплект Kompletní článek Kammer komplet Kammer komplett Komplektne vahepesa
Камера с лагерен
4a Chamber with bearing ring Článek s kroužkem ložiska Kammer med lejering Kammer mit Lagerring Laagriga vahepesa
пръстен
5a Chamber complete Камера - комплект Kompletní článek Kammer komplet Kammer komplett Komplektne vahepesa
6 Base Основа Patka Fodstykke Fußstück Alus
6a Stop pin Шплент Zarážkový kolík Rotationslås Sperrzapfen Lukustustihvt
Водеща плоча за Führungsplatte für
6d Guide plate for base Vodicí deska patky Styreplade til fodstykke Aluse juhtplaat
основата Fußstück
6g Bearing ring Ролков лагер Kroužek ložiska Lejering Lagerring Alumine laager
Предпазен капак на
7 Coupling guard Kryt spojky Skærm Schutzschirm Ühendusmuhvi kate
съединителят
7a Screw Винт Šroub Skrue Schraube Kruvi
8 Coupling complete Съединител - комплект Kompletní spojka Kobling komplet Kupplung komplett Komplektne ühendusmuhv
9 Screw Винт Šroub Skrue Schraube Kruvi
10 Shaft pin Шплент на вала Válcový kolík Stift Zylinderstift Võlli tihvt
10a Coupling half
12 Flange (oval)
18 Air vent screw Винт за обезвъздушаване Odvzdušňovací šroub Luftskrue Entlüftungsschraube Õhutusventiil
19 Pipe plug Тапа на тръбата Zátka Rørprop Stopfen Ääriku kork
21 Plug Пробка Zátka Prop Stopfen Kork
23 Plug Пробка Zátka Prop Stopfen Kork
25 Drain plug Пробка за дрениране Vypouštěcí zátka Tømmeprop Entleerungsstopfen Tühjendusava kork
26 Staybolt Шпилка Rozpěrný šroub Støttebolt Stehbolzen Distantspolt
26a Strap Лента Stahovací pás Spændebånd Spannband Klamber
26b Screw Винт Šroub Skrue Schraube Kruvi
26c Washer Шайба Podložka Spændeskive Unterlegscheibe Seib
28 Screw Винт Šroub Skrue Schraube Kruvi
28a Screw Винт Šroub Skrue Schraube Kruvi
31 Screw Винт Šroub Skrue Schraube Kruvi
32 Washer
32a Washer Шайба Podložka Spændeskive Unterlegscheibe Seib
35 Screw Винт Šroub Skrue Schraube Kruvi
36 Nut Гайка Matice Møtrik Mutter Mutter
36a Nut Гайка Matice Møtrik Mutter Mutter
37 O-ring/gasket О-пръстен/уплътнение O-kroužek/těsnicí kroužek O-ring/pakning O-Ring/Dichtung O-ring/tihend
38 O-ring О-пръстен O-kroužek O-ring O-Ring O-ring
38a O-ring О-пръстен O-kroužek O-ring O-Ring O-ring
39 Gasket
44 Inlet part complete Входяща част - комплект Kompletní vtoková část Indløbsdel komplet Einlaufteil komplett Komplektne imiosa
44a Inlet part upper
44b Inlet part lower
45 Neck ring Пръстен Mezerový kroužek Tætningsring Spaltring Tihendusrõngas
Kompletní mezerový
45a Neck ring complete Пръстен - комплект Tætningsring komplet Spaltring komplett Tihendusrõngas
kroužek
47 Bearing ring Търкалящ лагер Kroužek ložiska Lejering Lagerring Laager
Търкалящ лагер с винт за
47a Bearing with driver Ložisko s unašečem Leje med medbringer Lager mit Mitnehmer Juhikuga vahelaager
застопоряване
47b Bearing ring, rotating Търкалящ лагер - въртящ Kroužek ložiska otočný Lejering, roterende Lagerring, rotierend Laager, pöörlev
47c Bush Лагерна втулка Pouzdro Bøsning Buchse Puks
47d Retaining ring Спирателен пръстен Přídržný kroužek Låsering Haltering Lukustusrõngas
47e Retaining ring Спирателен пръстен Přídržný kroužek Låsering Haltering Lukustusrõngas
Гайка на разрязания
48 Split cone nut Matice upínacího pouzdra Møtrik for klembøsning Mutter für Klemmbuchse Lõhismutter
конус
49 Impeller Работно колело Oběžné kolo Løber Laufrad Tööratas
49a Impeller Работно колело Oběžné kolo Løber Laufrad Tööratas
49b Split cone Разрязан конус Upínací pouzdro Klembøsning Klemmbuchse Survepuks
49c Wear ring Износващ се пръстен Těsnicí kruh Slidring Verschleißring Kulutusrõngas
Discharge part/top guide
50a
vanes
51 Pump shaft Вал на помпата Hřídel čerpadla Pumpeaksel Pumpenwelle Pumba võll
55 Sleeve Външна втулка Vnější plášt’ Svøb Mantel Kattesärk
56 Base plate Основна плоча Základová deska Fodplade Grundplatte Alusplaat
56a Base plate Основна плоча Základová deska Fodplade Grundplatte Alusplaat
56c Screw Винт Šroub Skrue Schraube Kruvi
56d Washer Шайба Podložka Spændeskive Unterlegscheibe Seib
57 O-ring О-пръсетн O-kroužek O-ring O-Ring O-ring
Halter für
58 Seal carrier Носач на уплътнението Unašeč ucpávky Holder for akseltætning Tihendi kandur
Wellenabdichtung
58a Screw Винт Šroub Skrue Schraube Kruvi
60 Spring Пружина Pružina Fjeder Feder Vedru
61 Seal driver Водач Unašeč Medbringer Mitnehmer Võllitihendi juhik
62 Stop ring Зегерка Dorazový kroužek Stopring Stopring Lukustusrõngas
64 Spacing pipe Дистанционна тръба Distanční pouzdro Afstandsbøsning Distanzhülse Distantspuks
64a Spacing pipe Дистанционна тръба Distanční pouzdro Afstandsbøsning Distanzhülse Distantspuks
64b Spacing pipe
64c Clamp, splined Шлицова клема Drážková spona Spændestykke, spline Spannstück, Vielnut Soontega puks
64d Spacing pipe Дистанционна тръба Distanční pouzdro Afstandsbøsning Distanzhülse Distantspuks
Přídržka mezerového
65 Neck ring retainer Държач на пръстена Holder for tætningsring Halter für Spaltring Tihendusrõnga klamber
kroužku
66 Washer Шайба Podložka Spændeskive Unterlegscheibe Seib
66a Washer Шайба Podložka Spændeskive Unterlegscheibe Seib
328
Appendix
Designation
Pos.
GB BG CZ DK DE EE
66b Lock washer Контра - шайба Pojistná podložka Låseskive Sicherungsblech Vedruseib
67 Nut/screw Гайка/Винт Matice/Šroub Møtrik/Skrue Mutter/Schraube Mutter/Kruvi
69 Spacing pipe Дистанционна тръба Distanční pouzdro Afstandsbøsning Distanzhülse Distantspuks
76 Nameplate set Табела - комплект Sada štítků Skiltesæt Schildersatz Pumba sildik
76a Rivet
77 Pump head cover
100 O-ring О-пръстен O-kroužek O-ring O-Ring O-ring
105 Shaft seal Уплътнение на вала Hřídelová ucpávka Akseltætning Wellenabdichtung Võllitihend
201 Flange Фланец Příruba Flange Flansch Äärik
203 Retaining ring Спирателен пръстен Přídržný kroužek Låsering Haltering Lukustusrõngas
Designation
Pos.
GR ES FR HR IT
1 Φλάντζα προσαρμογής Brida acoplamiento Bride d’adaptation međuprirubnica Flangie adattatrici
1a Στήριγμα κινητήρα Acoplamiento Lanterne moteur međukomad Lanterna del motore
2 Κεφαλή αντλίας Cabezal bomba Tête de pompe glava crpke Testa pompa
3 Θάλαμος, άνω Cámara superior Chambre supérieure gornja komora Camera superiore
Θάλαμος χωρίς δακτύλιο Chambre sans bague komora bez rascijepljenog
3a Cámara sin anillo de junta Camera senza collarino
λαιμού d’étanchéité prstena
4 Θάλαμος πλήρης Cámara completa Chambre complète kompletna komora Camera completa
4a Θάλαμος με δακτύλιο εδράνου Cámara con anillo cojinete Chambre avec bague de palier komora s ležajnim prstenom Camera con cuscinetto
5a Θάλαμος πλήρης Cámara completa Chambre complète kompletna komora Camera completa
6 Βάση Base Pied de pompe nožni dio Base
6a Πείρος συγκράτησης Pasador tope Goupille d’arrêt zatik Molla di arresto
6d Πλάκα οδηγός γιά τη βάση Placa guía para base Plaque pour pied de pompe vodilica za nožni dio Guida per basamento
6g Δακτύλιος εδράνου Anillo cojinete Joint de palier prsten ležaja Cuscinetto
7 Προφυλακτήρας συνδέσμου Protector acoplamiento Protège-accouplement zaštita spojke Giunti di protezione
7a Κοχλίας Tornillo Vis vijak Vite
8 Σύνδεσμος πλήρης Acoplamiento completo Accouplement complet spojka kompletna Giunto completo
9 Κοχλίας Tornillo Vis vijak Vite
10 Πείρος άξονα Pasador eje Goupille cylindrique zatik vratila Molla albero
18 Τάπα εξαερισμού Tornillo purga aire Vis de purge odzračni vijak Vite della ventola
19 Τάπα σωλήνα Tapón tubería Bouchon čep Tappo
21 Τάπα Tapón Bouchon čep Tappo
23 Τάπα Tapón Bouchon čep Tappo
25 Τάπα αποστράγγισης Tapón purga Bouchon de vidange čep za pražnjenje Tappo spurgo
26 Κοχλίες συγκράτησης Espárrago sujeción Goujon sprežni vijak Tiranti
26a Τιράντα Tirante Tirant d’assemblage zatezna traka Tirante
26b Κοχλίας Tornillo Vis vijak Vite
26c Ροδέλα Arandela Rondelle podložna pločica Rondella
28 Κοχλίας Tornillo Vis vijak Vite
28a Κοχλίας Tornillo Vis vijak Vite
31 Κοχλίας Tornillo Vis vijak Vite
32a Ροδέλα Arandela Rondelle podložna pločica Rondella
35 Κοχλίας Tornillo Vis vijak Vite
36 Περικόχλιο Tuerca Ecrou matica Dado
36a Περικόχλιο Tuerca Ecrou matica Dado
37 Δακτύλιος-Ο/παρέμβυσμα Junta tórica/junta Joint/bague O-prsten/brtva O ring/guranizione
38 Δακτύλιος-Ο Junta tórica Joint O-prsten O ring
38a Δακτύλιος-Ο Junta tórica Joint O-prsten O ring
44 Πλήρες εσωτερικό μέρος Parte aspiración completa Partie aspiration complète ulazni dio kompletan Parte interna completa
45 Δακτύλιος λαιμού Anillo tope Bague d’étanchéité rascijepljeni prsten Collarino
45a Δακτύλιος λαιμού πλήρης Anillo tope completo Bague d’étanchéité complète rascijepljeni prsten kompletan Colalrino completo
47 Δακτύλιος εδράνου Anillo cojinete Bague de palier prsten ležaja Cuscinetto
47a Εδρανο με οδηγό Cojinete con engranaje Bague de palier avec driver prsten ležaja sa zahvatnikom Cuscinetto con guida
Δακτύλιος εδράνου
47b Anillo cojinete giratorio Bague de palier tournante prsten ležaja, rotirajući Cuscinetto rotante
στρεφόμενος
47c Φωλιά Manguito Douille tuljak Boccola
47d Δακτύλιος συγκράτησης Anillo cierre Bague de blocage pridržni prsten Anello di arresto
47e Δακτύλιος συγκράτησης Anillo cierre Bague de blocage pridržni prsten Anello di arresto
Περικόχλιο διαιρούμενου
48 Tuerca casquillo cónico Ecrou de cône de serrage matica za konusni prsten Dado bussola conica
κώνου
49 Πτερωτή Impulsor Roue rotor Girante
49a Πτερωτή Impulsor Roue rotor Girante
49b Διαιρούμενος κώνος Casquillo cónico Cône de serrage konusni prsten Bussola conica
49c Δακτύλιος φθοράς Anillo desgaste Bague d’usure potrošni prsten Anello di usura
51 Αξονας αντλίας Eje bomba Arbre de pompe vratilo crpke Albero pompa
55 Εξωτερικό χιτώνιο Camisa exterior Chemise plašt Camicia esterna
56 Πλάκα βάσης Placa base Plaque de base osnovna ploča Basamento
56a Πλάκα βάσης Placa base Plaque de base osnovna ploča Basamento
56c Κοχλίας Tornillo Vis vijak Vite
56d Ροδέλα Arandela Rondelle podložna pločica Rondella
57 Δακτύλιος-Ο Junta tórica Joint O-prsten O ring
58 Φορέας στυπιοθλίπτη Soporte cierre Toc d’entraînement držač brtve Porta tenuta
58a Κοχλίας Tornillo Vis vijak Vite
60 Ελατήριο Muelle Ressort opruga Molla
61 Οδηγός στεγανοποιητικού Guía de cierre Toc d’entrainement zahvatnik Guida guarnizione
62 Τερματικός δακτύλιος anillo de tope Bague d’arrêt zaustavni prsten Anello di arresto
64 Αποστάτης Casquillo espaciador Douille d’entretoise odstojnik Tubo distanziale
64a Αποστάτης Casquillo espaciador Douille d’entretoise odstojnik Tubo distanziale
64c Στεφάνη με εγκοπές Casquillo ranurado Pièce de serrage zatezni komad, višeutorni Giunto
64d Αποστάτης Casquillo espaciador Douille entretoise odstojnik Tubo distanziale
65 Στήριγμα δακτυλίου λαιμού Retén anillo junta Support pour bague d’étanchéité držač za rascijepljeni prsten Fermo per collarino
329
Appendix
Designation
Pos.
GR ES FR HR IT
66 Ροδέλα Arandela Rondelle podložna pločica Rondella
66a Ροδέλα Arandela Rondelle podložna pločica Rondella
66b Συγκράτηση ροδέλας Arandela cierre Rondelle de blocage sigurnosna pločica Blocco per rondella
67 Περικόχλιο/Κοχλίας Tuerca/Tornillo Ecrou/Vis matica/vijak Dado/Vite
69 Αποστάτης Casquillo espaciador Douille entretoise odstojnik Tubo distanziale
76 Σετ πινακίδας Juego placa identificación Plaque d’identification natpisne pločice Targhetta
100 Δακτύλιος-Ο Junta tórica Joint O-prsten O ring
105 Στυπιοθλίπτης Cierre Garniture mécanique brtva vratila Tenuta meccanica
201 Φλάντζα Brida Bride prirubnica Flangia
203 Δακτύλιος συγκράτησης Anillo cierre Bague de blocage pridržni prsten Blocca flangia
Designation
Pos.
KZ LT HU NL UA
1 Аралық фланец Tarpinis flanšas csatlakozó karima Adapterflens Перехідник
1a Шам Variklio atrama motortartó közdarab Lantaarnstuk Опора електродвигуна
2 Сорғының жоғарғы бөлігі Siurblio galvutė szivattyúfej Pompkop Головна частина насоса
3 Жоғарғы камера Viršutinė kamera felső kamra Bovenste kamer Камера, верх
Камера без
3a Саңылаусыз тығыздау камерасы Kamera be kaklelio žiedo közkamra résgyűrű nélkül Kamer zonder spaltring
ущільнювального кільця
4 Жинақталған камера Kamera komplett közkamra Kamer compleet Набір камер
Камера з кільцем
4a Подшипник сақинасы бар камера Kamera su guolio žiedu csapágyas közkamra Kamer met lager
підшипника
5a Жинақталған камера Kamera komplett közkamra Kamer compleet Набір камер
6 Табаны Korpusas talp Voetstuk Основа
6a Ұстағыш штифт Fiksatorius rögzítő tüske Anti rotatie stift Штифт зупинки
Тіреулердің/аяқтардың бағыттағыш Направляюча плита для
6d Korpuso centravimo plokštelė áramlásrendező tányér Geleideplaat voor voetstuk
плитасы основи
6g Подшипник сақина Atraminis guolis csapágygyűrű Lager Кільце опори
7 Қорғағыш қаптама Movos apsauga tengelykapcsoló burkolat Koppeling beschermer Захисний кожух
7a Винт Varžtas csavar Schroef Гвинт
8 Жинақталған муфта Visa mova komplett tengelykapcsoló Koppeling compleet Муфта в сборі
9 Винт Varžtas csavar Schroef Гвинт
10 Цилиндрлі штифт Veleno kaištis tengelyretesz Stift Штифт валу
Гвинт вентиляційного
18 Желдету саңылауының винті Oro išleidimo angos varžtas légtelenítő csavar Ontluchtings-schroef
клапана
19 Тығын Vamzdžio kamštelis karima zárócsavar Plug Трубна заглушка
21 Тығын Kamštelis zárócsavar Plug Кабельний ввід
23 Тығын Kamštelis zárócsavar Plug Кабельний ввід
25 Ағызу саңылауының тығыны Skysčio išleidimo kamštelis ürítőcsavar Aftapplug Пробка дренажного отвору
26 Тарту бұрандасы Sąvarža összefogó rúd Trekstag Шпилька
26a Тартқыш бау Juostinė apkaba összefogó pánt Spanband Стрічка
26b Винт Varžtas csavar Schroef Гвинт
26c Шайба Poveržlė távtartó Sluitring Шайба
28 Винт Varžtas csavar Schroef Гвинт
28a Винт Varžtas csavar Schroef Гвинт
31 Винт Varžtas csavar Schroef Гвинт
32a Шайба Poveržlė távtartó Sluitring Шайба
35 Винт Varžtas csavar Schroef Гвинт
36 Гайка Veržlė csavaranya Moer Гайка
36a Гайка Veržlė csavaranya Moer Гайка
Дөңгелек қималы тығыздағыш сақина/ Ущільнювальне
37 Žiedas/tarpiklis O-gyűrű/tömítés O-ring pakking
аралық қабат кільце/прокладка
38 Дөңгелек қималы тығыздағыш сақина Žiedas O-gyűrű O-ring Ущільнювальне кільце
38a Дөңгелек қималы тығыздағыш сақина Žiedas O-gyűrű O-ring Ущільнювальне кільце
44 Жиналған сорғыш қуыстағы бөлшек Visa įsiurbimo dalis komplett belső rész Inlaatdeel compleet Всмоктуюча частина повна
45 Саңылау тығыздағыш Kakliuko žiedas résgyűrű Spaltring Ущільнювальне кільце
Ущільнювальне кільце
45a Жинақталған саңылау тығыздағыш Visas kakliuko žiedas komplett résgyűrű Spaltring compleet
повне
47 Подшипник сақинасы Guolis csapágygyűrű Lager Кільце опори
47a "Жібі бар" подшипник Įstatoma guolis csapágy, megvezetővel Lager met meenemer Опора з двигуном
Кільце опори, що
47b Подшипниктің айналғыш сақинасы Besisukantis guolis csapágygyűrű, forgórész Lager roterend
обертається
47c Втулка Įvorė persely Bus Втулка
47d Ұстағыш сақина Laikantysis žiedas rögzítő gyűrű Borgring Стопорне кільце
47e Ұстағыш сақина Laikantysis žiedas rögzítő gyűrű Borgring Стопорне кільце
48 Қысқыш втулка гайкасы Skelta kūginė veržlė szorítókúp anya Klembusmoer Гайка для розтискної втулки
49 Жұмыс дөңгелегі Darbaratis járókerék Waaier Робоче колесо
49a Жұмыс дөңгелегі Darbaratis járókerék Waaier Робоче колесо
49b Босату втулкасы Skelta kūginė įvorė szorítókúp Klembus Розтискна втулка
Кільце щілинного
49c Антифрикциялық сақина Dėvėjimosi žiedas kopógyűrű Slijtring
ущільнення
51 Сорғы білігі Siurblio velenas szivattyú tengely Pompas Вал насоса
55 Қаптама Išorinis cilindras köpenycső Mantel Зовнішня втулка
56 Астыңғы плита Korpuso pagrindas alaplap Voetplaat Плита-основа
56a Астыңғы плита Korpuso pagrindas alaplap Voetplaat Плита-основа
56c Винт Varžtas csavar Schroef Гвинт
56d Шайба Poveržlė távtartó Sluitring Шайба
57 Дөңгелек қималы тығыздағыш сақина Žiedas O-gyűrű O-ring Ущільнювальне кільце
58 Білік тығыздағышының негізгі бөлшегі Riebokšlio laikiklis tömítés zárófedél Houder voor asafdichting Тримач ущільнення
58a Винт Varžtas csavar Schroef Гвинт
60 Серіппе Spyruoklė rugó Veer Пружина
61 Бүйірлік тығыздау серіппесі Riebokšlio tarpiklis vezető gyűrű Meenemer Оправлення ущільнення
62 Ұстағыш сақина Fiksavimo žiedas stopgyűrű Stopring Стопорне кільце
64 Аралық втулка Tarpinė įvorė távtartó gyűrű Afstandsbus Втулка
64a Аралық втулка Tarpinė įvorė távtartó gyűrű Afstandsbus Втулка
64c Тісті қысқыш гильза Apkaba, skelta hornyos rögzítógyűrű Spanstuk, splined Шлицевий хомут
64d Аралық втулка Tarpinė įvorė távtartó gyűrű Afstandsbus Втулка
Саңылау тығыздағышының негізгі Фіксатор ущільнювального
65 Kakliuko žiedo laikiklis résgyűrű rögzítő Houder voor spaltring
бөлшегі кільця
330
Appendix
Designation
Pos.
KZ LT HU NL UA
66 Шайба Poveržlė távtartó Sluitring Шайба
66a Шайба Poveržlė távtartó Sluitring Шайба
66b Ұстағыш шайба Fiksuojamoji poveržlė rögzítő alátét Borgring Стопорна шайба
67 Гайка/ винт Fiksuojamoji veržlė/Varžtas csavaranya/csavar Moer/Schroef Гайка/гвинт
69 Аралық втулка Tarpinė įvorė távtartó gyűrű Afstandsbus Втулка
Жинақталған техникалық параметрлері
76 Vardinė plokštelė adattábla készlet Typeplaat set Шилдик насоса
бар фирмалық тақташа
100 Дөңгелек қималы тығыздағыш сақина Žiedas O-gyűrű O-ring Ущільнювальне кільце
105 Білік тығыздағышы Riebokšlis tengelytömítés Asafdichting Торцеве ущільнення валу
201 Фланец Flanšas karima Flens Фланець
203 Ұстағыш сақина Laikantysis žiedas rögzítő gyűrű Borgring Стопорне кільце
Designation
Pos.
PL PT RU RO SK
1 Kołnierz przejściowy Flange do adaptador Промежуточный фланец Flanşa de adaptare Medzipríruba
1a Podstawa silnika Adaptador do motor Фонарь Scaunul motorului Lucerna
2 Głowica pompy Cabeça da bomba Головная часть насоса Capul pompei Horné teleso čerpadla
3 Komora górna Câmara superior Верхняя камера Camera superioară Horná komora
3a Komora bez pierścienia bieżnego Câmara sem aro Камера без щелевого уплотнения Camera fără inel de uzură Komora bez rozperného krúžka
4 Komora, kompletna Câmara completa Камера в сборе Camera completă Kompletná komora
Komora z pierścieniem
4a Câmara com casquilho Камера с подшипниковым кольцом Camera cu lagăr Komora s ložiskovým krúžkom
oporowym łożyska
5a Komora, kompletna Câmara completa Камера в сборе Camera completă Kompletná komora
6 Podstawa Base Основание Baza pompei Spodné teleso čerpadla
6a Kołek ustalający Pino Стопорный штифт Ştift de blocare Uzáverný kolík
Placa de ghidaj pentru Vodiaca platňa pre spodné
6d Dolna płyta kierująca Prato-guia da base Направляющая плита для опоры/лапы
baza pompei teleso
6g Pierścień oporowy łożyska Casquilho Подшипниковое кольцо Lagăr Ložiskový krúžok
7 Osłona sprzęgła Protecção do acoplamento Защитный кожух Apărătoare de protecţie Ochranný kryt spojky
7a Śruba Parafuso Винт Şurub Skrutka
8 Sprzęgło, komplet Acoplamento completo Муфта в сборе Cuplaj complet Kompletná spojka
9 Śruba Parafuso Винт Şurub Skrutka
10 Klin mocujący wału Pino do veio Цилиндрический штифт Ştiftul axului Zylindrický kolík
18 Śruba odpowietrzająca Parafuso de purga Винт вентиляционного отверстия Şurub de aerisire Odvzdušňovacia skrutka
19 Korek Bujão da tubagem Заглушка Dop filetat pentru ţeavă Zátka
21 Korek Bujão da tubagem Заглушка Dop Zátka
23 Korek Bujão da tubagem Заглушка Dop Zátka
25 Korek spustowy Bujão de drenagem Заглушка сливного отверстия Dop (buşon) de golire Vypúšt’acia skrutka
26 Śruba ściągająca Perno Стяжной болт Prezoane St’ahovacie skrutky
26a Ściąg Tirante Стяжная лента Clemă St’ahovacie spony
26b Śruba Parafuso Винт Şurub Skrutka
26c Podkładka Anilha Шайба Şaibă Podložka
28 Śruba Parafuso Винт Şurub Skrutka
28a Śruba Parafuso Винт Şurub Skrutka
31 Śruba Parafuso Śruba Şurub Skrutka
32a Podkładka Anilha Шайба Şaibă Podložka
35 Śruba Parafuso Винт Şurub Skrutka
36 Nakrętka Fêmea Гайка Piuliţă Matica
36a Nakrętka Fêmea Гайка Piuliţă Matica
Уплотнительное кольцо круглого сечения/
37 Pierścień O-ring/uszczelka O-ring/junta O-ring/garnitură O-krúžok/tesnenie
прокладка
38 Pierścień O-ring O-ring Уплотнительное кольцо круглого сечения O-ring O-krúžok
38a Pierścień O-ring O-ring Уплотнительное кольцо круглого сечения O-ring O-krúžok
44 Komora wlotowa Aspiração completa Деталь всасывающей полости в сборе Parte de intrare completă Vtoková čast’ komplet
45 Pierścień bieżny Aro Щелевое уплотнение Inel de etanşare Tesniaci krúžok
45a Pierścień bieżny, obrotowy Aro completo Щелевое уплотнение в сборе Inel de etanşare complet Tesniaci krúžok komplet
47 Pierścień oporowy łożyska Casquilho Кольцо подшипника Lagăr Ložiskový krúžok
47a Łożysko z zabierakiem Casquilho com guia Подшипник с "поводком" Lagăr cu cuzinet Ložisko s unášačom
47b Pierścień łożyskowy Casquilho rotativo Вращающееся кольцо подшипника Lagăr rotativ Ložiskový krúžok, rotujúci
47c Tulejka Manga Втулка Bucşa Medzikrú-žok/vložka
47d Pierścień mocujący Retentor Стопорное кольцо Inel de blocare Držný krúžok
47e Pierścień mocujący Retentor Стопорное кольцо Inel de blocare Držný krúžok
48 Nakrętka tulei stożkowej Fêmea cónica Гайка для зажимной втулки Piuliţă cu strângere pe con Matica so st’ahovacou vložkou
49 Wirnik Impulsor Рабочее колесо Rotor Obežné koleso
49a Wirnik Impulsor Рабочее колесо Rotor Obežné koleso
49b Tuleja stożkowa Casquilho cónico Разжимная втулка Con de strângere St’ahovacia vložka
49c Pierścień bieżny Aro de desgaste Антифрикционное кольцо Inel de uzură Uzatvárací krúžok
51 Wał pompy Veio Вал насоса Axul pompei Hriadeľ
55 Płaszcz Camisa exterior Кожух Manta exterioară Plášt’
56 Podstawa Base Плита-основание Placa de bază Základová platňa
56a Podstawa Base Плита-основание Placa de bază Základová platňa
56c Śruba Parafuso Śruba Şurub Skrutka
56d Podkładka Anilha Шайба Şaibă Podložka
57 Pierścień O-ring O-ring Уплотнительное кольцо круглого сечения O-ring O-krúžok
58 Mocowanie uszczelnienia Suporte do empanque Базовая деталь уплотнения вала Suport pentru etanşare Držiak upchávky hriadeľa
58a Śruba Parafuso Винт Şurub Skrutka
60 Sprężyna Mola Пружина Arc Spružina
Distanţier pentru etanşarea
61 Zabierak Batente do espaçador Пружина торцового уплотнения Unášač
mecanică
62 Pierścień stopowy Mola de encosto Стопорное кольцо Semering Dorazový krúžok
64 Tulejka dystansowa Espaçador Промежуточная втулка Tub distanţier Dištančné puzdro
64a Tulejka dystansowa Espaçador Промежуточная втулка Tub distanţier Dištančná puzdro
64c Tulejka wielowypustowa Casquilho escatelado Шлицевая зажимная гильза Suport canelat Španovací kus, drážkovaný
64d Tulejka dystansowa Espaçador Промежуточная втулка Tub distanţier Dištančné puzdro
65 Tulejka dystansowa Retentor do aro Базовая деталь щелевого уплотнения Suport pentru inelul de Držiak pre tesniaci krúžok
etanşare
331
Appendix
Designation
Pos.
PL PT RU RO SK
66 Podkładka Anilha Шайба Şaibă Podložka
66a Podkładka Anilha Шайба Şaibă Podložka
66b Podkładka zabezpieczająca Anilha retentora Стопорная шайба Şaibă de blocare Zaist’ovací plech
67 Nakrętka/Śruba Fêmea/Parafuso Гайка/Śruba Piuliţă/Şurub Matica/Skrutka
69 Tulejka dystansowa Espaçador Промежуточная втулка Tub distanţier Dištančné puzdro
Фирменная табличка с техническими
76 Tabliczka znamionowa Chapa de identificação Eticheta Štítok čerpadla
параметрами в сборе
100 Pierścień O-ring O-ring Уплотнительное кольцо круглого сечения O-ring O-krúžok
105 Uszczelnienie wału Empanque mecânico Уплотнение вала Etanşare mecanică Upchávka hriadeľa
201 Kołnierz Flange Фланец Flanşa Príruba
203 Pierścień mocujący Anel retentor Стопорное кольцо Inel de blocare Tesniaci krúžok/tesnenie
Designation
Pos.
SI RS FI SE TR
1 Vmesna prirobnica Prirubnica podešavanja Välilaippa Mellanfläns Küçültme flanşı
1a Konzola motorja Oslonac motora Moottorin jalusta Mellanstycke Motor oturağı
2 Glava črpalke Glava pumpe Pumppupää Toppstycke Pompa başı
3 Najvišja stopnja Gornje kućište Pesä/ylin Kammare, övre Bölme, üst
Mallankammare utan
3a Stopnja brez režnega obroča Kućište bez oslonog prstena Pesä, ilman kaularengasta Boyun halkasız bölme
tätningsring
4 Stopnja komplet Kompletno kućište Täydellinen pesä Kammare komplett Komple bölme
4a Stopnja z ležajnim obročem Kućište sa ležišnim prstenom Pesä laakerirenkailla Mellankammare med lager Yatak halkalı bölme
5a Stopnja komplet Kompletno kućište Täydellinen pesä Kammare komplett Komple bölme
6 Podnožje črpalke Element oslonca Jalkakappale Fotstycke Taban
6a Zaporni zatič Zaustavni štift Pidätintappi, lukitustappi Stoppsprint Stop pimi
6d Vodilna plošča za podnožje črpalke Vodeća ploča osnove Ohjauslevy jalustaan Styrplatta till fotstycke Taban için kılavuz plakası
6g Ležajni obroč Prsten kugličnog ležaja Laakerirengas Bottenlager Yatak halkası
7 Zaščitni pokrov Zaštita spojnice Kytkimen suoja Kopplingsskärm Kaplin koruması
7a Vijak Zavrtanj Ruuvi Skruv Vida
8 Sklopka komplet Komplet spojnice Täydellinen kytkin Koppling komplett Komple kaplin
9 Vijak Zavrtanj Ruuvi Skruv Vida
10 Cilindrični zatič Cilindrični štift Akselitappi Cylinderstift Şaft pimi
18 Odzračevalni vijak Zavrtanj za odzračivanje Ilmausruuvi Luftskruv Hava tahliye vidası
19 Čep Žep cevi Putkitulppa Rörpropp Boru tapası
21 Čep Čep Tulppa Propp Tapa
23 Čep Čep Tulppa Propp Tapa
25 Izpraznjevalni čep Drenažni čep Tyhjennystulppa Tömningspropp Tahliye tapası
26 pritrjevalni vijak Osnovni zavrtanj Pinnapultti Stödbult Germe civatası, saplama
26a Zatezni pas Osigurač Haka (säppi) Spännband Şerit
26b Vijak Zavrtanj Ruuvi Skruv Vida
26c Podložka Podloška Aluslevy Bricka Pul
28 Vijak Zavrtanj Ruuvi Skruv Vida
28a Vijak Zavrtanj Ruuvi Skruv Vida
31 Vijak Zavrtanj Ruuvi Skruv Vida
32a Podložka Podloška Aluslevy Bricka Pul
35 Vijak Zavrtanj Ruuvi Skruv Vida
36 Matica Matica Mutteri Mutter Somun
36a Matica Matica Mutteri Mutter Somun
37 O-tesnilo/ tesnilo O-zaptivni prsten O-rengas tiiviste O-ring/packning O-ring/conta
38 O-tesnilo O-prsten O-rengas O-ring O-ring
38a O-tesnilo O-prsten O-rengas O-ring O-ring
44 Vstopni del komplet Komplet ulazni deo Täydellinen sisäosa Inloppsdel komplett Komple emme kısmı
45 Režni obroč Osloni prsten Kaularengas Tätningsring Boyun halkası
45a Režni obroč komplet Komplet oslonog prstena Täydellinen kaularengas Tätningsring, komplett Komple boyun halkası
47 Ležajni obroč Prsten kugličnog ležaja Laakerirengas Lager Yatak halkası
47a Ležaj z nosilcem Kuglični ležaj sa prstenom Ohjainlaakeri Lager med medbringare Sürücülü yatak halkası
47b Ležajni obroč, rotirajoč Kuglični ležaj rotirajući Laakerirengas, pyörivä Lagerring, roterande Yatak halkası, döner
47c Puša Čaura Holkki Bussning Burç
47d Držalni obroč Noseći prsten Lukitusrengas Låsbricka Tespit halkası
47e Držalni obroč Noseći prsten Lukitusrengas Låsbricka Tespit halkası
48 Matica za pritrdilno pušo Matica konusne čaure Kartioholkki mutteri Mutter för klämbussning Yarık koni somunu
49 Rotor črpalke Obrtno kolo pumpe Juoksupyörä Pumphjul Kanat
49a Rotor črpalke Obrtno kolo pumpe Juoksupyörä Pumphjul Kanat
49b Pritrdilna puša Konusna čaura Kartioholkki Klämbussning Kapalı somun
49c Obrabni obroč Habajući prsten Kulutusrengas Slitring Aşınma halkası
51 Os črpalke Osovina pumpe Pumppuakseli Pumpaxel Mil
55 Plašč Spoljna zaštita Ulompi vaippa Mantel Dış ceket
56 Osnovna plošča Osnovna ploča Jalustalevy Fotstycke Şase
56a Osnovna plošča Osnovna ploča Jalustalevy Fotstycke Şase
56c Vijak Zavrtanj Ruuvi Skruv Vida
56d Podložka Podloška Aluslevy Bricka Pul
57 O-tesnilo O-prsten O-rengas O-ring O-ring
58 Držalo drsnega tesnila Kućište zaptivanja osovine Tiivistekannatin Hållare för axeltätning Salmastra taşıyıcı
58a Vijak Zavrtanj Ruuvi Skruv Vida
60 Vzmet Opruga Jousi Fjäder Yay
61 Gonilo tesnila Pogonaš zaptivaca Tiivisteen vetotappi Medbringare Salmastra yuvası
62 Stop prstan Zaustavni prsten Pysäytinrengas Stoppring Kitleme somunu
64 Distančnik Odstojna čaura Väliholkki Avståndsbussning Ayar ara parçası
64a Distančnik Odstojna čaura Väliholkki Avståndsbussning Ayar ara parçası
64c Natezni kos, utorni Osigurač saumetkom Kiristin, rihlattu Avståndsbussning (spline) Kelepçe boru
64d Distančnik Odstojna čaura Väliholkki Avståndsbussning Ayar ara parçası
65 Držalo režnega obroča Držač oslonog prstena Kaulusrenkaan pidin Hållare för tätningsring Boğaz aşınma halkası
332
Appendix
Designation
Pos.
SI RS FI SE TR
66 Podložka Podloška Aluslevy Bricka Pul
66a Podložka Podloška Aluslevy Bricka Pul
66b Varnostna podložka Osiguravajuća podloška Lukitusaluslevy Låsbricka Kitleme pulu
67 Matica/Vijak Matica/Zavrtanj Mutteri/Ruuvi Mutter/Skruv Somun/Vida
69 Distančnik Odstojna čaura Väliholkki Avståndsbussning Ayar ara parçası
76 Tipska ploščica Pločica označavanja Arvokilpisarja Typskylt Etiket
100 O-tesnilo O-prsten O-rengas O-ring O-ring
105 Drsno tesnilo Zaptivač osovine Akselitiiviste Axeltätning Mekanik salmastra
201 Prirobnica Prirubnica Laippa Fläns Flanş
203 Držalni obroč Osloni prsten Lukitusrengas Låsbricka Tutucu halka
333
CR, CRI, CRN 1s, 1, 3 and 5
Appendix
50a
51
36a
10a
8 9
10 49
64
105 65
4 45
7a
2 2 7 2
100 28 18
23 100 49
28 36
66a 64a
65
7
76a 4a 45
7a 76
60 26 47a
77 77
49
64c
37
66
67
65
5a 45
55
6 6
37
38
35 12 39 25
203
201
6 6 6
38 25
TM02 0455 3403
56 56 56
334
CR, CRI, CRN 10, 15 and 20
Appendix
36a 51
62
61
69
10a
8 9 3
10
49
49c
10a
1 8 9 64
10
65
28a 45 4
105
18
2 2 2
100
28 36
23 66a
100 49
7 49c
76a
7 7a 76 64
65
26
45 4
77 77
60
37
80
49
49c
64a
65
45 4a
55
47a
37 64d
49
6 6 49c
38a
64b
25 64c
39 66
38 67
12
35 65
45 44a
203
201
6 6 6 26a
38a
25 44b
TM02 7383 3403
26c
38
26b
56 56 56
335
CR, CRN 32, 45, 64 and 90
Appendix
48
49b
49
28a 49c
51
65
26b 45 45a
26c
9
7 8
4
3
47c
47d
7a 47c
1a 47d
26a
48
28
49b
36a 7a
48 49
7 49b 49c
65
7a 49a
58a 49c
105 45 45a
58
36 65 44
66a
76 45 45a
100 2
18 23
100 4a
37
60
47 47b 51
26 47e 66
66b
47a 67
37
55
31
32
6g
21
6
38a
31 38
32
6g
21
38a 6
21 38
38a 203 201 25
TM01 9996 3600
25
38
25
203 201 56
336
CR, CRN 120 and 150
Appendix
TM03 6001 4106
337
Appendix
7
5
3
1
338
Start-up
Appendix
TM01 1409 4497 TM01 1407 4497 TM01 1405 4497 TM01 1403 4497
8
6
4
2
?
TM01 9988 3600 TM01 1408 4497 TM01 1406 4497 TM01 1404 4497
1
Appendix
GB Start-up
1 2
Close the isolating valve on the discharge side of the pump and Remove the priming plug from the pump head and slowly fill the
open the isolating valve on the suction side. pump with liquid. Replace the priming plug and tighten securely.
3 4
See the correct direction of rotation of the pump on the motor fan Start the pump and check the direction of rotation.
cover.
5 6
Vent the pump by means of the vent valve in the pump head. At the Continue to vent the pump. At the same time, open the discharge
same time, open the discharge isolating valve a little. isolating valve a little more.
7 8
Close the vent valve when a steady stream of liquid runs out of it. For further information, see page 14.
Completely open the discharge isolating valve.
BG Пускане в действие
1 2
Затваря се спирателния кран на напорната страна, а този на Демонтира се пробката за пълнене и помпата бавно се пълни.
смукателната се отваря.
3 4
Вижте правилната посока на въртене на капака на мотора. Включете помпата и проверете правилността на посоката на
въртене.
5 6
Обезвъздушете през обезвъздушителния вентил като Продължете да обезвъздушавате като отваряте крана на
същевременно малко отворете крана на напорната страна. напорната страна повече.
7 8
Затворете обезвъздушителния вентил, когато от него протече За повече информация виж страница 26.
флуид. Отворете изцяло крана на напорната страна.
CZ Uvedení do provozu
1 2
Uzavřete uzavírací armaturu na výtlačné straně čerpadla Z hlavy čerpadla vyšroubujte plnicí zátku a do čerpadla pomalu
a otevřete uzavírací armaturu na sací straně čerpadla. nalévejte kapalinu.
Plnící zátku vrat’te na své místo a pevně utáhněte.
3 4
Podle šipky na krytu ventilátoru motoru čerpadla zjistěte směr Zapněte čerpadlo a zkontrolujte, zda směr otáčení odpovídá směru
otáčení hřídele čerpadla. uvedenému na krytu ventilátoru motoru.
5 6
Čerpadlo odvzdušněte pomocí odvzdušňovacího ventilu Pokračujte v odvzdušňování čerpadla. Současně otevřete poněkud
umístěného ve hlavě čerpadla. Současně mírně pootevřete více uzavírací armaturu na výtlačné straně čerpadla.
uzavírací armaturu na výtlačné straně čerpadla.
7 8
Odvzdušňovací ventil uzavřete, jakmile jím začne vytékat kapalina Další informace viz str. 38.
bez vzduchu. Otevřete naplno uzavírací armaturu na výtlačné
straně čerpadla tak, abyste dosáhli pracovního bodu čerpadla.
DK Idriftsætning
1 2
Luk afspærringsventilen på pumpens afgangsside og åbn Afmontér spædeproppen i topstykket og spæd pumpen langsomt.
afspærringsventilen på pumpens tilgangsside. Montér derefter spædeproppen igen.
3 4
Se pumpens korrekte omdrejningsretning på motorens Start pumpen og kontrollér pumpens omdrejningsretning.
ventilatorskærm.
5 6
Udluft pumpen på udluftningsventilen, som er placeret i topstykket. Fortsæt med at udlufte pumpen. Åbn samtidig afspærringsventilen
Åbn samtidig afspærringsventilen på pumpens afgangsside lidt. på pumpens afgangsside lidt mere.
7 8
Luk udluftningsventilen, når der løber en jævn væskestrøm ud af For yderligere information, se side 50.
den. Åbn afspærringsventilen på pumpens afgangsside helt.
DE Inbetriebnahme
339
Appendix
1 2
Das druckseitige Absperrventil schließen und das saugseitige Einfüllstopfen demontieren und Pumpe langsam auffüllen.
Absperrventil öffnen. Einfüllstopfen wieder einschrauben und fest anziehen.
3 4
Siehe richtige Drehrichtung auf der Lüfterhaube des Motors. Pumpe einschalten und Drehrichtung der Pumpe prüfen.
5 6
Pumpe über Entlüftungsventil im Kopfstück der Pumpe entlüften. Die Entlüftungsvorgehensweise fortsetzen. Gleichzeitig das
Gleichzeitig das druckseitige Absperrventil ein wenig öffnen. druckseitige Absperrventil ein bisschen mehr öffnen.
7 8
Entlüftungsventil schließen, wenn das Medium aus dem Ventil Für weitere Informationen, siehe Seite 62.
herausläuft. Das druckseitige Absperrventil ganz öffnen.
EE Käivitamine
1 2
Sulgege ventiil pumba survepoolel ja avage ventiil pumba Eemaldage pumbalt täiteava kork ja täitke pump aegamööda
imipoolel. vedelikuga. Pange kork tagasi oma kohale ja kinnitage hoolikalt.
3 4
Pöörlemissuund on tähistatud nooltega ventilaatori kattel. Käivitage pump ja kontrollige selle pöörlemissuunda.
5 6
Ventileerige pumpa selle peas paikneva õhutusventiili abil. Jätkake pumba ventileerimist. Samal ajal avage veelgi rohkem
Samal ajal avage veidi survepoole ventiili. survepoole ventiili.
7 8
Sulgege õhutusventiil niipea, kui vedelik hakkab ühtlaselt välja Edasine informatsioon: vt. lk. 74.
voolama. Avage survepoole ventiil täielikult.
GR Εκκίνηση
1 2
Κλείστε τη βάνα απομόνωσης στην πλευρά κατάθλιψης της αντλίας Αφαιρέστε την τάπα πλήρωσης από την κεφαλή της αντλίας και
και ανοίξτε τη βάνα απομόνωσης στην πλευρά αναρρόφησης. γεμίστε σιγάσιγά την αντλία με υγρό. Επανατοποθετήστε την τάπα
πλήρωσης και σφίγξτε τη καλά.
3 4
∆είτε τη σωστή φορά περιστροφής της αντλίας στο κάλυμμα Θέστε την αντλία σε λειτουργία και ελέγξτε τη φορά περιστροφής.
ανεμιστήρα του κινητήρα.
5 6
Εξαερώστε την αντλία με τη βοήθεια της βαλβίδας εξαέρωσης στην Συνεχίστε την εξαέρωση της αντλίας. Ταυτόχρονα, ανοίξτε λίγο
κεφαλή της αντλίας. Ταυτόχρονα, ανοίξτε λίγο τη βάνα ακόμη τη βάνα απομόνωσης κατάθλιψης.
απομόνωσης κατάθλιψης.
7 8
Κλείστε τη βαλβίδα εξαέρωσης όταν πια η ροή του υγρού που Για περισσότερες πληροφορίες, βλέπε σελίδα 86.
εξέρχεται είναι σταθερή. Ανοίξτε τελείως τη βάνα απομόνωσης
κατάθλιψης.
ES Puesta en marcha
1 2
Cerrar la válvula de corte en el lado de descarga de la bomba y Quitar el tapón de cebado del cabezal de la bomba y llenar la
abrir la válvula de corte en el lado de aspiración. bomba despacio de agua. Volver a poner el tapón de cebado y
apretarlo bien.
3 4
Comprobar el sentido de giro correcto de la bomba en la tapa del Poner la bomba en marcha y comprobar el sentido de giro.
ventilador del motor.
5 6
Purgar la bomba mediante la válvula de purga en el cabezal de la Seguir purgando la bomba. Al mismo tiempo abrir un poco más la
bomba. Al mismo tiempo, abrir un poco la válvula de corte de la válvula de corte de la descarga.
descarga.
7 8
Cerrar la válvula de purga cuando salga por la misma un flujo Para más información, ver pág. 98.
constante de líquido. Abrir la válvula de corte de la descarga
completamente.
FR Mise en route
340
Appendix
1 2
Fermer la vanne d’isolement du côté refoulement et ouvrir la vanne Démonter le bouchon d’amorçage de la tête de pompe et amorcer
d’isolement du côté aspiration de la pompe. lentement la pompe. Remettre en place le bouchon d’amorçage.
3 4
Voir le sens correct de rotation de la pompe sur le capot du Démarrer la pompe et vérifier son sens de rotation.
ventilateur du moteur.
5 6
Purger la pompe par la vis de purge située dans la tête de pompe. Continuer à purger la pompe. Ouvrir simultanément un peu plus la
Ouvrir simultanément légèrement la vanne d’isolement du côté vanne d’isolement du côté refoulement.
refoulement.
7 8
Fermer la vis de purge lorsqu’un filet d’eau homogène s’écoule. Pour plus d’informations, voir page 111.
Ouvrir entièrement la vanne d’isolement du côté refoulement.
HR Puštanje u pogon
1 2
Zatvoriti zaporni ventil na tlačnoj strani a otvoriti zaporni ventil na Skinuti čep za punjenje pa crpku polagano napuniti.
usisnoj strani. Ponovno vratiti čep za punjenje te ga čvrsto pritegnuti.
3 4
Prekontrolirati ispravni smjer vrtnje na poklopcu ventilatora motora. Uključiti crpku pa ispitati ispravni smjer vrtnje crpke.
5 6
Odzračiti crpku preko odzračnog ventila u glavi crpke. Istovremeno Nastaviti s odzračivanjem. Istovremeno još malo jače otvoriti
malo otvoriti zaporni ventil na tlačnoj strani. zaporni ventil na tlačnoj strani.
7 8
Zatvoriti odzračni ventil kad medij počne izlaziti na ventilu. Potpuno Za daljnje obavijesti vidi str. 123.
otvoriti zaporni ventil na tlačnoj strani.
IT Avviamento
1 2
Chiudere la valvola di intercettazione sul lato di mandata della Rimuovere il tappo di adescamento dalla testa pompa e versare
pompa e aprire quella sul lato di aspirazione. lentamente il liquido nella pompa. Reinserire il tappo e chiuderlo
accuratamente.
3 4
Osservare il corretto senso di rotazione della pompa sul coperchio Avviare la pompa e controllare il senso di rotazione.
della ventola motore.
5 6
Sfiatare la pompa per mezzo della valvola di sfiato sulla testa Continuare a sfiatare la pompa, continuando contemporaneamente
pompa. ad aprire la valvola di mandata.
Contemporaneamente, aprire leggermente la valvola di mandata.
7 8
Chiudere la valvola di sfiato quando fuoriesce un flusso di liquido Per ulteriori informazioni vedere pagina 135.
costante. Aprire completamente la valvola di mandata.
341
Appendix
LT Paleidimas
1 2
Uždarykite vožtuvą siurblio išvado pusėje ir atidarykite vožtuvą Siurblio galvutėje atsukite pripildymo kamštelį ir siurblį lėtai
siurblio įvado pusėje. pripildykite skysčio. Įstatykite pripildymo kamštelį ir gerai
užveržkite.
3 4
Pažiūrėkite ant variklio ventiliatoriaus gaubto, kokia yra teisinga Paleiskite siurblį ir patikrinkite sukimosi kryptį.
siurblio sukimosi kryptis.
5 6
Per siurblio galvutėje esantį oro išleidimo vožtuvą išleiskite iš Tęskite oro išleidimą. Tuo pačiu metu truputį daugiau atidarykite
siurblio orą. išvado vožtuvą.
Tuo pačiu metu truputį atidarykite išvado vožtuvą.
7 8
Oro išleidimo vožtuvą uždarykite, kai iš jo pradeda tekėti Daugiau informacijos pateikta 159 puslapyje.
nusistovėjusi skysčio čiurkšlė. Visiškai atidarykite išvado vožtuvą.
HU Üzembehelyezés
1 2
A nyomóoldali elzárószelepet zárjuk el, a szívóoldali A betöltőcsavart vegyük ki és a szivattyút lassan töltsük fel.
elzárószelepet nyissuk ki. A betöltőcsavart csavarjuk vissza és szorosan húzzuk meg.
3 4
Nézzük meg a motor ventillátorfedelén a helyes forgásirányt. Kapcsoljuk be a szivattyút és ellenőrizzük forgásirányát.
5 6
A szivattyú fejrészén lévő légtelenítőszelepen át légtelenítsük Folytassuk a légtelenítést, egyidejűleg kissé jobban nyissuk meg a
a szivattyút. Egyidejűleg kissé nyissuk meg a nyomóoldali nyomóoldali elzárószelepet.
elzárószelepet.
7 8
Amikor a légtelenítőszelepen már a levegőmentes szállított közeg Bővebb információ a 171. oldalon.
lép ki, zárjuk el a szelepet. A nyomóoldali elzárószelepet teljesen
nyissuk ki.
NL In bedrijf nemen
1 2
Sluit de scheidingsafsluiter aan de perszijde van de pomp en open Verwijder de ontluchtingsschroef van de pompkop en vul de pomp
de afsluiter aan de zuigzijde. langzaam met vloeistof. Breng de ontluchtingsschroef terug op zijn
plaats en zorg dat deze stevig vast zit.
3 4
Kijk of de draairichting van de pomp klopt (zie beschermkap van de Start de pomp en controleer de draairichting.
motorventilator).
5 6
Ontlucht de pomp met behulp van de ontluchtingsklep in de Ontlucht de pomp verder. Doe tegelijkertijd de persafsluiter iets
pompkop. Open tegelijkertijd de persafsluiter een beetje. verder open.
7 8
Sluit de ontluchtingsklep wanneer het medium gelijkmatig uit de Voor verdere informatie zie pagina 183.
ontluchtingsopening stroomt. Open de persafsluiter volledig.
UA Запуск
1 2
Закрити запірний кран на виході насоса та відкрити запірний Викрутити заглушку з верхньої частини насоса та повільно
кран на всмоктувальному трубопроводі. заповнити насос рідиною. Вкрутити заглушку.
3 4
Перевірити правильний напрямок обертання насоса, що Запустити насос та перевірити напрямок обертання.
вказаний на кришці вентилятора.
5 6
Видалити повітря з насоса з допомогою повітряного клапана в Продовжувати видаляти повітря з насоса. Одночасно відкрити
верхній частині насоса. Одночасно привідкрити вихідний вихідний кран ще трохи більше.
запірний кран.
7 8
Закрити повітряний клапан, коли постійний потік рідини потече Далі див. стор. 195.
з насоса. Повністю відкрити вихідний запірний кран.
342
Appendix
PL Uruchomienie
1 2
Zamknąć zawór odcinający na tłoczeniu pompy i otworzyć zawór Z głowicy pompy zdjąć korek zalewowy i napełnić pompę cieczą.
odcinający na ssaniu. Założyć korek i dokręcić go mocno.
3 4
Poprzez pokrywę wentylatora silnika sprawdzić, czy kierunek Uruchomić pompę i jeszcze raz sprawdzić kierunek obrotów.
obrotów pompy jest prawidłowy.
5 6
Poprzez otwór odpowietrzający na głowicy pompy odpowietrzyć Dalej odpowietrzać pompę. Jednocześnie jeszcze trochę otworzyć
pompę. Jednocześnie lekko otworzyć zawór odcinający na zawór odcinający na tłoczeniu.
tłoczeniu.
7 8
Gdy z otworu odpowietrzającego zacznie wypływać stały strumień Dalsze informacje, patrz str. 207.
cieczy, zamknąć go. Całkowicie otworzyć zawór odcinający na
tłoczeniu.
PT Arranque inicial
1 2
Feche a válvula de seccionamento do lado da descarga e abra a Retire o bujão de purga da cabeça da bomba e lentamente encha
válvula de seccionamento do lado da aspiração. esta com o líquido. Monte o bujão de purga.
3 4
Certifique-se de que o sentido de rotação da bomba está correcto, Efectue o arranque da bomba e verifique o sentido de rotação.
i.e.,
está de acordo com o que se indica na tampa do ventilador do
motor.
5 6
Purgue a bomba por meio da respectiva válvula, existente na Continue a purgar a bomba. Ao mesmo tempo, abra um pouco
cabeça da bomba. Ao mesmo tempo, abra ligeiramente a válvula mais a válvula de seccionamento do lado da descarga.
de seccionamento do lado da descarga.
7 8
Feche a válvula de purga quando um caudal uniforme começar a Para mais informação, consulte a página 219.
sair por ela. Abra agora completamente a válvula de
seccionamento do lado da descarga.
343
Appendix
RO Punerea în funcţiune
1 2
Închideţi vana de refulare şi deschideţi vana de aspiraţie complet. Desfaceţi ventilul de amorsare din capul pompei şi încet umpleţi
pompa cu lichid. Strângeţi bine ventilul după umplere.
3 4
Urmăriţi sensul corect de rotaţie al pompei indicat la partea Porniţi pompa şi verificaţi sensul de rotaţie.
superioară a motorului la ventilator.
5 6
Aerisiţi pompa prin intermediul ventilului de aerisire situat în capul Continuaţi să aerisiţi pompa. In acelaşi timp deschideţi vana de
pompei. In acelaşi timp deschideţi vana de refulare. refulare progresiv.
7 8
Inchideţi ventilul de aerisire când apa începe să arunce prin Pentru mai multe informaţii vedeţi pagina 243.
orificiu.
Se va deschide complet vana de refulare.
SK Uvedenie do prevádzky
1 2
Uzavrite uzatváraciu armatúru na výtlačnej strane čerpadla Z hlavy čerpadla vyskrutkujte plniacu zátku a do čerpadla pomaly
a otvorte uzatváraciu armatúru na sacej strane čerpadla. nalievajte kvapalinu.
Plniacu zátku naskrutkujte spät’ a pevne ju dotiahnite.
3 4
Podľa šípky na kryte ventilátora motora čerpadla zistite smer Zapnite čerpadlo a skontrolujte, či smer otáčania sa hriadeľa
otáčania sa hriadeľa čerpadla. zodpovedá smeru uvedenom na kryte ventilátora motora.
5 6
Čerpadlo odvzdušnite pomocou odvzdušňovacieho ventila Pokračujte v odvzdušňovaní čerpadla. Súčastne trochu pootvorte
umiestneného v hlave čerpadla. Súčastne mierne pootvorte uzatváraciu armatúru na výtlačnej strane čerpadla.
uzatváraciu armatúru na výtlačnej strane čerpadla.
7 8
Odvzdušňovací ventil uzatvorte akonáhle z neho začne vytekat’ Dalšie informácie, viď. str. 255.
kvapalina. Naplno otvorte uzatváraciu armatúru na výtlačnej strane
čerpadla tak, aby ste dosiahli pracovný bod čerpadla.
SI Zagon
1 2
Tlačni zaporni ventil zapreti in odpreti sesalni zaporni ventil. Čep odprtine za nalivanje odpreti in črpalko počasi napolniti.
Ponovno priviti čep in močno pritegniti.
3 4
Kontrolirati je potrebno pravilno smer vrtenja na pokrovu hlajenja Vklopiti črpalko in preveriti smer vrtenja črpalke.
motorja.
5 6
Črpalko odzračiti s pomočjo odzračevalnega ventila na glavi Odzračevalni postopek nadaljevati. Istočasno na tlačni strani še
črpalke. Istočasno nekoliko odpreti zaporni ventil na tlačni strani. bolj odpreti zaporni ventil.
7 8
Odzračevalni ventil zapreti, ko prične iztekati medij. Zaporni ventil Za obširnejše informacije glej stran 267.
na tlačni strani popolnoma odpreti.
RS Puštanje u rad
1 2
Zatvoriti zaustavni ventil na potisnoj strani i otvoriti zaustavni ventil Demontirati ulivni priključak i polako napuniti pumpu.
na usisnoj strani. Ponovo ušrafiti ulivni priključak i čvrsto ga pritegnuti.
3 4
Uočiti pravilan smer obrtanja na poklopcu ventilatora motora. Uključiti pumpu i proveriti smer obrtanja pumpe.
5 6
Odzračiti pumpu preko odzračnog ventila na glavi pumpe. Nastaviti sa postupkom odzračivanja.
Istovremeno malo otvoriti zaustavni ventil na potisnoj strani. Istovremeno zaustavni ventil na potisnoj strani otvoriti još malo
više.
7 8
Kada radni fluid počne da ističe iz ventila zatvoriti odzračni ventil. Za dalje informacije, vidi stranu 279.
Zaustavni ventil na potisnoj strani potpuno otvoriti.
344
Appendix
FI Käyttöönotto
1 2
Sulje pumpun painepuolen sulkuventtiili ja avaa tulopuolen Irroita pumpun yläkappaleen täyttötulppa ja täytä pumppu hitaasti.
sulkuventtiili. Asenna täyttötulppa tämän jälkeen.
3 4
Tarkista tuuletinkannesta pumpun oikea pyörimissuunta. Käynnistä pumppu ja varmista oikea pyörimissuunta.
5 6
Ilmaa pumppu yläkappaleessa sijaitsevan ilmausruuvin kautta. Jatka pumpun ilmaamista ja avaa pumpun painepuolen
Aukaise samalla hiukan pumpun painepuolen sulkuventtiiliä. sulkuventtiiliä hiukan enemmän.
7 8
Sulje ilmausventtiili kun siitä suihkuaa tasainen vesivirta. Lisätietoja sivuilla 291.
Aukaise pumpun painepuolen sulkuventtiili kokonaan.
SE Igångkörning
1 2
Stäng avstängningsventilen på pumpens trycksida och öppna Avlägsna spädproppen i toppstycket och fyll pumpen långsamt.
avstängningsventilen på sugsidan. Sätt sedan tillbaka proppen.
3 4
Kontrollera rätt rotationsriktning enligt motorns fläktkåpa. Starta pumpen och kontrollera pumpens rotationsriktning.
5 6
Avlufta pumpen med hjälp av ventilen på toppstycket. Fortsätt avlufta pumpen. Öppna samtidigt avstängningsventilen på
Öppna samtidigt trycksidan lite till.
avstängningsventilen på pumpens trycksida något.
7 8
Stäng avluftningsventilen när en jämn vätskeström kommer ut ur För ytterligare information, se sida 303.
den. Öppna avstängningsventilen på trycksidan helt.
TR İlk çalıştırma
1 2
Pompanın basma tarafındaki izolasyon vanasını kapatın ve emme Doldurma tapasını pompa başından sökün ve pompayı sıvı ile
tarafındaki izolasyon vanasını açın. doldurun. Doldurma tapasını tekrar yerine takın ve sağlam bir
şekilde sıkın.
3 4
Motor fan kapağında bulunan doğru pompa dönüş yönüne bakın. Pompayı çalıştırın ve dönüş yönünü kontrol edin.
5 6
Pompa başında bulunan tahliye valfı yardımıyla pompanın Pompanın havasını almaya devam edin. Aynı anda, basma
havasını alın. Aynı anda, basma izolasyon valfını biraz açın. izolasyon valfını biraz daha açın.
7 8
Düzenli bir sıvı akışı gerçekleştiğinde, tahliye valfını kapatın. İlave bilgiler için, sayfa 315’e bakın.
Basma izolasyon valfını tamamen açın.
345
Declaration of conformity 2
Declaration of conformity
346
Declaration of conformity
GR: ∆ήλωση συμμόρφωσης EC ES: Declaración CE de conformidad
Εμείς, η Grundfos, δηλώνουμε με αποκλειστικά δική μας ευθύνη ότι Nosotros, Grundfos, declaramos bajo nuestra entera responsabilidad
τα προϊόντα CR, CRI και CRN στα οποία αναφέρεται η παρούσα δήλωση, que los productos CR, CRI y CRN, a los cuales se refiere esta
συμμορφώνονται με τις εξής Οδηγίες του Συμβουλίου περί προσέγγισης declaración, están conformes con las Directivas del Consejo en la
των νομοθεσιών των κρατών μελών της ΕΕ: aproximación de las leyes de las Estados Miembros del EM:
— Οδηγία για μηχανήματα (2006/42/EC). — Directiva de Maquinaria (2006/42/CE).
Πρότυπα που χρησιμοποιήθηκαν: EN 809:1998, A1:2009. Normas aplicadas: EN 809:1998, A1:2009.
— Οδηγία Ηλεκτρομαγνητικής Συμβατότητας (EMC) (2004/108/EC). — Directiva EMC (2004/108/CE).
— Οδηγία Οικολογικού Σχεδιασμού (2009/125/ΕC). — Directiva sobre diseño ecológico (2009/125/CE).
Ηλεκτρικοί κινητήρες: Motores eléctricos:
Ρύθμιση πρώτης εκκίνησης Νο 640/2009. Reglamento de la Comisión Nº 640/2009.
Ισχύει μόνο σε τριφασικούς κινητήρες της Grundfos με σήμανση Válido sólo para motores trifásicos Grundfos pertenecientes a las
ΙΕ2 ή ΙΕ3. Βλέπε πινακίδα κινητήρα. categorías IE2 e IE3. Véase la placa de características del motor.
Πρότυπο που χρησιμοποιήθηκε: EN 60034-30:2009. Norma aplicada: EN 60034-30:2009.
— Οδηγία Οικολογικού Σχεδιασμού (2009/125/EC). — Directiva sobre diseño ecológico (2009/125/CE).
Αντλίες νερού: Bombas de agua:
Ρύθμιση πρώτης εκκίνησης Νο 547/2012. Reglamento de la Comisión Nº 547/2012.
Ισχύει μόνο για αντλίες νερού που φέρουν τον ελάχιστο δείκτη Aplicable únicamente a las bombas de agua marcadas con el índice
απόδοσης ΜΕΙ. Βλέπε πινακίδα αντλίας. de eficiencia mínima (IEM). Véase la placa de características de la
Αυτή η δήλωση συμμόρφωσης EC ισχύει μόνον όταν συνοδεύει τις bomba.
οδηγίες εγκατάστασης και λειτουργίας της Grundfos Esta declaración CE de conformidad sólo es válida cuando se publique
(κωδικός εντύπου 96462123 0914). como parte de las instrucciones de instalación y funcionamiento de
Grundfos (número de publicación 96462123 0914).
347
Declaration of conformity
348
Declaration of conformity
RU: Декларация о соответствии ЕС RO: Declaraţie de conformitate CE
Мы, компания Grundfos, со всей ответственностью заявляем, Noi, Grundfos, declarăm pe propria răspundere că produsele CR, CRI şi
что изделия CR, CRI и CRN, к которым относится настоящая CRN, la care se referă această declaraţie, sunt în conformitate cu aceste
декларация, соответствуют следующим Директивам Совета Directive de Consiliu asupra armonizării legilor Statelor Membre CE:
Евросоюза об унификации законодательных предписаний — Directiva Utilaje (2006/42/CE).
стран-членов ЕС: Standarde utilizate: EN 809:1998, A1:2009.
— Механические устройства (2006/42/ЕС). — Directiva EMC (2004/108/CE).
Применявшиеся стандарты: EN 809:1998, A1:2009. — Directiva Ecodesign (2009/125/CE).
— Электромагнитная совместимость (2004/108/EC). Motoare electrice:
— Директива по экологическому проектированию Regulamentul Comisiei nr. 640/2009.
энергопотребляющей продукции (2009/125/EC). Se aplică numai motoarelor trifazate Grundfos cu marca IE2 sau IE3.
Электродвигатели: Vezi plăcuţa de identificare a motorului.
Регламент Комиссии ЕС № 640/2009. Standard utilizat: EN 60034-30:2009.
Применяется только к трехфазным электродвигателям Grundfos, — Directiva Ecodesign (2009/125/CE).
обозначенным IE2 или IE3. См. шильдик с техническими Pompe de apa:
данными двигателя. Regulamentul Comisiei nr. 547/2012.
Применявшийся стандарт: EN 60034-30:2009. Se aplica numai pompelor de apa cu marca de eficienta minima
— Директива по экологическому проектированию index MEI. Vezi plăcuţa de identificare a pompei.
энергопотребляющей продукции (2009/125/EC). Această declarație de conformitate CE este valabilă numai când este
Насосы для перекачивания воды: publicată ca parte a instrucțiunilor Grundfos de instalare şi utilizare
Регламент Комиссии ЕС № 547/2012. (număr publicație 96462123 0914).
Применимо только к насосам для перекачивания воды,
промаркированным показателем минимальной эффективности
MEI. См. фирменную табличку насоса.
Данная декларация о соответствии ЕС имеет силу только в случае
публикации в составе инструкции по монтажу и эксплуатации на
продукцию производства компании Grundfos
(номер публикации 96462123 0914).
349
Declaration of conformity
Касаткина В. В.
Руководитель отдела качества,
экологии и охраны труда
ООО Грундфос Истра, Россия
143581, Московская область,
Истринский район,
дер. Лешково, д.188
350
Argentina Finland Lithuania South Africa
Grundfos companies
Bombas GRUNDFOS de Argentina S.A. OY GRUNDFOS Pumput AB GRUNDFOS Pumps UAB GRUNDFOS (PTY) LTD
Ruta Panamericana km. 37.500 Centro Mestarintie 11 Smolensko g. 6 Corner Mountjoy and George Allen Roads
Industrial Garin FIN-01730 Vantaa LT-03201 Vilnius Wilbart Ext. 2
1619 Garín Pcia. de B.A. Phone: +358-(0)207 889 900 Tel: + 370 52 395 430 Bedfordview 2008
Phone: +54-3327 414 444 Telefax: +358-(0)207 889 550 Fax: + 370 52 395 431 Phone: (+27) 11 579 4800
Telefax: +54-3327 45 3190 Fax: (+27) 11 455 6066
France Malaysia E-mail: lsmart@grundfos.com
Australia Pompes GRUNDFOS Distribution S.A. GRUNDFOS Pumps Sdn. Bhd.
GRUNDFOS Pumps Pty. Ltd. Parc d’Activités de Chesnes 7 Jalan Peguam U1/25 Spain
P.O. Box 2040 57, rue de Malacombe Glenmarie Industrial Park Bombas GRUNDFOS España S.A.
Regency Park F-38290 St. Quentin Fallavier (Lyon) 40150 Shah Alam Camino de la Fuentecilla, s/n
South Australia 5942 Tél.: +33-4 74 82 15 15 Selangor E-28110 Algete (Madrid)
Phone: +61-8-8461-4611 Télécopie: +33-4 74 94 10 51 Phone: +60-3-5569 2922 Tel.: +34-91-848 8800
Telefax: +61-8-8340 0155 Telefax: +60-3-5569 2866 Telefax: +34-91-628 0465
Germany
Austria GRUNDFOS GMBH Mexico Sweden
GRUNDFOS Pumpen Vertrieb Ges.m.b.H. Schlüterstr. 33 Bombas GRUNDFOS de México S.A. de GRUNDFOS AB
Grundfosstraße 2 40699 Erkrath C.V. Box 333 (Lunnagårdsgatan 6)
A-5082 Grödig/Salzburg Tel.: +49-(0) 211 929 69-0 Boulevard TLC No. 15 431 24 Mölndal
Tel.: +43-6246-883-0 Telefax: +49-(0) 211 929 69-3799 Parque Industrial Stiva Aeropuerto Tel.: +46 31 332 23 000
Telefax: +43-6246-883-30 e-mail: infoservice@grundfos.de Apodaca, N.L. 66600 Telefax: +46 31 331 94 60
Service in Deutschland: Phone: +52-81-8144 4000
Belgium e-mail: kundendienst@grundfos.de Telefax: +52-81-8144 4010 Switzerland
N.V. GRUNDFOS Bellux S.A. GRUNDFOS Pumpen AG
Boomsesteenweg 81-83 HILGE GmbH & Co. KG Netherlands Bruggacherstrasse 10
B-2630 Aartselaar Hilgestrasse 37-47 GRUNDFOS Netherlands CH-8117 Fällanden/ZH
Tél.: +32-3-870 7300 55292 Bodenheim/Rhein Veluwezoom 35 Tel.: +41-44-806 8111
Télécopie: +32-3-870 7301 Germany 1326 AE Almere Telefax: +41-44-806 8115
Tel.: +49 6135 75-0 Postbus 22015
Belarus Telefax: +49 6135 1737 1302 CA ALMERE Taiwan
Представительство ГРУНДФОС в e-mail: hilge@hilge.de Tel.: +31-88-478 6336 GRUNDFOS Pumps (Taiwan) Ltd.
Минске Telefax: +31-88-478 6332 7 Floor, 219 Min-Chuan Road
220125, Минск Greece E-mail: info_gnl@grundfos.com Taichung, Taiwan, R.O.C.
ул. Шафарнянская, 11, оф. 56, БЦ GRUNDFOS Hellas A.E.B.E. Phone: +886-4-2305 0868
«Порт» 20th km. Athinon-Markopoulou Av. New Zealand Telefax: +886-4-2305 0878
Тел.: +7 (375 17) 286 39 72/73 P.O. Box 71 GRUNDFOS Pumps NZ Ltd.
Факс: +7 (375 17) 286 39 71 GR-19002 Peania 17 Beatrice Tinsley Crescent Thailand
E-mail: minsk@grundfos.com Phone: +0030-210-66 83 400 North Harbour Industrial Estate GRUNDFOS (Thailand) Ltd.
Telefax: +0030-210-66 46 273 Albany, Auckland 92 Chaloem Phrakiat Rama 9 Road,
Bosna and Herzegovina Phone: +64-9-415 3240 Dokmai, Pravej, Bangkok 10250
GRUNDFOS Sarajevo Hong Kong Telefax: +64-9-415 3250 Phone: +66-2-725 8999
Zmaja od Bosne 7-7A, GRUNDFOS Pumps (Hong Kong) Ltd. Telefax: +66-2-725 8998
BH-71000 Sarajevo Unit 1, Ground floor Norway
Phone: +387 33 592 480 Siu Wai Industrial Centre GRUNDFOS Pumper A/S Turkey
Telefax: +387 33 590 465 29-33 Wing Hong Street & Strømsveien 344 GRUNDFOS POMPA San. ve Tic. Ltd. Sti.
www.ba.grundfos.com 68 King Lam Street, Cheung Sha Wan Postboks 235, Leirdal Gebze Organize Sanayi Bölgesi
e-mail: grundfos@bih.net.ba Kowloon N-1011 Oslo Ihsan dede Caddesi,
Phone: +852-27861706 / 27861741 Tlf.: +47-22 90 47 00 2. yol 200. Sokak No. 204
Brazil Telefax: +852-27858664 Telefax: +47-22 32 21 50 41490 Gebze/ Kocaeli
BOMBAS GRUNDFOS DO BRASIL Phone: +90 - 262-679 7979
Av. Humberto de Alencar Castelo Branco, Hungary Poland Telefax: +90 - 262-679 7905
630 GRUNDFOS Hungária Kft. GRUNDFOS Pompy Sp. z o.o. E-mail: satis@grundfos.com
CEP 09850 - 300 Park u. 8 ul. Klonowa 23
São Bernardo do Campo - SP H-2045 Törökbálint, Baranowo k. Poznania Ukraine
Phone: +55-11 4393 5533 Phone: +36-23 511 110 PL-62-081 Przeźmierowo Бізнес Центр Європа
Telefax: +55-11 4343 5015 Telefax: +36-23 511 111 Tel: (+48-61) 650 13 00 Столичне шосе, 103
Fax: (+48-61) 650 13 50 м. Київ, 03131, Україна
Bulgaria India Телефон: (+38 044) 237 04 00
Grundfos Bulgaria EOOD GRUNDFOS Pumps India Private Limited Portugal Факс.: (+38 044) 237 04 01
Slatina District 118 Old Mahabalipuram Road Bombas GRUNDFOS Portugal, S.A. E-mail: ukraine@grundfos.com
Iztochna Tangenta street no. 100 Thoraipakkam Rua Calvet de Magalhães, 241
BG - 1592 Sofia Chennai 600 096 Apartado 1079 United Arab Emirates
Tel. +359 2 49 22 200 Phone: +91-44 2496 6800 P-2770-153 Paço de Arcos GRUNDFOS Gulf Distribution
Fax. +359 2 49 22 201 Tel.: +351-21-440 76 00 P.O. Box 16768
email: bulgaria@grundfos.bg
Indonesia Telefax: +351-21-440 76 90 Jebel Ali Free Zone
PT GRUNDFOS Pompa Dubai
Canada Jl. Rawa Sumur III, Blok III / CC-1 Romania Phone: +971 4 8815 166
GRUNDFOS Canada Inc. Kawasan Industri, Pulogadung GRUNDFOS Pompe România SRL Telefax: +971 4 8815 136
2941 Brighton Road Jakarta 13930 Bd. Biruintei, nr 103
Oakville, Ontario Phone: +62-21-460 6909 Pantelimon county Ilfov United Kingdom
L6H 6C9 Telefax: +62-21-460 6910 / 460 6901 Phone: +40 21 200 4100 GRUNDFOS Pumps Ltd.
Phone: +1-905 829 9533 Telefax: +40 21 200 4101 Grovebury Road
Telefax: +1-905 829 9512
Ireland E-mail: romania@grundfos.ro Leighton Buzzard/Beds. LU7 4TL
GRUNDFOS (Ireland) Ltd. Phone: +44-1525-850000
China Unit A, Merrywell Business Park Russia Telefax: +44-1525-850011
GRUNDFOS Pumps (Shanghai) Co. Ltd. Ballymount Road Lower ООО Грундфос Россия
50/F Maxdo Center No. 8 XingYi Rd. Dublin 12 109544, г. Москва, ул. Школьная, 39-41, U.S.A.
Hongqiao development Zone Phone: +353-1-4089 800 стр. 1 GRUNDFOS Pumps Corporation
Shanghai 200336 Telefax: +353-1-4089 830 Тел. (+7) 495 564-88-00 (495) 737-30-00 17100 West 118th Terrace
PRC Факс (+7) 495 564 88 11 Olathe, Kansas 66061
Phone: +86 21 612 252 22
Italy E-mail grundfos.moscow@grundfos.com Phone: +1-913-227-3400
GRUNDFOS Pompe Italia S.r.l. Telefax: +1-913-227-3500
Telefax: +86 21 612 253 33
Via Gran Sasso 4 Serbia
Croatia I-20060 Truccazzano (Milano) Grundfos Srbija d.o.o. Uzbekistan
GRUNDFOS CROATIA d.o.o. Tel.: +39-02-95838112 Omladinskih brigada 90b Grundfos Tashkent, Uzbekistan The Repre-
Buzinski prilaz 38, Buzin Telefax: +39-02-95309290 / 95838461 11070 Novi Beograd sentative Office of Grundfos Kazakhstan in
HR-10010 Zagreb Phone: +381 11 2258 740 Uzbekistan
Phone: +385 1 6595 400
Japan Telefax: +381 11 2281 769 38a, Oybek street, Tashkent
GRUNDFOS Pumps K.K. www.rs.grundfos.com Телефон: (+998) 71 150 3290 / 71 150
Telefax: +385 1 6595 499
Gotanda Metalion Bldg., 5F, 3291
www.hr.grundfos.com
5-21-15, Higashi-gotanda Singapore Факс: (+998) 71 150 3292
Czech Republic Shiagawa-ku, Tokyo GRUNDFOS (Singapore) Pte. Ltd.
GRUNDFOS s.r.o. 141-0022 Japan 25 Jalan Tukang Addresses Revised 21.05.2014
Čajkovského 21 Phone: +81 35 448 1391 Singapore 619264
779 00 Olomouc Telefax: +81 35 448 9619 Phone: +65-6681 9688
Phone: +420-585-716 111 Telefax: +65-6681 9689
Telefax: +420-585-716 299
Korea
GRUNDFOS Pumps Korea Ltd. Slovakia
Denmark 6th Floor, Aju Building 679-5 GRUNDFOS s.r.o.
GRUNDFOS DK A/S Yeoksam-dong, Kangnam-ku, 135-916 Prievozská 4D
Martin Bachs Vej 3 Seoul, Korea 821 09 BRATISLAVA
DK-8850 Bjerringbro Phone: +82-2-5317 600 Phona: +421 2 5020 1426
Tlf.: +45-87 50 50 50 Telefax: +82-2-5633 725 sk.grundfos.com
Telefax: +45-87 50 51 51
E-mail: info_GDK@grundfos.com
Latvia Slovenia
SIA GRUNDFOS Pumps Latvia GRUNDFOS d.o.o.
www.grundfos.com/DK
Deglava biznesa centrs Šlandrova 8b, SI-1231 Ljubljana-Črnuče
Estonia Augusta Deglava ielā 60, LV-1035, Rīga, Phone: +386 31 718 808
GRUNDFOS Pumps Eesti OÜ Tālr.: + 371 714 9640, 7 149 641 Telefax: +386 (0)1 5680 619
Peterburi tee 92G Fakss: + 371 914 9646 E-mail: slovenia@grundfos.si
11415 Tallinn
Tel: + 372 606 1690
Fax: + 372 606 1691
Being responsible is our foundation
Thinking ahead makes it possible
Innovation is the essence
96462123 0914
ECM: 1142070 The name Grundfos, the Grundfos logo, and the payoff be think innovate are registered trademarks
owned by Grundfos Holding A/S or Grundfos A/S, Denmark. All rights reserved worldwide.
www.grundfos.com
VALVOLA A FLUSSO AWlATO CON SOFFIETTO -VITE
~
MIVAL
ESTERNAPN16-ESENTEMANUTE~ONE
STREAMUNED FLOWVALVE WITH BELLOWS
SCREW PN 16 - MAlNTENANCE FREE
COSTRUZIONE
- OurSIDE
CONSTRUCTlON
E
o:
DENOMINAZIONE
CORp'O
MATERIALE
.GHISA EN;.GJL.250-
PART NAME
BODY.
MATERIAL
EN~GJL-250.CAST.IRONI
I
. OO-FRJClloNBE8RINGS
~
~L.
:.B~USH
"\:
'STEM
-
:CARBO:-G,RAPHITE=:J
2JNCPLAIEDSTEED
GU'''' ,INDEX" I CARBoNSIm
.SJEEL
:.fEMp'EBED~SJEEL
. J
U3- ~OLAN!INO !
~ lCClAlo-=:::l . HANDWHEELr-- .SIEEL I
rn:
l15-
.GHIERAIERMAVOL. \JCCIAIO
CALOTTA BOCCOCA
I.SIO~DW~EEU:JUI
~CCIAIO
~
- BLANK NUT
.C~BOt'J SJEEL
CARBON STEEL
J
J
U6- DJSCO ANTIERIZIONE - .rAC'c~lOJtiOX hNII-EBICIION
DISK .SJ~ltJLEs.s_SIEEL--.J
l1L SP'I~E~STIC~ .~CCI!IO .ELft.,SJIC.p'IN .Cft.,BBON.SJEEL J
0::8- VITI AC'cl!lO_8.8 .S'cBEWS .CARB,QNSIEEL J
L19- ANELLOELASTICO- .ACCIAIOINOX- ELASTICRING- STAINLESSSTEEL J
L20- INGRASSATORE .~CCIAIOZINCATO .LUBRIC~Tm ~NCP.LATED.STEEL..J
L21- VITEDIBLOCCAGGIO- .ACCIAIOZINCATO- STOP..SCREW- ~NC P.LATEDSTEEL..J
[1L VITE LIMITAI DIALZATA ACCIAIO ZINCATO RISE LlMITER SCREW ZINC PLATEDSTEEL I
C I
I
INSTAllAZIONE I I
MANUTENZIONE
INSTALLATION MAINTENANCE
Prima di montare la valvola, aprirla portando l'otturatore QUESTO TIPO DI VALVOLA NON RICHIEDE ALCUNA MANUTENZIONE IN QUANTO IL
a circa metà dell'intera corsa. Accertarsi che l'interno SOFFI ETTO E' STATO TESTATO PER MIGLIAIA DI MANOVRE.
del corpo sia completamente pulito. Eventuali impurità La fuoriuscita di fluido dalla camera stoppa segnala una rottura accidentale del soffietto
dovranno essere rimosse per assicurare un corretto (6). In attesa di riparare o sostituire la valvola serrare il premistoppa.
funzionamento, se si dispone di aria compressa utilizzarla Per aggiungere altra baderna ad impianto non in pressione e temperatura, svitare il
per una migliore pulizia. premistoppa (9) inserire altra baderna e serrare il premistoppa.
Verificare che le flange ove sarà inserita abbiano i fori Con l'utilizzo della controtenuta è possibile l'aggiunta di altra baderna-ad impianto in
in asse, siano parallele e non vi sia troppo o poco spazio pressione e temperatura, svitando completamente la vite di bloccaggio'(21) e la vite limitatrice
tra di esse tenendo conto dello spessore delle guarnizioni di alzata (22) (se provvista) avvalersi della controtenuta,ricavata sullo stelo forzando la
impiegate, del loro naturale appiattimento dopo il manovra in apertura, accertarsi della funzionalità dèlla stessà ed eseguire le operazioni
serraggio dei dadi nonchè delle tolleranze sugli precedentemente descritte. Ciò dev'essere eseguito entro breve periodo dalla rottura del
scartamenti indicate dalla norma EN 558.1. soffietto poichè il fluido potrebbe ren'CIer~ein utilizzabile la funzionalitàiflella"controtenuta.
La valvola deve essere montata secondo la direzione
- ~ , ..'
Se necessario la valvola puo1iss'e~e smontata co~plet1Jmente utilizzando utensili standard.
. I ~ .
. .
te nparare Ia va Ivo Ia so lo ~er~1gran d .I d .lame
I ~
del flusso indicato dalla freccia rilevabile sul corpo. .
E' conslg Ila b I' le economlcamen
i ~ ~
t n. \ \
Fissare la valvola nella corretta posizione della linea e Prima di riasserAblarla~rUòtare il volàntinò~d'i dué giri in a~e'rtura,\erifiaare èhe i piani di
ricordarsi di inserire le guarnizioni tra le flange tenuta siàno acèuratamente~puliti'e non ,dannèggiati e che la baderna.(8), dopo aver inserito
centrandole il più possibile sui risalti, i quali dovranno il n'uovo kit~e le 'guarnizioni (7) sia"no integre iHo~ni lorò parte; diversamente è consigliabile
essere puliti per permettere la corretta tenuta. sostituirle. Ogn'ivalvola'j,vien'efornita conjstruzloili di funzionamento. \ ~
Inserire i bulloni nei fori delle flange e serrarli mantenendo . ,~~. ~i ~
l'''
una frequenza diametralmente altemata (per una migliore
deformazione delle guarnizioni). Controllare il corretto
funzionamento aprendo e richiudendo completamente
THIS KIND OF VALVE NEEDS NO MAINTENANCE SINCE
FOR T9USt~DS ~ANOE~JVRIi'S. I ~ ~ ,
THE BELLOWS HAS BEEN TESTED
The lea.kage,of\fluid from the stuffing OOXindicate~the accidental breaking of the bellows (6).
la valvola per due o tre volte. Waiting to repair or replace the .valve,.tighten the gland (9). In order to add more packing when
the plant is not in pressure neithèr temperature, unscrew the gland (9), fit new packing and tighten
Before to assemble the valve at the pipeline, open it until it again.~Using ttie backseat it is possible to add more packing when the plant is working, untighten
about half-stroke. Check inside the body to be completely completely the locking set screw (21) and the rise limiter (22) (if provided), use the backseat on
clean, possible impurities have to be removed in order to the stem.forcing the opening manoeuvre, check its funcionality and act following the above
ensure a right functioning. If compressed air is at your mentioned operations. This must be carried out within a short terrn from the bellows breaking since
disposal, use it for a better cleaning.
the fluid could damage the functionality of the backseat.
The counter-flanges of the pipeline must be parallel and If necessary the valve can be completely disassembled using standard tools4
have aligned holes. Check the space betweenthem, keeping
into account the gaskets and theirflattering after bolts closing
(it should not be too much or too little) and face to face
It is economically advisable to repair the valve only for big sizes.::\
Before to assemble it again, open the valve at two handwheei tums, check if the sealing seats are
\ . r-
tolerances as per EN 558-1 standard. carefully clean and not damaged; check if each'part of1the gaskets (7-8) is integrai, otherwise it
The valve must be assembled following the direction indicated is recommended to replace them. FunctiOriing'instructions are supplied together with each valve.
by the arrow on the body. Fix the valve in the right position
at the pipeline and remember to insert the gaskets between
the flanges centring them as much as possible on the raised PARTI DI RICA,.M~IO f~SIGLIATE
,
n~..-
faces. ~ i ~~
The raised faces have to be clean to allow a correct tightness.
Fit the bolts in flanges holes and tighten them maintaining
~tCOM"1ENDED ?PA(?E Pf'RTS I
a diametrically opposed seguence (for a better deforrnation
of the gaskets). Check the nght functioning of the valve with
two or three complete open-close operations.
Baderna
\
Packing
(8)~GuarniziJni
(8)- Gaskets \'
(7) . Kit completo:
(7) [Complete
\ \ ,.
stelo/soffiettolotturatore
kit: stem/bellows/disc.(3-6-4)
(3:6-4)
,t\.1\\\ ~ \J-
La MIVAL SRL si riserva di apportare modifiche senza alcun preavviso
, ~
~
\.~
VALVOLA A FLUSSO AWlATO CON SOFFIETTO VITE -
ESTERNAPN16-ESENTEMANUTE~ONE
STREAMUNED FLOWVALVEIMTH BELLOWS -OUTSIDE
SCREWPN 16-Iv1AINTENANCE FREE
CARATTERISTICHE
~
MIVAL
FEATURES
A RICHIESTA I ON REQUEST
Diametri superiori
Flange con forature speciali
Volantino alveolato per comando a distanza tramite catena
Attuatore pneumatico S.E. o D.E. - motorizzata con accessori
Sistema di lucchettaggio Verniciatura nitro BLU RAL 5013
Sedi di tenuta stellita1:e Nitrocellulose painting BLUE RAL 5013
Bigger sizes
Flanges with special drillings
Chain-wheel for remote manoeuvre
Pneumatic actuator S.A. or DA - electric actuator with fittings
Padlock device
Stellite overlay on seat and disc
I
DIMENSIONI E PESI
OIMENSIONS ANO WEIGHTS
DN D L H V Kg Kv
CONDIZIONI DI ESERCIZIO
u v- f113'\
VALVOLAAFLUSSOAWlATO- VITE ESTERNA PN 40
~
MIVAL
CON SOFFIETTO ESENTE MANUTENZIONE
STREAMUNED FLOWVALVE - OlJrSlDE SCREW PN 40
WITH BELLOWS
COSTRUZIONE
-
- MAINTENANCE FREE
CONSTRUCTlON
:. t PREM!STQ~A ":"'"""
BELLq,wS ~ - STAINLESSSTEEL:-
- ACCIAIO- GLAND SJEEL - -
8- INDICEGU)DASTELO":.ACCIAIQ
.
SfflItGUIDE-INDEX I STEEL -
.
- =
_9- DN15-200-: )CCIAIO-
BOCCOLA BUSHDN15-20°- STEEL
9 BOCCOLA DN 250 .- _GHISA SFEROIDALE BUSH DN250 NODULARCASTIRON
-
INSTAllAZIONE MANUTENZIONE
--- - -- ------
INSTALLATION MAINTENANCE
Prima di montare la valvola, aprirla portando l'otturatore QUESTOTIPO DI VALVOLANON RICHIEDEALCUNA MANUTENZIONEIN QUANTOIL
a circa metà dell'intera corsa. Accertarsi che l'interno SOFFIETTOE' STATOTESTATOPERMIGLIAIADI MANOVRE.
del corpo sia completamente pulito. Eventuali impurità La fuoriuscita di fluido dalla camera stoppa segnala una rottura accidentale del soffietto
dovranno essere rimosse per assicurare un corretto (6). In attesa di riparare o sostituire la valvola serrare i dadi del premistoppa.
funzionamento, se si dispone di aria compressa utilizzarla Per aggiungere altra baderna ad impianto non in pressione e temperatura, svitare i dadi
per una migliore pulizia. del premistoppa, inserire altra badema e serrare nuovamente i dadi.
Verificare che le flange ove sarà inserita abbiano i fori Con l'utilizzo della controtenuta è possibile l'aggiunta di altra baderna.ad impianto in
in asse, siano parallele e non vi sia troppo o poco spazio pressione e temperatura, svitando completamente la vite di bloccaggio (19)e la vite limitatrice
tra di esse tenendo conto dello spessore delle guamlzioni di alzata (16) (se provvista) avvalersi della controtenuta ricavata sullo stelo forzando la
impiegate, del loro naturale appiattimento dopo il manovra in apertura, accertarsi della funzionalità della stessa ed eseguire le operazioni
serraggio dei dadi nonchè delle tolleranze sugli precedentemente descritte. Ciò dev'essere eseguitò entro breve periodo dalla rottura del
scartamenti indicate dalla norma EN 558.1. soffietto poichè il fluido potrebbe rende~e inutilìzZabile la funzionalità della controtenuta.
La valvola deve essere montata secondo la direzione Se necessario la valvola può essere smontata co~pletamente utilizzando utensili standard.
del flusso indicato dalla freccia rileva bile sul corpo. E' consigliabile economicamente riparare le: valvol~ solo per i igrandi diametri.
Fissare la valvola nella corretta posizione della linea e Prima di riasserriblarla, ruotare il volantino di due giri in a~ertura, verificare che i piani di
ricordarsi di inserire le guarnizioni tra le flange tenuta siano accuratamente puliti e non danneggiati e che la baderna (14),dopo aver Inserito
centrandole il più possibile sul risalto, il quale dovrà il nuovo kit,e le ~uarnizioni (20)siano integre in ogni loro parte; diversamente è consiglia bile
essere pulito per permettere la corretta tenuta. sostituirle. Ogni valvola viene fornita con istruzioni di funzionamento. ~
Inserire i bulloni nei fori delle flange e serrar1i mantenendo ~ . ! . '-
una frequenza diametralmente altemata (per una migliore THIS KIND OF VALVE NEEDS NO MAINTENANCE SINCE THE BELLOWS HAS BEEN TESTED
deformazione delle guamizioni). Controllare il corretto FORTOUS~NDSMANOEUVRES. .., -.
funzionamento aprendo e richiudendo completamente The leakagè of fluid from the stuffing box indicate the accidental breaking of the bellows (6).
la valvola per due o tre volte. Waiting to repair or replace the valve, tighten the gland nuts.
in order to add new packing whith plant not in pressure neither temperature, loosen the gland nuts,
Before to assemble the valve at the pipeline, open it until fIt new packing and tighten again the nuts.
about half-stroke. Check inside the body to be completely Using the backseat it is possible to add more P.8cking when the plant is working, untighten completely
clean, possible impurities have to be removed in order to the locking set screw (21) and the rise limlter (22) (if provided), use the backseat on the stem
ensure a right functioning. If compressed air is at your forcing the opening manoeuvre, check its funciona1ity and act following the above mentioned
disposal, use it far a better cleaning.
The counter-flanges of the pipeline must be parallel and
have aligned holes. Check the space betweenthem, keeping
operations. This must be carried out within a short term trom the bellows breaking since the fluid
could damage the functionality of the backseat. -
If necessary the valve can be completely disassembled using standard tools.
into account the gaskets and their flattering after bolts closing
(it should not be too much or too little) and face to face It is economically advisable to repair the valve only for big sizes. ...,
~
tolerances as per EN 558-1 standard. Before to assemble it again, open the valve at two handwheel tums, check if the sealing seats are
The valve must be assembled following the direction indicated carefully clean and not damaged; checK"if eàch part of the gaskets is integrai, otherwise it is
by the arrow on the body. Fix the valve in the right position
at the pipeline and remember to insert the gaskets between
recommended to replace them.-Funçtioning instructions are supplied together with each valve.
- -
the flanges centring them as much as possible on the raised
face.
l"'REéoMMEN6ED ~SPARÈ PAm-S
PARTI DI RICAMBIO C.ONS-IGLIATE
r'"
L
.," ~
~
.:-
J
The raised face have to be clean to allow a correct tightness. .
.I
Fit the bolts in flanges holes and tighten them maintaining l " I '-
a diametrically opposed seguence (far a better deforrnation Baderna (14). ~uarnizioni ~20)
I
l , a ,
.
~
of the gaskets). Check the nght functioning of the valve with
two or three complete open-close operations.
Packing
(14)- Gaskets (20) 1
l l
1 ~ "\
La M/VAL SRL $i riserva .di 3f1porlare modifiche senza 3IculI,'f1reavvis(\
a ..
(.
'~ ' ,°. "
VALVOLAAFLUSSOAWlATO- VITE ESTERNA PN 40
-
CON SOFFIETTO ESENTE MANUTENZIONE
STREAMUNED FLOWVALVE - OlJrSlDE SCREW PN 40
wrn-I BELLOWS - MAlNTENANCE FREE
CARATTERISTICHE
~
MIVAL
FEATURES
5- ~ ~-
1
3;46/R' ~
" Parabolic dist
I ti
l 346/E
I
Q IBala11ced disco
-
-- ,~
1
"
.
.
~"'
Guarnizi~ne ~nter~mbiabile di PTFE sull'o~ore (max 180°C). . f. \
, ;~;aIl
"f
W'-I
ftID.ì1 ,
346fT
1
t'
Interchangeable l'
PTFE gasket on t,bedisc (max 180°C). ': ,.
l' ~ ~..
l
I ,r . AY!)(j ~\"
';l Ottu.r---;ptore
s;';'i-a~tom~on funzione di valvola di ritegno e chiusura.
34~ /A
~~ ti.
'"
--\.SDNR disc (check + on/off function)
\~. .t'~
--i Ottura;ore parabolico con guamizione intercambiabile di PTFE (max 180 °c). ,\,
'
'~?iJl~! ! .
346/RT
l
A RICHIESTA I ON REQUEST
Parabolic disc with interchangeable PTFE gasket (max 180°C). '\ I~
t.
\J
I~"--"
.
F(",~,~ . ,"" t'
Diametri sugeriori
Flange con forature speciali
Volantino alveolato per comando a distanza tramite catena
Attuatore pneumatico S.E. o D.E. - motorizzata con accessori
Sistema di lucchettaggio Verniciatura nitro GRIGIO ARGENTO RAL 7001
Sedi di tenuta stellita1e Nitrocellulose painting SILVER GREY RAL 7001
Attacchi a saldare di testa BW oppure a tasca SW
Bigger sizes
Flanges with special drillings
Chain-wheel for remote manoeuvre
Pneumatic actuator S.A. or DA - electric actuator with fittings
Padlock device
Stellite overlay on seat and disc
BW or SW connections
DIMENSIONI E PESI
- - - ----
.- OIMENSIONS D
ANO---WEIGHTS
- - --- - --- ---
DN L
- ---
H V Kg Kv.
mm mm mm mm mm m3/h
-15 95
1_0~5
13'0
15b~
2"30-
=ft3~
-f2s-:::'
J:t5~ ~5..4~i&S
4.8' -
:4--:"8 :z:
~o
-2'5 115 16'0" 240.
lI:i:Ii
- 12~5 6".8 12":'2-
~2 1'W~ iiI:ii:JI 1j3Ò- '='~8 ~~ 1?.5;. -===g..~l -1~~5--
~'O 150- -2b'(j~ ---277"- 1'5.0. ~2':'"9. ~ 27~
~5P. 1.65
"'::::::il
2_30=
o.iiiiiiiiii:::2YO~
~~7 ~ J5.Q' '"""":fSA =::1144.'3:::
=':65- -~85
-
-373.- .ioo':::!!to. ~2:r 81"'"
l1:::::::::li
-I:Io
'1''00
- -,
~'25
0=:1
200
-235 ='3"50'" 1
~:1~'"
CI' ~1-°.. ~4P9:
=310 377 r==:::11 2150
i10
"". =
4.§.~:.--=300
:2"50""'"
"'31
~5
-
115~
1'8~
70_2.72~5:: - -
-
--:1,50~ L,:,,~..Oq\ 480 5J6 350 99_382.7..
_200,
- 1;'37..5,;;,- 600 - - 633 ~~O 188_690.6-
250"'1- 450 - 730 785 500 275 1086
CONDIZIONI DI ESERCIZIO
WORKING CONOITIONS
~'.. -
D'N
SIZE
.Pressione ammissib'ii'é
A//owab/~ pressure
.
Massima temperatura d'esercizio
al variare della pressione
Max working temperature
[mm] [bar] re/atfd to~lhe_p/ess,-!r.e. ..-
L ".:I r- '"" C lo..,. ... ...
~"5~25~ ,,4.0"" '!::li = ""-1O°CL+50°C c:::
= "'=
::::::I1§-:4~:~
= - +11J0°C
~ 5-250;.J
.:==:!I~:g~
~30t~ ~ ~+~to~ =
1~5-250 ~2~.8== ~ao_o°c
_15-25.0- .
=23..3.-- .. . ~
+4.0.0":C
f2R\
~
MIVAL
FILTRO A IY'I RACCOGLITORE DIIMPURITA' PN 16
'V' SEDIMENT COUECTING STRAINER PN 16
COSTRUZIONE
CONSTRUCTlON
-......
POS DENOMINAZIONE MATERIALE PART NAME MATERIAL
I
'-.~
7 TAPPODI SPURGO..r-- ACCIAIO
f ,-'.... .:J
...
,
11
..~ ~ .:J .', .::::1
.
.
-
DRAIN PLJJG \ STEEL
",. ~ . L,
~~
...
--w
.. .-- --.I
A RICHIESTA I \. , L~
..~
....
~ -
I
I
,..
ON REQUEST
--:='
"'-""" I
~-~~ ~ I
I
I
I
I
I
I
INSTALLAZIONE I I
MANUTENZIONE
INSTALLATION MAINTENANCE
Prima di montare il filtro accertarsi che l'interno del Il filtro viene normalmente installato per impedire che impurità presenti nell'impianto
corpo sia completamente pulito. Eventuali corpi estranei possano danneggiare apparecchi montati a valle quali valvole di regolazione, di chiusura,
dovranno essere rimossI per assicurare una corretta ecc.
filtrazione. Il cestello del filtro (2) deve essere periodicamente pulito. Per effettuare tale operazione:
Il filtrodeve essere montato secondo la direzione del svitare i dadi (5),togliere il coperchio (4), pulire il cestello.
flusso indicato dalla freccia rileva bile sul corpo, può Prima di rimontarlo, verificare che i piani di tenuta siano accuratamente puliti e non
essere montato sia orizzontalmente che verticalmente, danneggiati e che la guarnizione (3) sia integra in ogni parte; diversamente\è consigliabile
ma non con flusso dal basso verso l'alto.
Verificare che le flange ove sarà inserito abbiano i fori
in asse, siano parallele e non vi sia troppo o poco spazio
sostituirla.
Il tappo di scarico (7) filettato sul coperchio (4) viene"normalmente --' 1 ~
fornito su filtri con
diametro superiore al DN 65, lo stesso è utile per svuotare il liquido residuo rimasto all'intemo
tra di esse tenendo conto dello spessore delle guarnizioni
impiegate e del loro naturale appiattimento dopo il
del filtro, pnma di togliere il coperchio.""
Se necessario il filtro può essére"smontato
\ ~~
completamente
\ \ \
utilizzando utensili standard.
serraggio dei dadi nonchè delle tolleranze sugli
scartamenti indicati dalla norma EN558-1. E' possibile togliere il tappo di spùrgo sostituehdolò co~ !,In'rtbinetto di staricJ per facilitare
Fissare il filtro nella corretta posizione della linea e lo svuotamento (vedere dis. 1), TALE RUBINETTO DOVRA ESSERE DI MATERIALE IDONEO
~
ricordarsi di inserire le guarnizioni tra le flange AL FLUIDO, ALLA TEMPERATURA E'ALLA lRESSIONE DI ESERCIZIO.
\ \
centrandole il più possibile sui risalti, i quali dovranno
essere puliti per permettere la corretta tenuta. equi~ pments ihstalled belòw, that is on/off valves, re gulating valves, et .
~ -J -. ~ . '
t-J
~ \--
Th~ strai~r~is n~rrnally\assJmble~, at Pi~eline\ in o~der\0 avoid"'fue im~urities to damage the
Inserire i bulloni nei fori delle flange e serrarli mantenendo The screen (2) fias to be periodically cleaned. , ( \
una frequenza diametralmente alternata (per la migliore To car'r,y outJhis op:atio~: loosen th'e body/&ver screws.(6);""take off the cover (4), clean the
deformazione delle guarnizioni). screen. Befare to a'ssemble it again, 'check if the,sealing areas are carefully cleaned and not
Before to assemble the strainer at the pipeline check inside damaged; check t.
if
,. t
each part ofthe gasKet is intégral, otherwise it is recommended to replace il.
.. .. .. ..-
the body to be completely clean possible extraneous matters If necessary the strainer can be completely disassembled using standard tools.
have to be removed in order to ensure a right filtering. The threJded pi'ug on the co~r, standard provided for strainers from DN 50 up, is useful to
The strainer must be assembled following the direction discharge the fluid that remains in the strainers.
indicated by the arrow on the body, it can be assembled It is possible to assemble a drain cock instead of the plug, in order to make easier the draining of
both horizontally and vertically but not with flow direction the strainer (see pic. 1), THIS COCK WILL BE MADE OF A MATERIAL SUITABLE TO THE
from bottom to top. FLUID, WORKING PRESSURE ANO TEMPERATURE.
The counter-flanges of the pipeline must be parallel and
have aligned holes. Check the space between them, keeping
into account the gaskets and theirflattering after bolts closing
(it should not be too much or too little) and face to face
tolerances as per EN-558-1 standard.
Fix the strainer in the right position at the pipeline and
remember to insert the gaskets between the flanges centring
them as much as possible on the raised faces.
The raised faces have to be clean to allow a correct tightness.
Fit the bolts in flanges holes and tighten them maintaining
a diametrically opposed sequence (for a better deforrnation
of the gaskets).
~
\.r"66\
, ~
FILTRO A IY'I RACCOGLITORE DIIMPURITA' PN 16
'V' SEDIMENT COUECTING STRAINER PN 16
CARATTERISTICHE
~
MIVAL
FEATURES
Diametri superiori
Flange;con forafu~e speciali I
Tappo di "spurgo sul cop~rchio per DN < 65
Cestello con foràture dlve"rse
Cestello di acciaio inox AISI.316 I
~-
I ~
Rubinetto con pòrtagommaper spurgo facilitato
BiggerS~es \ \ \
Flanges with special~drillings~
I)
,
1
\---l
Drain plu9'on the cover for DN < 65
Screèn wlth different kinds of drilling
-
AISI 316 stainless steel screen
Cock"with tul5e nolder for easy drain
I
DIMENSIONI E PESI
OIMENSIONS ANO WEIGHTS L
LDN D L
mm mm mm
:z:
u ~
(167\
RK... D Betriebsanleitung 808519-06
Rückschlagventile RK
Installation Instructions 808519-06
Non-Return Valves RK
F Instructions de montage et
de mise en service 808519-06
Clapets de retenue RK
E Instrucciones de montaje y
servicio 808519-06
Válvulas de retención RK
I Manuale di Istruzioni 808519-06
Valvole di non ritorno RK
Sicherheitshinweis D
Das Gerät darf nur von geeigneten und unterwiesenen Personen montiert und in Betrieb
genommen werden. Wartungs- und Umrüstarbeiten dürfen nur von beauftragten
Beschäftigten vorgenommen werden, die eine spezielle Unterweisung erhalten haben.
Bestimmungsgemäßer Gebrauch
Einsatz in Rohrleitungen zum Verhindern des Rückfließens von Medien innerhalb der
zulässigen Druck- und Temperaturgrenzen unter Beachtung der chemischen und
korrosiven Einflüsse auf das Druckgerät.
Die Medienbeständigkeit der Armatur muss für die Einsatzbedingungen geprüft werden.
Achtung
Das Typenschild kennzeichnet die technischen Eigenschaften des
Gerätes. Ein Gerät ohne gerätespezifisches Typenschild darf nicht in
Betrieb genommen oder betrieben werden!
Gefahr D
Die Armatur steht während des Betriebs unter Druck!
Wenn Flanschverbindungen oder Verschlussschrauben gelöst werden, strömen
heißes Wasser, Dampf, ätzende Flüssigkeiten oder toxische Gase aus. Schwere
Verbrühungen und Verbrennungen am ganzen Körper sind möglich! Schwere
Vergiftungen sind möglich!
Montage- oder Wartungsarbeiten nur in drucklosem Zustand durchführen!
Die Armatur ist während des Betriebs heiß oder tiefkalt!
Schwere Verbrennungen an Händen und Armen sind möglich.
Montage- oder Wartungsarbeiten nur bei Raumtemperatur durchführen!
Scharfkantige Innenteile können Schnittverletzungen an den Händen verursachen!
Beim Wechseln der Armatur Arbeitshandschuhe tragen!
ATEX (Atmosphère Explosible) D
Die Geräte weisen keine potenzielle Zündquelle auf und fallen daher nicht unter die
Explosionsschutz-Richtlinie 94/9/EG.
Einsetzbar in Ex-Zonen 0, 1, 2, 20, 21, 22 (1999/92/EG).
Die Geräte erhalten keine Ex-Kennzeichnung.
Technische Daten D
Einsatzgrenzen siehe Kennzeichnung bzw. Typenschildangaben (Druckklasse PN/Class,
Werkstoffnummer, Aufkleber für Weichdichtung, Federwerkstoff).
Reduzierte Temperaturgrenzen bei Verwendung von elastischen Dichtungen
und bei einigen Federwerkstoffen beachten.
Typ PN / CL DN PMA / TMA [bar] / [°C]
RK 70 6 /- 15 - 100 6 / -30 0,5 / 130
RK 70 6 /- 125 - 200 6 / -10 0,5 / 130
RK 71 16 /- 15 - 100 16 / -60 13 / 250
RK 41 16 /- 15 - 100 16 / -60 13 / 250
RK 41 16 /- 125 - 200 16 / -10 13 / 300
RK 44 16 /- 15 - 100 16 / -200 13 / 250
RK 44 16 /- 125 - 200 16 / -10 13 / 250
RK 44S 16 /- 15 - 100 16 / -200 16 / 90
RK 76 40 / 300 15 - 100 49,6 / -10 31,6 / 300
RK 86 40 / 300 15 - 100 51 / -10 36,9 / 350
RK 86 40 / 300 125 - 200 51 / -10 34,5 / 400
Fortsetzung nächste Seite
Technische Daten Fortsetzung D
Typ PN / CL DN PMA / TMA [bar] / [°C]
RK 86A 40 / 300 15 - 200 49,6 / -200 24 / 550
RK 16A 40 / 300 15 - 100 49,6 / -200 24 / 550
RK 16C 40 / 300 15 - 100 49,6 / -200 29,3 / 400
RK 26A 40 / 300 15 - 100 49,6 / -200 25 / 550
RK 49 160 / – 15 - 65 160 / -10 110,8 / 550
RK 49 160 / – 80 - 200 160 / -10 55,3 / 530
RK 29A 63 / – 15 - 200 63 / -200 44,2 / 500
RK 29A 100 / – 15 - 200 100 / -200 70,2 / 500
RK 29A 160 / – 15 - 200 160 / -200 112,4 / 500
RK 29A 250 / – 15 - 200 250 / -200 175,6 / 500
RK 29A 320 / – 15 - 200 320 / -200 224,7 / 500
RK 29A 400 / – 15 - 200 400 / -200 280,9 / 500
RK 29A – / 400 15 - 200 66,2 / -200 37,6 / 500
RK 29A – / 600 15 - 200 99,3 / -200 56,6 / 500
RK 29A – / 900 15 - 200 148,9 / -200 84,7 / 500
RK 29A – / 1500 15 - 200 248,2 / -200 140,9 / 500
RK 29A – / 2500 15 - 200 413,7 / -200 235 / 500
Systembeschreibung D
Rückschlagventile RK mit Spiralring-Zentrierung oder Gehäuse-Zentrierung. Für Ventile
mit Schließfeder ist die Einbaulage beliebig. Ventile ohne Schließfeder nur in vertikale
Leitungen mit Strömungsrichtung von unten nach oben montieren.
TOP
1 2 3 4
Typenschild / Kennzeichnung D
Typ: RK ...
DN:... Typ: RK ...
PN:... DN:...
.......... PN:...
..........
1/02 2002
1 2002
02
Konformitätserklärung D
Für die Geräte RK... erklären wir die Konformität mit folgender europäischer
Richtlinie:
■ Druckgeräte-Richtlinie 97/23/EG vom 29.05.1997, soweit die Geräte nicht unter
die Ausnahmeregel nach Artikel 3.3 fallen.
■ Angewandtes Konformitätsbewertungsverfahren: Anhang III, Modul H, überprüft
durch die benannte Stelle 0525.
Bei einer nicht mit uns abgestimmten Änderung des Gerätes verliert diese Erklärung
ihre Gültigkeit.
Bremen, den 11. 02.2005
GESTRA AG
Attention
The name plate specifies the technical characteristics of the equipment.
Do not commission or operate a device without a name plate!
Danger t
The valve is under pressure during operation.
When loosening flanged connections or sealing plugs, hot water, steam, corrosive
fluids or toxic gases may escape. This presents the risk of severe burns and scalds to
the whole body or severe cases or poisoning.
Installation and maintenance work should only be carried out when the system is
depressurized.
The valve becomes hot or extremely cold during operation. This presents the risk of
severe burns to hands and arms. Installation and maintenance work should only be
carried out at room temperatures.
Sharp edges on internals present a danger of cuts to hands. Always wear industrial
gloves for installation and maintenance work.
ATEX Directive 94/9/EC, 1999/92/EC t
The equipment does not have its own potential source of ignition and is therefore
not subject to the Directive 94/9/EC.
The equipment can be used in the following explosive zones: 0, 1, 2, 20, 21
and 22.
The equipment does not require an Ex marking.
Technical Data t
For pressure ratings see marking or name plate (pressure class PN/Class, material
number, sticker for soft seal, spring material)
Observe lower temperature ratings for equipment with elastic seals and certain spring
materials.
Type PN / CL DN PMA / TMA [bar] / [°C]
RK 70 6 /- 15 - 100 6 / -30 0.5 / 130
RK 70 6 /- 125 - 200 6 / -10 0.5 / 130
RK 71 16 /- 15 - 100 16 / -60 13 / 250
RK 41 16 /- 15 - 100 16 / -60 13 / 250
RK 41 16 /- 125 - 200 16 / -10 13 / 300
RK 44 16 /- 15 - 100 16 / -200 13 / 250
RK 44 16 /- 125 - 200 16 / -10 13 / 250
RK 44S 16 /- 15 - 100 16 / -200 16 / 90
RK 76 40 / 300 15 - 100 49.6 / -10 31.6 / 300
RK 86 40 / 300 15 - 100 51 / -10 36.9 / 350
RK 86 40 / 300 125 - 200 51 / -10 34.5 / 400
P.T.O.
Technical Data – continued – t
Type PN / CL DN PMA / TMA [bar] / [°C]
RK 86A 40 / 300 15 - 200 49.6 / -200 24 / 550
RK 16A 40 / 300 15 - 100 49.6 / -200 24 / 550
RK 16C 40 / 300 15 - 100 49.6 / -200 29.3 / 400
RK 26A 40 / 300 15 - 100 49.6 / -200 25 / 550
RK 49 160 / – 15 - 65 160 / -10 110.8 / 550
RK 49 160 / – 80 - 200 160 / -10 55.3 / 530
RK 29A 63 / – 15 - 200 63 / -200 44.2 / 500
RK 29A 100 / – 15 - 200 100 / -200 70.2 / 500
RK 29A 160 / – 15 - 200 160 / -200 112.4 / 500
RK 29A 250 / – 15 - 200 250 / -200 175.6 / 500
RK 29A 320 / – 15 - 200 320 / -200 224.7 / 500
RK 29A 400 / – 15 - 200 400 / -200 280.9 / 500
RK 29A – / 400 15 - 200 66.2 / -200 37.6 / 500
RK 29A – / 600 15 - 200 99.3 / -200 56.6 / 500
RK 29A – / 900 15 - 200 148.9 / -200 84.7 / 500
RK 29A – / 1500 15 - 200 248.2 / -200 140.9 / 500
RK 29A – / 2500 15 - 200 413.7 / -200 235 / 500
Description t
Non-return valve RK with spiral centering ring or self-centering body. Installation in any
position. Exception: Valves without spring can only be installed in vertical lines with
upward flow.
TOP
1 2 3 4
Name Plate / Marking t
Type: RK ...
DN:... Type: RK ...
PN:... DN:...
.......... PN:...
..........
1/02 2002
1 2002
02
Declaration of Conformity t
We hereby declare that the pressure equipment RK... conforms to the following
European Directive:
n Pressure Equipment Directive (PED) 97/23/EC of 29 May 1997 (except for
equipment excluded from the scope of the PED according to section 3.3).
n Applied conformity assessment procedure: Annex III, Module H, verified by the
Notified Body 0525.
This declaration is no longer valid if modifications are made to the equipment
without consultation with us.
Bremen, 11th February 2005
GESTRA AG
Utilisation conforme
Le clapet de retenue s’utilise sur la tuyauterie pour éviter le reflux des fluides dans les
limites de pression et température admissibles.
Il est nécessaire de vérifier la compatibilité entre le fluide et les matériaux consituant le
clapet pour en assurer la longévité.
Attention
La plaque d’identification indique les propriétés techniques de
l’appareil. Un appareil sans plaque d’identification spécifique ne doit
pas être mis en service ou exploité!
Danger F
En service le clapet de retenue est sous pression.
Lors du desserrage des brides ou des bouchons, de l’eau bouillante, de la vapeur, des
liquides ou gaz corrosifs ou toxiques peuvent s’échapper.
Il y a risque d’empoisonnement et de brûlures graves sur tout le corps. Avant
d’effectuer des travaux d’installation ou d’entretien, décomprimer l’installation.
Pendant le fonctionnement de l’installation le clapet de retenue est très chaud ou très
froid.
Il y a risque de brûlures aux mains et aux bras. Avant d’effectuer des travaux
d’installation ou d’entretien vérifier que le purgeur est à température ambiante.
Les pièces intérieures à arêtes vives peuvent causer des coupures aux mains.
Porter des gants de travail pour remplacer les pièces internes.
Directive ATEX 94/9/CE, 1999/92/CE F
Les équipements ne disposent pas de leur propre source potentielle d’inflammation,
par conséquent ils ne sont pas concernés par la directive
94/9/CE.
Les appareils peuvent être utilisés pour des zones explosibles 0, 1, 2, 20, 21
et 22.
Les équipements ne portent pas le marquage Ex.
Données techniques F
Plage d’utilisation – voir plaque d’identification ou marque (classe de pression PN/Class,
nuance matériaux, nuance joint souple et ressort).
Observer les restrictions (réduction des limites de température) pour des appareils avec des
joints élastiques ou certains matériaux de ressort.
Type PN / CL DN PMA / TMA [bar] / [°C]
RK 70 6 /- 15 - 100 6 / -30 0,5 / 130
RK 70 6 /- 125 - 200 6 / -10 0,5 / 130
RK 71 16 /- 15 - 100 16 / -60 13 / 250
RK 41 16 /- 15 - 100 16 / -60 13 / 250
RK 41 16 /- 125 - 200 16 / -10 13 / 300
RK 44 16 /- 15 - 100 16 / -200 13 / 250
RK 44 16 /- 125 - 200 16 / -10 13 / 250
RK 44S 16 /- 15 - 100 16 / -200 16 / 90
RK 76 40 / 300 15 - 100 49,6 / -10 31,6 / 300
RK 86 40 / 300 15 - 100 51 / -10 36,9 / 350
RK 86 40 / 300 125 - 200 51 / -10 34,5 / 400
TSVP
Données techniques – suite – F
Type PN / CL DN PMA / TMA [bar] / [°C]
RK 86A 40 / 300 15 - 200 49,6 / -200 24 / 550
RK 16A 40 / 300 15 - 100 49,6 / -200 24 / 550
RK 16C 40 / 300 15 - 100 49,6 / -200 29,3 / 400
RK 26A 40 / 300 15 - 100 49,6 / -200 25 / 550
RK 49 160 / – 15 - 65 160 / -10 110,8 / 550
RK 49 160 / – 80 - 200 160 / -10 55,3 / 530
RK 29A 63 / – 15 - 200 63 / -200 44,2 / 500
RK 29A 100 / – 15 - 200 100 / -200 70,2 / 500
RK 29A 160 / – 15 - 200 160 / -200 112,4 / 500
RK 29A 250 / – 15 - 200 250 / -200 175,6 / 500
RK 29A 320 / – 15 - 200 320 / -200 224,7 / 500
RK 29A 400 / – 15 - 200 400 / -200 280,9 / 500
RK 29A – / 400 15 - 200 66,2 / -200 37,6 / 500
RK 29A – / 600 15 - 200 99,3 / -200 56,6 / 500
RK 29A – / 900 15 - 200 148,9 / -200 84,7 / 500
RK 29A – / 1500 15 - 200 248,2 / -200 140,9 / 500
RK 29A – / 2500 15 - 200 413,7 / -200 235 / 500
Déscription F
Clapets de retenue RK avec bague de centrage spécial ou avec corps autorisant le
centrage. Montage en toutes positions, à la seule exception des clapets sans ressort de
rappel. Pour ces clapets, montage uniquement sur tuyauterie verticale, avec sens de
passage de bas en haut.
TOP
1 2 3 4
Plaque d’identification / Marquage F
Type: RK ...
DN:... Type: RK ...
PN:... DN:...
.......... PN:...
..........
1/02 2002
1 2002
02
Déclaration de conformité F
Nous déclarons la conformité des appareils soumis à pression RK... avec la
Directive Européene suivante:
n Directive Equipements Soumis à Pression (DESP) 97/23/EC du 29 mai 1997
(sauf les cas d’exclusion suivant l’article 3.3).
n Procédure d’évaluation de la conformité appliquée : annexe III, module H, vérifié
par l’organisme notifié 0525.
Cette déclaration n’est plus valable si une modification est apportée à l’appareil
sans notre accord.
Atención
En la placa de características están especificadas las propiedades téc-
nicas del aparato. ¡Nunca poner en operación ni trabajar con un aparato
que carezca de la placa de características especifica del aparato!
Peligro E
La válvula está sometida a presión durante el funcionamiento.
Al aflojar los tornillos de las bridas o los tapones de cierre podría producirse escape
de agua caliente, vapor, líquidos corrosivos o gases tóxicos. Existe el peligro de sufrir
graves quemaduras, heridas o intoxicaciones por inhalación cuando se produzca un
escape de fluido.
Los trabajos de montaje o mantenimiento sólo deben ser realizados cuando la válvula
no se encuentre sometida a presión.
Dado que en operación la válvula puede encontrarse a temperatura muy elevada o
muy baja, existe el peligro de sufrir importantes quemaduras en las manos y brazos si
se manipula sin precaución.
Los trabajos de montaje o mantenimiento deberán realizarse únicamente a
temperatura ambiente.
Las partes internas por tener terminaciones afiladas, pueden ocasionar heridas
cortantes en las manos. Utilizar siempre guantes de trabajo para realizar los
trabajos de montaje o de mantenimiento.
Directiva ATEX 94/9/EC 1999/92/EC E
Los equipos no tienen fuentes potenciales de ignición y por eso no entran en el
ámbito de aplicación la directiva 94/9/EC.
Los equipos se pueden usar en las zonas explosivas 0, 1, 2, 20, 21 y 22.
Los equipos no requieren un marcado Ex.
Datos técnicos E
Margen de aplicación – véase marcaje o placa característica (clase de presión PN/Class,
número de material, etiqueta para junta blanda, material de resorte). Tener en cuenta las
restricciones (reducción de temperatura para los aparatos con juntas blandas o para unos
materiales de resorte.
Tipo PN / CL DN PMA / TMA [bar] / [°C]
RK 70 6 /- 15 - 100 6 / -30 0,5 / 130
RK 70 6 /- 125 - 200 6 / -10 0,5 / 130
RK 71 16 /- 15 - 100 16 / -60 13 / 250
RK 41 16 /- 15 - 100 16 / -60 13 / 250
RK 41 16 /- 125 - 200 16 / -10 13 / 300
RK 44 16 /- 15 - 100 16 / -200 13 / 250
RK 44 16 /- 125 - 200 16 / -10 13 / 250
RK 44S 16 /- 15 - 100 16 / -200 16 / 90
RK 76 40 / 300 15 - 100 49,6 / -10 31,6 / 300
RK 86 40 / 300 15 - 100 51 / -10 36,9 / 350
RK 86 40 / 300 125 - 200 51 / -10 34,5 / 400
sigue al dorso
Datos técnicos – continuación – E
Tipo PN / CL DN PMA / TMA [bar] / [°C]
RK 86A 40 / 300 15 - 200 49,6 / -200 24 / 550
RK 16A 40 / 300 15 - 100 49,6 / -200 24 / 550
RK 16C 40 / 300 15 - 100 49,6 / -200 29,3 / 400
RK 26A 40 / 300 15 - 100 49,6 / -200 25 / 550
RK 49 160 / – 15 - 65 160 / -10 110,8 / 550
RK 49 160 / – 80 - 200 160 / -10 55,3 / 530
RK 29A 63 / – 15 - 200 63 / -200 44,2 / 500
RK 29A 100 / – 15 - 200 100 / -200 70,2 / 500
RK 29A 160 / – 15 - 200 160 / -200 112,4 / 500
RK 29A 250 / – 15 - 200 250 / -200 175,6 / 500
RK 29A 320 / – 15 - 200 320 / -200 224,7 / 500
RK 29A 400 / – 15 - 200 400 / -200 280,9 / 500
RK 29A – / 400 15 - 200 66,2 / -200 37,6 / 500
RK 29A – / 600 15 - 200 99,3 / -200 56,6 / 500
RK 29A – / 900 15 - 200 148,9 / -200 84,7 / 500
RK 29A – / 1500 15 - 200 248,2 / -200 140,9 / 500
RK 29A – / 2500 15 - 200 413,7 / -200 235 / 500
Descripción E
Válvulas de retención RK con anillo de centraje espiral o con cuerpo de centraje.
Instalación en cualquier posición. Excepción: Válvulas sin muelles sólo se deben
instalar en tuberías verticales con flujo ascendente.
TOP
1 2 3 4
Placa característica / Marcaje E
Tipo: RK ...
DN:... Tipo: RK ...
PN:... DN:...
.......... PN:...
..........
1/02 2002
1 2002
02
Declaración de conformidad E
Declaramos que los equipos de presión RK... cumplen con la directiva europea
siguiente:
n Directiva de Equipos a Presión (DEP) 97/23/CE del 29 mayo 1997 (excepto los
casos de exclusión según el párrafo 3.3 de la Directiva).
n Procedimiento de evaluación de conformidad aplicado: anexo III, módulo H,
verificado por el organismo notificado 0525.
Esta declaración pierde su validez en el caso de que se realicen modificaciones en
los equipos que no hayan sido acordadas con nosotros.
Uso appropriato
Le valvole RK sono valvole automatiche progettate per essere utilizzate su tubazioni per
bloccarne il flusso di ritorno. Devono essere tenuti in considerazione sia i limiti di Pressione/
Temperatura che gli effetti chimici e di corrosione del fluido utilizzato. Verificare scrupolosa
mente la resistenza alle aggressioni chimiche nelle effettive condizioni di esercizio.
Attenzione
La targhetta indica i dati tecnici dello scaricatore.
Non montare scaricatori privi di targhetta dati.
Pericolo I
Durante l’esercizio la valvola è sotto pressione.
Smontando la valvola o allentando le viti acqua calda, vapore, fluidi corrosivi o gas
tossici potranno fuoriuscire violentemente. Ciò provocherà scottature su tutto il corpo
e/o casi gravi di avvelenamento.
Questi lavori devono essere sempre eseguiti ad impianto freddo e senza pressione.
Le valvole, durante l’esercizio, possono essere estremamente calde o fredde e quindi
provocare seri danni a mani e braccia. L’installazione e la manutenzione devono
essere sempre eseguite a temperatura ambiente.
Parti interne con spigoli vivi possono causare lesioni alle mani, per questo motivo
raccomandiamo l’uso di robusti guanti da lavoro.
Direttiva ATEX 94/9//EC, 1999/92/EC I
La valvola non ha una propria sorgente di innesco e non è perciò soggetta alla
Direttiva 94/9/EC.
La valvola può essere impiegata nelle seguenti zone pericolose: 0, 1, 2, 20, 21
e 22.
La valvola non necessita di marchio Ex.
Dati tecnici I
I dati di rating Pressione possono essere rilevati sulla targhetta dati (classe di pressione
PN/Class, codice materiale del corpo e della molla, materiale della eventuale sede soffice).
Verificare accuratamente, nel caso di basse temperature e tenuta soffice, il rating della
valvola e la compatibilità di alcuni tipi di molle.
Tipo PN / CL DN PMA / TMA [bar] / [°C]
RK 70 6 /- 15 - 100 6 / -30 0,5 / 130
RK 70 6 /- 125 - 200 6 / -10 0,5 / 130
RK 71 16 /- 15 - 100 16 / -60 13 / 250
RK 41 16 /- 15 - 100 16 / -60 13 / 250
RK 41 16 /- 125 - 200 16 / -10 13 / 300
RK 44 16 /- 15 - 100 16 / -200 13 / 250
RK 44 16 /- 125 - 200 16 / -10 13 / 250
RK 44S 16 /- 15 - 100 16 / -200 16 / 90
RK 76 40 / 300 15 - 100 49,6 / -10 31,6 / 300
RK 86 40 / 300 15 - 100 51 / -10 36,9 / 350
RK 86 40 / 300 125 - 200 51 / -10 34,5 / 400
– vedi retro –
Dati tecnici – continua – I
Tipo PN / CL DN PMA / TMA [bar] / [°C]
RK 86A 40 / 300 15 - 200 49,6 / -200 24 / 550
RK 16A 40 / 300 15 - 100 49,6 / -200 24 / 550
RK 16C 40 / 300 15 - 100 49,6 / -200 29,3 / 400
RK 26A 40 / 300 15 - 100 49,6 / -200 25 / 550
RK 49 160 / – 15 - 65 160 / -10 110,8 / 550
RK 49 160 / – 80 - 200 160 / -10 55,3 / 530
RK 29A 63 / – 15 - 200 63 / -200 44,2 / 500
RK 29A 100 / – 15 - 200 100 / -200 70,2 / 500
RK 29A 160 / – 15 - 200 160 / -200 112,4 / 500
RK 29A 250 / – 15 - 200 250 / -200 175,6 / 500
RK 29A 320 / – 15 - 200 320 / -200 224,7 / 500
RK 29A 400 / – 15 - 200 400 / -200 280,9 / 500
RK 29A – / 400 15 - 200 66,2 / -200 37,6 / 500
RK 29A – / 600 15 - 200 99,3 / -200 56,6 / 500
RK 29A – / 900 15 - 200 148,9 / -200 84,7 / 500
RK 29A – / 1500 15 - 200 248,2 / -200 140,9 / 500
RK 29A – / 2500 15 - 200 413,7 / -200 235 / 500
Descrizione I
Le valvole RK con dispositivo di centraggio a filo o con corpo sagomato possono essere
installate in qualsiasi posizione. Nel caso di valvole senza molla, queste dovranno
essere montate su linee verticali con flusso dal basso verso l’alto.
ALTO
1 2 3 4
Targhetta dati / Marcature I
Tipo: RK ...
DN:... Tipo: RK ...
PN:... DN:...
.......... PN:...
..........
1/02 2002
1 2002
02
Dichiarazione di compatibilità I
Con la presente dichiariamo che le valvole RK..., sono conformi alla direttiva
europea seguente:
n Pressure Equipment Directive (PED) No. 97/23/CE del 29 maggio 1997 (tranne
quelle escluso dalla sezione 3.3 della PED).
n Le applicazioni delle procedure di conformità: Allegato III; Modulo H, sono
eseguite dall’ Organismo Notificato 0525.
In caso di modifiche non con noi concordate questa dichiarazione perde ogni sua
validità.
Brema, 11 febbraio 2005
GESTRA AG
BONT ®
Sleeve-packed
Cocks
type RM
BONT ® Sleeve-packed Cocks
GENERAL INFORMATION SIZES (DN)
BONT® sleeve-packed cocks have "soft seal" obtained by means of Cocks are currently manufactured for the nominal passage diame-
a packing sleeve fitted in the body between body and plug. The ters 5 mm to 25 mm, that is 1/4" to 1"
advantages of this system have been verified by very many users
that have installed millions of cocks of this type all over the world in MATERIAL SCHEDULES
all operative fields. In Fig 406 are indicated the Material Schedules currently manufac-
Tha advantages of this design are: tured. Boldface are given the ones of major diffusion.
- circular through flow passage,
- very long life of body and plug, since the elastic packing sleeve is RATINGS
interposed between these two pieces,
In Fig. 406 are indicated the maximum operating conditions.
- no sensitivity to changes of temperature,
Conditions for cocks of smaller size (DN) are:
- no possible plug seizure,
- best performances at low and high temperature up to 350 ÷ 400 °C,
- possibility of restoring thightness during service by compressing DN PN ASME Temp.
Type
packing sleeve, mm bar Class °C
- complete interchangeability of worn pieces,
- packing sleeve can be replaced by unskilled personnel without RM1. 5 160 900 400
removing the cock from the vessel. After sleeve change the cock
is as good as new. RM2. 8 160 900 400
Table 2 - Technical data for Sleeve-packed cocks type RM 413 and RM 415
DIMENSIONS DIMENSIONS Weight
Packing Thread
Plug Material
TYPE sleeve Nominal d A1 D A A2 B C Q M Fig.
Dia. Schedules approx.
type bore BSP mm mm mm mm mm mm mm mm
mm kg
RM1.413 M1.2 1/4” 12 1/4” G o 3/8” G - - 70 - 45 76 8 100 52, 63, 64 413 0,35
RM2.413 M2.2 3/8” 18 3/8” G o 1/2” G - - 80 - 54 95 10 130 52, 63, 64 413 1,20
RM1.415 M1.2 5 12 3/8” G 12 9 60 85 45 76 8 100 52, 63, 64 415 0,40
RM2.415 M2.2 8 18 1/2” G 16 11 80 110 54 95 10 130 52, 63, 64 415 1,00
Table 3 - Technical data for Sleeve-packed cocks type RM 416 and RM 417
DIMENSIONS DIMENSIONS
Weight
Packing Thread Flange Dimensions
Material
TYPE sleeve Nominal Plug Fig.
bore Dia. Schedules approx.
type d1 d2 A3 A4 F D b E A A1 A2 B C M
mm mm kg
BSP BSP mm mm mm mm mm mm mm mm mm mm mm mm
BONT ® Page 2
BONT ® Sleeve-packed Cocks, straight through
- type RM 413 female screwed
- tipo RM 415 male screwed
1 Type RM 413 is usually supplied female screwed to UNI 338, DIN 3 Body length (A) is not binding.
259, BSP 2779. Type RM 415 is usually supplied male screwed to
UNI 338, DIN 259, BSP 2779, with 1 union nut and 1 union tailpi- 4 Weights shown in Technical table refer to Material Schedule 52.
pe. On request and with overprice, second union nut and tailpipe
are available. 5 Handle is usually supplied with each cock.
2 Depending on our patterns and forgings, connections can be 6 For Material Schedule and operating conditions, please refer to
machined with different threads (e.g. ANSI B2.1) or with socked page 2.
weld ends (ANSI B 16.11).
1 These cocks are usually supplied screwed to UNI 338, DIN 259, 4 Each cock RM 417 has a screw with needle seal on the testing
BSP 2779. Sealing is performed: flange, to avoid dangerous fluid outflow in case of wrong opera-
- on pressure gauge side: at the bottom of female connection tion.
- on the other side: at the end of male connection.
5 Handle is usually supplied with each cock.
2 Depending on our patterns and forgings, connections can be
machined with different threads (e.g. ANSI B2.1). 6 For Material Schedule and operating conditions, please refer to
3 On request and with overprice, cocks with rotating female connec- page 2
tion (instead of integral female connection) on pressure gauge
side are available, to get pressure gauge exact orientation.
BONT ® Page 3
BONT ® Sleeve-packed Cocks
Description and
Maintenance instructions
Fig. 404
1 Body 5 Eyelets
2 Plug 6 Tightening nut
3 Ring 7 Screw and washer
4 Packing sleeve 8 Handle
Maintenance Reassembling
- After cock is first put into service or after change of packing sleeve, - Insert ring into body. Insert new packing sleeve, making sure that
OPEN THE COCK AND FOLLOW UP THE PACKING SLEEVE by its ridge enters the relevant groove of the body.
the tightening nut (6). Repeat operation during the first hours and - Press plug and keep in place by handle, washer and screw (Fig.
if any trace of leakage would appear. For long life of packing 404)
sleeve, compress it slightly and often, rather than strongly and - Smear tightening nut (6) with a thin layer of graphitized grease and
once in a while. screw up.
- Should be impossible to reach perfect sealing in this way, disman-
tle the cock and repack. Spare parts
- In the pattern of Fig. 404, to remove the handle from its place can - When ordering spare parts please state:
be prejudicial to right operating of the cock. - cock type and figure number
- outside diameter of plug
Dismantling - item number according list
- Make sure the line is NOT under pression. - material
- Remove tightening nut (6). - packing sleeves, on page 11.
- Remove screw, washer and handle (Fig. 404)
- Tap top of plug with a wooden or aluminium mallet until plug is out Kit of tools to facilitate the reassembling are available on request.
of body.
- Examine plug and body for signs of scoring or damage which could
affect cock tight seal. Clean carefully all parts.
BONT ® Page 4
BONT ® Sleeve-packed Cocks
Spare Packing Sleeve
DN
DIMENSIONS
TYPE passage nominal bore
d d D1 D2 L
mm pollici mm mm mm
M1.2 6 1/4” 12 18 23
M2.2 8 5/16” 18 26 32
M3.2 10 3/8” 22 33 37
M4.2 15 1/2” 28 38 44
M5.2 20 3/4” 40 52 56
M6.2 25 1” 50 62 65
Packing sleeves type M3.2, M4.2, M5.2, M6.2 are only spare parts for old pattern cocks no more manufactured by us after year 1972
ND
DIMENSIONS
TYPE passage nominal bore
d D1 D2 L
mm mm mm mm
M1.4 3 12 18 23
M2.4 6 18 26 32
M3.4 8 22 33 37
M4.4 10 28 38 44
M5.4 15 40 52 56
M6.4 20 50 62 65
Packing sleeves type M3.4, M4.4, M5.4, M6.4 are only spare parts for old pattern cocks no more manufactured by us after year 1972
ND
DIMENSIONS
TYPE passage nominal bore
d D1 D2 L
mm mm mm mm
M2.8 5 18 26 43
Packing sleeve type M2.8 is only spare part for old pattern cock no more manufactured by us after year 1972
QUALITY / PACKING SLEEVE MATERIAL STANDARD GRAFITE STANDARD PTFE GLASS REINFORCED
BONT ® Page 5
In 1905, Cesare Bonetti opened a shop in Milan, Italy, to After two expansions, in 1969, the company moved to its new
manufacture small hand valves to meet the local demand. In headquarters in Garbagnate Milanese, where Bonetti contin-
the early 1920s, this small but growing firm, took on a new ues its passion for growth through research, development
industrial look and moved into the production and sale of and design accuracy.
industrial valves. This, in turn, increases its opportunities to continue to grow
and expand.
BONETTI®, by this time, had become a well known company
for the production of piston valves, sleeve-packed cocks, and Facilities:
glass level gauges. Subsequently, the production range, Enclosed surface 66,000 sq.m
bearing the BONT® and CMI Pasquini® registered trade- Offices building (with car parking
marks was increased to include new valves for high temper- below) for three stories 2,200 sq.m
ature and high pressure service designed to meet the Facilities building (mess-hall, locker
strictest requirements of the time and using the most rooms, sanitary department, etc.)
advanced design and manufacturing technology. This includ- for three stories 2,000 sq.m
ed double sealing valves, bellows valves, diaphragm valves, Manufacturing shed (including
and magnetic level gauges. Production Department and
general Facilities) 19,000 sq.m
Conc. SMA 283/93
This catalogue is exclusive property of Cesare Bonetti S.p.A. Any unauthorised reproduction, in total or in part, of this catalogue shall be prosecuted.
Products and data sheets on this catalogue reflect current standard production. Cesare Bonetti S.p.A. reserves the right to carry out amendments to products and
materials. Amendments or modifications to drawings and materials can be done also to comply with particular Customer’s request or technical specifications.
Bonetti Armaturen Vertriebs GmbH Sales Office Telephone: +49 06431 598310
D-65549 Limburg an der Lahn (Germany) Telefax: +49 06431 598329
In den Fritzenstücker, 4 E-mail: bonetti-germany@t-online.de
Bonetti Australia Pty Ltd Sales Office Phone & Fax: +61 3 5977 1966
715 Esplanade (P.O. Box 2041) Mobile: +61 0412 318880
MORNINGTON - Victoria - 3931 - Australia E-mail: dtsbont@hotkey.net.au
BONETTI (Suzhou) Level Gauges & Valves Co., Ltd. Sales Office Phone +86-512-6281 6390
Yuandong Gongyefang, Minsheng Road, Fax: +86-512-6281 6396
Shengpu District, Suzhou Industrial Park, E-mail: bonettisuzhou@yahoo.com
Jiangsu, China 215021
Pubblicazione B 02 - 15 - Eng. - Rev. 01
CESARE BONETTI S.p.A.
~ El
~
1-20024 GARBAGNATE MILANESE (ITALY)
Tel.: +390299072.1 - Telefax: +39029952483
Internet: http://www.cesare-bonetti.it
e-rnail: bont.post@cesare-bonetti.it
1
GENERAL USE AND MAINTENANCE PRESCRIPTION
1.0 SCOPE 6.0 STORAGE
This manual states safety criteria, check and controls, installation Valves must be stored protected from weather or contamination
instruction, use and maintenance instruction for BONETTI@ Piston arising from dirt, mud and so on. If valves have to be stored for a
valves in cast steel and forged steel material, manufactured by while, we suggest to maintain them in the original packing. If storage
Cesare Bonetti S.p.A. is very long, check valves periodically (not less than twice an year)
and verify surface and internal condition, removing any dirt, rust
2.0 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION and/or corrosion from inside and outside.
The BONETTI Piston Valve is a device useful to intercept a fluid,
liquid or gas. 7.0 INSTALLATION
Standard materials normally used for pressure containing part are Installation must be done by qualified and skilled personnel.
forged or cast Carbon Steel, Low Alloy Steel, Austenitic Stainless Before installing, to avoid structure deformation or any other
Steel. damage that could cause leakage or bad valve working, check care-
If those materials are not suitable for the fluid, please note that fully to:
Cesare Bonetti S.p.A. can provide same type of valves in forged or - remove protection caps from valve end connections;
cast special materials according to Customer specification. verify absence of dirt inside valve;
- be sure that upstream and downstream piping is clean and with-
3.0 RATING out any dirt coming from drilling or welding (as metal shaving or
Max rating condition (pressure and temperature) and group fluid slag) or corrosion and so on;
classification is stated by 97/23/CE Directive (PED), annex 11,and install single way valves according arrows indication on body;
are shown in following Table 1. - install valve so that it does not sustain piping weight, and sustain
valve if its weight could stress or danger flanges or piping, also
Table 1
- considering vibrations, seismic stress or wind, if any. Cesare
Material Rating Gr. Tab. Art.3.3 DN Cat Bonetti S.pA, on request, can provide you technical data to
DIN2401 calculate, at your care, such stress
ASME 816.34 avoid misalignment between piping and valve ends. Check if face
to face valve dimension fits correctly with distance between piping
WCB/A105 PN 40 1 6 ,; ON 25 ON 32+200 III ends.
WCB/A105 PN 40 2 7 ,; ON 32 ON 40+200 I-Ill
,; ON - avoid valve or piping thermal expansion able to stress the struc-
CF8M/316 PN 40 1 6 25 ON 32+200 III ture. To minimize thermal expansion effect insert an expansion
CF8M/316 PN 40 2 7 ,; ON 32 ON 40+200 I-Ill joint or use other systems able to minimize such deformation.
WCB/A105 ,; ASME300 1 6 ,; ON 25 ON 32+200 III - for flanged valves check correct position and dimension of
WCB/A105 ASME150 2 7 ,; ON 50 ON 65+200 I-Ill gaskets between valve flange and piping flange, apply the proper
WCB/A105 ASME300 2 7 ,; ON 32 ON 40+200 I-Ill bolting torque to stay bolts. For screwed valves verify compatibili-
CF8M/316 ,; ASME300 1 6 ,; ON 25 ON 32+200 III ty between valve and piping screw thread.
CF8M/316 ASME150 2 7 ,; ON 50 ON 65+200 I-Ill
,; ON 32 - for connections with welding ends as BW as SW, see par. 12.0
CF8M/316 ASME300 2 7 ON 40+200 I-Ill
- in the sketch assembly always install systems able to section and
interrupt upstream and downstream flow, with a draining system
WARNING: For valves equipped with PTFE rings, maximum allow- for said sectioned plant parts.
able temperature is limited to 200 °C. Those section and draining systems give also a good help when
For rating of pressure containing parts (body and bonnet) refer, maintaining valves in safety conditions.
for any material, to ASME 816.34 - Always verify, using a torque wrench, body/bonnet bolting torque
restoring torque as indicated in Fig. 1065 - Bolting Torque section.
WARNING: This check must be performed as bolting torque could be lower
Piston valves could be dangerous if used for "Lethal service". after a while, due to sealing material settlement.
Lethal service is the use of valves with "Lethal Substances" as
defined in ASME Section VIII Part UW: 8.0 OPERATION
By "lethal substances" are meant poisonous gases or liquids BONETTI's Piston Valves, usually, do not require maintenance.
of such a nature that very small amount of the gas or of the Verify periodically that moving items - as stem or bushing - are prop-
vapour of the liquid mixed or unmixed with air is dangerous to erly greased, using graphite grease suitable for the exercise operat-
life when inhaled. For purpose of this Division, this class ing temperature.
includes substances of this nature which are stored under If the valve can be corroded or oxidated by external atmospheric
pressure or may generate a pressure if stored in a closed agents or by internal plant environment atmosphere, protect the
vessel. valve using painting able to avoid or minimize such corrosion.
To minimize leakage risk, verify periodically body/bonnet bolting
4.0 SAFETY CRITERIA torque, restoring value as indicated in Fig. 1065.
Proper working of valves can be obtained if all steps regarding This is particularly important if valve has intermittent working or vari-
installation, start up, control and maintenance are managed by duly able exercise operating temperature.
instructed, qualified and skilled personnel. If leakage appears from body/bonnet connection, close the valve
Therefore this use and maintenance manual, together with the use and restore body/bonnet bolting torque.
and maintenance manual of each valve type, must be deeply
considered by such personnel. WARNING: If there is any leakage from the packing, or from
If use and/or maintenance instruction are not applied, product may body/bonnet sealing, to stop such leakage operate with the packing
be damaged or work badly, generating risk of damage to people, gland or on body/bonnet bolting. If the leakage is not immediately
plant or environment. stopped, packing or body/bonnet sealing ring can be damaged very
Prescription stated in section "SAFETY GENERAL INFORMATION" soon, so requiring its complete change. A long time leakage can
must be respected. also irreparabily damage metallic surfaces contacting the packing
(as stem and stuffing box) or the upper ring (as valve body or
5.0 INSPECTION AT RECEIPT piston).
When receiving goods, check carefully to verify that no damage has
been suffered during transportation. On line sealing of BONETTI piston valves is obtained with a "soft"
Check also that valve type, rating pressure/temperature as shown contact between internal surface of lower ring and piston introduced
on Table 1 and valve material, as indicated on body, bonnet and/or inside it.
label, comply with application. Therefore do not force handwheel considering that piston stroke end
Never exceed limits stated by such rating. is obtained:
Verify and be sure that valve material is suitable for process fluid - in valves with rising not rotating stem by antirotation/stroke indica-
and surrounding atmosphere. tor contacting bushing;
2
- in valves with rising and rotating stem, by handwheel contacting Table 2
bonnet upper part. No. Item No. Item
Therefore never force handwheel to avoid damage to stem or to 1 Body 8 Handweel nut
piston. 2.1 Lower valve ring 9 Bonnet
For same reason do not remove handwheel from valve in exer- 2.2 Upper valve ring 10 Stud bolt and nut
cise. 3 Lantern bush 11 Belleville washer
4 Piston 16 Threaded bushing
If perfect sealing on line or from body/bonnet is not obtained apply- 5 Split nut 17 Pin
ing the proper bolting torque to body/bonnet bolting (as indicated in 6 Stem 41 Thrust plate
Fig. 1065), valve must be maintained. 7 Handweel 50 Name plate
For valves having a stuffing box packing on stem, maintenance must
be performed immediately, isolating valve, if leakage appears from
packing and can not be eliminated operating on packing gland.
3
-
Table 4 ANSI 800 and DIN PN63 Valves
OO /)
/(:// "'
~
~
Fi9'1
13. ~)
14.
I
7 8 .
15.
16 50 :f'"'"
9 17
11A 6 1:, -==:I
10
2.2 5
41 Fig.A
3 4
2.1 1 Valves DN 25 and bigger:
6. Fix piston (4) on a vice, protecting cylindrical grinded piston
surface with a rubber layer to avoid any darnage;
Unscrew split piston nut (5), operating clockwise (as it has left
handed thread)
7. Separate stern frorn piston and check absence of wear or
darnage on stern part retaining split nut: if darnaged, stern rnust
be changed;
Fig. 1077 8. Check absence of wear or darnages on split nut: if darnaged,
split nut rnust be changed;
Grease stern and bushing thread, using a grease suitable for the 9. Fix piston on a vice, protecting cylindrical grinded piston surface
valve operating ternperature; with a rubber layer to avoid any darnage;
WARNING: as sealing rings contain thin rnetal sheets, handle with 10. Fit split nut (two pieces) on it housing in the lower part of stern,
care to avoid injure. greasing housing and split nut internal part;
WARNING: Used sealing rings are deformed by mechanichal 11. Grease split nut thread and its housing on piston, than hand
pressure; they must be disposed and never be used again. To
screw split nut on piston carefully aligning thread of the two
assemble valve using same sealing rings could generate leak- split nut pieces. As split nut thread is left handed, screwing
ages and risk to people and environment..
rnust perforrned counterclockwise.
12. Using a wrench, strongly screw split nut on piston;
9.1.2 PISTON CHANGING
13. Grease stern thread, and screw stern on its bonnet bushing: be
If piston shows scrapes on grinded cylindrical surface, it is no rnore
careful to avoid any darnage to the cylindrical grinded piston
suitable to perforrn a perfect valve sealing and rnust be changed.
surface;
To perforrn piston changing operate as follows:
14. Fit handwheel, narne plate and screw handwheel nut.
I
B. Valves up to DN 65 included and bigger than DN 65 with
A. Valves up to DN 50 included and valves with not balanced
balanced piston (having stuffing box on stem - type BVe,
piston over DN 50 (without stuffing box -
type BK, BV, BVR
-
BVd) Refer to Table 3 and Fig. 1020
and BVn) -
Refer to Table 2 and Fig. 1004
1. Rernove anti rotation device/stroke indicator retaining ring (42);
2. Fully unscrew stuffing box gland nut (13);
1. Rernove handwheel (7), unscrewing handwheel nut (8);
3. Unscrew handwheel nut (8) and rernove locking washer (28);
2. Operate stern (6), using pliers with rubber covered nose to avoid
4. Operate clockwise handwheel until it is free frorn lower part of
stern thread darnage, and screw stern clockwise until it exit frorn
bushing (38);
lower bonnet side;
5. Extract stern and piston frorn lower part of bonnet: be careful
3. Check wear of stern and bushing (16) thread: they rnust be in when passing with stern thread through packing (12.1 and 12.2)
perfect condition with no evidence of picking-up, seizing, scratch
to avoid stern thread darnage;
or other darnages or wear. If it is present sorne of said defect or
6. Using a protective rubber layer, to avoid stern darnages in the
darnage, stern and/or bonnet (or bonnet bushing) rnust be
threaded part or in the part contacting packing, fix stern on a
changed too.
vice, so that it is possible to access the lower internal piston
part;
Valves up to DN 20 included:
7. Unscrew notched nut (43) operating clockwise, as notched
4. Those valves have piston/stern connection rnechanically ben- nut is left hand screwed, and rernove it and non rotating disk
ded: they can not be separated and, as spare, they are (27);
purchased together.
8. Rernove piston (31) and carefully check absence of wear and/or
5. Grease stern and bushing thread with a grease suitable for the darnages on stern, backseat (32), non rotating disk (27); if there
valve operating ternperature and screw stern into bonnet, with is evidence of any darnage, scratch or wear, itern rnust be
care to avoid any darnage to the grinded piton surface; changed;
9. Place backseat on stern, fit the new piston, than non rotating
4
disk and screw, operating counterclockwise, notched nut, Valve contains items that are subject to fair and normal wear.
strongly fixing it with a wrench; Therefore valve must be periodically inspected by user.
10. Remove gland nut (13) from stuffing box, extract old packing Inspection time scheduling and interval must be performed by user
(12.1 and 12.2), clean stuffing box internal and fit new packing according plant working condition, process fluid and plant knowl-
(12.1 and 12.2) in their housing, hand screwing lightly gland nut; edge and/or experience.
11. Grease stem with grease suitable for valve operating tempera-
ture and insert stem inside bonnet having care to avoid any Always avoid any valve improper use able to generate unfair valve
damage to packing when passing through with stem thread; wear as:
12. insert in the stem the antirotation/stroke indicator device (23) do not use a stop valve or a on-off valve as regulating valve
before stem reaches its bushing; avoid in process fluid abrasive particles, or piping sandblasting
check that anti rotation device ends are well placed in bonnet residual, or swarf, or welding dross;
guide avoid water freezing in cast iron or nodular iron valves;
13. Screw stem in the bushing (operating counterclockwise with
handwheel): be careful to avoid any damage to cylindrical grind- - If valves must be used in temperature condition exceeding materi-
ed piston surface; al creep temperature, Cesare Bonetti S.p.A. can give, under
14. When stem appears out of its bushing upper part, fit locking - Customer request, technical data suitable for residual working life
washer (28), name plate and handwheel nut. calculation, to be performed by Customer or by end user.
15. Fit anti rotation device in its polygrooved stem housing and fix it
with retaining ring (42) 11.0 MAXIMUM ADMITTABLE WORKING TEMPERATURE
16. Screw packing gland nut. If valve has to be used in low temperature working condition,
Customer or end user must verify valve material fitness.
9.2 VALVE ASSEMBLING
a) Operate handwheel in opening direction (counterclockwise) until 12.0 WELDING AND QUALITY CONTROL
stroke end; Any welding must be performed by qualified personnel and using
b) Insert piston in upper sealing ring just and slowly push until stud qualified procedures according EN 288/287 or ASME IX standard.
thread appears through bonnet flange holes Any non destructive test must be performed by qualified personnel
c) hand screw body/bonnet nuts according to EN 473 0 SNT-TC-1A.
d operate handwheel in closing direction (clockwise) until stroke
end, than operate in opening direction until bonnet lower part 13.0 FINAL WARNINGS
reaches upper sealing ring; Preserve valve specific maintenance manual together with this
e) unscrew body/bonnet nuts, lace washers and again hand screw manual and let them consultable by maintenance personnel.
nuts; Be sure that maintenance personnel read any part of those manuals
f) Operate handwheel until valve closing and start to screw before any use or maintenance operation.
body/bonnet nuts, using a torque wrench in crossing sequence, If you have lost the manuals, please contact Cesare Bonetti S.p.A.
until bolting torque stated in Fig. 1065 has been reached; to obtain a copy.
Be careful: bonnet must descend perfectly straight and orthogo- Cesare Bonetti S.p.A. shall be happy to give you any further techni-
nal respect to sealing rings plane. cal information.
- only one sealing material for any fluid: less spares BVR 15 3/8"1/2" 5 8
- low coefficient of friction: low operating torque BV 10 3/8" 5 10
- less valve maintenance BV 15 1/2" BVR 20 3/4" 5 10
BV 20 3/4" BVR 25 1" 6 12
BV 25 1" BVR 32 1.1/4" 6 17
BV 32 1.1/4" BVR 40 1.1/2" 8 18
A piston valve (Fig. 1004) requires: BV 40 1.1/2" BVR 50 9 18
2"
Sealing rings items No. 2.1 and 2.2. BV 50 2" 10 18
BVn 65 10
A piston valve Fig. 1020 (balanced piston) requires:
BVn 80 5
sealing rings (pos. 2.1 e 2.2) . BVn 100 5
- packing rings (pos. 12.1 e 12.2) BVn 125 14
autoseal ring (pos. 35) BVn 150 12
BVe 65 12 20
- Generally spare sealing rings are delivered in "Kit" package in BVe 80 3"
8 18
- which all necessary spare sealing item is included. Specify type BVe 100 4" 8 20
- and dimension of valve when ordering spares. BVe 125 18 27
Bolting torques are indicated in Fig. 1065 BVe 150 6" 16 28
BVe 200 40 50
10.0 WORKING LIFE
Piston valve has been designed, tested and is granted for a long BVd 65/70
cycle operating life provided that rating condition (pressure and BVd 80 3"
18
temperature) of the valve have been respected. BVd 100 4" 20
BVd 125
BVd 150 6" 28
5
TABLE 5
STRESS RISK CURE
Internal pressure Internal overpressure, End user must avoid to exceed pressure limits stated on use
mechanical unstability and maintenance manual
Maximum and minimum temperature Limit exceeding End user must avoid to exceed limit as stated on use and
maintenance manual
Fatigue Mechanical unstability. To be analysed and calculated by end user. Under request,
suitable data to calculate can be disclosed to end user.
Corrosion Mechanical unstability. End user must select proper material according fluid characteristic.
Possible flu id leakage. Under request, data concerning overthickness can be disclosed
to end user
Bolting corrosion Bolting is not in contact with process fluid. If standard bolting
material is not suitable for the atmosphere, Customer must indicate
a different material or a suitable protective surface coating
(as zinc, nickel or other)
Erosion Mechanical unstability. End user must select valve type and trim in material suitable
Possible flu id leakage. for operating condition. Under request, data concerning
overthickness can be disclosed to end user
Wear Sealing surfaces wear and Do not partialize an on/off valve. Avoid process fluid containing
consequent leakages. Thickness reduction abrasive particles, residuals or anything able to damage valve
of pressure containing parts with sealing.
material resistance reduction and
working life reduction.
Fluid static pressure Mechanical unstability.. Must be analyzed and calculated by end user. Under request,
suitable data to calculate can be disclosed to end user.
Avoid water freezing inside bellows sealed valves
Avoid bellows sealed valves use with fluid leaving crystallizing
substances, deposits, scale, fouling between bellows convolutions.
Such residual could limit bellows correct moving limiting the bellows
stroke.
Stress due to traffic, wind Mechanical unstability. Must be analyzed and calculated by end user. Under request,
snow, hearthquake or suitable data to calculate can be disclosed to end user.
dynamic solicitation
Stress due to constraint, Mechanical unstability. Must be avoided or calculated by end user. Under request,
su pport, rest or other suitable data to calculate can be disclosed to end user.
Shock Breakage
Water or condensate hammer Must be avoided or prevented by end user (as installing steam traps
and consequent damage of pressure in the proper plant position to avoid condensate hammer)
containing parts
Low or high or not correct Leakages between body and bonnet Strictly follow bolting torque values stated in maintenance manual
bolting torque High operating torque
Thermal shock Differential thermal expansion Must be avoided or prevented by end user
Structure deformation Breakage, fluid process leakage Must be avoided or prevented by end user
due to not proper stresses
(absence of sustain, stressed assembling
due to incorrect face to face distance or flatness)
Use of not original spare joints Process fluid leakages to environment Must be avoided by end user
(or used joint installation)
Uncleaness of housing surfaces Process fluid leakages to environment Must be avoided by end user Carefully clean housing surfaces of
of sealing joints after disassembling sealing joints before assembling
Mastic or glue used between Process fluid leakages to environment Must be avoided by end user
body and bonnet or joints
Housing surfaces of sealing joints Process fluid leakages to environment Must be avoided by end user Carefully clean housing surfaces of
corroded by chemical etching sealing joints before assembling
Sealing joints not complying Not correct sealing joints material Must be avoided by end user
or useful for operating condition or dimension
6
GESTRA Steam Systems
PA 46 EN
English
PA 47
MPA 46
MPA 47
Installation Instructions 81844701
RapidAction Intermittent Valve for Removing Boiler Sludge
PA 46, PA 47, MPA 46, MPA 47
Contents
Page
Important Notes
Usage for the intended purpose...............................................................................................................4
Safety note..............................................................................................................................................4
Danger....................................................................................................................................................4
Attention..................................................................................................................................................4
PED (Pressure Equipment Directive).........................................................................................................5
ATEX (Atmosphère Explosible)..................................................................................................................5
Explanatory Notes
Scope of supply.......................................................................................................................................6
Description..............................................................................................................................................7
Function..................................................................................................................................................7
Technical Data
Name plate / marking..............................................................................................................................8
Dimensions PA 46, PA 47.........................................................................................................................9
Dimensions MPA 46, MPA 47.................................................................................................................10
End dimensions of flanges (extract).......................................................................................................11
Dimensions of butt-weld ends (extract)..................................................................................................12
Dimensions of socket-weld ends (extract)..............................................................................................12
Pressure & temperature ratings / Connections.......................................................................................13
Materials...............................................................................................................................................14
Corrosion resistance..............................................................................................................................14
Sizing....................................................................................................................................................14
Capacity chart PA 46, PA 47, MPA 46, MPA 47.......................................................................................15
Control pressure chart MPA 46, MPA 47.................................................................................................16
Design
PA 46, PA 47..........................................................................................................................................17
MPA 46, MPA 47....................................................................................................................................18
Key........................................................................................................................................................19
Installation
PA 46, PA 47, MPA 46, MPA 47..............................................................................................................20
Attention................................................................................................................................................20
Flanged design......................................................................................................................................20
Socket-weld design...............................................................................................................................20
Butt-weld design...................................................................................................................................21
Heat treatment of welds........................................................................................................................21
Mounting hand lever PA 46, PA 47.........................................................................................................21
Changing position of hand lever.............................................................................................................21
Changing the operating side of the intermittent blowdown valve PA 46 / PA 47......................................22
Changing the operating side of the intermittent blowdown valve MPA 46 / MPA 47................................23
Commissioning
Danger..................................................................................................................................................24
PA 46, PA 47, MPA 46, MPA 47 .............................................................................................................24
Contents - continued -
Page
Operation
Danger..................................................................................................................................................25
Intermittent boiler blowdown.................................................................................................................25
Duration and frequency of intermittent boiler blowdown........................................................................25
Maintenance
Retightening stuffing box.......................................................................................................................26
Attention................................................................................................................................................26
Replacing stuffing box PA 46, PA 47.......................................................................................................27
Replacing stuffing box, valve seat and valve plug PA 46, PA 47..............................................................28
Replacing stuffing box MPA 46, MPA 47.................................................................................................29
Replacing stuffing box, valve seat and valve plug MPA 46, MPA 47........................................................30
Replacing control membrane in diaphragm actuator MPA 46, MPA 47....................................................31
Attention................................................................................................................................................31
Torques required for tightening..............................................................................................................32
Tools......................................................................................................................................................32
Single parts of stuffing box, valve plug, valve seat..................................................................................33
Mounting / removing valve seat.............................................................................................................34
Mounting / removing control membrane................................................................................................35
Key........................................................................................................................................................36
Retrofitting
Danger..................................................................................................................................................36
Mounting diaphragm actuator................................................................................................................37
Mounting an existing MPA 26, MPA 27 diaphragm actuator....................................................................37
Mounting the forkhead (hand lever for emergency operation).................................................................38
Mounting the limit switch (proximity switch).................................................................................... 38-39
Tools......................................................................................................................................................40
Torques required for tightening..............................................................................................................40
Spare Parts
Spare parts list......................................................................................................................................41
Decommissioning
Danger..................................................................................................................................................42
Disposal................................................................................................................................................42
Annex
Declaration of Conformity......................................................................................................................43
Important Notes
Safety Note
The equipment must only be installed and commissioned by qualified and competent staff.
Retrofitting and maintenance work must only be performed by qualified staff who – through adequate
training – have achieved a recognised level of competence.
Danger
Attention
The name plate specifies the technical features of the equipment. Note that any piece of
equipment without its specific name plate must neither be commissioned nor operated.
Important Notes – continued –
The equipment meets the requirements of the Pressure Equipment Directive 97/23/EC.
Application in fluids of group 2. With CE marking, except equipment according to section 3.3.
The valves PA 46, PA 47, MPA 46, MPA 47 can be used in potentially explosive areas, provided that the
following notes are observed:
The operating fluid must not generate excessively high temperatures. Electrostatic charges that may
be generated during operation must be discharged. Make sure that the stuffing box is tight and that
the valve spindle can run smoothly. The equipment can be used in Ex zones 1, 2, 21, 22 (1999/92/EC)
II 2 G/D c X.
For more information refer to our ATEX Declaration of Conformity.
Explanatory Notes
Scope of supply
PA 46
1 Intermittent valve for removing boiler sludge PA 46
1 Hand lever
1 Installation manual
PA 47
1 Intermittent valve for removing boiler sludge PA 47
1 Hand lever
1 Installation manual
MPA 46
1 Intermittent valve for removing boiler sludge MPA 46
1 Installation manual
MPA 47
1 Intermittent valve for removing boiler sludge MPA 47
1 Installation manual
Retrofitting kit for PA 46, PA 47
1 Diaphragm actuator
1 Spacer disc
1 Installation manual
Hand lever for emergency operation
1 Hand lever for emergency operation
1 Forkhead G 10 x 20, DIN 71752
1 Hexagon-head cap screw
Retrofit set for limit switch for MPA 46, MPA 47
2 Proximity switches with L-plugs
2 Isolation amplifiers
2 Mounting brackets
4 Washers
1 Tracing pin
1 Installation manual
Explanatory Notes - continued -
Description
Intermittent valves for manual or automatic and programme-controlled removing of boiler sludge from
land or marine installations, particularly if these installations are operated without constant supervision
in accordance with TRD 604. Sludge sediments, which are accumulated precipitates from boiler water
that settle at the bottom of the boiler, will be removed from the steam boiler with the the aid of valves
PA and MPA. These valves give the boiler a short blow at regular intervals, thereby discharging
accumulated sludge and sediments.
■ PA 46 and PA 47 are designed for manual operation (diaphragm actuator can be retrofitted).
■ MPA 46 and MPA 47 feature a diaphragm actuator for compressed air or pressurized water.
Function
The intermittent valves for removing boiler sludge PA 46 and PA 47 are openend by means of a hand
lever. A pressure pin forces the spring-loaded valve plug out of the valve seat. The large cross-
sectional area of the orifice creates a suction effect, giving a short-term high water flow which will
discharge the precipitated sludge and sediments and - if installed - move them to a mixing cooler
(= blowdown receiver). The intermittent valve for removing boiler sludge must be completely opened
for about 2 seconds with the aid of the hand lever in order to give the boiler a short and highly
effective blow.
The intermittent valves for removing boiler sludge MPA 46 and MPA 47 are openend by the diaphragm
actuator. The guide pin of the diaphragm actuator acts upon the pressure pin, which in turn forces the
spring-loaded valve plug out of the valve seat. The large cross-sectional area of the orifice creates a
suction effect, giving a short-term high water flow which will discharge the precipitated sludge and
sediments and - if installed - move them to a mixing cooler (= blowdown receiver). Compressed air
(at room temperature) or pressurized water (at room temperature) can be used as control fluid for the
diaphragm actuator in accordance with the specified pressure and temperature ratings.
The duration of the bottom blowdown, i. e. the time when the valve is open, should be approx.
2 seconds. The time period when the valve remains closed and hence the frequency of the bottom
blowdown must be established as a function of the size and capacity of the steam boiler.
The duration and frequency of the bottom blowdown must be established individually by the user
as a function of the size and capacity of the steam boiler, the boiler water quality and the
corresponding load.
Technical Data
For pressure and temperature ratings see the specification on the valve body or the data given on the
name plate. Further details are given in various GESTRA publications, such as datasheets and technical
information.
In accordance with EN 19, the following type and design data are indicated on the name plate or body:
n Manufacturer
n Type designation
n Pressure class PN or Class
n Material number
n Maximum temperature
n Maximum pressure
n Direction of flow
4
n Stamp on valve body, e. g. 07 specificies the manufacturing quarter and year
(in this case the 4th quarter of 2007)
PA 46 PA 47
max. 55bar@271°C
DN 25 PN 40 max.800psi@520°F
MADE BY GESTRA AG TMA 300°C MADE BY GESTRA AG DN B16.34-CL600
Nominal pressure
Nominal size Max. admissible temperature
Letter “M”
PA 46 PA 47
max. 55bar@271°C
0525 B16.34 CL300 0525 max.800psi@520°F
MADE BY GESTRA AG DN TMA 572°F MADE BY GESTRA AG DN B16.34-CL600
Fig. 1
Technical Data – continued –
Dimensions PA 46, PA 47
25
490
350
250
68-108.5
L
Fig. 2
Technical Data – continued –
∅ 235
G 3∕8
25
360
68-108.5
Fig. 3 L
10
Technical Data – continued –
ASME B16.5
DN
∅l Class 150
[inch] ½ ¾ 1 1¼ 1½ 2
[mm] 15 20 25 32 40 50
D 98.4 107.9 117.5 127.0 152.4
b 12.7 14.3 15.9 17.5 19.0
k 69.8 79.4 88.9 98.4 120.6
g 42.9 50.8 63.5 73.0 92.1
l 15.9 15.9 15.9 15.9 19.0
n 4 4 4 4 4
L L 150 160 180 230 230
[kg]*) 8.8/13.2 9.3/13.7 10.6/15.0 13.8/18.2 15.6/20.0
*) Weight PA 4... / Weight MPA 4...
11
Technical Data – continued –
d2 40 45 55 62 75
d2
12
Technical Data – continued –
PA 4..., MPA 4...-ASME, Flanged B16.5 Class 150, Butt-weld ends B16.25, Socket-weld ends B16.11, Class 3000
pmax (max. pressure) [bar]g 14
ts (boiling temperature) [°C] 198
pmax (max. pressure) [psi]g 203
ts (boiling temperature) [°F] 388
Calculated according to ASME B16.34
PA 4..., MPA 4...-ASME, Flanged B16.5 Class 300, Butt-weld ends B16.25, Socket-weld ends B16.11, Class 3000
pmax (max. pressure) [bar]g 42
ts (boiling temperature) [°C] 254
pmax (max. pressure) [psi]g 609
ts (boiling temperature) [°F] 489
Calculated according to ASME B16.34
PA 4..., MPA 4...-ASME, Flanged B16.5 Class 600, Butt-weld ends B16.25, Socket-weld ends B16.11, Class 3000
pmax (max. pressure) [bar]g 55
ts (boiling temperature) [°C] 271
pmax (max. pressure) [psi]g 800
ts (boiling temperature) [°F] 520
Calculated according to ASME B16.34
13
Technical Data – continued –
Materials
Corrosion resistance
When used for its intended purpose, the safe functioning of the equipment will not be impaired by
corrosion.
Sizing
The valve body is not designed for pulsating loads. The sizing and anti-corrosion additives reflect the
latest state of technology.
14
Technical Data – continued –
[lb/s] [kg/s]
20
40
30
10
20
8
7
6
50
5 40,
DN
10
4
8
7 3
6
Heißwasserdurchsatz
Capacity of hot water
5 32
0, 25,
of hot water
2
4 D N2
3
Capacity
1 [bar]
2 1 2 3 4 6 8 10 20 30 40 60 80 100
[psi]
10 20 30 40 60 80 100 200 300 400 600 800 1000
Differenzdruck
Differential pressure
Fig. 4 Differential pressure
15
Technical Data – continued –
32
25,
20,
DN
0
,5
40
DN
Boiler pressure
Control pressure
Fig. 5
16
Design
PA 46, PA 47
o 1
n
2
m
t
l
k
j
i 3
h
4
g
f
e
d
c
b 5
a
0 7
9
Fig. 6 8
17
Design – continued –
o
p
n
t l
k
3
s 4
j
i
h
g
f
e
d
c
b 5
a
0 7
9 8
Fig. 7
18
Design – continued –
Key
19
Installation
The intermittent valve for removing boiler sludge can be installed in horizontal or vertical pipes.
The hand lever of the PA 46, PA 47 and the hand lever for the emergency operation of MPA 46, MPA 47
must be freely movable.
Attention
■ If pressurized water is used as control fluid for the diaphragm actuator make sure that
the control line to the diaphragm actuator is made from corrosion-resistant material.
■ To avoid waterhammer lay the pipe downstream of the intermittent valve in such a
way that it has a slight fall, or evacuate the pipe before carrying out the boiler blow
down.
■ The length of the pipe between the steam boiler and the intermittent valve for
removing boiler sludge must not exceed two metres!
Flanged design
1. Observe position of installation. The hand lever 1 or the hand lever for emergency operation s
(MPA...) must be freely movable.
2. Observe the direction of flow. The arrow indicating the flow direction is specified on the name
plate 6.
3. Consider space required for opening the valve. When the intermittent valve for removing boiler
sludge is installed, a minimum space of at least 150 mm is required for removing or retrofitting
the actuator!
4. Remove plastic plugs. They are only used as transit protection.
5. Clean seating surfaces of both flanges.
6. Install intermittent valve for removing boiler sludge.
Socket-weld design
1. Observe position of installation. The hand lever 1 or the hand lever for emergency operation s
(MPA...) must be freely movable.
2. Observe the direction of flow. The arrow indicating the flow direction is specified on the name
plate 6.
3. Consider space required for opening the valve. When the intermittent valve for removing boiler
sludge is installed a minimum space of at least 150 mm is required for removing or retrofitting
the actuator!
4. Remove plastic plugs. They are only used as transit protection.
5. Clean socket-weld ends.
6. Arc weld trap only manually (welding processes 111 and 141 in accordance with ISO 4063).
20
Installation – continued –
Butt-weld design
1. Observe position of installation. The hand lever 1 or the hand lever for emergency operation s
(MPA...) must be freely movable.
2. Observe the direction of flow. The arrow indicating the flow direction is specified on the name
plate 6.
3. Consider space required for opening the valve. When the intermittent valve for removing boiler sludge
is installed a minimum space of at least 150 mm is required for removing or retrofitting the actuator!
4. Remove plastic plugs. They are only used as transit protection.
5. Clean butt-weld ends.
6. Arc-weld trap only manually (welding processes 111 and 141 in accordance with ISO 4063)
or use gas welding process (welding process 3 in accordance with ISO 4063).
Attention
■ Only qualified welders certified e. g. according to DIN EN 287-1 may weld the valve
into lines.
1. Release retaining piece for hand lever l and pull it out of the forkhead k.
2. Apply lubricant (e. g. WINIX 5000) to the retaining piece, forkhead and hole for attaching the hand lever.
3. Push hand lever 1 through distance sleeve 3 into the forkhead k and fix it in place by means of
the retaining piece l.
As standard the hand lever is mounted to the right side of the flow direction. If required by the customer
we can also deliver the hand lever in other positions. To change the position of the hand lever proceed
as follows:
1. Unscrew GESTRA diaphragm actuator q (if installed).
2. Undo retaining piece l and pull out of the forkhead k. Pull hand lever 1 (if installed) out of the
pressure sleeve i.
3. Unscrew hexagon head screws o, remove locking lever 2.
4. Remove pressure plate n and distance sleeve 3.
5. Pull split pin j out of the pressure sleeve i.
6. Turn pressure sleeve i to the left by 90°, 180° or 270° – depending on the desired position of the
lever.
7. Insert new split pin j into the pressure sleeve i and secure it.
8. Put pressure sleeve n and distance sleeve 3 in place.
9. Mount remaining components in reverse order. Fasten and secure hexagon-head screws o to the
torque indicated in the table “Torques required for tightening”.
WINIX® is a registered trademark of WINIX GmbH, Norderstedt
21
Installation – continued –
180° 90°
270° 0°
Fig. 8
22
Installation – continued –
Changing the operating side of the intermittent blowdown valve MPA 46 / MPA 47
180° 90°
270° 0°
Fig. 9
23
Commissioning
Danger
Risk of severe burns! The hand lever of the intermittent blowdown valve PA 46, PA 47 is
hot during operation. Touching the hot hand lever can cause severe burns.
Use thermally insulated and temperature resistant safety gloves when operating the
valve.
During operation moving internals can pinch one’s hands or fingers, causing severe
injuries. Do not touch moving parts.
The intermittent blowdown valves MPA 46, MPA 47 are remote controlled and can open
and close abruptly.
The flanged connections of the PA 46, PA 47, MPA 46, MPA 47 must be permanently bolted and
leakproof.
After starting up the steam boiler or pressure vessel, the intermittent valve for removing boiler sludge
should be completely opened and closed once. The valve must close automatically, ensuring tight
shut-off.
The stuffing box must be leakproof! Inspect the check hole 4 in order to detect any fluid leakage.
If the equipment is mounted in a new and unpurged installation increase the blowdown frequency
a little at the beginning.
24
Operation
Danger
Risk of severe burns! The hand lever of the intermittent blowdown valve PA 46, PA 47 is
hot during operation. Touching the hot hand lever can cause severe burns.
Use thermally insulated and temperature resistant safety gloves when operating the
valve.
During operation moving internals can pinch one’s hands or fingers, causing severe
injuries. Do not touch moving parts.
The intermittent blowdown valves MPA 46, MPA 47 are remote controlled and can open
and close abruptly.
Simple water treatment processes cannot prevent small amounts of alkaline earths from getting
into the boiler water, thereby causing residual hardness. As a consequence chemical treatment for
removal of hardness in the steam boiler is necessary. The controlled addition of moderate amounts
of excess phosphate ions (’phosphate treatment‘) leads to the precipitation of calcium phosphates
and magnesium phosphates. Both substances form fine sludge deposits which settle out on heating
surfaces and the bottom of the boiler. These sludge deposits can form an adherent insulating coating
on heating surfaces, resulting in an effect similar to that of hard scale. These insulating layers formed
in zones of high heat transfer retard the flow of heat and cause overheating, which may result in
deformation and ultimately failure of the affected boiler parts. It is therefore essential to remove sludge
deposits at regular intervals. Although the use of polyacrylates as complexing agents for removing
residual hardness has a dispersing effect, the free-flowing boiler sludge must also be removed by
blowdown.
Hardness salts and other impurities are kept in suspension by polyacrylates but will eventually over
time settle down on the boiler bottom in the form of finely divided sludge particles. These sludge
deposits impair boiler safety and should be removed by intermittent boiler blowdown.
When the GESTRA intermittent valve opens, a localized low-pressure area forms around the blowoff
opening and the boiler sludge rushes out at high velocity, giving the steam boiler a short blow. The
discharge of sludge and precipitated solids (valve fully open) takes approx. 2 seconds. In order to
ascertain the blowdown frequency, the operating data of the installation have to be taken into account.
As ancillary equipment for the intermittent blowdown valves MPA... we recommend the GESTRA
Programme-Controlled Blowdown System TA...
To control the salt content (TDS) of the boiler water we recommend the GESTRA Continuous Blowdown
Valves BA... or BAE...
25
Emergency operation MPA 46, MPA 47
Danger
Risk of severe injuries to the whole body. The intermittent blowdown valves MPA 46,
MPA 47 are remote controlled and can open and close abruptly. Make sure that the line
for the control fluid of the diaphragm actuator is depressurized (zero bar) and isolated
during the emergency operation of the MPA 46, MPA 47.
Insert the hand lever for emergency operation only to operate the valve and remove it
immediately after operation.
1. Fit hand lever for emergency operation s, operate intermittent valve for removing boiler sludge.
2. Remove hand lever for emergency operation s immediately after operation.
Maintenance
GESTRA intermittent valves for removing boiler sludge PA 46, PA 47, MPA 46 and MPA 47 are usually
free of maintenance.
Depending on the quality of the boiler water and the operating mode of the steam generating unit the
equipment may have to be serviced after one to two years of operation.
If fluid escapes through the check hole 4 the union nut f of the stuffing box must be retightened:
1. Observe danger note on page 4.
2. Insert pin punch through the opening in the distance sleeve 3 into one of the holes of the union nut
f; carefully tighten it clockwise by hand until no more fluid escapes through the check hole 4.
3. Open the intermittent blowdown valve completely. The stuffing box must not leak.
4. Check control hole 4 for leaks. If fluid escapes, retighten stuffing box. The valve must close auto
matically without leaking.
Attention
26
Maintenance – continued –
27
Maintenance – continued –
28
Maintenance – continued –
29
Maintenance – continued –
Replacing stuffing box, valve seat and valve plug MPA 46, MPA 47
30
Maintenance – continued –
Attention
■ The torque for tightening the hexagon-head cap screws u must not exceed 5 Nm
because higher torques could damage the control membrane!
31
Maintenance – continued –
Tools
32
Maintenance – continued –
d
c
a
9
Fig. 10 5
Fig. 11
33
Maintenance – continued –
Fig. 12
Fig. 13
34
Maintenance – continued –
Fig. 14
y
35
Maintenance – continued –
Key
Retrofitting
GESTRA intermittent valves PA 46 and PA 47 can be retrofitted with a GESTRA diaphragm actuator
(MPA 46, MPA 47).
Danger
36
Retrofitting – continued –
37
Retrofitting – continued –
38
Retrofitting – continued –
A B
z
B
D
B
Fig. 16 C C
D
Fig. 15
B
A
min. 0.80,8/ max.
min. 1.61,6
/ max.
min.
min.0.032"
0,032” / max. 0.063"
/ max. 0,063”
Fig. 17
39
Retrofitting – continued –
Tools
40
Spare Parts
sltk Hand lever for emergency operation with forkhead 335 060
41
Parts for retrofitting
sltk Hand lever for emergency operation with forkhead 335 060
Decommissioning
Danger
Disposal
Dismantle the valve and separate the waste materials, using the material specifications in the table
“Technical Data” as reference.
For the disposal of the valve observe the pertinent legal regulations concerning waste disposal.
42
Annex
Declaration of Conformity
We hereby declare that the pressure equipment PA 46, PA 47, MPA 46 and MPA 47 conform to the
following European Directives:
■ Pressure Equipment Directive 97/23/EC of 29 May 1997 for equipment of category 1 according to
the table “Pressure Equipment Directive” on page 5.
■ ATEX Directive 94/9/EC of 23 March 1994.
Applied conformity assessment procedure according to 97/23/EC: Annex III, Module H, verified by the
Notified Body 0525.
Applied conformity assessment procedure according to 94/9/EC: Annex VIII.
This declaration is no longer valid if modifications are made to the equipment without consulation with us.
43
GESTRA
GESTRA AG
P. O. Box 10 54 60, D-28054 Bremen
Münchener Str. 77, D-28215 Bremen
Telephone 0049 (0) 421 35 03 - 0
Fax 0049 (0) 421 35 03 - 393
E-Mail gestra.ag@flowserve.com
Internet www.gestra.de
SC20
Sample Coolers and Systems
Installation and Maintenance Instructions
1. Safety information
2. General
product information
3. Installation
4. Commissioning
5. Operation
6. Maintenance
7. Spare parts
Printed in the UK
IM-P403-66 AB Issue 3 © Copyright 20061
2 IM-P403-66 AB Issue 3
1. Safety information
Safe operation of these products can only be guaranteed if they are properly
installed, commissioned, used and maintained by qualified personnel (see
Section 1.11) in compliance with the operating instructions. General installation and
safety instructions for pipeline and plant construction, as well as the proper use of
tools and safety equipment must also be complied with.
1.2 Access
Ensure safe access and if necessary a safe working platform (suitably guarded)
before attempting to work on the product. Arrange suitable lifting gear if required.
1.3 Lighting
Ensure adequate lighting, particularly where detailed or intricate work is required.
IM-P403-66 AB Issue 3 3
1.6 The system
Consider the effect on the complete system of the work proposed. Will any proposed
action (e.g. closing isolation valves, electrical isolation) put any other part of the
system or any personnel at risk?
Dangers might include isolation of vents or protective devices or the rendering
ineffective of controls or alarms. Ensure isolation valves are turned on and off in a
gradual way to avoid system shocks.
1.8 Temperature
To avoid burns, it is essential that cooling water is flowing before opening the sample
inlet valve. Always close the sample inlet valve before turning off the cooling water.
1.12 Handling
Manual handling of large and /or heavy products may present a risk of injury. Lifting,
pushing, pulling, carrying or supporting a load by bodily force can cause injury
particularly to the back. You are advised to assess the risks taking into account the
task, the individual, the load and the working environment and use the appropriate
handling method depending on the circumstances of the work being done.
4 IM-P403-66 AB Issue 3
1.13 Residual hazards
In normal use the external surface of the product may be very hot. If used at the
maximum permitted operating conditions the surface temperature of some products
may reach temperatures of 350°C (662°F).
Many products are not self-draining. Take due care when dismantling or removing
the product from an installation (refer to 'Maintenance instructions').
1.14 Freezing
Provision must be made to protect products which are not self-draining against
frost damage in environments where they may be exposed to temperatures below
freezing point.
1.15 Disposal
Unless otherwise stated in the Installation and Maintenance Instructions, this
product is recyclable and no ecological hazard is anticipated with its disposal
providing due care is taken.
IM-P403-66 AB Issue 3 5
2. General product information
2.1 Description
The Spirax Sarco SC20 sample cooler is used to cool samples of boiler water or steam.
The cooler consists of a stainless steel coil, through which the sample flows, and a stainless
steel body, through which cooling water flows in the opposite direction. The end caps have
pre-drilled mounting brackets. The SC20 is also available with a clamp adaptor for connecting
to an industry standard ½" sanitary clamp fitting.
Note: Sample IN
Parts shown in dotted line
are not supplied with the
SC20 or SCS20 system.
Alternative
clamp
adaptor
Cooling water
OUT to drain or tundish
Cooling water IN
6 IM-P403-66 AB Issue 3
2.2 Available types
BSP connections (6 mm O/D tube).
NPT connections (6 mm O/D tube). A ¼" NPT male x 6 mm O/D stud coupling is supplied
loose for connecting the sample inlet tube to an NPT inlet valve or fitting.
BSP sample cooler kit (SCS20), complete with sample inlet valve, cooling water inlet valve,
and carbon steel fittings.
A kit (SCS20), as above, but with stainless steel fittings.
A sample cooler (BSP or NPT) with a clamp adaptor suitable for connection to an industry
standard ½" sanitary clamp fitting (clamp not supplied).
Note: The SC20 sample cooler is not polished or specially treated internally, and the
internal finish of the coil is not specified. Special sanitary sample coolers (SSC20) are
also available in BSP and NPT. They have a stated coil internal finish. See separate
literature for further details.
IM-P403-66 AB Issue 3 7
2.4 Pressure / temperature limits
Coil
Pressure psi g
� ��� ��� ��� ��� ���� ���� ����
���
Temperature °C
���
Temperature °F
���
��� ���
��� ���
��� ���
�� ���
�
� �� �� �� �� ���
Pressure bar g
Body
Maximum design pressure 10 bar g @ 100°C (145 psi g @ 212°F)
Maximum design temperature 100°C @ 10 bar g (212°F @ 145 psi g)
Designed for a maximum cold hydraulic test pressure of: 16 bar g (232 psi g)
Note: The pressure / temperature limits for the clamp adaptor are dependant on the
manufacturer's recommendations.
Materials
Body and coil Austenitic stainless steel grade 316L
8 IM-P403-66 AB Issue 3
3. Installation
Note: Before actioning any installation observe the 'Safety information' in Section 1.
- We recommend the use of corrosion resistant pipework suitable for the fluid being sampled.
- Keep the length of all pipes to a minimum.
- Cooling water must be clean and free of scale forming salts.
- The sample cooler must be mounted vertically, using the pre-drilled top and bottom
mounting brackets (see Figure 2).
- Allow sufficient space below the SC20 for collection of the sample in a beaker or similar
container. We recommend that a tundish piped to drain is located underneath this outlet.
No conection is required on the sample OUT.
- Connect the pipework as shown in the drawing (Figure 3). The cooling water IN should
be piped to the bottom of the sample cooler in ½" nominal bore pipe via the cooling water
inlet valve. A ½" BSP / NPT male / female elbow makes a suitable connector.
- Pipe the cooling water OUT from the top of the sample cooler to an open drain or tundish.
Caution: to avoid the possibilty of an air lock at the top of the sample cooler, do not allow
the thread of the cooling water OUT elbow to protrude into the sample cooler body - maximum
thread engagement 15 mm.
- SC20 with sample inlet clamp adaptor - Install the clamp fitting and seal in accordance with
the manufacturer's instructions.
Sample IN
Ø13 mm
Cooling water
OUT to drain
or tundish
350 mm
centres
nominal
Cooling water
IN
IM-P403-66 AB Issue 3 9
4. Commissioning
After installation or maintenance carry out tests to ensure that the system is fully functional.
5. Operation
WARNING:
To avoid the risk of scalding, it is essential that a full flow of cooling water is present
before opening the sample inlet valve.
Always close the sample inlet valve before turning off the cooling water.
Sample pipework becomes very hot under normal working conditions, and will cause
burns if touched.
Follow this procedure for safe operation and accurate sampling:-
- Open the cooling water inlet valve first and ensure that a full flow can be seen at the cooling
water outlet.
- Gradually open the sample inlet valve and regulate the flow to achieve a cooled sample at
about 25°C (77°F).
- Allow the sample to run for a while before collection. This will ensure that a true sample is
collected for analysis.
- When enough liquid has been collected close the sample inlet first, and then the cooling
water inlet valve.
- After closing the sample inlet valve the sample OUT connection may drip for a few minutes
while the coil drains.
6. Maintenance
No routine maintenance is required.
7. Spare parts
The spare parts available are listed below. No other parts are supplied as spares.
Available spares
Component Stock number
Sample inlet valve BSP 4037900
Sample inlet valve NPT 4037990
Stud coupling carbon steel BSP 0962373
Stud coupling stainless steel BSP 0963243
Stud coupling ¼" NPT male x 6 mm stainless steel 0963209
(for connecting SC20 to an NPT valve or fitting)
10 IM-P403-66 AB Issue 3
IM-P403-66 AB Issue 3 11
12 IM-P403-66 AB Issue 3
Page 1 of 3
TI-P403-09
AB Issue 9
���
���
���
Cooling water
��� OUT to drain
�� or tundish
�
� �� �� �� �� ���
Pressure bar g
The product must not be used in this region.
Body
Maximum design pressure 10 bar g @ 100°C
Maximum design temperature 100°C @ 10 bar g Cooling SC20
Designed for a maximum cold hydraulic test pressure of 16 bar g water Sample cooler
IN
Note: The pressure / temperature limits for the clamp adaptor are
dependant on the manufacturer's recommendations
Materials
Coil Austenitic stainless steel Grade 316L
Body Austenitic stainless steel Cooling water inlet valve
Local regulations may restrict the use of this product to below the conditions quoted.
In the interests of development and improvement of the product, we reserve the right to change the specification without notice. © Copyright 2009
Page 2 of 3
Performance
The tables below show typical sample outlet temperatures above cooling water inlet temperatures for several pressures and cooling
water flowrates.
Example
A sample flowrate of 30 I / h is required from a boiler operating at 10 bar g. For a cooling water flowrate of 0.3 I / s from Table 1 the sample
outlet temperature would be 4°C above the cooling water inlet temperature. If the cooling water is at 15°C, the sample temperature would
be 19°C.
Table 2 is used in the same way for steam.
Samples may not be taken where marked '-' as the flow is limited by the sample inlet valve capacity.
10 1°C 1°C 3°C 6°C 6°C 0°C 0°C 1°C 1°C 4°C 0°C 0°C 0°C 0°C 2°C
20 2°C 2°C 6°C 8°C 8°C 1°C 1°C 2°C 2°C 6°C 0°C 0°C 0°C 1°C 4°C
30 5°C 5°C 8°C 11°C 11°C 3°C 3°C 4°C 4°C 8°C 0°C 0°C 2°C 3°C 6°C
40 7°C 7°C 11°C 13°C 13°C 5°C 5°C 6°C 6°C 10°C 1°C 1°C 2°C 3°C 8°C
50 10°C 10°C 13°C 15°C 15°C 6°C 6°C 8°C 8°C 12°C 3°C 3°C 4°C 5°C 9°C
60 14°C 14°C 16°C 18°C 18°C 9°C 9°C 10°C 10°C 14°C 4°C 5°C 5°C 6°C 11°C
80 16°C 18°C 20°C 22°C 22°C 11°C 12°C 13°C 14°C 18°C 6°C 7°C 8°C 9°C 15°C
100 18°C 20°C 24°C 26°C 27°C 15°C 16°C 16°C 18°C 22°C 10°C 11°C 12°C 13°C 18°C
120 22°C 23°C 29°C 30°C 31°C 17°C 18°C 20°C 23°C 26°C 11°C 13°C 15°C 17°C 22°C
5 3°C 3°C 4°C 5°C 6°C 6°C 2°C 2°C 3°C 3°C 4°C 4°C 1°C 1°C 1°C 2°C 2°C 2°C
10 - 7°C 8°C 8°C 8°C 9°C - 4°C 4°C 4°C 4°C 5°C - 1°C 2°C 2°C 2°C 2°C
15 - - 9°C 10°C 10°C 11°C - - 5°C 6°C 6°C 7°C - - 2°C 2°C 3°C 4°C
70 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
E F
½" BSP or NPT
ØG
H A B C
'Adaptor' Standard
cooler cooler
Weights (approximate)
Cooler 3.1 kg
SCS20 system 4.2 kg
Spare parts
The spare parts available are listed below. No other parts are supplied as spares.
Available spares:
Component Stock number
Sample inlet valve BSP 4037900
Sample inlet valve NPT 4037990
Stud coupling carbon steel BSP 0962373
Stud coupling stainless steel BSP 0963243
Stud coupling ¼" NPT male x 6 mm stainless steel (for connecting SC20 to an NPT valve or fitting) 0963209
How to order
Example: 1 off Spirax Sarco SC20 sample cooler having BSP connections.
10 2014
WWW.CONFLOW.IT
Index 2 / 2
1 - INFORMAZIONI GENERALI E DI SICUREZZA 1 – GENERAL AND SAFETY INFORMATION
Prima di installare la valvola rimuovere le protezioni di Before installing valve, remove plastic covers placed on
plastica poste a copertura delle flange o degli attacchi di flanges or connection ends.
connessione.
ATTENZIONE Durante la messa in funzione della WARNING Be careful not to touch the body,
valvola o durante l’esercizio non toccare il gruppo whilst the valve is in operation, this may be hot.
corpo che potrebbe condurre calore se il fluido
impiegato è ad alta temperatura.
ATTENZIONE Durante l’esercizio non toccare lo WARNING Be careful not to touch the stem,
stelo perché é in movimento, potrebbe essere caldo whilst the valve is in operation, as this i s moving,
e potrebbe intrappolare le dita o i vestiti. it may be hot and it’s possible trapping of fingers
and clothes.
ATTENZIONE Prima di iniziare eventuali WARNING Before starting maintenance be sure
operazioni di manutenzione assicurarsi che la that the valve is not pressurized or hot.
valvola non sia in pressione e/o calda.
ATTENZIONE Per le valvole motorizzate, prima di WARNING For electric powered valves, before
effettuare qualsiasi operazione sull’attuatore, to make any operations on the actuator, ensures
assicurarsi che l’alimentazione elettrica sia isolata that the main is isolated and secured against an
da apposito interruttore e sia assicurata. accidental switching-on.
Non rimuovere la targhetta descrittrice fissata al castello Never remove description plate placed on the yoke as it
poiché riporta il numero di matricola, dato indispensabile shows all necessary data required to trace back a specific
per rintracciare la valvola nel tempo. valve.
Si prega di fare espresso riferimento a tale numero per la
fornitura di parti di ricambio.
Non rimuovere la targhetta indicatrice della corsa che é il Never remove the travel indicator plate which is the major
principale riferimento per la taratura della valvola. reference for the valve calibration.
La mancata osservanza delle informazioni generali di In the event of non-observance of the general rules,
sicurezza, delle norme vigenti e delle istruzioni di montaggio safety information and of the installation instructions, this
possono: may:
Causare pericolo per l’incolumità di chi sta Cause danger to life and limb of the user or third
eseguendo le manovre o di terzi. party
Danneggiare la stessa valvola o le cose adiacenti. Damage the valves and other property belonging to
Compromettere l’efficiente funzionamento della the owner
valvola stessa. Endanger the efficient functioning of the valve
2 - ISTRUZIONI DI MONTAGGIO 2 - INSTALLATION INSTRUCTONS
2.1 - MONTAGGIO SUL’IMPIANTO NOTE GENERALI 2.1 - INSTALLATION IN THE PLANT GENERAL INFO
Prima del montaggio della valvola effettuare un’accurata Before installing a valve ensure that the pipes are cleaned
pulizia della tubazione con aria compressa, acqua o altro with compressed air, water or other suitable fluids to
fluido di soffiaggio per eliminare corpi estranei, scorie di remove any matter that may damage the seal surfaces of
saldatura e detriti vari che potrebbero danneggiare le valve.
superfici di tenuta della valvola.
ATTENZIONE Montare la valvola con la freccia WARNING When installing a valve, make sure the
di direzione impressa sul corpo nello stesso senso direction arrow printed on its body and the pipe fluid
del fluido della tubazione. are in the same direction.
Viene comunque raccomandato il montaggio di un filtro a “Y” It is recommended that a “Y” filter (our series “FY”) is fitted
(ns. serie “F Y”) sulla tubazione, a monte della valvola. upstream the valve on the fluid pipe.
Per misure fino al DN100, il montaggio della valvola può Until DN100, the valve can be installed vertically or
essere effettuato in posizione verticale od orizzontale. Per le horizontally.
valvole dal DN125 al DN200 è consigliato il montaggio in From DN125 to DN200 sizes, is suggested a vertical
verticale per ovviare l’ usura dovuta al peso e ai relativi installation to avoid wear and to make easy maintenance
sfregamenti, oltre che facilitare le operazioni di operations.
manutenzione.
ATTENZIONE E’ vietato gravare la valvola WARNING External loads cannot be applied to the
con carichi estranei. E’ obbligo dell’installatore valve. The installer must take appropriate special
proteggere la valvola da sollecitazioni esterne. measures to protect the valve from external stress.
1 / 35
2.2 – MONTAGGIO VALVOLE PNEUMATICHE 2.2 – PNEUMATIC VALVES INSTALLATION
Se la valvola è equipaggiata di filtro riduttore è preferibile che If a valve is supplied with filter regulator, then this should
questi sia montato verticalmente così da favorire lo scarico be installed vertically. A screw placed at the bottom of the
della condensa per mezzo dell’apposito disaeratore. filter makes the elimination of condensate easier.
ATTENZIONE Se la valvola è equipaggiata di WARNING When installing a valve fitted with a pilot
strumentazione (posizionatore pilota, ecc.) usare positioner, regulator etc. care should be taken as
particolare cura nel montaggio sulla tubazione
poiché ogni colpo potrebbe provocare il any knock can cause damage to these things and
danneggiamento degli accessori oppure la may even affect their settings.
staratura degli stessi.
ATTENZIONE Se la valvola è equipaggiata di WARNING Always ensure that the manual
volantino di testa per il comando manuale di hand-wheel, located at the top of the actuator
emergenza, assicurarsi che durante il is at a full rest position during automatic
funzionamento automatico sia in posizione di operation. This is to prevent any restriction to
completo riposo, questo per non ostacolare valve travel.
meccanicamente la corsa della valvola che potrebbe
essere limitata.
Il servomotore viene collegato alla fonte d’aria mediante un The actuator is connected to the air source by a pipe
tubo del diametro di 4x6 mm. 4x6 mm.
Tale diametro può essere maggiorato quanto maggiore è la The diameter can be higher proportionally to the
distanza tra la fonte d’aria e la valvola. distance between the air source and the valve.
Le connessioni pneumatiche sono Ø 1/8” GAS F The pneumatic connections are Ø 1/8” Rp ISO 7
Ingresso AD = parte superiore della testata Ingresso AD Input = Upper case part
AR = parte inferiore della testata AR Input = Lower case part
Ingresso DE = parte superiore ed inferiore della testata DE Input = Upper and Lower case part
Non installare le valvole in ambienti con temperature Do not install valves in environments at temperatures
superiori ai 70 °C e inferiori ai – 10°C. above 70 °C or less than –10 °C.
Se l’attacco superiore è adibito a sfiato, proteggere lo stesso If the upper connection is the breather, protect it with a
con un apposito raccordo o con un tubo curvo, al fine di non nipple or with a curved pipe, to avoid the input of liquids or
immettere liquidi e/o agenti atmosferici nella testata. atmospheric agents into the actuator.
I cavi di alimentazione devono essere dimensionati in modo The mains connecting cables must be suitably dimensioned
adeguato per la massima corrente richiesta dall’attuatore e to accept the max current requirement of the actuator, and
devono corrispondere alle norme IEC 227 e IEC 245. correspond to IEC 227 and IEC 245.
I cavi di colore giallo / verde possono essere usati solo per The yellow – green coloured cables may only be
collegare la terra PE sulla base della cassa dell’attuatore. used for connecting to PE earth connection on
housing plate.
Gli attuatori elettrici non hanno un interruttore elettrico The eclectic actuators do not have an internal electrical
interno. power switch.
Un interruttore per l’attuatore o un interruttore generale deve A switch or power mains switch has therefore to be
pertanto essere previsto nell’impianto in posizione vicina ed provided in the building installation.
accessibile agli operatori. This should be positioned close to the device and be easily
Detto interruttore deve essere indicato, con apposita accessible to the user and shell be labelled as the mains
targhetta, come interruttore principale dell’attuatore. isolator switch for the actuator.
L’impianto deve essere provvisto di fusibili per sovraccarichi The building installation must also provide for power surge
di tensione corrispondenti agli standard IEC 34 – 1,8 con trips or fuses corresponding to standard IEC 34 – 1,8 with
protezione classe 1 per le connessioni all’attuatore. protection class 1, for the actuator connections.
Non installare le valvole in ambienti con temperature Do not install valves in environments at temperatures
superiori ai 60 °C e inferiori ai – 20°C. above 60 °C or less than – 20 °C.
2 / 35
2.3.1 – COLLEGAMENTI ELETTRICI DELLE 2.3.1. – WIRING DIAGRAM OF ELECTRIC POWERED
VALVOLE MOTORIZZATE SERIE “EP” VALVES “EP” SERIES
I collegamenti elettrici Fig.2 devono essere effettuati da The electric connections Fig.2 may be operated by
personale qualificato ed autorizzato. skilled and authorized operating personnel.
Rimuovere il coperchio come indicato nella Fig.1 e Remove the cover following the Fig.1 and after the operations
successivamente rimontarlo come indicato, facendo replacing the cover align the markings on the cover edge with
attenzione alla tacca di riferimento e spingendo con una the groove in the actuator housing and push cover down until
piccola pressione. it sits over the “O” ring.
Ingrassare sempre l’“O” ring serve per un facile smontaggio Lightly grease the sealing ring to help mounting the cover.
e rimontaggio del coperchio.
Fig. 1
Lo schema elettrico situato all’interno del coperchio The wiring diagram inside the actuator cover is binding for the
dell’attuatore è vincolante per gli specifici collegamenti. specific actuator connection.
X1 – NON UTILIZZATO Not used
Fig.2
X2 – CAVO INTERNO Internal wiring
3 / 35
2.3.2 – COLLEGAMENTIELETTRICI DELLE 2.3.2 – WIRING DIAGRAM OF ELECTRIC POWERED
VALVOLE MOTORIZZATE SERIE “EPR” VALVES “EPR” SERIES
I collegamenti elettrici Fig.2.1, 2.2, 2.3 devono essere The electric connections Fig.2.1, 2.2, 2.3 may be operated
effettuati da personale qualificato ed autorizzato. Rimuovere by skilled and authorized operating personnel. Remove the
il coperchio come indicato nella Fig.1.1. cover following the Fig.1.1.
Fig. 1.1
Lo schema elettrico situato all’interno del coperchio The wiring diagram inside the actuator cover is binding for the
dell’attuatore è vincolante per gli specifici collegamenti. specific actuator connections.
Qui di seguito (fig.2.1, 2.2, 2.3) sono riportati gli schemi Here below (fig.2.1, 2.2, 2.3) are the simplified wiring
elettrici semplificati per i collegamenti. diagrams for connections.
4 / 35
2.1.3 Segnale 3 Punti / Signal 3 Point modulating
Alimentazione / Supply : 24 V AC Alimentazione / Supply : 24 V DC
Azione Valvola / Valve Action : NC / NA - NO Azione Valvola / Valve Action : NC / NA - NO
5 / 35
2.2 Segnale 3 Punti / Signal 3 Point modulating
Alimentazione / Supply : 220/230 V AC Azione
Valvola / Valve Action : NC / NA - NO
Le valvole vengono fornite tarate e collaudate, pronte per Valves are supplied, calibrated and tested to work in
poter funzionare alle condizioni richieste dal cliente in fase conditions set by the customer. With respect to all the safety
d’ordine. Dopo essersi assicurati di aver rispettato tutte le conditions, open slowly the upstream and downstream
avvertenze, aprire lentamente le valvole di intercettazione isolating valves.
poste a monte e a valle della valvola. THE STUFFING BOX PACKING IS FREE OF
IL PREMISTOPPA E’ ESENTE DA MANUTENZIONE. MAINTENENCE
ATTENZIONE Dopo la prima ora di WARNING Within the first hour of operation
funzionamento controllare il serraggio dei dadi check the screws holding the yoke-bonnet and
che serrano l’insieme castello – bonnet - corpo , valve body, see 2.7.
vedi 2.7.
ATTENZIONE Rispettare i valori indicati WARNING Always respect the mentioned
nella tabella 2.7 ogni qualvolta si effettuano
operazioni di manutenzione.
! values, see table 2.7 when maintenance
operations are involved.
ATTENZIONE Se la valvola è equipaggiata di WARNING Never rotate the stem in valves fitted
tenuta a SOFFIETTO, non ruotare mai lo stelo with a BELLOWS seal as this may result in
per nessun motivo. Un’eventuale manovra twisting or breaking of the bellows.
sbagliata potrebbe provocare la torsione e la
rottura del soffietto.
6 / 35
2.5 – AVVIAMENTO VALVOLE PNEUMATICHE 2.5 - START-UP PNEUMATIC VALVES
- VALVOLE DI REGOLAZIONE Tipo - CONTROL VALVES Type
2000 – 2600 – 2700 – 5000 – 5600 – 5700 -5800 2000 – 2600 – 2700 – 5000 – 5600 - 5700 – 5800
Le pressioni d’aria di comando standard sono: The standard air control signals are :
3-15 psi, 6-18 psi, 6-30 psi 3-15 psi, 6-18 psi, 6-30 psi
la massima pressione sul diaframma del servocomando non Maximum pressure on the actuator control, and
deve mai superare il valore di consequently on the diaphragm, must not excess
35 psi - 2,5 bar. 35 psi - 2,5 bar.
- VALVOLE ON-OFF Tipo 2100 - 5100 - ON-OFF VALVES Type 2100 - 5100
La massima pressione d’aria di comando è di Min. 2 bar e The maximum control air pressure is Min. 2 bar and max. 6
max 6 bar. bar
L’aria utilizzata deve essere assolutamente secca, priva The air must be absolutely dry and free from oil or
quindi di olio o condensa che potrebbero danneggiare la condensate which may cause damage to the actuator
membrana del servomotore o gli accessori eventualmente diaphragm or auxiliary fittings on the valve i.e. pilot
montati a bordo della valvola. positioner, solenoid etc.
-VALVOLE ON-OFF TIPO 2100 - 5100 - TYPE 2100 - 5100 EP ON-OFF VALVES On-Off
Segnale on-off con tensione apre e chiude signal, opens and closes
Accendere l’interruttore principale posto a protezione del Switch on the power mains.
motore della valvola. Check by electronic regulator or on-off electric signal if the
Controllare attraverso il regolatore o il termostato che la valve opens and closes in both directions.
valvola si m uova in entrambe le direzioni APERTA/CHIUSA.
NOTA : Rispettare i valori sopra indicati ogni qualvolta si NOTE: Always respect the above mentioned values
effettuano operazioni di manutenzione. when maintenance operations are involved.
7 / 35
2.8 – VOLANTINO MANUALE 2.8 – MANUAL HANDWHEEL
2.8. 1– VOLANTINO MANUALE VALVOLE 2.8.1 – MANUAL HANDWHEEL FOR “AD” PNEUMATIC
PNEUMATICHE “AD” (Fig. 2.8.1) VALVES (Fig. 2.8.1)
Assicurarsi che il volantino rif.1in condizioni di riposo Make sure about the non-working position of the
(funzionamento automatico) sia tutto verso l’alto. handwheel (ref.1); it must be in the highest position.
Di fabbrica il dado rif.5 viene bloccato in questa The nut ref.5 is supplied by default locked in this position.
posizione. To start the valve manually, make sure there is not air in
Per azionare manualmente la valvola, assicurarsi che the actuator, then unscrew the safety nut ref.5, carry it in
non vi sia aria nel servomotore, quindi svitare il dado di the highest position and turn the handwheel ref.1.
sicurezza rif.5, portarlo verso l’alto e ruotare il volantino rif.1. Now the handwheel works like a piston and closes the
in questo modo il volantino fa da pistone e chiude la valvola. valve.
Fig. 2.8.1
2.8.2 – VOLANTINO MANUALE VALVOLE 2.8.2 – MANUAL HANDWHEEL FOR “AR” PNEUMATIC
PNEUMATICHE “AR” (Fig. 2.8.2) VALVES (Fig. 2.8.2)
Assicurarsi che il volantino rif.1in condizioni di riposo Make sure that the handwheel, in non-working condition,
(funzionamento automatico) sia tutto avvitato verso il basso. is completely screwed in lower position. The stem ref.2
Lo stelo rif.2 durante il funzionamento automatico sale e during the automatic working goes up and down.
scende. To start the valve manually, make sure there is not air in the
Per azionare manualmente la valvola, assicurarsi che non actuator, then turn the handwheel ref.1 counter clockwise.
vi sia aria nel servomotore, quindi ruotare il volantino rif.1 in Now the handwheel works like an extractor and raises the
senso antiorario. Il volantino fa da estrattore ed stem opening the valve.
alza lo stelo aprendo la valvola.
APRE / OPEN
8 / 35
2.8.3 – VOLANTINO MANUALE VALVOLE 2.8.3 – MANUAL HANDWHEEL FOR EP ELECTRIC
MOTORIZZATE EP (Fig. 2.8.3) POWERED VALVES (Fig. 2.8.3)
Il volantino delle valvole serie EP Fig.2.8.3 A è sempre in The handwheel of the EP series valve Fig.2.8.3 A is
presa e ruota durante il funzionamento automatico. In always engaged and rotates during the automatic
mancanza di segnale o tensione per manovrare working. Without signal or supply, handle the valve
manualmente la valvola, ruotare in senso orario. manually rotating clockwise.
Il volantino delle valvole serie EP Fig.2.8.3 B durante il The handwheel of the EP series valve Fig.2.8.3.B is in
funzionamento automatico è sempre a riposo. In mancanza non-working position during the automatic working.
di segnale o tensione, per manovrare manualmente la Without signal or supply handle the valve manually, push
valvola, premere il pomello rif.1 e ruotare il volantino, the knob ref.1 and rotate the handwheel.
2.8.4 – VOLANTINO MANUALE VALVOLE 2.8.4 – MANUAL HANDWHEEL FOR EPR ELECTRIC
MOTORIZZATE EPR (Fig. 2.8.4) POWERED VALVES (Fig. 2.8.4
Durante il funzionamento automatico la leva di During the automatic working the manual lever must be
commando manuale deve essere posizionata nel suo placed in the own casing (see fig. 2.8.4 A).
alloggiamento (vedi fig. 2.8.4 A). To handle the valve manually extract the lever from the
Per manovrare manualmente la valvola estrarre la leva casing and rotate it clockwise (see fig. 2.8.4 B). At the end
dall’apposito alloggiamento e ruotare in senso orario (vedi replace the lever into the casing (see fig. 2.8.4 C)
fig. 2.8.4 B). A fine manovra riposizionare la leva nel suo
alloggiamento (vedi fig. 2.8.4 C).
ATTENZIONE se durante la manovra manuale WARNING if the lever is left during the
la leva viene rilasciata si blocca dopo un manual handle, it stops after a quarter turn “safe
quarto di giro in posizione di sicurezza. lock”
Fig. 2.8.4 B
9 / 35
2.9 – INGRASSATORE (fig. 2.9) 2.9 – LUBRIFICATOR (fig. 2.9)
Durante il funzionamento automatico l’ingrassatore deve During the automatic working t he lubrificator must stay
rimanere chiuso. Per chiudere l’ingrassatore ruotare in closed. To close the lubrificator turn clockwise the handwheel
senso orario il volantino rif.7. ref.7.
Per ingrassare il premistoppa procedere come segue: To lubrificate the packing see the following instructions:
Chiudere l’otturatore principale con volantino rif. 7. Svitare il Close the main valve by handwheel ref. 7.
volantino del caricatore rif. 5. Caricare il grasso. Unscrew the handwheel ref. 5
Riavvitare il volantino rif. 5 solo pochi giri. Put the grease inside. Screw the handwheel ref. 5
Aprire l’otturatore principale per mezzo del volantino rif. 7, Open the main valve by the handwheel ref. 7, screw the
avvitare il volantino rif. 5 al fine di caricare il grasso handwheel ref.5 to put the grease inside the stuffing box
all’interno del premistoppa e richiudere l’otturatore principale packing and close the main valve by the handwheel ref.7.
per mezzo del volantino rif. 7. L’operazione di ingrassaggio The lubrification is suggested every 600 hours of working or
viene consigliata ogni 600 ore di funzionamento oppure when the stem movement is not fluid.
quando lo stelo non si muove in modo lineare.
Fig. 2.9
3 – TARATURA 3 - CALIBRATION
3.1 - NOTE GENERALI 3.1 – GENERAL INFORMATION
Le valvole vengono fornite tarate e collaudate, pronte per Valves are supplied, calibrated and tested to work in
poter funzionare alle condizioni richieste dal cliente in fase conditions set by the customer.
d’ordine.
3.2 – TARATURA VALVOLE PNEUMATICHE DI 3.2 – PNEUMATIC CONTROL VALVES CALIBRATION
REGOLAZIONE
Nel caso sia necessario ritarare la valvola di regolazione If further calibration is required, the equipment required is as
occorrono i seguenti strumenti: follows :
- un manometro a molla Bourdon con scala 0-40 psi - a Bourdon spring pressure gauge, range 0-40 psi
- un filtro riduttore di pressione o un manipolatore d’aria - a pressure filter regulator , or an air manipulator finely
finemente regolabile nel campo 0-35 psi adjusted in the range 0-35 psi
Applicato il filtro riduttore alla linea di aria compressa, si
Fit the filter to the compressed air line, connecting the filter
collega l’ uscita dello stesso al manometro e quindi al
regulator outlet to the pressure gauge and then to the
servomotore della valvola di regolazione da ritarare.
actuator of the pneumatic control valve to be calibrated.
Controllare il valore di taratura delle molle indicato sulla
targhetta descrittrice fissata al castello, campo “segnale”. Check the spring calibration value. This is indicated on the
Per le valvole con AZIONE DIRETTA (AD=aria chiude), description plate located on the yoke, range “signal”.
Figura di esempio Fig.3, regolare lentamente il riduttore For DIRECT ACTION valves (AD= air closes), example
registrandolo al valore di partenza della valvola. figure Fig.3, slowly adjust the regulator recording the valve
Ad esempio se il segnale previsto é 3-15 psi, la valvola deve start value.
incominciare a muoversi a 3 psi ed a 15 psi deve aver If the started signal is 3-15 psi, the valve has to start moving
compiuto tutta la corsa arrivando sulla sede in posizione di at 3 psi and at 15 psi should complete the travel, reaching
chiusura. the seat in the closed position.
Se il segnale di partenza è inferiore a 3 psi é necessario: If the start signal is less than 3psi it is necessary :
- allentare i dadi rif. n°20 che serrano l’asta superiore rif. - loosen the travel indicator locknuts ref. n°20 between the
n°22 con lo stelo inferiore rif. n°6. upper stem ref. n° 22 and the lower stem ref. n° 6.
- avvitare lo stelo inferiore rif. n°6 per ottenere l’incremento - screw the lower stem ref. n°6 to increase the start signal.
del segnale di partenza. If the start signal is higher than 3psi it is necessary :
Se il segnale di partenza è superiore a 3 psi é necessario : - loosen the travel indicator locknuts ref. n° 20 between
- allentare i dadi rif. n°20 che serrano l’asta superiore rif. the upper stem ref. n° 22 and the lower stem ref. n° 6.
n°22 con lo stelo inferiore rif. n°6. - unscrew the lower stem ref. n° 6 to decrease the start
- svitare lo stelo inferiore rif. n°6 per ottenere la signal.
diminuzione del segnale di partenza.
10 / 35
3.2 – TARATURA VALVOLE PNEUMATICHE DI 3.2 – PNEUMATIC CONTROL VALVES CALIBRATION
REGOLAZIONE (segue) (to be continued)
Per le valvole con AZIONE ROVESCIA (AR=aria apre), For REVERSE ACTION valves (AR= air opens), example
Figura di esempio Fig.4, operare come sopra. figure Fig. 4, act as indicated above.
Ad esempio se il segnale previsto é 3-15 psi, la valvola deve If the stated signal is 3-15 psi, the valve has to start moving
incominciare a muoversi a 3 psi ed a 15psi deve aver at 3 psi and at 15 psi should complete the travel, reaching
compiuto tutta la corsa arrivando alla totale apertura. the fully open position.
Se il segnale di partenza è inferiore a 3 psi é necessario: If the start signal is less than 3 psi it is necessary:
- allentare i dadi rif. n°20 che serrano l’asta superiore rif. - loosen the travel indicator locknuts ref. n°20 between
n°22 con lo stelo inferiore rif. n°6. the upper stem ref. n° 22 and the lower stem ref. n° 6.
- svitare lo stelo inferiore rif. n°6 per ottenere l’incremento del - unscrew the lower stem ref. n° 6 t o increase the start
segnale di partenza. signal.
Se il segnale di partenza è superiore a 3 psi é necessario : If the start signal is higher than 3 psi it is necessary :
- allentare i dadi rif. n°20 che serrano l’asta superiore rif. - loosen the travel indicator locknuts ref. n° 20 between the
n°22 con lo stelo inferiore rif. n° 6. upper stem ref. n° 22 and the lower stem ref. n° 6.
- avvitare lo stelo inferiore rif. n°6 per ottenere la - screw the lower stem ref. n° 6 to decrease the start
diminuzione del segnale di partenza. signal.
Attenzione! In fase di ritaratura assicurarsi che la valvola Warning! When re-calibrating ensure the valve completes its
compia tutta la corsa. travel.
Questa operazione può essere controllata visivamente This can be visually checked monitoring the travel indicator
osservando il disco indicatore rif. n°21 scorrere sulla disc ref. n°21 w h i l e is slides over the travel indicator plate
targhetta indicatrice della corsa rif. n°19. ref. n°19.
Ripetere le operazioni di apertura / chiusura o chiusura / Repeat the opening / closing or closing / opening
apertura fino a quando si sono ottenuti i giusti valori. operations until the correct values are obtained.
3.3 – TARATURA VALVOLE PNEUMATICHE ON-OFF 3.3 – PNEUMATIC ON-OFF VALVES CALIBRATION
Le valvole pneumatiche on-off vengono fornite già tarate Pneumatic on-off valves are supplied calibrated to the signal
secondo il segnale di comando, scelto dal cliente, ed in base stated by the customer and depending on the inlet
alla pressione di ingresso del fluido. pressure of the fluid.
Le valvole on-off non richiedono ulteriori operazioni di No further calibration is necessary for pneumatic on-off
ritaratura. valves.
Fig. 3 “AD” Fig.4 “AR”
11 / 35
3.4 – TARATURA VALVOLE MOTORIZZATE SERIE “EP” 3.4 – ELECTRIC POWERED VALVES CALIBRATION
“EP” SERIES
3.4.1 – TARATURA INTERRUTTORI INTERNI SERIE “EP” 3.4.1. – LIMIT SWITCHES CALIBRATION “EP” SERIES
Le valvole vengono fornite tarate e collaudate, pronte per Valves are supplied, calibrated and tested to work in
poter funzionare alle condizioni richieste dal cliente in fase conditions set by the customer. The s t a n d a r d limit
d’ordine. Gli interruttori standard interni, servono per switches serve to switch-off the actuator when the limits have
bloccare il motore in apertura e chiusura per coppia. La been reached. For the calibration see Fig. 5. They can be
regolazione viene effettuata come indicato nella Fig. 5 I fine used also for stroke – limitation. If the limit switches are not
corsa di coppia possono essere utilizzati anche per limitare right calibrated after 2’ the friction of the actuator switch-off
la corsa della valvola. Nel caso un interruttore sia starato the system.
rispetto alla corsa meccanica, la frizione del motore è tarata
per staccarsi automaticamente dopo circa 2’.
Fig. 5 Vite di bloccaggio
Locking screw
Vite di regolazione
Gear screw
2
3.4.2. – TARATURA RONDELLE A TAZZA SERIE “EP” 3.4.2. – DISC SPRINGS SETTING “EP” SERIES
Assicurarsi di aver posizionato le rondelle a tazza in base Be sure you set the disc springs according to the figures on
alla figura relativa al motore prescelto (vedi fig.6 / 6.1 / 6.2 / the selected motor (see fig.6 / 6.1 / 6.2 / 6.3 below). Tighten
6.3 sotto). Procedere quindi al serraggio a croce della flangia then the clamping screws crosswise according to the value
secondo il valore indicato in figura. shown on each figure.
Fig. 6
TIPO / TYPE PSL201
Singole Disposizione rondelle a tazza
Single N°18 molle a tazza
Ø 23 x Ø12,2 x sp.1
Gruppi di 4 N°1 gruppi di 4 +
Flangia N°5 singole per porzione
4-Fold
Flange Disc springs distribution
N°18 disc springs
Ø23 x Ø12,2 x th.1
N°1 4-fold + N°5 single
for each portion
Porta stelo N°4 viti
Stem joint Forza di serraggio flangia:8 Nm
N°4 screws Flange clamping force:8 Nm
12 / 35
Fig. 6.1
TIPO / TYPE PSL202
Singole Doppie Disposizione rondelle a tazza
Single Double N°14 molle a tazza
Ø23 x Ø12,2 x sp.1,25
N°1 doppie + N°5 singole per porzione
Disc springs distribution
Flangia N°14 disc springs
Flange Ø23 x Ø12,2 x th.1,25
N°1 double + N°5 single
for each portion
Fig. 6.2
TIPO / TYPE PSL204
Flangia Disposizione rondelle a tazza
Flange N°16 molle a tazza
Tutte doppie Ø23 x Ø12,2 x sp. 25
All double N°4 doppie per porzione
Disc springs distribution
N°16 disc springs
Ø23 x Ø12,2 x th. 1,25
N°4 double for each portion
N°4 viti
N°4 screws Forza di serraggio flangia:8 Nm
Porta stelo
Flange clamping force:8 Nm
Stem joint
Fig. 6.3
3.5 – TARATURA VALVOLE MOTORIZZATE SERIE “EPR” 3.5 – ELECTRIC VALVES CALIBRATION “EPR” SERIES
Non è necessaria nessuna taratura, l’attuatore esegue una Any setting is requested. The actuator starts an
procedura di “autotuning”. “autotuning” process.
3.5.1 – DIAGNOSTICA SERIE “EPR” 3.5.1 – CHECK-UP “EPR” SERIES
Entrambi iLED lampeggiano in verde : tempo di attesa (45 Both LEDs flash green : waiting period (45s) after
s.) a funzione di disinserzione di emergenza decorsa. emergency function has finished.
Entrambi i LED lampeggiano in rosso: inizializzazione. Both LEDs flash red: initialization.
Un LED lampeggia in verde : Il motore compie una corsa in One LED flashes green : drive extends direction in
direzione del LED corrispondente. accordance with LED.
Un LED illuminato in verde : motore a riposo, ultima corsa in One LED lights up green: drive in rest position, last running
direzione del LED corrispondente. direction in accordance with LED.
Un LED illuminato in rosso: fine corsa raggiunto. Posizione One LED lights up red: end position reached. Valve position
della valvola (aperta o chiusa) secondo il LED (open or closed) in accordance with LED.
corrispondente. No LED slight up: no pow er supply or no control (3 points
LED spenti : niente tensione di alimentazione o niente mode).
segnale di comando (per regolatore a 3 posizioni). Entrambi Both LEDs flash red/green: manual mode.
i LED lampeggiano rosso / verde: funzionamento manuale.
13 / 35
4 - MANUTENZIONE 4 - MAINTENENCE
ATTENZIONE PRIMA DI EFFETTUARE QUALSIASI WARNING BEFORE M AKING ANY OPERATIONS OF
OPERAZIONE DI MANUTENZIONE, DARE ARIA AL MAINTENANCE, PRIOR TO REMOVAL THE YOKE -
SERVOMOTORE (1 BAR ) AL FINE DI COMPRIMERE LE ACTUATOR ASSE MBLY, PUT INTOTHE ACTUA TOR AI R
MOLLE. DA QUESTO MOMENTO SI PUO' ESTRARRE I L PRESSURE OF 1 BAR. THIS OPERATION WILL ENSURE
CASTELLO-SERVOMOTORE ED OGNI COMPONENTE THE CORRECT RETURN SPRINGS AND THEY WILL BE NOT
COLLEGATO SENZA POSSIBILITA’ CHE LE MOLLE FALLING OVER.
RIMANGONO PRIVE DI COMPRESSIONE.
4.1 - SOSTITUZIONE GUARNIZIONE CORPO 4.1 - REPLACEMENT OF BODY GASKET
ATTENZIONE SE LA VALVOLA É EQUIPAGGIATA DI WARNING IN THE CASE OF VALVES FITTED WITH
TENUTA A SOFFIETTO, CONSIDERANDO LA COMPLESSITÀ BELLOWS SEAL IT IS ADVISABLE TO CONTACT OUR
DELLE OPERAZIONI PER LA SOSTITUZIONE DELLA SERVICING DEPARTMENT FOR THE REPLACEMENT OF
GUARNIZIONE CORPO SI CONSIGLIA DI CONTATTARE IL BODY GASKET.
NOSTRO SERVIZIO ASSISTENZA.
4.1.1 - VALVOLE A 2 VIE PNEUMATICHE TIPO 4.1.1 – 2 WAYS PNEUMATIC VALVES TYPE
2000 – 2100 – 5000 – 5100 – 5800 2000 – 2100 – 5000 – 5100 – 5800
L’operazione di sostituzione della guarnizione del corpo può The replacement of the body gasket can be carried out
essere eseguita con la valvola montata sulla tubazione. without removing the valve from the pipe work.
Per valvole ad AZIONE DIR ETTA (AD= aria chiude), Fig. 7, For DIRECT ACTION valves (AD= air closes), Fig. 7,
procedere come segue: proceed as follows :
- svitare i dadi di fissaggio rif. n°17 che serrano il castello rif. - unscrew the body locknuts ref. n° 17 fixing the yoke ref.
n°18 sul corpo valvola rif. n°1. n° 18 on the valve body ref. n° 1.
- rimuovere contemporaneamente il c astello rif. n° 18 - remove at the same time the yoke ref. n° 18 complete of
completo di ogni componente. every component.
- rimuovere la vecchi a g uarnizione rif. N°9 e pu lire - take off the old gasket ref. N° 9 and clean the casing
accuratamente la sede di alloggiamento. thoroughly to get rid of any foreign material.
- sostituire la guarnizione rif. n°9. - place the new gasket ref. n° 9.
- procedere q uindi al montaggio ese guendo le prece denti - for reassembling carry out the above procedure in
operazioni in senso inverso. reverse.
Per valvo le ad AZIONE ROVESCIA (AR= ariaapre), F ig. 8, For REVERSE A CTION valves (AR= air opens), Fig.8, to
per sostitu ire la guarnizione del corpo procedere c ome replace the ga sket proceed as indicated a bove but havi ng
sopra avendo cura per ò, prim a di svitare i dadi di fissaggio care, prior to loose the bo dy lock nuts ref. n° 17, to su pply
rif. n°17, di da re aria, ad u na pressi one c he conse nta al la air to the actu ator at a suitable pressure capable to make
valvola di compiere pochi millimetri di corsa, in modo da few millimetres of stroke , i.e. to m ove the plug far from the
allontanare l’otturatore dalla sua sede. seat.
Per valv ole a DOPPIO EF FETTO (DE= aria a pre/chiude ), For DOUBLE ACT ION valves (DE= air opens/cl oses),
procedere co me per la v ersione “AD ” avendo cur a p erò, proceed as indicated for “AD” version but having care, prior
prima di svitare i dadi di fissaggio rif. n°17, di contro llare che to loose the body locknuts ref. n° 17 , to check the valve is in
la va lvola s ia in p osizione d i tutta a pertura in modo c he fully open position, i.e. the plug must be far from the seat.
l’otturatore sia allontanato dalla sua sede.
(*) Attenzione ! per le valvole 5000 – 5100 - 5800 (*) Warning ! for 5000 – 5100 – 5800 types
Se si vuo le sostituire anche la guarnizione inferiore, svitare i If you want to replace the lower bo dy g asket, loose th e
dadi, toglier e la flan gia i nferiore rif. 1a e proced ere al la locknuts re move the b ottom flange rif.1a and proceed to
sostituzione. the replacement.
Nessuna ritar atura é ric hiesta dop o la s ostituzione d ella After replace ment of the bod y gask et no ca librations are
guarnizione del corpo. Si consi glia di u tilizzare se mpre necessary. Please note always use the manufacturers
guarnizioni originali e di ingrassare s empre lo stel o e l ’asta recommended gasket and always gre ase th e stem and
superiore. the diaphragm rod.
4.1.2 - VALVOLE A 2 VIE MOTORIZZATE TIPO 4.1.2 – 2 WAYS ELECTRIC POWERED VALVES
2000 – 2100 – 5000 – 5100 – 5800 TYPE 2000 – 2100 – 5000 – 5100 – 5800
Aprire la v alvola fino a metà corsa e proc edere come seg ue Open the valve until the middle stroke than proceed as
rif. Fig. 9 e Fig.10: follows ref. Fig. 9 and Fig. 10 :
- svitare i d adi di fissaggio rif. n°17 c he serrano il castello rif. - unscrew the body locknuts ref. n° 17 fixing the yoke ref. n°
n°18 sul corpo valvola rif. n°1. 18 on the valve body ref. n° 1.
- rimuover e contemporaneamente il ca stello rif. n° 18 - remove a t t h e same time the yoke ref. n° 18 complete of
completo di ogni componente. every component.
- rimuover e l a vecch ia guarnizione rif. n°9 e pulire - take off the old gasket ref. N° 9 and clean t h e casing
accuratamente la sede di alloggiamento. thoroughly to get rid of any foreign material.
- sostituire la guarnizione rif. n°9. - place the new gasket ref. n° 9.
- proce dere q uindi al montaggio es eguendo le prec edenti - for reassembling carry out the above procedure in
operazioni in senso inverso. reverse.
14 / 35
Fig. 7 5000 AD Fig. 8 5000 AR
15 / 35
4.1.3 - VALVOLE PNEUMATICHE A 3 VIE 4.1.3 – PNEUMATIC 3 WAYS VALVES
TIPO 2600 – 2700 – 5600 - 5700 DN 15 – DN 20 TYPE 2600 – 2700 – 5600 – 5700 DN 15 – DN 20
L’operazione di sostituzione della guarnizione corpo non può The replacement of the body gasket can not be carried out
essere eseguita con la valvola montata sulla tubazione. without removing the valve from the pipe work.
16 / 35
4.1.4 - VALVOLE MOTORIZZATE A 3 VIE 4.1.4 – ELECTRIC POWERED 3 WAYS VALVES
TIPO 2600 – 2700 – 5600 - 5700 DN 15 – DN 20 TYPE 2600 – 2700 – 5600 – 5700 DN 15 – DN 20
L’operazione di sostituzione della guarnizione corpo non può The replacement of the body gasket can not be carried out
essere eseguita con la valvola montata sulla tubazione. without removing the valve from the pipe work.
17 / 34
4.1.5 - VALVOLE PNEUMATICHE 3 vie miscelatrici 4.1.5 – PNEUMATIC VALVES 3 ways mixing
TIPO 2600 – 5600 DN 25 – DN 200 TYPE 2600 – 5600 DN 25 – DN 200
L’operazione di sostituzione della guarnizione corpo non può The replacement of the body gasket can not be carried out
essere eseguita con la valvola montata sulla tubazione. without removing the valve from the pipe work.
18 / 34
4.1.6 - VALVOLE PNEUMATICHE 3 vie deviatrici 4.1.6 – PNEUMATIC VALVES 3 ways diverting
TIPO 2700 – 5700 DN 25 – DN 200 TYPE 2700 – 5700 DN 25 – DN 200
L’operazione di sostituzione della guarnizione corpo non può The replacement of the body gasket can not be carried out
essere eseguita con la valvola montata sulla tubazione. without removing the valve from the pipework.
19 / 35
4.1.7 - VALVOLE MOTORIZZATE 3 vie miscelatrici 4.1.7 – ELECTRIC POWERED VALVES 3 ways mixing
TIPO 2600 - 5600 DN 25 – DN 200 TYPE 2600 – 5600 DN 25 – DN 200
L’operazione di sostituzione della guarnizione corpo non può The replacement of the body gasket can not be carried out
essere eseguita con la valvola montata sulla tubazione. without removing the valve from the pipe work.
20 / 35
4.1.8 - VALVOLE MOTORIZZATE 3 vie deviatrici 4.1.8 – ELECTRIC POWERED VALVES 3 ways dev. TYPE
TIPO 2700 – 5700 DN 25 – DN 200 2700 – 5700 DN 25 – DN 200
L’operazione di sostituzione della guarnizione corpo non The replacement of the body gasket can not be carried out
può essere eseguita con la valvola montata sulla tubazione. without removing the valve from the pipe work.
21 / 35
4.2 - SOSTITUZIONE PREMISTOPPA 4.2 - REPLACEMENT OF STUFFING BOX PACKING
ATTENZIONE SE LA VALVOLA È EQUIPAGGIATA DI WARNING IN THE CASE OF VALVES FITTED W I TH
TENUTA A SOFFIETTO, CONSIDERANDO LA COMPLESSITÀ B E L L O W S SEAL IT IS ADVISABLE TO CONTACT OUR
DELLE OPERAZIONI PER LA SOSTITUZIONE DELLA SERVICING DEPARTMENT F O R THE REPLACEMENT OF
GUARNIZIONE CORPO SI CONSIGLIA DI CONTATTARE IL BODY GASKET.
NOSTRO SERVIZIO ASSISTENZA.
4.2.1 - VALVOLE A 2 VIE PNEUMATICHE 4.2.1 – 2 WAYS PNEUMATIC VALVES
TIPO 2000 – 2100 – 5000 – 5100 – 5800 TYPE 2000 – 2100 – 5000 – 5100 – 5800
L’operazione di sostituzione del premistoppa può essere The replacement of the stuffing box packing can be carried
eseguita con la valvola montata sulla tubazione. out without removing the valve from the pipework.
Per valvole ad AZIONE DIRET TA (AD= aria chiude), For DIRECT ACTION valves (AD=air closes), fig.3 page 11
fig.3 pag. n°11 fig.7 pag n°15 procedere come segue: and fig.7 page 15 proceed as follows :
- svitare i dadi di fissaggio rif. n°17 che serrano il castello - unscrew the body locknuts ref. n° 17 fixing the yoke ref.
rif. n°18 sul corpo valvola rif. n°1. n° 18 on the valve body ref. n° 1.
- rimuovere contemporaneamente il castello rif. n°18 - remove a t t h e same time the yoke ref. n° 18 complete of
completo di ogni componente. every component.
- svitare i dadi del profilo otturatore rif. n°3 estrarre la - unscrew the locknuts plug ref. n° 3, remove the
rosetta rif. n°4 e il profilo otturatore rif. n°5 washer ref. n°4 and the profile plug n° 5
- sfilare il bonnet completo rif. n°7 e procedere alla - take off the complete bonnet ref. n° 7 and proceed to the
sostituzione del premistoppa come indicato nella Fig. 23 – substitution of the stuffing box packing as
NOTA: sui diametri nominali dal DN125 al DN200 questa indicated on Fig. 23 – NOT E: for valves from DN125
operazione comporta la rimozione, insieme al bonnet, to DN 200 take off the floating locking flange with the
della flangia flottante di chiusura. (vedi fig. 22 a / 22 b - bonnet (see fig. 22 a / 22 b - pag n°23).
pag n°23). - when you change the stuffing box packing, is
- quando si cambia il premistoppa è necessario necessary remove also the body gasket ref. N° 9 see
sostituire anche la guarnizione corpo rif. N°9 vedi 4.1.1 point
punto 4.1.1 - for reassembling carry out the above procedure in
- procedere quindi al montaggio eseguendo le reverse.
precedenti operazioni in senso inverso.
Per valvole ad AZIONE ROVESCIA (AR= aria apre), fig.4 For REVERSE ACTION valves (AR=air opens), Fig.4 page
pag.11 fig.8 pag.15 procedere come sopra, avendo cura 11 and Fig. 8 page 15, to replace the gasket proceed as
però, prima di svitare i dadi di fissaggio rif. n°17, di dare aria, indicated above but having care, prior to loose the body
ad una pressione che consenta alla valvola di compiere locknuts ref. n° 17, to supply air to the actuator at a suitable
pochi millimetri di corsa, in modo da allontanare l’otturatore pressure capable to make few millimetres of stroke, i.e. to
dalla sua sede. m o v e the plug far from the seat.
Per valvole a DOPPIO EFFETTO (DE = aria apre/chiude), For DOUBLE ACT ION valves (DE= air opens/closes),
procedere come per la versione “AD” avendo cura però, proceed as indicated for “AD” version but having care,
prima di svitare i dadi di fissaggio rif. n°17, di controllare che prior to loose the body locknuts ref. n° 17 , to check the
la valvola sia in posizione di tutta apertura in modo che valve is in fully open position, i.e. the plug must be far
l’otturatore sia allontanato dalla sua sede. from the seat.
Nessuna ritaratura é richiesta dopo la sostituzione del After r e p l a c e m e n t of the stuffing box packing no
premistoppa. Si consiglia di utilizzare sempre guarnizioni calibrations are necessary. Please note always use the
originali e di ingrassare sempre lo stelo e l’asta superiore. manufacturers recommended gasket and always grease
the stem and the diaphragm rod.
4.2.2 - VALVOLE A 2 VIE MOTORIZZATE TIPO 2000 – 4.2.2 – 2 WAYS ELECTRIC POWERED VALVES TYPE
2100 – 5000 – 5100 – 5800 2000 – 2100 – 5000 – 5100 – 5800
Aprire la valvola fino a metà corsa e procedere come segue Open the valve until the middle stroke than proceed as
rif. Fig. 9 e Fig. 10 pag. 11: follows ref. Fig. 9 and Fig. 10 page 11 :
- svitare i dadi di fissaggio rif. n°17 che serrano il castello rif. - unscrew the body locknuts ref. n° 17 fixing the yoke
n°18 sul corpo valvola rif. n°1. ref. n° 18 on the valve body ref. n° 1.
- rimuovere contemporaneamente il castello rif. n°18 - remove at t h e same time the yoke ref. n° 18
completo di ogni componente. complete of every component.
- unscrew the locknuts plug ref. n° 3, remove the
- svitare i dadi del profilo otturatore rif. n°3 estrarre la rosetta
washer ref. n°4 and the profile plug n° 5
rif. n°4 e il profilo otturatore rif. n°5
- take off the complete bonnet ref. n° 7 and precede the
- sfilare il bonnet completo rif. n°7 e procedere alla substitution of the stuffing box packing as indicated on
sostituzione del premistoppa come indicato nella Fig. 23 Fig. 23 - NOTE: for valves from DN125 to DN 200 take off
- NOTA: sui diametri nominali dal DN125 al DN200 questa the floating locking flange with the bonnet (see fig. 22 c -
operazione comporta la rimozione, insieme al bonnet, pag n°23).
della flangia flottante di chiusura (vedi fig. 22 c pag n°23). - when you change the stuffing box packing, is necessary
- quando si cambia il premistoppa è necessario sostituire remove also the body gasket ref. N° 9 see 4.1.2 point
anche la guarnizione corpo rif. N°9 vedi punto 4. 1.2 - for reassembling carry out the above procedure in
reverse.
- procedere quindi al montaggio in senso inverso.
22 / 35
Fig. 22a 5000 AD Fig. 22b 5000 AR
23 / 35
4.2.3 - VALVOLE PNEUMATICHE A 3 VIE 4.2.3 – PNEUMATIC 3 WAYS VALVES
TIPO 2600 – 2700 – 5600 - 5700 DN 15 – DN 20 TYPE 2600 – 2700 – 5600 – 5700 DN 15 – DN 20
L’operazione di sostituzione del premistoppa può essere The replacement of the stuffing box packing can be carried
eseguita con la valvola montata sulla tubazione ma out without removing the valve from the pipe work but
considerando la complessità delle operazioni si consiglia di considering that more complicated operations are involved,
eseguire la manutenzione con la valvola staccata dalla it is advisable to take out the valve from the pipe work.
tubazione.
Rif. Fig. 11 – 12 - 23 procedere come segue : Ref. Fig. 11 – 12 - 23 proceed as follows :
- dare aria al servomotore ad una pressione tale che sia - supply air to the actuator at a suitable pressure
possibile allontanare di pochi millimetri l’otturatore dalla sede capable to make few millimetres of stroke moving
superiore o inferiore the plug far from the upper or lower seat
- allentare i dadi rif. n°20 che serrano l’asta superiore - loosen the position indicator locknuts ref. n° 20 between
rif. n°22 con lo stelo inferiore rif. n°6. the diaphragm rod r e f . n° 22 and the stem ref. n° 6.
- svitare i dadi di fissaggio rif. n°17 che serrano il - unscrew the body locknuts ref. n° 17 fixing the yoke
castello rif. n°18 sul corpo valvola rif. n°1. ref. n° 18 on the valve body ref. n° 1.
- svitare lo stelo inferiore rif. n°6 e separarlo dall’asta - unscrew the stem ref. n°6 and divide it from
superiore rif. n°22. the diaphragm rod ref. n° 22.
- rimuovere il castello rif. n°18. - remove the yoke ref. n° 18 and unthread the
- sfilare il bonnet rif. n°7 (lo stelo rif. n°6 rimarrà bonnet ref. n° 7 (the stem ref. n° 6 will remain
inserito nel corpo valvola). into the valve body).
- rimuovere il vecchio premistoppa e sostituirlo rif. Fig. 23 - take off the old stuffing box packing and replace
- quando si cambia il premistoppa è necessario sostituire it ref. Fig.23.
anche la guarnizione corpo rif. N°9 vedi punto 4.1.3 - when you change the stuffing box packing, is
- procedere quindi al montaggio eseguendo le precedenti necessary remove also the body gasket ref. N° 9 see
operazioni in senso inverso. 4.1.3 point
- for reassembling carry out the above procedure
in reverse.
Fig. 23 PREMISTOPPA – Stuffing box packing
24 / 35
4.2.4 - VALVOLE MOTORIZZATE A 3 VIE 4.2.4 – ELECTRIC POWERED 3 WAYS VALVES TYPE
TIPO 2600 – 2700 – 5600 - 5700 DN 15 – DN 20 2600 – 2700 – 5600 – 5700 DN 15 – DN 20
L’operazione di sostituzione del premistoppa non può essere The replacement of the stuffing box packing cannot be
eseguita con la valvola montata sulla tubazione! carried out without removing the valve from the pipe work!
4.2.5 - VALVOLE PNEUMATICHE 3 vie miscelatrici 4.2.5 – PNEUMATIC VALVES 3 ways mixing
TIPO 2600 – 5600 DN 25 – DN 200 TYPE 2600 – 5600 DN 25 – DN 200
L’operazione di sostituzione del premistoppa non può essere The replacement of the stuffing box packing cannot be
eseguita con la valvola montata sulla tubazione! carried out without removing the valve from the pipe work!
Rif. Fig. 15 – 16 procedere come segue: Ref. Fig. 15 – 16 proceed as follows :
- dare aria al servomotore ad una pressione tale che sia - supply air to the actuator at a suitable pressure capable
possibile allontanare di pochi millimetri l’otturatore dalla to make few millimetres of stroke moving the plug far
sede inferiore o superiore. from the lower or upper seat.
- attraverso il tronchetto flangiato inferiore e mediante - through the lower flanged connection and by means of
un’apposita chiave, svitare i dadi di bloccaggio suitable wrench loosen the plug locknuts ref. n° 3
dell’otturatore rif. n°3, che serrano il profilo inferiore rif. fixing the lower plug profile ref. n° 5 on the stem ref. n°6
n°5 sullo stelo rif. n°6, e rimuoverli unitamente alla rosetta and remove them together with the spring washer ref.
rif. n°4. n° 4.
- svitare i dadi di fissaggio rif. n°17 che serrano il castello - unscrew the body locknuts ref. n° 17 fixing the yoke ref. n°
rif. n°18 sul corpo valvola rif. n°1. 18 on the valve body ref. n° 1.
- rimuovere contemporaneamente il castello rif. n°18, il - remove at the same time the yoke ref. n° 18, the bonnet
bonnet rif. n°7, lo stelo rif. n°6 (il profilo dell’otturatore rif. ref. n° 7, the stem ref. n° 6 (the plug profile ref. n°5 will
n°5 rimarrà inserito nel corpo valvola). remain into the valve body).
- sfilare il bonnet rif. n°7 e rimuovere il vecchio premistoppa - remove the bonnet ref. n°7 and take off the old stuffing
e sostituirlo rif. Fig. 23 - NOTA: sui diametri nominali dal box packing and replace it ref. Fig. 23 - NOT E: for
DN125 al DN200 questa operazione comporta la valves from DN125 to DN 200 take off the floating locking
rimozione, insieme al bonnet, della flangia flottante di flange with the bonnet. (see fig. 22 a / 22 b - pag n°19).
chiusura. (vedi fig. 22 a / 22 b - pag n°19). - when you change the stuffing box packing, is
- quando si cambia il premistoppa è necessario sostituire necessary remove also the body gasket ref. N° 9 see
anche la guarnizione corpo rif. N°9 vedi punto 4.1.5 4.1.5 point
- procedere quindi al montaggio eseguendo le precedenti - for reassembling carry out the above procedure in
operazioni in senso inverso. reverse.
25 / 35
4.2.6 - VALVOLE PNEUMATICHE 3 vie deviatrici 4.2.6 – PNEUMATIC VALVES 3 ways diverting
TIPO 2700 – 5700 DN 25 – DN 200 TYPE 2700 – 5700 DN 25 – DN 200
L’operazione di sostituzione del premistoppa non può essere The replacement of the stuffing box packing can not be
eseguita con la valvola montata sulla tubazione! carried out without removing the valve from the pipe work!
L’operazione di sostituzione del premistoppa non può essere The replacement of the stuffing box packing can not be
eseguita con la valvola montata sulla tubazione! carried out without removing the valve from the pipe work!
L’operazione di sostituzione del premistoppa non può essere The replacement of the stuffing box packing can not be
eseguita con la valvola montata sulla tubazione! carried out without removing the valve from the pipe work!
Rif. Fig. 17 – 18 procedere come segue: Ref. Fig. 17 – 18 proceed as follows :
- dare aria al servomotore ad una pressione tale che sia - supply air to the actuator at a suitable pressure capable
possibile allontanare di pochi millimetri l’otturatore dalla to make few millimetres of stroke moving the plug far
sede inferiore o superiore. from the lower or upper seat.
26 / 35
- attraverso il tronchetto flangiato inferiore e mediante - through the lower flanged connection and by means of
un’apposita chiave, svitare i dadi di bloccaggio suitable wrench loosen the plug locknuts ref. n°
dell’otturatore rif. n°3, che serrano il profilo inferiore rif. 3 fixing the lower plug profile ref. n° 5 on the stem ref. n°
n°5 sullo stelo rif. n°6, e rimuoverli unitamente alla rosetta 6 and remove them together with the spring washer ref.
rif. n°4. n° 4.
- svitare i dadi di fissaggio rif. n°17 che serrano il - unscrew the body locknuts ref. n° 17 fixing the yoke ref.
castello rif. n°18 sul corpo valvola rif. n°1. n° 18 on the valve body ref. n° 1.
- rimuovere contemporaneamente il castello rif. n°18, il - remove at the same time the yoke ref. n° 18, the bonnet
bonnet rif. n°7, lo stelo rif. n°6 con il profilo otturatore ref. n° 7, the stem ref. n° 6 with the upper plug profile ref.
superiore rif. n°5a. n° 5a.
- sfilare il bonnet rif. n°7 e rimuovere il vecchio premistoppa - remove the bonnet ref. n°7 and take off the old stuffing
e sostituirlo rif. Fig. 23 - NOTA: sui diametri nominali dal box packing and replace it ref. Fig. 23. -
DN125 al DN200 questa operazione comporta la NOTE: for valves from DN125 to DN 200 take off the
rimozione, insieme al bonnet, della flangia flottante di floating locking flange with the bonnet. (see fig. 22 a /22 b
chiusura. (vedi fig. 22 a / 22 b pag n°23). page n°23).
- quando si cambia il premistoppa è necessario sostituire - when you change the stuffing box packing, is
anche la guarnizione corpo rif. N°9 vedi punto 4.1.5 necessary remove also the body gasket ref. N° 9 see
- procedere quindi al montaggio eseguendo le precedenti 4.1.5 point
operazioni in senso inverso. - for reassembling carry out the above procedure in
reverse.
4.3 – SOSTITUZIONE DEL PROFILO OTTURATORE e 4.3 – REPLACEMENT OF PLUG PROFIL and SOFT
DELLA TENUTA SOFFICE SU VALVOLE A DUE VIE TIPO SEAL ON TWO WAYS VALVE
2000 – 2100 – 5000 - 5100 TYPE 2000 –2100 – 5000 - 5100
ATTENZIONE SE LA VALVOLA É EQUIPAGGIATA DI WARNING IN THE CASE OF VALVES FITTED WITH
TENUTA A SOFFI ETTO, NON RUOTARE LO STELO. B E L L O W S SEAL DON’T TURN THE TRIM STEM.
Per valvole ad AZIONE DIRET TA (AD = aria chiude), Fig. For DIRECT ACTION valves (AD= air closes), Fig. 7,
7 pagina n°11 procedere come segue: page n° 11 proceed as follows :
- svitare i dadi di fissaggio rif. n°17 che serrano il castello - unscrew the body locknuts ref. n° 17 fixing the yoke ref.
rif. n°18 sul corpo valvola rif. n°1. n° 18 on the valve body ref. n° 1.
- rimuovere contemporaneamente e il castello rif. n°18 - remove a t t h e same time the yoke ref. n° 18 complete of
completo di ogni componente. every component.
- svitare i dadi del profilo otturatore rif. n°3 estrarre la - unscrew the locknuts plug ref. n° 3, remove the washer
rosetta rif. n°4 e sostituire il profilo otturatore rif. n°5 ref. n°4 and replace the plug profile ref. n° 5
- per l’ eventuale sostituzione della tenuta soffice Smontare - for eventually replacement of the soft seal remove
il platorello sopra il profilo dell’otturatore e sostituire the plate over the profile plug and replace the soft ring
l’anello - when you change the plug profile, is necessary
- quando si cambia il profilo otturatore è necessario remove also the body gasket ref. N° 9 see 4.1.1 point
sostituire anche la guarnizione corpo rif. N°9 vedi punto - for reassembling carry out the above procedure in
4.1.1 reverse according to the tightening torques shown in the
- procedere quindi al montaggio eseguendo le precedenti table below.
operazioni in senso inverso seguendo le forze di
serraggio indicate nella tabella sotto. For REVERSE ACTION valves (AR=air opens), Fig.8,
Per valvole ad AZIONE ROVESCIA (AR = aria apre), Fig. 8, page n° 9 to replace the gasket proceed as indicated above
pagina n°9 proceder e come sopra, avendo cura però, prima but having care, prior to loose the body locknuts ref. n° 17,
di svitare i dadi di fissaggio rif. n°17, di dare aria, ad una to supply air to the actuator at a suitable pressure
pressione che consenta alla valvola di compiere pochi capable to make few millimetres of stroke , i.e. to move the
millimetri di corsa, in modo da allontanare l’otturatore dalla plug far from the seat.
sua sede. For DOUBLE ACTION valves (DE= air opens/closes),
Per valvole a DOPPIO EFFETTO (DE = aria apre/chiude ), proceed as indicated for “AD” version but having care,
procedere come per la versione “AD” avendo cura però, prior to loose the body locknuts ref. n° 17 , to check the
prima di svitare i dadi di fissaggio rif. n°17, di controllare valve is in fully open position, i.e. the plug must be far
che la valvola sia in posizione di tutta apertura in modo che from the seat.
l’otturatore sia allontanato dalla sua sede. Nessuna After replacement of the plug profile no calibrations are
ritaratura é richiesta dopo la sostituzione del profilo. necessary.
27 / 35
4.4 – SOSTITUZIONE OTTURATORE SU VAVOLE TIPO 4.4 – PLUG REPLACEMENT ON VALVES TYPE
2600 – 2700 – 5600 – 5700 - 5800 2600 – 2700 – 5600 5700 - 5800
Per la sostituzione degli otturatori di queste valvole Vi For the replacement of the plug of these valves it’s
consigliamo di contattare il nostro Servizio Assistenza. advisable to contact our Servicing Department.
4.5 – SOSTITUZIONE DELLA SEDE SU TUTTE LE 4.5 – SEAT REPLACEMENT ON EVERY VALVE TYPES
VALVOLE
La sostituzione della sede o delle sedi è sempre It is never suggested the replacement of the seat / s.
sconsigliata, sarebbe preferibile sostituire l’intero corpo It is preferable to replace the cast body with the seat / s.
valvola. Qualora tale operazione fosse strettamente inside.
necessaria, Vi consigliamo di contattare il nostro Servizio In case the replacement of the s e a t / s is strictly
Assistenza perché, considerando la complessità delle necessary, considering that more complicated operations are
operazioni e gli utensili da utilizzare, non è possibile involved and cannot be carried out on the plant, it is
eseguirla sull’impianto. advisable to contact our Servicing Department.
28 / 35
5 – INVERSIONE DELL’AZIONE 5 – REVERSING THE ACTION
L’operazione di inversione dell’azione può essere eseguita Reversing the action can be carried out without removing
con la valvola montata sulla tubazione. the valve from the pipe work.
Rif. Fig. 26 procedere come segue : Ref. Fig. 26 proceed as follows :
- Invertire i particolari come mostrato nel disegno - overturn all the components showed on drawing
- La forza di serraggio della vite ref.33 deve essere di 20Nm. - The tightening force of the screw ref.33 must be
20 Nm.
ATTENZIONE ! verificare in funzione del segnale se le molle
sono compatibili, es. si vuole passare da una versione AR WARNING! verify function of the signal if the springs are
6-18 psi ad una versione AD 3-15 psi. Contattare il ns. compatible, example if you want to switch from one version
Servizio Post-Vendita per verificare il tipo molle. AR 6-18 psi to a version AD 3-15 psi. Contact our After-
Sales Service to verify the springs type.
29 / 35
6 - ANOMALIE DI FUNZIONAMENTO
Riportiamo qui di seguito alcuni inconvenienti che si possono verificare durante il funzionamento delle valvole ed i
provvedimenti da adottare.
Perdita elevata con valvola chiusa Tenuta soffice rovinata Sostituire la tenuta
Tenuta metallica rovinata - il cono Smerigliare o sostituire l’otturatore,
dell’otturatore o lo spigolo della smerigliare o tornire il piano della
sede rovinato sede.
Pressione differenziale tra monte e Sostituire il servomotore con uno di
valle della valvola troppo elevata diametro idoneo.
Perdita del premistoppa “O” rings e / o anelli deteriorati sostituire gli “O” rings e gli anelli
soffietto rotto contattare il nostro Servizio Assistenza
6 - TROUBLES SHOOTING
Here below some of the possible causes giving troubles during normal working conditions of the valves and the direction to
follows in order to find the source of them :
SYMPTOMS POSSIBLE CAUSE REMEDY
No complete travel of the plug Air leaks in the unit control pipings Check and replace piping if necessary
(Stem does not complete the travel) Air leaks in the valve actuator Tight bolts and nuts of
diaphragm casings
Actuator diaphragm perforated Replace the actuator diaphragm
Electric powered actuator failed Replace the actuator
Foreign material inside the body Remove them and clean the seating
Travel indicator plate not aligned Align it to the travel indicator disc
No correct control signal coming Check the control system
from the control system
Trigger action of the stem Corroded or seized stem Replace the stem
Foreign material inside the bonnet Replace the bonnet and the stuffing
box packing
High leakage of fluid through the valve Soft seal is damaged Replace the soft seal
in closed position Metal seating, plug shape or Lap or replace the plug,
seat are damaged lap or face the surface of the seat
Too high differential pressure Not enough power of the pneumatic
(between upstream and downstream actuator; replace it with a suitable one
pressures)
Leakage on stuffing box “O” rings and / or rings are damaged Replace the “O” rings and the rings
Damaged or broken bellows seal Contact our Servicing Department
30 / 35
7 – ANALISI DEI RISCHI 7 – HAZARD ANALYSIS
Con questo documento vengono valutati i rischi connessi Analysis of hazards that may occur during normal
con l’apparecchiatura su indicata, che possono insorgere working, installation and maintenance. In line with
durante il suo utilizzo, installazione o movimentazione, in what is required by PED Directive 97/23/CE Annex 1
accordo a quanto previsto dalla Direttiva PED 97/23 CE points 1 & 2 the manufacturer must follow the principles
Allegato 1 punto 1 e 2, vengono altresì indicate le set out below in the following order to arrive at the most
prescrizioni a cui attenersi per evitare l’insorgere degli appropriate solution:
stessi.
a) eliminate or reduce hazards as far as is
La classificazione delle soluzioni adottate è la reasonably practicable
seguente: b) apply appropriate protection measures against
hazards which cannot be eliminated
a) Soluzione per eliminare e/o ridurre il rischio. c) where appropriate, inform users of residual
b) Applicazione delle opportune misure di hazards
protezione contro i rischi che non possono
essere eliminati.
c) Informazione degli utilizzatori circa i rischi
residui.
31 / 35
7 – ANALISI DEI RISCHI 7 – HAZARD ANALYSIS
32 / 35
7 – ANALISI DEI RISCHI 7 – HAZARD ANALYSIS
33 / 35
7 – ANALISI DEI RISCHI 7 – HAZARD ANALYSIS
Manutenzione della valvola con Maintenance of the valve with the plant
CAUSA CAUSE
impianto in pressione under pressure
EFFETTO Manutenzione non corretta EFFECT Incorrect maintenance.
Cattivo funzionamento dell’impianto,
Bad working of the plant, danger of
pericolo di proiezioni di particolari in
PERICOLO RISK discharge of metallic parts, danger of
pressione, pericolo di fuoriuscita del
leakage of fluid.
fluido.
a) Le attività di manutenzione devono
a) The maintenance of the valve must
essere effettuate con valvola
be carried out with the equipment
intercettata.
at atmospheric pressure.
b) L’apparecchio deve essere privo
b) The valve must be without
SOLUZIONE di pressione idrostatica. SOLUTION
hydrostatic pressure.
c) L’apparecchio deve essere
c) The fluids of the equipment
intercettato come prescritto nel
must be intercepted.
manuale di uso e installazione.
7.1 – ANALISI DEI RISCHI AGGIUNTIVA PER 7.1 – FURTHER HAZARD ANALYSIS FOR
DIRETTIVA MACCHINE 2006/42/CE MACHINERY DIRECTIVE 2006/427CE
CAUSA Parti in movimento non protette CAUSE Moving parts not protected
34 / 35
8 – MANUALI ACCESSORI COLLEGATI 8 – REFERING ACCESSORIES MANUALS
Manuale di installazione – Istruzioni supplementari per Installation manual – supplementary instruction for ATEX
ATEX 94/9/CE 94/9/CE
Manuale di installazione e manutenzione valvole serie “Low-noise” series installation and maintenance
“antirumore” N° M/UNIWORLDLOWNOISE/I/E manual N° M/UNIWORLDLOWNOISE/I/E
Manuale Posizionatore pneumaticoed elettropneumatico Pneumatic and electropneumatic pilot positioner Manual
N° M/PPL/EPL/I/E N° M/PPL/EPL/I/E
Manuali Posizionatori SMART digitale N° M/SS2/I SMART digital pilot positioners Manual
N° M/SS2/E and M/SS3/E
Manuale Filtro riduttore Serie AFR N° MAFR/I/E Air filter regulator manual AFR Series N° MAFR/I/E
Manuale Attuatore intelligente “AMS” N° M/AMS/E Intelligent electric powered actuator “AMS” manual
Solo versione in Inglese N° M/AMS/E
Scheda switches interni per attuatore AVF N° Internal switches datasheet for actuator AVF N°
M/AVFSWITCHES/I/E M/AVFSWITCHES/I/E
35 / 35
PED 97/23/CE SERIE UNIWORLD MODULO A
Materiali / Materials :
EN GJL 250 – 5 °C / + 200 °C
EN GJS 400 - 18LT – 20 °C / + 300 °C
1.0619 – 20 °C / + 400 °C
ASTM A 216 WCB – 20 °C / + 425 °C
1.4408 CF8M – 196 °C / + 425 °C
CERTIFICATO DI CONFORMITA’. I prodotti sono stati v erificati e is pezionati rispetto al nostro Sistema Controllo Qualita' UNI
EN ISO 9001. Noi certifichiamo che questo prodotto corrisponde a lla Vostra richiesta e che le sue caratteristiche sono in
conformita' con le nostre specifiche tecniche.
CERTIFICATE OF CONFORMITY This product has been manufactured, tested and inspected in accordance with our Quality Assurance
System UNI EN ISO 9001. We certify that it contents correspond to the order placed and its performance is in conformance w ith our
technical specifications.
Materiali / Materials :
EN GJL 250 – 5 °C / + 200 °C
EN GJS 400 - 18LT – 20 °C / + 300 °C
1.0619 – 20 °C / + 400 °C
ASTM A 216 WCB – 20 °C / + 425 °C
1.4408 CF8M – 196 °C / + 425 °C
CERTIFICATO DI CONFORMITA’. I prodotti sono stati v erificati e is pezionati rispetto al nostro Sistema Controllo Qualita' UNI
EN ISO 9001. Noi certifichiamo che questo prodotto corrisponde a lla Vostra richiesta e che le sue caratteristiche sono in
conformita' con le nostre specifiche tecniche.
CERTIFICATE OF CONFORMITY This product has been manufactured, tested and inspected in accordance with our Quality Assurance
System UNI EN ISO 9001. We certify that it contents correspond to the order placed and its performance is in conformance w ith our
technical specifications.
Gli eventuali accessori e/o varianti di attuatore sono conformi alle seguenti Direttive:
Eventually accessories and actuator variations are conformed to following Directive:
Sensore induttivo Tipo FCE/I2 – FCE/I4 Inductive proximity switches Type FCE/I2 – FCE/I4
2004/108/CE, DIN EN 50032 IP 68 IEC 68-2-14, approvato “US SAFETY SYSTEM” (UL)
Elettrovalvole Tipo EV3 24V CC - 24V – 110V – 220V 50/60 Hz 2004/108/CE
Solenoid valves Type EV3 24V CC – 24V – 110V – 220V 50/60 Hz
Tutti gli accessori conformi alla Direttiva ATEX 94/9/CE sono oggetto di certificato di conformità a parte
The conformity certification of all accessories conformed to ATEX 94/9/CE Directive are supplied separately
DICHIARAZIONE DI CONFORMITA’
AI SENSI DELL’ALLEGATO II DIRETTIVA EUROPEA “MACCHINE”
N° 2006/42/CE
Declaration of conformity according to “MACHINE DIRECTIVE”
N° 2006/42/CE annex II
11 2012
FILTRI RIDUTTORI
AIR FILTER REGULATORS
1 - DESCRIZIONE 1 - DESCRIPTION
I filtri riduttori Serie AFR sono stati studiati per alimentare, con aria The air filter regulators AFR Series are specially designed for feed,
pulita e ad una pressione controllata, tutta la strumentazione di misura, with clean air and controlled pressure, all the measuring and control
regolazione, macchinari automatici e qualsiasi tipo di apparecchiatura instrumentations, automatic machines and any type of pneumatic
pneumatica o elettropneumatica. L’elevata precisione di regolazione e devices. The high precision of control and its constructive
le loro caratteristiche costruttive industriali rendono l’apparecchio characteristics make it particularly reliable even in environmental
particolarmente affidabile anche nell’utilizzo in condizioni heavy conditions.
particolarmente gravose.
4. INSTALLAZIONE : 4. INSTALLATION :
Il filtro riduttore serie AFR è dotato di n° 2 attacchi Ø1/4” Rp ISO7. The air filter regulator AFR series is provide with two Ø1/4” RP ISO 7
IN = INGRESSO OUT = USCITA l’altro attacco Ø1/8” Rp ISO7 serve connections IN = INPUT OUT = OUTPUT the remaining connection
per il collegamento del manometro di lettura della pressione ridotta. Per Ø1/8” Rp ISO7 is suitable for the pressure gauge of the reduced
montare il manometro svitare uno dei due tappi a vite . pressure. To mount the pressure gauge unscrew one of the two
screw plugs.
1
5. MESSA IN FUNZIONE : 5. START-UP :
RIF. Fig.1 e 2 Tipi AFR35 AFR80 AFR35/A AFR80/A: REF. Fig.1 e 2 Types AFR35 AFR80 AFR35/A AFR80/A:
dopo aver effettuato i collegamenti, tirare verso l’alto la manopola di after having performed the connections, pull up the adjusting handle
regolazione del campo (in modo da sbloccarla), portando la pressione (unlock it) and adjust the output pressure by means of the adjusting
ridotta al valore desiderato, ed effettuare la lettura sul manometro. handle and read the gauge. By turning the handle clockwise, the
Ruotando la manopola in senso orario la pressione aumenta, ruotando output pressure increases, while turning it anti-clockwise the output
la manopola in senso antiorario la pressione diminuisce. pressure reduces.
A seguito di questa operazione bloccare la manopola schiacciando Lock the handle after this operation, pushing it down.
verso il basso.
RIF. Fig. 3 Tipi AFRX35 AFRX80: REF. Fig. 3 Tipi AFRX35 AFRX80 :
dopo aver effettuato i collegamenti, svitare il dado di bloccaggio , after having performed the connections, unscrew the locking nut,
ruotare la vite di regolazione del campo, portando la pressione ridotta rotate the range adjusting screw, adjust the output pressure and read
al valore desiderato, ed effettuare la lettura sul manometro. Ruotando the gauge. By turning the screw clockwise, the output pressure
la vite in senso orario la pressione aumenta, ruotando la vite in senso increases, while turning it anti-clockwise the output pressure
antiorario la pressione diminuisce. reduces.
A seguito di questa operazione bloccare il dado. Lock the locking nut after this operation.
6. MANUTENZIONE : 6. MAINTENANCE :
I filtri riduttore AFR sono dotati di una tazza che raccoglie la condensa The AFR Air Filter Regulators are equipped by a screw bowl that
dell’aria di alimentazione, periodicamente è necesario svuotarla holds the supply air condensate. Periodically eliminate the
premendo la valvola di drenaggio. La periodicità di questa operazione condensate by the draincock. The frequency of this operations
dipende dall’umidità contenuta nell’aria di alimentazione. depends on the amount of humidity contained in the air supply.
ATTENZIONE Nell’eseguire questa operazione porre WARNING When performing this operation pay
estrema attenzione al fluido in pressione eliminato great attention to the exhausted working fluids.
dallo sfiato
All’occorrenza la tazza può essere smonata, svuotata e pulita . Anche il The screw bowl can be removed, empted and cleaned. The internal
filtro interno può essere smontato per mezzo del dado di serraggio. filter can be also removed by the locknut.
ATTENZIONE Per eseguire questa operazione, WARNING Before this operation, make sure that
assicurarsi che il riduttore non sia alimentato. the filter regulator is closed, without pressure.
Vite di regolazione
Manopola regolaz. Adjusting nut
Adjusting handle
Manopola regolaz.
Adjusting handle Vite di bloccaggio
Manometro Locking nut
Manometro Gauge
Gauge
Manometro
Gauge
Tazza Tazza
Bowl Bowl
Tazza
Valvola drenaggio Bowl
Draincock
Valvola drenaggio
Draincock Valvola drenaggio
Draincock
2
Via Lecco 69/71
20041 AGRATE BRIANZA (MI) - ITALY
DICHIARAZIONE DI CONFORMITA’
AI SENSI DELL’ALLEGATO VII DIRETTIVA EUROPEA “PED” N° 97/23/CE
Declaration of conformity according to PED DIRECTIVE N° 97/23/CE annex VII
A. Descrizione / Description : Filtri Riduttori Serie AFR - Air Filter Regulators AFR Series
Tipo / Type : AFR35 – AFR80 – AFR35/A – AFR80/A – AFRX35 – AFRX80
Max allowable pressure / Max pressione ammissibile
AFR35 – AFR80 : 10 barg / AFR35/A – AFR80/A : 17 barg / AFRX35 – AFRX80 : 15 barg
DICHIARAZIONE DI CONFORMITA’
AI SENSI DELLA DIRETTIVA EUROPEA “ATEX” N°94/9/CE (Allegato X punto B.)
Declaration of conformity according to ATEX DIRECTIVE N° 94/9/CE
(Annex X Point B.)
Per quanto esposto si dichiara che gli apparecchi descritti al punto A, classificati secondo il punto B e
valutati in accordo al punto C, soddisfano i requisiti essenziali di sicurezza previsti nell’allegato II della
Direttiva 94/9/CE e ad essa applicabili.
We declare that the equipments mentioned on above point A, classificated according to point B, valuated according to point C, are
conformed to the most essential safety requirements as required by Directive 94/9/CE annex II.
CERTIFICATO DI CONFORMITA’. I prodotti sono stati verificati e ispezionati rispetto al nostro Sistema Controllo Qualita' UNI
EN ISO 9001. Noi certifichiamo che questo prodotto corrisponde alla Vostra richiesta e che le sue caratteristiche sono in
conformita' con le nostre specifiche tecniche.
CERTIFICATE OF CONFORMITY This product has been manufactured, tested and inspected in accordance with our Quality Assurance
System UNI EN ISO 9001. We certify that it contents correspond to the order placed and its performance is in conformance with our
technical specifications.
2/2
Seriea • MONTAOC • IKSTALLATTON • EINBAU
Baureih* Las carnpoawta ASCO/JOUCCéAATTC Die ASCWJOUCXIMATIC-Komponerrtan Le rrjccorrjernerit éiectnque dori èrre rea- In case of etecbicaJ ccrinecrions, they ara
EL£CTROVANNE6 T A R A U O E E S O U A APPLIQUE ASCO/JOUCOMATIC componenU are
s o n i c o n c u * pour l e s domaines d a dùrfen nur kinerheJD dar ani den Typen- •aé par un personnei qualrfhs et se+or les onty to be mede by bamed personnei and
InstaMton intanded lo be used onfy ttWl the tochnì-
norme* et règaartenti locaux. beva lo be in ecorxilance with the locai
114-115 S O L E N O D V ALVES. TURE A M O CONNECTION OR S U B B A S E HOUNTMQ l o n c t i o n n e m e r u indiqués d a n s la cal dis/erctonaacs as speerfied on the schedem angegecenen Datan aingeeetzt
reguiabons a n d standsfds
190-192 • U Q N E T V E N T U QEWINDCAKSCHLUSS ODER QRUMDPLATTEN - AUSFUHRUNG 3/2 docucTrentaltor. Aucuna rnodifteabon na
peut ètra réelieee sur la matenei sana
l'accora posatati» du tabneant ou da aon
rapréaantant. Avant da procèder au
nameplate. Change» io Ine equiprnent
Sreoriryallowed after censj "ùngine manu-
tacturer or i t i repreeentatrve. Bafore in-
stai abon deprcssori Ine pipino, system
«moen.Varlndarungen an d»n Produh-
ten sind nur nach Pfcjckspracrta rnit ASCO/
XHXX)MATIC zuiàsata.
Vor oem Einbau dar Ventile muti dea
• A r a m toute iritervenbon. couper rali-
mantafjon éiectnque pour m a t t e hors
teneion lea cemposants
Caution:
• I sola t» from electncal supofy and d a - .
anergize the electncal drcua and vott-
• Vor Begtnn dar ArtMften ist sicherzu-
steten, dail alle olaMjtschen Lerlungen
(3D rnontaoe. dérxessuriser les carviUsabons and dean intemairy. R cariaitungssystarti dnjddos gaschaltet • Les bobina* éualent en courant after- age w r r y i n g perts before ste^ting work. und Netzieiie spejtnungsioe geschaltet
al eftectuer un nettoyage mi orna. und innen o»remtgi werden. natii 50 et/ou 80 Hz ou pour courant • CÓits eust (or Ac 50 and/or 60 Rz and sind.
The equipment may be mounted in any
La produri paut «tra monte dans n'importa Die Einbaulage der Produkta ist generali continu OC • Ote Magnete sind in 50 irtd/oder 60 Hz
posibon.
quella poaitjon. The ftow direction and pipe connection ol • Sekxi la laneion. Ie< composants alee- • Dapendent upon the voftag» electricaJ Wer^selstrom oder in Gleichstrom Se-
UVRA1SON PACKAGING U E F E O UNO Defletto;
Le serie rtodnxtoeonduauide est irtofe^ué valves ara inescateci on the body ancVor in tnoueadoiventétre miss la terre contor- componenti, must be provided wfth an (erbar
Die DurchhulVVchtung und dar Elngang
a • Bobin» taitts 25. 30 ou 40 a - Coil aiz» 25, 30 oi 40 a -M*gn»i Orafi* 25,SOcder 40 par raperà* sur la corps ef/ou dona la the oocumerrtatJon. mérnent BUS norme3 et règlements lo- earth connecixxi and satisty locai regu- • Je nach Spannungsbareioh mul3 das
von Ventilen sind rjakervueichrret..
b • Cornectaui b.- Plug b-StochdoM caux. laaons and siandanls Venti nach den geltenden Ftegeln ei-
docurnarrlabon. The pipe connection* bave to be m ac- Die Rohrinscr*iss» solita n antsrjrachend
• La rvccorrMrnanl aladrique s aftectue pai • The atectnceJ cocj^ection is by a plug nen Schutzleiteransohlull erhaften.
Sous emòafag* rfi&matormé Vacuum pacfcad tooether : La dimensirxi d e s luyeuleriae doit
oxivapondra au racxxydemem Indigué
cordare© wrth ihe s u e indeated on the
body or in the leaflet.
den GroSenangaban sui den Typen-
schildam mit rtancWaùMchen Veracnrau- connecteur oabrocTtabla rwfmalisé 3 bro- wrth 3 pria (2 + earth). cabla ouoat : a • Der eiatansche AnschluB srfolgt durch
c - Corps rféiectrovanne c - Sctortoid va (ve body i l è y r f i i m i t nhna Manrni d e * (2 * massa), aortie da cable CM10 CM10 (Pg 11P) oonnector swrveAing aine stsndardsierta Draikontalti-Steca-
sur la corpo, ou dana la nobea. Cautkm: bungen durchgefuhn wrerden. Dabel lai
d - CUps pour makttkjn 0» U d -Captobattitocoi d - l e * capi t u Magrwt (Pg I I P ) cqnnedeur cri*ntable de 90° ri»- through 90* x 90*. verbindung (2 Kontaktatift» * I Erde)
• Reducàng the c o n n e o o n s may causa JOJpajwjaj TU fcwhtan:
bobina e - S V l l 4 : wehout a -MV 114 : orine • L»oonnecteurtype30rxisa*rJeuncou- • The typ» X) connectcr has a r»movaWe Kabelausgang : C M 10 (Pg 11P)
• Una rastneoon dea tuyautanaa paut (mproper opera Don or maftunaionmg • ErwHaoXizJerurKjderAnsd^ussekann
• - E V 1 W : tèmi SV1l5:wifhoul MV US:Orma verde supéneur démcrTtabte permet- upper lid a l o w i n g access lo tre wirmg rxientierbarer Ksbelve rtwiòor. der um
entrstner dea dystuiOfxuiements. • f-or the D'otection o l the equipmenT in- zu Laistungs- und Funhtions-
EV115:n»ent SVltSonaubbaae: MV 1J6 Btodonontaga : tant racces au cébiage et le ccntrùie taf easy cnecking of n a eiecjncaJ power iaweils 90* gadrent werdan kann.
• A/In da protèoer te matari*!, r jtaaer une stai a strame* or fi Ha» surtabta ter the minderungen funren.
EV 1ISa appNQvx : 4 H M5 s 18 4 H MS • 16 ais* de l'aa'rrwrtaaon éiectnque tana tuppfy «rithout u nc-->gc*ng the connec- • D i * Gerate*iec*tdose dea Typ» 30ist
crepine OU un f ì b s adequai en a moni, Servio» invohed m the irrtet SJO» BS dose • ZuniSchutzo^V»fitile5drtor-5cftmut2-
4 H M5 i 1S SV 1 SO 2 tcrvws CW4 i 34 MV 190: aebnxner le cortnecteur. donc sans •• r, and hence wrihout Interrupting op- rrul acrwrvnCeienctJeren CNJCH*' zur e*v
ausai pres qua posaible du produrt. to ina produci a» posaibie. tanger odar F*er so c i d i t aAj mòglichin
EV '90 : 2 vi» c u i J 34 SV 1 32 : 2 Krvw5 CU4 > 15 • En cas d'unii ss tjoo da ruban, péto, • il tape, peste, spray or a sirnaar lubri- den Vantiaogang intagnen werden irttarrompre le loncbonnement de féiec- a t i o n of t h e s o i e n o i d valva fachen Ùberprùfung der eleMriachen
EV 192 : 2 vi» CM4 x 35 2 Sctoauben CM4 • 34 trovanne (vrjif page 1 ) jss
aerosol ou autre hjbnliant I c s du carti <s used wnen rlghtening. avoid par- • Bei AbOchtung am Gawind» isi darsi/ * 1).
• Degré de prrxecbon IP65 lorsque la rac- • When IXJ rrectiy instafed thes connection
2 ScnraxJben CM4 . 35 serrege. velller a c* qu'aucun cofps Udes arrtaring the system. zu achtsn. daO «tain Dichtungsmatenei In
cordamant est comscternent effectu» provtdes IP SS fxrXection. arvtfemt dar Betrieb des Magnetventls
étranger na p a n a » * dans la Circuit. • Use proper tool» and locate wrenches * e Rohrfcvtung oder das Venni gelangt,
untertorochen werdan mufl.
• Utjliser un ouaHage appropri* « piacer as dosa as possibie to the o x w e c b c n • ZurMoritageaajInurgeeignetesWerk-
• MOE EN S E R V I C E • PUT71NQ tNTO S E R V I C E • Durch ordnunQsgernipe Montage der
ELECIWOVANNC les d e a ausai pres qua poasiWo du point point zeug verwendet werdan.
Avartt mise aous tansion, veritier la con- B»fora energiaing the coi! «naure that the Geratesleckdose wtrd Schutzklasse IP65
BOLCNOtO VALVC MOWTACE - MOUNTING - WONTAOE da raccordamant. • To avoid darnaga totheaquipment, DO • KorHsche Varschraubungen sind sorg-
cordane» de tansion entra bobine et re- supply voltavo is the seme that indicataci erreicht.
MAQMgTVeimL • Annd'avitertoutedétérioration.NePAS NOT OVERTIGHTEN pipe conoecbons. féftig anzuzierven. Es ist baratri zu acn-
seau tfalimentalion On the nameplate of the co*
THOP SERRÉR les raccorda des • Do noi use valve ex solenc*d as a levar. ten. daO beim Anziohen das Gehause
2/2 NF ruyau«*n*a. • The pipe «xTWCtlons should rwt appry nichi beschadigr wird.
Avant de meftre la circuii sous pression. Belor» pressunzing the system, first carry- • INBETRIEBNAHME - W ART UNO
affectuer un assai électrique. Mettre la out an eloctrical test. Energize the coil a Bevor dea Macrerrveoti arrceechariet wird
2/2 NC • Ne pea sa servir de la vanne ou da la any force, lorqueor sliain lo the produci. • Magnet und Fùnrungsrotir von Ventilen
bobine soua tansfon piustaum fois at ècco - few ti mas and nonno a metal dick signiry- prùfen, obdie Natzspannung mitder Spen-
tate magnétique comma d'un levier. dùrfen ni chi als Gagenhalter benutzt ter la ' d i e ' matalaque qui signale la fonc- ing the solenrxd operation. nuno des Magneten joer»< nstimmt.
• Las tubes de raccordo moni ne devront werdan. fJonnement de la téla rnagnetjque. The valve are equipped with coiis surtable VorDructuMaufschlagung oesProcuktes
e x e r c e r a u c u n a t t o r i , c o u p l e ou • D«^rtem-rx}»»n3cf>(tjs»e solar, flucfi- L'atectrovanne compone un boOinage for corTtJnuOu* operation. The ambiem solita ai ne elektrische Fur*»cr*spnjfung
contrainte sur le pt odurt. ten und dùrfen keine Spamungen auf pntvu pour m a » sous tansion perma-
temperature should noi exceed *60°C to artoioen :
das Venti ùbertragen. nere», dans les krnit»* de temperatura
pravent. To prevent the poasiMity of per- Den Magi-einwinriatsem. und ausschaJ-
3/2 NF ambienta maximele (*60* C) Pour evitar ten. Es muB ein K l i c k e n zu h o r e n a*«n.
toute brùrlure. na pes louoher la lète ma-
3/2 NC INSTALLATION IHSTALLATIOW hot under Des Magrtetventil ist tur D»uerb«tneb bei
gnó'.iqu» qui. an tonctionnerneni normai
normal operation conofl-orts. eìner maxinalen UrT>get>xìgstemperatur
" 1 permanence sous tension. peut
[ 441 44C
I l*r * I U |
2 ou 3 rxlncea
oracea tarsudas
tarsui
G 1/4 dans la coro»
2 or 3 G 1/4 tnreeded orifìcea m tm oosing
?
Cnaoue électrovanne peut èrre equipe* or holding down. Bel Wchl zugénglchem Magnetvenbl s o l -
• Subbase G t/4 - impèantatlon 2/2 • Spool valve serie» 232 fype T
OU non (fune ccrnmande a maio a impul- te vom rnstaflateur ein Scnutz vorgese-
• Grundplafle G 1/4 - AufsteJlung 2/2 •• VVf^scItNjO^veo»
« e g e i Baurcah» " 232 ryp« I
slon at/ou r ben werden, um teghches versehenei-
3/2 NF • MAINTENANCC
Maàilenanc* of ASCO/JOUCOMATIC ches Berùhren zu vermeiden.
. 3/2 NC • EWTHCTTalN productB is dipenderli on Service condi- Jede* Magnetventil kann auf Wunsch mit
L'errtreaen néce«*aire aux produrB ASCO/ ti ons. Perìodto cteaning is recommonded, einer HnndnotbeiAtigting a» liei art werden
JOUCOMAT1C vane avec leuni oondi- the timing of vrhioh w*H depend on the (impulsbeuibgt oder mit Verrastung).
•ons rfuolisancn II est srxjnaitabie da medeia^servicecorKlSons Ouringsen^
361 00 027 " ^ 4 ^ V proceder à un nattoyage pertodique d o r t
rintervaJle varie survant la nature ou fluide.
o n g , components should be axamined
for axcessive wear
• WARTUNG
Die Warturtg bangi von den Einsatz-
Emo*»» G 1/4 - Implantatton V2
HJS ccodbon» d * fonctionnernent et le A complete sei of intamal p a m is ava I- bedingungen ab In antsprachendan Zeii-
SubbaseG 1/4 - wptanuHtón 3.1> milieu s-nbum Lors da l'inte^e-tjcn. les abto as a spare or rebt*id kit (exoapt SV abstanden muOdus ProduM geOHnet und
Grundpistta G 1/4.- Aulsfaeung 3/2 composants obrvent et re exarninaa pour serie* t 9 0 ) . gereinigl werdan Fùr die Ubernoiung der
detecter toute usure exceeswe. tf a proctsrn occurs ourtrtg inataJMon/ ASCO/JOOCOMATIC t^0<Jut(t* kónnen
192) 3/2 NO EEJp» Un ensemble de piece* ìmemes est pro-
pose en piece* de rechange pour procè-
maintenance or in casa ol ooubt ptease
contact ASCO/JOUCOMATIC or author-
Eraafztaaaitza gefiefart werden (auper
MV Baureihe 190) Tr»ten Schw e ri n a i -
der é la retaci o n » u i Ev serie 190).
( s ised refxasentatfves. lon bei Ernbau. Botrieboder Warturw auf.
1 DESCRIZIONE 1 1 DESCRIPTION 1
2 DATI TECNICI TIPO PPL 1 2 TECHNICAL DATA TYPE PPL 1
INFORMAZIONI GENERALI DI
4 1 4 GENERAL AND SAFETY INFORMATION 1
SICUREZZA
ACCOPPIAMENTO POSIZIONATORE
5 2 5 POSITIONER–ACTUATOR COUPLING 2
ATTUATORE
5.1 Attuatore normalmente aperto (AD) 2 5.1 Normally open actuator (AD) 2
5.2 Attuatore normalmente chiuso (AR) 3 5.2 Normally closed actuator (AR) 3
5.3 Attuatore doppio effetto (DE) 4 5.3 Double effect actuator (DE) 4
6 INSTALLAZIONE SU VALVOLA 5 6 INSTALLATION ON VALVE 5
Montaggio su valvola con attuatore a Installation on casted actuator yokes
6.1 5 6.1 5
castello integrale (IEC 534) (IEC 534)
6.1.1 Montaggio frontale 5 6.1.1 Front position mounting 5
6.1.2 Montaggio posteriore 6 6.1.2 Back position mounting 6
Montaggio su valvola con attuatore a Installation on pillar actuator yokes
6.2 7 6.2 7
colonna (IEC 534) (IEC 534)
6.2.1 Montaggio frontale 7 6.2.1 Front position mounting 7
6.2.2 Montaggio posteriore 8 6.2.2 Back position mounting 8
MONTAGGIO SU ALTRI TIPI DI INSTALLATION ON DIFFERENT TYPE
7 9 7 9
ATTUATORE OF ACTUATORS
7.1 Blocchetto IEC 534 9 7.1 Block IEC 534 9
CONNESSIONI PNEUMATICHE ED PNEUMATIC AND ELECTRIC
8 10 8 10
ELETTRICHE CONNECTIONS
9 AVVIAMENTO 11 9 START-UP 11
10 OPERAZIONE AUTO - MANUALE 11 10 AUTO – MANUAL OPERATION 11
ORIFIZIO RIDOTTO PER VALVOLA
11 12 11 RESTRICTED PILOT VALVE ORIFICES 12
PILOTA
11.1 Manutenzione valvola pilota 12 11.1 Pilot valve maintenance 12
12 SPLIT - RANGE 13 12 SPLIT - RANGE 13
13 ANOMALIE DI FUNZIONAMENTO 14 13 TROUBLES SHOOTING 14
14 RICAMBI 15 14 SPARE PARTS 15
15 CERTIFICATI DI CONFORMITA’ 15 CONFORMITY CERTIFICATES
1 – DESCRIZIONE 1 – DESCRIPTION
PPL e EPL sono posizionatori a semplice e doppio effetto con PPL and EPL are simple or double acting positioner with input
segnale in entrata 3-15 psi e 4-20 mA per il controllo proporzionale di signal 3-15 psi and 4-20 mA for proportional control of
attuatori lineari. Gli apparecchi confrontano il segnale proveniente pneumatic linear actuators. The positioner operate by
dall’unità regolante con la posizione della leva di feedback collegata comparing input signal, from the control unit, with the position of
allo stelo dell’otturatore. La comparazione tra queste due forze feedback lever joined to the valves stem. An amplified pressure,
genera una pressione di uscita che agisce direttamente sulla generates by the comparison of these two forces, operates
membrana dell’attuatore. directly on actuator diaphragm.
2- DATI TECNICI tipo PPL: 2- TECHINICAL DATA type PPL:
Protezione Std Tipo PPL Waterproof IP 66 Standard Protection Type PPL Waterproof IP 66
ATEX 94/9/CE Tipo PPL-EX II2GDc IICX -20°C≤Ta≤+80°C ATEX 94/9/CE Type PPL-EX II2GDc IICX -
20°C≤Ta≤+80°C
Segnale di Ingresso 3 - 15 psi … 0.2 – 1.0 bar Input Signal 3 - 15 psi … 0.2 – 1.0 bar
Split range Disponibile Split range Available
Alimentazione Aria 1.4 … 7 bar (20 … 100 psi) Supply Air Pressure 1.4 … 7 bar (20 … 100 psi)
Corsa Nominale 10 … 80 mm Unica molla Standard stroke 10 … 80 mm Unic spring
Connessioni Pneumatiche 1/4” NPT Pneumatic connections 1/4” NPT
Temperatura Ambiente -20 ° … +80 °C Ambient Temperature -20 ° … +80 °C
Linearità Entro +/- 1.0 % fondo scala Linearity Within +/- 1.0 % F.S.
Sensibilità Entro 0.2 % fondo scala Sensitivity Within 0.2 % F.S.
Isteresi Entro 0.5 % fondo scala Hysteresis Within 0.5 % F.S.
Ripetibilità Entro +/- 0.5 % fondo scala Repeatability Within +/- 0.5 % F.S.
Consumo d’aria 5 LPM (alimentazione 1.4 bar) Air consumption 5 LPM (supply 1.4 bar)
Capacità 80 LPM (alimentazione 1.4 bar) Flow capacity 80 LPM (supply 1.4 bar)
Capacità 80 LPM (alimentazione 1.4 bar) Flow capacity 80 LPM (supply 1.4 bar)
Peso 2.1 Kg Weight 2.1 Kg
3 - DATI TECNICI tipo EPL : 3- TECHINICAL DATA type EPL :
Protezione standard EPL Waterproof IP 66 Standard protection EPL Waterproof IP 66
Tipo EPL - IECEx II 2G Exia IIC T6 Ga -20/70°C Type EPL - IECEx II 2G Exia IIC T6 Ga -20/70°C
II 2G Exia IIC T6 Ga c IIC T6 - II 2G Exia IIC T6 Ga c IIC T6 -
Tipo EPL-EXATEX Type EPL-EXATEX
Ta -20 °C / 70°C Ta -20 °C / 70°C
II 2G Ex d mb IIC T6 o T5 II 2G Ex d mb IIC T6 or T5
ATEX EPL-EXD ATEX ATEX EPL-EXD ATEX
Ta T6 -40 ..+55°C T5 -20..+70°C Ta T6 -40..+55°C T5 -20..+70°C C
Segnale di Ingresso 4 – 20 mA Input Signal 4 – 20 mA
Input resistance -
Impedenza entrata 235 +/- 15 Ω 235 +/- 15 Ω
impedance
Split range Disponibile Split range Available
Alimentazione Aria 1.4 … 7 bar (20 … 100 psi) Supply Air Pressure 1.4 … 7 bar (20 … 100 psi)
Corsa Nominale 10 … 80 mm Unica molla Standard stroke 10 … 80 mm Unic spring
Connessioni Pneumatiche ¼” NPT Pneumatic connections ¼” NPT
Connessioni Elettriche PG16 su attacco ½” NPT Electric Connections PG16 on connection ½” NPT
Temperatura Ambiente -20 ° … +70 °C Ambient Temperature -20 ° … +70 °C
Linearità Entro +/- 1.0 % fondo scala Linearity Within +/- 1.0 % F.S.
Sensibilità Entro 0.2 % fondo scala Sensitivity Within 0.2 % F.S.
Isteresi Entro 0.5 % fondo scala Hysteresis Within 0.5 % F.S.
Ripetibilità Entro +/- 0.5 % fondo scala Repeatability Within +/- 0.5 % F.S.
Consumo d’aria 5 LPM (alimentazione 1.4 bar) Air consumption 5 LPM (supply 1.4 bar)
Capacità 80 LPM (alimentazione 1.4 bar) Flow capacity 80 LPM (supply 1.4 bar)
Peso EPL / EPL-EXATEX 2.1 Kg Weight EPL/EPL-EXATEX 2.1 Kg
Peso EPL-EXD 2.9 Kg Weight EPL-EXD 2.9 Kg
4 – INFORMAZIONI GENERALI DI SICUREZZA 4 – GENERAL AND SAFETY INFORMATION
Prima di installare gli apparecchi rimuovere le protezioni di plastica Before installing positioner, remove plastic caps placed on
poste a copertura degli attacchi di connessione. connection ends.
ATTENZIONE Durante il funzionamento gli apparecchi WARNING Be careful during functioning the
contengono pressione d’aria. positioners are under pressure.
ATTENZIONE Durante l’esercizio non toccare lo stelo WARNING Be careful not to touch the stem during
perché é in movimento, potrebbe intrappolare le dita o i operations, possible trapping of fingers and clothes.
vestiti.
ATTENZIONE Prima di iniziare eventuali operazioni di WARNING Before starting maintenance be sure that
manutenzione assicurarsi che il posizionatore non sia in the positioner is not pressurized.
pressione.
ATTENZIONE I posizionatori Tipo EPL – IECEx e Tipo EPL- WARNING The positioners type EPL – IECEx and type
ATEX devono essere alimentati da costruzioni elettriche EPL-ATEX (must be feed by electric devices certified
associate, certificate in conformità alle norme EN 50.014 ed in conformity with EN 50.014 and EN 50.020
EN 50.020 che rispettino i limiti delle caratteristiche elettriche standards. The devices must comply the electric
vedi punto 3. features mentioned on technical specification, see
point 3.
La mancata osservanza delle informazioni generali di sicurezza, delle In the event of non-observance of the general rules, safety
norme vigenti e delle istruzioni di montaggio possono: information and of the installation instructions, this may:
• Causare pericolo per l’incolumità di chi sta eseguendo le • Cause danger to life and limb of the user or third party
manovre o di terzi. • Endanger the efficient functioning of the positioner
• Compromettere l’efficiente funzionamento del posizionatore.
1
5 - ACCOPPIAMENTO POSIZIONATORE ATTUATORE 5- COUPLING POSITIONER – ACTUATOR
5.1 ATTUATORE NORMALMENTE APERTO (AD) 5.1 NORMALLY OPENED ACTUATOR (AD)
In mancanza di alimentazione primaria le molle portano in posizione di Without air supply the springs OPEN the actuator. Pilot
APERTO l’attuatore. Il posizionatore può essere configurato in 2 positioner can be set with 2 different modes for DIRECT or
modalità diverse per ottenere la movimentazione dell’attuatore stesso REVERSE control action.
in modo DIRETTO o ROVESCIO.
NOTA BENE: Tutti i posizionatori vengono forniti pre-configurati per il IMPORTANT NOTE: All positioners are normally supplied for
funzionamento in azione diretta a semplice effetto (OUT 2 chiuso). single acting operation with direct action (out 2 closed). Always
Controllare sempre la posizione della leva dello SPAN. check for SPAN lever position.
3 Psi / 4 mA
OUT1
SUPPLY / ALIMENTAZIONE
INPUT SIGNAL / SEGNALE COMANDO
3-15 Psi (PPL) / 4-20 mA (EPL) 15 Psi / 20 mA
Vedi nota sotto!
OUT2
Plugged / Tappata See note below !
15 Psi / 20 mA
NOTA: la posizione della leva SPAN del presente NOTE: the position of SPAN lever is refered to
schema è riferita al MONTAGGIO FRONTALE FRONT LEFT MOUNTING. In case of FRONTAL
SINISTRO. Per montaggio FRONTALE DESTRO la RIGHT MOUNTING reverse the SPAN lever. Same
leva deve essere invertita! Medesima nota è valida per operation must be made in case of BACK
il montaggio POSTERIORE DESTRO E SINISTRO. LEFT/RIGHT MOUNTING POSITION.
2
5.2 ATTUATORE NORMALMENTE CHIUSO (AR) 5.2 NORMALLY CLOSED ACTUATOR (AR)
In mancanza di alimentazione primaria le molle portano in posizione di Without air supply the springs CLOSED the actuator. Pilot
CHIUSO l’attuatore. Il posizionatore può essere configurato in 2 positioner can be set with 2 different modes for DIRECT or
modalità diverse per ottenere la movimentazione dell’attuatore stesso REVERSE control action.
in modo DIRETTO o ROVESCIO.
NOTA BENE: Tutti i posizionatori vengono forniti pre-configurati per il IMPORTANT NOTE: All positioners are normally supplied for
funzionamento in azione diretta a semplice effetto (OUT 2 chiuso). single acting operation with direct action (out 2 closed). Always
Controllare sempre la posizione della leva dello SPAN. check for SPAN lever position.
15 Psi / 20 mA
OUT1
SUPPLY / ALIMENTAZIONE
INPUT SIGNAL / SEGNALE COMANDO
3-15 Psi (PPL) / 4-20 mA (EPL)
OUT2 3 Psi / 4 mA
Plugged / Tappata
Vedi nota sotto!
See note below !
3 Psi / 4 mA
SUPPLY / ALIMENTAZIONE
INPUT SIGNAL / SEGNALE COMANDO
3-15 Psi (PPL) / 4-20 mA (EPL)
NOTA: la posizione della leva SPAN del presente NOTE: the position of SPAN lever is refered to
schema è riferita al MONTAGGIO FRONTALE FRONT LEFT MOUNTING. In case of FRONTAL
SINISTRO. Per montaggio FRONTALE DESTRO la RIGHT MOUNTING reverse the SPAN lever. Same
leva deve essere invertita! Medesima nota è valida per operation must be made in case of BACK
il montaggio POSTERIORE DESTRO E SINISTRO. LEFT/RIGHT MOUNTING POSITION.
3
5.3 ATTUATORE DOPPIO EFFETTO (DE) 5.2 ATTUATORE DOPPIO EFFETTO (DE)
L’attuatore si porta in posizione CHIUSO o APERTO attraverso la Actuator moves to OPEN or CLOSE position by the air signal,
spinta dell’aria e si ferma in posizione in assenza di alimentazione. Il in case of supply failure it stays in last position. Pilot positioner
posizionatore può essere configurato in 2 modalità diverse per ottenere can be set with 2 different modes for DIRECT or REVERSE
la movimentazione dell’attuatore stesso in modo DIRETTO o control action.
ROVESCIO.
NOTA BENE: Tutti i posizionatori vengono forniti pre-configurati per il IMPORTANT NOTE: All positioners are normally supplied for
funzionamento in azione diretta a semplice effetto (OUT 2 chiuso). single acting operation with direct action (out 2 closed). Always
Controllare sempre la posizione della leva dello SPAN. check for SPAN lever position.
3Psi / 4mA
OUT1
SUPPLY / ALIMENTAZIONE
INPUT SIGNAL / SEGNALE COMANDO
3-15 Psi (PPL) / 4-20 mA (EPL)
15 Psi / 20mA
OUT2 Vedi nota sotto!
See note below !
15 Psi / 20 mA
OUT1
SUPPLY / ALIMENTAZIONE
INPUT SIGNAL / SEGNALE COMANDO
3-15 Psi (PPL) / 4-20 mA (EPL)
3 Psi / 4 mA
OUT2 Vedi nota sotto!
See note below !
NOTA: la posizione della leva SPAN del presente NOTE: the position of SPAN lever is refered to
schema è riferita al MONTAGGIO FRONTALE FRONT LEFT MOUNTING. In case of FRONTAL
SINISTRO. Per montaggio FRONTALE DESTRO la RIGHT MOUNTING reverse the SPAN lever. Same
leva deve essere invertita! Medesima nota è valida per operation must be made in case of BACK
il montaggio POSTERIORE DESTRO E SINISTRO. LEFT/RIGHT MOUNTING POSITION.
4
6 - INSTALLAZIONE SU VALVOLA 6- INSTALLATION ON VALVE
6.1 MONTAGGIO SU VALVOLA CON ATTUATORE A CASTELLO 6.1 FITTING THE POSITIONER TO YOKE TYPE ACTUATOR
INTEGRALE ( IEC 534 ) ( IEC 534 )
6.1.1 – MONTAGGIO FRONTALE 6.1.1 – FRONT POSITION MOUNTING
Montare il posizionatore come indicato nella fig. 1 Mount the positioner as showed on fig.1
TARGHETTA INDICE
DI CORSA
Travel indicator label
100%
LEVA SPAN VERSO IL BASSO
VALVOLA AR
SPAN LEVER IN LOWER
AR VALVE POSITION
0
LEVA SPAN VERSO L’ALTO
VALVOLA AD
SPAN LEVER IN UPPER
AD VALVE
POSITION
100%
Fissare la staffa (Rif.1) allo stelo, appena sotto il disco indicatore, Connect the valve stem joint (Ref.1) to the valve stem, just below
serrandola con i due dadi. the indicator disc and screw it with two nuts.
Fissare il perno leva (Rif.2) alla leva del posizionatore per mezzo Place the pin lever (Ref.2) in the middle of positioner feed-back
dei dadi in dotazione (posizione centrale). lever using the nuts included.
Fissare il posizionatore alla staffa (Rif.3) e serrare Place the positioner on the mounting bracket (Ref.3) and tight the
provvisoriamente la vite di ancoraggio al castello (Rif.4). locknut (Ref.4).
Dare aria all’attuatore fino a raggiungere meta’ corsa, quando la Supply air to the actuator up to half stroke, when the lever is
leva è in posizione orizzontale bloccare definitivamente la vite horizontal (50% of stroke) screw definitively the locknut (Ref.4)
(Rif.4) quindi togliere l’aria dall’attuatore. and discharge air from the actuator.
5
6 - INSTALLAZIONE SU VALVOLA 6- INSTALLATION ON VALVE
6.1 MONTAGGIO SU VALVOLA CON ATTUATORE A CASTELLO 6.1 INSTALLATION ON CASTED ACTUATOR YOKE
INTEGRALE ( IEC 534 ) ( IEC 534 )
6.1.2 – MONTAGGIO POSTERIORE 6.1.2 – BACK POSITION MOUNTING
Montare il posizionatore come indicato nella fig. 2 Mount the positioner as showed on fig.2
VITE DI SERRAGGIO
STAFFA POSIZIONATORE STAFFA VALVOLA (Rif.1)
(Rif.4) Valve stem joint
Positioner mounting bracket
locknut PERNO LEVA (Rif.2)
Pin lever
LEVA SPAN
Vedi schema in basso
STAFFA POSIZIONATORE (Rif.3)
SPAN LEVER
Positioner mounting bracket See below
0
LEVA SPAN VERSO L’ALTO
VALVOLA AD
SPAN LEVER IN UPPER
AD VALVE
POSITION
100%
Fissare la staffa (Rif.1) allo stelo, appena sotto il disco Connect the valve stem joint (Ref.1) to the valve stem, just below
indicatore, serrandola con i due dadi. the indicator disc and screw it with two nuts.
Fissare il perno leva (Rif.2) alla leva del posizionatore per mezzo Place the pin lever (Ref.2) in the middle of positioner feed-back
dei dadi in dotazione (posizione centrale). lever using the nuts included.
Fissare il posizionatore alla staffa (Rif.3) e serrare Place the positioner on the mounting bracket (Ref.3) and tight
provvisoriamente la vite di ancoraggio al castello (Rif.4). the locknut (Ref.4).
Dare aria all’attuatore fino a raggiungere meta’ corsa, quando la Supply air to the actuator up to half stroke, when the lever is
leva è in posizione orizzontale bloccare definitivamente la vite horizontal (50% of stroke) screw definitively the locknut (Ref.4)
(Rif.4) quindi togliere l’aria dall’attuatore. and discharge air from the actuator.
6
6 - INSTALLAZIONE SU VALVOLA 6- INSTALLATION ON VALVE
6.2 MONTAGGIO SU VALVOLA CON ATTUATORE A COLONNA 6.2 INSTALLATION ON PILLAR ACTUATOR YOKES
( IEC 534 ) ( IEC 534 )
6.2.1 – MONTAGGIO FRONTALE 6.2.1 – FRONT POSITION MOUNTING
Montare il posizionatore come indicato nella fig. 3 Mount the positioner as showed on fig.3
STAFFA POSIZIONATORE
(Rif.3)
LEVA SPAN Positioner mounting bracket
Vedi schema in basso
SPAN LEVER
See below
0
LEVA SPAN VERSO L’ALTO
VALVOLA AD
SPAN LEVER IN UPPER
AD VALVE
POSITION
100%
Fissare la staffa (Rif.1) allo stelo, appena sotto il disco Connect the valve stem joint (Ref.1) to the valve stem, just below
indicatore, serrandola con i due dadi. the indicator disc and screw it with two nuts.
Fissare il perno leva (Rif.2) alla leva del posizionatore per mezzo Place the pin lever (Ref.2) in the middle of positioner feed-back
dei dadi in dotazione (posizione centrale). lever using the nuts included.
Fissare il posizionatore alla staffa (Rif.3) e serrare Place the positioner on the mounting bracket (Ref.3) and tight
provvisoriamente i dadi degli archetti (Rif.4). the pillars yoke locknuts (Ref.4).
Dare aria all’attuatore fino a raggiungere meta’ corsa, quando la Supply air to the actuator up to half stroke, when the lever is
leva è in posizione orizzontale bloccare definitivamente i dadi horizontal (50% of stroke) screw definitively the pillars yoke
degli archetti (Rif.4) quindi togliere l’aria dall’attuatore. locknuts (Ref.4) and discharge air from the actuator.
7
8 - CONNESSIONI PNEUMATICHE ED ELETTRICHE 8- PNEUMATIC AND ELECTRIC CONNECTIONS
Tutti i collegamenti pneumatici sono facilmente accessibili (vedi All pneumatic connections are easily accessibile (see Fig.7).
Fig.7). Per le connessioni elettriche della serie EPL basta inserire i For the electric connections of EPL series put the two cables
due fili nel passacavo e collegarli alla morsettiera interna into the cable gland and plug them to the internal terminal board
contrassegnata con “+” e “-“ (vedi Fig. 8). marked by “+” and “-“ (see fig.8)
Fig.7
TIPO/TYPE PPL
Fig.8
TIPO/TYPE EPL
10
9 - AVVIAMENTO 9 - START-UP
Controllare che tutti i collegamenti el et t ri c i - Check that all pneumatic and electrics connections are
p n e u m a t i c i siano corretti e che il posizionatore sia correct and that positioner is correctly mounted according
montato in accordo alla tipologia di attuatore e di azione (vedi to the actuator action and function required ( refer to section 5)
sez. 5 )
Fornire l’alimentazione al posizionatore : 30 psi per le valvole Supply air to the positioner : 30 psi for control valves - 6 / 7
di regolazione - 6 / 7 bar per valvole a pistone bar for valve with piston
Fornire il segnale di comando 3 psi o 4 mA. Girare la Supply the input signal 3 psi or 4 mA. Turn the zero
rotella dello zero in senso orario o antiorario fino ad adjusting screw clockwise or counter clockwise to set the zero
ottenere la partenza della valvola vedi Fig. 9 position
Controllare la corsa della valvola fornendo il segnale max di Check the stroke of the control valve by setting input signal 15
15 psi o 20 mA. Se la corsa non raggiunge il 100 % svitare o psi or 20 mA. If the stroke does not meet 100%, turn the span
avvitare la vite dello SPAN fino a raggiungere il 100% adjusting screw clockwise or counter clockwise until 100% is
vedi Fig.9. reached., the same operation is necessary if the positioner
reached the 100% before with max signal
Fig.9
Rotella regolazione ZERO
Vite dello SPAN ZERO adjusting screw
SPAN adjusting
screw
Dettaglio
“A” AUTO-MAN
Vedi pto.10
Vite AUTO-MAN
Alloggiamento sede
AUTO-MAN screw
Seat adjuster
Non rimuovere
! Don’t remove
Vite di bloccaggio
Stopper screw
11
11 - ORIFIZIO RIDOTTO PER VALVOLA PILOTA 11 – REDUCED PILOT VALVE ORIFICES
ATTENZIONE Prima di rimuovere il pilota, WARNING Before removing pilot valve, be sure to
assicurarsi di avere scollegato segnale ed disconnect positioner from the signal and supply air.
alimentazione.
Nel caso il posizionatore risulti troppo veloce, viene fornito, If positioner is too fast during working phase apply the restricted pilot
insieme al posizionatore, un kit di orifizi a passaggio ridotto. Per valve orifice kit. To install it, the pilot valve must be removed from the
installarlo, occorre rimuovere dal posizionatore il pilota: positioner:
Svitare le quattro viti “A” (Vedi Fig. 10) di fissaggio Remove the four screws “ A” (see Fig.10) holding the pilot to the
Togliere la molla di compensazione “B” (vedi Fig.10) positioner body.
Una volta rimosso il pilota, ruotarlo sottosopra (vedi Fig.11) Remove the compensation spring “B” (see Fig.10)
Rimuovere gli O-rings dalle porte Out1 e Out2 (vedi Fig 11) When the pilot valve is removed, reverse it (see Fig.11)
Posizionare i piattelli degli orifizi nelle rispettive sedi e porre Remove the o-rings from Out1 and Out2 (see Fig.11)
sopra di essi i nuovi O-rings, quindi rimontare il pilota Place the orifices plates in their places with the new o-rings
above them and re-install the pilot valve.
Fig.10
B
A
A
Fig. 11
OUT 1
OUT 2
12
12 - SPLIT-RANGE 12 – SPLIT RANGE
Se l’applicazione lo richiede è possibile eseguire il 100% di corsa If required the 100% of stroke can be obtained with 50% of reduced
con il segnale in ingresso ridotto del 50 % esempio : input signal. Example:
Serie PPL 3-9 psi … 9-15 psi PPL series 3-9 psi … 9-15 psi
Serie EPL 4-12 mA … 12- 20 mA EPL series 4-12 mA … 12- 20 mA
Per ottenere questo funzionamento è necessario effettuare in To obtain this function it is necessary to make the following set-up:
opzione le seguenti regolazioni :
1. Move the pin on feedback lever (see Fig.12, detail A)
1. Regolare il perno sulla leva di feedback vedi fig.12 2. Turn the screw span lever (see Fig.12, detail B)
dettaglio A 3. Move the positioner on the bracket (see Fig.12, detail C)
2. Regolare la vite dello SPAN lever vedi fig. 12 dettaglio B (Operation suggested only for stroke upper 30 mm)
3. Spostare il posizionatore sulla staffa vedi fig. 12 dettaglio C
(operazione consigliata solo per corse superiori a 30 mm) When the right span is obtained, follow the instructions in the
chapter 9.
Una volta raggiunto il campo desiderato procedere come al cap. 9
Fig.12
DETTAGLIO B
DETAIL B
DETTAGLIO A
DETAIL A
DETTAGLIO C
DETAIL C
13
13 - ANOMALIE DI FUNZIONAMENTO
Riportiamo qui di seguito alcuni inconvenienti che si possono verificare durante il funzionamento :
L’attuatore pendola e non si stabilizza Velocità troppo elevata Diminuire la velocità vedi punto 10
13 - TROUBLES SHOOTING
Here below some of the possible causes giving troubles during normal working conditions :
Actuator hutting Opening / Closing speed too high Reduce the speed see chapter 10
14
13 - RICAMBI 13 – SPARE PARTS
LEVA COMPLETA DI
MANOM. ALIMENT. PERNO
MAN. SUPPLY AIR LEVER WITH PIN
MAN. SEGNALE
MAN. INPUT
LEVA DELLO SPAN
SPAN LEVER
STAFFA E VITI DI
SERRAGGIO
BRACKET WITH
SCREWS STAFFA STELO VALVOLA
VALVE STEM BRACKET
EPL SERIES
15
Via Lecco 69/71
20041 AGRATE BRIANZA (MI) - ITALY
DICHIARAZIONE DI CONFORMITA’
AI SENSI DELLA DIRETTIVA EUROPEA “ATEX” N° 94/9/CE ( allegato X punto B. )
Declaration of conformity according to
ATEX DIRECTIVE N° 94/9/CE ( Annex X point B. )
II 2GD c IIC X
TEMPERATURA AMBIENTE : -20°C ≤ Ta ≤ +70°C
AMBIENT ACTUATOR TEMPERATURE
Per quanto esposto si dichiara che gli apparecchi descritti al punto A, classificati secondo il punto B e
valutati in accordo al punto C, soddisfano i requisiti essenziali di sicurezza previsti nell’allegato II della
Direttiva 94/9/CE e ad essa applicabili.
We declare that the equipments mentioned on above point A, classificated according to point B, valuated according to point C, are
conformed to the most essential safety requirements as required by Directive 94/9/CE annex II.
www.conflow.it 47
Funzioni TU93 Functions
Ritardo all'eccitazione con consenso del segnale di comando, Impulso ritardato alla chiusura comando Start, 1 relè
A 1 relè istantaneo + 1 relè ritardato istantaneo + 1 relè temporizzato
ON
OFF Alim Alimentando il timer il relè RL1 commuta istantaneamente. J
ON
Alimentando il timer il relè RL1 commuta istantaneamente.
Chiudendo il comando di START ha inizio il conteggio, a fine
Chiudendo il comando di START ha inizio il conteggio, a fine OFF Alim tempo il relè RL2 commuta per 1 sec. Azionando di nuovo il
NC tempo il relè RL2 commuta. Azionando di nuovo il comando di comando di START il ciclo viene ripetuto.
NA Start
START il ciclo viene ripetuto. Chiudendo il comando di STOP NC
Chiudendo il comando di STOP durante la temporizzazione il
NA Start
NC
durante la temporizzazione il conteggio è sospeso, riaprendo il conteggio è momentaneamente sospeso, riaprendo il
NA Stop comando il conteggio riprende finchè raggiunge il tempo NC comando il conteggio riprende finchè raggiunge il tempo
impostato. RL2 torna allo stato iniziale quando viene chiuso il NA Stop
impostato. RL2 torna allo stato iniziale quando viene chiuso il
NC
NA Reset RESET o quando viene tolta tensione a ciclo ultimato. RESET o se viene tolta tensione .
NC
fondo scala
B Ritardo all'eccitazione con consenso del segnale di
comando, 2 relè ritardati Full scale
Parzializzatore a ciclo continuo con consenso del
comando : 2 relè a sequenza simmetrica
ON
t=t1+t2
OFF Alim Alimentare il timer. Chiudendo il comando di START ha inizio il Alimentre il timer. Chiudendo il comando di START ,con
conteggio, a fine tempo i due relè commutano. Azionando di Mv
ON
0
conteggio in down, ha inizio un ciclo di 2 tempi la cui somma è il
NC
NA Start nuovo il comando di START il ciclo viene ripetuto. Chiudendo il OFF Alim fondo-scala selezionato : Relè RL1 eccitato da fondoscala a
comando di STOP durante la temporizzazione il conteggio è valore impostato e Relè RL2 eccitato da valore impostato a 0.
NC sospeso, riaprendo il comando il conteggio riprende fino a NC La sequenza è a ciclo continuo. Chiudendo il comando di STOP
NA Stop NA Start durante la temporizzazione il conteggio è sospeso, riaprendo il
raggiungere il valore impostato. Le uscite tornano allo stato
iniziale quando viene chiuso il RESET, o quando viene tolta NC
comando il conteggio riprende fino a raggiungere il tempo
NC
NA Reset tensione a ciclo ultimato. NA Stop impostato. Azionando il comando di RESET, o togliendo la
tensione di alimentazione, il timer torna allo stato iniziale.
ON Relay on delay-ON with start command : two delayed relays NC
Reset
OFF RL1 NA
Percentage time continuous cycle with start command :
With the supply voltage connected , the timing begins when the Two asimmetric relays
ON
OFF RL2
START command is closed . At the end of the time period the OFF
ON
RL1 With the supply voltage connected , a cycle with Two times begins when the
relays turn ON. If the START command operated again a new Start command is closed. The ammount of the two times is the full scale.The
t cycle begins. When the STOP command is activated, the timing ON
counting is in down.
freezes and returns to run when the command is deactivated. RL2 Relay RL1 is ON from the full scale to the set time
Relay RL2 is ON from the set time to zero
The relays turn OFF if the RESET command is activated or %t1 %t2 The sequence is continuously repeated. The STOP command, when
(after the timing has finished) turnig off the power line.T he timer
t=t1+t2 activated, freezes the timing, when it is deactivated the timing returns to run.
returns to the initial state. when the supply voltage is removed . Tempo impostato If the RESET command is activated, or if the power line turns OFF , the timer
Set time returns to the initial state.
Ritardo alla diseccitazione all’apertura del comando : Totalizzatore di chiusire del segnale di comando,
2 relè temporizzati Tv 2 relè a sequenza simmetrica
Da Alimentare il timer. Chiudendo il comando di START i relè si ON
OFF Alim
Alimentare il timer. Chiudendo il comando di START ha inizio il
conteggio. Aprendo il comando di START durante la
ON
Alim eccitano e si diseccitano quando, dopo l’apertura el comando di
OFF
START, è trascorso il tempo impostato. Azionando di nuovo lo temporizzazione il conteggio si ferma, richiudendo il comando il
NC
START il ciclo viene ripetuto. Richiudendo lo START durante la NA Start conteggio riprende.
NC
NA Start temporizzazione il conteggio viene azzerato e ricomincia al Relè RL1 eccitato durante il conteggio ,
rilascio del comando. Chiudendo il comando di STOP durante la NC relè RL2 eccitato al termine del conteggio .
NA Stop
NC
temporizzazione il conteggio è sospeso, riaprendo il comando il Azionando di nuovo lo START il ciclo viene ripetuto.Togliendola
NA Stop
conteggio riprende fino a raggiungere il tempo impostato. NC
tensione di alimentazione, il timer torna allo stato iniziale.
NA Reset
NC Azionando il comando di RESET o togliendo tensione, il timer
NA Reset Totalizer with START/STOP command : two asimmetric
Delay-OFF at the aperture of the command, ON
OFF RL1
relays
ON
OFF RL1 two temporized relays With the supply voltage connected, RL1 turns ON and the
After having connected the power line, the relays turn on after OFF
ON
RL2 timing begins when the Start command is closed. When the
OFF
ON
RL2 the START command has been activated;the timing begins at START is opened the timing freezes and return to run when it is
the opening of the START command and the relays turn off at t=t1+t2 t1 t2 reclosed . At the end of the set time period RL1 turns OFF and
t the end of the set time. If the START command is newsly RL2 turns ON . If the START command is newsly operated a new
operated a new cycle begins. The STOP command, when cycle begins. The STOP command, when activated, freezes the
activated, freezes the timing, when it is deactivated the timing timing, when it is deactivated the timing returns to run . If the
returns to run. If the RESET command is activated or the power RESET command is activated or the power line turns OFF, the
line turns OFF , the timer returns to the initial state. timer returns to the initial state.
www.cdcelettromeccanica.it 33